ADVERTISEMENT. 


The  Most  Notable  - 


of  recent  additions  to  the  machinery  used  for  cutting  Jacquard  Cards,  is  the 
Automatic  Lacer  built  by  John  Royle  &  Sons,  of  Paterson,  N.  J.,  U.  S.  A.. 
The  distinctive  feature  of  this  machine  is  that  it  unites  the  two  operations  of 
punching  and  lacing  cards,  operations  heretofore  separate  and  distinct,  and 
requiring  separate  care  and  attention. 

The  reduction  of  these  two  operations  to  one  has  long  been  a  subject  of 
consideration  to  both  machinists  and  textile  manufacturers,  but  it  has  re- 
mained for  tt 


Class  No. 


Book  No. 


Access/$3-G 


Vol..  / 


practical  ma< 
merely  from  ; 
because  of  th 
high  grade  ( 
detail.  Ever 
machine  that 
at  about  tw 
operation  sin 
greatest  time 
cutter  since  t 
years  ago;  a 
been  identifie 
There  is 

the  Repeater  ;  any  doubts  that  might  exist  on  this 
score  having  been  finally  laid  to  rest  a  great  many  j  | 
years  ago,  ar 
Lacer  would 
Althoug 
experimental 
continuous  i 
number  of 
where  it  is  j 
easy  to  han 
superior  to 
does  not  dro 
be  depended 

ties  in  a  macnine  01  tnis  sort. 


FRANKLIN  INSTITUTE  LIBRARY 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


st  thoroughly 
ir,  considered 
ork,  not  alone 
3n  of  the  very 
the  minutest 
the  result  is  a 
and  certainty, 
•erform  either 
isidered  as  the 
al  of  the  card- 
Royles,  some 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


*  K"owles  too,,  f> 


W  WORCESTER,  MASS., 


U.  S.  A. 


OF 
THE 


Most 
Approved 
and 

Advanced 


Adapted  for 
Weaving1 
Every  Known 
Type 


Types 


FOR 


Every  Class 


OF 


ALSO. 

BUILDERS  OF 


Textile 
Fabric, 


AT  A 


Weaving; 


MINIMUM 
COST. 


Lappet  and  Embroidery  Looms. 


BRANCH  WORKS : 

PROVIDENCE,  R.  I. 


FOREIGN  REPRESENTATIVE, 

Hutchinson,  Hollingworth  &  Co., 

Dobeross,  England. 


ii 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


AMERICAN  SUPPLY  CO., 

Hill  Furnishers, 

ii  and  13  Eddy  Street,         =         Providence,  R.  I. 

MANUFACTURERS  OF 

Loom  Harness^ Reeds 

MAIL  HARNESS  FOR  WORSTED  AND  WOOLEN  GOODS, 

OAK-TANNED  LEATHER  BELTING, 

LOOM  PICKERS  AND  STRAPPING  OF  ALL  KINDS. 


Sole  Owners  and  Manufacturers  of 


PATENT JACQUARD  HEDDLES 


Dealers  in 

Calf,  Sheep  and  Lamb  Roller  Skins,  Roller  and  Slasher 
Cloth,  and  Roll  Coverers'  Tools. 


SOLE  AGENTS  IN  THE  U.  S.  A.  FOR  J.  0.  &  S.  ROLLER  SKINS. 


We  have  unequaled  facilities  for  furnishing  Shuttles,  Spools  and  Bobbins,  Wire  Heddles  and  Heddle  Frames,  Spinning  Rings  and  Ring 

Travelers,  Belt  Hooks,  and  Wire  Goods  of  every  description. 

Our  Oval  Dent  Reeds  are  especially  adapted  for  Weaving  Coarse  and  Fancy  Cotton, 
Fine  Worsted  and  Woolen  Goods.    Price  same  as  Common  Reeds. 

we  make  a  specialty  of  Soldered  Reeds  for  Beaming  and  Weaving, 

ALSO  SCOTCH  TAPE  LEICE  REEDS,  THREAD  LEICE  REEDS 
AND    BLOCK    LEICE  REEDS. 


P.  W.  LIPPITT,  President.  JOHN  A.  CARTER,  Secretary.  MYRON  FISH,  Treasurer. 

JOHN  E.  KENDRICK,  Vice=President.  JOSEPH  H.  KENDRICK,  Agent. 


iii 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


563, 1 32 


VISITORS  in 
 ONE  YEAR! 


TO 
THE 


Exhibition  Department 


OF  THE 


PHILADELPHIA  BOURSE. 


Manufacturers  of  Textile  Machinery  

and  Mechanical  Appliances  will  find  the  Exhibition  Department  of  the 
Philadelphia  Bourse  the  best  place  in  the  country  for  the  display  of  the 
very  latest  improvements  in  Machinery  and  Manufactured  Goods. 


[open  dailyJ 


For  information,  apply  or  address 

S.  LEWIS  JONES, 

Superintendent. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


NO  TEXTILE  IMPROVEMENT 
OF  THE  CENTURY 


can  compare  with  the 


Northrop 
Loom. 


IT 


TAKES  ONE=  FOURTH  OF  THE  HELP 
OUT  OF  A  COTTON  MILL, 


producing  an  equal  quantity  and  a  better  product  with  the  reduced 
force  left. 


IT 


TAKES  LESS  SKILL,  AS  WELL  AS 
LESS  LABOR. 

The  New  Attachments 


ARE  ALREADY 

ADOPTED  ON 


20,000 


LOOMS 


They  are  weaving  nearly  all  grades  of  ordinary  cotton  fabrics,  and  are  used 
by  mills  whose  judgment  and  standing  are  unquestioned. 


WE  ALSO  SELL 

Spindles,  . 
Temples, 
Separators, 
Spinning  Rings, 
Warpers,  . 
Spooler  Guides, 
Bobbin  Holders, 
Banding  Machines, 


of  which  we  are 
the  largest 
manufacturers 
in  this  country, 
if  not  in  the 
world. 


ALSO 


Twisters,  . 
Spoolers,  . 

Reels,  

Chain  Dyeing  Process, 
Twister  Stop  Motions, 
Shuttle  Guards,  . 
Cut  Markers,  . 
Belt  Hole  Guards, 

Etc.,  Etc.,  Etc. 


DRAPER  COMPANY, 


HOPEDALE,  MASS. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


D.  R.  KENYON  &  SON, 

RARITAN,  N.  J., 

MAKERS  OF 

Woolen  flachinery. 

Kenyon's  Patented  Tentering  and  Drying  Machines  on  Pipe  System,  Hot  Air  Dryers 
and  Tentering  Michines,  Fulling  Mills,  Washers,  Chinchilla  and  Whitney 
Machines,  Cone  Willows,  Marsden  &  Blamire  Lap  Feed,  Soaping  Ma- 
chines, Wringing  Machines,  Yorkshire  Gigs,  Dyeing  Machines 
for  Piece  Goods,  Friction  Clutches,  Jigs,  double  or  single, 
Brush  and  Pumicing  Machines  for  Worsteds,  Dew- 
ing Machines,    Rag   Washing  Engines, 
Water  and  Starch  Mangles,  Bleach 
House  Washers,  etc. 


Kenyon's  Improved  Drying  and  Tentering  Machine — Pipe  System. 


The  above  illustration  represents  one  of  our  largest  machines  on  pipe  system. 
We  make  this  style  of  various  lengths  and  widths  and  from  six  to  ten  feet  in  height, 
geared  direct  with  double  vertical  engines,  or  arranged  to  be  driven  on  either  side 
from  mill  shaft,  cone  pulleys  to  be  used  to  give  the  various  speed  required.  Our 
patent  low-down  feed  is  one  of  the  most  important  improvements  ever  made  on  this 
class  of  machines,  the  operators  being  near  the  floor  are  out  of  heat  of  room,  and  ma- 
chine does  not  require  as  much  height  of  room  as  those  having  the  elevated  platform, 
and  feed  at  upper  part  of  machine.  With  the  many  other  valuable  improvements, 
lately  added,  we  have  a  machine  of  great  strength  and  durability,  that  will  tenter  the 
heaviest  goods,  and  is  not  equalled  by  any  Tenter  and  Drying  Machine  on  the  market. 

Manufactured  by   [)     ^    KENYON  &  SON,   RaHtan,  N.  J. 


vi 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


Cheney  brothers, 

SOUTH  MANCHESTER,  CONN., 
HARTFORD,  CONN., 

SILK  MANUFACTURERS. 


SALESROOMS : 

NEW  YORK :  47?  Broome  St.     BOSTON :  79  Chauncy  St. 

CHICAGO:  239  Fifth  Avenue. 


ALL  KINDS  OF  SPUN  SILK  YARNS 

IN  THE  GRAY,  DYED  OR  PRINTED,  ON  SPOOLS,  WARPED  OR  IN  THE  HANK. 

ORGANZIINIEIS  AND  TRAMS, 

FAST  COLORS  WARRANTED. 


SPECIAL  YARNS  MADE  TO  ORDER  m  «™e  goods. 

.  Dress  Silks,  Satins,  Gros  Grains, 

Millinery  Silks,  Plushes  and  Velvets. 

Printed  Decorative  Goods. 


Printed  Foulards  and  Satins,  Ribbons,  Sashes. 


POSSELT'S  TEXTILE  LIBRARY, 

VOL.  III. 

•     RECENT  IMPROVEMENTS  IN 


Textile  Mach* 

RELATING  TO  WEAVING. 

Giving  Descriptive  Illustrations  of  the  Construction  and  Operation  of  the  Most 
Modern  Makes  of   Looms,  Jacquards,  Spoolers, 
Winders,  Dressers,  etc.,  etc. 

ALSO 

Illustrating  and  Explaining  the  Latest   Improvements  in  Shuttles, 
Temples,  Pickers,  Reeds,  Heddles,  Harnesses,  etc., 

FOR  THE  USE  OF 

Manufacturers,    Mill  Managers,    Designers,  Overseers, 
Loomfixers,  Students  and  Inventors. 


inery 


BY 

E.  A  POSSELT, 

Consulting  Expert  on  Textile  Designing  and  Manufacturing.  Author  and  Publisher  of '"  Technology  oj  Textile 
Design;"  "  The  Jacquard  Machine  Analyzed  and  Explained;"  "Structure  of  Fibres,  yarns  and 
Fabrics;"  "Textile  Calculations;"  "Posse It's  Textile  Library;"  Editor  oj  "  The  Textile  Record;" 
Editor  oj  Textile  Terms  in  "Standard  Dictionary"  and  "  Iconographic  Encyclopaedia  of  the  Arts  and 
Sciences  ;  "  Principal  of  l'Posselt's  Private  School  of  Textile  Design  ;  "  formerly  Headmaster  of  the  Textile 
Department  of  the  Pennsylvania  Museum  and  School  of  Industrial  Art,  Philadelph'a. 


WITH  OVER  600  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

PRICE,  THREE  DOLLARS.  ' 


PHILADELPHIA  : 
E.  A.  POSSELT,  Author  and  Publisher, 

2152  N.  TWENTY-FIRST  STREET. 


LONDON : 

SAMPSON  LOW,  MARSTON  AND  COMPANY,  LIMITED, 
St.  Dunstan's  House,  Fetter  Lane,  Fleet  St. 


[Copyrighted  by  e.  a.  Posski.t.j 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


Mason  Machine  Works 


TAUNTON,  MASS. 
U.  S.  A. 


COTTON  MACHINERY. 


 jSife  

LATEST 
PATTERN 
REVOLVING 
FLAT  CARDS, 
RAILWAY 
HEADS 
AND 
DRAWING 

FRAMES. 




COMBERS, 
SPINNING 
FRAMES, 
MULES. 

LOOMS 
IN  GREAT 
VARIETY, 
PLAIN 
AND  FANCY. 


LICENSED  AND  PREPARED  TO  BUILD  NORTHROP  OR  DRAPER  LOOMS. 


Thorough 
Inspections 


AND 


Insurance  against  Loss  or  Damage  to 
Property  and  Loss  of  Life  and 
Injury  to  Persons 


CAUSED  BY 


STEAM  BOILER  EXPLOSIONS. 


J.  JV..  AlLSN,  .President.  .," 

WM.vSi  Fk^NKLIN,  Vice-President. 

F.  B.  ALLEN,  Second  Vice-President. 

J.  B   PIERCE,  Secretary  and  Treasurer. 

L.  B.  BRAINARD,  Assistant  Treasurer. 


COIOSi 


THE  GETT*  CENTER 
LIBRARY 


PREFACE. 


THE  importance  for  every  Textile  Manufacturer,  Superintendent,   Designer,  Overseer  and 
Student  to  be  familiar  with  the  latest  and  most  improved  Machinery,  Devices  and  Supplies 
as  needed  in  the  weaving  department  of  an  up-to-date  mill,  is  the  cause  of  bringing  this 
book  before  the  public. 

Illustrations  and  reading  matter  have  been  most  carefully  edited  so  as  to  bring  the  various 
subjects  as  plain  as  possible  before  the  reader. 

It  would  have  been  impossible  to  furnish  a  work  dealing  with  each  and  every  make  of  machinery 
or  devices  at  present  in  use  ;  however,  a  successful  attempt  has  been  made  to  illustrate  the  latest 
and  those  of  the  most  importance,  and  it  is  my  intention  to  publish  a  second  volume,  to  be  issued 
three  years  hence,  giving  a  description  of  such  machinery  or  devices  as  either  escaped  notice  or 
were  impossible  to  be  obtained  for  this  book,  or  such  as  will  be  invented  and  put  to  practical  test 
previously  to  publishing  said  volume.  The  present  book  will  also  form  a  most  valuable  manual  of 
reference  to  inventors,  it  being  the  most  complete  work  on  textile  machinery  relating  to  weaving 
heretofore  published. 

I  have  the  pleasure  in  acknowledging  my  indebtedness  to  Mr.  Geo.  W.  Kritler,  Master  Weaver, 
Philadelphia,  for  his  kindness  in  examining  proofs. 

E.  A.  POSSELT. 

Philadelphia,  January,  '98. 


DAVIS  &  FURBER  MACHINE  CO., 


MANl'FA<  ITURERS  OF 


W00len         ~  Cardin^nmn.. 

Machinery,  Sp00llnESu«e. 

WITH  ALL  MODERN  IMPROVEMENTS. 

PLANETARY  NAPPERS 

FOR  WOOLEN  AND  COTTON  GOODS. 

Card  Clothing  of  Every  Description. 
North  Andover,  Mass. 

Illustrated  Circulars  Upon  Application. 


.ADVERTISEMENT. 


M.  A.  FURBUSH  &  SON  MACHINE  CO. 

PHILADELPHIA 

MAKERS  OF 

WOOLEN 

CARDING,    SPINNING    AND  WEAVING 

MACHINERY 

ALSO 

WORSTED  CARDING  MACHINES, 

THE  MURKLAND  INGRAIN  CARPET  LOOM. 

ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE  WITH    FULL   PARTICULARS  ON  APPLICATION. 


INDEX  TO  ADVERTISEHENTS. 


Alteuius,  W.  W.  &  Son  Philadelphia   xxi 

American  Supply  Co  Providence,  R.  I   iii 

Atherton  Machine  Co  Paterson,  N.  J   xiii 

Borchers,  Richard  C.  &  Co  Philadelphia    xii 

Bourse                                                                          Philadelphia   iv 

Butterworth,  H.  W.  &  Sons  Co  Philadelphia  (Inside  back  cover) 

Cheney  Bros  S.  Manchester,  Conn,  and  Hartford,  Conn   vii 

Cleaver  &  Leather  Paterson,  N.J   xiii 

Crabb,  Wm.  &  Co  Newark,  N.J   xviii 

Crompton  &  Knowles  Loom  Works  Worcester,  Mass  (ii  and  outside  back  cover) 

Davis  &  Furber  Machine  Co  N.  Andover,  Mass  (Below  Preface) 

Dietze,  Emil  Paterson,  N.  J   xviii 

Draper  Co   Hopedale,  Mass     v 

Fairmount  Machine  Co  Philadelphia   xxxi 

Fischer,  Frank                                                              Paterson,  N.J   xviii 

Fleming  &  Chapin  Philadelphia   xxiii 

Furbush,  M.  A.  &  Son  Machine  Co.   Philadelphia   ix 

Globe  Machine  Works  Frank  ford,  Phila   xx 

Gowdey,  J.  A.  &  Son.                                                    Providence,  R.  I   xvii 

Granger  Foundry  &  Machine  Co  Providence,  R.  I   xi 

Hall,  I.  A.  &  Co  Paterson,  N.J   xvii 

Halton,  Thomas  Philadelphia   xxx 

Hand,  Frederic  &  Co.   Paterson,  N.J   xviii 

Hartford  Steam  Boiler  Inspection  and  Insurance  Co  Hartford,  Conn   viii 

Harwood,  Geo.  S.  &  Son     Boston,  Mass  (After  Classified  Index) 

Houghton,  E.  F.  &  Co  Philadelphia  (Opposite  first  page  of  reading  matter) 

Holbrook  Mfg.  Co.,  The  New  York   xiv 

Howson  &  Howson  Philadelphia   xxiv 

Hunter,  James  Machine  Co  North  Adams,  Mass   xix 

Hunter,  Robert    Nicetown,  Phila   xvi 

Inglis,  James,  Jr  Paterson,  N.  J   xii 

Jackson,  James  &  Sons                                                  Paterson,  N.  J   xvii 

Kilburn,  Lincoln  &  Co   Fall  River,  Mass   xiv 

Kenyon,  D.  R.  &  Sou  Raritan,  N.  J    vi 

Knowles  Loom  Works  (See  Crompton  &  Knowles  Loom 

Works)  Worcester,  Mass. 

Liotard ,  Louis  F  Paterson ,  N.  J   xvi 

Mason  Machine  Works                                                      Taunton,  Mass    viii 

Phenix  Iron  Foundry  Providence,  R.  I   xix 

Philadelphia  Bourse,  The  Philadelphia   iv 

Posselt,  E-  A  Philadelphia   xvii,  xxiii,  xxv-xxix 

Royle,  John  &  Sons  Paterson,  N.J   i 

Rushton,  D.  &  J  Paterson ,  N.  J   xvii 

Schofield,  George  L   Philadelphia   xvii 

Sergeson,  R.  &  Co  Philadelphia   xxiv 

Sturtevaut,  B.  F.  Co  Boston,  Mass     x 

Textile  Record  Co  Philadelphia   xxiii 

Universal  Winding  Co  Boston,  Mass   xxii 

Watson,  L  S.  Mfg.  Co  Leicester,  Mass   xx 

Whitinsville  Spinning  Ring  Co  Whitinsville,  Mass   xvi 

Wi'.kins,  F.  B.  &  Co  Woonsocket,  R.  I   xix 

Wilkins  Mfg.  Co  Woonsocket,  R.  I   xix 

Woonsocket  Machine  &  Press  Co  Woonsocket,  R.  I     xv 


CLASSIFIED  INDEX  TO  ADVERTISEHENTS. 


Belting. 

American  Supply  Co. 
E.  F.  Houghton  &  Co. 
Robert  Hunter. 
George  L.  Schofield. 

Belt  Dressing. 

E.  F.  Houghton  .X:  Co. 

Bleaching,  Dyeinar,  Drying  and 
Finishing  Machinery. 

W.  W.  Alteuius  &  Son. 
Richard  C.  Borchers  &  Co. 
H.  W.  Butterworth  &  Sons  Co. 
Davis  &  Furber  Machine  Co. 
Draper  Co. 

Fairmount  Machine  Co. 

Granger  Foundry  and  Machine  Co. 

James  Hunter  Machine  Co. 

D.  R.  Kenyon  &  Son. 
Phenix  Iron  Foundry. 
B.  F.  Sturtevant  Co. 
Woonsocket  Machine  &  Press  Co. 

Blowers. 

James  Hunter  Machine  Co. 
B.  F.  Sturtevant  Co. 

Bobbins. 

American  Supply  Co. 

E.  F.  Houghton  &  Co. 
Cleaver  &  Leather. 

Books. 

E.  A.  Posselt. 

Card  Clothing. 

William  Crabb  &  Co. 
Davis  &  Furber  Machine  Co. 

Card  Cotters. 

Frank  Fischer. 

Card  Cutting  and  Lacing  Machin- 
ery. 

John  Royle  &  Sons. 


Carding,  Combing,  Spinning  and 
Drawing  Machinery. 

Crompton  &Knowles  Loom  Works. 
Davis  &  Furber  Machine  Co. 
Draper  Co. 

M.  A.  Furbush&Son  Machine  Co. 

Geo.  S.  Harwood  &  Son. 

Robert  Hunter. 

D.  R.  Kenyon  &  Son. 

Matoa  Machine  Works. 

Woonsocket  Machine  &  Press  Co. 

Counsellors-at-Law. 

Howson  cS:  Howson. 

Cotton  Yarns. 

Fleming  &  Chapin. 

Designers. 

Etnil  Dietze. 
Frederic  Hand  &  Co. 
D.  &  J.  Rushton. 

Design  Paper,  Colors  and  Brushes. 

James  Inglis,  Jr. 

Doubles. 

Crompton  &Knowles Loom  Works. 

Fairmount  Machine  Co. 

M.  A.  Furbush  &  Son  Machine  Co. 

Thomas  Halton. 

James  Jackson  &  Sons. 

Mason  Machine  Works. 

John  Royle  &  Sons. 

Edgings. 

Fleming  &  Chapin. 

Elevators. 

Fairmount  Machine  Co. 

Exhibition  of  Textile  Machinery. 

The  Philadelphia  Bourse. 

Harnesses,  Heddles  and  Reeds. 

American  Supply  Co. 
Cleaver  &  Leather. 
William  Crabb  &  Co. 
J.  A.  Gowdey  &  Son. 
I.  A.  Hall  &  Co. 
Thomas  Halton. 
Louis  F.  Liotard. 
F.  B.  Wilkins  &  Co. 
L.  S.  Watson  Mfg.  Co. 


CLASSIFIED  INDEX  TO  ADVERTISEHENTS.— Continued. 


Hydro  Extractors. 

George  L.  Schofield. 

Insurance. 

Hartford  Steam  Boiler  Inspection 
and  Insurance  Co. 

Jacquards  and  Card  Stamping 
Machinery. 

Crompton  &Knowles  Loom  Works. 
M.  A.  Furbush  &  Son  Machine  Co. 
Thomas  Halton. 
James  Jackson  &  Sons. 
John  Royle  &  Sons. 

Jacqnard  Cards. 

James  Inglis,  Jr. 

Jacqnard  Harness  Builders. 

Cleaver  &  Leather. 

Crompton  &  Knowles  Loom  Works. 

Thomas  Halton. 

Looms. 

Crompton  &  Knowles  Loom  Works. 
Davis  &  Furber  Machine  Co. 
Draper  Co. 

Fairmount  Machine  Co. 

M.  A.  Furbush  &  Son  Machine  Co. 

Kilburn,  Lincoln  &  Co. 

Mason  Machine  Works. 

Woonsocket  Machine  &  Press  Co. 

Loom  Pickers. 

American  Supply  Co. 
Wilkins  Mfg.  Co. 

Machinery   (Cotton,   Wool,  and 
Silk). 

W.  W.  Alt  emus  &  Son. 
Atherton  Machine  Co. 
Richard  C.  Borchers  &  Co. 
H.  W.  Butterworth  &  Sons  Co. 
Cleaver  &  Leather. 
Crompton  &  Knowles  Loom  Works_ 
Davis  &  Furber  Machine  Co. 
Draper  Co. 

Fairmount  Machine  Co. 

M.  A.  Furbush  &  Son  Machine  Co. 

Globe  Machine  Works. 

Granger  Foundry  &  Machine  Co. 

Thomas  Halton. 

Geo.  S.  Harwood  &  Son. 

James  Hunter  Machine  Co. 

Robert  Hunter. 

James  Jackson  &  Sons 

Kilburn,  Lincoln  &  Co. 


D.  R.  Kenyon  &  Son. 
Mason  Machine  Works. 
Phenix  Iron  Foundry. 
John  Royle  &  Sous. 
George  L.  Schofield. 

B.  F.  Sturtevant  Co. 
Universal  Winding  Co. 
Woonsocket  Machine  &  Press  Co. 

Mill  Supplies. 

American  Supply  Co. 

Cleaver  &  Leather. 

William  Crabb  &  Co. 

Crompton  &  Knowles  Loom  Works. 

Draper  Co. 

J.  A.  Gowdey  &  Son. 

I.  A.  Hall  &  Co. 

Thomas  Halton. 

Geo.  S.  Harwood  &  Son. 

E.  F.  Houghton  &  Co. 
Robert  Hunter. 
Louis  F.  Liotard. 
John  Royle  &  Sons. 
Whitinsville  Spinning  Ring  Co. 

F.  B.  Wilkins  &  Co. 
Wilkins  Manufacturing  Co. 

Nappers. 

Richard  C  Borchers  &  Co. 
Davis  &  Furber  Machine  Co. 
Fairmount  Machine  Co. 

Oils. 

E.  F.  Houghton  &  Co. 

Patent  Solicitors. 

Howson  &  Howson. 

Publications. 

E.  A.  Posselt. 
Textile  Record  Co. 

Pumps. 

Phenix  Iron  Foundry. 

Presses. 

Granger  Foundry  and  Machine  Co. 
Phenix  Iron  Foundry. 
Woonsocket  Machine  and  Press  Co. 

Reeds. 

(See  Harnesses,  Heddles  &  Reeds.) 

Ring  Travelers. 
American  Supply  Co. 
Draper  Co. 

Whitinsville  Spinning  Ring  Co. 


CLASSIFIED  INDEX  TO  ADVERTISEflENTS.— Continued. 


Shafting;,  Pulleys  and  Couplings. 

Fairmount  Machine  Co. 

James  Hunter  Machine  Co. 

Kilburn,  Lincoln  &  Co. 

Pheuix  Iron  Foundry. 

John  Royle  &  Sons. 

Woonsocket  Machine  and  Press  Co. 

Shuttles. 

American  Supply  Co. 

Cleaver  &  Leather. 

Draper  Co. 

I.  A.  Hall  &  Co. 

E.  F.  Houghton  &  Co. 

R.  Sergeson  &  Co. 

Silk  Yarns. 

Cheney  Bros. 

Soaps. 

The  Holbrook  Manufacturing  Co- 
Spindles. 

Draper  Co. 

Spinning  Kings. 

American  Supply  Co. 
Draper  Co. 

Whitinsville  Spinning  Ring  Co. 


Spools. 

American  Supply  Co. 
Cleaver  &  Leather. 
I  A.  Hall  &  Co. 

Sprinklers. 
Granger  Foundry  an 3  Machine  Co, 

Steam  Boiler  Inspection. 

Hartford  Steam  Boiler  Inspection 
and  Insurance  Co. 

Ventilating. 

B.  F.  Sturtevant  Co. 
James  Hunter  Machine  Co. 
Warping,  Beaming,  Spooling  and 
Winding  Machinery. 

W.  W.  Altemus  &  Son. 
Atherton  Machine  Co. 
Davis  &  Furber  Machine  Co. 
Draper  Co. 

Fairmount  Machine  Co. 

M.  A.  Furbush  &  Son  Machine  Co. 

Globe  Machine  Works. 

John  Royle  &  Sons. 

Universal  Winding  Co. 

Yarns. 

Cheney  Bros. 
Fleming  &  Chapin. 


To  Lessen  the  Cost  of  PRODUCTION 
and  IMPROVE  the  quality  of  the  work. 


THE  BRAMWELL  FEEDER  (over  9,000 in  use.) 

For  Woolen,  Worsted,  Shoddy,  and  Hosiery  CARDS  and  GARNETT  MACHINES. 
THE  APPERLY  FEEDER  (over  9,500  in  use.)  For  Second  Breaker  and  Finisher  CARDS. 

THE  BRAMWELL  PICKER  FEEDERS  (two  styles.) 

For  Burr  and  Mixing  Pickers,  also  Fearnaughts. 

THE  BRAMWELL  OPENER  AND  FEEDER. 

For  Wool  Washers  and  Wool  Dryers. 

SOLE  AGENTS  for  the  SPENCER  AUTOMATIC  WOOL  OILER. 

Saves  Oil,  Eabor  and  Waste. 

THE  WOODBURY  CLUTCH  ATTACHMENT  for  BRAMWELL 

FEEDERS.    Positive  and  Durable. 

A  FULL  LINE  OF  PINS  AND  PARTS  for  LEMAIRE  FEEDS. 

APRONS  and  REPIARS  of  all  kinds. 


[Machinery 


GEO.  S.  HARWOOD  &  SON. 

S3  State  Street,  Room  703,  BOSTON,  MASS. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


THE 


STURTEVANT 
SYSTEM 


for  HEATING  and  VENTILATING  TEXTILE  MILLS. 

for  DRYING  and  HANDLING  RAW  STOCK. 

for  DRYING,  TENTERING  and  OXIDIZING  PLANTS. 

for  REMOVING  STEAM  from  DYE  HOUSES,  SLASHERS, 
DRY  CANS,  etc.,  etc. 

for  REITOVING  WASTE  from  FRENCH  NAPPERS  and 
collecting  same. 

for  FORCED  or  INDUCED  DRAFT  on  BOILER  PLANTS. 


Tills  cut  shows  the  Stnrtevant  Improved  Fan  System  of  Hoods  for  removing  Steam  from  Slashers. 

SEND  FOR  DESCRIPTIVE  CATALOGUE. 


SPECIAL  BLOWERS  AND  ENGINES  FOR  EVERY  DUTY. 

Plans,  Estimates  and  Catalogues  cheerfully  furnished. 


B.  F.  Stnrtevant  Company, 


34  Oliver  Street,  Boston,  Mass. 
131  Liberty  Street,  New  York,  N.  Y. 
135  North  Third  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 
16  South  Canal  Street,  Chicago,  111. 


75  Queen  Victoria  Street,  London,  E.  C.  Eng. 
21  West  Nile  Street,  Glasgow,  .Scotland. 
38  Wilhelmstrasse,  Berlin,  Germany. 
2  Kungsholmstorg,  Stockholm,  Sweden. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


BLEACHING,  DYEING,  DRYING, 

|  Finishing  Machinery. 


COMPLETE   EQUIPMENTS  FURNISHED. 


our  specialties  are 

Calenders  and  Rolls 


FOR   ALL   GRADES   OF  FINISH, 


COTTON,  PAPER,  HUSK,  CLOTH,  CHILLED  IRON, 
BRASS,  RUBBER  A™  WOOD  ROLLS. 


OUR  PATENT 

"Husk=Cotton"  Combination  Rolls 

are  the  result  of  careful  study  of  materials  and  roll  construction,  and 
for  FINISH,  ELASTICITY  and  DURABILITY 
are  unsurpassed. 


f>„f T<  WITH  SELF=FEEDlNG  CHAIN  IMPROVED 

KHlclil     1  enierS,        swinging  and  driving  motion. 

Patent  Washing  Machines,  on  a  new  principle. 

Patent  Singeing  Machines,  0%^T2Sb^W(i 
Patent  "Atomizing"  Sprinklers. 


PROVIDENCE,   R.  I. 


CONTENTS. 


Shedding  Mechanisms. 

PAGE 

The  Knowles  Shedding  Mechanism    7 

Pattern  Mechanism  of  the  Kuowles  Loom   9 

Pattern  Mechanism  for  Kuowles  Narrow  Ware  Looms  in  which  Reverse  Gears  are  Not  Used   9 

Mechanism  for  Operating  Shedding  and  Drop-Box  Pattern  Indicators  for  Knowles  Looms   10 

Attachment  to  the  Shedding  Mechanism  of  the  Knowles  Loom   13 

Back  View  of  the  Knowles  Shedding  Mechanism  Driven  from  Bottom  Shaft   13 

The  Knowles  Selvage  Motion   14 

Shedding  Mecbanism  for  Fabrics  Produced  by  Two  Weaves   14 

Device  for  Open-Shed  Fancy  Looms  for  Evening  the  Harnesses   16 

Wicks'  and  Roy's  Shedding  Mechanism   17 

Improved  Construction  of  Harness  Levers  in  Connection  with  Lifter  and  Depressor,  etc.,  for  Crompton  Looms.  18 

The  Crompton  Harness-Frame  Moving  Device  for  Witch-Top  Looms   18 

Scheid's  Shedding  Mechanism   19 

Birchall's  Harness  Leveling  Device   20 

Alvord's  Shedding  Mechanism   21 

Ingraham's  Shedding  Mechanism   22 

Eastwood's  Shedding  Mechanism   13 

Eccles's  Harness  Mechanism  for  Open-Shed  Looms   24 

Oldham's  Shedding  Mechanism   25 

Goodyear's  Shedding  Mechanism   26 

Evans's  Shedding  Mechanism    27 

Perham's  Shedding  Mechanism   29 

Box  notions  and  Shuttle  Boxes. 

The  Knowles  Gingham  Box  Motion   30 

Multiplier  Mechanism  for  Knowles  Looms   30 

The  Knowles  Four  Chain  Multiplier   35 

The  Knowels  Shawl  Loom  Box  Pattern  Mechanism   41 

Hutchin's  Fancy  Cotton  and  Silk  Dobby  Pattern  Mechanism   41 

Box  Motion  for  Witch  Looms   44 

Shuttle  Box  Motion  for  Plain  Looms   45 

Shuttle  Box  Mechanism  for  Crompton  Looms     46 

Ingraham's  Drop-Box  Mechanism   47 

Goodyear's  Shuttle  Box  Operating  Mechanism     49 

Scheid's  Shuttle  Box  Operating  Mechanism   49 

DuFaur  and  Gartner's  Shuttle  Box  Mechanism   50 

DuFaur's  Multiplier   51 

Luscomb's  Shuttle  Box  Mechanism   53 

Shuttle  Box  for  Plain  Looms   55 

Northrop's  Shuttle  Check  for  Plain  Looms   56 

Shuttle  Box  for  Northrop  Looms   56 

Werner's  Shuttle  Check   57 

Cowgill's  Shuttle  Binder   58 

Nolan  &  Wilkie's  Mouthpiece  for  Loom  Shuttle  Boxes   58 

Gartner's  Self  Adjustable  Shuttle  Box  .Supporting  Rod    59 

Let-Off  flechanisms. 

The  Knowles  Friction  Let-Off  Motion   60 

The  Knowles  Warp  Slackener   60 

The  Masr  n  Whip-Roll   62 

Pratt's  Let-Off  Mechanism   63 

Waite's  Let-Off  Mechanism   63 

Folsom's  Let-Off  Mechanism  .    64 

Talbot's  Let-Off  Mechanism   65 

Palmer's  Let- Off  Mechanism   66 

Pierce's  and  McAllen's  Warp  Beam  Brake   67 


Take- Up  Mechanisms. 

PAGK 

The  Knowles  Ratchet-Ring  Take-Up   68 

Tbe  Knowles  Worm  Take-Up   68 

Take-Up  Attachment  for  the  Knowles  Narrow  Ware  Loom   69 

The  Mason  Adjustable  Guide  lor  Cloth  Roll  Stands   69 

Sull  ivau's  Cloth  Guide   70 

Brady's  Take-Up  and  Drop-Box  Governing  Mechanism   71 

Kastler's  Conditional  Take-Up  Mechanism   72 

Warp  Beams. 

The  Knowles  Warp  Beam  and  Ratchet  Beam  Head   73, 

The  Knowles  Warp  Beam  for  Extra  Heavy  Built  Looms   74 

Adjustable  Head  for  Warp  Beams   74 

The  Fairmount  Machine  Company's  Adjustable  Beam  Head  for  Gingham  Loom  Warp  Beams   75 

Stop-Motions. 

The  Knowles  Center  Stop- Motion   76 

McMichael's  Filling  Stop-Motion  ;   76 

Warp  Stop-Motion  for  Northrop  Looms   78 

Northrop's  Filling  Stop-Motion   78 

Mommer's  Electric  Warp  Stop-Motion  for  Looms   79 

Picking  Mechanisms. 

Kritler's  Sweep-Stick  for  Connecting  the  Sweep-Arm  and  Picking-Stick  of  a  Loom   80 

The  Knowles  Picking  Motion  for  Equal  Geared  Looms   81 

The  Mason  Picking  Mechanism    81 

Werner's  Picker  and  Relief  Motions   82 

Paige's  Picker  Mechanism   84 

Perham's  Picker  Operating  Mechanism   84 

Barselou's  Rocker  and  Shoe  Connection  for  Picker-Sticks   85 

Doyle's  Picker  Check   86 

Sartwell's  Picker-Stick  Check   86 

Mooney's  Picker  Check-Strap   87 

Durkin's  Picker  Mechanism   88 

Lemaire's  Picker  Strap   88 

Lahue's  Picker-Strap   89 

Warren's  Picker  Staff  Strap   90 

Ashby's  Picker-Strap   90 

Li^sey's  Lug  Strap   91 

Device  for  Securing  Pickers  to  Loom  Picker-Staffs   92 

Keith's  Picker-Stick   92 

Bearing  for  Loom  Picker-Sticks   93. 

Languirand's  Picker-Staff.   93 

Holbrook's  Picker   94 

Gleaeon's  Picker     94 

WardwelPs  Picker   95 

Wilkins'  Loom  Picker   95 


Shuttles. 


Draper's  Self-Threading  Shuttle  for  Northrop  Looms   96 

Another  Improvement  in  Shuttles  for  Northrop  Looms   96 

Bobbin  Holder  for  Draper  Shuttles   97 

Cop-Skewer  for  Shuttles  for  Northrop  Looms   97 

The  Litchfield  Shuttle   98 

Sergeson's  Shuttle   90 

Another  Sergeson's  Shuttle   100 

Sergeson's  Cop-Shuttle   100 

Sutcliffe  &  Marshall's  Shuttle   100 

Morrison's  Shuttle   101 

Nason's  Self-Threading  Shuttle   102 

Allen's  Two  Bobbin  Shuttle.    102 

Todd's  Shuttle  for  Narrow  Ware  Looms   103 

Daudelin's  Self  Threading  Tension  Device  for  Shuttles   104 

Nason's  Tension  Device  for  Shuttles   104 

Howard  &  Fitton's  Tension  Device  for  Shuttles   104 

Sweeney  &  Stroble's  Automatic  Tension  Device  for  Shuttles   105 

Hamblin  &  Cornell's  Tension  Device  for  Shuttles   106 

Hamblin  &  Damon's  Tension  Device  for  Shutiles   106 

Hamblin  &  Damon's  Improved  Tension  Device  for  Shuttles   107 

Grant's  Tension  Device  for  Shuttles   107 

Whitley's  Tension  Device  for  Shuttles  for  Weaving  Broad  Silk  Goods   108 


PAGE 

Koester's  Tension  Device  for  Shuttles  for  Ribbon  Looms   109 

Torld's  Tension  Device  for  Shuttles  for  Narrow  Ware  Looms   109 

Rigby's  Conductor  for  Shuttles  for  Narrow  Ware  Looms   no 

Dolber's  Shuttle-Threader   Hi 

Temples. 

The  Knowles  Temple   112 

Painchaud's  Temple   112 

The  Dutc  her  Temple   113 

Improved  Dutcher  Temple   114 

The  Dutcher  Thread-Cutting-  Temple   114 

Claus's  and  Ludlam's  Temple   116 

Sykes's  Temple   116 

Sykes's  Improved  Temple    117 

Mason's  Temple   118 

Reeds  and  Reed  Motions. 

Adamson's  Reed  ■  119 

Liotard's  Reed    119 

The  Crompton  Reed  for  Weaving  Tufted  Fabrics    119 

Albinson's  False  Reed   120 

Reed  for  Douping   121 

Davenport's  Reed  for  Warping   121 

The  Knowles  Loose-Reed  Motion  for  Silk  Looms   122 

Heddles  and  Harnesses. 

bedding's  Doup-Heddle  for  Leno  Weaving   123 

Hampson's  Harness  for  Weaving  Leno  Goods   124 

Harness  Shifter  and  Adjuster   124 

Harness  Connection  for  Plain  Looms   125 

Jacquards  and  Card-Cutting  Hachinery. 

Halton's  Jacquard  Mechanism   126 

The  Knowles  Open-Shed  Jacquard   126 

The  Knowles  Double  Cylinder  Single-Lift  or  Rise-and-Drop  Jacquard   127 

The  Knowles  Marseilles  Qudt  Jacquard   128 

The  Knowles  Twill  Jacquard   129 

The  Knowles  Double  Acting  Open-Shed  Tacquard  Machine   129 

The  Knowles  Jacquard  for  Two  Weave  Fabrics  1     130 

Hilton's  Jacquard  for  Two  Weave  Fabrics   132 

Device  to  Insure  the  Proper  Guidance  of  the  Rear  Ends  of  the  Needles  of  a  Jacquard  Machine   133 

Jackson's  Jacquard  Mechanism   H4 

The  Knowles  Jacquard  Box  Chain  Indicator  Mechanism   135 

Stafford's  Lingo   135 

Butcher's  Jacquard  Heddle   135 

Comberboird  to  Permit  Change  of  Texture   136 

Jacquard  Loom  with  Shaft- Harness  Attached   137 

Royle's  Piano  Machine  for  Punching  Jacquard  Cards   138 

Royle's  Machine  for  Punching  and  Stacking  Jacquard  Cards      140 

Wire  Rod  for  Jacquard  Cards   142 

Spooling,  Winding,  Warping  and  Reeling  Machinery. 

The  Furbush  Automatic  Stop-Motion  for  Spooling  Machinery   . .  143 

Draper's  Spooling  Machine   144 

Lord's  Spooling  Machine    145 

Draper's  Spooler  Guide   145 

Draper's  Bobbin-Holder  for  Spoolers    146 

Bunch  Arresting  Yarn  Guide  for  Spooling  Machines   146 

Shell- Holder  for  Spooling  Machines     147 

Thread  Guide  for  Spooling  and  Winding  Machines   148 

The  Altemus  Filling  Winder     148 

Bowman's  Bobbin  Holder  or  Clamp  for  Horizontal  Bobbin  Winders  -. .  150 

Machine  for  Winding  Yarn  from  Chains  onto  Filling  Bobbins   151 

The  Universal  Method  of  Winding   152 

Furbush's  Dressing,  Warping  or  Reeling  Machine   153 

Atherton's  Warp  Beaming  Machine.    154 

Machine. for  Dressing  or  Beaming  Cotton  Warps   155 

The  Denn  Electric  Stop-Motion  for  Warping  Machines   155 

Self  Registering  Stop-Motion  Mechanism  for  Warpers     156 

Tension  Regulator  for  Yarn  Beams   157 

Warp  Compresser    157 

Risk's  Indicator  for  Winding  and  Warping  Machines   T58 

Atwood's  Reel   159 

lord's  Reel  and  Support   160 


Miscellaneous. 

Improvements  for  the  Mason  Loom   61 

The  Mason  Brake  Mechanism   162 

Clutch- Operating  Mechanism  for  Crompton  Looms   163 

Filling  Cutting  Device  for  Northrop  Looms   164 

Filling  Carriers  for  Northrop  Looms   164 

Locating  Shipper-Handle  in  Cotton  Looms  at  the  Opposite  End  of  Belt  Pulley   165 

Scott's  Lappet  Loom    166 

Knowles  Lappet  Motion   166 

Reversing  Mechauism  for  Knowles  Carpet  Looms  in  Connection  with  their  Filling  Stop-Motion   168 

Bardsley's  Leno  Motion   170' 

Loom  for  Weaving  Pile  Fabrics   171 

McMichael's  Smash  Protector   172 

Poehnert's  Smash  Protector   173 

The  Knowles  Cloth  Separator   173 

Zuppinger's  Cloth  Separator   174 

Bosworth's  Automatic  Pick-Counter   174 

Lancaster's  Pick-Measuring  Device   176 

Lutton's  Pattern-Chain  Support   176 

Pitman  for  Looms   177 

Loom  Gear   178 

Pile-Wire  for  Looms    178 

The  Altemus  Method  of  Gearing  for  Transforming  Uniform  Rotary  Motion  into  Differential  Rotary  Motion. . . .  179 

An  Ingenious  Apparatus  for  Removing  Wrapping-Cord  from  Yarn  Chains   179 

Bobbin  for  Silk  Weaving   180 

Fisher's  Bobbin   180 

Blackburn's  Bobbin  : . .  181 

Spool-Head    182 

Graduated  Yarn  Templet   182 

Graduated  Cloth- Weight  Templet   183 

Cloth  and  Yarn  Calculating  Rule   183 

Scale-Beam  for  Ascertaining  the  Counts  of  Yarn   '.  '   ....  184 


EI.  F.  HOUGHTON  &  CO., 

240-50  W.  Somerset  St., 
Philadelphia. 

GENERAL 

MILL.  FURNISHERS, 

EVERYTHING 

FOR  THE  MILL. 


STAINLESS  LOOM  OILS,  SPINDLE  OILS, 

WOOL  OILS,  BELT  DRESSINGS. 


SHEDDING  MECHANISMS. 


THE  KNOWLES  SHEDDING  MECHANISM. 

This  mechanism  is  shown  in  the  accompanying  three 
illustrations,  of  which  Fig.  i  shows  the  complete  shed- 
ding mechanism;  Fig.  2  shows  the  top  and  bottom 
cylinders,  also  the  vibrator  and  jack  attachment;  Fig. 
3  shows  the  box  mechanism  for  raising  and  lowering 
the  shuttle  boxes. 

a,  indicates  arch  of  loom  frame;  6,  the  loom  frame; 
C,  the  bolts  for  fastening  the  arch  a,  on  to  loom  frame 
6;  d,  indicates  the  top  cylinder  for  operating  shedding 
mechanism;  e,  the  bottom  cylinder  for  operating  shed- 


is  a  small  rod  running  across  the  top  of  jacks  for 
holding  them  down  on  the  rod  fc. 

chain  cylinder  gear,  fastened  to  the  chain  cylinder 
I',  by  means  of  a  soft  set  screw  (not  shown),  so  that 
provided  any  catch  occurs  no  other  breakage  but  the 
breaking  of  said  soft  set  screw  will  result;  I",  the  boxes 
for  holding  chain  cylinder  and  which  can  be  raised  or 
lowered  by  set  screws  I'". 

ntt  two  elliptical  gears  for  transferring  the  character- 
istic fast  and  slow  motion  to  chain  cylinder  I'.  To  the 
right  of  these  two  elliptical  gears  tn,  are  seen  two  spur 


ding  mechanism;  d\  the  part  of  top  cylinder  for  operat- 
ing shuttle  boxes;  c',  the  part  of  bottom  cylinder  for 
operating  shuttle-boxes;  f,  the  vibrator  levers;  <J,  the 
vibrator  gears;  h,  the  vibrator  connectors;  i,  the  har- 
ness jacks;  i',  the  comb  for  keeping  them  in  proper 
position. 

Vibrator  lever,  gear  and  connector  are  the  same  for 
shedding  and  box  mechanism,  with  the  exception  of 
the  long  connector  h',  used  for  raising  single  box. 

j,  arbor  of  harness  jacks,  fulcrumed  to  rod  fc,  fastened 
to  the  lower  extension  of  arch  «.  of  the  loom  frame. 


gears,  of  which  the  lower  situated  is  a  double  spur 
gear.  The  outside  gear  of  the  double  spur  gear,  is 
smaller  and  meshes  into  the  teeth  of  the  chain  cylinder 
gear  I. 

n,  the  reverse  key,  held  in  position  by  casting  n', 
bolted  on  to  loom  frame  a.  This  reverse  key  acts  as  a 
shaft  for  all  the  upper  sections  of  previously  referred  to 
three  sets  of  gears.  It  has  a  double  key  set  in  its  shaft. 
When  the  loom  is  in  motion  and  the  chain  cylinder 
running  forward,  one  of  the  lips  fastens  the  top  ellip- 
tical gear  and  also  the  previously  referred  to  outside 
situated  upper  gear,  which  meshes  with  the  chain 
cylinder  gear  I.  If  required  to  reverse  the  chain  cylin- 
der the  reverse  key  w,  is  drawn  out,  in  turn  liberating 
the  top  elliptical  gear  and  fastening  the  middle  spur 


8 


gear,  which  meshes  witli  the  bottom 
double  spur  gear,  thus  in  turn  re- 
verses the  chain  cylinder  gear  and 
its  cylinder. 

Spring  o,  connects  to  the  lock 
knife  o\  (See  Fig.  3.)  This  lock 
knife  is  operated  by  means  of  finger 
.0",  fastened  to  rod  0"'  by  a  set  screw, 
and  which  finger  in  turn  is  operated 
b<  a  cam  (not  shown)  fastened  on 
the  bottom  cylinder  e. 


Three  upright  arms  (one  on  each 
end  and  one  in  centre  of  the  head 
motion)  extending  upward  on  shaft 
0"'  hold  lock  knife  0'  by  means  of 
set  screws. 

As  the  chain  ball  (riser)  of  pattern  chain  p,  comes 
under  the  heel  of  the  vibrator  lever  f,  the  cam  which 


operates  the  finger  0"  of  the  lock  knife  must  be  on  its 
highest  part,  which  causes  the  knife  to  be  out,  allowing 
the  vibrator  lever  f,  to  change  according  to  pattern 
chain.  As  the  low  part  of  the  cam  comes  around,  the 
spring  0  will  immediately  pull  the 
lock  knife  in  between  the  ends  of 
the  vibrator  lever  f,  holding  them 
steady  while  vibrator  gears  g,  are 
rotating. 

p'  is  the  chain  rack  for  holding 
the  chain  in  position  and  away  from 
the  jacks  i. 

Vibrator  levers  f,  are  fulcrumed 
on  rod  f,  and  held  in  position  by 
shell  r. 

Every  vibrator  connector  ft,  has 
connected  to  it  a  follower-lever  Q, 
the  object  of  which  is  to  keep  con- 
nector ft,  from  flying  back  when  the 
harness  rises.  Every  follower-lever 
is  pressed  down  by  means  of  a 
spring  q',  held  in  position  by  rack 
q"  and  turns  on  shaft  q'".  Cylinders 
d  and  e,  are  driven  by  bevel  gears  r 
and  r\  which  in  turn  are  driven  by 
bevel  gears  s  and  s',  keyed  to  up- 
right shaft  driven  either  from 
crank  shaft  or  bottom  shaft  of  the 
loom  as  required. 

m,  is  a  hand  wheel  used  by  the 
T?      n  operator  for  turning  harnesses  by 

■ALCf ■  J  hand  when  necessary. 

_  ft',  is  the  lever  for  a  single  box 
lift  (box  No.  2);  V,  compound  lever 
for  raising  box  3  and  4;  V,  brace  for 
holding  compound  lever  in  posi- 
tion; V",  the  pulleys  around  which 
box  chain  v'" ,  runs  for  raising  the 
boxes.  (Crompton  and  Knowles  Loom 
Works.) 


9 


PATTERN  MECHANISM  OF  THE  KNOWLES 
LOOM. 

In  the  accompanying  drawing  is  shown  a  front  ele- 
vation of  a  detached  portion  of  the  head  of  the 
Knowles  loom,  sufficient  to  illustrate  the  nature  of 
the  device. 

Numerals  of  reference  indicate  thus:  i,  is  the  upper 
cylinder  gear,  journaled  in  the  upper  portion  of  the 
head  frame  (arch)  2,  and  3  is  the  lower  cylinder  gear, 
journaled  in  the  lower  portion  of  the  head  frame  2.  4, 
is  the  pattern  cylinder  shaft  journaled  in  the  frame  2. 
On  the  front  end  of  said  shaft  4,  is  fast  the  pattern 
cylinder  gear  5,  which  is  provided  with  a  series  of 
equidistant  notches  5',  in  its  periphery.  In  this  in- 
stance there  are  6  notches.  The  portions  of  the  peri- 
phery of  the  gear  5,  between  the  notches  5',  are 
provided  with  gear  teeth  5".  For  a  predetermined 
distance  on  each  side  of  the  notches  5',  the  teeth  5", 
are  left  off,  and  these  portions  of  the  periphery  of  the 
gear  5,  are  plain,  as  well  as  the  notched  portion.  The 
outer  ends  of  the  notches  5',  are  beveled,  or  made 
flaring  to  allow  of  the  ready  admission  and  with- 


drawal of  the  driving  pin  6,  on  the  arm  or  plate  7, 
secured  to  the  gear  8,  in  this  instance  by  a  screw  7'. 
Said  gear  8,  is  journaled  on  a  stud  8'. 

The  plate  7,  secured  to  the  gear  8,  has  a  mutilated 
pinion  g,  made  integral  therewith,  or  secured  thereto. 
Said  pinion  9,  is  provided  with  nine  teeth,  correspond- 
ing to  the  number  of  spaces  between  the  teeth  5",  on 
each  section  of  the  periphery  of  the  gear  5,  and  the 
teeth  on  the  mutilated  pinion  9,  are  adapted  to  mesh 
with,  and  communicate  a  slow  motion  to  the  gear  5, 
through  the  revolution  of  the  gear  8,  when  the  pin  6, 
is  free  from  engagement  with  the  slots  5',  in  said 
gear  5. 

Continuous  motion  is  communicated  to  the  gear  8, 
from  the  upper  or  lower  cylinder  gear,  in  this  instance 
from  the  lower  cylinder  gear,  either  in  a  forward  or  in 
a  backward  direction,  by  the  ordinary  system  of  cir- 
cular gears,  as  shown  in  the  drawing.  Said  system  of 
gears  consists  of  a  gear  10,  connected  and  adapted  to 
move  with  the  lower  cylinder  gear  3,  by  the  sliding  key 
11,  in  the  ordinary  way.  Said  gear  10,  meshes  with 
and  drives  a  gear  12,  loose  on  a  stud  13,  fast  in  the 
head  frame,  and  a  third  gear  14,  made  integral  with  the 
gear  12,  or  secured  thereto,  meshes  with,  and  drives 
the  gear  8. 


A  fourth  gear  15,  is  journaled  on  the  same  shaft  as 
the  gear  10,  and  meshes  with  the  gear  8,  and  runs 
loose,  except  when  it  is  desired  to  reverse  the  pattern 
chain  mechanism,  when  by  means  of  the  sliding  key 
11.  the  gear  15,  is  connected  and  made  to  revolve  with 
the  cylinder  gear  3,  and  turn  the  gear  8,  in  the  reverse 
direction,  leaving  the  gear  10,  loose. 

From  the  description  in  connection  with  the  draw- 
ing, the  operation  of  the  pattern  mechanism,  for  com- 
municating a  continuous  fast  and  slow  motion  to  the 
pattern  cylinder  shaft  4,  and  to  the  pattern  cylinder, 
not  shown,  will  be  readily  understood. 

When  the  loom  is  running  properly  the  revolution 
of  the  cylinder  gear  3,  will  cause  the  gear  10,  connected 
therewith,  to  revolve  in  the  direction  indicated  by  the 
arrow,  also  the  gear  12,  and  the  gear  14,  fast  thereto, 
and  the  gear  8,  and  through  the  gear  8,  the  arm  7, 
carrying  the  pin  6,  and  the  mutilated  pinion  9.  At 
every  revolution  of  the  gear  8,  the  pin  6,  will  enter 
into  one  of  the  slots  5',  in  the  periphery  of  the  gear  5, 
and  communicate  to  said  gear  a  fast  motion  for  a  part 
of  its  revolution.  As  soon  as  the  pin  6,  leaves  the  slot 
5',  the  teeth  9',  on  the  mutilated  pinion  9,  will  engage 
with  the  teeth  5",  on  one  section  of  the  periphery  of 
the  gear  5,  and  communicate  a  slow  motion  to  said 
gear,  for  a  part  of  its  revolution.  This  operation  is 
repeated,  and  a  continuous  fast  and  slow  motion  of  the 
gear  5,  and  also  the  pattern  cylinder  shaft  4,  and  of  the 
pattern  cylinder,  not  shown,  is  obtained. 

In  case  it  is  desired  to  reverse  the  motion  of  the 
pattern  cylinder  shaft  4,  the  slide  pin  11,  is  drawn  out, 
causing  the  gear  15,  to  revolve  with  the  cylinder  gear 
3,  and  turn  the  gear  8,  in  the  opposite  direction,  and 
also  the  plate  7,  carrying  the  pin  6,  the  gears  10,  12, 
and  14,  running  loose. 

This  mechanism  does  away  with  the  elliptical  gears 
as  used  in  the  older  style  of  looms,  and  which  are  ex- 
pensive to  make,  obtaining  a  continuous  fast  and 
slow  motion  with  the  ordinary  system  of  circular  gears. 

The  explanation  thus  given  covers  one  of  the  most 
important,  if  not  the  most  ingenious,  inventions  of 
the  Knowles  Loom  Works.  They  never  left  their 
original  idea  of  operating  the  harness,  but  continu- 
ously improved  the  method  of  driving  the  chain  cylin- 
der. Their  object  is  to  have  a  continuous  motion  of 
said  chain  cylinder  without  the  use  of  elliptical  or 
eccentric  gears  and  yet  have  a  fast  and  slow  motion 
of  said  cylinder. 

In  the  new  device  they  have  both;  when  the  chain  is 
moving  from  one  bar  to  the  other  the  motion  is  very 
fast,  but  as  the  cylinder  gears  are  changing  the  harness 
from  one  pick  to  the  other  the  chain  cylinder  motion  is 
slow,  thereby  gaining  speed  of  the  chain  cylinder  with- 
out the  use  of  elliptical  gears,  thus  removing  any  possi- 
bility of  harness  skips  and  reducing  the  wear  and  tear 
on  the  machinery  to  the  lowest  possible  amount. 
(Crompton  and  Enoiolcs  Loom  Works.) 


PATTERN     MECHANISM     FOR  KNOWLES 
NARROW    WARE    LOOMS     IN  WHICH 
REVERSE    GEARS    ARE    NOT  USED. 

The  object  of  this  mechanism  is  (also)  to  communi- 
cate  a  continuous  fast  and  slow  motion  to  the  pattern 
chain  cylinder. 

By  means  of  this  mechanism,  is  done  away  with  the 
system  of  reverse  gears,  the  pattern  cylinder  gear  being 
driven  directly  from  the  shaft  of  the  head  motion 
cylinder  gear,  by  a  pinion  and  pin  fast  on  said  shaft. 
Provision  is  also  made  for  turning  the  pattern  cylinder 
and  chain  in  a  reverse  direction,  by  mounting  the 
pattern  cylinder  gear  loose  on  the  pattern  cylinder  shaft, 
and  combining  therewith  a  snap  handle,  fast  on  said 


10 


shaft,  and  provided  with  a  spring  actuated  pin  which 
engages  holes  or  recesses  in  the  pattern  cylinder  gear, 
to  cause  said  gear  to  revolve  with  the  pattern  cylinder 
shaft. 

As  mentioned  before,  this  improvement  can  be  used 
on  a  Knowles  loom,  where  reverse  gears  are  not 
needed;  it  is  an  excellent  motion,  the  same  as  is  pro- 
duced by  the  aid  of  eccentric  or  elliptical  gears,  namely, 
a  fast  motion  as  the  chain  is  passing  from  one  bar  to 
the  other  and  a  slow  motion  when  the  gears  are 
changing  the  harness.  Reverse  gears  are  not  needed 
on  any  plain  loom  where  the  harness  chain  is  of  short 
repeats. 

In  the  accompanying  drawings  a  detached  portion 
of  the  head  of  the  Knowles  loom  is  given,  sufficient  to 
illustrate  the  nature  of  the  mechanism. 

Referring  to  the  drawings:  Figure  A  is  a  front  eleva- 
tion of  a  portion  of  the  head  of  said  Knowles  loom, 
and  Fig.  B  is  a  sectional  detail,  through  the  pattern 
cvlinder  gear  and  the  snap  handle,  taken  on  line  2,  2, 
Fig.  A.  . 

i,  is  the  head  frame;  2,  is  the  upper  cylinder  gear, 
and  3,  the  lower  cylinder  gear;  the  shafts  2,  3,  of 
which  are  journaled  in  boxes  on  the  head  frame  1,  and 
4,  is  the  pattern  cylinder  shaft,  journaled  in  the  frame 


I,  in  the  usual  way.  On  the  front  end  of  said  shaft  4, 
is  loosely  mounted  the  pattern  cylinder  gear  5,  which 
is  provided  with  a  series  of  equidistant  notches  5',  and 
with  gear  teeth  5",  on  the  periphery  of  the  gear,  inter- 
mediate the  notches.  The  teeth  5",  are  left  off  for  a 
predetermined  distance  on  each  side  of  the  notches  5', 
and  these  portions  of  the  periphery  of  the  gear,  as  well 
as  the  notched  portions,  are  plain,  and  the  outer  ends 
of  the  notches  5',  are  beveled  or  made  flaring  to  allow 
of  the  ready  admission  and  withdrawal  of  the  driving 
pin. 

On  the  end  of  the  cylinder  gear  shaft  4,  outside  of 
the  cylinder  gear  5,  is  a  snap  handle  bar  6,  secured 
to  said  shaft,  by  a  screw  7.  The  snap  handle  bar  6, 
is  provided  with  a  handle  8,  and  also  with  a  spring 
actuated  pin  9,  mounted  and  adapted  to  move  out  or 
in,  in  a  boss  6',  on  the  bar  6.  The  pin  9,  has  an  en- 
larged head  9',  and  is  actuated  by  a  spiral  spring  10, 
inclosed  within  a  chamber  in  the  boss  6'.  The  inner 
end  of  pin  9,  is  adapted  to  extend  into  holes  or  re- 
cesses 11,  in  the  arms  of  the  pattern  cylinder  gear  5. 
The  head  9',  is  provided  with  a  pin  9",  fast  therein, 
which  extends  loosely  into  a  hole  in  the  end  of  the 
boss  6',  and  when  the  pin  9,  is  withdrawn,  it  may  be 


turned  so  as  to  cause  the  end  of  the  pin  9",  to  bear 
against  the  end  of  the  boss  6',  to  hold  the  pin  9,  out 
of  engagement  with  the  holes  11. 

It  will  be  seen  that  by  withdrawing  the  pin  9,  so  that 
the  inner  end  thereof  will  not  engage  with  the  holes 
or  recesses  11,  in  the  cylinder  gear  5,  that  the  pattern 
cylinder  shaft  4,  may  be  turned  by  the  snap  handle 
bar  6,  to  turn  the  pattern  cylinder  and  chain,  without 
turning  the  cylinder  gear  5. 

The  pattern  cylinder  gear  5,  is  driven  directly  from 
the  shaft  3',  of  the  lower  cylinder  gear  3,  by  a  pinion 
12,  fast  thereon,  and  meshing  with  the  gear  teeth  5", 
on  the  pattern  cylinder  gear  5,  to  communicate  a  slow 
motion  thereto,  and  by  a  pin  13,  on  an  arm  or 
plate  14,  secured  to,  or  made  integral  with  the  pinion 
12,  which  pin  engages  the  notches  5',  in  the  cylinder 
gear  5,  to  communicate  a  fast  motion  thereto.  It  will 
thus  be  seen  that  by  means  of  the  pin  13,  and  the 
pinion  12,  a  continuous  fast  and  slow  motion  is  com- 
municated to  the  pattern  cylinder  gear  5,  and  in  this 
instance  from  the  shaft  of  the  lower  cylinder  gear. 

When  it  is  desired  to  disconnect  the  pattern  cylinder 
gear  5,  so  that  the  pattern  cylinder  shaft  4,  and  pattern 
chain  may  be  turned  without  turning  said  gear,  the 
spring  actuated  pin  9,  is  withdrawn  from  engagement 
with  the  cylinder  gear  5,  and  the  pattern  cylinder  shaft 
4,  turned  by  means  of  the  handle  8,  on  the  snap  handle 
bar  6.    (Crompton  and  Knowles  Loom  Works.) 


MECHANISM    FOR    OPERATING  SHEDDING 
AND  DROP-BOX  PATTERN  INDICAT- 
ORS FOR  KNOWLES  LOOMS. 

On  the  Knowles  fancy  loom  the  box  motion  and 
the  shedding  motion  are  driven  by  the  same  device. 

The  purpose  of  this  mechanism  is  to  provide  means 
by  which  certain  bars  of  the  box-pattern  indicators  may 
be  repeated  without  constructing  successive  similar 
bars,  and  at  the  same  time  to  so  connect  the  box-pattern 
mechanism  with  the  harness-pattern  mechanism  that 
the  two  will  not  be  thrown  out  of  time  with  each  other 
when  the  harness-pattern  mechanism  is  reversed  in  the 
operation  of  picking  out  imperfect  work  or  otherwise. 

The  box-pattern  mechanism  consists  of  two  sets  of 
indicators — a  main  and  auxiliary  set — each  driven  by 
a  pin-wheel  and  a  star-wheel,  and  each  pin-wheel  fitted 
to  be  slid  into  or  out  of  engagement  with  its  respective 
star-wheel,  according  to  indicators,  moved  by  the  op- 
posite star-wheel. 

This  feature  is  accomplished  by  driving  the  box- 
mechanism  pin-wheel  shaft  from  the  harness-pattern- 
indicator  shaft  or  its  driving  mechanism,  so  that  when 
the  harness-indicators  are  reversed,  the  box-pattern 
mechanism  is  reversed. 

Referring  to  the  accompanying  drawings:  Fig.  1  is 
a  side  view  of  the  working  parts  of  the  mechanism 
detached.  Fig.  2  is  an  end  view  of  some  of  the  parts 
shown  in  Fig.  1,  looking  in  the  direction  of  the  arrow 
a,  same  figure.  Fig.  3  is  an  opposite  end  view  of  some 
of  the  parts  detached,  looking  in  the  direction  of  the 
arrow  &,  in  Fig.  1.  Fig.  4  is  a  section  on  line  X,  Fig. 
3,  looking  in  the  direction  of  arrow  c,  same  figure. 
Fig.  5  is  a  detail  of  the  reverse  key  shown  in  Figs.  3 
and  4,  and  Fig.  6  is  a  central  longitudinal  section  of  the 
shaft  3,  and  parts  mounted  thereon. 

Numerals  of  reference  in  the  accompanying  illustra- 
tions refer  to  the  following  parts:  1,  represents  the 
harness-pattern  barrel  provided  with  notched  flanges  2, 
to  carry  indicators  (not  shown)  made  up  of  chain-bars, 
links  and  rolls  of  the  ordinary  construction.  The 
barrel  1,  is  fast  upon  shaft  3,  and  upon  the  end  of  shaft 
3,  is  secured  a  gear-wheel  4,  driven  by  a  set  of  reverse 
gears. 

Loose  on  the  end  of  the  shaft  5,  Figs.  1  and  4, 
through  which  power  is  applied,  are  a  pair  of  gears 


11 


6,  and  7,  which  are  splined  to  receive  the  end  of  reverse 
keys  8,  (see  Figs.  4  and  5,)  seated  in  a  spline  in  the 
shaft  5.  The  stem  9,  of  the  reverse  key  8,  is  fitted  flush 
with  the  surface  of  the  shaft,  the  projection  10,  being 
fitted  to  engage  the  spline  in  the  gears,  either  of  which 
may  be  driven  with  the  shaft  5,  according  as  the  key  8, 
is  pushed  in  to  engage  gear  7,  or  pulled  out  to  engage 
gear  6,  the  gear  which  is  out  of  engagement  with  the 
key  being  loose  upon  the  shaft.  The  gears  6  and  7,  are 
confined  upon  the  shaft  5,  laterally  by  the  flange  11, 


end  of  the  spring  13,  is  secured  a  pin  14,  which  projects 
through  a  slot  in  the  collar  12,  and  is  pressed  by  the 
tension  of  the  spring  13,  into  notches  9',  in  the  face  of 
the  stem  9,  of  the  key  8.  The  notches  9',  are  so  placed 
as  to  hold  the  key  8,  in  proper  position  for  engage- 
ment with  the  respective  gears  6  and  7.  To  avoid  the 
possibility  of  both  gears  being  engaged  at  the  same 
time  by  the  key  8,  and  consequent  damage  to  some  of 
the  parts  of  the  mechanism  should  power  be  applied, 
the  gears  6  and  7  are  chambered  to  the  depth  of  the 


Fig.  1 


integral  with  the  shaft  and  the  collar  12,  fast  upon  the 
outer  end  of  the  shaft  (See  Fig.  4).    Coiled  partially 


Fig.  3. 

around  the  collar  12,  is  flat  spring  13,  fastened  to  the 
collar  at  one  end  and  free  at    the  other.    To  the  free 


spline  at  their  adjoining  faces  for  a  length  equal  to  the 
length  of  the  projection  10,  on  the  stem  of  key  8,  so 
that  in  sliding  the  key  8,  it  leaves  the  spline  of  one  gear 
when  it  enters  that  of  the  other.  Mounted  upon  a  stud 
15,  is  a  gear  16,  which  meshes  with  gear  7,  of  the  driv- 
ing-shaft 5,  and  which  is  fast  to  the  hub  of  a  second 
gear  17,  which  is  loose  upon  the  stud  15  (See  Fig.  4). 
Gears  7  and  16  are  enough  larger  than  6  and  17,  so  that 
the  teeth  of  the  latter  clear  each  other  when  7  and  16 
are  properly  meshed. 

The  stud  15  and  shaft  5  are  so  situated  with  reference 
to  shaft  3  that  gears  6  and  17  are  both  in  mesh  with 
gear  4.  Gears  7  and  16  are  of  the  same  size,  and  gears 
6  and  17  are  of  the  same  size,  and  so  proportioned  to 
gear  4,  that  one  complete  revolution  of  gear  6  or  gear 
17  turns  shaft  3  through  the  angular  space  between  two 
contiguous  notches  in  the  harness-pattern  barrel- 
flanges  2. 

When  the  key  8  is  pushed  into  engagement  with  gear 
7,  the  harness-pattern  barrel  1  is  driven  through  the 
intermediate  gears  16  and  17  in  its  normal  direction, 
with  the  loom  running  forward.  When  the  key  8  is 
pulled  out  into  engagement  with  gear  6,  the  harness- 
pattern  barrel  is  driven  directly  through  gear  6  in  the 
reverse  direction.  This  construction  is  used,  for  the 
reason  that  the  harness-acting  mechanism  cannot  be 
turned  backward,  the  object  being  to  reverse  the  har- 
ness-pattern indicators,  while  the  loom  or  its  harness- 
actuating  mechanism  is  turned  in  the  process  of  pick- 
ing out  imperfect  work,  &c. 

The  box-mechanism  pin-wheel  shaft  is  geared  to 


12 


reverse  gear  7,  by  putting  gear  18,  of  the  same  size  as 
gear  7,  and  fast  upon  the  end  of  pin-wheel  shaft  19, 
in  mesh  with  gear  7.  Shaft  19  projects  for  some  dis- 
tance beyond  the  harness-pattern  barrel  1  (See  Fig.  1). 
Near  the  opposite  end  of  the  shaft  19  from  gear  18  is 
mounted  a  pin-wheel  20,  free  to  slide  upon  the  shaft, 
hut  compelled  to  rotate  in  unison  with  it  by  means  of 
the  feather  21,  set  in  the  shaft.  Pin-wheel  20,  is  fitted 
to  engage  a  star-wheel  22,  integral  with  sleeve  23,  which 
is  mounted  loosely  upon  a  continuation  of  harness- 
indicator  shaft  3,  and  which  is  confined  laterally  on  the 
shaft  by  a  shoulder  24  and  a  collar  25,  fastened  on  the 
end  of  the  shaft  3  (See  Fig.  1).  Fast  upon  the  end  of 
sleeve  23,  which  adjoins  shoulder  24,  is  the  main  pat- 
tern-barrel 26,  of  the  box-mechanism,  provided  with 
notched  flanges  26'  to  carry  indicators,  made  up  of 
chain  bars  60,  rolls  61,  and  links  (not  shown)  similar 
to  those  employed  in  the  harness-pattern  indicator, 
and  of  ordinary  construction.  Pivoted  on  a  stud  27, 
above  and  at  the  rear  of  main  box  pattern-barrel  26, 

is  a  lever  28,  provided  with 
a  foot  29,  adapted  to  be 
engaged  by  the  main  pat- 
tern-indicators. A  link  31 
connects  the  outer  end  of 
lever  28  with  arm  30  of  a 
bell-crank  lever  30,  32,  pi- 
voted on  a  stud  63,  below 
shaft  19.  Arm  32  of  the 
bell-crank  lever  30,  32,  is 
forked  about  the  hub  33  of 
a  pin-wheel  34,  which  is 
mounted  upon  shaft  19, 
similarly  to  pin-wheel  20. 
Resting  in  the  fork  of  arm 
32  is  yoke  35,  which  is 
fitted  loosely  in  the  groove 
36  in  the  pin-wheel  hub  33. 
Pin-wheel  34  is  fitted  to  en- 
gage a  star-wheel  37,  in- 
tegral with  a  sleeve  38,  which  is  mounted  loosely  upon 
sleeve  23,  and  which  is  confined  laterally  by  flange  39 
integral  with  sleeve  23  and  a  collar  40  fastened  upon 
said  sleeve.  Sleeve  38  carries  the  notched  flanges  41' 
of  the  auxiliary  pattern-barrel  41  of  the  box  mechan- 
ism, over  which,  on  stud  27,  is  pivoted  a  lever  42,  simi- 
lar to  lever  28,  and  provided  with  a  foot  43,  adapted 
to  be  engaged  by  auxiliary  pattern-indicators.  A  link 
44  connects  the  outer  end  of  lever  42  with  arm  45  of  a 
bell-crank  lever  45,  46,  pivoted  on  a  stud  51  below 
shaft  19.  Arm  46  of  the  bell-crank  lever  45,  46,  is 
forked  about  the  hub  47  of  pin-wheel  20,  and  carries  a 
yoke  48,  fitted  loosely  in  the  groove  49  in  hub  47.  A 
spring  50  is  coiled  about  the  shank  of  stud  51,  one  end 
of  which  is  fast  in  a  collar  52,  fastened  by  a  set-screw 
53  to  stud  51,  and  the  other  end  of  which  engages  arm 
46  of  the  bell-crank  lever  45,  46.  The  spring  50  is  of 
sufficient  strength,  and  its  tension  is  so  adjusted,  by 
turning  collar  52  on  the  stud  51,  that  when  no  indicator 
roll  is  under  the  foot  43,  the  spring  50  slides  the  pin- 
wheel  20  on  shaft  19,  into  engagement  with  star-wheel 
22.  Pin-wheel  34  is  slid  on  shaft  19  out  of  engagement 
with  its  star-wheel  37  by  a  similar  spring  coiled  on  the 
stud  63  of  bell-crank  lever  30,  32,  when  no  indicator- 
roll  is  under  foot  29  of  lever  28.  The  arms  of  the  bell- 
crank-levers  and  the  levers  28  and  42  are  so  propor- 
tioned to  the  distance  through  which  the  levers  are 
moved,  by  lifting  the  feet  29  and  43  from  resting  on  a 
bar  to  resting  on  a  roll,  that  such  motion  slides  the 
pin-wheels  on  their  driving-shaft  the  right  distance  to 
be  properly  in  or  out  of  engagement  with  their  star- 
wheels. 

The  indicators  for  the  box-shifting  mechanism  are 
placed  on  the  same  bars  with  the  pin-wheel  indicators 
on  the  main  pattern-barrel  of  the  box-mechanism,  and 
the  levers  53  for  transmitting  the  indications  to  the 


box-shifting  mechanism  are  pivoted  on  the  same  stud 
27  with  lever  28.  Depending  from  levers  53  are  links 
54  (shown  broken  off),  with  which  the  levers  53  are 
connected  to  the  box-shifting  mechanism.  (Not 
shown  and  of  ordinary  construction.) 

The   pin-wheels   20   and   34   are        jq  q' 
so  set  on  the  feather  21,  that  the  r 
auxiliary    pin-wheel    34    has    com-  *r/~\, 
pleted  the  action  on  its  star-wheel  /~~|  I  I  -TQ 

37,  when  pin-wheel  20,  begins  to        S  '-**§}J 
act  on  its  star-wheel  22,  both  ac- 
tions occupying  something  less  than 
a  complete  revolution  of  pin-wheel        FlO.  £ , 
shaft  19.  «* 

The  pin-wheels  and  star-wheels  are  so  proportioned 
that  one  movement  thereof  turns  the  pattern-barrels 
through  the  angular  space  between  two  contiguous 
notches. 

The  operation  of  the  box-pattern  mechanism  is  as  fol- 
lows: Figs.  1  and  2  represent  the  main  pattern-barrel 
26  as  in  engagement  to  be  actuated  and  the  auxiliary 
pattern  barrel  41  as  at  rest.  Suppose  the  action  of 
pin-wheel  20,  which  is  just  beginning,  brings  up  a  pat- 
tern-bar which  it  is  desired  to  repeat.  A  roll  on  the 
bar  lifts  lever  28,  which,  through  link  31  and  bell-crank 
lever  30,  32  slides  pin-wheel  34  into  engagement  with 
its  star-wheel  37.  On  the  succeeding  revolution  star- 
wheel  37  and  the  auxiliary  pattern-barrel  41  will  be 
turned  one  space,  bringing  a  roll  under  lever  42^ 
which,  through  link  44  and  bell-crank  lever  45,  46, 
slides  pin-wheel  20  out  of  engagement  with  its  star- 
wheel  22,  so  that  the  revolution  is  completed  without 
moving  the  main  pattern-barrel  26.  The  main  pattern- 
barrel  26  will  continue  to  rest  and  the  auxiliary  pat- 
tern-barrel to  run  as  long  as  each  succeeding  action  of 
the  auxiliary  pattern-surface  pin-wheel  34  brings  up 
a  roll  under  lever  42.  The  desired  number  of  rests 
having  been  reached,  an  empty  bar  is  presented  under 
lever  42,  which  allows  spring  50  to  slide  the  pin-wheel 
20  into  engagement  with  its  star-wheel  22  in  season  to 
turn  the  main  pattern-barrel  26  on  the  same  revolution, 
when  the  parts  are  returned  to  the  position  shown  in 
the  drawings,  and  the  operation  may  be  repeated. 

When  it  is  desired  to  turn  the  harness-pattern  in- 
dicators backward  in  the  operation  of  picking  out  im- 
perfect work  or  of  finding  the  pick,  the  reverse  key  8 
is  pulled  out,  reversing  the  motion  of  gear  4  on 
the  harness-pattern  shaft  3,  and  also  that  of  gear  18 
and  pin-wheel  shaft  19,  so  that  the  box-mechanism 
indicators,  with  no  attention  whatsoever  from  the 
operator,  are  always  kept  in  time  with  the  harness- 
indicators,  no  matter  which  way  or  for  how  many  picks 
the  harness-pattern  mechanism  is  turned. 

If  the  box-pattern  mechanism  were  driven  independ- 
ently of  the  harness-pattern  mechanism,  and  it  were 
left  to  the  operator  to  keep  count  of  the  number  of 
pattern-bars  reversed,  or  even  to  reverse  independently 
the  box-pattern  mechanism  whenever  the  harness-pat- 
tern mechanism  was  reversed,  the  operator  would 
easily  get  confused  and  get  the  two  pattern-mechan- 


"22 

Fig.  6.  *J 

isms  out  of  time  with  each  other,  thus  putting  the 
wrong  filling  in  the  shed. 

Instead  of  connecting-gears  18  and  7  as  shown  in 
Fig.  3,  gears  18  and  4  could  be  connected  with  equal 
facility;  but  sometimes  on  said  loom  the  gear  4  is 
replaced  with  a  star-wheel  similar  to  star-wheels  20 
and  34,  and  its  pin-wheel  is  driven  by  a  set  of  reverse 
gears.    (Crompton  and  Knoiclcs  Loom  Works.) 


13 


ATTACHMENT  TO  THE  SHEDDING  MECHAN- 
ISM OF  THE  KNOWXES  LOOM. 

The  object  of  this  motion  is  to  keep  the  vibrator 
connector  (after  the  cylinder  has  raised  the  harness) 
from  falling  back. 

The  accompanying  illustration  is  a  sectional  view  of 
this  motion,  taken  between  and  parallel  to  the  arches 
or  elevated  part  of  the  loom  frame;  it  also  shows  the 
jack  and  vibrator  connected,  which  is  used  on  all  their 
open  shed  looms.  The  method  of  operation  of  this 
motion  will  be  best  explained  by  quoting  numerals  oi 
references  of  the  various  parts  shown  in  the  accom- 
panying illustration,  and  of  which  I,  represents  a  por- 
tion of  the  arch  of  the  loom  frame,  and  2,  the  head 
frame.  3,  is  a  harness  lever,  pivoted  on  the  shaft  4, 
which  extends  across  the  arch  space  and  has  a  bearing 
in  each  arch.  5  and  6,  are  the  cylinder  gears;  7,  the 
vibrator-gear;  8,  the  vibrator-lever;  9,  the  connector; 


and  10,  the  pattern-chain.  11,  is  a  rod  which  extends 
across  the  arch-space,  and  on  which  is  pivoted  an  inde- 
pendent follower  12,  for  each  vibrator-gear  connector 
9,  in  the  loom.  13,  is  an  arm  extending  above  the  arch 
and  carrying  across  the  arch-space  a  plate  14,  through 
which  passes  freely  the  rods  15,  the  heads  16,  of  which, 
rest  in  sockets  on  the  followers.  Confined  between 
the  plate  14,  and  the  heads  of  the  rods  16,  are  coiled 
springs  17,  which  act  to  press  the  followers  downward 
upon  the  connectors  9. 

The  operation  is  as  follows:  The  harness-levers  and 
the  box-motion  levers  are  reciprocated  by  the  partial 
revolution  of  the  vibrator-gear  7,  a  roll  on  the  pattern- 
chain  lifting  the  vibrator-gear  into  engagement  with 
the  top  cylinder-gear  5,  throwing  the  vertical  arm  of 
the  harness-lever  outward,  and  a  tube  on  the  pattern- 
chain  letting  the  vibrator-gear  into  engagement  with 
the  lower  cylinder-gear  6,  and  throwing  the  harness- 
lever  in  the  opposite  direction. 

Our  illustration  represents  the  lower  cylinder-gear 
just  beginning  to  act  on  the  vibrator-gear.  As  the 
vibrator-gear  revolves,  the  end  of  connector  9,  is  lifted 
by  the  crank-pin  18,  a  distance  equal  to  the  radius  of 
the  crank-pin  path  described  about  the  centre  19,  and 
at  the  same  time  the  connector  is  pushed  to  the  left. 
The  coil-spring  17,  by  its  compression  allows  the  rod 
15,  to  rise  with  the  follower  and  connector,  and  when 
the  crank-pin  18,  passes  the  centre  and  the  end  of  con- 
nector 9  drops,  the  force  of  the  spring  keeps  the  fol- 
lower pressing  on  the  connector.  The  top  of  con- 
nector 9,  is  rounded,  and  the  saddle  20,  of  the  follower 
is  correspondingly  hollowed  to  help  keep  these  parts 
in  alignment. 

The  head  of  the  spring-rod  is  made  to  fit  a  socket  in 


the  follower,  to  facilitate  the  insertion  or  removal  of 
the  rod  and  springs  for  the  purpose  of  renewing  worn- 
out  springs,  or  for  other  reasons. 

When  it  is  desired  to  take  out  the  vibrator-lever 
gear  and  connector  from  the  loom,  it  is  necessary  to 
hold  the  follower  up  out  of  contact  with  the  connector. 
To  accomplish  this,  the  lod  21,  is  placed  in  ears  on  the 
arches  and  extended  across  the  arch-space,  on  which 
are  pivoted  individual  latches  22,  for  each  follower, 
which  may  be  raised  into  the  position  shown  in  dotted 
lines  23,  where,  in  conjunction  with  notches  24,  in  the 
face  of  the  followers,  the  followers  may  be  held  up  out 
of  the  way,  as  desired.  It  is  also  sometimes  desirable 
to  run  the  loom  with  part  of  the  vibrators  out,  in  which 
case  the  latch  prevents  the  follower  from  dropping 
down  and  letting  the  spring  and  rod  fall  from  their 
positions,  or  avoiding  the  necessity  of  removing  the 
followers  to  prevent  such  derangement.  {Vrompton 
ami  Knowles  Lduiii  Works.) 


BACK  VIEW  OF  THE  KNOWLES  SHEDDING 
MECHANISM  DRIVEN  FROM  BOT- 
TOM SHAFT. 

This  accompanying  illustration  shows  bottom  shaft 
drive  for  head  motion,  which  is  generally  used  on  the 


c 


Knowles  heavy  worsted  loom.  A  description  of  the 
mechanism  is  best  given  by  quoting  letters  of  refer- 
ences, and  of  which  «,  shows  the  long  driving  gears, 


14 


commonly  called  the  cylinder  gear.  They  are  chilled 
in  casting,  and  are  very  hard;  they  are  made  with  the 
part  that  operates  the  harness  adjustable,  so  that  the 
harness  and  box  may  be  made  to  operate  at  the  same 
time,  or  the  harness  a  little  in  advance  of  the  box,  in 
order  to  change  the  shed  upon  the  filling,  before  beat- 
ing up.  They  will  work  perfectly  at  any  point  at  or 
between  the  extremes  of  the  slot  in  the  shaft.  When- 
ever the  section  of  the  top  cylinder  is  changed,  it  is  not 
necessary  to  make  the  same  change  with  the  bottom 
cylinder;  in  fact,  for  some  fabrics  it  is  necessary  to  set 
the  top  and  bottom  cylinders  at  different  points. 

&,  indicates  the  box  section  of  the  cylinder  gear;  C, 
the  bevel  gear  on  the  top  cylinder;  dt  the  bevel  gear 
which  drives  the  top  cylinder;  e,  the  cap  which  holds 
the  upright  shaft  in  place;  f,  the  bevel  gear  which 
drives  the  bottom  cylinder;  (J,  the  bevel  gear  on  the 
bottom  cylinder;  h,  the  upright  shaft  which  transmits 
motion  from  the  bottom  shaft  to  the  head  motion;  i,  is 
the  chain  rack  bolted  on  with  i';  j,  are  the  jacks  that 
lift  the  harness;  k,  is  the  spring  lever  to  hold  the  chain 
in  position  on  the  cylinder  shaft  I;  mt  indicates  the 
bearing  in  which  shaft  I,  works  in;  w,  is  a  set  screw  to 
hold  bearing  mt  in  place;  o,  is  a  set  screw  to  raise  or 
lower  cylinder  shaft  I;  P,  is  a  lock  lever  to  hold  vibrat- 
ors in  place;  Q,  is  a  hand  lever  with  which  to  lock  or 
unlock  the  clutch  gear  v,  on  bottom  of  upright  shaft; 
T,  is  a  connector  connecting  with  s,  a  rocking  lever 
connecting  with  lever  f,  connecting  with  pin  w,  with 
which  the  clutch  is  locked  or  unlocked;  w,  is  a  driving 
gear  to  drive  cluth  gear  V;  cr,  is  an  intermediate  gear 
which  is  driven  from  bottom  shaft;  V,  is  the  stand  that 
holds  the  intermediate  shaft,  and  z,  is  the  loom  side. 
(Crompton  and  Knowles  Loom  Works.) 


THE  KNOWLES  SELVAGE  MOTION. 

This  selvage  motion  does  the  same  work  that  is 
required  of  a  skeleton  harness.  It  is  operated  from  the 
fifth  vibrator  in  the  box  section,  which  was  formerly 
used  for  the  sliding  pick. 


a,  and  6,  indicate  the  top  and  bottom  cylinder;  c,  the 
vibrator  gear;  d,  the  connector;  e,  a  spring  drop 
weight;  0,  is  the  angle  lever  which  connects  with  lever 
h;  connector  i,  which  in  turn  connects  with  crank  j, 
which  operates  the  selvage  shaft  fc;  I,  shows  the  drum 
around  which  listing  strap  wi, is  carried,  and  nt  indicates 
the  lower  strip  of  the  selvage  heddle  strap.  {Crompton 
and  Knowles  Loom  Works.) 


SHEDDING  MECHANISM  FOR  FABRICS  PRO- 
DUCED BY  TWO  WEAVES. 

The  object  of  the  new  device  is  to  provide  an  auto- 
matic two-weave  attachment  of  simple  construction 
and  operation,  and  which  is  adapted  to  be  combined 
with  the  indicator-levers  of  a  dobby  mechanism  to 
automatically  move  one-half  of  said  levers  out  of  en- 
gagement with  their  pattern-surfaces,  so  that  they  will 
become  inoperative,  and  at  the  same  time  allow  the 
other  indicator-levers  to  engage  their  pattern-surfaces 
and  become  operative. 

In  connection  with  this  two-weave  attachment,  two 
sets  of  indicator-levers  are  used  and  each  indicator- 
lever  is  connected  by  a  lifting-wire  with  an  upper  and 
lower  hook-latch,  and  a  single  lifting-wire  serves  for 
two  levers,  so  that  if  a  lever  of  one  set  is  inoperative 
to  act  on  the  hook-latches  the  lever  of  the  other  set  is 
operative.  Double-index  pattern-bars,  or  bars  with 
two  sets  of  pins  or  pattern-surfaces  thereon  are  used, 
one  set  for  one  set  of  indicator-levers  and  the  other  set 
for  the  other  set  of  indicator-levers. 

The  new  mechanism  is  intended  to  be  used  on  looms 
for  weaving  any  class  of  goods  requiring  two  weaves, 
as  dress-goods,  blankets,  &c,  in  which  there  are  two 
different  weaves. 


Fig.  i  is  a  side  elevation  of  a  portion  of  the  dobby- 
frame,  looking  in  the  direction  of  arrow  a  Fig.  3, 
showing  two  indicator-levers,  a  lower  hook-latch,  the 
lower  end  of  the  lifting-wire,  the  end  of  a  pattern- 
cylinder,  a  two-index  pattern  bar,  and  the  double-weave 
attachment  combined  therewith.  Fig.  2  is  a  section 
taken  at  a  point  indicated  by  line  2-2  Fig.  3,  looking 
in  the  direction  of  arrow  a,  same  figure.  The  lifting- 
wire  and  hook-latch  shown  in  Figs.  1  and  3  are  not 
shown  in  this  figure.  Fig.  3  is  a  plan  view  of  the  parts 
shown  in  Fig.  1,  and  also  shows  the  pattern-surface, 
which  operates  the  indicator-lever  29.  Fig.  4  shows  a 
section  of  the  pattern-cylinder,  two  indicator-levers,  a 
jack-lever,  an  upper  and  lower  hook-latch,  and  a  lift- 
ing-wire, and  in  section  the  upper  and  lower  sliding 
lifting-bar  and  the  stop  bars;  and  Fig.  5  is  a  side 
view  of  the  lifting-wire,  looking  in  the  direction  of 
arrow  b,  Fig.  4. 

Numerals  of  references  indicate  thus:  1,  is  a  portion 
of  one  of  the  upright  frames  supporting  the  dobby. 

2,  indicates  the  pattern-cylinder,  which  is  fast  on  shaft 

3.  In  the  longitudinal  grooves  or  recesses  of  the 
pattern-cylinder  extend  the  pattern-chain  bars,  only  one 
of  which,  4.  is  shown  in  the  drawings. 

On  the  pattern-bar  4,  are  two  sets  of  pins  5  and  6, 
arranged  in  two  alternate  rows  (See  Fig  3).  Extend- 
ing over  the  pattern-cylinder  2,  are  two  sets  of  indi- 
cator-levers 7  and  8.    One  set  7,  is  acted  on  by  the 


15 


pins  5  and  the  other  set  8,  by  the  pins  6,  in  the  pattern- 
chain  bars  4.  The  indicator-levers  are  loosely 
mounted  on  a  shaft  9,  secured  in  the  frames,  and  at 
their  outer  ends,  when  in  lowered  position,  rest  on 
the  bar  10,  which  has  pins  II,  extending  up  therefrom 
between  the  levers  7  and  8,  to  guide  and  hold  them  in 
position. 

Each  one  of  the  set  of  levers  7,  is  adapted  to  be  en- 
gaged and  raised  by  its  set  of  pins  5,  in  case  said  levers 
are  in  their  lowered  position,  while  each  one  of  the  set 
of  levers  8  is  adapted  to  be  engaged  and  raised  by  its 
set  of  pins  6,  in  case  said  levers  are  in  their  lower 
position,  at  each  partial  revolution  or  movement  of 
the  pattern-chain. 

The  inner  ends  8'  of  the  indicator-lever  8  extend 
beyond  their  supporting-shaft  9,  and  in  a  substantially 
horizontal  plane,  while  the  inner  end  7'  of  the  levers  7 
extend  upwardly  above  the  ends  8'  of  the  levers  8,  as 
shown  in  the  drawings.  The  inner  ends  of  said  levers 
7  and  8  extend  through  slots  in  the  grate  9'. 

Arranged  over  the  two  sets  of  levers  7  and  8  are  an 
upper  and  lower  set  of  hook-latches  12  and  13,  which 
hook  over  and  are  operated  by  the  upper  and  lower 
slide-bars  14  (See  Fig.  4).  There  is  an  upper  latch 
12,  and  a  lower  latch  13,  for  each  pair  of  levers  7  and  8, 
and  each  one  of  the  pair  of  levers  is  connected  with 
the  upper  latch  12,  and  lower  latch  13,  by  a  lifting- 


wire  15,  which  is  made  of  the  shape  shown  in  Figs.  4 
and  5.  The  lower  double  end)  15',  rests  on  the  top  of 
the  inner  end  of  the  lever  8,  while  the  side  projecting 
end  15",  rests  on  the  top  of  the  inner  end  of  the  lever  7 
(See  Fig.  4).  The  side  projecting  end  15",  also  extends 
under  and  is  adapted  to  lift  the  lower  latch  13.  The 
upper  end  of  the  lifting-wire  15,  extends  under  and 
engages  the  upper  latch  12  to  lift  the  same  when  de- 
sired. It  will  thus  be  seen  that  either  lever  7  and  8,  of 
the  two  sets  of  levers,  when  it  is  engaged  by  its 
pattern-pins,  will  lower  both  the  upper  latch  12,  and 
lower  latch  13,  simultaneously. 

The  latches  12  and  13,  are  pivoted  at  their  inner  ends 
on  the  connector  16,  centrally  pivoted  on  the  harness- 
lever,  (not  shown)  connected  with  the  harness-frame, 
and  adapted  to  engage  at  its  upper  end  the  stop-bar  17, 
and  at  its  lower  end  the  stop-bar  18. 

The  combination  of  the  two-weave  attachment  with 
the  dobby  mechanism  is  thus:  Extending  under  the 
outer  ends  of  the  two  sets  of  levers  7  and  8.  outside 
of  the  pattern-cylinder  2,  and  having  projecting  ends 
or  journals  supported  in  bearings  in  the  side 
frames,  is  a  rocking  plate  19,  the  outer  edge  19',  of 
which  is  adapted  to  engage  downward  projections  20, 
on  the  lower  edge  and  near  the  outer  end  of  the  levers 
7,  so  that  when  the  plate  19.  is  rocked  in  one  direction 
to  raise  the  outer  edge  19'  thereof,  all  the  levers  7,  will 


be  raised  at  their  outer  ends  and  held  up,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  2,  so  that  the  pins  5,  on  the  pattern-bars  4,  can  pass 
under  the  levers  7,  without  moving  said  levers.  When 
the  plate  19,  is  rocked  in  the  opposite  direction  to  raise 
the  inner  edge  19",  said  edge  will  engage  downward 
projections  21,  on  the  levers  8,  and  raise  said  levers 
(See  dotted  lines,  Fig.  2)  and  hold  them  out  of  engage- 
ment with  the  pins  6,  on  the  pattern-bar  4,  as  before 
described  in  connection  with  the  levers  7.  At  the  same 
time  the  set  of  levers  7,  are  allowed  to  drop  down  on  to 
the  pins  5,  on  the  pattern-bar  4,  as  the  pattern-cylinder 
2,  revolves.  It  will  thus  be  seen  that  as  the  plate  19,  is 
rocked  in  one  direction  one  set  of  indicator-levers,  as 
7,  is  raised  and  becomes  inoperative  and  the  other  set, 
as  8,  is  lowered  and  becomes  operative.  As  the  two 
patterns  to  be  woven  are  on  the  same  bar  and  there  are 
two  indicator-levers  for  each  upper  and  lower  hook- 
latch,  either  indicator-lever  may  be  made  to  govern  the 
operation  of  the  hook-latches  through  the  lifting-wire 
15,  as  desired,  by  rocking  the  plate  19,  in  one  direction 
or  the  other,  and  in  this  way  we  can  change  from  one 
weave  to  the  other. 

The  lifting-wires  15,  are  made  in  such  a  manner  that 
the  dropping  of  the  inner  ends  of  either  set  of  levers 
by  the  raising  of  the  outer  ends  by  the  plate  19,  does 
not  affect  the  engagement  of  said  lifting-wires  15,  with 
the  other  set  of  levers  or  their  operation  by  said  levers. 

To  communicate  a  rocking  motion  to  the  plate  19, 
at  the  desired  time  to  change  the  weave,  a  crank-arm 
22,  is  connected  fast  on  the  end  of  the  journal  23,  on 
one  end  of  the  plate  19,  through  a  connector-rod  24, 
with  an  angle-lever  25,  pivoted  on  a  stud  26,  at  the 
upper  end  of  the  bracket  or  arm  27.  The  other  arm  of 
said  angle-lever  25,  is  connected  through  link  28,  with 
the  inner  end  of  an  indicator-lever  29,  which  is  rigidly 
attached  at  its  inner  end  to  the  link  28,  to  cause  the 
angle-lever  25,  to  have  a  rocking  motion  and  through 
connector  24,  communicate  a  rocking  motion  to  the 
plate  ig. 

The  indicator-lever  29  extends  over  a  pattern-surface 
on  the  pattern-cylinder  31,  of  ordinary  construction 


no  1 
Z 


and  operation,  and  is  pivotally  supported  at  its  outer 
end  on  the  rod  32.  As  the  pattern-cylinder  31  revolves 
and  a  roll  33,  thereon  comes  under  the  lever  29,  said 
lever  is  raised,  and  through  intermediate  connections 
the  plate  19,  is  operated. 


16 


A  coiled  spring  30,  around  the  journal  23,  of  the 
plate  19,  (See  Fig.  3)  is  employed  to  move  the  angle- 
lever  25,  over  to  the  left,  as  shown  in  Fig.  I,  when  a 
tube  comes  under  the  indicator-lever  29. 

The  pattern-surface,  which  controls  the  movement 
of  the  indicator-lever  29,  is  so  built  that  at  the  proper 
time,  when  it  is  desired  to  change  the  weave,  the  lever 

29,  will  be  raised  by  a  roll  33,  coming  under  it.  The 
plate  19,  will  then,  through  intermediate  connections, 
be  automatically  rocked  and  raised  at  its  inner  edge 
to  raise  one  set  of  levers,  as  8,  at  their  outer  ends,  (See 
dotted  lines,  Fig.  2)  and  hold  them  out  of  engagement 
with  the  pins  on  the  pattern-bars.  At  the  same  time 
the  other  set  of  levers,  as  7,  will  be  dropped  at  their 
outer  ends  on  to  the  pins  on  the  pattern-bars  and 
through  said  levers  and  connections  to  the  harnesses 
the  desired  shed  will  be  made. 

When  a  tube  comes  under  the  lever  29,  the  spring 

30,  will  move  the  angle-lever  25,  and  lower  the  lever 
29,  and  a  reverse  motion  will  be  communicated  to 
the  plate  19,  to  raise  the  outer  edge  thereof  and  raise 
the  outer  ends  of  the  other  set  of  levers,  as  7,  and  at 
the  same  time  lower  the  outer  ends  of  the  levers  8,  to 
change  the  weave  and  allow  the  levers  8,  to  operate 


to  make  the  required  shed  for  the  other  weave,  and  this 
operation  is  repeated  as  desired.  (Crompton  and 
Knoirles  Loom  Works.) 


DEVICE  FOR  OPEN  SHED  FANCY  LOOMS 
FOR  EVENING  THE  HARNESSES 

when  a  warp-thread  breaks  or  end  requires  to  be  tied 
in,  so  as  to  lay  the  warp  side  by  side  and  enable  the 
operative  to  piece  up  the  warp  or  tie  in  the  ends  re- 
quired. 

In  such  looms  as  heretofore  constructed  the  evener- 
slide  had  to  be  drawn  out  by  hand  after  the  lay  was 
brought  into  the  proper  position,  and  then  the  har- 
nesses had  to  be  brought  together  by  hand.  After 
the  ends  were  tied  in,  the  parts  had  to  be  returned  to 
their  original  positions  by  hand  before  the  loom  was 
ready  to  start. 

The  object  of  the  improvement  is  to  perform  all 
these  operations  automatically,  through  setting  in 
motion  a  simple  apparatus  connected  with  a  cord  ex- 


tending practically  around  the  loom,  by  pulling  the 
cord. 

For  a  clear  understanding  of  the  improved  device 
the  accompanying  three  illustrations  are  given,  and 
of  which  Fig.  1  is  a  skeleton  view  of  parts  of  an  open- 
shed  fancy  loom,  showing  the  improvement  connected 
with  co-operating  parts.  Fig.  2  is  a  perspective  view 
of  the  levers  connecting  with  the  crank-shaft  of  the 
lay  of  the  loom.  Fig.  3  is  a  side  view  of  a  modified 
form  of  the  device. 

A,  indicates  the  lay  of  an  open-shed  fancy  loom;  B, 
the  connecting-rod  connecting  the  lay  with  the  crank 
of  the  shaft  C.  The  shipper  of  the  stop-lever  D,  is 
secured  to  the  shipper  or  stop-shaft  E,  and  supported 
in  the  raised  frame  F,  is  the  evener-slide  T. 

These  parts  are  the  essential  parts  of  every  open- 
shed  fancy  loom,  and  as  the  present  improvement 
concerns  only  these  parts,  the  other  parts  of  the  loom 
are  omitted,  so  as  to  avoid  confusion. 

The  preferred  means  for  accomplishing  the  pre- 
viously stated  object  consist  in  the  lever  0,  loosely 
mounted  on  the  shipper-shaft  E,  close  to  the  shipper- 
lever  D.  The  upper  projection  of  the  lever  9,  is  pro- 
vided with  the  pin  0' ,  bearing  on  the  shipper-lever  D. 
To  the  lower  end  of  the  lever  9,  is  pivotally  connected 
the  arm  ht  the  other  end  of  this  arm  h,  being  pro- 
vided with  the  shoulder  The  arm  h,  is  supported 
in  the  slotted  bracket  i,  secured  to  the  end  frame 
of  the  loom.  The  bracket  fc,  is  secured  to  the  arm  h, 
and  near  this  is  the  eye  I,  to  which  the  cord  m,  is 


fastened.  This  cord  m,  is  carried  over  guides  along 
the  end  around  part  or  the  whole  of  the  loom,  the 
end  of  the  cord  being  secured  to  any  fixed  place  on 


17 


the  loom,  and  at  such  a  height  that  it  does  not  in- 
terfere with  the  work  of  the  operative  or  the  loom 
and  is  within  easy  reach  of  the  operative. 

On  the  crank-shaft  C,  the  wiper-cam  «,  is  secured 
so  as  to  rotate  with  the  crank-shaft.  The  shoulder  n' 
of  the  wiper-cam  »,  is  designed  to  engage  with  the 
shoulder  ft',  on  the  end  of  the  arm  ft,  when  this  arm 
is  raised.  Close  to  the  cam  »,  and  also  secured  to 
the  crank-shaft  C,  is  the  cam  o,  provided  with  the 
shoulders  o'  and  o".  The  evencr-slide  T,  is  provided 
with  the  slotted  head  P.  The  lever  <],  pivoted  to  the 
bracket  f,  secured  to  the  frame  F,  is  provided  at  its 
upper  end  with  a  pin  s,  which  extends  through  the 
slot  in  the  head  P,  on  the  evener-slide  T.  To  the 
lower  part  of  the  lever  Q,  is  connected  pivotally  the 
arm  ?*,  which  extends  through  the  slot  in  the  bracket 
t,  and  is  provided  at  its 
free  end  with  two  shoulders 
w',  and  u".  To  the  arm  «, 
on  its  under  side,  is  secured 
the  bracket  v. 

In  the  normal  condition, 
when  the  loom  is  running 
the  arm  ft,  rests  in  the  slott- 
ed bracket  £,  and  supports, 
by  means  of  the  brackets 
fc,  and  V,  the  arm  »,  in  the 

position  shown  in  Fig.  2.  The  cams  n,  and  o,  revolve 
without  interfering  with  the  arms  ft,  and  «.  When, 
now,  to  tie  in  ends  or  piece  the  warp  the  loom  re- 
quires to  be  stopped  and  the  warp  evened,  the  op- 
erative pulls  on  the  cord  m,  and  raises  the  arm  ft,  the 
shoulder  of  the  cam  comes  in  contact  with  the 
shoulder  ft',  and  pushes  the  arm  ft,  and  the  lower  end 
of  the  lever  0,  forward,  and  the  pin  g',  operates  the  ship- 
per-lever D,  to  stop  the  loom.  In  the  movement  of 
the  arm  ft,  the  bracket  fc,  passes  beyond  the  bracket  v, 
the  arm  u,  descends,  the  shoulder  0',  of  the  cam  0, 
encounters  the  shoulder  u',  of  the  arm  »,  and  draws 
this  arm  rearward  and  with  it  the  lower  end  of  the 
lever  Q,  the  upper  end  of  which  draws  the  evener-slide 
sidewise,  and  as  it  is  supported  on  pins  entering  diag- 
onal slots,  it  raises  the  evener-slide  and  operates  the 
harnesses  to  even  the  warp  in  the  usual  manner,  and 
by  the  old  well-known  means. 

After  the  piecing  is  completed  the  lay  A.  is  pushed 
back,  thus  partly  rotating  the  crank-shaft  C,  and  cam 
0,  the  shoulder  0"  comes  in  contact  with  the  shoulder 
w"  and  pushes  the  arm  w,  with  the  lower  end  of  the 
lever  Q,  forward  and  the  evener-slide  T,  inward  and 
downward  into  the  original  position.  The  shipper- 
lever  D,  is  now  drawn  forward  to  start  the  loom,  and, 
by  coming  in  contact  with  the  pin  ,<7',the  lever  0,  pushes 
the  arm  ft,  backward,  the  bracket  ft,  coming  in  contact 
with  the  bracket  vt  lifts  it  and  the  arm  w,  and  supports 
the  same  in  the  position  shown  in  Fig.  2.  By  this 
arrangement  the  pull  on  the  cord  m,  sets  the  mechan- 
ism in  operation  to  stop  the  loom  and  even  the  har- 
nesses, and  a  push  on  the  lay  puts  the  loom  in  condi- 
tion to  be  started  by  the  shipper-lever. 

In  the  modified  form  shown  in  Fig.  3,  the  arm  ft,  is 
connected  by  the  lever  4.  with  the  arm  m3,  which  is 
pivoted  to  the  lever  <1.  The  lever  4,  is  pivoted  in  the 
slot  of  the  bracket  *',  and  only  the  cam  is  secured 
to  the  crank-shaft  C.  In  this  modified  form  the  cam 
«,  will  have  to  be  accurately  adjusted  so  that  the  ship- 
per motion  to  stop  the  loom  and  the  movement  of  the 
evener-slide  will  correspond  with  the  movements  of 
the  harness-operating  mechanism. 

This  improvement  offers  two  good  points:  First,  it 
is  not  necessary  for  the  weaver  to  go  to  the  side  of  the 
loom  to  stop  the  latter;  secondly,  it  enables  the  weaver 
to  operate  the  loom  without  uncoupling  the  head 
motion  from  the  other  parts  of  the  loom  and  raising 
the  harness  by  hand  when  tieing  up  threads  in  the 
warp.    (William  Cavanaugh,  Providence,  R.  I.) 


WICKS'  AND  ROY'S  SHEDDING  MECHANISM. 

This  device  is  shown  in  the  accompanying  illustra- 
tion representing  a  side  elevation  of  that  part  of  the 
framework  which  supports  the  shedding  mechanism, 
the  frame  next  the  beholder  having  been  removed. 

Letters  of  reference  indicae  thus:  A,  denotes  the 
framework,  and  B,  B,  two-barrel-gears  journaled  in 
the  framework  and  having  gear-teeth  upon  a  portion 
of  their  periphery,  said  barrel-gears  being  arranged  one 
above  and  the  other  below  a  gear  C,  carried  by  the  free 
end  of  a  lever  C,  pivoted  at  one  end  upon  a  rod  CJ,held 
by  the  frame  A,  so  the  angular  motion  of  the  lever  C, 
will  carry  the  gear  C,  up  or  down  and  bring  its  teeth 
into  engagement  with  the  teeth  upon  either  the  upper 
or  lower  of  the  barrel-gears  B,  B,  the  lever  C,  being 
actuated  by  a  pattern-chain  D.  The  barrel-gears  B,  B, 
rotate  in  opposite  directions  and  the  gear  wheel  C,  will 
be  rotated  one-half  a  revolution  in  one  direction  or  the 
other,  as  it  is  engaged  by  the  upper  or  lower  of  the 
barrel  gears  B,  B. 

The  gear  C,  carries  a  crank-pin  E,  to  which  a  link 
E',  is  pivoted,  having  its  opposite  end  provided  with  a 
hook  E2,  adapted  to  engage  a  stud  E3,  projecting  from 
the  side  of  a  swinging  lever  F,  pivoted  upon  a  rod  F', 
held  in  the  frame  A,  so  the  rotation  of  the  gear  C, 
back  and  forth  through  a  half-revolution  will  impart 
an  angular  movement  to  the  lever  F.  The  lever  F,  is 
connected  by  a  link  G,  with  a  pivoted  jack  H,  having 
arms  H',  and  H2,  provided  with  notches  H',  to  which 
the  harness-straps  are  attached.  A  short  distance  above 
the  studs  E4,  on  the  swinging  lever  F,  and  the  studs  I, 
on  the  jack  H,  are  projecting  lugs  which  extend  over 
the  hooked  ends  of  the  connecting-links,  so  as  to  pre- 
vent them  from  being  lifted  and  disengaged  from  the 
studs  during  the  operation  of  the  loom.  The  lever  F, 
and  arm  H',  of  the  jack  are  provided  with  a  series  of 


studs  E4,  and  I,  in  order  to  allow  the  hooked  link  G, 
to  be  shifted  from  one  to  the  other  of  the  studs  to 
vary  the  extent  of  the  angular  motion  of  the  jack,  so 
as  to  vary  the  motion  of  the  harness-frames  and  pro- 
duce what  is  known  as  an  "angular  shed"  in  the  warp. 

We  thus  describe  the  arrangement  of  a  single  lever, 
a  rotating  gear  with  a  single  jack,  and  intermediate 
lever  F,  which  comprise  the  actuating  mechanism  for 
a  single  harness-frame,  the  several  parts  being  dupli- 
cated for  each  harness-frame  contained  in  the  loom. 

The  novelty  of  the  new  device  consists  in  actuating 
the  jacks  indirectly  from  the  rotating  crank-wheels  C, 
with  the  use  of  an  intermediate  lever  F.  It  is  similar 
in  its  construction  to  the  Knowles  shedding  mechan- 
ism, with  the  addition  of  lever  F,  and  link  G.  (J-  F- 
I II  icks  and  B.  8.  Roy,  Worcester,  Mass.) 


18 


IMPROVED   CONSTRUCTION   OF  HARNESS- 
LEVERS  IN  CONNECTION  WITH  LIFTER 
AND  DEPRESSOR,  ETC.,  FOR  CROMP- 
TON  LOOMS. 

Prior  to  this,  the  jacks  have  been  provided  with 
guiding-surfaces  located  remote  from  their  fulcrum- 
points,  usually  more  remote  from  the  said  fulcrum- 
points  than  the  knives  or  one  of  them,  and  in  prac- 
tice much  difficulty  has  been  encountered  by  reason 
of  the  sticking  of  the  jacks  in  contact  with  the  said 
guiding-surfaces,  so  that  the  jacks  do  not  move  easily 
and  quickly,  nor  with  certainty,  thus  greatly  interfering 
with  the  proper  and  rapid  operation  of  the  loom.  To 
obviate  this  difficulty,  is  the  object  of  the  present  im- 
proved construction  of  the  device. 

Fig.  I,  in  section,  shows  a  sufficient  portion  of  a 
Crompton  loom,  having  the  improvements  added. 
Fig.  2  shows  part  of  a  lever  and  its  jack  as  resting  on 
a  projection  of  the  pattern-chain.  Letters  of  reference 
indicate  thus:  A,  the  loom  frame  having  a  rod  «,  on 
which  are  mounted  the  slotted  hubs  of  the  levers  B, 
having  a  latterly-extended  arm  bt  which  receives  the 
pivot  for  a  notched  jack  6a,  having  at  its  upper 
edge  a  notch  2  (See  Fig.  2),  to  be  engaged  by  a  de- 


pressor or  knife  c,  and  at  its  under  side  a  notch  3,  to 
be  engaged  by  an  elevator  or  knife  c't  said  depressor 
and  elevator  being  each  made  as  bars,  to  the  ends  of 
which  may  be  connected,  respectively,  sets  of  links  c1, 
attached  in  turn  in  an  adjustable  manner  to  arms  c4, 
c5,  of  a  rock-shaft  c°.  The  arms  6,  of  the  levers  have 
each  a  guide-surface  (shown  as  on  a  lug  8),  which  is 
arranged  intermediate  the  elevator  and  depressor  and 
the  fulcrum  of  the  jack,  and  is  of  sufficient  length  to 
overlap  the  jack  b2,  and  act  as  a  lateral  guide  there- 
fore to  prevent  twisting  or  lateral  movement  of  the 
jack  out  of  place,  the  edge  of  said  lug  also  serving  the 
purpose  of  an  evening-surface,  it  being  acted  upon  by 
the  outer  edge  of  the  depressor  c,  the  inner  edge  of 
the  elevator,  by  the  action  of  its  edge  against  one  edge 
of  the  lever  B,  serving  as  the  second  guiding  surface 
to  effect  the  evening  of  the  levers  and  of  the  shed,  Fig. 
I,  showing  the  said  depressor  and  elevator  acting  as 
cveners. 

In  order  that  the  lever  with  the  depressor  arranged 
above  the  jack  and  the  elevator  below  the  jack  at  the 
same  edge  of  the  lever  may  have  sufficient  range  of 
movement,  said  lever  is  shown  as  having  an  offset  B', 
to  thus  provide  a  recess  10,  in  which  the  depressor 
may  stand  when  the  shed  is  open. 


The  top  of  the  elevator  C,  (shown  in  Fig  1,)  is  made 
of  such  shape  as  to  come  in  contact  with  the  under  side 
of  such  jacks  as  are  engaged  with  the  depressor  c, 
such  contact  aiding  in  keeping  the  hooks  of  the  jacks 
in  engagement  with  the  edge  of  the  depressor  during 
the  movement  of  the  depressor  and  while  the  elevator 
is  being  moved  outwardly,  and  at  the  same  time  said 
lifter,  by  slightly  lifting  the  jacks  engaged  by  the  de- 
pressor, causes  them  to  bear  more  lightly  on  the  rolls 
or  protuberances  of  the  usual  pattern-surface,  and  con- 
sequently the  wear  of  the  jacks  and  of  the  pattern- 
surface  is  lessened. 

In  the  present  contraction  the  jack  is  made  much 
shorter  than  before,  and  the  shorter  the  jack  the  less 
its  weight,  said  jack  preferably  terminating  short  of 
the  lever. 

The  lug  8,  carried  by  one  arm  &,  acts  not  only  on  one 
side  of  the  hooked  jack  pivoted  upon  it,  but  also 
against  one  side  of  the  jack  of  the  lever  next  to  it. 

Each  of  the  notched  jacks  is  provided  (see  Fig.  2,) 
with  a  stop  pin  or  projection  12,  which  engages  a 
toe  13,  of  the  lug  8,  said  pin  preventing  the  jack  from 
dropping  down  horizontally  when  not  held  up  by  the 
pattern  chain  or  surface  p.  The  pin  12,  and  toe  13, 
aid  in  keeping  the  jack  in  place  on  the  lever  when  it  is 
removed  from  the  loom. 

The  arm  b,  has,  as  shown,  at  its  under  side  a  small 
pin  or  projection  which  acts  as  a  guide  for  a  spiral 
spring  15,  one  edge  of  which  acts  against  a  seat  16, 
on  the  jack  6a,  said  spring  acting  normally  to  keep  the 
jack  pressed  toward  the  pattern-surface. 

The  arms  6,  of  the  upright  levers  are  provided  at 
each  end  with  wearing-surfaces  4,  which  contact  the 
surface  of  one  arm  with  the  corresponding  surface  of 
an  adjacent  arm,  all  the  arms  being  kept  pressed 
together  by  bars,  adjustably  attached  to  a  part  of  the 
loom-frame  by  suitable  bolts  c10. 

By  reference  to  Fig.  1,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  jacks 
may  be  readily  withdrawn  from  engagement  with  both 
the  depressor  and  elevator,  and  the  harness-lever  re- 
moved from  the  loom,  for  since  both  the  elevator  and 
depressor  are  arranged  at  the  same  side  of  the  lever, 
and  since  they  are  not  confined  to  the  jacks  by  reason 
of  traveling  in  slots  in  the  jacks  or  otherwise,  but  so 
engage  the  jacks  that  the  latter  may  be  readily  discon- 
nected from  the  same  by  moving  said  elevator  and 
depressor  into  close  proximity  one  with  the  other,  the 
lever  may  have  a  lateral  movement  sufficient  to  with- 
draw the  end  of  jack  from  between  and  from  en- 
gagement with  the  elevator  and  depressor,  and  the  en- 
tire lever  and  its  attached  jack  thereafter  lifted 
bodily  from  position  without  necessary  removal  of 
either  the  elevator  or  depressor.  To  facilitate  this  re- 
moval, the  jack  may  be  sprung  to  one  side  far  enough 
to  disengage  its  stop-shoulder  from  the  hook  on  the 
lug  8,  which  will  thereby  permit  the  jack  to  drop  down 
into  a  vertical  position. 

The  gist  of  the  improvement  may  be  thus  stated 
shortly:  First,  a  spring  holds  the  finger  on  the  chain 
at  all  times;  second,  the  finger  is  made  shorter  than 
before  and  the  jack  can  be  removed  from  the  loom 
without  taking  the  depressor  knife  out,  a  feature  not 
possible  to  be  done  with  the  jacks  used  heretofore. 
(Crompton  and  Knowlcs  Loom  Works.) 


THE  CROMPTON  HARNESS-FRAME-MOVING 
DEVICE  FOR  WITCH-TOP  LOOMS. 

The  inventors  of  this  new  device,  Messrs.  H.  Wyman 
and  A.  A.  Gordon,  claim  that  mechanism  for  this  pur- 
pose as  theretofore  constructed  has  been  defective  in 
that  connections  interposed  between  the  harness  frames 
and  the  spring-controlled  levers  are  so  made  and  at- 
tached to  the  levers  in  such  a  manner,  that  the  conec- 


19 


tions  wear  so  rapidly  when  joined  to  the  levers  as  to 
entail  expense  in  repairs,  besides  loss  of  time,  this  ex- 
cessive and  rapid  wear  being  due  chiefly  to  the  fact  that 
the  connection  tips  on  the  lever  at  the  point  of  their 
junction,  owing  to  the  particular  lines  of  their  move- 
ment. 

In  the  newly-constructed  device  the  spring-con- 
trolled levers  are  provided  with  sectors,  against  which 
the  connections  bear,  one  end  of  each  spring  being 
connected  to  the  end  of  the  lever  farthest  from  the  sec- 
tor and  also  to  the  frame-piece.  In  this  way  all  side- 
wise  or  swaying  movements  of  the  connections  is  over- 
come, and  also  the  wear  on  the  connections  reduced 
to  the  minimum. 

Heretofore  spring-controlled  levers  have  been  ar- 
ranged side  by  side  on  the  same  fulcrum  rod;  but  by 
separating  the  levers  into  two  sets  and  mounting  them 
on  two  fulcrum  rods,  so  that  the  strap  attaching  end 
of  one  lever  points  to  the  right  and  the  other  to  the 
left  of  a  vertical  plane  at  a  right  angle  to  the  series  of 
harness  frames,  the  builders  of  the  new  device  are  en- 
abled to  get  two  rows  of  levers  in  the  line  occupied  by 
the  connections  leading  to  the  harness-frames,  and  thus 
are  enabled,  by  having  two  rows  of  levers,  to  make 
the  harness  connections  broader  than  if  using  but  one 
row,  and  by  providing  one  end  of  each  lever  with  a 
sector  the  connections  may  be  sustained  on  a  flat  sur- 
face during  the  movements  of  the  levers. 

The  levers  have  notches  at  their  outer  ends  at  differ- 
ent distances  from  their  fulcra  to  receive  the  buckles  or 
loops  to  which  is  attached  one  end  of  the  springs  used, 
the  adjustment  of  a  buckle  or  loop  into  one  or  the 


of  levers  C,  D,  having  sector-shaped  ends  C,  D',  being 
sufficiently  wide  to  receive  against  their  faces  the  con- 
nections C2,  D2,  one  end  of  each  of  said  connections  be- 
ing suitably  attached,  respectively,  to  one  of  said  levers 
C,  D',  the  means  employed  being  the  projections  c,  d, 
over  which  the  straps  are  hooked.  The  ends  of  the 
two  series  of  levers  are  made  to  face  each  other,  just 
enough  space  being  left  to  permit  the  (connection) 
straps  C,  DJ,  to  come  between  them,  as  in  Fig.  I,  the 
straps  attached  to  the  levers 


a* 


being  attached  in  alterna- 
tion to  the  successive  har- 
ness frames.  Parts  of  the 
sides  of  the  levers  may 
touch,  or  substantially  so, 
and  thus  obviate  twisting 
strains. 

The  outer  ends  of  the 
lever  C,  D,  are  notched,  as 
at  2,  3,  to  receive  the  loops 
4,  5,  attached  by  springs 
6,  7,  (fully  shown  at  the  left 
in  Fig.  i)  to  hooks  8,  g,  of 
rods  or  bars  io,  12,  mount- 
ed in  notches  of  the  frame 

A,  and,  as  shown  in  Fig.  I,  there  are  a  series  of  bar- 
holding  notches  13,  14,  in  either  of  which  the  said  bars 
may  be  placed  when  it  is  desired  to  alter  at  one  opera- 
tion the  tension  of  all  the  springs.  The  open  slots  in 
the  hubs  of  the  levers  to  fit  the  rods  B,  are  in  such 
direction  that  the  springs  6,  7,  act  normally  to  keep  the 
levers  on  said  rods,  and  to  enable  the  levers  of  the 
series  to  be  moved  over  different 
distances  by  the  springs  when  acting 
to  move  the  harness  frames,  the 
stop  rods  G,  G,  are  set  at  an  in- 
clination, as  represented,  to  the  ful- 
crum rods  B,  B. 

This  new  device  is  designed  for 
looms  having  witch  tops,  i.  e.,  device 
for  raising  the  harness  and  which  in 
turn   have  to  be  pulled  down  by 
springs.     The   straps   in   the  new 
device,   running   from   the  spring- 
levers  with  springs  attached,  give 
plenty  of  room;  therefore  do  away  with  the  wearing 
parts  on  the  hooks,  springs,  and  all  straps  connected 
with    the    harness.     (Crompton   and   Knowles  Loom 
Works.) 


other  of  said  notches  providing  for  greater  or  less  ten- 
sion of  the  springs.  The  ends  of  the  springs  most 
remote  from  the  notched  ends  of  the  levers  are  con- 
nected to  a  spring-holding  bar,  and  the  frame  where 
this  bar  is  located  has  a  series  of  notches  whereby  the 
bar  may  be  quickly  adjusted  in  its  position  to  at  one 
operation  vary  the  tension  simultaneously  of  all  the 
springs. 

The  back  stop  for  the  levers  is  made  as  a  bar  or  rod, 
which  occupies  a  position  at  an  angle  to  the  fulcrum 
rod  for  the  levers,  so  that  the  said  levers  may  occupy 
different  positions  in  order  that  the  front  and  back 
harness  frames  may  occupy  different  horizontal  planes, 
the  back  harness  frame  or  the  one  farthest  from  the 
breast  beam  of  the  loom  having  the  greater  movement. 
The  levers  have  their  hubs  slotted  to  be  applied  to  or 
removed  from  the  fulcrum  rod  without  disturbing  the 
latter,  and  the  strain  of  the  spring  is  such  as  to  keep  the 
levers  seated  on  their  fulcrum  rod. 

For  a  clear  understanding  of  the  construction  of  this 
improved  device  the  accompanying  illustrations  are 
given,  and  of  which  Fig.  1,  in  side  elevation  represents 
a  sufficient  portion  of  a  loom  to  illustrate  the  inven- 
tion; Fig.  2,  a  section  thereof  in  the  line  x,  Fig.  1. 

The  supporting  frame  A,  has  two  fulcra  B,  B,  on 
which  are  mounted  the  slotted  hubs  of  the  two  series 


SCHEID'S  SHEDDING  MECHANISM. 

Fig.  A,  is  a  side  elevation  of  a  dobby  provided  with 
the  improvements,  and  Fig.  B,  an  enlarged  detail  view 
of  one  of  the  hooked  jacks  operating  levers  and  its 
adjustable  supporting  arms. 

The  frame  the  harness  lever  &,  the  connector  c, 
the  hooked  jacks  d,  and  e,  and  the  lifters  f,  and  g,  are 
of  usual  construction.  The  lifting  lever  h,  'pivoted  as 
at  i,  to  the  frame  and  operated  by  the  pattern  sur- 
face m,  in  the  usual  manner,  is  provided  near  its  inner 
end  with  an  upwardly  extending  rod  h't  the  horizon- 
tally arranged  pin  ft10,  of  arm  h',  resting  in  the  vertical 
slot  Jla,  of  lever  h.  Near  the  upper  end  of  said  rod  is 
arranged  an  elongated  vertical  slot  h*,  in  which  is 
adjustably  secured,  by  means  of  bolt  and  nut  h',  or  in 
any  other  desired  manner,  the  arm  ft*,  adapted  to  bear 
on  the  under  side  of  the  upper  hooked  jack  d. 

In  the  lower  portion  of  the  rod  h',  is  also  arranged 
an  elongated  vertical  slot  h",  in  which  is  adjustably 
secured,  by  means  of  bolt  and  nut  V,  the  arm  h*t 
which  latter  bears  against  the  under  side  of  the  lower 
hooked  jack  e. 

It  is  a  well-established  fact  that  the  ordinary  sup- 
porting means  for  the  hooked  jack,  during  the  frequent 


20 


usage  of  the  dobby,  get  worn  off  very  rapidly  and  must 
be  substituted  by  new  ones  from  time  to  time  to  insure 
a  perfect  operation  of  the  machine.    This  is  avoided  in 


the  new  device,  having  arranged  the  arm  ft2,  and  ft3, 
supporting  the  hooked  jacks,  adjustable  on  the  carry- 
ing or  supporting  rod  ft'.  As  soon  as  the  top  portion 
of  the  said  arms  is  worn  off  the  nuts  of  the  bolts  ft5, 
and  ft7,  are  loosened  and  the  arms  slid  upward  and 
turned  outward  in  their  respective  slots  to  the  height 
and  position  required,  and  the  nuts  are  then  again 
tightened  up. 

A  further  improvement  of  this  dobby  is  shown  in  the 
accompanying  illustration,  of  which  Fig.  C  is  a  side 
elevation  of  a  dobby  provided  with  an  improved  jack- 
supporting  rod,  which  is  the  gist  of  the  present  im- 
provement; Fig.  D,  an  enlarged  detail  view  of  the 
same,  illustrated  in  connection  with  a  portion  of  its 
lifting  lever. 

In  said  drawings,  a,  is  the  dobby  frame;  6,  the 
harness  lever,  carrying  the  connector  c,  to  the  outer 
end  of  which  are  pivotally  secured  the  upper  and  lower 
hooked  jacks,  d,  and  e,  adapted  to  be  engaged  by  the 
lifters  f,  and  0,  respectively. 


C  D 

The  lifting  lever  ft,  pivoted  as  at  ft1,  and  operated 
through  pattern  chain  ft,  is  provided  at  or  near  its 
inner  end  with  a  vertically-arranged  slot  ft2,  in  which 


rests  the  pin  is,  projecting  horizontally  from  link  is. 
To  said  link  is  adjustably  secured,  by  bolt  and  nut  i7,  the 
flattened  lower  portion  i3,  of  the  supporting  rod  i, which 
is  for  that  purpose  provided  with  an  elongated  slot  i\ 
through  which  the  tightening  bolt  V,  passes.  The 
supporting  rod  i,  is  either  round  or  flat,  and  is  pro- 
vided with  an  upper  and  lower  collar  or  lug  i1,  and  i2, 
adapted  to  support  the  upper  and  lower  jacks  respec- 
tively. The  link  i5,  can  be  provided  with  projecting 
flanges  i",  as  shown  in  Fig.  D,  to  obtain  a  more  secure 
and  firmer  joint  between  the  said  link  and  the  flattened 
portion  i3,  of  rod  i,  if  so  desired. 

Should,  during  the  operation  of  the  machine,  the 
jack-supporting  collars  or  lugs  i1  and  i2,  partially  wear 
off,  the  tightening  nut  and  bolt  i ,  is  loosened,  the  rod 
raised  up  to  the  required  height  and  the  bolt  and  nut 
again  tightened.  By  this  simple  means  the  frequent 
changing  of  the  jack-supporting  rods  and  their  respec- 
tive collars  is  fully  avoided  and  the  device  thus  ren- 
dered more  durable  and  economical.  (Adam  Schcid, 
Harrison,  Assignor  to  Robert  Atherton,  Paterson,  N.  J.) 


BIRCH  ALL'S    HARNESS-LEVELING  DEVICE. 

Fig.  I  is  a  side  elevation  of  a  dobby  with  certain 
portions  removed  and  others  shown  in  section  (ar- 


ranged on  a  portion  of  a  loom-frame),  and  provided 
with  the  improved  leveling  device.  Fig.  2,  is  a  view 
similar  to  Fig.  I, illustrating  the  position  of  parts  when 
the  leveling  device  is  in  operation;  and  Figs.  3  and  4 
are  top  plan  views  of  the  leveling  device  as  shown  in 
Figs.  1  and  2  respectively. 

In  said  drawings  a,  represents  a  portion  of  the 
loom-frame,  and  b,  the  dobby-frame  secured  thereto, 
and  provided  with  the  cross-rod,  serving  as  a  fulcrum 
for  the  harness-levers  C,  the  latter  ones  connected  with 
the  harness  of  the  loom  through  the  cords  c'. 

On  each  side  of  the  dobby,  and  secured  to  the  loom- 
frame  a,  in  any  desired  manner,  is  a  bracket  c,  serving 
as  bearings  for  the  ends  f,  of  the  crank-shaft  CI,  of  the 
leveling  device. 

On  one  end  of  said  crank-shaft  is  secured  the  crank 
or  handle  ft,  provided  with  an  arm  i,  on  which  is  ar- 
ranged a  horizontally-inwardly  projecting  pin  ft, 
adapted  to  engage  and  bear  on  the  loom-frame  a.  The 
said  crank-shaft  9,  when  in  normal  position,  Figs.  1 
and  3,  does  not  fully  touch  the  harness-levers,  and 
bears  on  the  loom-frame  a,  but  is  allowed  a  lateral  mo- 
tion in  its  bearings  e,  sufficient,  when  pushed  inward, 
after  being  turned  from  right  to  left,  to  bring  the  said 
pin  ft,  over  and  above  and  into  engagement  with  the 
said  loom-frame,  as  shown  in  Figs.  2  and  4. 


21 


In  operation  when  the  warp-threads  from  necessity 
of  repairing  or  the  harness-threads  for  any  other 
reason  have  to  be  brought  to  one  level,  the  operator 


stops  the  machine  and  turns  the  crank-shaft  9,  by  means 
of  the  handle  ht  from  right  to  left,  until  the  pin  fc,  is 
over  and  above  the  loom-frame  «.  The  crank-shaft 
is  then  pushed  inward  and  the  handle  ht  released.  The 
pin  k,  bearing  on  the  loom-frame,  prevents  the  crank- 
shaft from  returning  to  its  normal  position,  and  thus 
holds  the  harness  and  warp  threads  in  a  level.  When 
the  necessary  repairs  are  done,  the  crank-shaft  by 
means  of  its  handle  is  pulled  outward  and  allowed  to 
returns  to  its  normal  position.  (Thomas  Birchall,  As- 
signor to  Robert  Atherton,  Paterson,  N.  J.) 


ALVORD'S  SHEDDING  MECHANISM. 

This  shedding  mechanism  is  shown  in  its  sectional 
elevation  in  the  accompanying  illustration.  Examin- 
ing this  drawing  we  find  the  harness-lever  I,  hung  on 
shaft  2,  retained  in  place  by  pin  3,  passed  through 
curved  slot  3',  in  said  lever  1,  and  which  harness-lever 
has  the  usual  harness-frame  connected  to  its  ends  by 
cording. 

On  the  arm  4,  of  lever  1,  is  pivotally  mounted  at  8, 
a  lock  lever  5,  the  segmental  arms  of  which  are  struck 
on  a  curve  from  the  centre  of  shaft  2.  Hook  6,  is 
connected  to  a  third  radial  arm  of  lock-lever  5,  at  a 
point  7,  outside  of  pivot  8,  on  which  lock-lever  5,  is 
mounted.  The  free  end  of  hook  6,  is  provided  at  top 
and  bottom  with  two  projections,  between  which  there 
is  a  small  space,  forming  at  the  upper  side  a  notch  to 
be  engaged  by  the  reciprocating  knife  9,  and  at  the 
lower  side  a  notch  to  be  engaged  by  the  reciprocating 
knife  10,  whereby  the  hook  may  be  moved  longitudi- 
nally. 

the  knife  9,  termed  the  "elevator"  raises  the  harness- 
frame  connected  to  lever  1,  and  the  knife  10. 

The  "depressor"  lowers  the  said  harness-frame.  The 
hook  is  vibrated  by  a  pattern  surface  14,  to  cause  its 
notches  to  engage  the  reciprocating  knives,  a  riser  14', 
on  the  pattern  surface  acting  to  raise  the  hook  and 
place  its  upper  notch  in  engagement  with  the  elevator 
9,  and  a  "sinker"  14",  permitting  the  hook  to  fall 
by  reason  of  its  own  weight,  thus  engaging  the  lower 
notch  of  the  hook  with  the  depressor  10. 

As  the  reciprocation  of  the  knives  9,  and  10,  is 
constant,  it  is  necessary  that  the  hook  be  freed  from 
engagement  with  said  knives  at  the  extreme  of  its 
movement;  otherwise  when  once  engaged  by  one  of 
the  knives  there  would  be  a  like  reciprocation  of  the 
hook  and  an  open  shed  could  not  be  formed.  To 
effect  this  disengagement  there  is  placed  at  a  point 
near  the  position  reached  by  the  elevator  9,  in  its  out- 
ward movement,  a  clearing  bar  13,  which  co-acts  with 
the  beveled  portion  13',  on  the  upper  side  of  hook  6, 
besides  there  is  placed  a  clearing  bar  16,  at  a  point 
near  the  position  reached  by  the  depressor  10,  in  its 
inward  movement,  which  clearing  bar  16,  co-acts  with 
the  beveled  portion  16',  upon  the  under  side  of  the 
hook. 


Upon  the  underside  of  the  hook  6,  is  formed  also 
the  run  15,  against  which  the  risers  of  the  pattern 
surface  operate,  and  that  end  of  the  riser  nearest  the 
pivotal  point  of  the  hook  is  cut  away  to  permit  the 
hook  to  be  depressed  by  the  action  of  the  clearing 
bar  13. 

In  order  that  the  harness  lever  may  be  retained  in 
either  extreme  position  and  an  open  shed  be  formed, 
there  are  provided  stationary  butting  bars  11  and  12, 
which  co-act  with  the  lock  lever  5,  to  lock  the  harness 
lever  in  either  extreme  position.  These  butting  bars 
are  arranged  in  an  arc  struck  from  centre  of  shaft  2, 
and  placed  one  on  each  side  of  the  arm  4,  of  the  har- 
ness lever  and  of  the  radial  arm  of  lock  lever  5,  and 
bear  upon  the  segmental  arms  of  said  lever  5.  When 
in  this  position  the  arm  4,  and  lever  5,  are  locked 
together,  and  the  pull  upon  the  hook  6,  draws  the  arm 
4,  and  moves  the  harness  lever,  the  lock  lever  5,  hav- 
ing no   independent  movement  at  this   time.  This 


movement  will  continue  until  the  arm  4,  of  the  lever  1, 
is  brought  against  one  of  the  butting  bars,  and  at  that 
instant  the  end  of  one  segmental  arm  clears  the  op- 
posite butting  bar,  and  is  by  a  slight  turn  of  lever  5, 
upon  its  pivot,  placed  against  the  butting  bar. 

The  tension  on  the  warps  carried  by  the  harness 
frame  cannot  disturb  the  position  of  the  parts,  and  the 
harness  frame  will  be  unmoved  until  the  hook  is 
moved  in  the  return  direction,  at  which  time  the  lock 
lever  5,  is  turned  slightly  on  its  pivot  and  the  end  of 
the  segmental  arm  freed  from  engagement  with  the 
butting  bar.  The  harness  frame  is  then  free  to  be 
removed  into  its  other  position  by  the  continued  move- 
ment of  the  hook,  the  parts  being  locked  at  the  end 
of  the  movement  in  the  same  way,  as  just  described. 

The  operation  of  the  mechanism  is  as  follows:  The 
pattern  surface  14,  is  timed  to  move  when  the  knives 
are  at  the  opposite  extremity  of  their  motion  to  that 
shown  in  our  illustration.  When  so  timed,  a  hook  6, 
which  has  a  sinker  under  it  will  drop  on  to  the  de- 
pressor knife,  and  a  hook  with  a  riser  under  it 
will  be  forced  up  and  connect  with  the  elevating  knife 
9.  The  forward  movement  of  the  knives  will  unlock 
the  harness  levers,  and  they  will  be  moved  into  their 
opposite  positions  and  locked  in  place. 

An  open  shed  will  be  formed  and  the  harness  frames 
will  have  been  pulled  positively  into  position.  The  har- 
nesses will  remain  in  their  respective  places  so  long  as 
sinkers  follow  sinkers  and  risers  follow  risers  on  the 
pattern  surface,  but  when  a  riser  follows  a  sinker,  or 
vice  versa,  the  levers,  and  consequently  the  harnesses 
will  move  into  the  opposite  position.  The  hooks  are 
freed  from  the  knives  by  the  action  of  clearing  bars  13 
and  16,  as  previously  described.  (Clinton  Alvord, 
Philadelphia.) 


22 


INGRAHAM'S  SHEDDING  MECHANISM. 

This  shedding-mechanism  refers  to  for  what  are 
known  as  "open  shed"  looms,  the  object  being  to  effect 
the  movement  of  the  heddle  frames  without  any  severe 
strain  on  the  operating  devices,  to  insure  the  locking 
of  the  heddle  frames  when  the  shed  is  open,  so  as  to 
permit  the  jacks  to  be  readily  shifted,  and  to  provide 
for  lifting  the  depressed  heddle-frames  independently 
of  the  regular  operating  mechanism  when  it  is  desired 
to  gain  access  to  a  warp  thread  in  the  lower  portion  of 
the  shed. 

Fig.  i,  is  a  transverse  section,  partly  in  elevation,  of 
a  loom  provided  with  the  new  shedding  mechanism. 
Fig.  2,  is  an  enlarged  vertical  sectional  view  of  said 
heddle  operating  mechanism.  Figs.  3  and  4,  are  like 
views  of  parts  of  the  mechanism,  in  different  positions, 
and  Fig.  5,  is  a  transverse  section  on  the  line  1-2, 
Fig.  2. 


moved  to  and  fro.  their  inclined  slots,  acting  on  the 
antifriction  rollers  carried  by  the  studs  d,  of  the  heddle- 
levers,  will  cause  said  heddle-levers  to  vibrate  upon  the 
fulcrum  shaft  c,  and  will  thus  raise  and  lower  the 
heddle  frames  B,  and  the  path  in  which  the  roller  is 
forced  to  travel  by  the  action  of  the  inclined  slot  will 
be  curved,  and  will  be  almost  at  right  angles  to  the 
thrust  imparted  by  the  inclined  portion  of  the  slide  F, 
by  which  means  the  up  and  down  thrusts  upon  the 
slide  F,  is  lessened,  as  compared  with  a  thrust  directly 
across  the  line  of  movement  of  said  slide. 

At  each  end  of  the  inclined  slot  of  each  slide  F,  is 
an  offset  f,  and  when  the  slide  is  in  either  of  its  ex- 
treme positions,  the  antifriction  roller  on  the  stud  <Z, 
of  the  heddle-lever  occupies  one  of  these  offsets  and 
the  heddle  frames  are  thereby  effectually  locked  in 
their  extreme  positions  corresponding  to  the  "open 
shed,"  the  strain  upon  the  heddles  having  no  effect  in 


A,  represents  part  of  a  frame  of  a  loom,  and  B, 
represents  heddle  frames  to  which  are  connected  cords 
a,  a',  passing  over  pulleys  I),  b',  said  cords  being  con- 
nected to  heddle-levers  D,  mounted  on  the  frame  of 
the  loom,  and  these  heddle-levers  being  in  the  form 
of  bell-cranks,  one  arm  of  each  lever  being  connected 
to  the  upper  cords  a,  of  its  corresponding  heddle  frame, 
and  the  other  arm  to  the  lower  cord  a',  of  the  same. 
Each  heddle-lever  has  on  its  lower  arm  an  upwardly 
projecting  stud  d,  the  upper  end  of  which  carries  an 
antifriction  roller  d\  (see  dotted  lines  Fig.  2)  which  is 
adapted  to  an  inclined  slot  f,  in  slide  F,  guided  in 
transverse  bearings  C,  on  the  frame  of  the  heddle 
operating  mechanism,   so  that,  as  these   slides  are 


moving  the  slides  from  the  positions  to  which  they 
have  been  adjusted. 

In  order  to  provide  for  the  effective  guidance  and 
lateral  retention  of  the  slides  F,  and  yet  permit  said 
slides  to  be  arranged  closely  together,  the  top  and  bot- 
tom edges  of  the  guiding  portion  of  each  slide  are 
beveled  or  V-shaped,  and  the  guide-bars  C,  have  like 
beveled  or  V-shaped  grooves  for  the  reception  of  these 
beveled  edges  of  the  slides  as  shown  in  Fig.  5. 

The  movement  of  the  slides  F,  to  effect  the  rise  and 
fall  of  the  heddle-frame  demanded  by  the  required 
shedding  of  the  warp,  is  derived  from  reciprocating 
bars  G  and  H,  which  are  carried  by  guide  blocks  g, 
the  latter  being  connected  by  rods  ft,  respectively  to 
the  upper  and  lower  arms  of  a  three-armed  lever  I, 


23 


hung  to  a  transverse  shaft  ft',  the  third  arm  of  said  lever 
being  connected  by  a  rod  li\  and  link  A*,  to  a  spur 
wheel  A4,  driven  from  any  suitable  part  of  the  loom. 

Hung  to  each  of  the  slides  F,  is  a  jack  J,  which  has, 
on  its  upper  and  lower  edges,  lugs  I,  i' ,  facing  in  op- 
posite directions,  and  each  of  these  jacks  J,  is  under 
the  control  of  a  finger  A',  on  a  pivoted  arm  K,  which 
is  acted  upon  by  the  pins  m,  of  a  pattern-chain  M, 
carried  by  a  pattern-drum  N,  the  intermittent  move- 


ment of  the  latter  being  effected  by  any  suitable  means, 
for  instance  by  means  of  a  ratchet-wheel  nt  on  the 
drum  shaft,  acted  on  by  a  pawl  carried  by  an  arm  n', 
hung  to  said,  shaft,  and  vibrated  by  the  bar  H,  through 
the  medium  of  a  rod  n~,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2.  When  the 
parts  are  in  the  position  shown  in  Fig.  2,  the  bars  G 
and  H  are  at  the  extremes  of  their  rearward  move- 
ment, and  are  about  to  move  forward,  that  is  to  say, 
the  bar  G  is  about  to  move  to  the  right  and  the  bar  H 
to  the  left.  The  jacks  of  the  slides  F  of  those  heddle 
frames  which  are  to  be  lifted  have  been  raised  so  that 
their  lugs  i,  are  in  engagement  with  the  bar  G,  while 
the  jacks  of  the  slides  of  those  heddle  frames  which 
are  to  be  lowered,  have  been  dropped  so  that  their 
lugs  1",  engage  with  the  bar  H,  the  jacks  of  the  slides 
of  those  heddle  frames  which  are  not  to  be  raised 


ment  is  imparted  to  those  slides  whose  jacks  are  in 
engagement  with  the  bars,  as  shown  in  Fig.  3,  the 
movement  of  the  heddle-frames  from  one  position  to 
the  other  being  effected  by  the  slides,  which,  owing 
to  their  inclined  slots,  so  act  upon  the  heddle-levers, 
that  the  movement  of  the  latter  is  affected  easily  and 
smoothly  and  without  shock  or  jar  upon  the  operating 
portions  of  the  device,  the  heddle-frames  being  finally 
locked  in  their  extreme  positions  (that  is  to  say  with 
the  shed  open)  owing  to  the  off-set  ends  of  the  in- 
clined slots  in  the  slides.  On  the  backward  movement 
of  the  slides  G  and  H,  the  pattern-chain  is  shifted  and 
the  jacks  J,  are  raised  and  lowered  in  accordance  with 
the  requirements  of  the  pattern.  (See  Fig.  4.)  In 
order  to  permit  the  upper  bar  G  to  yield  against  the 
pressure  of  the  jacks  from  below,  said  bar  has  journals 
p,  which  are  free  to  turn  in  the  guide-blocks  <J,  the 
preponderance  in  weight  being  in  advance  of  the 
journals,  so  that  the  acting  edge  of  the  bar  G 
will  fall  into  engagement  with  the  lugs  I,  of  the 
jacks,  as  soon  as  said  bar  is  fully  retracted. 

To  prevent  the  links  of  the  pattern-chain  from 
being  carried  around  by  the  under  side  of  the 
drum  N,  there  is  mounted  adjacent  to  the  latter, 
a  deflecting  shoe  P,  which  so  acts  upon  the 
depending  portion  of  the  chain,  as  to  press  its 
links  out  of  the  spaces  between  the  teeth  of  the 
drum,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2. 
In  order  to  effect  the  raising  of  the  lower  heddle- 
frames  without  corresponding  movement  of  the  re- 
ciprocating bar  G,  when  it  becomes  necessary  to  raise 
the  warps  constituting  the  lower  portion  of  the  shed, 
so  as  to  tie  up  a  broken  thread,  or  for  other  purposes, 
there  is  mounted  at  one  side  of  loom  a  lever  S.  shown 
by  dotted  lines  in  Fig.  2,  this  lever  carrying  a  transverse 
bar  s,  which  acts  upon  downwardly  projecting  lugs  tt 
upon  the  slides  F,  of  all  the  depressed  heddle-frames, 
so  that  on  operating  the  lever  S  by  hand,  an  outward 
movement  of  all  of  these 
slides  can  be  effected 
independently  of  the  re- 
gular operating  devices. 
It  will  be  observed  that 
the  reciprocating  bars 
G  and  H  act  only  upon 
one  side  of  the  lugs  I,  V , 
of  the  jacks  J,  so  that 
said  lugs  are  free  to 
move  away  from  the  re- 
ciprocating bars  when 
the  slides  are  moved  by 
the  evener-bar.  By  so 
connecting  the  lever 
S,  the  leverage  for 
raising  the  heddle-frames  when  desired,  is  so  increased 
that  this  operation  may  be  easily  performed.  This  is 
of  great  importance,  especially  where  the  loom  has  a 
large  number  of  heddles.    (Fainnount  Machine  Works.) 


being  allowed  to  remain  down,  and  the  jacks  of  the 
slides  corresponding  to  the  heddle  frames  which  are 
not  to  be  depressed  being  allowed  to  remain  up.  As 
the  bars  G  and  H  move  forward,  corresponding  move- 


EASTWOOD'S  SHEDDING  MECHANISM. 

Referring  to  the  accompanying  drawings,  Fig.  A, 
is  a  sectional  side  elevation  of  a  dobby  provided  with 
the  improvements;  Fig.  B,  a  detail  view  of  one  of  the 
jack  supporting  rods. 

In  said  drawings,  a,  represents  the  frame;  6,  the 
harness  lever;  c,  the  connector  pivotally  secured  to 
said  lever  b;  d,  and  e,  the  upper  and  lower  hooked 
jacks,  respectively,  pivotally  secured  to  the  said  con- 
nector, and  f,  and  <J,  the  lifters. 

Pivoted,  as  at  fc,  is  the  lifting  lever  i,  acted  upon  by 
the  pattern  surface  or  chain  »«,  in  the  usual  manner. 
To  the  inner  end  of  said  lever  i,  is  pivotally  secured  the 
upwardly  extending  rod  h,  which  for  that  purpose 


24 


has  its  lower  end  bent  horizontally,  as  at  ft3,  Fig.  B, 
and  rests  with  said  portion  ft3,  in  a  horizontally  ar- 
ranged hole  of  lever  i.  The  upper  end  of  rod  ft, 
.is  also  bent  horizontally,  as  at  ft',  and  bears  with  said 


B 


Z3J> 


horizontal  portion  under  the  upper  jack  d,  while  the 
lower  jack  e,  rests  upon  the  loop  ft2,  projecting  hori- 
zontally from  and  integral  with  the  rod  ft.  (Alfred 
Gartner,  Newark,  N.  J.,  Assignor  to  Benjamin  Eastwood, 
Patcrson,  N.  J.) 


ECCLES'S  HARNESS  MECHANISM  FOR  OPEN 
SHED  LOOMS. 

In  many  fancy  patterns  the  weaving  requires  one, 
two,  three,  or  four  heddles  out  of  a  set  of  ten  or  more 
to  remain  open  for  several  picks,  and  thus  an  open 
shed  prevents  the  unnecessary  movement  and  chafing 
of  the  warp-threads. 

By  the  present  mechanism  the  heddle-frames  are  all 
liberated  at  each  pick. 

The  invention  consists  of  an  automatically-operated 
clamp  that  will  rigidly  clamp  all  the  heddle-levers 

open  for  the  flight 

ffi  ^  °f  the  shuttle  and 

automatically  liber- 
ate them  just  as  the 
lifter  and  de- 
pressor starts  on 
the  return  stroke 
that  opens  the  shed. 
Of  the  accom- 
panying illustrations  Fig.  i,  is 
a  back  view  of  so  much  of  a 
loom-harness  frame  as  will 
show  the  mechanism  mounted 
thereon.  Fig.  2,  is  an  end  view 
of  Fig.  1.  Fig.  3,  is  an  edge 
view  of  the  spring.  Fig.  4,  is  a 
face  view  of  Fig.  3.  Figs.  5,  6, 
and  7,  are  views  of  the  cam- 
box.  Figs.  8,  and  13,  are  views 
of  the  right-angle  harness-lever. 
Figs.  9,  and  10,  are  views  of  the 
pressure-pin.  Figs.  11,  and  12,  are  views  of  the  ec- 
centric cam. 

The  construction  of  the  mechanism  is  as  follows: 


1,  represents  the  right-angle  harness-lever;  3,  the 
double-hook  moving  jack. 
The  jacks  are  controlled  by 
a  pattern-chain  and  oper- 
ated by  a  lifter  and  depress- 
or. To  the  lever  1,  is  fixed 
a  bearing- surface  2.  In 
a  series  of  levers  these 
surfaces  bear  one  against 
the  other,  as  shown  in  Fig. 

2,  which  shows  a  series  of 
ten  levers  nested  one 
against  the  other  at  the 
bearing-surfaces  2.  • 

4,  indicates  a  fixed  bear- 
ing   placed    at    the  right- 
hand  side  of  the  last  lever 
in  the  series.    5,  indicates 
a  stand  or  hanger  for  the 
clamp-pin   7,  and  forms  a 
part  of  the  cam-box  6.  7, 
is  a  pressure-pin,  the  flanged 
end  of  which  presses  against  the  surface  2,  on  the  lever 
1.    The  plain  end  of  pin  7,  on  the  left  is  pressed  by  the 
spring  9.    By  means  of  a  pin 
13,  the  pressure-pin  7,  is  fixed 
to  the  part  6,  of  the  cam-box. 
To  that  part  of  the  cam-box  6, 
is  an  arm  8,  and  from  which  is 
a  connecting-rod  10.    11,  is  an 
eccentric  grooved  cam,  mounted 
on  the  crank-shaft  12. 

The  operation  of  the  new 
motion  is  as  follows:  Motion 
being  given  the  cam  11,  by 
shaft  12,  as  soon  as  the  shed 
is  opened  the  cam-box  is  closed 
as  shown  in  Figs.  2,  and  6. 
This  closing  of  the  cam-box 
allows  the  spring  9,  through 
the  pin  7,  to  press  all  the  levers 
1,  together  at  2,  and  clamp 
them  tight,  holding  the  shed 
open  for  the  passage  of  the 
shuttle  and  a  cross  of  the  warp  yarn  on  the  previous 
pick  until  the  next  pick  is  crossed  on.    As  the  lifter 


Fiq  9 


and  depressor  hooks  on  the  jacks  for  a  change 
shed,  the  cam  11,  through  rod  10,  and  cam-box 
ing  against  the  inclined 
cams  of  the  box,  press 
apart  the  cam-box  6, 
which  draws  to  the  left 
the  pin  head  7,  and  re- 
lieves all  the  levers,  and 
they  are  free  to  be  moved 
in  either  direction,  up  or 
down,  when  they  are 
again  clamped  as  before 
described. 

The  cam-box  shows 
eight  bearing-surfaces; 
however  a  less  number 
may  be  used.  (James 
Eccles,  Philadelphia.) 


of  the 
6,  act- 

<§> 

Fig.  10. 


Fan. 


Fp.  /3. 


25 


OLDHAM'S  SHEDDING  MECHANISM. 

One  of  the  principal  objects  sought  to  be  secured  in 
the  construction  of  this  dobby  is  the  locking  of  each 
heddle-frame  either  at  the  highest  or  lowest  point  that 
it  assumes  in  the  weaving  operation,  and  giving  to 
each  jack  or  lever  a  positive  movement  in  either 
direction  in  order  to  operate  each  heddle-frame  in- 
'dependently  when  called  into  action  by  the  pattern- 
chain,  and  also  the  locking  of  the  whole  number  of 
heddle-frames  used  in  the  weave  in  the  position  in 
which  they  have  been  placed  for  an  intermittent  period. 

This  means  the  production  of  an  open  shed  or  the 
establishment  of  a  uniform  line,  at  which  the  upper  and 
lower  warps  will  be  held  to  insure  the  shuttle's  flight 
and  many  other  advantages  in  the  weaving  operation. 


Fig.  i,  is  a  side  elevation  of  the  principal  working 
part  of  the  device,  represented  as  mounted  on  one 
end  of  the  arch  of  the  loom-frame  and  showing  the 
jacks  in  their  two  directly  opposite  positions,  or  when 
the  heddle-frame  is  at  its  highest  and  lowest  point. 
Fig.  2,  is  a  top  plan  view  of  the  same.  Fig.  3,  repre- 
sents a  skeleton  of  the  locking-frame  in  its  operative 
position  in  connection  with  independent  notched  bars 
connected  with  the  jacks,  the  locking  frame  being 
shown  in  section,  holding  the  jack  at  its  full  forward 
movement,  and  the  dotted  position  of  the  two  parts 
illustrating  the  jack  at  the  point  of  its  full  backward 
movement. 

Letters  of  references  indicate  thus:  represents 
the  loom-arch,  to  the  appropriate  side  of  which  on  the 
top  the  dobby  is  securely  mounted.  B,  indicates  one 
of  the  two  side-frames  of  the  dobby-frame.  Upon  the 
inner  ends  of  the  side-frames  B,  is  secured  a  shaft  «, 
which  gives  a  bearing  to  each  of  the  levers  or  jacks  m. 

Directly  forward  of  the  shaft  n,  journaled 
in  the  two  side-frames,  is  a  rock-shaft  0, 
to  the  outer  end  of  which,  at  the  proper 
side  of  the  frame,  is  secured  a  T-shaped 
rocker-arm  T,  and  in  opposite  position  upon 
the  other  end  of  said  shaft  is  a  lever  t.  Pivotally 
connected  by  means  of  an  integral  boss  or  projection 
upon  one  side  of  the  upwardly-directed  arm  of 
each  jack  is  a  long  draw-bar  c,  provided  with  two 
notches  c\  and  c,  or  teeth  upon  its  upper  edge,  and  the 
bottom  edge  of  each  of  said  draw-bars  c,  is  constructed 
with  a  single  notch  or  projection  C3.  The  said  notches 
are  for  engagement  with  the  transverse  knives  d,  and 
«,  located  one  above  and  the  other  below  the  notched 
draw-bars  c,  and  sliding  with  a  reciprocating  move- 
ment in  suitable  openings  &  and  in  the  side-frames 
B.  These  knives  are  connected  by  the  rods  to  the 
T-shaped  rocker-arm  T,  and  the  lever  t. 

In  the  extreme  outer  end  of  the  two  side-frames  B, 
of  the  machine  are  pivoted  loosely  on  the  shaft  1,  small 


levers  or  feelers  f,  corresponding  in  numbers  to  the 
draw-bars  c,  and  upon  which  the  outer  ends  of  the  said 
bars  rest,  the  feelers  or  levers  being  raised  by  means 
of  the  risers  on  the  pattern-chain,  the  sinkers  of  the 
chain  allowing  for  the  fall  of  the  levers  or  feelers  in 
keeping  with  the  character  of  the  weave.  A  spring  2, 
secured  to  one  of  the  sides  of  the  machine,  has  its  free 
end  resting  in  one  of  the  suitable  curved  depressions  in 
the  periphery  of  the  hand-wheel  i,  secured  on  one  end 
of  the  shaft  3,  by  which  the  pattern-chain  cylinder  is 
rotated. 

To  the  main  arm  T,  is  connected  a  depending-rod  s. 
adjustable  at  20,  and  the  same  is  pivoted  at  its  bottom 
end  to  an  eccentric  gear  that  meshes  with  a  similar 
gear,  secured  on  the  power-shaft  of  the  loom.  Pivoted 
on  the  frame  in  the  rear  of  the  eccentric  gears  referred 
to  is  a  lever  provided  at  its  free  end  with  a  loosely- 
revolving  roller,  which  is  engaged  at  each  revolution 
of  the  eccentric  gear  by  the  cam-piece.  A  vertically- 
moving  rod  Z,  is  secured  to  said  lever,  the 
upper  end  of  which  is  connected  to  a  frame 
E,  pivoted  by  means  of  the  rod  n"t  on  the 
stationary  cross-girt  I.  A  spring' 8,  has  one 
,^  end  secured  to  the  stationary  rack  and 

connects  with  frame  E.  Upon  one  end  of 
shaft  3,  is  secured  an  arm  P,  supplied  with  a 
pawl  p' ,  a  spring  io,  connecting  said  arm  and 
pawl  and  causing  the  latter  to  constantly 
be  in  engagement  with  the  teeth  of  the 
ratchet-wheel  12. 
Connected  to  the  upper  end  of  the  arm  P,  is  a  sup- 
plemental connecting-rod  '/,  whost  rear  end  is  pivoted 
to  the  lever  tt  and  the  front  connecting  part  or  head 
has  an  integral  foot,  which  rests  upon  the  face  of  the 
second  rear  tooth  engaged  by  the  pawl  and  prevents 
any  recoil  to  the  pattern-chains.  Supplemental  or 
auxiliary  notched  connecting-rods  F,  are  pivoted  near 
the  rear  ends  upon  suitable  bosses  or  projections  ni1 
on  the  jacks  m,  their  forward  ends  provided  with  suit- 
able shoulders  f\  and  notches  f°,  for  engagement  with 
the  pivoted  locking-frame  E. 

A  transverse  rod  14,  directly  in  the  rear  of  the  rock- 
shaft  O,  the  two  ends  of  which  are  secured  in  the  two 
side  frames,  is  covered  with  rubber,  thereby  limiting 
the  forward  movement  of  the  jacks  and  furnishing  a 
cushion  for  the  latter  to  strike  against. 

The  whole  series  of  jacks  are  assisted  in  being  sup- 
ported in  an  upright  position  by  means  of  the  clamps 


or  guards  15,  placed  each  side  of  the  series  and  bear- 
ing against  the  two  outer  jacks,  these  clamps  being 
rigidly  secured  on  the  shaft  n. 

Pivoted  on  the  rack  or  grate  h,  is  a  hold-back  or 
locking-frame  K,  placed  transversely  over  the  draw- 
bars c,  for  engaging  the  notches  c",  and  the  outer  ends 
of  said  draw-bar  c,  and  it  is  provided  with  an  arm  V ,  by 


26 


which  the  hold-back  can  be  liberated  from  all  the 
draw-bars  by  the  operator. 

In  the  operation  of  the  machine  motion  is  communi- 
cated from  the  drive-shaft  of  the  loom  by  means  of  the 
eccentric  gears,  and  communicated  to  the  T-shaped 
lever  by  means  of  the  adjustable  arm  s.  and  at  each 
revolution  of  the  gear  to  which  the  said  arm  is  con- 


nected.  a  proper  amount  of  vibrating  motion  is  im- 
parted to  the  same,  and  by  means  of  the  connections 
d",  and  C,  to  the  reciprocating  knives  d,  and  c.  In  the 
forward  movement  of  the  knife  d,  all  of  those  draw- 
bars that  have  been  raised  by  the  movement  of  the 
pattern-chain  will  be  in  such  a  position  as  to  cause  the 
notches  C,  of  the  draw-bars  to  be  engaged  by  the  up- 
per knife  <2,  and  its  forward  movement  will  pull  the 
draw-bars  forward,  thereby  drawing  the  respective  jack 
to  which  they  are  attached  to  its  full  stroke. 

The  opposite  result  will  come  to  those  draw-bars 
that  are  depressed  by  the  directly  opposite  movement 
of  the  lower  knife  e,  engaging  those  notches  c3,  or  pro- 
jections on  the  bottom  edge  of  the  draw-bars.  Dur- 
ing the  reciprocating  movement  of  the  knives  the 
pivoted  locking-frame  E,  will  be  elevated  by  means  of 
the  previously  referred  to  cam,  roller,  lever,  and  ver- 
tical rod  Z,  so  as  not  to  engage  the  notches  f,  and 
shoulders  f5,  of  the  auxiliary  notched  connecting-rods 
F,  to  the  jacks  m.  When  the  stroke  of  the  two  knives 
is  complete,  the  frame  E,  is  forced  by  its  own  weight 
and  assisted  by  the  spring  8,  to  drop  in  the  rear  of  the 
shoulders  f,  or  into  the  notches  f,  of  the  proper  con- 
necting-rods F,  and  remaining  there  until  the  harness 
is  to  make  another  change,  when  the  whole  series  of 
rods  F,  will  be  simultaneously  liberated. 

The  locking-frame  E.  has  its  lower  edge  rounded 
slightly,  as  shown  at  E',  Fig.  3,  so  as  that  if  unusual 
strain  is  exerted  on  any  of  the  bars  F,  the  lock- 
ing-frame E,  will  rise  slightly  against  the  ten- 
sion of  the  spring  8,  and  free  the  bars  F,  so  as 
to  prevent  breaking  any  of  the  working  parts 
of  the  machine. 

The  spring  8,  must  be  sufficiently  strong  to  pre- 
serve at  all  times  under  ordinary  circumstances  an 
even  shed-line.  The  supplemental  spring  f,  con- 
nected to  the  locking-frame  K,  serves  to  form  an  ad- 
ditional hold  on  all  those  draw-bars  connected  with 
the  jacks  carrying  the  upper  shed  by  engaging  the 
upper  notch  CJ,  of  each  of  them  in  their  forward 
position.  The  spring  f,  secured  thereto,  connects 
with  one  of  the  side-frames  B,  and  an  operating-rod 
V ,  serves  to  unlock  it  from  all  the  draw-bars  it  engages 
from  the  opposite  side  of  the  loom.  This  is  for  even- 
ing the  shed. 

In  case  the  pattern  of  weave  requires  a  long  pattern- 
chain  the  weight  and  momentum  of  the  pattern-chain 
cylinder  has  a  tendency  to  overlap  or  override  to  the 
following  pick  when  the  usual  form  of  ratchet  and 
pawl  is  used,  but  not  so  in  this  case.  The  integral 
foot  prevents  any  further  rotation  of  the  pattern- 
cylinder  than  a  single  tooth  of  the  ratchet-wheel. 

It  very  often  happens  the  loom  is  revolved  back- 
ward, which  would  result  in  breaking  any  positive 
locking-device,  the  locking-frame  E,  having  the  bev- 


eled edge  E',  and  the  safety-spring  8,  in  this  case  in- 
stantly releasing  the  transverse  locking-frame  from  all 
the  supplemental  draw-bars  F,  as  hereinbefore  ex- 
plained, thus  overcoming  the  danger  of  breakage 
when  the  loom  is  reversed.  (George  Oldham,  Phila- 
delphia.) 

GOOD  YEAR'S  SHEDDING  MECHANISM. 

To  enable  the  reader  to  understand  the  mechanism 
the  accompanying  drawings  are  given,  and  of  which 
Fig.  1,  is  an  elevation  looking  at  one  side  of  the  mech- 
anism.   Fig.  2,  is  a  longitudinal  sectional  view  of  it. 

The  operation  of  the  mechanism  is  as  follows:  With 
the  parts  in  the  positions  shown  in  illustrations,  the 
cam  e'\  first  draws  the  rods  N,  O,  toward  each  other 
to  enable  them  to  be  raised  by  the  projection  of  the 
cam-guide  Q,  above  the  path  of  the  head  h2,  of  the 
cam-slide  G,  the  pattern-cylinder  lifts  the  finger  J,  to 
raise  the  jack  I,  so  its  shoulder  I,  is  in  the  path  of  the 
primary  impelling-bar  B,  and  the  cam  e',  moves  the 
levers  D,  D',  and  the  bar  B,  so  as  to  impel  the  jack  I, 
and  the  slide  G,  in  the  direction  indicated  by  the  arrow 
in  Fig.  2.  When  the  slide  G,  has  been  impelled  to  a 
point  where  the  head  h2,  moves  beyond  the  end  of  the 
rod  O,  the  cam  c2,  moves  the  levers  P',  M,  to  separate 
the  ends  «,  0,  of  the  rods  N,  O,  and  allow  the  ends  to 
descend  into  the  path  of  the  head  h~,  so  that  the  end  0, 
will  take  position  behind  the  head  h2,  of  said  slide. 
Before  the  cam  e',  completes  its  revolution,  it  with- 
draws the  bar  B,  from  engagement  with  the  primary 
impelling-jack  I,  and  the  end  0,  of  rod  O,  engages  with 
the  head  h2,  so  as  to  complete  the  movement  of  the 
slide  G,  in  the  direction  indicated,  this  movement  of 
the  slide  being  completed  by  the  time  the  cam  e',  has 
made  a  full  revolution,  at  which  time  the  pattern-cylin- 
der releases  the  finger  J,  so  that  the  finger  and  jack  I, 
will  drop  or  fall  by  gravity.  As  the  cam-slide  G,  is 
moved  in  the  manner  described,  its  incline  h'.  rides 
against  the  incline  f,and  this  pressure  turns  the  double 
heddle-lever  to  move  the  heddle-frames.  As  the  slide 
G,  completes  its  stroke,  the  head  h2,  is  engaged  by  the 
rod  O,  to  prevent  the  slide  and  heddle-lever  from  being 


moved  accidentally.  As  the  cams  e',  e2,  continue  to  ro- 
tate, the  cam  6*,  operates  the  lever  M,  to  again  move 
the  rods  N,  O,  and  cause  the  ends  »,  0,  to  approach 
and  ride  upon  the  inclines  </',  (f,  <1,  of  the  guide  Q, 
thus  lifting  the  rods  out  of  the  path  of  the  head  h',  of 
said  slide  G,  and  the  cam  e',  now  moves  the  levers  D. 
D',  in  a  manner  to  draw  the  primary  impelling-bar  B'. 
into  engagement  with  the  shoulder  I',  on  the  lower  side 


27 


of  the  jack  I,  which,  it  will  be  remembered,  was  low- 
ered on  the  completion  of  the  first  stroke  or  move- 
ment of  the  slide  G. 

This  primary  impelling-bar  B',  now  impels  the  slide 
G,  in  the  reverse  direction  until  the  head  h2t  thereof, 
passes  the  end  n,  of  the  bar  N,  at  which  time  the  cam 


e3,  moves  the  lever  M,  to  separate  the  ends  n,  o,  of  the 
rods,  and  cause  the  end  »,  to  take  position  behind  the 
head  A*.  The  cam  e',  now  retracts  the  bar  B,  and  the 
cam  c2,  impels  the  rod  N,  to  force  its  end  against  the 
head  h1,  and  to  cause  the  rod  N,  to  impel  the  slide  G, 
to  the  full  limit  of  its  stroke  or  until  the  slide  again 
assumes  the  position  shown  by  Fig.  2.  As  the  slide 
G,  is  impelled  in  the  direction  referred  to  its  incline 
h,  rides  against  the  incline  f,  to  rock  the  double  lever 
F,  F',  and  cause  it  to  again  move  the  heddles.  (Robert 
B.  Goodyear,  Philadelphia.) 


EVANS'S  SHEDDING  MECHANISM. 

The  gist  of  the  improved  mechanism  is  found  in 
doing  away  with  a  great  amount  of  chain  stuff,  the  ar- 
rangement of  the  new  device  acting  as  a  multiplier  on 
each  bar. 

It  will  put  in  as  many  repeats  of  one  pattern  as  re- 
quired by  the  design  by  one  chain,  then  start  another 
chain  to  weave  another  pattern  as  the  fabric  calls  for. 
The  change  from  one  chain  to  the  other,  i.  e.,  the  mul- 
tiplier, is  worked  from  the  first  jack,  which  jack  can 
be  used  solely  for  that  purpose. 

In  the  usual  construction  of  the  harness-operating 
mechanism,  known  as  the  "dobby,"  having  two  rows 
of  pegs  on  one  bar  of  the  pattern-chain,  one  set  of 
indicator-fingers  is  operated  from  one  row  of  pegs, 
and  the  other  set  from  the  other  row  of  pegs  on  the 
same  bar.  The  first  set  of  indicator-fingers  operates 
the  lower  jack-hook,  and  the  second  set  operates  the 
upper  jack-hook.  The  lifting-knives  move  alternately 
at  each  successive  pick  of  the  loom,  and  when  the  jack- 
hooks  engage  with  them,  the  corresponding  harness  is 
raised  and  lowered.  One  row  of  pegs  on  the  bar  of  the 
pattern-chain  determines  which  harness  and  warp- 
thread  shall  be  raised  for  a  certain  pick,  and  the  other 
row  of  pegs  on  the  same  bar  determines  the  raising  of 
the  warp-threads  for  the  next  succeeding  pick.  One 
bar  of  the  pattern-chain,  therefore,  represents  two 
picks  in  the  woven  fabric,  and  the  pattern-chain  must 
have  a  sufficient  number  of  bars  to  control  the  spring 
ing  of  the  warp  for  the  pattern  of  the  whole  length 
of  the  fabric. 

In  the  weaving  of  a  variety  of  fabrics,  such  as  hand- 
kerchiefs, towels  and  similar  goods,  the  length  of 
pattern-chain  required  is  objectionable  on  account  of 
its  cost  of  labor  in  pegging  and  the  power  and  mech- 
anism required  to  carry  and  operate  it. 

The  object  of  the  present  invention  is  to  so  con- 


struct the  dobby  that  fabrics,  such  as  towels  or  hand- 
kerchiefs, in  which  stripes  or  borders  of  one  peculiar 
pattern  or  weave  are  followed  or  preceded  by  a  field  of 
another  pattern  or  weave  can  be  produced  with  a 
short  length  of  pattern-chain. 

In  a  loom  provided  with  a  dobby  constructed  after 
this  invention  the  pattern  for  the  main  portion  of  the 
fabric  is  represented  by  one  of  the  two  rows  of  pegs 
on  each  of  the  bars  of  the  pattern-chain,  and  the  pat- 
tern for  the  cross-borders  is  represented  by  the  other 
row  of  pegs  on  the  same  bar. 

Instead  of  using  each  bar  of  the  pattern-chain  to 
control  the  warp  of  two  successive  picks,  as  is  the 
usual  method  employed  heretofore,  in  the  pattern- 
chain  used  in  carrying  out  this  invention  each 
bar  controls  the  springing  of  the  warp  for  one 
pick  only,  and  yet  by  use  of  a  controlling  mech- 
anism, a  short  pattern-chain,  or  for  some  weaves 
a  cylinder  provided  with  a  pattern-surface,  will 
be  sufficient  to  weave  fabrics  of  any  desired 
length  in  which  two  kinds  of  patterns  of  weaves 
are  used  at  pre-determined  intervals. 
The  controlling  mechanism  may  also  be  arranged  to 
control  the  harness-operating  mechanism  in  the  old 
construction  of  the  dobby  where  two  adjacent  indi- 
cator-fingers operate  the  one,  the  lower  and  the  other 
the  upper  jack-hooks. 

Fig.  1,  is  a  side  view  of  a  dobby  provided  with  the 
improvements.'  Fig.  2,  is  a  side  view,  and  Fig.  3,  a  top 
view,  of  one  of  the  pair  of  indicator-fingers.  Fig.  4,  is  a 
side  view,  and  Fig.  5,  a  top  view,  of  the  other  of  the  pair 
of  indicator-fingers.  Fig.  6,  is  an  edge  view,  on  an  en- 
larged scale,  of  a  needle  for  operating  the  jack-hooks, 
showing  the  upper  and  lower  hooks,  and  the  two  parts 
of  the  indicator-fingers  in  section.  Fig.  7,  is  a  face 
view,  and  Fig.  8,  an  edge  view,  of  the  needle  on  the 
scale  of  Fig.  1.    Fig.  9,  is  a  diagrammatic  representa- 


tion of  the  indicator-fingers,  the  pattern-chain,  the  aux- 
iliary chain  and  their  relative  relation  to  each  other, 
showing  also  the  indicator-finger  on  one  side  through 
which  the  mechanism  for  operating  the  auxiliary  chain 
is  set  in  motion. 

To  illustrate  the  invention  as  clearly  as  possible  and 
avoid  confusion,  the  dobby  part  of  the  loom  only  is 
shown. 


28 


Jfi/xilicury 
Chain  ZS 


To 

S  20 


Pattern 

chain  16 


w*^?  .... 


■78-°  ' 


Of  the  accompanying  illustrations,  numeral  of  ref- 
erence 2  indicates  the  end  frames  of  the  dobby,  secured 
to  or  forming  part  of  one  of  the  end  frames  of  the 
loom.  The  vibrator-arm  3,  is  secured  to  a  shaft  sup- 
ported in  the  end  frames  2.  The  ends  of  this  vibrator- 
arm  3,  are  connected  by  the  rods  4,  with  the  lifter- 
knives  5,  and  these  slide  in  the  slotted  ways  6. 

The  harness-lever  7,  is  the  first  one  near  the  frame. 
The  other  harness-levers  required  to  weave  the  pat- 
terns are  not  shown,  but  all  are  pivotally  secured  on 
the  shaft  8,  the  ends  of  which  are  supported  in  the  end 
frames  2.  To  the  bracket  9,  forming  part  of  the  har- 
ness-lever 7,  is  pivoted  the  connector-arm  10,  and  to 
each  end  of  the  same  are  pivotally  connected  the  jack- 
hook  11a,  to  the 
9  •  upper  end  and  the 

jack-hook  nb,  to 
I — * — . — 1 — 1 — 1 — (_  the  lower  end. 
1,  38 ^ — ; — $  ,  9  ,.l  The  indicator- 
fingers  are  pivot- 
ed on  the  shaft  13, 
supported  in  the 
end  frames  2,  and 
rest  on  the  bar  14, 
extending  from 
one  end  frame  to 
the  other. 

On  referring  to 
Fig.  6,  it  will  be 
seen  that  the  nee- 
dle 15,  supports 
jack  11a.  on  the 
upper  end  15a,  and 
the  jack  lib,  on 
the  shoulder  15b, 
at  its  lower  end, 
and  that  the  nee- 
dle is  supported 
by  the  indicator- 
finger  12a,  by  a  shoulder  formed  by  the  enlargement 
15c,  of  the  needle  and  by  the  lateral  projection  12c,  of 
the  indicator-finger  12b.  The  indicator-finger  12a,  is 
provided  on  one  side  with  two  projections  (shown  in 
Fig-  3),  so  as  to  form  the  groove  or  space  I2e,  and  the 
indicator-finger  12b,  is  provided  with  the  projection 
12c  (shown  in  Fig.  5),  and  also  with  the  upward-pro- 
jecting flat  piece  I2d.  The  lower  end  of  the  needle  15, 
passes  through  the  space  I2e,  between  the  finger  12a, 
and  the  flat  projection  i2d,  on  the  finger  12b.  By  this 
construction  either  of  the  fingers  12a,  or  12b,  may  lift 
the  jack-hooks  independent  of  the  other,  but  both  the 
short  ends  of  the  indicator-fingers  12a,  and  12b,  must 
be  depressed  before  the  needle  can  descend  and  permit 
the  jack-hooks  to  engage  with  the  lifting-knives. 

The  object  of  this  improved  construction  of  a  dobby 
and  the  mode  of  operating  the  same  is  best  explained 
thus: 

Referring  to  Fig.  1,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  sprocket- 
wheel  16,  is  placed  below  the  indicator-fingers  12,  and 
that  the  primary  pattern-chain  A,  on  which  the  trans- 
verse bars  17,  are  secured,  is  supported  and  operated 
by  the  sprocket-wheel  16.  On  the  bars  17,  are  secured 
two  lines  of  pegs,  each  forming  a  pattern-surface.  The 
row  of  pegs  18,  on  the  forward  edge  of  the  bar  corre- 
sponds with  the  harnesses  required  to  be  operated  to 
weave  one  pick  of  a  pattern — the  cross-stripe,  for  in- 
stance— and  the  row  of  pegs  19,  on  the  rear  edge  of  the 
bar  corresponds  with  the  harnesses  required  to  be  oper- 
ated to  weave  one  pick  of  the  other  pattern — the  field  or 
body,  for  instance.  These  pegs  are  placed  so  that  they 
register  always  with  a  certain  one  of  the  parts  of  the 
indicator-fingers  throughout  the  series — that  is  to  say, 
the  pegs  may  register  with  either  of  the  parts  12a,  or 
12b.  This  is  clearly  shown  in  Fig.  9,  wherein  the  pegs 
18,  and  19,  are  so  placed  that  they  will  operate  the 


parts  12a,  of  each  pair  of  indicator-fingers,  the  pegs  of 
each  row  being  arranged  in  the  alternation  shown. 
Now,  in  this  condition,  the  pegs  cannot  operate  the 
needle  15,  because  it  requires  both  of  the  short  ends  of 
the  parts  12a,  and  12b,  to  be  depressed  to  permit  the 
needle  15,  to  descend  and  permit  the  jack-hooks  to  en- 
gage with  the  lifting-knives  5.  If  now,  by  any  suitable 
mechanical  means  the  weighted  end  of  one  of  the  two 
part  indicator-fingers — in  the  present  instance  the  part 
12b, — be  raised  so  as  to  depress  the  short  end  con- 
nected with  the  needle  15,  then  when  the  pattern-peg 
registering  with  the  other  half  passes  under  the  same, 
it  will  operate  the  needle  to  connect  the  jack-hooks 
with  the  lifter-knives  and  the  proper  harness  will  be 
operated.  The  means  designed  for  thus  operating  the 
half  of  the  indicator-fingers  consists  in  the  auxiliary  or 
indicator  chain  20,  on  which  the  transverse  bars  17a, 
are  secured.  On  each  of  these  bars  17a,  one  row  of 
pattern-pegs  only  is  secured.  The  pegs  18a  and  19a, 
are  placed  near  one  or  the  other  edge  of  the  bars  17a, 
the  same  as  are  the  pegs  18  and  19,  on  the  bar  17,  so 
that  the  co-acting  pegs  will  operate  the  respective 
halves  of  the  indicator-fingers  at  the  same  time,  the 
pegs  18a,  corresponding  to  the  pattern  of  the  pegs  18, 
on  the  primary  pattern-chain  A;  but  they  are  laterally 
placed  so  that  while  the  pegs  18,  on  the  primary  pat- 
tern-chain register,  say,  with  the  half  12a,  the  pegs  18a, 
register  with  or  operate  the  other  half,  12b,  of  the  indi- 
cator-fingers, and  the  levers  21,  pivotally  secured  at 
one  end  and  bearing  on  the  halfs  12b,  of  the  indi- 
cator-fingers, being  raised  when  the  pegs  18a,  pass  un- 
der the  same,  will  raise  the  weighted  outer  end  of  the 
half  12b,  of  the  indicator-fingers  and  thereby  permit 
the  pattern  pegs  18,  to  operate  the  other  half,  12a,  to 
connect  the  jack-hooks  with  the  lifter-knives  5,  and 
operate  the  desired  harnesses.  The  row  of  pegs  i8a, 
operates  to  unlock  one  of  a  pair  of  the  indicator- 
fingers,  and  the  row  of  pegs  18,  operates  the  other  one 
of  the  pair  of  indicator-fingers,  the  pegs  19a,  perform- 
ing the  corresponding  office  for  the  pegs  19,  because 
the  needle  is  supported  by  two  adjacent  indicator- 
fingers  forming  the  pair  and  cannot  be  lowered  to 
engage  the  jack-hook  if  only  one  is  used  or  the  jack- 
hooks  if,  as  shown  in  the  drawings,  two  are  used,  until 
the  weighted  outer  ends  of  both  indicator-fingers  are 
raised  and  the  inner  ends  of  both  are  lowered  with  the 
needle. 

When  now  the  row  of  pegs  18a,  has  raised  the  outer 
ends  of  one  of  the  pairs  of  indicator-fingers  corre- 
sponding with  the  pattern,  then  the  row  of  pegs  18, 
can  operate  the  other  one  of  the  pair  of  indicator- 
fingers,  and  thus  lower  the  needle  and  the  jack-hook 
or  jack-hooks  so  as  to  connect  the  harness  required  to 
be  operated  to  weave  the  pattern  corresponding  with 
the  row  of  pegs  18.  The  row  of  pegs  19a,  performs 
the  corresponding  office  for  the  rows  of  pegs  19,  on 
the  pattern-chain. 

The  first  indicator-finger  12,  which  is  the  one  near- 
est the  end  frame,  and  the  first  harness-lever  7,  are 
preferably  used  to  operate  the  auxiliary  or  controlling 
pattern-chain  20,  but  they  are  not  in  any  wise  altered 
and  both  may  be  used  to  control  the  operation  of  a 
harness  when  the  auxiliary  or  controlling  pattern  is 
not  required,  or  when  the  auxiliary  or  controlling 
pattern-chain  is  operated  by  some  other,  moving  part. 
In  the  preferred  construction,  as  shown  in  Fig.  1,  the 
end  frame  2,  is  provided  with  the  arm  2a,  near  the 
lower  end  of  which  is  pivoted  the  lever  23,  the  upper 
end  24,  of  which  lever  is  bent  inward  so  as  to  bear  on 
the  harness-lever  7.  To  the  lower  end  of  the  lever 
23,  is  pivotally  secured  the  ratchet-bar  25,  the  hook  on 
the  front  end  of  which  engages  with  the  ratchet-wheel 
26.  The  spring  23a,  is  secured  at  one  end  to  the  frame 
2,  and  at  the  other  end  to  the  lever  23.  (William 
Evans,  Fall  River,  Mass.) 


29 


PERHAM'S  SHEDDING  MECHANISM. 

This  motion  is  for  a  roller  loom,  easy  in  its  action, 
doing  away  with  the  cams  on  bottom  shaft,  placing 
them  on  the  crank  shaft,  obtaining  a  cheaper  and  yet  a 
more  durable  device. 

The  device  can  be  readily  and  quickly  adjusted  by 
the  operative  to  conform  to  the  desired  pick,  and  in  a 
similar  manner  to  be  adjusted  in  any  order  required 
for  a  particular  pattern. 

Of  the  accompanying  illustrations  Fig.  r,  is  an  end 
view  of  the  improvements  represented  as  operatively 
connected  with  a  loom,  only  so  much  of  the  latter 
and  its  equipments  being  shown  as  is  necessary  to 
explain  the  invention.  Fig.  2,  is  a  front  view  of  the 
same,  a  part  of  the  central  portion  being  shown  as 
broken  out. 

Letters  of  reference  indicate  thus:  A,  designates 
the  loom-frame.  B,  is  the  crank-shaft,  by  which  the 
lay  C,  is  operated  through  suitable  connections.  D. 
is  the  breast-beam.  E,  designates  the  picker-sticks. 
F,  the  harness.  G,  the  cloth-roll.  H,  a  rod  extend- 
ing parallel  with  the  breast-beam  and  connected  with 


the  stopping  mechanism,  and  I,  a  holding  pawl  co- 
operating with  a  ratchet-wheel  J,  on  the  cloth-roll  to 
prevent  the  latter  from  turning  backward. 

a,  designates  a  broad-rim  wheel,  arranged  to  turn 
on  a  stud  d,  secured  to  the  loom-frame  and  provided 
on  the  interior  of  its  rim  with  a  circle  of  ratchet 
teeth  c,  which  may  be  an  integral  part  of  the  rim,  or 
be  formed  on  a  ring  detachably  connected  with  the 
rim. 

Upon  the  outer  surface  or  periphery  of  the  rim- 
wheel  a,  are  detachably  and  adjustably  secured  a 
series  of  cam-rings  d,  adjustably  and  removably  held 
by  means  of  a  spline  d'.  The  said  cam-rings  are  pro- 
vided on  their  peripheries  with  a  plurality  of  rises  ?. 
and  falls  f,  according  with  the  number  of  ratchet-teeth 
c,  to  the  pattern  to  be  woven. 

The  means  for  detachably  and  adjustably  securing 
the  cam-rings  upon  the  rim-wheel  are  not  shown  in 


the  illustration,  as  any  suitable  device  may  be  em- 
ployed for  this  purpose. 

Upon  the  stud  b,  is  fulcrumed  a  lever  <J,  to  the  end 
of  one  arm  of  which  is  pivoted  a  pawl  ft,  adapted  to 
take  into  the  teeth  of  the  rachet-ring  described.  The 
other  end  of  said  lever  .'/,  is  provided  with  an  elongated 
slot  ',  in  which  an  eccentric  j,  on  the  crank-shaft 
operates,  so  that  each  rotation  of  the  crank-shaft  the 
lever  .'/,  and  its  attached  pawl  /',  will  be  actuated  so  as 
to  engage  the  ratchet-teeth  <l,  and  move  the  rim-wheel 
",  to  the  extent  of  the  distance  between  two  of  the  said 
ratchet-teeth. 

k,  designates  a  lever  (as  many  as  there  are  sets  of 
harness  to  be  operated),  fulcrumed  at  its  rear  end, 
as  at  I,  and  has  a  cord  »i,  attached  to  its  other  end, 
which  cord  extends  over  pulleys  and  is  connected  at 
its  other  end  with  the  harness  F,  to  be  raised.  On  the 
lever  K,  there  is  a  projection  o,  which  rests  upon  the 
periphery  of  the  cam-ring  d,  so  that  in  the  rotation  of 
the  rim-wheel  with  the  said  rings  secured  thereto,  the 
rises  and  falls  of  the  said  rings  will  act  upon  the  levers 
k,  and  through  their  connections  with  the  harness  raise 
the  latter,  and  allow  them  to  be  depressed,  it  being 
understood  that  a  rise  e,  on  a  cam  ring  d,  will  operate 
to  raise  a  heddle,  under  the  arrangement  shown,  and 
that  a  fall  f,  will  allow  the  heddle  to  be  lowered, 
through  any  of  the  common  and  known  means  em- 
ployed for  the  purpose,  such  as  springs,  weights,  or 
connections  with  other  heddles  which  operate  to  de- 
press one  set  of  heddles  when  another  set  is  raised. 

The  finger  ?>,  employed  on  the  rod  H,  of  the  com- 
mon stopping  mechanism,  which  is  provided  with  ;i 
pin  Q,  extending  under  the  holding-pawl  I,  is  elon- 
gated, as  shown  in  Fig.  i,  and  thereto  is  attached  one 
end  of  a  cord  the  other  end  of  which  is  connected 
to  one  of  the  angular  ends  of  a  rock-rod  s,  the  other 
angular  end  of  the  said  rock-rod  being  connected,  by 
means  of  a  cord  t,  with  a  pawl  h,  so  that  as  the 
rod  H,  is  rocked  and  the  pin  1,  on  the  finger  P,  oper- 
ates to  raise  the  pawl  I,  the  said  finger  will  also, 
through  the  medium  of  its  connections,  operate  to 
raise  the  pawl  h,  and  so  arrest  the  movement  of  the 
rim-wheel  a,  and  its  adjuncts. 

The  levers  ft,  might  be  arranged  above  the  rim- 
wheel  and  the  cam-ring  tf,  thereon,  and  the  connec- 
tions of  the  harness  with  the  lever  be  made  from  the 
lower  part  of  the  latter  and  operate  to  depress  the 
same. 

With  this  invention  it  will  be  seen  that  we  are  en- 
abled to  operate  the  harness-controlling  mechanism 
directly  from  the  lay-operating  crank  shaft,  and  greitly 
simplify  and  cheapen  the  cost  of  construction,  making 
the  machine  easy  of  operation  and  of  stopping  and 
starting,  and  providing  plenty  of  room  for  the  cloth- 
roll  and  warp-beam.  Besides  this,  the  improvements 
provide  a  construction  which  is  most  ready  of  exami- 
nation and  manipulation  by  the  weaver  in  case  of  need 
of  turning  the  mechanism  back  or  otherwise  moving  it 
without  moving  other  parts  of  the  loom  to  correspond 
with  the  required  pick:  and  moreover,  the  mechanism 
is  such  as  to  materially  lessen  the  momentum  of  the 
moving  parts,  so  that  the  loom  can  be  stopped  nuicker 
than  heretofore  without  undue  shock  or  jar.  (Charles 
Foster  Perham.  Lowell,  Mass.) 


BOX  MOTIONS  AND  SHUTTLE  BOXES. 


THE  KNOWLES  GINGHAM  BOX  MOTION.* 

(For  4x1  or  6  x  1  Box  Looms.) 

This  motion,  as  shown  in  the  accompanying  illustra- 
tion, is  controlled  by  the  box  pattern  chain  «,  which 
is  operated  in  connection  with  a  multiplier  chain  b, 
by  a  cam  on  the  bottom  shaft  (not  shown).  The  stand 
C,  for  the  box  pattern  and  multiplier  mechanism  is 
bolted  to  the  arch  C,  and  the  stand  rf,  for  the  box 
motion  itself  is  fastened  to  the  loom  side  d'.  The  box 
motion  is  also  run  from  the  bottom  shaft.    This  causes 


lever  f,  by  rod  .'/,  it  raises  the  vibrator  lever  f,  into 
connection  with  the  top  cylinder  gear  In  order  to 
prevent  any  skips,  a  lock-knife  i,  closes  in  under  or 
over  the  vibrator  lever  f,  as  soon  as  it  has  been  raised 
or  lowered  to  its  correct  position,  the  lock-knife  i, 
being  operated  by  a  cam  (and  lock-knife  finger  /") 
on  the  shaft  fc,  of  the  bottom  cylinder  gear  k'. 

Whenever  the  vibrator  gear  I,  is  raised  into  contact 
with  the  top  cylinder  gear  h,  the  vibrator  gear  I,  is 
turned  through  half  a  revolution,  carrying  the  vibrator 
connector  tft,  from  the  left  to  the  right  and  locking  it 
tts  it  comes  into  the  line  of  centres;  in  addition  to  this 
there  is  a  lock-lever  »,  and  spring  0, 
which  holds  the  connector  »»  in  place. 

The  motion  of  the  vibrator  connector 
'",  in  connection  with  the  angle  lever  /», 
raises  the  boxes.  The  front  lever  t, 
using  the  end  of  the  compound  lever  '" 
as  a  fulcrum  raises  two  shuttle  boxes  s. 
The  back  lever  Q,  using  the  centre  of 
the  compound  lever  '",  as  a  fulcrum 
raises  one  shuttle  box  S, 

In  the  case  of  the  6  x  1  box  loom 
there  are  two  levers  which  raise  two 
boxes  each,  and  one  that  raises  one  box. 

The  adjustment  of  the  box  is  effected 
by  means  of  an  adjustable  tip  «,  which 
connects  the  vibrator  connector  m,  to 
the  angle  lever  p.  (Crompton  and 
Knowles  Loom  Works.) 


a  complete  movement  of  all  the  pints  once  in  two 
picks  and  prevents  the  boxes  from  changing  when  the 
shuttle  is  in  the  dead  box. 

When  a  roll  of  the  pattern  chain  a,  conies  under  one 
of  the  levers  c,  which  is  connected  with  the  vibrator 


*See  also  article  on  "Mechanism  for  Operating  Shedding 
and  Drop-box  Pattern  Indicators  for  Knowles  Looms"  in 
previous  chapter. 


MULTIPLIER   MECHANISM  FOR 
KNOWLES  LOOMS. 

This  invention  relates  to  that  class  of 
looms  which  are  provided  with  an  aux- 
iliary or  multiplier  pattern-chain  in 
addition  to  the  main-pattern-chain.  By 
means  of  the  auxiliary  or  multiplier 
pattern-chain,  certain  bars  of  the  main 
pattern-chain  of  the  drop-box-indicating 
mechanism  may  be  repeated  without 
constructing  successive  similar  bars  in 
said  main  pattern-chain. 

The  object  of  the  present  invention  is 
to  provide  a  supplemental  mechanism, 
to  be  combined  with  the  main-pattern- 
chain  and  auxiliary  or  multiplier  pattern- 
chain    mechanism,    which    will  operate 
automatically    to    stop,    for   a  pre-de- 
termined  time,  the  mechanism   which  operates  said 
pattern-chains  and  to  start  said  mechanism  to  cause 
the  pattern-chains  to  operate. 

The  new  mechanism  may  be  combined  with  any  loom 
of  the  class  referred  to,  and  is  designed  particularly 
for  looms  for  weaving  handkerchiefs,  cotton  blankets, 
etc.,  in  which  a  solid  color  is  put  into  the  body  of  the 
goods  for  a  certain  number  of  picks. 

In  using  the  improvements  on  looms  of  the  class 
referred  to.  the  inventor  of  the  new  device.  Mr.  Wm. 
Wattie,  combines  the  same  with  the  cloth-take-up 
friction-roll,  so  that  after  a  certain  amount  of  cloth 
is  taken  up.  the  mechanism  will  operate  automatically 
to   start   the   mechanism    which    drives   the  pattern- 


30 


chains.  The  new  mechanism  is  also  combined  with 
indicating  mechanism  on  the  main  pattern-chain  cy- 
linder, so  that  said  indicating  mechanism  will  automat- 


ically operate  the  new  mechanism  to  stop  the  mech- 
anism which  drives  the  pattern-chains  when  desired. 

In  the  accompanying  drawings  a  multiplier  mech- 
anism for  a  6xi  box-loom  is  shown. 

Fig.  t,  shows  a  loom  side  from  the  inside,  the  rear 
view  of  the  box-pattern  indicating  mechanism,  and  the 
supplemental      mechanism  combined 
therewith.    Fig.  2,  is  a  rear  view  of  the 
box-pattern  indicating  mechanism  and 
.a  portion  of  the  improvements,  looking 
in  the  direction  of  arrow  «,  Fig.  4.  Fig. 
.3,  is  a  front  view  looking  in  the  direction 
■of  arrow  6,  Fig.  4.    Fig.  4,  is  a  plan 
view  looking  in  the  direction  of  arrow 
■c,  Fig.  2.    Fig.  5,  is  a  section  on  line 
5-5,  Fig.  4,  looking  in  the  direction  of 
arrow  a,  same  figure.    Fig.  6,  is  a  detail 
of  the  indicating-disk   on   the  friction 
take-up    roll-shaft    and    the  engaging 
finger    or    lever,    looking    in    the  di- 
rection of  arrow  d,  Fig.  7.     Fig.  7,  is  a  plan  view 
of  the  parts  shown  in  Fig.  6,  looking  in  the  direction 
of  arrow  e,  same  figure;  and  Fig.  8,  is  a  perspective 
view  of  one  of  the  adjustable  indicating  cams  or 
switches  on  the  indicating-disk.    Figs.   2  to  8,  in- 
clusive, are  shown  on  an  enlarged  scale  compared  to 
Fig.  1. 

In  the  drawings,  1,  indicates  the  loom  side,  on  the 
upper  part  of  which  is  secured  the  stand  or  frame  2, 
on  which  are  supported  the  several  parts  of  the  drop- 
box  pattern-indicating  mechanism.  The  drop-box  pat- 
tern-indicating mechanism  is  in  this  instance,  as  be- 
fore stated,  arranged  for  a  6x1  box-loom.  In  the 
pattern-indicating  mechanism,  3  is  the  main-pattern- 
chain  cylinder,  loosely  mounted  on  a  stud  4,  secured 
in  the  frame  2.  Cylinder  3,  has  grooved  or  notched 
heads  or  ends  3',  and  carries  the  main  pattern-chain 


5,  made  up  of  links  6,  which  connect  the  bars  7,  upon 
which  are  mounted  rolls  c  and  tubes  8.  The  cylinder 
3,  is  provided  with  a  hand.-wheel  10,  by  means  of 
which  said  cylinder  is  turned  in  either  direction,  as 
desired. 

The  auxiliary  or  multiplier  pattern-chain  cylinder  11, 
is  loosely  mounted  on  a  stud  12,  secured  in  the  frame 
2,  and  carries  the  auxiliary  or  multiplier  pattern-chain 
13,  made  up  of  links  6,  bars  7,  rolls  9,  and  tubes  8, 
similar  to  the  main  pattern-chain  5.  The  auxiliary 
pattern-cylinder  u,  is  provided  with  a  hand-wheel  14, 
to  turn  the  same  as  desired. 

On  a  stud  15,  secured  in  the  upper  part  of  the  frame 
2,  on  the  outside  of  the  stud  4,  are  pivoted,  in  this 
instance,  three  shuttle-box  indicator-levers  16,  17,  and 
18,  which  are  operated  by  the  main  pattern-chain  5. 
The  outer  ends  16',  17'  and  18'  of  said  levers  are 
enlarged  as  shown,  to  act  as  weights,  and  the  inner 
end  of  each  of  said  levers  is  pivoted  to  the  upper  end 
of  the  connector-rods  19  (see  Fig.  3,)  leading  to  the 
vibrator  levers  of  the  box-motion,  (not  shown)  of 
any  ordinary  construction  and  operation,  and  which 
is  arranged  at  the  lower  part  of  the  loom.  Upon  said 
stud  15,  is  also  pivoted  one  end  of  the  weighted  in- 
dicator-lever 20  and  one  end  of  the  the  lock-lever  21, 
which  is  provided  with  a  convex  portion  21',  adapted 
to  extend  into  the  concave  portions  22',  in  the  stop- 
wheel  22,  fast  on  the  pattern-chain  cylinder  3.  (See 
Fig.  5.) 

On  the  stud  4,  and  next  to  the  frame  2,  is  loosely 
mounted  a  ratchet-wheel  23,  which  is  secured  to  the 
main  pattern-chain  cylinder  3,  and  through  said 
ratchet-wheel  said  main  pattern-chain  cylinder  is 
operated. 

On  a  stud  24,  fast  in  the  opposite  end  of  the  frame 
2,  from  the  stud  15,  is  pivoted  one  end  of  a  weighted 
indicator-lever  25,  which  is  acted  on  by  the  auxiliary 
or  multiplier  pattern-chain  13.  On  the  stud  24,  is 
also  pivoted  one  end  of  the  lock-lever  26,  provided 
with  a  convex  portion  26',  adapted  to  extend  into 
concave  portions  27',  in  the  stop-wheel  27,  secured  to 


37 

the  auxiliary  pattern-chain  cylinder  11.  The  lower  end 
of  the  lock-lever  26,  is  secured  to  the  lower  end  of 


32 


the  lock-lever  21,  by  a  spring  28,  (see  Fig.  5,)  which 
acts  to  move  said  levers  toward  each  other  and  hold 
them  in  engagement  with  their  respective  stop-wheels 
22  and  27. 

A  ratchet-wheel  29,  is  mounted  loosely  on  the  stud 
12,  and  is  secured  to  the  auxiliary  pattern-chain  cyl- 
inder 11,  and  through  said  ratchet-wheel  29,  said 
auxiliary  pattern-chain  cylinder  is  operated. 

The  mechanism  for  operating  the  ratchet-wheel  23, 
to  communicate  motion  to  the  main  pattern-chain  5. 
and  for  operating  the  ratchet-wheel  29,  to  communicate 
motion  to  the  auxililiary  pattern-chain  13,  consists  of  a 
lever  30,  fast  on  a  rock-shaft  31,  journaled  in  the  lower 
part  of  the  frame  2.  This  lever  30,  carries  at  its  upper 
end  two  oppositely-extending  pawls  32  and  33,  pivoted 
thereon.  The  pawl  32,  is  adapted  to  engage  the  teeth 
of  the  ratchet-wheel  23,  of  the  main-pattern-chain 
cylinder  3,  and  the  pawl  33,  is  adapted  to  engage  the 
teeth  of  the  ratchet-wheel  29,  of  the  auxiliary  pattern- 
chain  cylinder  11. 

On  the  other  end  of  the  rock-shaft  31,  is  fast  the 
inner  end  of  an  arm  34.    Motion  is  communicated  to 


said  arm  34,  and  through  rock-shaft  31,  to  the  arm  or 
lever  30,  carrying  the  pawls  32  and  33. 

A  give-way  or  lock  connection  intermediate  the  arm 
34,  and  the  driven  part  of  the  loom,  from  which  said 
arm  is  operated  is  provided,  and  means  to  automati- 
cally operate  said  give-way  connection  to  disconnect  the 
arm  34,  and  immediately  stop  the  movement  of  the 
pattern-surfaces  in  case  the  filling  gives  out,  and  the 
filling-stop-motion  shaft  acts  to  stop  the  loom.  In  this 
instance,  the  outer  end  of  the  arm  34,  is  provided 
with  a  pin  or  screw  35,  which  is  adapted  to  engage  a 
notch  36',  in  the  slotted  head  36,  on  the  connector- 
rod  37  (See  Fig.  2).  The  lower  end  of  said  rod  37, 
is  connected  with  a  lever  38,  pivoted  at  38',  and  carry- 
ing a  pin  38",  which  extends  into  a  groove  in  a  cam 
39,  fast  on  a  driven  shaft  40  (See  Fig.  1).  A  con- 
tinuous up-and-down  motion  is  communicated  to  said 
rod  37,  and  through  the  arm  34,  to  the  rock-shaft  31, 
and  the  arm  30,  carrying  the  pawl  32  and  33. 

From  the  head  36  of  the  connector-rod  37,  a  chain 
or  cord  41  leads  over  a  pulley  42,  loose  on  the  rock- 


shaft  31,  and  over  pulleys  43  and  44,  mounted  on  the 
loom  side  (see  Fig.  1),  to  an  arm  45,  fast  on  the  fill- 
ing stop-motion  shaft  46.  The  rocking  of  the  stop- 
motion  shaft  46,  will,  through  arm  45,  and  cord  41, 
draw  the  head  36,  on  the  rod  37,  toward  the  front  of 
the  loom  and  cause  the  pin  35,  to  be  disengaged  from 
the  notch  36',  and  be  moved  into  the  longitudinal  slot 
36",  in  the  head  36,  to  allow  said  head  and  the  con- 
nector-rod 37,  to  move  up  and  down  without  moving 
the  arm  34,  so  that  the  pattern-indicating  mechanisms 
may  be  instantly  stopped,  though  the  loom  may  con- 
tinue to  run. 

A  pawl  47,  pivoted  on  the  arm  34,  and  bearing  at 
one  end  against  the  inner  edge  of  the  head  36,  and 
attached  at  its  other  end  to  one  end  of  a  spring  48, 
acts  to  push  outwardly  the  head  36,  on  the  rod  37,  and 
hold  the  pin  35,  in  the  notch  36',  to  form  a  give-way 
or  lock  connection  between  the  connector-rod  37,  and 
the  arm  34. 

In  order  to  regulate  the  operation  of  the  ratchet- 
wheels  23  and  29,  of  the  main  pattern-chain  cylinder  3,. 
and  the  auxiliary  pattern-chain  cylinder  11,  respec- 
tively, by  the  pawls  32  and  33,  a  pawl  guard  or  shield 
is  provided  for  each  pawl  to  keep  the  same  out  of 
engagement  with  its  ratchet-wheel  when 
desired.  The  pawl  32,  which  operates 
the  ratchet-wheel  23,  of  the  main  pat- 
tern-chain cylinder  3,  is  provided  with  a 
pawl  guard  or  shield  49,  pivoted  at  about 
its  central  point  on  a  pin  50,  in  the 
frame  2,  in  such  a  manner  that  the  end 
49',  which  acts  as  a  guard  for  the  pawl 
32,  will  extend  under  said  pawl  (See 
Fig.  2).  The  other  end  49",  of  said 
shield  49,  is  connected  by  a  pin  51,  to- 
a  boss  52,  which  extends  out  from  the 
free  end  of  the  weighted  indicator-lever 
25,  of  the  auxiliary  pattern-chain  13. 
The  pawl  guard  or  shield  53,  for  the 
pawl  33,  which  operates  the  ratchet- 
wheel  29,  of  the  auxiliary  pattern- 
chain  cylinder  u,  is  pivoted  at  about 
its  central  point  on  a  pin  54,  in  the  frame  2,  with  its 
other  end  53',  which  acts  as  a  shield  for  the  pawl  33, 
adapted  to  extend  under  the  outer  end  of  said  pawl 
(See  Fig.  2).  The  inner  end  53",  of  said  pawl-guard 
S3,  is  connected  by  a  pin  55,  to  a  boss  56,  which  ex- 
tends out  from  the  free  end  of  the  weighted  indicator- 
lever  20,  of  the  main  pattern-chain  3. 

We  will  now  proceed  to  describe  the  supplemental 
mechanism  combined  with  the  mechanisms  before  de- 
scribed, whereby  both  the  main  pattern-chain  and  the 
auxiliary  pattern-chain  will  be  automatically  stopped 
and  automatically  started  when  desired. 

On  the  stud  15,  is  pivotally  mounted  one  end  of  an 
indicating-lever  57,  which,  in  this  instance,  is  located 
between  the  indicator-lever  20,  and  the  lock-lever  21 
(See  Fig.  4). 

The  main  pattern-chain  cylinder  3,  is  provided  with 
indicating-surfaces  to  act  on  said  lever  57.  Said  in- 
dicating-surfaces may  form  a  separate  row  of  tubes  and 
rolls  between  the  heads  or  ends  3',  of  the  cylinder  3, 
or,  as  in  this  instance,  the  indicating  surface  or  roll 
58,  may  be  substituted  for  one  of  the  tubes  8,  which 
extend  into  the  notches  or  grooves  in  the  ends  3',  of 
the  cylinder  or  barrel  3  (See  Fig.  4).  In  this  way  it 
is  not  necessary  to  use  a  longer  barrel  or  cylinder. 
The  inner  end  of  the  indicating-lever  57,  is  provided 
with  a  pin  57',  which  extends  over  the  top  of  the  arm 
30,  which  forms  a  stop  to  limit  the  downward  motion 
of  said  lever  (See  Fig.  5). 

A  link  or  connector  60,  attaches  the  end  of  said  lever 
57,  to  an  arm  61,  fast  on  a  shaft  62,  mounted  in  the 
lower  part  of  the  frame  2  (See  Figs.  2,  3  and  5).  A 
second  arm  63,  is  also  fast  on  said  shaft  62,  and  is 


33 


connected  by  a  link  or  connector  64,  to  the  lower  end 
of  a  switch-lever  65,  pivoted  at  66',  on  the  head  36 
(See  Fig.  2).  The  upper  end  65',  of  said  lever  65,  is 
adapted  to  extend  under  the  pin  or  screw  35,  in  the 
outer  end  of  the  arm  34,  as  shown  in  Fig.  3,  to  cause 
said  arm  34,  to  move  up  and  down  with  the  head 
36,  and  rod  37,  to  operate  the  pattern-surfaces. 

A  guide  plate  or  shield  66,  is  secured  by  the  screw 
35,  to  the  end  of  the  arm  34,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2,  and 
extends  over  the  slotted  portion  of  the  head  36,  to 
hold  the  head  in  proper  position  relative  to  the  arm 
34.  By  means  of  the  indicating-surface  58,  through 
the  lever  57,  link  60,  arm  61,  shaft  62,  arm  63,  and  con- 
nector 64,  a  positive  motion  is  communicated  to  the 
switch-lever  65,  to  move  the  upper  end  65',  thereof 
out  from  under  the  pin  35,  in  the  arm  34,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  2,  to  allow  the  head  36,  and  rod  37,  to  move 
freely  up  and  down  without  moving  the  arm  34. 

The  switch-lever  65,  is  provided  with  an  outwardly 
extending  arm  67,  the  outer  end  of  which  is  adapted 
to  ride  over  an  inclined  surface  68',  on  the  lever  68, 
and  extend  into  a  notch  68",  in  the  inner  edge  of 
said  lever.  A  spring  69,  acts  to  hold  said  arm  67,  in 
engagement  with  said  notch  68",  in  the  lever  68,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  2,  and  until  said  arm  67,  is  disengaged 
from  said  notch  the  switch-lever  65,  will  remain  in 
the  position  shown  in  Fig.  2,  in  which  position,  as 
before  stated,  the  head  36  and  rod  37  are  free  to 
move  up  and  down  without  moving  the  arm  34.  Thus 
both  the  main  pattern-chain  and  the  auxiliary  pattern- 
chain  will  remain  at  rest  and  the  drop-boxes  remain 
stationary  while  one  shuttle  is  weaving  in  the  body 
of  the  fabric. 

To    release   the   switch-lever  65, 
and  allow  the  same  to  be  moved 
back  under  the  pin  35,  to  cause  the 
arm  34  to  be  moved  by  the  head  36, 
and  rod  37  to  operate  the  pattern- 
chains,  the  upper  end  of  the  lever  68, 
is  connected  through  a  connection 
70,  passing  over  a  pulley  71,  loose 
on  the  rock-shaft  31,  and  over  a 
pulley   72,   mounted   on   the   loom  g 
side,   (see   Fig.   1)   to  a  lever  73, 
pivoted  at  its  lower  end  on  a  stud 
74,  in  the  stand  75,   (see  Fig.  6) 
and  provided  with  an  arm  or  lower 
lever  76,  pivoted  thereon  to  move  in 
a  horizontal  plane.    The  free  end  of 
the  arm  or  lever  76,  is  adapted  to  travel  on  the  peri- 
phery of  a  disk  77,  which  is  the  indicating-disk,  and 
in  this  instance  is  made  integral  with  the  gear  77',  fast 
on  the  shaft  78,  of  the  friction  take-up  roll. 

A  pinion  79,  fast  on  a  driven  shaft  80,  meshes  with 
the  teeth  on  the  gear  77'  (See  Fig.  1).  A  spring  81, 
is  attached  at  one  end  to  the  projection  82,  on  the 
stand  75  and  at  its  other  end  to  lever  73,  and  acts 
to  hold  projection  73',  on  lower  part  of  said  lever 
in  engagement  with  the  heel  or  projection  76',  on  the 
arm  or  lever  76,  and  the  free  end  of  the  arm  or  lever 
76,  on  the  periphery  of  the  disk  77  (See  Fig.  7).  Pro- 
jections 73'  and  76',  are  connected  by  a  spring  85. 

On  the  indicating-disk  77,  are  secured,  in  this  in- 
stance, by  screws  83,  indicating  devices  or  switch- 
cams  84,  in  this  instance  two  in  number. 

As  the  indicating-disk  77  revolves,  the  arm  or  lever 
76  travels  on  the  periphery  thereof  until  it  engages 
the  curved  plate  84',  of  the  switch-cam  84,  which  ex- 
tends over  the  periphery  of  the  disk,  as  shown  in  Fig. 
8.  The  curved  plate  84',  causes  the  arm  76,  to  leave 
the  periphery  of  the  disk  77,  and  the  spring  81,  acts 
to  move  the  lever  73,  on  its  pivot  74,  and  cause  the 
free  end  of  the  arm  76,  to  drop  into  the  notch  84",  in 
the  switch-cam  84,  against  the  action  of  the  spring  85. 
The  movement  of  the  lever  73,  through  connection  70, 


moves  the  lever  68,  inwardly  at  its  upper  end  and  dis- 
engages the  arm  67,  on  the  switch-lever  65,  from  the 
notch  68",  in  said  lever  68,  and  allows  the  spring  69, 
to  act  to  move  the  upper  end  65',  of  the  switch-lever 
65,  under  the  pin  35,  in  the  arm  34  (See  Fig.  3). 

From  the  thus  given  description,  in  connection  with 
the  drawings,  the  operation  of  the  supplemental  mech- 
anism, in  connection  with  the  operation  of  the  main 
pattern-chain  and  the  auxiliary  pattern-chain  mech- 
anisms, will  be  readily  understood. 

The  pattern-surfaces  are  made  up  to  produce  the  de- 
sired pattern  in  the  fabric,  and  the  indicators,  which 
operate  the  supplemental  indicating-lever  57,  of  the 
mechanism,  are  arranged  according  to  the  length  of 
the  body  of  the  fabric  to  be  woven,  and  the  indicating 
devices  or  switch-cams  84,  on  the  indicating-disk  77, 
are  adjusted  to  correspond. 

Supposing  the  parts  to  be  in  the  position  shown  in 
Fig.  3  and  the  loom  running,  as  long  as  a  tube  8,  on 
the  main  pattern-surfaces  comes  under  the  indicator- 
lever  20,  said  lever  will  stay  down  and  through  the 
pawl-shield  53,  prevent  the  pawl  33,  on  the  arm  30, 
from  engaging  with  the  ratchet-wheel  29,  to  turn  the 
auxiliary  pattern-chain  13,  and  a  roll  9,  on  said  auxili- 
ary pattern-chain  13,  being  under  the  indicator-lever 
25,  (see  Fig.  4)  will  hold  said  lever  up  and  keep  the 
end  49',  of  the  pawl-shield  49,  down,  as  shown  in  Fig. 


2,  so  that  the  pawl  32,  will  engage  with  the  ratchet 
23,  and  turn  the  main  pattern-chain  5.  The  next  turn 
of  the  main  pattern-chain  5,  as  shown  in  the  draw- 
ings, will  bring  a  roll  9,  under  the  indicator-lever  20, 
(see  Fig.  4)  which  will  raise  said  lever  and  at  the  same 
time  lower  the  end  53',  of  the  pawl-shield  53,  con- 
nected with  said  lever  20,  so  that  on  the  return  move- 
ment of  the  arm  30,  the  pawl  33,  will  engage  with  the 
ratchet-wheel  29,  and  move  the  auxiliary  pattern-chain 
13,  to  bring  a  tube  8,  under  the  indicator-lever  25, 
(see  Fig.  4)  which  will  cause  said  lever  to  drop  down 
and  at  the  same  time  raise  the  end  49',  of  the  pawl- 
shield  49,  connected  with  said  lever  25,  so  that  on  the 
return  movement  of  the  arm  30,  the  pawl  32,  will  be 
held  out  of  engagement  with  the  ratchet-wheel  23, 
thus  leaving  the  main  pattern-chain  5,  at  rest  as  long 


34 


•as  the  multiplier-chain  13,  runs  and  a  tube  comes 
under  the  indicator-lever  25.  As  soon  as  a  roll  9, 
comes  under  said  lever  25,  the  same  is  raised  and  the 
end  49',  of  the  pawl-shield  49,  dropped,  and  then  the 
main  pattern-chain  5,  is  operated,  as  before  described, 
olid  so  the  operation  continues  until  in  the  revolution 
of  the  main  pattern-chain  cylinder  3,  the  indicating 
surface  58,  is  brought  under  the  projecting  point  57", 
of  the  indicator-lever  57.  The  next  revolution  of  the 
main  pattern-chain  cylinder  will  raise  said  indicating- 
lever  57,  and,  through  link  60,  arm  61,  shaft  62,  arm 


ing  runs  out,  the  give-way  or  lock  connection  between 
the  arm  34,  and  the  head  36,  on  the  rod  37,  operates 
through  the  cord  or  chain  41,  attached  to  the  arm  45, 
on  the  filling-stop-motion  shaft  46,  to  move  in  the 
head  36,  and  cause  the  pin  35,  to  extend  into  the 
upper  slotted  part  36',  of  the  head  36,  and  allow  said 
head  and  rod  37,  to  move  up  and  down  without  mov- 
ing the  arm  34.  After  the  filling  is  replaced  the  re- 
turn movement  of  the  filling-stop-motion  shaft  46, 
will  slacken  the  cord  41,  and  allow  the  spring-actuated 
pawl  47,  to  act  to  push  out  the  head  36,  and  bring  the 
pin  35,  on  the  arm  34,  into  the  notch  36',  and  hold  it 
there  to  make  a  connection  between 
said  arm  34,  and  the  head  36,  on 
the  connector-rod  37. 

We  are  thus  enabled,  automati- 
cally, through  a  supplemental  indi- 
cating-surface and  mechanism  oper- 
ated thereby  to  automatically  stop 
the  operation  of  the  main  pattern- 
chain   and    the   multiplier  pattern- 
chain,  and  through  an  indicating- 
disk  on  the  take-up-roll   shaft  or 
other  driven  shaft  of  the  loom  we  are 
enabled  through  intervening  connections  to  automat- 
ically put  into  operation  the  main  and  auxiliary  pattern 
mechanisms. 

The  supplemental  mechanism  may  be  readily  com- 
bined with  looms  of  ordinary  construction  of  the  class 
referred  to,  and  by  means  of  the  adjustable  indicating 
devices  or  switch-cams  on  the  indicating-disk  77,  we 
can  adjust  the  same  according  to  the  length  of  the 
body  of  the  fabric  desired  to  be  woven  without  chang- 


63,  and  connector  64,  move  the  switch-lever  65,  into 
the  position  shown  in  Fig.  2.  The  switch-lever  65, 
will  be  held  in  this  position  by  means  of  the  arm  67, 
engaging  the  notch  68",  in  the  lever  68,  as  above  de- 
scribed. The  head  36  and  rod  37,  are  now  free  to 
move  up  and  down  without  moving  the  arm  34,  which 
operates  the  pawl-carrying  arm  30.  The  body  of  the 
fabric  is  now  woven,  the  main  pattern-chain  and  the 
auxiliary  pattern-chain  remaining  at  rest. 

The  projecting  end  57",  of  the  indicating-lever  57, 
is  so  made  relative  to  the  indicating-surface  58,  that  it 
will  engage  said  surface  to  operate  the  lever  57,  in 
advance  of  the  indicating-surfaces  which  act  on  the 
other  levers  over  the  main  pattern-chain,  and  before 
the  surface  58,  reaches  the  top  of  the  cylinder  or  barrel 
3,  (as  shown  in  Fig.  5)  the  pawl-carrying  arm  30,  will 
continue  to  operate  by  the  downward  movement  of  the 
head  36,  and  arm  37,  to  move  the  cylinder  3,  of  the 
main  patern  surface  sufficiently  to  carry  the  indicating- 
surface  58,  beyond  the  projecting  end  57",  of  the  in- 
dicating-lever 57,  to  allow  said  lever  to  drop  at  the 
proper  time. 

When  the  desired  length  of  the  body  of  the  fabric 
is  woven,  the  revolution  of  the  indicating-disk  77,  as 
the  friction  take-up  roll  is  revolved,  will  bring  the 
switch-cam  84,  into  engagement  with  the  arm  76,  and, 
through  spring  81,  lever  73,  and  cord  connection  70, 
the  lever  68,  will  be  moved  in  at  its  upper  end,  releas- 
ing the  switch-lever  65,  which  is  then  moved  by  the 
spring  6g,  into  the  position  shown  in  Fig.  3,  with  the 
end  65',  extending  under  the  pin  35,  in  the  arm  30. 
The  main  pattern-surface  and  the  auxiliary  pattern-sur- 
face are  then  again  put  into  operation. 

If  at  any  time  in  the  operation  of  the  loom  the  fill- 


ing the  disk.  By  changing  the  gears  77',  and  79,  we 
may  vary  the  speed  of  the  indicating-disk  77,  to  make 
it  revolve  faster  or  slower,  as  desired.  (Crompton  and 
Knowles  Loom  Works.) 


35 


THE  KNOWIES  FOUR  CHAIN  MULTIPLIER. 

The  object  of  this  multiplier  is  to  do  away  with 
indicator-disk  on  the  previously  explained  multiplier 
on  the  take-up  roll  and  the  connections  therefrom 
to  the  chain  mechanisms,  and  to  provide  a  four  pat- 
tern-chain mechanism  which  operates  in  connection 
with  the  main  pattern-chain  mechanism  to  start  said 
mechanism  instantly  when  desired,  that  is,  to  change 
on  the  pick.  The  fourth  pattern-chain  is  also  used  in 
connection  with  the  third  pattern-chain  as  a  multi- 
plier chain  in  the  same  way  as  the  ordinary  multiplier 
chain  is  used  in  connection  with  the  main  pattern- 
chain.  For  example,  if  the  third  pattern-chain  is  weav- 
ing stripes  by  means  of  the  fourth  pattern-chain  the 
stripes  can  be  divided  and  additional  stripes  put  in 
without  increasing  the  length  of  the  third  chain. 

In  the  accompanying  illustrations  the  improvement 
is  shown  applied  to  a  four-by-one  drop-box  loom  com- 
bined with  main  and  multiplier  pattern-chain  mech- 
anisms. 

Referring  to  the  drawings,  Fig.   i  shows  a  loom 
side,  on  the  upper  part  of  which  is  supported  the  box- 
pattern-indicating  mechanism  embodying  the  improve- 
ments and  upon  the  lower  part  the  box-shifting  mech- 
anism.   Fig.  2  is  a  front  view  of  the  box-indicatin 
mechanism  shown  in  Fig.   i,  looking  in 
the  direction  of  arrow  a,  Fig.  4.    Fig.  3  is 
a  rear  view  of  the  box-pattern-indicating 
mechanism,  looking  in  the  direction  of 
arrow       Fig.  4.    Fig.  4  is  a  plan  view 
looking  in  the  direction  of  arrow  c,  Fig. 
2.    Fig.  5  is  a  vertical  cross-section  on 
line  5-5,  Fig.  4,  looking  in  the  direction 
of  arrow  «,  same  figure.    The  parts  shown 
at  the  left  in  Fig.  4  and  some  of  the  other 
parts  are  not  shown  in  this  figure.    Fig.  6 
is  a  vertical  cross-section  on  line  6-6,  Fig. 
4,  looking  in  the  direction  of  arrow  «, 
same  figure;  and  Fig.  7  is  a  vertical  sec- 
tion on  line  7-7,  Fig.  4,  looking  in  the 
direction  of  arrow  «,  same  figure.  Figs. 
2  to  7,  inclusive,  are  shown  on  an  en- 
larged   scale    compared    to  illustration 
Fig.  1. 

In  the  accompanying  drawings  on  the 
top  of  the  loom  side  or  end  is  supported 
the  loom-arch  stand  1,  on  the  upper  part 
of  which  is  secured  the  stand  or  frame  2, 
on  which  are  supported  the  several  parts 
of  the  drop-box  pattern-indicating  mech- 
anism. 

In  said  pattern-indicating  mechanism,  3 
is  the  main  pattern-chain  cylinder,  loosely 
mounted  on  a  stud  4,  secured  in  the  frame 

2.  Said  cylinder  or  barrel  3,  has  grooved  or  notched 
heads  or  ends  and  carries  the  main  pattern-chain  5, 
made  up  of  links  6,  which  connect  the  bars  7,  upon 
which  are  mounted  tubes  8,  and  rolls  9.    The  cylinder 

3,  is  provided  with  a  hand-wheel  10,  by  means  of 
which  said  cylinder  is  turned  in  either  direction,  as 
desired. 

The  auxiliary  or  multiplier  pattern-chain  cylinder 
11,  is  loosely  mounted  on  a  stud  12.  supported  in  the 
frame  2  and  in  the  bracket  2',  and  in  this  instance 
upon  the  opposite  side  of  the  stand  2  from  the  main 
pattern-chain  cylinder  (See  Fig.  4).  The  cylinder  II, 
carries  the  auxiliary  or  multiplier  pattern-chain  13, 
made  up  of  links  6,  bars  7,  tubes  8,  and  rolls  9,  similar 
to  the  main  pattern-chain  5.  The  cylinder  11,  is  pro- 
vided with  a  hand-wheel  14,  to  turn  said  cylinder  in 
either  direction,  as  desired. 

On  a  stud  15,  secured  in  a  boss  16,  on  one  end  of  the 
stand  2,  are  loosely  mounted  the  outer  weighted  ends 
of  two  shuttle-box-indicator  levers  17  and  18,  which 


extend  over  and  are  operated  by  the  main  pattern- 
chain  5.  The  inner  ends  of  the  levers  17  and  18,  are- 
provided  with  open-end  slots  to  receive  the  loops  or 
heads  19',  on  the  upper  ends  of  the  connector-rods 
19,  (see  Figs.  1  and  2)  which  lead  to  the  two  con- 
nectors 48,  to  which  they  are  adjustably  attached  by 
a  collar  49  and  set-screw  50  (See  Fig.  1).  The  con- 
nector-rods 19,  by  reason  of  the  open-end  slots  in  the 
ends  of  the  levers  17  and  18,  can  move  up  without 
raising  said  levers. 

The  connectors  48,  are  attached  at  their  lower  ends 
to  the  vibrator-levers  20,  of  the  box-shifting  mech- 


anism shown  in  Fig.  1  and  which  consists  of  the  uppe 
and  lower  cylinder-gears  21  and  22,  vibrator-gear  23, 
carried  on  the  vibrator-lever  20,  pivoted  at  its  outer 
end  at  24,  and  the  vibrator-connector  25,  pivoted  at 
one  end  on  the  vibrator-gear  23  and  at  its  other  end 
to  the  compound  lever  26,  which  operates  the  shuttle- 
box-lifter. 

A  ratchet-wheel  28,  is  mounted  on  the  stud  4,  and 
is  secured  to  the  main  pattern-chain  cylinder  3  (See 
Fig.  4).  A  stop-wheel  29,  is  also  mounted  on  the 
stud  4,  and  secured  to  the  ratchet-wheel  28,  to  turn 
with  said  ratchet-wheel.  Said  stop-wheel  is  provided 
with  concave  portions  29',  in  its  periphery,  into  which 
is  adapted  to  extend  the  convex  portion  30',  on  the 
lock-lever  30,  pivoted  at  31,  on  the  frame  2  (see  Fig. 
6),  and  connected  by  a  spring  32,  and  link  32',  to  a 
similar  lock-lever. 

On  the  stud  12,  of  the  multiplier  pattern-chain  cyl- 
inder 11,  is  mounted  a  ratchet  33,  (see  Figs.  4  and  7) 
which  is  secured  to  the  multiplier  pattern-chain  cyl- 


36 


inder  n.  A  stop-wheel  34,  (see  Fig.  4)  is  also 
mounted  on  said  stud  12  and  secured  to  the  ratchet- 
wheel  to  turn  with  said  ratchet-wheel,  and  is  provided 
with  concave  portions  34',  in  its  periphery,  into  which 
extends  a  convex  portion  35',  on  the  lock-lever  35, 
pivoted  at  35",  on  the  frame  2  (See  Figs.  3  and  7). 
A  spring  36,  encircling  a  pin  36',  sliding  at  one  end 
in  an  eye  36",  and  secured  at  its  other  end  to  the 
lock-lever  35,  (see  Fig.  3)  acts  to  hold  said  lever  35, 
in  engagement  with  the  stop-wheel  34. 

We  will  now  describe  the  third  pattern-chain  mech- 
anism, combined  with  the  main  pattern-chain  and  the 
multiplier  pattern-chain  mechanisms  above  described 
and  the  shuttle-drop-box  shifting  mechanism  and  in 
this  instance  located  at  the  front  of  the  stand  or  frame 
2,  and  in  front  of  and  in  line  with  the  multiplier  pat- 
tern-chain 13. 

On  a  stud  37,  supported  in  the  frame  2  and  the 
bracket  2",  is  loosely  mounted  a  pattern-chain  cylinder 
38,  carrying  the  supplemental  pattern-chain  39,  made  up 
of  links  6,  bars  7,  tubes  8,  and  rolls  9.    The  pattern- 


It  will  be  seen  that  the  movement  of  the  indicator- 
levers  17,  and  18,  on  the  main  pattern-chain  5,  through 
the  connector-rods  19,  attached  to  the  connector-rods 
48,  will  communicate  motion  to  the  vibrator-levers  20, 
of  the  box-shifting  mechanism,  and  the  indicator- 
levers  46  and  47,  on  the  third  pattern-chain  39, 
through  connector-rods  48,  attached  to  the  vibrator- 
levers  20,  will  also  communicate  motion  to  said 
vibrator-levers  20,  to  operate  the  box-shifting  mech- 
anism. 

We  will  now  describe  the  fourth  pattern-chain  mech- 
anism. On  the  stud  44,  is  loosely  mounted  a  pattern- 
chain  cylinder  149,  carrying  the  fourth  pattern-chain 
150,  made  up  of  the  links  6,  bars  7,  tubes  8,  and  rolls 
9.  On  the  stud  44,  of  the  pattern-chain  cylinder  149, 
is  mounted  a  ratchet-wheel  151,  which  is  secured  to 
the  pattern-chain  cylinder  149.  A  stop-wheel  152,  is 
also  mounted  on  said  stud  44,  and  is  secured  to  the 
ratchet-wheel  151,  to  turn  with  said  ratchet-wheel,  and 
is  provided  with  concave  portions  152',  in  its  periphery, 
into  which  is  adapted  to  extend  a  convex  portion 


chain  cylinder  38,  is  provided  with  a  hand-wheel  40, 
to  turn  said  cylinder  in  either  direction,  as  desired. 

On  the  stud  37,  of  the  third  pattern-chain  cylinder 
38,  is  mounted  a  ratchet-wheel  41,  which  is  secured  to 
said  third  pattern-chain  cylinder  38.  A  stop-wheel 
42,  is  also  mounted  on  said  stud  37,  and  is  secured 
to  the  ratchet-wheel  41,  to  turn  with  said  ratchet- 
wheel,  and  is  provided  with  concave  portions  42',  in 
its  periphery,  in  which  is  adapted  to  extend  a  convex 
portion  43',  on  the  lock-lever  43,  pivoted  at  43",  on 
the  frame  2,  (see  Fig.  6)  and  connected  by  a  link  32', 
and  a  spring  32,  to  the  lock-lever  30.  The  spring  32, 
acts  to  draw  the  lock-levers  30  and  43,  toward  each 
other,  to  hold  them  in  engagement  with  the  stop- 
wheels  29  and  42,  as  shown  in  Fig.  6. 

On  a  stud  44,  secured  in  a  boss  45,  on  the  frame  2, 
are  loosely  mounted  the  outer  weighted  ends  of  two 
shuttle-box-indicator  levers  46  and  47,  which  extend 
over  and  are  operated  by  the  third  pattern-chain  39. 
The  inner  ends  of  the  levers  46  and  47,  are  in  this 
instance  provided  with  open  end  slots  to  receive  the 
loops  or  heads  48',  on  the  upper  end  of  the  con- 
nector-rods 48,  and  allow  said  rods  48,  to  move  up 
without  raising  said  levers.  The  lower  ends  of  said 
rods  48,  are  attached  to  the  vibrator-levers  20,  of  the 
box-shifting  mechanism  above  described  (See  Fig.  1). 


153',  on  the  lock-lever  153,  pivoted  at  154,  on  the 
frame  2  (See  Fig.  6).  A  spring  155,  is  connected  at 
one  end  to  said  lock-lever  153,  and  at  its  other  end 
to  a  pin  156,  on  the  frame  2,  and  acts  to  hold  the 
lock-lever  in  engagement  with  the  stop-wheel  152,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  6. 

We  will  now  describe  the  mechanism  for  operating 
the  main  pattern-chain  5,  multiplier  pattern-chain  13, 
and  third  pattern-chain  39,  and  fourth  pattern-chain 
150. 

In  the  lower  central  part  of  the  frame  2,  in  a  boss 
51,  is  mounted  a  shaft  52,  (see  Figs.  4  and  6)  adapted 
to  have  a  rocking  motion.  On  the  front  end  of  the 
shaft  52,  is  secured  by  a  set-screw  53,  the  lower  end  of 
the  rocking  pawl-carrying  arm  54.  Upon  the  upper 
end  of  said  pawl-carrying  arm  54,  are  pivoted  four 
pawls  55,  56,  57,  and  158.  The  pawl  55,  acts  as  a  pull- 
pawl  and  is  provided  with  a  hook  55',  at  its  free  end, 
which  extends  over  and  engages  the  teeth  on  the 
ratchet-wheel  41,  to  move  said  ratchet-wheel,  and  with 
it  the  pattern-chain  cylinder  38,  and  the  third  pattern- 
chain  39.    The  pawl  56,  is  pivoted  on  the  opposite  side 


37 


-of  the  pawl-carrying  arm  54,  from  the  pawl  55,  and 
acts  as  a  push-pawl,  and  its  free  end  engages  the  teeth 
on  the  ratchet-wheel  33,  to  move  said  ratchet-wheel 
and  with  it  the  pattern-chain  cylinder  11,  and  multi- 
plier pattern-chain  13. 

The  pawl  57,  is  pivoted  on  the  front  of  the  pawl- 
carrying  arm  54,  and  extends  in  an  opposite  direction 
to  the  pawls  55,  and  56.  Said  pawl  57,  acts  as  a  push- 
pawl,  and  the  free  end  thereof  engages  with  the 
ratchet-teeth  on  the  rachet-wheel  28,  to  move  said 
ratchet-wheel  and  the  pattern-chain  cylinder  3,  and 
main  pattern-chain  5.  The  pawl  158,  is  pivoted  on  the 
upper  end  of  the  pawl-carrying  arm  54,  and  extends 
over  the  pawl  56,  (see  Figs.  4  and  6)  and  acts  as  a 
push-pawl,  and  engages  the  teeth  on  the  ratchet-wheel 
151,  to  move  said  ratchet-wheel  and  with  it  the  pat- 
tern-chain cylinder  149,  and  the  fourth  pattern-chain 
150.  Upon  the  opposite  end  of  the  shaft  52,  from  the 
pawl-carrying  arm  54,  is  secured  the  inner  end  of  the 
arm  58,  (see  Fig.  3)  which  is  connected  through  a 
give-way  or  lock  connection  with  the  driven  part  of 
the  loom.  Said  lock  connection  and  mechanism  con- 
nected with  the  stop-motion  shaft  to  automatically 


connection  62,  will  be  pulled  to  draw  the  head  60,  of 
the  connector-rod  61,  to  the  right  in  Fig.  3,  and  move 
the  screw  or  pin  59,  out  of  the  notch  60",  into  the  slot 
60',  to  allow  the  head  60,  and  connector-rod  61,  to 
move  up  and  down  without  moving  the  arm  58,  so 
that  the  pattern-indicating  mechanism  will  be  instantly 
stopped,  though  the  loom  may  continue  to  run. 

A  pawl  68,  pivoted  at  69,  on  the  arm  58,  and  bearing 
at  one  end  against  the  inner  edge  of  the  head  60,  and 
attached  at  its  other  end  to  one  end  of  a  spring  70, 
which  is  secured  at  its  other  end  to  the  arm  58,  acts 
to  hold  the  screw  59,  in  the  notch  60",  in  the  head  60, 
to  form  a  lock  connection  between  the  connector-rod 
61,  and  the  arm  58. 

We  will  now  describe  the  mechanism  for  controlling 
the  engagement  of  the  pawls  55,  56,  57,  and  158,  with 
their  respective  ratchet-wheels,  so  that  only  one  pat- 
tern-chain will  be  operated  at  a  time- — that  is,  the 
main  pattern-chain,  the  multiplier  pattern-chain,  the 
third  pattern-chain,  and  the  fourth  pattern-chain  will 
be  operated  at  the  proper  time. 

The  stopping  and  starting  of  the  pattern-chains  at 
the  proper  time  is  controlled  by  indicator-levers  ex- 


operate  said  lock  connection  and  disconnect  the  arm 
<6s,  to  stop  the  movement  of  said  arm  and  the  pawl- 
carrying  arm  54,  is  of  such  construction  that  the  move- 
ment of  the  four  pattern-chains  will  cease  in  case  the 
filling  gives  out  and  the  filling  stop-motion  shaft  acts 
to  stop  the  loom. 

The  outer  end  of  the  arm  58,  is  provided  with  a 
screw  or  pin  59,  which  is  adapted  to  engage  a  notch 
60",  leading  out  from  a  vertical  slot  60',  in  the  head  60, 
on  the  upper  end  of  the  connector-rod  61.  The  lower 
end  of  said  connector-rod  61,  is  connected  with  a 
cam  on  the  bottom  shaft  or  with  some  other  driven 
part  of  the  loom,  (not  shown)  from  which  a  con- 
tinuous up-and-down  motion  is  communicated  to  said 
rod  61,  and,  through  the  arm  58,  to  the  rock-shaft  52 
and  the  pawl-carrying  arm  54. 

From  the  head  60,  of  the  connector-rod  61,  a  con- 
nection 62,  leads  over  a  pulley  63,  loose  on  the  shaft 
52,  (see  Fig.  3)  and  over  two  pulleys  64,  and  65, 
mounted  on  the  loom  side,  (see  broken  lines,  Fig.  1) 
to  an  arm  66,  fast  on  the  stop-motion  shaft  67,  so  that 
when  the  loom  is  stopped  by  the  stop-motion  shaft 
in  the  ordinary  way,  in  case  the  filling  gives  out,  the 


tending  over  and  operated  by  the  pattern-chains  and 
connecting  mechanisms. 

As  before  stated,  the  main  pattern-chain  5,  is  used 
to  weave  in  the  headings  or  borders  and  the  multi- 
plier pattern-chain  13,  is  used  in  connection  with  the 
main  pattern-chain  5,  to  repeat  certain  bars  of  the  main 
pattern-chain,  the  main  pattern-chain  being  at  rest 
while  the  multiplier  pattern-chain  is  working  and  the 
multiplier  pattern-chain  being  at  rest  while  the  main 
pattern-chain  is  working. 

The  third  pattern-chain  39,  is  used  for  weaving  the 
striped  body  of  the  fabric  between  the  headings,  and 
the  fourth  pattern-chain  150,  is  used  in  connection  with 
the  third  pattern-chain  39,  to  repeat  certain  bars  of 
said  third  pattern-chain,  said  third  pattern-chain  being 
at  rest  while  the  fourth  pattern-chain  is  working  and 
the  fourth  pattern-chain  being  at  rest  while  the  third 
pattern-chain  is  working.  It  will  be  understood  that 
of  the  four  pattern-chains  only  one  is  working  at  the 
same  time. 

In  order  to  control  the  movement  of  the  ratchet- 
wheel  33,  of  the  multiplier  pattern-chain  mechanism, 
a  shield  or  guard  71.  is  provided,  which  extends  under 
the  pawl  56,  (see  Fig.  4)  to  raise  said  pawl  and  pre- 
vent its  engagement  with  said  ratchet-wheel  33.  The 
shield  or  guard  71,  is  pivoted  at  72,  on  the  stand  2, 


38 


(see  Fig.  7)  and  has  an  extension  or  arm  71',  on  the 
opposite  side  of  its  pivot-support,  the  end  of  which 
is  provided  with  an  open-end  slot  into  which  extends 
a  pin  7.3,  extending  out  from  the  weighted  end  74', 
of  the  indicator-lever  74,  extending  over  the  main 
pattern-chain  5,  loosely  mounted  at  its  outer  end  on 
the  stud  15  (see  Fig.  4).  It  will  thus  be  seen  that 
the  row  of  indicators  on  the  main  pattern-chain  5, 
under  the  indicator-lever  74,  through  said  lever  74, 
pin  73,  and  the  arm  71',  and  shield  71,  controls  the 
action  of  the  pawl  56  of  the  multiplier  pattern-chain 
mechanism. 

A  shield  or  guard  75,  extends  under  the  pawl  57, 
which  moves  the  ratchet-wheel  28,  of  the  main  pattern- 
chain  mechanism.  The  shield  75,  is  pivoted  at  76,  on 
the  stand  2,  (see  Fig.  7)  and  has  an  arm  or  extension 
75',  on  the  opposite  side  of  its  pivot-support,  the  end 
of  which  is  provided  with  an  open-end  slot  into  which 
extends  a  pin  77,  extending  out  from  the  weighted  end 
78',  of  the  indicator-lever  78,  extending  over  the  mul- 
tiplier pattern-chain  13,  and  loosely  mounted  at  its 
outer  end  on  the  stud  44  (See  Figs.  4  and  7). 

It  will  thus  be  seen  that  the  row  of  indicators  on 
the  multiplier  pattern-chain  13,  under  the  indicator- 
lever  78,  through  said  lever  78,  pin  77,  and  the  arm 


rear  extension  79',  engaging  with  the  upward  exten- 
sion 82',  on  the  arm  82. 

Extending  over  the  main  pattern-chain  5,  is  an  in- 
dicator-lever 84,  the  outer  end  of  which  is  mounted 
loosely  on  the  stud  15,  and  the  inner  end  provided 
with  a  pin  85,  which  extends  over  the  top  of  the 
pawl-carrying  arm  54,  (see  Fig.  4)  to  limit  the  down- 
ward motion  of  said  lever  at  its  free  end.  The  indi- 
cator-lever 84,  has  a  downward  extension  84'  thereon, 
(see  Fig.  3)  which  is  adapted  to  be  engaged  by  an 
indicator  86,  on  the  main  pattern-chain. 

The  indicators  which  act  on  the  indicator-lever  84, 
form  a  separate  row  of  tubes  and  rolls  between  the 
heads  or  ends  of  the  pattern-cylinder,  or,  as  in  this 
instance,  the  indicators  may  be  substituted  for  one  of 
the  tubes  which  extend  into  the  notches  or  grooves 
in  the  ends  of  the  cylinder  or  barrel  (See  Fig.  4). 

A  link  87,  connects  the  outer  end  of  the  indicator- 
lever  84,  with  the  arm  82,  forming  a  part  of  the  shield 
80  (See  Fig.  2). 

An  angle-lever  88,  (see  Figs.  6  and  7)  is  pivoted  at 
89.  on  the  frame  2,  and  is  provided  with  a  notched 
portion  88',  in  the  upper  end  of  its  vertical  arm,  into 
which  a  downward  extension  82",  on  the  arm  82,  is 
adapted  to  extend.    A  spring  90,  attached  to  the  arm 


jfl 


-14? 


11 

—  J 


'I 

75'  and  shield  75,  controls  the  action  of  the  pawl  57, 
of  the  main  pattern-chain  mechanism,  in  connection 
with  a  shield  or  guard  79,  connected  with  the  third 
pattern-chain  mechanism. 

We  will  now  describe  the  construction  and  opera- 
tion of  the  shield  or  guard  which  extends  under  the 
pawl  55,  which  operates  the  ratchet-wheel  41,  of  the 
third  pattern-chain  39. 

The  shield  or  guard  80,  is  pivoted  at  81,  on  the  stand 
2  (See  Fig.  7).  Said  shield  or  guard  extends  under 
the  projecting  end  55',  of  the  operating  pawl  55,  of 
the  third  pattern-chain  39  (See  Fig.  4).  Upon  the 
opposite  side  of  the  pivot  81,  of  the  shield  80,  is  an 
extension  or  arm  82,  upon  the  outer  upper  end  of  which 
is  pivoted  the  lower  end  of  the  shield  or  guard  79, 
which  extends  under  the  pawl  57,  of  the  main  pattern- 
chain  mechanism  and  operates  in  connection  with  the 
shield  75,  as  above  stated. 

The  shield  79,  has  a  pivotal  motion  in  a  vertical 
plane  on  the  supporting  arm  82,  and  is  provided  with 
a  rear  extension  79',  which  engages  an  upward  exten- 
sion 82',  on  the  arm  82.  A  spring  83,  attached  to  the 
shield  79,  and  to  the  upward  extension  82',  (see  Fig. 
3)  holds  the  shield  79,  in  its  raised  position  with  the 


82  and  to  the  stand  2,  and  a  spring  91,  attached  to  the 
angle-lever  88  and  to  the  stand  2,  act  to  hold  the  arm 
82,  and  the  angle-lever  88,  in  engagement,  as  shown 
in  Figs.  6  and  7. 

Upon  the  stud  144,  is  loosely  mounted  the  outer 
end  of  the  indicator-lever  92,  (see  Figs.  2  and  4)  which 
extends  over  and  is  acted  on  by  indicators  on  the 
fourth  pattern-chain  10.  On  the  inner  end  of  the  in- 
dicator-lever 92,  is  hung  the  upper  end  of  a  connector 
93,  which  has  a  vertical  slot  93',  in  the  lower  end 
thereof,  through  which  extends  loosely  a  screw  112, 
secured  in  the  end  of  the  lower  arm  of  the  angle-lever 
88  (See  Fig.  2). 

In  the  revolution  of  the  fourth  pattern-chain  150, 
when  the  pattern-indicator  109,  comes  under  the  lever 
92,  said  lever  will  be  raised  and  with  it  the  connector 
or  arm  93,  (see  Figs.  2  and  6)  causing  the  angle-lever 
88,  through  the  engagement  of  the  pin  112,  thereon 
with  said  arm  93,  to  move  on  its  pivotal  support  and 
be  disengaged  from  the  arm  82,  of  the  shield  80,  and 
allow  the  spring  90,  to  act  to  draw  down  the  arm  82 
and  with  it  the  shield  79,  so  that  the  pawl  57,  can  en- 
gage with  the  ratchet-wheel  28,  of  the  main  pattern- 
chain  mechanism  and  put  said  mechanism  into  opera- 


39 


tion.  At  the  same  time  the  shield  80,  is  raised  to  hold 
the  pawl  55,  out  of  engagement  with  the  ratchet-wheel 
41,  of  the  third  pattern-chain  mechanism  to  stop  said 
mechanism.  As  soon  as  the  pattern-indicator  109, 
passes  from  under  the  lever  92,  said  lever  drops  down 
at  its  free  end  and  with  it  the  connector  93,  the  slot 
93'  in  said  connector  93,  allowing  the  connector  to 
drop  without  moving  the  angle-lever  88. 

The  revolution  of  the  main  pattern-chain  5,  brings 
at  the  proper  time  the  pattern-indicator  86,  on  said 
chain  under  the  indicator-lever  84,  and  raises  said 
lever  84,  and  through  the  link  87,  raises  the  arm  82, 
and  allows  the  spring  91,  to  act  to  draw  over  the 
angle-lever  88,  and  bring  the  end  thereof  under  the 
arm  82,  and  hold  it  in  its  raised  position,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  7.  The  raising  of  the  arm  82,  raises  the  shield 
79,  under  the  pawl  57,  of  the  main  pattern-chain  mech- 
anism and  lowers  the  shield  80,  under  the  pawl  55,  of 
the  third  pattern-chain  mechanism,  as  shown  in  Fig.  7. 

The  shield  79,  extending  under  the  pawl  57,  of  the 
main  pattern-chain  mechanism,  is  pivoted  to  the  arm 
82,  to  have  a  movement  in  a  vertical  plane  independent 


Extending  out  from  the  inner  end  of  the  indicator- 
lever  114,  is  a  pin  115,  which  extends  into  the  open- 
end  slot  in  one  end  of  the  shield  or  guard  116,  centrally 
pivoted  on  the  frame  2  (See  Fig.  6).  The  opposite 
end  of  the  shield  or  guard  116,  extends  under  the 
pawl  ss,  which  engages  the  ratchet-wheel  41,  to  operate 
the  third  pattern-chain  39. 

It  will  be  seen  that  in  the  revolution  of  the  fourth 
pattern-chain  150,  when  a  roll  comes  under  the  in- 
dicator-lever 114,  said  lever  will  be  raised  and  move 
the  shield  116,  on  its  pivotal  support  and  cause  one 
end  of  the  shield  to  be  raised  and  the  other  end  under 
the  pawl  55,  to  be  lowered  to  allow  said  pawl  55,  to 
drop  down  and  engage  the  ratchet-wheel  41,  to  put 
into  operation  the  third  pattern-chain  39. 

The  third  and  fourth  pattern-chains  cooperate  to 
weave  the  fabric  according  to  the  pattern,  the  fourth 
pattern-chain  acting  as  a  multiplier  for  the  third  pat- 
tern-chain in  the  same  manner  that  the  first  and 
second  pattern-chains  cooperate  to  weave  the  fabric, 
the  second  pattern-chain  acting  as  a  multiplier  for  the 
first  pattern-chain. 


of  said  arm,  so  that  the  arm  82,  may  be 
raised  while  the  pawl  57,  is  in  engage- 
ment with  the  teeth  of  the  ratchet-wheel 
28,  and  after  the  pawl  57  has  completed 
its  stroke,  the  spring  83  will  then  act  to 
carry  the  pawl  from  engagement  with 
the  ratchet-wheel  by  causing  the  shield 
79,  to  lift  the  said  pawl. 

We  will  now  describe  the  connections  intermediate 
the  third  and  fourth  pattern  mechanisms,  by  means  of 
which  they  co-act,  and  the  starting  of  one  stops  the 
other,  and  vice  versa. 

On  the  stud  44.  is  loosely  mounted  the  end  of  an 
indicator-lever  no  (see  Fig.  4)  the  inner  end  of  which 
extends  over  the  third  pattern-chain  39  (See  Fig.  5). 
Extending  down  from  the  indicating-lever  no,  is  an 
extension  no',  which  has  at  its  lower  end  a  boss  111, 
extending  out  at  right  angles  therefrom  (See  Fig.  4). 
In  said  boss  is  secured  a  pin  112,  which  extends  into 
the  open-end  slot  in  one  end  of  the  shield  or  guard 
113,  centrally  pivoted  on  the  frame  2  (See  Figs.  3  and 
6).  The  opposite  end  of  the  shield  or  guard  113,  ex- 
tends under  the  pawl  158,  which  engages  the  ratchet- 
wheel  151,  to  operate  the  fourth  pattern-chain  150. 

It  will  be  seen  that  in  the  revolution  of  the  third  pat- 
tern-chain 39,  when  a  roll  9,  comes  under  the  indicator- 
lever  no,  said  lever  will  be  raised  and  move  the  shield 
113,  on  its  pivotal  support  and  cause  one  end  of  said 
shield  to  be  raised  and  the  other  end  under  the  pawl 
158,  to  be  lowered  to  allow  said  pawl  158,  to  drop 
down  and  engage  the  ratchet-wheel  151,  to  put  in 
operation  the  fourth  pattern-chain  150,  as  shown  in 
Fig-  3- 

On  the  stud  144,  is  loosely  mounted  the  outer  end 
of  an  indicator  lever  114,  (see  Fig.  4)  the  inner  end 
of  which  extends  over  the  fourth  pattern-chain  150. 


From  the  above  description,  in  con- 
nection with  the  drawings,  the  operation 
of  the  improvements  in  drop-box-indi- 
cating mechanism  in  which  four  pattern- 
chains  are  used  will  be  readily  under- 
stood. 

Suppose  the  loom  is  running,  with  the  third  pattern- 
chain  39,  in  operation,  to  weave  the  striped  body  of  a 
blanket  between  the  headings  or  borders,  in  case  a 
blanket  is  being  woven,  the  other  three  pattern-chains 
will  be  at  rest. 

When  a  roll  9.  on  the  third  pattern-chain  39,  comes 
under  the  indicator-lever  no,  (see  Fig.  4)  said  in- 
dicator-lever will  be  raised,  and  through  pin  112,  en- 
gaging the  inner  end  of  the  shield  113,  (see  Fig.  6) 
the  outer  end  of  said  shield  will  be  dropped  to  allow 
the  pawl  158,  to  engage  and  operate  the  ratchet-wheel 
151,  of  the  fourth  pattern-chain  150.  The  revolution 
of  the  fourth  pattern-chain  150,  will  bring  a  tube  8, 
on  said  pattern-chain  under  the  indicator-lever  114, 
and  will  cause  said  lever  114,  to  drop,  and  through  the 
pin  115,  engaging  the  outer  end  of  the  shield  116, 
will  raise  the  inner  end  of  said  shield  116, 
(see  Fig.  6)  and  raise  the  pawl  55,  out  of  engage- 
ment with  the  ratchet-wheel  41,  of  the  third  pattern- 
chain  mechanism,  so  that  the  third  pattern-chain  39, 
will  stop.  The  fourth  pattern-chain  150,  will  continue 
to  run  and  repeat  the  bars  of  the  third  pattern-chain 
39,  until  a  roll  9,  comes  under  the  indicator-lever  114. 


40 


The  lever  will  then  be  raised,  and  through  pin,  115, 
the  outer  end  of  the  shield  116,  will  be  raised  and 
the  inner  end  will  be  dropped,  allowing  the  pawl  55, 


until  a  roll  9,  comes  under  the  lever  84,  which  will 
raise  said  lever  and,  through  pin  73,  thereon  engaging 

the  arm  71',  of  the  shield  71,  (see  Fig.  7)  lower  said 


to  engage  the  ratchet-wheel  41,  and 
operate  the  third  pattern-chain  39  (See 
Fig.  6).  The  revolution  of  the  third 
pattern-chain  39,  will  bring  a  tube  8, 
under  the  indicator-lever  110,  and, 
through  pin  112,  engaging  the  inner  end 
of  the  shield  113,  will  raise  the  outer 
end  of  said  shield  and  raise  the  pawl 
158,  out  of  engagement  with  the  ratchet- 
wheel  151,  of  the  fourth  pattern-chain  mechanism,  and 
the  fourth  pattern-chain  150,  will  stop. 

This  operation  will  be  repeated,  according  to  the 
arrangement  of  the  third  and  fourth  pattern-chains, 
the  fourth  pattern-chain  acting  as  a  multiplier  for  the 
third  pattern-chain  and  the  two  chains  weaving  the 
striped  body  of  the  fabric  between  the  headings  or 
borders.  In  the  revolution  of  the  fourth  chain  150, 
when  the  indicator  109,  thereon  engages  the  indicator- 
lever  92,  as  shown  in  Fig.  5,  then  said  lever  92,  will  be 
raised  and,  through  connector  93,  (see  Fig.  2)  will 
rock  the  angle-lever  88  and  disconnect  the  upright 
arm  thereof  from  the  extension  82",  on  the  arm  82, 
(see  Fig.  7)  and  allow  the  outer  end  of  said  arm  82 
to  drop  down,  actuated  by  the  spring  90,  and  with  it 
the  shield  79,  so  that  the  pawl  57  can  engage  the 


shield  71,  and  allow  the  pawl  56,  to  drop 
and  engage  the  ratchet-wheel  33,  to  oper- 
ate the  second  or  multiplier  pattern- 
chain  39.  The  revolution  of  the  chain 
39,  will  bring  a  tube  8,  under  the  lever  78,  (see  Fig. 
7)  and,  through  the  pin  77,  on  said  lever  engaging  the 
arm  75',  of  the  shield  75,  will  raise  said  shield  75,  and 
disengage  the  pawl  57,  from  the  ratchet-wheel  28,  so 
that  the  main  pattern-chain  5,  will  stop.  When  in  the 
revolution  of  the  second  pattern-chain  39,  a  roll  9, 
comes  under  the  lever  78,  (see  Fig.  7)  the  shield  75. 
is  lowered,  allowing  the  pawl  57,  to  operate  the  main 
pattern-chain  5,  and  this  operation  is  repeated  as 
desired,  the  second  pattern-chain  39,  acting  as  a 
multiplier  for  the  main  pattern-chain  5,  in  weaving  the 
headings  or  borders  of  the  goods. 

When  in  the  revolution  of  the  main  pattern-chain  5, 


ratchet-wheel  28  and  operate  the  main 
pattern-chain  5.  The  lowering  of  the 
shield  79,  and  arm  82,  raises  the  shield 
80,  which  raises  the  pawl  55  from  en- 
gagement with  the  teeth  of  the  ratchet- 
wheel  41,  of  the  third  pattern-chain 
mechanism  and  stops  the  third  pattern- 
chain  38,  and  a  post  or  stud  170,  fast  at 
its  lower  end  on  the  outer  end  of  the  extension  55'  of 
the  pawl  55  and  extending  under  and  engaging  with 
its  upper  end  the  pawl  158,  acts  to  hold  the  pawl  158, 
out  of  engagement  with  the  ratchet-wheel  151,  of  the 
fourth  pattern-chain  mechanism,  so  that  the  move- 
ment of  the  pawl-carrying  arm  54,  to  the  right,  Fig.  6, 
will  not  operate  the  fourth  pattern-chain  150. 

The  main  pattern-chain  5.  will  continue  to  operate 


Fl£-  7 


the  indicator  86  thereon  comes  under 
the  lever  84,  it  will  raise  said  lever  and 
through  link  87,  will  raise  the  arm  82,  of 
/  /  the  shield  79,  to  allow  the  spring  91, 

to  act  and  draw  the  vertical  arm  of  the  angle-lever 
88  under  the  arm  82.  The  raising  of  the  arm  82,  will 
raise  the  shield  79,  to  disengage  the  pawl  57,  from  the 
ratchet-wheel  28,  and  stop  the  main  pattern-chain  5. 
and,  at  the  same  time  lower  the  shield  80,  to  allow  the 


41 


pawl  55,  to  engage  the  ratchet-wheel  41,  and  operate 
the  third  pattern-chain  39.  The  lowering  of  the  shield 
80,  and  the  pawl  55,  will,  through  pin  170,  lower  the 
pawl  158,  so  that  it  will  engage  the  ratchet-wheel  151, 
and  move  the  fourth  pattern-chain  150,  once  on  the 
movement  of  the  pawl-carrying  arm  54  to  the  right, 
Fig.  6.  The  movement  of  the  pawl-carrying  arm  54 
to  the  left,  Fig.  6,  will  move  the  third  pattern-chain 
39,  and  bring  a  tube  under  the  indicator-lever  no,  to 
raise  the  shield  113,  and  thus  hold  the  pawl  158,  out 
of  engagement  with  the  ratchet-wheel  151  and  prevent 
the  turning  of  the  fourth  pattern-chain  150,  on  the 
return  movement  of  the  pawl-carrying  arm  54,  Fig.  6, 
to  the  right.  The  third  pattern-chain  39  and  the 
fourth  pattern-chain  150  will  then  operate,  as  before 
described,  to  weave  the  striped  body  of  the  goods. 
It  will  be  seen  that  the  four  pattern-chains  all  co- 
operate, and  the  stopping  of  one  starts  another,  etc. 
It  will  also  be  seen  that  when  the  indicator  109,  on 
the  fourth  pattern-chain  150,  in  the  revolution  of  said 
chain  comes  under  the  lever  92,  the  shield  79,  through 
connector  93  and  angle-lever  88,  is  instantly  dropped 
to  allow  the  pawl  57,  of  the  main  pattern-chain  mech- 
anism to  put  into  operation  the  main  pattern-chain  5, 
and  this  change  is  made  instantly  or  on  the  pick  with- 
out any  possibility  of  an  extra  pick  or  two  being  put 
into  the  fabric  before  the  main  pattern-chain  5,  starts. 
(Crompion  and  Knowlcs  Loom  Works.) 


THE  KNOWLES    SHAWL    LOOM  BOX 
PATTERN  MECHANISM. 

This  mechanism  is  to  be  used  on  looms  for  weaving 
shawls  and  so  forth  where  the  goods  have  a  plain  body 


and  a  striped  border;  the  mechanism  being  operated 
by  the  weaver  while  the  loom  is  running. 

The  mechanism  will  be  best  understood  by  referring 
to  the  following  letters: — A,  is  the  hand-shaft  for 
calling  box  chain  movement;  attached  to  A,  is  a  rod 


which  extends  across  the  entire  width  of  the  loom; 
B,  is  the  cam-lever  which  rides  on  the  cam  C;  D,  is 
the  top  cylinder;  E,  is  the  box  pattern-chain  and  cyl- 
inder which  is  loose  on  the  end  of  the  harness  cylinder 
shaft;  F,  is  the  harness  cylinder;  G,  is  bottom  cylinder; 

H,  is  a  handle  by  which  the  box  pattern-chain  can  be 
turned  independently  of  the  rest  of  the  mechanism; 

I,  is  a  friction  upon  the  box  chain  shaft;  J,  is  the  pawl 
which  turns  the  ratchet  K,  and  the  box  chain;  the 
ratchet  K,  being  fixed  to  the  pattern-chain. 

In  order  to  operate  the  mechanism  the  weaver  pulls 
the  rod  (not  shown)  attached  to  the  end  of  the  rod 
A.  This  turns  the  rod  A,  and  brings  the  lever  B, 
against  the  cam  C,  and  as  the  cam  revolves  it  turns 
the  ratchet  K,  one  tooth  and  consequently  the  box 
pattern-chain  one  bar. 

Once  pulling  the  handle  attached  to  A,  only  turns 
the  box  pattern-chain  once  so  that  the  weaver  must 
pull  the  handle  each  time  a  change  is  required. 
(Crompton  and  Knowlcs  Loom  Works.) 


HUTCHIN'S  FANCY  COTTON  AND  SILK 
DOB  BY  PATTERN  MECHANISM. 

In  the  new  mechanism  the  driving  of  the  dobby 
pattern-chain,  the  box  pattern-chain  and  the  Knowles 
sliding  pin  wheel  multiplier  is  trained  together  and  so 
arranged  that  in  picking  out  imperfect  work  or  turn- 
ing back  the  pattern-chains  for  any  purpose  the  pat- 
terns can  never  get  out  of  time  with  each  other. 

The  stop  motion  is  also  connected  to  the  pattern- 
chain  driving  so  that  whenever  the  filling  breaks  or 
runs  out  the  pattern  mechanism  is  automatically 
stopped  on  the  pick  in  which  the  filling  failed,  making 
it  unnecessary  for  the  operator  to  turn  back  the  pat- 
terns for  failure  of  the  filling. 

Fig.  1  shows  a  plan  view  of  the  drop  box  pattern 
mechanism,  and  a  double  index  dobby  pattern  mech- 
anism (of  which  only  a  portion  of  the  pattern  cylinder 
and  its  mechanism  is  shown),  with  the  improvements 
applied  to  said  pattern  mechanism.  Fig.  2  is,  on  a 
reduced  scale,  an  end  view  of  the  parts  shown  in  Fig. 
1,  looking  in  the  direction  of  arrow  «,  same  figure,  and 
shows  also  the  loom  side,  and  connections  to  the  arm 
on  the  knock-off  shaft.  Fig.  3  is  an  edge  view  of  the 
frame  shown  in  Fig.  2,  looking  in  the  direction  of 
arrow  6,  Fig.  2,  showing  by  full  lines  the  connections 
shown  by  dotted  lines  in  Fig.  2.  The  pattern  mech- 
anisms are  not  shown,  and,  Fig.  4  is  a  sectional  detail, 
through  the  gear  and  slide  clutch,  shown  at  the  top 
of  Fig.  1. 

1,  indicates  the  loom  side  or  frame,  at  the  left  of  the 
loom;  2,  the  dobby  frame,  supported  on  the  upper 
end  of  the  frame  1,  and  having  the  two  upright  side 
frames  3,  in  which  is  mounted  the  shaft  4,  of  the 
dobby  pattern  cylinder  5,  for  the  harness  frames,  not 
shown.  The  pattern  cylinder  5,  is  provided  with  a 
series  of  longitudinal  grooves  or  recesses  6,  in  which 
extend  the  bars  of  the  pattern-chain.  Only  one  pat- 
tern-chain bar  (7)  is  shown,  and  this  is  provided  with 
two  rows  of  pattern-pins  8  and  9,  arranged  alternately, 
for  what  is  termed  a  double  index  dobby.  The  pins 
8  and  9,  act  on  the  indicator-levers  (not  shown)  of  the 
dobby. 

The  end  of  the  pattern  cylinder  shaft  4,  extends  be- 
yond the  inner  side  frame  3,  and  has  a  worm  gear  10, 
loose  thereon,  which  is  held  to  turn  with  the  shaft  4, 
by  a  spring-actuated  clutch  device  11,  consisting  of  a 
spring-actuated  arm  or  dog  11',  pivoted  at  one  end 
on  a. plate  11",  the  hub  11"',  of  which  is  fast  on  the 
shaft  4. 

A  coil  spring  12,  bearing  at  one  end  against  a  collar 
12',  fast  on  the  end  of  the  shaft  4,  and  at  its  other 


42 


end  against  the  arm  or  dog  n',  acts  to  keep  the  said 
dog  n',  in  engagement  with  the  lugs  10',  on  the  worm 
gear  10,  so  that  the  revolution  of  the  gear  10,  will 
revolve  the  shaft  4,  of  the  pattern-cylinder  5.  The 
shaft  4,  can  be  turned  by  hand,  if  desired,  the  dog  11', 
slipping  by  the  lugs  10',  on  the  worm  gear  10,  and  the 
spring  12  contracting,  so  that  the  shaft  4  and  pattern 
cylinder  5  may  be  turned  in  either  direction,  independ- 
ently of  said  worm  gear  10. 

Secured  to  the  dobby  mechanism  frame  2,  is  the 
frame  13,  which  in  this  instance  supports  the  drop  box 
pattern  mechanism,  and  also  the  shaft  14,  which  drives 


A  lever  19,  pivoted  at  20,  is  provided  with  a  yoke 
19',  having  pins  or  rolls  which  extend  into  the  peri- 
pheral groove  in  the  hub  16.  The  lever  19,  is  used 
to  move  said  hub  in  one  direction  or  the  other,  to 
secure  the  gear  15  to  the  shaft  14,  or  to  cause  it  to 
run  loose  thereon,  as  above  described.  A  spring  21, 
encircles  the  pivot  stud  20,  of  the  lever  19,  and  acts 
to  move  the  lever  19  in  one  direction,  to  keep  the 
hub  16  against  the  collar  18,  as  shown  in  Fig.  1  and 
the  pin  17  in  the  hole  15'  in  the  gear  15. 

The  lever  19,  is  operated  automatically,  to  move  the 
hub  16  and  withdraw  the  pin  17,  from  the  hole  15'  in< 


the  dobby  pattern-chain  cylinder  5  and  the  pattern 
surfaces  of  the  drop  box  pattern  mechanism.  The 
shaft  14,  has  a  gear  15,  loose  thereon,  driven  by  a 
system  of  gears,  or  some  driven  part  of  the  loom,  not 
shown.  Said  gear  15  is  attached  to  said  shaft,  to 
revolve  the  same,  by  means  of  a  sliding  grooved  hub 
16,  and  carrying  a  pin  17,  which  extends  through  a 
guide  hole  in  a  collar  18,  fast  on  the  shaft  14,  (see 
Fig.  4)  and  is  adapted  to  enter  a  hole  15'  in  the  gear 
15,  to  cause  the  shaft  14  to  be  revolved  with  the  gear 
15,  and  to  be  withdrawn  from  said  hole,  to  allow  the 
gear  15,  to  run  loose  on  the  shaft  14  (See  Fig.  4). 


the  gear  15,  and  allow  said  gear  15  to  run  loose  on 
the  shaft  14  and  said  shaft  to  stop,  by  a  cord  or 
flexible  connection  22,  which  is  secured  at  one  end 
to  the  lever  19  in  front  of  its  pivot  point  20,  and  runs 
over  a  pulley  23  supported  on  an  arm  24,  over  a  second 
pulley  25,  and  a  third  pulley  26  supported  on  the  loom 
side,  to  an  arm  27,  fast  on  the  knock-off  shaft  28, 
mounted  to  rock  in  bearings  29.  on  the  front  of 
the  breast  beam  30  (See  Figs.  2  and  3). 

On  the  opposite  end  of  the  shaft  14  from  the  gear 
15,  is  fast  a  worm  31,  which  extends  below  and  en- 
gages and  turns  the  worm  gear  10.    The  worm  31  has 


43 


J 


a  dwell  of  one-half  a  revolution,  as  there 
are  two  sets  of  pins  8  and  g  on  the  pat- 
tern bars,  and  therefore  a  partial  revolu- 
tion of  the  worm  gear  io,  and  pattern 
cylinder  5,  is  made  only  every  two  picks. 

On  the  extreme  end  of  the  shaft  14  is 
fast  a  gear  32,  which  meshes  into  and 
drives  a  gear  33,  fast  on  the  shaft  34,  of 
the  drop  box  pattern  mechanism.  By 
means  of  the  gears  32  and  33,  the  dobby 
pattern  cylinder  and  the  drop  box  pattern 
cylinders  are  connected,  so  that  the  turn- 
ing of  one  in  either  direction  will  turn 
the  other  simultaneously. 

In  the  drop-box  pattern  mechanism,  35 
indicates  the  box  pattern  chain  cylinder: 
36,  the  pattern  indicator  levers  for  a  series 
of  six  drop  boxes,  not  shown.  37,  is  the 
indicator  lever,  connected  through  connec- 
tors and  levers,  not  shown,  with  the  pin 
wheel  38,  splined  on  a  sleeve  49,  fast  on 
the  shaft  34,  to  slide  said  pin  wheel  38, 
out  of  engagement,  or  into  engagement 
with  the  star  wheel  39,  which  operates  the 
box  pattern  cylinder  35,  in  the  ordinary 
way. 

40,  is  the  auxiliary  or  multiplier  pattern 
chain  cylinder,  used  in  this  instance,  and 
41,  the  indicator  lever  thereof,  connected 
through  connectors  and  levers,  not  shown, 
with  the  pin  wheel  42,  splined  on  the 
sleeve  49,  to  slide  said  pin  wheel  42,  out 


of  engagement,  or  into  en- 
gagement, with  the  star 
wheel  43,  which  operates  the 
multiplier  pattern  chain  cyl- 
inder 40,  according  to  the 
indications  of  the  box  pat- 
tern chain,  and  the  multi- 
plier pattern  chain.  The 
box  chain  and  the  multi- 
plier chain  are  operated  in 
the  manner  fully  explained 
in  the  article  on  the  mech- 
anism for  operating  shedd- 
ing and  drop-box  pattern 
indicators  f  o  r  Knowles 
looms. 

On  the  front  end  of  the 
shaft  34,  is  fast  a  hand-wheel 
44,  by  means  of  which  both, 
the  box  pattern  chain  mech- 
anism and  the  dobby  pattern 
chain  mechanism,  through 
gears  33  and  32,  are  simul- 
taneously turned  backward 
or  forward,  the  hand-lever 
19,  being  first  moved  to  the 
position  indicated  by  dotted 
lines,  Fig.  r,  to  disengage 
the  pin  17  on  hub  16  from 
the  hole  15'  in  the  gear  15, 
and  allow  the  gear  to  be 
loose  on  the  shaft  14. 
(Crompton  and  Enoivles 
Loom  Works.) 


44 


BOX-MOTION  FOR  WITCH  LOOMS. 

Fig.  i  of  the  drawings  shows  in  side  elevation  the 
framing  of  a  loom  having  the  improvement  applied 
thereto,  Fig.  2  shows  in  rear  elevation  the  box-operat- 
ing crank  and  its  immediate  connections,  part  of  the 
support  being  in  vertical  section. 

i,  indicates  the  loom-framing;  2,  the  crank-shaft  of 
the  loom;  3,  the  cam-shaft;  5,  6,  are  the  gear-wheels 
by  which  motion  is  transmitted  from  the  crank-shaft 
to  the  cam-shaft;  7,  represents  the  shuttle-boxes;  8, 
the  box-rod;  9,  is  the  box-lever;  10,  is  the  operating 
connecting-rod.  which  joins  the  rear  end  of  the  said 
box-lever  9,  with  the  operating-crank  40. 

11,  is  the  pattern-chain  for  the  box-motion,  it  pass- 
ing around  a  chain-barrel  which  is  mounted  on  the 
shaft  12,  the  latter  being  supported  by  the  elevated 
part  of  the  loom-framing. 


13,  is  the  ratchet-wheel,  which  is  connected  with  the 
pattern-barrel  12.  14,  is  the  pawl  whicn  engages  with 
the  ratchet-wheel  13,  for  the  purpose  of  actuating  the 
pattern-barrel  and  pattern-chain.  15,  is  the  swinging 
arm  or  carrier  on  which  the  pawl  14,  is  pivoted.  16, 
is  the  conecting-rod,  which  joins,  the  said  arm  or 
carrier  15  to  the  crank  17,  on  the  gear  18.  19,  is  a 
gear  on  the  cam-shaft  3,  which  engages  with  gear  18 
to  rotate  the  latter. 

The  crank  40,  is  carried  by  a  disk  20,  having  a  hub 
21,  which  latter  is  mounted  to  turn  in  a  bearing  22, 
that  is  provided  in  a  bracket  23,  which  is  applied  to 
the  loom-framing.  24,  is  a  partially-toothed  gear 
which  is  connected  with  the  hub  21,  so  that  the  said 
gear  and  the  disk  20,  with  its  crank  40,  rotate  in 
unison.  This  gear  has  blank  or  toothless  spaces  at 
one  hundred  and  eighty  degrees  apart,  these  spaces 
separating  the  teeth  of  gear  24  into  two  segments. 


25,  is  a  segment-gear  which  is  connected  with  gear 
18,  and  rotates  in  unison  therewith.  This  segment- 
gear  constitutes  a  moving  toothed  surface  for  engage- 
ment with  the  gear  24,  and  its  teeth  are  sufficient  in 
number  to  act,  in  connection  with  one  of  the  gear- 
segments  of  gear  24,  and  with  also  one  of  the  rock- 
ing teeth  which  are  referred  to  hereinafter,  to  occasion 
a  semirotation  of  said  gear  24,  and  the  hub  and  crank- 
disk  which  are  connected  therewith,  so  as  through 
connecting-rod  10  to  move  the  box-lever  9  and  shift 
the  boxes  7. 

26,  are  rocking  teeth  which  are  applied  to  the 
partially-toothed  gear  24,  at  the  blank  spaces  of  the 
latter,  the  said  gear  24  being  recessed  where  the  said 
blank  spaces  exist  for  the  reception  and  play  of  the 
said  rocking  teeth.  Each  rocking  tooth  26,  has  a  hub 
portion,  the  latter  having  a  hole  for  the  passage  of 
a  pivotal  pin,  by  which  to  pivotally  connect  it  with 
the  gear  24.  Each  of  the  said  rocking  teeth  has  also 
a  pin  or  projection  by  means  of  which  to  move  the 
tooth  on  its  pivot.  The  pins  or  projections  of  the  two 
rocking  teeth  engage  the  cam-slots  formed  in  the 
concave  outer  faces  of  the  two  longitudinal  portions 
or  arms  of  an  actuating  cam-piece  31,  having  collars 
30,  between  which  is  received  a  ring  32,  having  pins 
33,  at  opposite  sides  thereof  playing  in  slots  34,  in 
the  extremities  of  the  members  of  the  forked  depend- 
ing arm  of  a  bell-crank  35.  Said  bell-crank  is  pivoted 
at  36,  to  the  bracket  23,  and  has  joined  thereto  the 
lower  end  of  a  connection  or  wire  37,  the  upper  end 
of  which  is  connected  with  the  pattern  finger  or  lever 
38,  which  latter  rests  upon  the  pattern-chain  and  is 
acted  by  the  risers  thereon.  The  said  risers  act, 
through  the  said  pattern-finger  and  the  other  devices 
which  have  been  described,  to  move  the  cam-piece  31, 
lengthwise  in  one  direction — for  example,  toward  the 
left  in  Fig.  2.  For  the  purpose  of  moving  the  said 
cam-piece  in  the  reverse  direction — namely,  toward  the 
right  in  Fig.  2 — the  spring  39,  is  employed,  it  having 
one  end  thereof  connected  with  one  arm  of  the  bell- 
crank  35,  and  the  other  end  thereof  connected  with  a 
suitable  portion  of  the  framing. 

Each  cam-slot  has  two  straight  portions  extending 
parallel  with  the  length  of  the  cam-piece  31,  and  on 
different  lines  which  are  parallel  to  each  other,  these 
parallel  portions  being  connected  by  inclined  portions, 
which  constitute  rests  to  hold  the  respective  rocking 
teeth  26,  fixed  in  the  respective  positions  which  are 
given  them  by  each  lengthwise  movement  of  the  cam- 
piece,  the  inclined  connecting  portions  of  the  slots 
acting  as  cams  to  rock  the  respective  rocking  teeth 
on  their  pivots.  The  two  cam-slots  are  formed  or 
disposed  so  that  when  by  the  lengthwise  movement 
of  the  cam-piece  31,  one  tooth  26,  is  retracted — the 
other  tooth  26  is  projected.  Each  rocking-tooth  26, 
has  a  contacting-surface  adapted  to  bear  against  the 
adjacent  end  of  one  of  the  gear-segments  of  the  gear 
24,  when  the  tooth  is  in  its  projected  position.  The 
said  tooth  is  formed  with  a  sloping  outer  surface  so 
that  when  the  tooth  is  in  the  retracted  position,  the 
rocking  tooth  will  be  wholly  out  of  the  range  of  move- 
ment of  the  gear-segment  25.  The  contacting-sur- 
face of  each  rocking  tooth  26,  with  the  adjacent  end 
of  a  gear-segment  of  gear  24,  affords  a  firm  backing 
for  the  rocking  tooth  when  the  enlarged  first  tooth 
(see  Fig.  1)  of  the  segment-gear  25,  comes  around  in 
the  rotation  of  the  latter  and  engages  with  such  rock- 
ing tooth.  As  will  be  understood,  when  the  cam-piece 
is  moved  in  the  proper  direction  to  cause  a  rocking 
tooth  to  become  projected  into  the  path  of  the  said 
enlarged  first  tooth,  the  gear  24  and  connected  parts 
will  be  impelled,  by  the  engagement  of  said  first  tooth 
with  the  said  rocking  tooth  so  as  to  bring  the  teeth  of 
the  following  segment  of  gear  24,  around  into  position 
to  be  engaged  by  the  teeth  of  segment-gear  25,  where- 


45 


upon  gear  24  and  the  connected  parts,  including  the 
crank  40,  will  be  rotated  through  one  hundred  and 
eighty  degrees,  thereby  shifting  the  shuttle-boxes, 
after  which  the  segment-gear  will  run  out  of  mesh 
with  the  teeth  of  gear  24,  at  a  blank  space  on  the 


latter,. the  rocking  tooth  in  such  space  being  retracted. 
The  gear  24,  and  connected  parts  then  will  remain 
without  movement  of  rotation,  holding  the  shuttle- 
boxes  in  the  position  which  was  given  them  by  the 
described  movement  of  the  parts  until  the  cam-piece 
is  moved  in  the  opposite  direction  -lengthwise  by  the 
action  of  the  described  devices,  so  as  to  project  the 
other  previously-retracted  rocking  tooth  into  the  range 
of  the  segment-gear  25. 

At  the  free  ends  of  arms  of  the  cam  piece  31,  the 
cam-slots  are  open-ended  for  convenience  in  assem- 
bling and  separating  the  parts,  this  construction  en- 
abling the  cam-piece  conveniently  to  be  slipped  into 
place  or  removed  after  the  rocking  teeth  have  been 
mounted  in  the  gear  24.  (Crompton  and  Knowles  Loom 
Works.) 

SHUTTLE-BOX  MOTION  FOR  PLAIN  LOOMS. 

This  motion  is  adapted  for  weaving  textile  fabrics, 
etc.,  in  which  the  shuttle  boxes  are  arranged  two  by 
one,  or  four  by  one. 

The  box-operating  mechanism  is  preferably  arranged 
at  the  lower  part  of  the  loom,  at  the  rear  right  or  left 
hand  end  thereof. 

Referring  to  the  drawings: — Fig.  A,  is  a 
side  view  of  this  box  motion,  looking  in 
the  direction  of  arrow  a,  Fig.  C.  Fig.  B. 
corresponds  to  Fig.  A,  but  shows  the 
parts  of  the  mechanism  in  the  opposite 
position,  and  Fig.  C,  is  an  edge  view  of 
the  parts  shown  in  Fig.  A,  looking  in  the 
direction  of  arrow  b,  same  figure. 

1,  is  a  frame  or  stand,  adapted  to  be 
bolted  to  the  lower  side  of  the  loom,  at 
the  rear  right  hand  end  thereof,  and  near 
the  bottom  shaft.  2,  is  the  bottom  shaft, 
journaled  in  bearings  (not  shown)  and  3, 
is  a  two-leaf  cam  fast  on  the  bottom  shaft.  4,  is  an  in- 
dicator lever  hung  on  a  stud  5,  fast  in  the  frame  1, 


and  6,  is  a  connector  attached  at  one  end  to  said  in-* 
dicator  lever  4,  and  connected  at  its  other  end  with 
the  box  pattern  chain  indicator  (not  shown). 

A  cam  arm  7,  is  pivoted  at  its  lower  end  on  a  stud 
8,  fast  in  the  frame  1,  and  is  provided  at  its  upper  end 
with  gear  teeth  7'.  The  cam  arm  7,  has  an  opening 
7"  therein,  through  which  the  bottom,  or  driver  shaft 
2,  extends,  and  is  also  provided  with  two  oppositely 
extending  arm  7"'.  On  a  pin  9,  fast  in  the  outer  end 
of  one  arm  7"',  is  pivoted  a  cam  finger  10,  provided 
with  an  outwardly  extending  pin  10',  adapted  to  be 
engaged  by  the  indicator  lever  4. 

A  second  cam  finger  11,  is  pivoted  on  a  pin  12,  fast 
in  the  outer  end  of  the  other  arm  7"',  of  the  cam  arm 
7,  and  is  provided  with  an  outwardly  extending  pin 
11',  which  is  adapted  to  be  engaged  by  the  outer  end 
of  the  indicator  lever  4. 

The  cam  finger  10,  is  provided  at  its  free  end  with 
a  boss  or  roll  13,  adapted  to  be  engaged  by  the  leaf 
3',  of  the  two-leaf  cam  3,  and  the  free  end  of  the 
cam  finger  11,  is  provided  with  a  boss  or  roll  14, 
adapted  to  be  engaged  by  the  leaf  3",  of  said  cam  3. 

A  pin  15,  on  the  arm  7"',  of  the  cam  arm  7,  limits 
the  downward  motion  of  the  cam  finger  10,  and  a 
pin  15',  limits  the  upward  motion  of  said  finger.  A 
pin  16,  on  the  other  arm  7"',  of  the  cam  lever  7, 
limits  the  upward  motion  of  the  cam  finger  11,  and 
a  pin  16',  limits  the  downward  motion  of  said  finger. 

The  gear  teeth  7',  on  the  upper  end  of  the  cam 
arm  7,  mesh  with  and  drive  a  pinion  17,  loose  on  a 
stud  18,  fast  in  the  upper  part  of  the  frame  1.  Fast 
to  or  made  integral  with  the  pinion  17,  is  a  crank 
disk  19,  and  upon  the  opposite  side  of  said  pinion  is — 
in  this  instance,  a  disk  20,  provided  with  a  friction 
device  consisting  of  two  arms  21,  pivoted  at  one  end 
on  a  pin  22,  on  the  frame,  and  provided  with  curved 
portions  at  their  other  ends,  which  encircle  the  disk 
20,  and  are  pressed  thereon  to  produce  friction  by  a 
bolt  23,  extending  through  holes  in  said  arms  21,  and 
provided  with  a  spring  24,  intermediate  the  upper 
side  of  the  upper  arm  21,  and  the  nut  25,  on  said 
bolt.  By  screwing  up  or  down  the  nut  25,  the  friction 
of  the  arm  21,  on  the  disk  20,  may  be  adjusted  as 
desired.  Said  friction  prevents  the  disk  20,  returning 
to  its  starting  point,  if  the  loom  should  start  before 
said  disk  completes  its  motion. 


A  connector  26,  is  pivoted  at  one  end  on  a  crank 
pin  27,  on  the  crank  disk  19,  and  at  its  other  end  is 


46 


pivoted  to  the  upper  end  of  the  angle  lever  28,  which 
lever  is  hung  on  a  pin  29,  in  the  frame  i.  To  the 
other  end  of  the  angle  lever  28,  is  pivoted  a  connector 
30,  the  lower  end  of  which  is  adjustably  secured  by 
a  bolt  31,  in  the  head  32,  of  the  box  lifter  rod  33. 

The  angle  lifter  lever  28,  may  be  provided  with  a 
give  way,  or  safety  device  34,  which  will  yield  and 


Fig.  B,  and  thus  the  top  cell  of  the  shuttle  box  will 
be  lowered.  The  shuttle  box  will  stay  in  this  position 
until  the  indicator  lever  4  is  lifted,  through  the  con- 
nector 6,  by  a  pattern-chain-indicator,  and  when  said 
lever  is  so  lifted,  the  cam  finger  10,  through  the  en- 
gagement of  the  pin  10',  thereon  with  said  indicator 
lever  4,  will  be  lifted  out  of  engagement  with  the  cam 
3,  as  shown  in  Fig.  B,  and  at  the  same  time  the  other 
cam  finger  11,  will  be  lifted,  through  the  engagement 
of  the  pin  11',  thereon,  with  the  indicator  lever  4, 
and  the  boss  or  roll  14,  on  the  end  of  said  cam  finger 
11,  will  be  in  position  to  be  engaged  by  the  leaf  3", 
of  the  cam  3,  as  shown  in  Fig.  B,  and  the  revolution 
of  said  cam  will  cause  the  cam  arm  7,  to  swing  over 
into  the  opposite  position  from  that  shown  in  Fig.  B, 
to  that  shown  in  Fig.  A,  thus  raising  the  lifter  rod, 
and  also  the  lower  cell  of  the  shuttle  box,  and 
returning  it  to  its  first  position  shown  in 
Fig.  A. 

This  motion  can  be  used  for  looms  running 
at  high  speed,  the  motion  being  sure  to  give 
a  positive  and  quick  change  for  the  shuttle 
boxes.  (Crompton  and  Enowles  Loom  ^Yorks.) 


allow  the  lever  to  give  at  this  point,  so  as  to  prevent 
the  breaking  of  the  parts  of  the  box  lifter  mechanism. 

In  Fig.  A,  the  box  lifter  rod  33,  is  shown  in  its 
upper  position,  and  therefore  the  bottom  cell  of  the 
shuttle  box  (not  shown),  is  ready  to  receive  or  dis- 
charge the  shuttle. 

To  lower  the  lifting  rod,  so  that  the  top  cell  of  the 
box  will  assume  the  position  occupied  by  the  bottom 
cell,  the  operation  is  as  follows:  The  leaf  3',  of  the 
cam  3,  fast  on  the  bottom  shaft  2,  revolves  in  the 
direction  of  the  arrow,  Fig.  A,  toward  the  cam  finger 

10,  and  said  finger  hav- 
ing been  lowered  by  the 
indicator  lever  4,  through 
the  connector  6,  into  the 
position  shown  in  Fig. 
A,  will  be  in  the  path  of 
said  leaf  3',  of  the  cam  3, 
which  will  come  in  con- 
tact with  the  boss  or  roll 
10',  on  the  end  of  said 
cam  finger,  and  cause 
the  cam  arm  7,  through 
said  cam  finger,  to  move 
in  the  same  direction 
that  the  cam  3  moves,  as 
indicated  by  the  arrow 
in  Fig.  A,  and  the  teeth 
7',  on  said  arm  7,  engag- 
ing the  teeth  of  the 
pinion  17,  will  cause  said 
pinion  to  revolve  and 
also  the  crank  disk  19, 
carrying  the  pin  27,  and 
through  the  connector 
26,  attached  to  said  crank 
pin,  the  angle  lifter 
lever  28,  will  be  moved,  to  lower  the  lifter  rod  33, 
through  connector  30,  into  the  position   shown  in 


SHUTTLE-BOX  MECHANISM  FOR  CROMP- 
TON LOOMS. 

It  is  a  well-known  fact  to  any  fixer  that  in  the 
operation  of  a  modern  loom  the  time  in  which  the 
shuttle-boxes  must  be  shifted  is  very  short,  and  the 
box  mechanism  must  act  quickly  and  with  precision. 

Frequently  the  boxes  and  their  connections  are  of 
considerable  weight,  and  the  shafts,  wheels,  and  other 
parts  required  to  move  the  same  must  necessarily  be 
heavy  and  strong,  so  heavy,  in  fact,  that  difficulty  is 
found  in  operating  them  at  the  speed  and  with  the 
accuracy  desired. 

The  present  invention  has  for  its  object  to  provide 
an  improved  and  novel  box  mechanism  wherein  the 
number  and  speed  of  operation  of  the  several  parts 
are  reduced. to  a  minimum. 

The  box  operating  or  shifting  member  in  the  new 
mechanism  is  actuated  by  a  cam,  as  heretofore,  said 
cam,  however,  being  rotated  by  a  wheel  provided  with 
a  plurality  of  slots  or  notches  to  enable  it  to  be  inter- 
mittingly  rotated  by  a  driving-wheel  provided  with  a 
plurality  of  projections  adapted  to  enter  said  slots  or 
notches. 

The  slotted  or  notched  wheel  is  of  considerable 
diameter  and  provided  with  a  large  number  of  slots 
in  order  that  each  step-by-step  or  rotative  movement 
of  the  wheel  may  be  as  slight  as  possible. 

By  means  of  the  new  device  a  continuously-rotat- 
ing wheel  is  made  to  engage  the  notched  wheel  for 
nearly  one-half  of  each  rotation  of  the  former,  yet 
act  through  only  about  one-quarter  of  each  rotation 
to  actually  move  the  said  notched  or  slotted  wheel 
and  its  cam,  so  that  a  quick  intermitting  cam  move- 
ment may  be  obtained  from  a  continuously  and  rela- 
tively slow  rotating  driving  wheel. 

The  accompanying  illustration  shows  in  end  eleva- 
tion, a  sufficient  portion  of  a  loom  to  enable  anybody 
to  understand  at  once  the  new  mechanism. 

A,  indicates  the  frame  of  the  loom;  a,  the  crank-shaft, 
connected  with  and  to  vibrate  the  lay  B;  6,  the  lay- 
swords;  c,  the  shuttle-box;  C,  its  lift-rod;  c2,  the  swing- 
ing bracket  or  frame  connected  with  and  vibrated  with 
the  lay  and  in  which  the  lift-rod  c',  slides;  d,  the  main 
or  driving  shaft  geared  to  and  operating  the  crank- 
shaft. 

The  shuttle-box  lift-rod  C,  is  connected  by  a  link  e, 
with  one  arm  of  the  bell-crank  lever  or  shifting 
member  C,  fulcrumed  at  e2,  on  the  frame  and  having 


47 


its  other  arm  provided  with  a  suitable  roller-stud  c3, 
held  in  operative  contact  with  the  cam  E,  by  the 
weight  of  the  shuttle-box  on  its  lift-rod. 

The  cam  E,  is  provided  with  a  plurality  of  projec- 
tions or  tappets,  of  the  same,  or  of  different  heights, 
to  impart  the  desired  movement  to  the  shuttle-box, 


ranging  from  its  highest  to  its  lowest  position,  and 
these  tappets  or  projections  are  formed  so  as  to  reduce 
as  far  as  possible  all  unnecessary  movement  of  the 
cam,  and  also  to  most  quickly  shift  the  box  when  the 
cam  is  changed. 

For  instance,  the  depression  between  two  tappet 
projections  is  of  a  size  nearly  or  quite  fitting  the  roller 
c3,  so  that  the  initial  movement  of  the  cam  will  act  to 
move  the  roller  and  partially  lift  the  shuttle-box,  and 
the  highest  portion  of  the  projection  is  made  as 
pointed  as  is  practicable  in  order  that  no  unnecessary 
movement  of  the  cam  shall  take  place  when  the  roller 
has  reached  the  highest  point  on  any  projection. 

The  cam  E,  is  secured  to  the  face  of  a  wheel  F, 
loosely  mounted  upon  a  stud  f.  This  wheel  F,  is 
provided  with  a  large  number  of  radial  slots  or  notches 
V,  the  entrances  to  which  are  made  slightly  flaring, 
as  at  P,  said  wheel  being  driven  by  the  driving  wheel 
P,  fast  on  a  shaft,  or  it  may  be  loosely  mounted  upon 
a  stud  P,  on  the  frame  and  provided  with  two  projec- 
tions or  pins  P,  adapted  to  enter  the  slots  V ,  in  the 
wheel  F,  to  drive  the  latter. 

The  driving-wheel  P,  is  geared  to  and  driven  by  a 
mating  wheel  P,  fast  on  the  main  or  driving  shaft  dt 
of  the  frame. 

The  shaft  d,  rotates  once  for  each  two  picks  of  the 
loom,  and  a  corresponding  rotation  is  imparted  to 
tire  driving-wheel  P,  as  the  two  wheels  are  of  sub- 
stantially the  same  diameter.  At  each  rotation  of  the 
driving-wheel  P,  one  of  its  pins  P,  enters  a  notch  or 
slot  f,  in  the  slotted  wheel  F,  and  turns  the  latter  a 
distance  represented  by  the  distance  between  two  slots 
on  the  wheel. 

In  the  illustration  one  of  the  pins  is  shown  as  just 
entering  a  slot,  and  the  other  pin  as  just  leaving  an- 
other slot,  and  starting  from  this  position  of  the  driv- 
ing-wheel the  uppermost  pin  P,  will  rotate  for  nearly 
one-eighth  of  a  rotation  of  the  driving-wheel  before 
it  will  begin  to  move  the  slotted  wheel  F.  It  will 
then  move  the  wheel  through  substantially  one-quarter 
of  its  rotation  and  will  then  permit  the  said  slotted 
wheel  to  stand  at  rest  for  another  one-eighth  of  a 
rotation  before  its  pin  leaves  the  slot  in  the  wheel, 
and,  therefore,  since  the  slotted  wheel  is  held  against 
movement  during  an  eighth  of  a  rotation  before  a  pin 


leaves  a  slot,  and  after  a  pin  leaves  a  slot  for  another 
one-eighth  of  a  rotation,  while  the  other  pin  is  enter- 
ing a  new  slot,  the  wheel  is  held  against  movement 
for  one-quarter  of  a  rotation  of  the  driving-wheel  f3,  is 
then  moved  for  a  distance  represented  by  one-quarter 
of  the  rotation  of  the  said  driving-wheel,  and  again 
rested  for  another  one-quarter  of  a  rotation  of  said 
wheel,  and  so  on. 

The  slotted  wheel  F,  therefore,  is  given  an  inter- 
mitting rotary  movement  by  and  from  a  continuously- 
rotating  driving-wheel,  the  slotted  wheel  having  two 
movements  and  two  periods  of  rest,  all  of  substantially 
the  same  duration,  during  each  rotation  of  the  driving- 
wheel. 

The  driving-shaft  d,  and  driving-wheel  P,  rotate  at 
a  relatively  slow  speed,  and  the  slotted  wheel  F,  be- 
ing of  relatively  large  diameter  with  a  large  number 
of  slots  V ,  receives  only  a  comparatively  short  move- 
ment for  each  shifting  of  the  shuttle-box,  so  that  the 
wear  and  tear  of  the  parts  is  reduced  to  a  minimum, 
and  the  high  speed  heretofore  necessary  in  operating 
the  parts  of  the  box  mechanism  is  entirely  overcome. 

Furthermore,  the  pins  working  in  the  slots  start  the 
slotted  wheel  easily  and  without  shock,  thereby  differ- 
ing from  pawl-and-ratchet  or  other  mechanism  for 
imparting  a  relative  intermitting  motion  to  the  cam- 
wheel 

The  mechanism  embodying  the  invention,  i.  €.,  the 
axis  of  the  driving-wheel  P,  lies  inside  of  the  peri- 
pheral line  of  the  driving-wheel  F.  Hence,  one  of  the 
pins  P,  enters  its  slot  at  the  top  of  the  driving-wheel 
before  the  other  pin  leaves  its  slot  at  the  bottom  of 
said  wheel,  so  that  the  driving-wheel  F,  is  always 
under  the  direct  control  of  at  least  one  of  the  pins  P, 
whereas  if  the  axis  of  the  said  driving-wheel  was  out- 
side the  peripheral  line  of  the  driving-wheel  one  of 
the  pins  must  necessarily  leave  its  slot  before  the  other 
pin  can  fully  enter  its  slot,  thereby  leaving  the  driving- 
wheel  for  at  least  two  periods  in  each  rotation  of  the 
driving-wheel  without  any  means  of  holding  it  in  posi- 
tion, except  some  means  independent  of  the  pins  be 
provided  to  retain  it  positively  in  position  during  the 
periods  when  it  is  not  engaged  by  one  or  the  other 
of  the  pins. 

As  readily  seen  by  explanations  thus  given,  the  ob- 
ject of  the  new  mechanism  is  to  get  a  motion  that  will 
work  well  on  high  speed  looms  running  on  plain 
work,  i.  e.,  no  pattern-chain  to  be  used. 

In  the  illustration  a  3  box  cam  connection  is  shown, 
however,  by  changing  the  cam,  2  or  4  boxes  could  be 
used,  but  as  this  is  a  continuous  motion  worked  from 
the  bottom  shaft,  no  rest  of  boxes  can  be  had  for 
more  than  one  pick. 

The  new  mechanism  gives  a  quick  motion  to  the 
cam  and  at  the  same  time  a  slow  motion  to  all  the 
parts  operating  said  cams,  resulting  in  a  quick  and 
positive  box  motion  with  very  little  wear  on  the  parts 
constituting  said  motion.  {Crompton  and  Knowles 
Loom  Works.) 


INGRAHAM'S  DROP-BOX  MECHANISM. 

The  object  of  this  device  is  to  construct  a  simple, 
positive,  and  efficient  drop-box  motion  for  looms,  that 
the  boxes,  when  adjusted,  being  effectually  locked 
against  vertical  displacement  in  either  direction. 

To  explain  this  mechanism,  the  accompanying  three 
illustrations  are  given  and  of  which  Fig.  1  is  a  side 
view  of  sufficient  of  a  loom  to  illustrate  this  improved 
drop-box  motion.  Fig.  2  is  a  similar  view  with  some 
of  the  outer  parts  removed  and  some  in  sections  in 
order  to  show  internal  construction.  Fig.  3  is  a  trans- 
verse section  on  the  lines  3-3,  Fig.  1. 


48 


A,  represents  one  of  the  side  frames  of  the  loom, 
having  a  bearing  for  the  shaft  B,  which  has  a  spur- 
pinion  a,  meshing  with  a  spur-wheel  a',  which  is  free 
to  turn  on  a  stud  «2,  secured  to  a  hood  or  casing  a3, 
attached  to  the  side  frame  A.    On  said  stud  a2,  also 


turns  a  drum  D,  between  which  and  the  hub  of  the 
spur-wheel  a'  there  is  a  frictional  clutch  connection 
consisting  of  fingers  6,  hung  to  studs  on  the  drum 
and  engaging  at  their  free  ends  with  notches  in  the 
hub  of  the  spur-wheel  a',  the  fingers  being  retained 
in  engagement  with  said  notches  by  means  of  springs 
&2,  bearing  upon  the  fingers  and  secured  to  studs  b3, 
on  the  drum.  On  the  periphery  of  the  drum  D,  are 
formed  two  toothed  segments  D',  being  diametrically 
opposite  each  other,  and  on  each  side  of  the  drum  is 
suitably  mounted  a  hollow  shaft,  that  on  one  side  of 
the  drum  being  represented  at  F,  and  that  on  the 
opposite  side  at  G.  At  the  outer  end  of  the  shaft  F, 
is  a  crank-pin  f,  which  is  connected  by  a  link  f,  to 
one  arm  of  a  lever  H,  the  latter  being  fulcrumed  mid- 
way of  its  length  to  the  lower  end  of  a  link  g',  depend- 
ing from  the  crank-pin  g  of  the  shaft  G,  the  forward 


end  of  the  lever  H,  being  constructed  for  connection 
to  the  drop-box  rod. 


Connected  to  the  drop-box  lever  H,  is  an  arm  I, 
which  is  hung  to  a  stud  I'  on  a  depending  portion  of 
the  hood  a3,  said  arm  I,  being  connected  to  one  end 
of  a  spring  J,  tending  to  lift  it,  and  the  tension  of  the 
spring  being  regulated  by  the  adjustment  of  a  ratchet- 
wheel  J',  to  which  the  other  end  of  said 
spring  is  attached,  back  movement  of  the 
ratchet-wheel  being  prevented  by  a  pawl 
J2.  This  spring-actuated  arm  serves  to 
counterbalance  the  weight  of  the  drop- 
boxes,  and  thus  permits  the  easy  elevation 
of  the  same  and  prevents  uneven  strain 
upon  the  operating  mechanism  for  the 
drop-box  lever. 

The  throw  of  each  of  the  crank-pins  f 
and  g,  is  equal  to  the  height  of  one  of  the 
boxes.  Hence  the  construction  shown  is 
adapted  for  application  to  a  four-box 
loom.  When  the  parts  are  in  the  position 
shown  in  Fig.  i,  the  boxes  will  be  fully  de- 
pressed, the  top  box  will  be  in  line 
with  the  shuttle-race,  the  crank-pin  f,  be- 
ing at  the  top  limit  of  and  the  crank-pin 
g,  at  the  bottom  limit  of  its  throw. 

If  it  is  desired  to  raise  the  boxes  to  the 
extent  of  one  box,  a  half  turn  is  imparted 
to  the  shaft  F,  so  as  to  carry  its  crank-pin 
to  the  lowest  limit  of  its  throw,  and  there- 
by operate  the  lever  H,  so  as  to  raise  the 
boxes  to  the  desired 
extent,  the  lever  H, 
fulcruming  upon  the  link  g'. 

If  it  is  desired  to  raise  the  boxes 
from  the  lowest  position  to  the  ex- 
tent of  two  boxes,  the  shaft  F  is 
permitted  to  remain  stationary  and 
the  shaft  G,  has  a  half  turn  im- 
parted to  it.  This  imparts  motion 
to  the  link  g',  and  as  the  latter  is 
connected  to  the  lever  H,  at  a  point 
midway  of  the  length  of  the  leve- 
and  the  inner  end  of  the  latter  L 
fulcrumed  upon  the  lower  end  of  the 
link  f,  the  movement  of  the  outer 
end  of  the  lever  H,  which  is  con- 
nected to  the  drop-box  rod,  will  be 
doubled.  Consequently  the  boxes 
will  be  lifted  to  the  extent  of  two 
boxes. 

If  it  is  desired  to  effect 
a  three-box  lift,  both 
shafts  F  and  G,  are  given  a  half  turn  from 
the  positions  shown  in  Fig.  i,  the  opera- 
tion of  the  shaft  G,  resulting  in  a  lift  of 
two  boxes  and  the  operation  of  the  shaft 
F,  resulting  in  a  further  lift  of  one 
box. 

The  boxes  can  be  lowered  in  like  manner 
to  the  extent  of  one,  two,  or  three  boxes, 
by  the  operation  of  either  or  both  of  the 
shafts  F  and  G.  In  fact  it  will  be  readily 
understood  that  as  the  operation  of  the 
shaft  F  provides  for  a  movement  of  the 
boxes  in  either  direction  to  the  extent  of 
one  box,  and  the  operation  of  the  shaft  G 
provides  for  a  movement  of  the  boxes  in 
either  direction  to  the  extent  of  two  boxes, 
any  desired  operation  of  the  boxes  can  be 
effected  by  moving  either  or  both  shafts. 
When  both  shafts  are  operated,  the  move- 
ment due  to  the  operation  of  the  shaft 
F,  is  added  to  or  subtracted  from  the 
movement  due  to  the  operation  of  the  shaft  G.  (Fair- 
mount  Machine  Company,  Phila.) 


49 


GOOD  YEAR'S  SHUTTLE-BOX-OPERATING 
MECHANISM. 

An  explanation  of  the  new  device  is  best  given  by 
quoting  letters  and  numerals  of  reference  to  the  ac- 
companying illustration  and  of  which  A,  represents 
the  loom  side;  B,  the  lay.  At  the  end  of  the  lay  B, 
are  arranged,  in  the  usual  manner,  the  shuttle-boxes 
I,  2,  3,  and  4.  The  shuttle-boxes  are  connected  to 
the  operating  mechanism  by  rod  5,  carrying  a  shoe  6, 
which  shoe  rests  on  a  roller  fixed  in  the  end  of  lever 
7.  The  levers  7,  and  8,  are  double-pivoted.  One  pivot 
is  on  a  stud  fixed  on  the  side  of  the  loom-frame.  The 
other  pivot  is  on  a  stud  in  the  short  end  of  lever  8. 

10,  is  a  cog-wheel,  in  which  are  made  ten  teeth  or 
cogs,  five  teeth  being  directly  opposite  the  other  five, 
as  is  shown  by  the  dotted  lines.  This  wheel  is  a  driver, 
and  is  fixed  on  the  "cam-shaft"  of  the  loom.  The 
outer  ends  of  these  teeth  are  flanged,  23,  the  first  and 
last  space  between  the  first  and  the  last  tooth  of  each 
series  being  open. 

9,  are  driven  wheels,  each  having  twelve  cogs  or 
teeth,  six  in  each  series,  each  series  being  directly  op- 
posite the  other.  The  first  and  last  tooth  of  each  series 
has  a  lug,  which  lugs  enter  the  open  spaces  at  the  be- 
ginning and  end  of  each  series  of  teeth  on  the  wheel  10. 

The  wheels  9,  are  mounted  on  studs  fixed  to  the 
loom  side  A.  Each  wheel  9,  carries  a  stud,  and  by 
pitmen  15,  and  16,  the  wheels  are  connected  to  levers 


7  and  8.  To  each  of  the  wheels  9,  is  fixed  or  cast  a 
flange  25.  In  these  flanges  are  made  notches,  and 
on  the  back  are  cast  lugs. 

14,  are  spring-brakes,  each  having  at  its  lower  end 
a  V-shaped  lug.  These  lugs  engage  in  the  V-notches 
in  the  flanges  25. 

11,  is  a  lever  hung  on  a  stud  fixed  to  the  loom  side. 
This  lever  11,  carries  on  a  stud,  fingers  12,  and  13, 
which  are  connected  by  cords  or  wires  27,  and  28, 
to  the  pattern-chain  for  controlling  the  movements  of 
the  shuttle-boxes.  On  the  lower  end  of  lever  11,  is 
pivoted  a  trigger,  also  is  fixed  a  stop-lug,  and  to  said 
trigger  is  attached  a  cord  by  which  the  trigger  is  con- 
nected to  the  filling  stop-motion. 

The  operation  of  the  shuttle-box-motion  is  as  fol- 
lows: Motion  is  given  by  the  cam-shaft  that  carries 
the  wheel  10.  The  movement  is  in  direction  indicated 
by  the  arrows,  one  revolution  for  each  two  picks  of 
filling.  The  wiper-cam  and  lever  11,  give  a  to-and-fro 
movement  to  the  fingers  12,  and  13,  which  fingers, 
being  controlled  by  the  pattern-chain,  raise  or  drop 
them  so  as  to  cause  them  to  strike  in  their  movement 
the  lugs  on  wheels  9.    The  movements  of  the  fingers 


and  driver-wheel  10,  are  so  timed  that  the  push  of 
the  fingers  will  move  the  wheels  9,  so  that  the  first 
tooth  of  a  series  on  wheel  9,  will  enter  the  open  space 
of  the  flange  23,  beginning  with  the  series  of  teeth  on 
wheel  10.  This  flange  23,  prevents  the  wheels  gearing 
except  in  the  first  space  of  each  series.  In  the  position 
of  the  shuttle-box,  as  shown  in  our  illustration,  the 
top  box  1,  is  in  use.  If  finger  12,  now  moves  the 
wheel  9,  on  the  right  hand,  it  will  be  revolved  one- 
half  of  one  revolution.  The  stud  and  pitman  24,  will 
be  moved  to  the  bottom  of  wheel  9.  The  pitman  16, 
being  connected  to  lever  7,  will  raise  the  box  one 
shelf,  and  shuttle  2,  will  be  used.  After  two  picks  the 
finger  13,  may  be  caused  to  strike  a  lug  on  wheel  9, 
to  the  left  hand.  This  will  cause  that  wheel  to  make 
one-half  of  one  revolution,  and  its  pitman  15,  being 
connected  to  lever  8,  will  raise  the  box  to  shelf  4, 
and  shuttle  4  will  be  used.  If  after  two  picks  fingers 
12,  and  13,  both  act  at  the  same  time,  both  wheels 
9,  will  be  moved,  giving  a  full  drop,  and  put  the  boxes 
in  position,  as  shown  in  our  illustration.  Box  3,  may 
be  called  if  box  1  is  in  position,  by  solely  operating 
finger  13,  wheel  9  on  the  left,  and  lever  8.  This  will 
skip  box  2,  and  bring  box  3,  into  position.  If  box  2, 
is  in  position,  and  box  3,  is  wanted,  both  pinions  9 
are  moved,  lever  8  raises  two  and  lever  7  drops  one, 
and  the  box  is  only  raised  one  shelf.  Thus  it  is  re- 
quired to  discount  one  shelf  in  order  to  reach  the  one 
desired.  The  wheel  9  on  the  right  moves  one  box. 
The  wheel  9  on  the  left,  moves  two  boxes.  Both 
wheels  moving  at  the  same  time  move  three  boxes, 
and  it  is  plain  and  clear  that  with  the  improved  device 
added  to  looms,  any  one  of  a  series  of  four  boxes  can 
be  commanded  at  will.  (Hughes  &  Russum,  Frank- 
ford,  Phila.) 


SCHEID'S  SHUTTLE-BOX-OPERATING 
MECHANISM. 

Fig.  1  is  a  side  elevation  of  a  loom  provided  with 
this  mechanism,  only  those  parts  being  shown  which 
are  necessary  to  illustrate  the  nature  of  the  new  device; 
Fig.  2  is  an  enlarged  detail  view  of  the  upper  shuttle- 
box  lever-controlling  cam-wheels  and  its  operating 
mechanism;  Fig.  3  is  a  top  plan  view  of  Fig.  2;  Figs. 
4  and  5,  are  left-hand  end  elevations  of  Fig.  2,  in 
working  and  normal  positions,  respectively;  and  Fig. 
6  is  an  enlarged  detail  view  in  elevation  of  the  pattern- 
chain  and  of  the  treadle-levers  operated  thereby.  The 
new  device  refers  to  looms  operated  by  Jacquard 
machines  or  witches  placed  on  top  of  loom. 

The  operation  of  the  device  is  as  follows:  During 
the  operation  of  plain  weaving,  the  shuttle-box-operat- 
ing mechanism  is  at  rest.  The  hook  c3,  having  been 
lowered,  engages  the  pin  C,  and  thus  prevents  angle- 
lever  C,  from  being  operated  by  the  cam  c3,  on  shaft  0. 
When  the  Jacquard  calls  for  the  introduction  of  a 
color  to  be  worked  in  a  fabric,  the  cord  c9,  is  drawn 
upward  by  the  Jacquard  mechanism,  thus  releasing  the 
pin  c7,  and  thereby  bringing  the  angle  lever  c*,  into 
engagement  with  the  cam  c3.  Through  the  link  c", 
radial  lever  c~,  and  pawl  c23,  the  ratchet  wheel 
c24,  is  thus  rotated  the  required  distance.  The  shaft  rfa, 
and  sprocket-wheel  d6t  are  thus  resolved,  operating 
the  pattern-chain  until  one  of  its  rollers  comes  under 
and  lifts  one  of  the  levers  d*t  di. 

In  Fig.  1  of  the  drawings  is  illustrated  the  position 
of  lever  f,  when  the  first  or  top  compartment  of  the 
shuttle-box  is  brought  opposite  the  lay  or  race  and 
ready  to  discharge  its  shuttle.  Supposing  that  the 
second  shuttle  from  the  top  is  called  for  after  the 
first  shuttle  has  performed  its  operation,  the  cam 
remains  in  its  raised  position — that  is  to  say,  the  angle 
lever  i3,  and  its  respective  treadle  d\  are  prevented 


50 


from  returning  to  their  normal  positions.  The  roller 
on  the  pattern-chain  next  to  the  roller  which  has 
lifted  the  said  lever  d\  engages  and  travels  along  the 
curved  cam  portion  d20,  of  the  latter  and  thus  will 
keep  the  said  treadle  in  its  raised  position. 

A  second   roller  simultaneously   lifts   that  treadle 


which  controls  through  its  cord  connection  the  arm 
i*  on  shaft  i,  which  latter,  through  the  arm  V1,  (its 
pin  engaging  the  annular  groove,)  slides  the  cam-wheel 
ft21,  on  the  shaft  ft2,  until  the  pin  It2,  is  in  the  path  of  the 
cam  projection  9,  of  wheel  9°,  and  the  projection  ft3, 
directly  beneath  the  lever  f.  The  wheel  0°,  in  its 
rotation  and  through  the  projection  9,  engaging  the 
pin  ft2,  operates  the  cam-wheel  ft",  until  the  projection 
ft3,  has  raised  the  lever  to  its  highest  position.  The 
pointed  end  of  said  projection  now  rests  against  the 
lug  or  stop  f",  in  which  position  it  remains  until  the 
cam-wheel  is  about  to  be  returned  for  a  different 
shuttle  call,  as  will  be  manifest. 


Raising  second  box: — Through  the  connection  of 
the  free  end  of  the  lever  f,  with  the  shuttle-box-sup- 
porting rod  the  latter  is  raised  one  compartment  and 
thus,  the  corresponding  shuttle  (the  second  one  from 
the  top)  brought  into  operation.  Should  said  shuttle 
be  required  for  more  than  one  pick,  the  hooked  end 
lever  C8,  is  lowered  by  the  Jacquard  machine  into  en- 
gagement with  the  pin  c7,  of  link  c",  thus  withdrawing 


the  angle  lever  c*,  from  contact  with  cam  c*,  and  thus 
preventing  a  further  rotation  of  the  shuttle-changing 
device  on  shaft  d2. 

Raising  the  third  box: — Now  supposing  that  the 
third  shuttle  from  the  top  is  required  it  is  necessary 
to  return  the  cam  wheels  ft'",  and  ft21,  to  their  normal 
positions.  The  corresponding  treadles  d*  and  d*  are 
lowered  by  the  pattern  chain,  thus  releasing  the  angle 
l&vers  from  the  strain  of  the  cord  connections  and 
thereby  allowing  the  spiral  springs  n' ,  to  slide  their 
respective  cam-wheels  ft20,  and  ft21,  back  on  their  stub- 
shafts  until  the  pins  ft2  are  out  of  the  path  of  the  pro- 
jections 9  of  wheel  9°,  and  the  projections  ft*  in  align- 
ment with  the  lever  f.  The  said  lever  will  be  forced 
downward  upon  said  projections  ft*,  by  the  action  of 
the  springs  fn,  or  f,  (see  Fig.  i)  and  as  the  cam- 
wheels  are  oscillated  backward  and  thus  returned  to 
their  normal  position  by  the  action  of  the  uncoiling 
of  their  respective  spiral  springs  n' ,  the  said  lever  f°, 
will  continue  in  its  downward  movement  until  it  has 
reached  its  lowermost  position.  Through  the  connec- 
tion of  the  free  end  of  the  lever  f,  with  the  shuttle- 
box-suporting  rod,  said  rod  and  the  box  are  lowered 
one  compartment  and  the  second  shuttle  from  the  top 
is  thus  brought  into  operation. 

Raising  the  fourth  box: — If  the  fourth  shuttle  from 
the  top  is  called  for,  the  cam  wheel  ft21,  is  operated 
until  the  projection  ft3,  has  raised  the  lever  to  its 
highest  position,  when  the  pointed  end  of  said  pro- 
jection engages  the  lug  or  stop  f*.  as  will  be  manifest. 

From  the  foregoing  it  can  readily  be  seen  that  when 
the  cam-wheels  are  operated  to  raise  the  lever  they  are 
brought  into  engagement  with  the  same  by  their 
respective  angle-levers  and  are  oscillated  by  the  pro- 
jections 9,  of  wheel  9°,  while  when  the  lever  is  to  be 
lowered  the  spiral  springs  which  by  the  former 
operation  has  been  depressed  and  coiled  tighter,  per- 
form the  operation  of  returning  (oscillating  back- 
ward) the  said  cam  wheels  to  their  respective  normal 
positions. 

The  mode  of  operation  of  the  lower  oscillating  cam 
wheels  Ka1  and  ft23,  and  the  connecting  lever  f,  is  the 
same  as  that  of  upper  cam  wheel  and  its  lever  f. 
(Adam  Seftcid,  Harrison,  N.  J.) 


DU  FAUR  AND   GARTNER'S  SHUTTLE-BOX 
MECHANISM. 

This  motion  is  designed  for  Jacquard  or  witch-top 
looms.  It  is  driven  directly  from  the  crank-shaft,  by 
a  double  eccentric  motion,  an  arm  from  one  eccentric 
working  the  box  pattern  chain  and  an  arm  from  the 
other  eccentric  working  the  cam-ratchet-wheels.  It 
is  an  easy  motion  adopted  for  looms  running  at  high 
speed. 

Fig.  i,  is  a  side  elevation  of  a  loom  provided  with 
the  mechanism,  certain  portions  being  removed  or 
broken  away,  and  others  shown  in  section,  to  better 
illustrate  the  nature  of  the  box  mechanism;  Fig.  2, 
is  a  sectional  view  on  the  line  x-x  of  Fig.  I,  certain 
parts  being  added  and  others  removed. 

a,  represents  the  loom  frame,  in  which  is  arranged 
the  driving-shaft  ft,  carrying  the  eccentric  c,  and  trans- 
mitting its  motion,  through  the  pitman  c,  pivoted,  as 
at  d,  to  said  eccentric,  to  the  lay  or  batten  s,  supported 
by  swords  f,  which  are  fulcrumed,  as  at  f1,  to  the 
bracket-frames  a',  of  the  loom  «,  respectively. 

At  each  end  of  the  lay  are  arranged  the  shuttle- 
boxes  f2,  carried  by  rods  f3,  each  of  which  rods  is 
guided  by  the  block  f*,  secured  to  its  respective  sword. 

On  the  shaft  ft,  is  also  mounted  an  eccentric  6°, 
operating  through  its  projecting  arm  ft1,  the  oscillat- 
ing lever  &x,  fulcrumed  on  the  shaft  ft3,  the  latter 


51 


having  its  bearing  in  the  bracket-frame  a*.  On  said 
shaft  is  also  mounted  the  sprocket-wheel  V,  carrying 
the  pattern-chain  bl,  which  latter  controls  the  treadle- 
levers  b°  and  V,  fulcrumed,  as  at  bs,  to  the  projecting 
portion  a5,  of  the  bracket-frame  a*.  Any  device  for 
operating  the  treadle-levers  ft6,  b\  can  be  used. 

At  the  lower  portion  of  the  loom-frame  «,  is  ar- 
ranged a  bracket-frame  a2,  serving  as  bearings  for  the 


The  cam-groove  wheels  on  one  cam-shaft  are  in  the 
same  plane  as  the  corresponding  cam-groove  wheels 
on  the  other  cam-shaft  and  are  each  provided  with  an 
endless  cam-groove  consisting  of  four  concave  and 
four  convex  curves,  arranged  alternately  and  sym- 
metrically, as  clearly  shown  in  Fig.  I. 

On  the  cam-shafts  c"  and  6°,  are  loosely  mounted 
the  oscillating  levers  c13  and  c",  respectively,  pivotally 
connected  at  their  free  ends,  as  at  <?  and  c10,  to  the 
arm  or  link  <?,  which  latter  is  provided  with  the 
horizontally-arranged  pin  c7,  engaging  the  elongated 
slot  c°,  of  the  free  end  of  arm  c5,  of  an  angle-lever 
which  is  fulcrumed,  as  at  c\  to  the  loom-frame.  The 
other  arm,  c3,  of  said  angle-lever  is  pivotally  con- 
nected as  at  c2,  to  the  arm  c\  carried  by  and  project- 
ing from  the  eccentric  c,  all  as  clearly  shown  in  Fig.  i» 
The  oscillating  levers  c13  and  c14,  are  provided  with 
horizontally-arranged  pins  020  and  !73°,  respectively, 
on  each  of  which  pins  and  on  each  side  of  the  levers 
are  fulcrumed  the  pawls  <f  and  <f  \  adapted  to  engage 
the  respective  ratchet  wheels  g*,  0°,  and  'f,  <f,  to  thus 
intermittently  rotate  the  same  (and  the  cam-groove 
wheels  connected  therewith). 

The  brake-wheel  (f\   V",  U'\   and  92\ 
which  are  octagonal-shaped,  are  each  en- 
-ZrVo'.-i?.     gaged   and   thus   controlled   by   the  flat 
*  springs  0s1,  J/23,  9a,  and  <f  \  respectively,  as 

clearly  shown  in  Fig.  2  of  the  drawings. 
The  pawls  gw,  and  g11,  are  connected  at  their  project- 
ing free  ends  by  cords  or  wires        &13,  &'\  b'\  with 
their  respective  treadle-levers  &",  b\    (Adolf  Faber  du 
-\-&  Faur  and  Alfred  Gartner,  Newark,  N.  J.,  assignors  ta 
Robert  Atherton,  N.  J.) 


DU  FAUR'S  MULTIPLIER. 


parallel  cam-shafts  c11  and  c12,  which  have  their  inner 
ends  supported  by  the  bracket-frames  a*. 

On  the  cam-shaft  c12,  which  is  provided  at  its  for- 
wardly  projecting  portion  with  a  hand-wheel  c15,  is 
secured  the  cam-groove  wheel  g1,  having,  integral 
therewith,  the  ratchet-wheel  gs,  and  the  octagonal- 
shaped  brake-wheel  (f".  On  said  cam-shaft  is  also 
loosely  mounted  a  sleeve,  prevented  from  lateral 
movement  by  means  of  'a  collar  on  shaft  c12,  which 
sleeve  carries  the  cam-groove  wheel  ff*,  the  ratchet  g\ 
and  the  brake-wheel  g'M.  The  projecting  end  of  the 
sleeve  c10,  is  provided  with  a  hand-wheel  c18,  all  as 
clearly  shown  in  Fig.  2.  As  will  be  observed  from 
said  figure,  the  cam-groove  wheels  g1  and  g3,  and 
their  respective  ratchet  and  brake-wheels  are  arranged 
symmetrically  with  relation  to  each  other,  and  the 
said  ratchet-wheels  are  on  the  inner  and  the  brake- 
wheels  on  the  outer  faces  of  said  cam-groove  wheels. 

On  the  cam-shaft  c11,  are  arranged  and  mounted,  in 
a  manner  similar  to  that  described  in  connection  with 


cam-shaft  c12.  Fig.  2,  the  cam-groove  wheels  g  and  g1, 
their  respective  ratchet-wheels  g*  and  g",  brake-wheels 
O2"  and  g2\  and  hand-wheels  c20  and  c".    (See  Fig  2.) 


The  object  of  this  mechanism  is  to  provide  a  mul- 
tiplier for  box-looms,  as  explained  in  the  preceding 
article,  by  means  of  which  certain  picks  can  be  re- 
peated without  the  use  of  a  long  and  cumbersome 
pattern-chain. 

Fig.  A,  is  a  side  elevation  of  this  improved  multi- 
plier arranged  on  a  portion  of  a  loom-frame  of  ordi- 
nary construction;  Fig.  B,  a  rear  elevation  thereof, 
the  pattern  and  auxiliary  chain  being  removed;  Fig. 
C,  a  detail  view  of  the  sprocket-wheel  actuating  and 
controlling  mechanism;  and  Figs.  D  and  E,  detail 
views  of  the  sprocket-wheels  and  of  the  pattern  and 
auxiliary  chains,  respectively,  carried  thereby. 

In  place  of  using  one  chain  as  on  his  box  motion 
explained  in  the  preceding  article,  Mr.  Du  Faur  uses 
in  the  present  multiplier  two  chains.  On  the  box 
chain  is  placed,  where  required,  a  long  chain  bar  which 
extends  out  past  the  chain  links  and  on  which  bar  is 
placed  a  raiser  every  time  "multiplying"  is  required. 
When  this  bar  is  raised  to  the  top  of  cylinder  it  lifts 
an  arm  which  stops  the  pattern-chain  and 
starts  the  auxiliary  chain.  On  this  auxiliary 
chain  is  also  placed,  where  required,  a  long 
bar  having  a  riser  placed  thereon,  and  as  soon 
as  the  pattern  calls  for  another  change  of 
filling  this  long  bar  is  brought  to  the  top 
of  cylinder,  thus  lifting  a  second  arm,  which  discon- 
nects the  auxiliary  chain  and  in  turn  connects  the 
pattern-chain  again.  A  thorough  description  of  this 
novel  multiplier  is  best  given  by  quoting  letters  of 
reference  of  which  a,  represents  a  portion  of  a  loom- 
frame,  and  a\  a  bracket-frame  secured  thereto,  which 
latter  furnishes  the  bearings  for  the  shaft  C°,  which  is 
arranged  parallel  to  the  main  driving-shaft  b,  mounted 
in  the  loom-frame  a.  On  the  shaft  c°,  is  securely 
mounted  a  sleeve  e,  having  integral  therewith  the 
sprocket-wheel  c2,  and  ratchet-wheel  c10,  and  also  the 


52 


wheel  c' ,  by  means  of  which  the  shaft  c°,  may  be 
rotated  by  hand.  On  said  shaft  c°,  is  also  loosely 
mounted  a  sleeve  e3,  having  integral  therewith  the 
sprocket-wheel  e4,  the  ratchet-wheel  c11,  and  the  hand- 
wheel  e\ 

The  ratchet-wheels  c10,  and  cu,  which  have  their 
teeth  cut  in  opposite  directions,  are  arranged  in  close 
proximity  to  each  other  and  are  separated  by  the 
sleeve  c4,  loosely  mounted  on  the  shaft  <?,  and  provided 
with  the  arms  c5  and  e".  The  free  end  of  the  arm  c5, 
is  pivotally  connected  as  at  c3,  to  the  arm  c2,  project- 
ing from  the  ring  or  rim  C,  surrounding  the  eccentric 
c,  which  latter  is  secured  on  the  main  driving-shaft  £>. 
To  the  free  end  of  the  arm  c8,  is  secured  the  pin  C1  on 
which  are  arranged — and  on  each  side  of  the  arm — 
the  pawls  c8  and  (?,  adapted  to  engage  the  teeth  of 
their  respective  ratchet-wheels  ci0  and  Cu.  (See 
Fig.  C.) 

In  the  bracket-frame  «',  and  above  and  parallel  to 
the  shaft  c°,  is  secured  the  rod  a",  from  which  is 
adjustably  suspended,  by  means  of  the  set-screw  a11, 
the  forked  bracket  a10,  serving  as  a  guide  for  the  levers 
a4,  a6,  fulcrumed  on  the  stub-shaft  a3,  which  latter  is 
secured  in  the  projecting  portion  a2,  of  the  bracket- 


frame  a'.  Said  levers  are  arranged  above  the  sprocket- 
wheel  c~,  and  are  adapted  to  be  operated  by  the  balls 
or  rolls  of  the  pattern-chain  e22,  Fig.  D,  as  will  be 
manifest.  On  the  rod  a',  is  loosely  mounted  the  sleeve 
.'/,  which  is  prevented  from  lateral  motion  by  the  collar 
{/'",  secured  to  said  rod. 

Integral  with  the  sleeve  ff,  or  secured  thereto  in 
any  desired  manner  are  the  depending  arms  9'  and  g2, 
carrying  the  horizontally-projecting  pins  g3  and  <74, 
adapted  to  engage  the  pawls  and  c9,  respectively,  in 
a  manner  hereinafter  described.  The  sleeve  9,  and  its 
depending  arms  g' ,  0",  are  held  in  operative  position 
by  means  of  the  flat  spring  g",  secured  with  one  end 
to  the  projecting  portion  a15,  of  the  bracket-frame  a', 
and  provided  at  its  other  end  with  teeth  engaging  the 
notches  g23,  arranged  in  lug  {f,  which  . latter  projects 
from  the  sleeve  g.  (See  Fig.  C.)  The  spring  <78,  may 
be  strengthened  by  the  pin  g\  secured  with  one  end 
substantially  in  the  centre  of  the  spring  and  with  its 
other  end  to  the  rod  a",  all  as  clearly  shown  in 
Fig.  B. 

The  pattern-chain  P,  is  carried  by  the  sprocket- 
wheel  e2,  and  rests  with  its  depending  portion  on  the 
slide  or  guide  f,  secured  to  and  projecting  from  the 


bracket-frame  a',  while  the  auxiliary  chain  e20,  is 
carried  by  the  sprocket-wheel  e4,  and  rests  with  its 
depending  portion  on  the  slide  or  guide  f,  also  secured 
to  the  bracket-frame  a'. 

On  one  or  more  of  the  rods  of  the  pattern-chain 
e22,  is  arranged  a  ball  e23,  in  alignment  with  the  depend- 
ing arm  g',  and  adapted  at  certain  intervals  to  engage 
the  said  arm.  The  auxiliary  chain  e20,  is  likewise  pro- 
vided with  balls  e21,  adapted  at  certain  intervals  to  en- 
gage the  depending  arm  g2. 

In  operation  a  continuous  oscillating  motion  is  im- 
parted from  the  main  driving-shaft  through  the  ec- 
centric c,  and  arms  c2  and  c5,  to  the  arm  c",  arranged 
on  the  sleeve  c4,  and  carrying  the  pawls  c8  and  c". 
The  pawl  c9,  is  normally  held  out  of  engagement  with 
the  ratchet-wheel  cu,  by  means  of  the  pin  g*,  and 
thus  prevents  rotation  of  the  sleeve  c3,  and  the 
sprocket-wheel  (carrying  the  auxiliary  chain  cm)  con- 
nected therewith.  The  pawl  c8,  whenever  the  arm  c', 
is  oscillated  from  right  to  left,  Fig.  C,  moves  the 
ratchet-wheel  Cw,  and  thus  the  pattern-chain  e22.  The 
pattern-balls  will  thus  come  under  and  raise  or  operate 
the  respective  levers  a4  or  a5,  thereby  actuating  the 
respective  parts  of  the  shuttle-changing  mechanism  to 
bring  the  required  box  in  position 
to  throw  its  shuttle.  The  pattern- 
chain  continues  to  revolve  until  one 
box  is  required  for  more  than  one 
pick,  that  is  to  say,  one  of  the  levers 
a4,  a5,  is  to  be  lifted  and  held  in  its 
raised  position  until  the  necessary 
picks  or  throws  from  the  shuttle  of 
the  box,  actuated  from  said  lever, 
have  been  accomplished. 
^  At  the  required  moment  the  ball 
e23,  of  the  pattern-chain  comes  in 
contact  with  and  throws  or  swings 
the  depending  arm  carrying  the 
pin  g3,  outward  until  the  said  pin, 
after  engaging  the  pawl  c8,  has 
thrown  the  latter  out  of  engage- 
ment with  the  ratchet-wheel  c10. 
Simultaneously  the  depending  arm 
g2,  carrying  the  pin  g*,  is  thrown  or 
swung  inward,  thus  clearing  the 
pawl  c9,  and  allowing  the  latter  to 
engage  the  teeth  of  the  ratchet- 
wheel  c".  The  ratchet-wheel  c11,  is 
thus  rotated  in  a  direction  opposite 
to  the  direction  of  the  ratchet-wheel 
cw,  and  as  it  is  in  fixed  connection 
with  the  sprocket-wheel  e4,  the  auxiliary  chain  e20,  is 
revolved  or  operated. 

Said  auxiliary  chain  continues  to  revolve  until  the 
respective  pick  has  been  repeated  the  required  number 
of  times.  At  that  pick  the  ball  c21,  comes  into  contact 
with  and  throws  or  swings  the  depending  arm  g2,  car- 
rying the  pin  gi,  outward  until  the  said  pin  has  thrown 
the  pawl  C,  out  of  engagement  with  the  ratchet-wheel 
c11,  thus  stopping  the  rotation  of  the  latter.  Simul- 
taneously the  depending  arm  g' ,  carrying  the  pin  g3, 
is  thrown  inward,  thus  releasing  the  pawl  c8,  which 
latter  again  engages  the  teeth  of  the  ratchet-wheel  c10, 
and  rotates  the  same.  The  depending  arms  !7',  and 
g2,  are  held  in  their  respective  positions  by  the  flat 
spring  g°,  as  heretofore  described.  It  will  thus  be 
seen  that  when  the  ball  e21,  of  auxiliary  chain  eM,  en- 
gages the  depending  arm  g2,  the  said  auxiliary  chain 
is  at  rest,  while  the  pattern-chain  is  rotated.  On  the 
other  hand,  when  the  ball  c23  of  pattern-chain  e22, 
engages  the  depending  arm  g' ,  the  said  pattern-chain 
is  stopped  in  rotation  and  the  auxiliary  chain  started 
in  a  manner  heretofore  described. 

To  remedy  defective  picks,  the  sprocket-wheels  e2, 
and  e4,  may  be  operated  by  hand  forward  and  back- 


53 


ward  by  means  of  the  wheels  C  and  c5,  respectively, 
as  will  be  manifest.  (Adolf  Fabcr  du  Faur,  assignor 
to  Robert  Athcrton,  Patcrson,  N.  J.) 


LUSCOMB'S  SHUTTLE-BOX  MECHANISM. 

The  object  of  the  new  mechanism  is  to  provide  a 
shuttle-box-opcrating  mechanism  for  looms  in  which 
accurate  and  positive  movement  is  imparted  to  the 


box  or  frame  adapted  to  contain  several  shuttles  which 
carry  filling  of  varied  colors  or  counts.  The  move- 
ment of  the  shuttle-box  is  rapid  and  accurate,  and  be- 
sides the  shuttle-box  is  locked  in  position  in  the  line 
of  the  shuttle-raceway  between  any  two  successive 
movements. 

An  advantage  gained  over  a  great  many  other  mo- 
tions of  this  kind  is,  that  this  motion  can  be  thrown 
out  of  gear  very  handy  when  a  weaver  has  occasion  to 
turn  the  pattern-chain  back  by  hand. 

Of  the  accompanying  illustrations,  Fig.  r,  is  an  end 
view  of  a  loom  showing  the  shuttle-box-operating 
mechanism  in  side  elevation.  Fig.  2,  discloses  the 
shuttle-box-operating  mechanism  in  end  elevation, 
viewing  the  same  from  the  back  of  the  loom.  Fig.  3, 
shows  the  mechanism  directly  connected  to  the  shuttle- 
box-lifting  devices.  Fig.  4,  is  a  sectional  drawing. 
Fig.  5,  shows  in  detail  an  automatic  release  and  stop- 
motion.  Fig.  6,  shows  in  detail  a  compound  counter- 
weight for  balancing  the  weight  of  the  reciprocating 
parts  of  the  shuttle-box  mechanism. 

For  explaining  the  mechanism,  a  shuttle-box  with 
four  compartments  is  selected,  however  a  mere  mechan- 
ical modification  or  reduplication  of  the  device  for 
raising  and  lowering  the  shuttle-box  will  enable  that 
mechanism  to  be  applied  to  shuttle-boxes  of  more  or 
less  than  four  compartments. 

The  shuttle-box  T2,  is  firmly  secured  to  a  rod  T', 
which  fits  loosely  at  its  lower  end  in  the  shoe  t,  on  the 
free  end  of  the  lever  T.  A  rod  R,  is  joined  by  a 
flexible  joint  r,  to  the  lever  T,  and  forms  the  connec- 


tion between  the  lever  T,  and  a  compound  eccentric 
E.  The  lever  T,  is  flexibly  connected  to  the  frame  of 
the  loom  by  a  link  V ' . 

The  weight  of  the  moving  parts  of  the  shuttle-box 
movement  is  counterpoised  by  the  weight  L,  in  its 
relationship  to  the  other  parts  of  the  mechanism. 

This  counterweight  is  shown  in  detail  in  Fig.  6, 
and  consists  of  two  parts  >«',  held  together  by  a 
rod  tn*,  which  is  controlled  by  a  spring  The  upper 
portion  m',  of  the  counterweight  is  turned  down  to  a 
cylindrical  projection  tn\  which  fits  in  a  socket  of  cor- 
responding dimensions  at  the  top  of  the  part  ni1>  of 
the  counterweight.  Into  the  part  is  screwed  the 
rod  m*,  which  passes  into  the  hole  in  the  lower  por- 
tion of  m~,  in  which  the  enlarged  head  of  rod  m*,  is 
fitted  to  slide.  Spring  holds  the  two  parts  of  the 
counterweight  together  in  such  a  manner  that  when- 
ever the  counterpart  is  lifted  or  dropped  suddenly,  the 
jolt  of  the  movement  is  in  part  taken  up  by  the  yield- 
ing of  the  spring  »»*. 

The  nature  of  the  compound  eccentric  E,  is  seen  by 
examination  of  Figs.  3  and  4.  The  rod  R,  is  screwed 
into  the  tongue  of  the  eccentric-strap  c,  which  em- 
braces the  outer  eccentric  c',  which  in  turn  embraces 
and  serves  as  a  strap  for  the  inner  eccentric  e2. 

The  throw  of  eccentric  C,  is  twice  that  of  the 
eccentric  e2,  so  that  if  the  throw  of  eccentric  e2,  be 
regarded  as  the  unit  of  the  throw  of  the  compound 
eccentric  E,  the  rod  R,  may  be  lifted  either  one,  two 
or  three  units,  according  to  whether  either  or  both  of 
eccentrics  e\  c2,  are  employed.  The  unit  of  throw 
is  that  which  corresponds  to  a  movement  of  the  shut- 
tle-box sufficient  to  shift  it  one  shuttle-space. 

Eccentric  e2,  is  integral  with  or  screwed  to  the  sleeve 
d,  which  rotates  on  the  stud  f,  as  a  bearing.  In  the 
sleeve  dt  are  cut  gear-teeth  which  mesh  with  the  pinion 
d',  which  in  turn  is  driven  by  gear-wheel  d2,  fast  on  the 
shaft,  which  is  actuated  by  star-wheel  D'. 

The  eccentric  e',  is  slotted  at  c3,  and  within  that 
slot  plays  the  pin  f,  secured  to  the  crank-plate  f2. 


which  forms  an  extension  of  the  sleeve  f,  which,  like 
the  sleeve  d,  turns  on  rod  f. 


54 


The  sleeve  f,  is  geared  to  mesh  with  the  pinion  P, 
which  in  turn  meshes  with  the  gear-wheel  f,  which  is 
actuated  by  the  star-wheel  D. 

Each  of  the  trains  of  gears,  actuated  by  star-wheels 
D,  and  D',  respectively,  is  designed  to  give  the  ec- 


centrics e',  and  e2,  exactly  one  hundred  and  eighty 
degrees  of  revolution,  so  that  each  turn  consequent 
upon  the  passage  of  one  segment  of  the  star-wheel 
will  result  in  giving  the  eccentric  its  maximum  throw. 

As  eccentric  e',  has  an  amplitude  of  throw  twice  that 
of  eccentric  e2,  the  resultant  throw  of  the  two  eccentrics 
may  be  made  to  be  either  one,  two  or  three  units, 
either  up  or  down.  If,  for  instance,  eccentric  e2,  is  at 
the  uppermost  position  of  its  throw  and  eccentric  C, 
at  its  lowermost  position  and  it  is  desired  to  move 
the  shuttle-box  system  another  unit  of  throw  upward, 
simultaneous  movement  of  the  two  trains  of  gears 
connected,  respectively  with  star-wheels  D,  and  D', 
will  result  in  the  desired  movement,  eccentric  e',  mov- 
ing two  units  up,  while  eccentric  e2,  moves  one  unit 
down,  subtracting  its  unit  from  the  two  of  upward 
throw  of  eccentric  e'. 

The  normal  position  of  the  system,  as  shown  in  the 
drawings,  is  the  one  in  which  the  uppermost  compart- 
ment of  the  shuttle-box  T2,  is  in  line  with  the  shuttle- 
raceway.  The  three  other  possible  positions  of  the 
shuttle-box  are  secured  by  movement  of  the  com- 
pound eccentric  E.  Determination  of  the  movements 
of  the  compound  eccentric  E,  is  secured  by  the  follow- 
ing mechanism: — 

The  intermittent  movement  of  star-wheels  D,  and 
D',  is  secured  by  the  agency  of  pin-wheels  P,  and  P', 
mounted,  respectively,  on  shafts  P,  and  p',  which  shafts 
are  adapted  to  slide  longitudinally  in  their  bearings  in 
the  machine  frame.  At  the  left-hand  end  of  shafts  P,  and 
p',  viewing  the  machine  as  in  Figs,  i  and  4,  are  shipper 
cam-wheels  G2,  and  G3.  The  wheel  G2,  and  its  dupli- 
cate G3,  are  spur-gears,  meshing  with  the  spur-gear 
G',  and  having  upon  their  faces  flange-cams  9.  The 
wheels  P,  P',  are  driven  from  the  main  shaft  of  the 
loom  through  the  train  of  mechanism  consisting  of 
the  chain  C',  wheel  W,  and  its  shaft  S,  on  which  the 
spur-gear  G',  is  keyed.  This  gear  meshes  with  gears 
G2,  and  G3,  on  shafts  P,  p' . 

The  rotation  of  the  pin-wheels  is  continuous  and 
their  operation  upon  star  wheels  D,  D',  determined 
by  the  lengthwise  movement  of  the  shafts  P,  P'.  This 


movement  is  determined  by  the  operation  of  the 
shippers  b'\  which  operate  on  the  cam-flange  f,  by 
means  of  the  finger  &3,  and  thumb  &4,  Fig.  4.  The 
shippers  &2,  consist  of  plates  sliding  in  boxes  which 
form  integral  parts  of  the  yoke  The  lower  ends  of 
shippers  b\  extend  through  the  boxes  on  and  rest 
upon  the  ends  of  lifting-levers  I,  I',  which  are  provided 
with  toes  I',  resting  upon  the  links  of  a  pattern-chain 
C4,  which  is  moved  at  a  uniform  rate  by  means  of  the 
chain  C2,  and  wheel  C3,  Fig.  1.  Apron  A',  is  pro- 
vided with  means  which  insure  a  proper  disposition  of 
the  slack  loop  of  pattern-chain  C4,  when  the  latter  is 
unusually  long.  Through  levers  I,  I',  operated  by  the 
links  of  pattern-chain  C4,  the  shippers  6s,  are  raised 
or  lowered.  The  movements  of  the  pattern-chain  C4, 
are  timed  so  that  the  movement  of  the  shipper  up 
and  down  shall  occur  when  the  cam-flange  0,  is  making 
the  upper  half  of  its  revolution.  The  finger  and 
thumb  &3,  and  b\  are  so  proportioned  and  disposed 
(see  Fig.  4)  that  a  movement  of  the  shipper  62,  must 
result  in  a  movement  of  shaft  p'  either  to  the  right 
or  left. 

Viewing  the  machine  as  in  Fig.  4,  it  is  obvious  that 
a  movement  of  shaft  p',  to  the  left,  will  result  in  the 
engagement  of  star-wheel  D',  by  pin-wheel  P',  and  a 
consequent  movement  of  the  eccentric-rod  R,  through 
the  trains  of  gears  hereinbefore  described.  To  effect 
this  movement,  let  the  lever  I',  be  raised  by  a  lug  on 
pattern-chain  C4.  Then  the  shipper  b~,  will  be  pushed 
up  into  such  a  position  that  the  thumb  b\  will  upon 
the  next  half-revolution  of  the  gear  G3,  come  into 
operative  contact  with  the  cam-flange  <f.  This  con- 
tact instantly  throws  the  gear  G3,  shaft  p',  and  pin- 
wheel  P',  to  the  left.  The  gear  G3,  moves  along  the 
face  of  wheel  G',  which  is  made  sufficiently  wide  to 
permit  this  movement  and  at  the  same  time  continue 
its  work  of  driving  the  gears  G2,  and  G3,  and  their 
respective  trains  of  mechanism.  The  longitudinal 
movement  of  shaft  p',  to  the  left,  brings  the  flange  <f, 
under  the  guide  portion  of  finger  l>3,  and  so  long  as 
the  shipper  62,  remains  elevated,  the  star-wheel  D', 


is  rotated  intermittently  with  every  revolution  of  pin- 
wheel  P'.  As  the  pin  P2,  of  pin-wheel  P,  leaves  the 
star-wheel  notches,  the  disk  portion  of  P,  fits  in  the 
concave  faces  of  the  star-wheel  sectors  and  locks  the 
star-wheel  between  the  intermittent  movements  of 
rotation.  The  same  action  takes  place  with  pin-wheel 
P',  and  its  pin  P3.  In  order  to  throw  star-wheel  D', 
out  of  operation,  the  reversal  of  the  mechanical  move- 


55 


ment  just  described,  is  effected  by  arranging  the  links 
of  pattern-chain  C,  so  that  lever  I',  will  drop  and 
permit  the  shipper  V1,  to  rest  in  its  normal  position, 
as  shown  in  Fig.  4.  This  movement,  like  the  up- 
ward movement  of  lever  I',  and  shipper  b-,  takes  place 
when  the  flange-cams  V,  are  in  the  upper  half  of  their 
revolution.  The  finger  b3,  then  operates  to  throw  the 
gear  G3,  and  shaft  p',  with  pin-wheel  P',  a  sufficient 
distance  to  the  right  to  throw  the  pin-wheel  out  of 
engagement  with  the  star-wheel  D',  the  disk  portion 
of  the  pin-wheel  remaining  in  the  corresponding  face 
of  the  star-wheel  segment  and  locking  the  same  in 
position. 

The  above  description  relates  only  to  one  of  the 
star-wheels  and  its  train  of  operating  mechanism,  but 
is  equally  applicable  to  the  others. 

Reduplication  of  the  mechanism  described  in  con- 
nection with  either  of  the  eccentric  members  e',  e2, 
and  their  respective  actuating  mechanism  will  render 
the  shuttle-box-operating  attachment  capable  of  secur- 
ing the  requisite  movement  to  a  shuttle-box  having 
more  than  four  compartments  or  members. 

In  connection  with  the  shuttle-box-lifting  mechan- 
ism there  is  provided  means  for  throwing  the  box- 
motion  out  of  connection  with  the  main  shaft  of  the 
loom. 

This  disconnection  may  take  place  at  the  will  of 
the  operator  who  desires  to  manipulate  the  box-mo- 
tion by  hand,  or  automatically,  when  some  obstruc- 
tion to  the  movement  of  the  shuttle-box  renders  in- 
stant disconnection  with  the  source  of  power  neces- 
sary. The  portion  of  the  mchanism  contrived  to  secure 
these  results  is  shown  in  Fig.  5,  which  is  a  detail  of 
Fig.  1. 

The  driving-shaft  of  the  shuttle-box  mechanism  is 
made  in  two' parts  S,  and  S',  the  outer  shaft  S,  being 


capable  of  sliding  along  the  inner  shaft  S'.  The  main 
driving-wheel  W,  turns  upon  the  inner  shaft  S',  and  is 
normally  in  engagement  with  the  disk  W,  by  reason 
of  the  interlocking  of  the  tooth  w',  and  the  notch 
w,  in  disk  W,  and  wheel  W,  respectively.  At  the 
end  of  the  shaft  S',  remote  from  wheel  W,  is  mounted 
the  hand-wheel  X.  The  hub  of  hand-wheel  X,  is 
bored  out  to  receive  the  end  of  shaft  S',  upon  which 
is  the  collar  s,  which  rests  against  a  shoulder  of  the 
hub  of  wheel  X.  The  nut  s',  screws  the  wheel  and 
hub  to  the  shaft  S'.  The  hollow  shaft  S,  is  inserted  in 
the  hub  of  wheel  X,  and  in  the  space  between  shaft  S', 
and  the  sides  of  the  hole  bored  in  the  hub  of  wheel  X, 
is  placed  a  coil  spring  s2,  which,  bearing  against  the 
collar  s,  at  one  end,  and  the  end  of  hollow  shaft  S, 
at  the  other,  constantly  exerts  its  bias  to  hold  disk 
W,  against  wheel  W.  This  thrust  of  spring  s2,  holds 
the  disk  W,  and  wheel  W,  normally  in  engagement 
with  each  other  by  means  of  the  tooth  and  notch  W>', 
and  10,  heretofore  described. 

The  hollow  shaft  S,  has  a  collar  -53,  integral  with  it, 
and  which  collar  is  turned  to  a  bevel  or  conical  sur- 
face, so  as  to  permit  the  claw  x3,  of  notch  x,  to  ride 
up  when  shaft  S',  is  thrust  to  the  left,  as  viewed  in 
Fig.  5.  A  spring  x',  constantly  presses  the  claw  x3, 
of  catch  x,  against  the  conical  surface  of  collar  ss. 

If  the  operator  desires  to  turn  the  shuttle-box  mech- 


anism by  hand  he  has  only  to  thrust  the  hand-wheel 
X,  toward  the  disk  W,  against  the  pressure  of  spring 
8*.  The  claw  x*,  of  catch  x,  rides  up  over  the  collar 
s3,  until  it  catches  on  the  back  side  of  the  collar.  With 
the  parts  in  this  position  the  spring  s',  is  locked  out 
of  action  and  the  shaft  S',  is  moved 
,o\  ,  through  the  hollow  shaft  S,  until  disk 
J  V71"  W,  and  wheel  W,  are  turned  out  of 
'  1?  engagement.  Then  through  the  mech- 
4,  anisni  shown  and  described  in  connec- 
^  tion  with  Fig.  1,  the  shuttle-box-mech- 
jt  anism  may  be  operated  by  hand.  Like- 
wise the  mechanism  of  Fig.  5,  is 
s  useful  as  an  automatic  release  or  stop 
motion  whenever  by  chance  the  nor- 
,S  mal  movement  of  the  shuttle-box  is 
interrupted  or  obstructed. 
T^ff  A  The  sides  of  tooth  to',  and  notch 

?'  '  10,  are  inclined  at  such  an  angle  that 

while  under  normal  operation  the 
spring  s2,  holds  the  tooth  and  notch  10,  and  10' ,  in  en- 
gagement with  each  other,  the  interposition  of  an 
obstruction  will  increase  the  sliding  tendency  of  the 
inclined  sides  of  the  said  tooth  and  notch  w' ,  and  w, 
to  such  a  point  that  the  pressure  of  spring  s2,  will  be 
firm,  and  the  tooth  W,  be  thrown  out  of  notch  w. 
This  results  in  a  lengthwise  relative  movement  of  the 
shafts  S,  and  S',  so  that  the  claw  x3,  of  catch  x, 
hooks  over  the  collar  s3,  holding  the  wheel  W,  and 
disk  W,  out  of  engagement.  In  this  position  the 
mechanism  is  retained  until  the  workman  in  attend- 
ance upon  the  loom  can  repair  the  damage  or  remove 
the  obstruction.    (Andrew  Luscomb,  Fall  River,  Mass.) 


SHUTTLE-BOX  FOR  PLAIN  LOOMS. 

The  object  in  the  construction  of  this  box  is,  to  im- 
prove the  shuttle-box  end  of  the  lay,  whereby  the 
flight  of  the  shuttle  may  be  started  in  the  proper  direc- 
tion across  the  raceway  of  the  lay. 

In  looms  as  now  commonly  made,  having  a  binder 
in  the  back  of  the  shuttle-box  and  an  adjustable  front 
plate,  said  front  plate  is  constructed  to  present  a 
straight  face  with  short  rounded  ends. 

The  portion  of  the  front  plate  next  the  end  of  the 
lay  is  adjusted  and  held  in  place  at  just  the  proper 
distance  from  the  back  plate  to  leave  a  space  just 
sufficient  to  receive  the  shuttle  as  it  comes  to  rest  in 
the  shuttle-box;  but,  if  the  face  of  the  front  plate, 
commencing  at  its  end  nearest  the  end  of  the  lay, 
should  be  held  parallel  with  the  reed  then  the  space 
afforded  at  the  open  mouth  of  the  shuttle-box  to 
admit  the  shuttle,  would  be  too  small  and  would  not 
properly  receive  the  shuttle  should  it  be  a  little  out 
of  alignment  as  it  passed  the  selvage-warps. 

Consequently  the  face  of  the  front  plate  is  com- 
monly set  at  an  angle  to  the  plane  occupied  by  the 
face  of  the  reed,  and  as  a  result  thereof  the  shuttle, 
on  its  arrival  in  the  box,  may  stop  in  an  inclined 
position  with  relation  to  the  face  of  the  reed,  and  the 
shuttle  when  started  in  such  position  will  be  moved 
in  an  angular  direction  with  relation  to  the  face  of 
the  reed  and  will  be  thrown  off,  of  the  race  of  the  lay 
into  the  shed,  causing  what  is  called  a  "smash." 

One  of  the  chief  purposes  of  the  face-plate  is  to 
correctly  position  the  shuttle  in  the  shuttle-box  or 
line  it  up  in  the  box,  so  that  when  it  starts  on  its 
flight  after  it  has  been  struck  by  the  picker,  it  will 
have  a  straight-line  movement,  and  it  will  continue 
such  movement  from  end  to  end  of  the  lay. 

To  overcome  the  possibility  of  starting  the  shuttle 
in  an  angular  direction,  with  relation  to  the  direction 
of  the  lay  and  at  the  same  time  afford  ample  space 


56 


for  the  entrance  of  the  shuttle  in  the  shuttle-box 
should  it  have  deviated  somewhat  from  a  straight 
line  at  the  time  it  emerged  from  the  shed,  a  novel 
front  plate  is  arranged  having  two  straight  or  plane 
surfaces,  one  intersecting  the  other  at  a  slight  angle, 
that  part  of  the  straight  face  of  the  improved  front 
plate  nearest  the  outer  end  of  the  shuttle-box,  being 
set  substantially  parallel  with  the  reed,  the  second 
portion  of  the  straight  face  nearest  the  open  end  of 
the  shuttle-box  being  inclined  from  the  junction  of 
said  angle  somewhat  outwardly  toward  the  breast- 
beam  to  thus  form  an  enlarged  entrance  for  an  in- 
coming shuttle,  the  said  shuttle  when  it  reaches  the 
picker  in  the  box  being  positioned  parallel  with  the 
lay  by  the  straight  face  of  the  front  plate  nearest  the 
outer  end  of  the  lay  and  remaining  in  that  position 
when  it  is  struck  by  the  picker  and  during  the  first 
part  of  the  flight  being  guided  in  a  straight  line 
parallel  to  the  reed. 

Of  the  accompanying  illustrations  Fig.  I,  in  plain 
view,  shows  one  end  of  a  lay  with  the  improvements 
added,  and  Fig.  2,  is  a  side  elevation  of  the  front  plate 
detached. 


A,  indicates  the  lay;  B,  the  back  plate  of  the  shuttle- 
box,  having  an  overhanging  lip  B',  at  the  entrance  end 
of  the  box.    C,  indicates  the  binder  as  pivoted  at  C. 

The  front  plate  D,  forming  one  side  of  the  shuttle- 
box,  has  slotted  ears,  which  receive  the  screws  d, 
used  to  connect  the  front  plate  adjustably  to  the  lay. 
The  face  of  the  front  plate  from  near  its  end  nearest 
the  end  of  the  lay  is  made  straight,  as  at  d,2,  to  sub- 
stantially the  point  00',  and  from  that  point  toward 
the  opposite  end  of  the  front  plate  the  face  is  also 
straight,  but  the  second  straight-line  face  d3)  is  at  an 
obtuse  angle  to  the  straight-line  face  of  the  other 
part  of  the  front  plate.  The  straight  face  d2,  is  located 
substantially  parallel  to  the  reed  carried  by  the  lay, 
so  as  to  insure  the  proper  position  for  the  shuttle 
when  fully  into  the  shuttle-box,  so  that  as  the  picker 
strikes  the  shuttle  to  throw  it  from  the  box  through 
the  shed,  the  said  shuttle  will  start  straight. 

By  inclining  the  face  d3,  ample  entrance  for  the 
shuttle  into  the  box  will  be  insured,  and  thereafter 
the  straight  face  d2,  will  correctly  position  the  shuttle 
preparatory  to  a  new  flight.    (Draper  Co.) 


NORTHROP'S  SHUTTLE-CHECK  FOR  PLAIN 
LOOMS. 

The  object  of  this  check  is  the  construction  of  a 
binder  whereby  the  same  may  be  adjusted  in  such 
manner  as  to  present  more  or  less  of  its  swell  in  the 
box  to  check  the  shuttle  or  raise  the  dagger  higher. 

The  free  end  of  the  usual  binder  used  in  looms  is 
commonly  acted  upon  by  the  protector-rod  finger. 

In  this  check  the  binder  is  made  in  two  parts,  one 
part  being  adjustable  on  the  other  part,  whereby  by 


a  greater  or  less  adjustment  of  one  part  on  the  other, 
a  greater  or  less  projection  of  the  swell  of  the  binder 
into  the  shuttle-box  may  be  effected. 

Fig.  1,  in  side  elevation,  represents  part  of  one  end 
of  a  lay  and  part  of  a  picker  and  its  stick  and  the 


improved  binder;  and  Fig.  2  is  a  top  or  plan  view  of 
Fig.  1,  with  the  part  of  the  back  plate  of  the  shuttle- 
box  broken  out  to  better  show  the  improved  binder. 

A  description  of  this  shuttle  check  is  best  given  by 
quoting  letters  of  reference. 

A,  indicates  the  lay;  B,  its  back  plate  having  an  over- 
hanging lip  B'.  C,  is  the  adjustable  front  plate  con- 
nected by  screws  C ;  D,  is  the  picker  stick,  and  d'  the 
picker;  a,  the  stop-rod,  and  a',  its  finger. 

The  binder  E,  pivoted  at  2,  is  shown  as  made  of 
two  parts,  the  part  e,  having  the  swell  e',  and  at  its 
back  an  inclined  seat  e2  and  a  part  e3,  having  an  angular 
end  e4,  said  end  bearing  on  said  seat,  the  part  e*t  being 
slotted  to  receive  a  threaded  stud,  on  which  is  placed 
a  clamping-nut  f. 

With  the  parts  in  the  position  shown  in  the  draw- 
ings the  swell  of  the  binder  projects  its  greatest 
amount  into  the  shuttle-box;  but  to  secure  a  less 
projection  of  said  swell  into  the  shuttle-box  the  nut 
f,  may  be  loosened  and  the  end  e3  be  adjusted  on  the 
stud  to  the  right,  such  adjustment  putting  the  fore 
end  of  the  part  e3  in  a  different  vertical  plane  with 
relation  to  the  acting  face  of  said  swell,  and  when  in 


the  desired  or  proper  position  the  nut  will  be  again 
set  to  hold  the  parts  firmly.    (Draper  Co.) 


SHUTTLE-BOX  FOR  NORTHROP  LOOMS. 

In  automatic  looms,  or  looms  in  which  the  shuttle 
is  replenished  with  a  bobbin  while  the  shuttle  is  in  the 
shuttle-box  and  the  loom  in  motion,  it  is  necessary 
in  the  operation  of  supplying  the  shuttle  with  a 
bobbin  or  filling-carrier  that  the  shuttle  always  oc- 
cupies as  nearly  as  possible  exactly  the  same  position 
in  the  shuttle-box  whenever  the  pusher  used  to  push 
the  filling-carrier  from  the  usual  filling-carrier  feeder 
into  the  shuttle  acts,  the  filling  in  the  shuttle  having 
been  exhausted  or  broken. 

To  accomplish  this  is  the  object  of  the  present  in- 
vention, >■  e.,  securing  a  definite  position  for  the  shuttle 
in  the  shuttle-box. 

Fig.  1,  is  a  top  or  plan  view  of  a  part  of  lay  with 
its  shuttle-box  and  a  shuttle  therein,  and  Fig.  2,  is 
a  front  elevation  of  the  same. 

The  lay  A,  having  at  its  end  a  shuttle-box  slotted 
through  from  top  to  bottom,  as  shown  by  dotted  lines. 


57 


Fig.  2,  the  binder  o,  the  spring  ?>,  acting  thereon  to 
normally  keep  the  binder  pressed  into  the  box,  the 
picker-stick  D,  having  a  picker  d,  and  the  shuttle  E, 
having  tips  c,  a  suitable  self-threading  device  C  and 
suitable  jaws  e2  to  receive  the  ringed  head  of  a  bobbin 
or  filling-carrier,  are  substantially  as  explained  in  the 
previous  article  "Northrop's  Shuttle  Check  for  Plain 
Looms,"  and  in  practice  this  loom  will  have  cooperat- 
ing with  it  a  filling-carrier  feeder  and  a  pusher,  to 
put  a  fresh  filling-carrier  into  the  shuttle  whenever 
the  filling  has  been  broken  or  exhausted  in  the  shuttle. 

To  insure  the  correct  positioning  of  the  shuttle  in 
the   shuttle-box   under  the   pusher,  referred   to,  the 


shuttle-box  is  provided  at  its  front  side  with  a  front 
plate  G,  having  ears  presenting  elongated  opening 
for  the  reception  of  screws  g,  by  which  to  confine  the 
front  plate  in  adjusted  position.  The  inner  side  of 
this  front  plate,  (see  Fig.  i)  near  its  outer  end,  is 
provided  with  an  inclined  surface  [/',  of  such  shape  as 
to  conform,  substantially,  to  the  contour  of  the  shuttle 
just  back  of  its  point  e,  so  that  as  the  said  shuttle 
arrives  fully  into  the  box  its  inclined  side  will  meet 
and  bear  against  the  inclined  face  of  the  front  plate, 
the  further  movement  of  the  shuttle  in  that  direction 
being  stopped  by  the  said  incline  .'/',  the  binder  acting 
on  the  shuttle  at  its  opposite  flat  side  back  of  the 
pointed  end.  thus  seating  the  shuttle  against  the  said 
incline  9',  so  that  the  said  shuttle 
will  be  checked  and  positioned  cor- 
rectly with  relation  to  the  slot  in 
the  lay,  through  which  the  spent 
filling-carrier  in  the  shuttle  may  be 
ejected.  The  rigid  front  plate  acts 
to  receive  against  it  the  front  side  of 
the  shuttle,  the  shuttle  being  acted 
upon  at  its  rear  side  by  the  binder, 
which  cooperates  with  the  flat  or 
straight  side  of  the  shuttle  between 
its  poined  ends,  the  binder  exactly 
positioning  the  shuttle  with  its  filling-carrier,  so  that 
the  latter  may  be  correctly  ejected  from  the  shuttle 
and  so  that  the  shuttle  will  be  so  placed  that  the  trans- 
ferrer, whenever  it  operates,  can  unerringly  put  a  new 
filling-carrier  into  the  shuttle,  and,  further,  the  binder 
being  extended  along  the  back  of  the  lay  throughout 
the  length  of  the  shuttle  prevents  any  possible  dis- 
placement of  the  shuttle  with  relation  to  the  width 
of  the  lay  and  the  slot  made  in  the  same,  as  described. 
(Draper  Co.) 


removed  therefrom,  as  required,  without  loss  of  time 
or  the  services  of  a  machinist,  and  whereby,  in  the 
use  thereof,  the  shuttles  may  be  more  gradually 
brought  to  rest,  and  the  shocks  and  jars,  as  well  as 
the  wear  on  the  pickers,  incident  to  machines  of  this 
character,  thereby  materially  reduced. 

Fig.  i,  is  a  top  view  of  the  check,  showing  the 
shuttle  moving  into  position  to  engage  the  picker  and 
the  buffer  device  in  its  normal  inoperative  position 
with  its  buffer  expanded.  Fig.  2,  is  also  a  top  view 
showing  this  buffer  device  with  its  buffer  compressed, 
to  thereby  check  or  cushion  the  shuttle. 

Heretofore  it  has  been  the  usual  practice  to  form  a 
buffer  by  means  of  cotton  or  other  suitable  waste 
placed  in  the  rear  of  the  picker;  but  such  a  buffer  is 
not  only  unreliable,  in  that  it  has  no  uniform  resist- 
ance, and  therefore  permits  the  picker  and  the  shuttle 
to  come  to  rest  in  various  positions  at  different  times, 
but  it  also  becomes,  in  a  short  time,  compressed  into 
a  rigid  and  practically  solid  mass,  and  thus  materially 
loses  its  action  as  a  buffer. 

To  obviate  these  defects  and  disadvantages,  is  the 
object  of  this  buffer  device,  simple  in  construction,  and 
effective  in  operation,  and  in  the  use  of  which,  by 
reason  of  the  uniformity  of  resistance  furnished,  the 
device  materially  assists  in  maintaining  the  regularity 
and  perfect  operation  of  the  loom,  and  also,  by  reason 
of  the  relatively  long  stroke  of  the  buffer  block  or  head 
as  compared  with  buffer  means  heretofore  in  use,  the 
shuttle  is  brought  to  rest  more  gradually,  so  that  it 
can  be  held  in  the  shuttle-box  by  a  less  powerful 
shuttle-binder,  and  consequently  requires  a  less  power- 
ful blow  of  the  picker-staff  in  order  to  drive  the  shuttle 
out  of  the  box  and  through  the  shed  into  the  op- 
posite shuttle-box  of  the  loom,  whereby  the  loom  can 
be  operated  with  less  power  and  a  material  saving 
thereby  effected,  not  only  in  power,  but  in  continuity 
of  operation  and  cost  of  maintenance. 

The  buffer  device  comprises  in  a  general  way,  a 
buffer  block  or  head  A,  preferably  composed  of  metal, 
although  any  suitable  material  might  be  used,  such  as 
raw-hide,  adapted  to  engage  the  picker-head  when  in 
its  position  of  rest;  a  buffer  B,  comprising  one  or 
more  springs,  herein  shown,  however,  as  two  in  num- 
ber, preferably  one  inside  of  or  superimposed  upon 
the   other,   adapted  to   cushion   and   counteract  the 


Fiof-  Z. 


WERNER'S  SHUTTLE-CHECK. 

The  object  of  this  device  is  to  provide  a  simple  and 
effective  check  or  buffer  adapted  to  be  quickly  assem- 
bled and  disposed  in  looms  alread>  in  use  and  readily 


thrust  of  the  shuttle  and  permit  the  same  to  gradually 
come  to  rest  on  its  engagement  with  the  picker-head, 
and  a  base-block  C. 

In  the  use  of  this  device,  the  picker  having  been 
placed  in  its  race  35,  with  the  shank  41,  thereof  carried 
by  the  guide-rod  42,  and  connected  by  the  strap  44, 
to  the  picker-staff  45,  the  buffer-head  is  placed  in  posi- 
tion with  its  guide-arms  30,  and  extension  31,  in  their 
respective  positions,  to  permit  the  buffer-head  to  en- 
gage the  picker-head  43.  The  base-block  is  then 
placed  in  position  with  its  rear  face,  engaging  the 
transverse  wall  40,  and  its  wings  or  extensions  34,  in 
the  recess  36.  The  springs  are  then  compressed  and 
placed  in  position  intermediate  the  base-block  and  the 
buffer-head,  and  the  device  is  then  in  position  for  use, 
and  when  the  shuttle,  by  means  of  the  picker  and 
picker-staff,  is  forced  through  the  shed  and  the  end 


58 


thereof  strikes  one  of  the  pickers,  the  springs  are  com- 
pressed. (See  Fig.  2.)  The  force  of  the  blow  is 
thereby  taken  up,  the  shuttle  and  the  picker  cushioned 
with  uniform  regularity,  and  the  shuttle  permitted  to 
gradually  come  to  rest.  (Louis  C.  Werner,  East 
Windsor,  Connecticut.) 


COWGILL'S  SHUTTLE-BINDER. 

This  binder  is  an  excellent  device  for  single  box 
looms  running  at  high  speed,  and  is  shown  in  the 
accompanying  illustrations  of  which  Fig.  A,  represents 
a  top  view  of  one  end  of  the  lay  of  the  loom,  show- 
ing one  of  the  shuttle-boxes  having  such  a  shuttle- 
binder  attached.  Fig.  B,  is  a  sectional  view  on  line 
3-3,  of  Fig.  A. 


Quoting  letters  of  reference  will  clearly  explain  the 
construction  and  operation  of  the  device. 

A,  denotes  a  portion  of  the  lay  of  the  loom.  B, 
denotes  one  of  the  shuttle-boxes,  and  C,  the  binder, 
pivoted  upon  a  stud  C,  with  the  inner  side  of  the 
binder  C,  placed  in  the  path  of  the  shuttle,  so  that 
when  the  shuttle  enters  the  box  B,  the  binder  C,  will 
be  swung  upon  the  stud  C,  and  the  free  end  of  the 
binder  moved  outward. 

Journaled  in  bearings  D,  which  are  attached  to  the 
lay,  is  a  protector-rod  D',  to  which  is  attached  a 
finger  D2,  with  its  end  bearing  against  the  binder  C. 
A  weighted  arm  D3,  is  attached  to  the  protector-rod 
and  extends  beneath  the  lay,  so  that  its  weight  will 
rock  the  rod  and  hold  the  end  of  the  finger  DJ,  pressed 
against  the  outside  of  the  binder  C,  with  a  uniform 
pressure,  or  in  lieu  of  the  weighted  arm  D3,  a  spring 
can  be  applied  to  rock  the  rod  D'. 

The  binder  C,  consists  of  a  bar  of  wood  pivoted 
upon  the  stud  C',  and  provided  upon  its  inner  side 
with  an  elastic  finger  E,  integral  with  the  bar  C,  and 
separated  from  it  by  the  saw-kerf  E'.  The  finger  E, 
has  its  free  end  scarfed  at  E2,  for  the  incoming  shuttle 
to  strike  against,  and  the  binder  is  held  in  its  normal 
position  with  the  inner  side  E3,  of  the  elastic  finger 
lying  within  the  path  of  the  shuttle,  so  as  to  exert  a 
friction  upon  the  shuttle  as  it  is  received  within  the 
box.  As  the  incoming  shuttle  strikes  against  the 
scarfed  end  Es,  of  the  elastic  finger  E,  the  finger 
yields  slightly  to  the  impact  of  the  shuttle,  gradually 
checking  the  momentum  of  the  shuttle  as  it  approaches 
the  end  of  the  box.  The  continued  motion  of  the 
shuttle,  however,  after  pressing  the  elastic  finger, 
causes  the  free  end  of  the  binder  to  be  moved  out, 
thereby  rocking  the  protector-rod  D'. 

This  method  of  construction  not  only  renders  the 
binder  extremely  cheap  and  simple,  and  obviates 
entirely  the  employment  of  a  tempered  spring-blade 
attached  by  screws  or  bolts,  but  it  also  provides  a 
binder  which  is  extremely  sensitive  to  the  impact  of 
the  shuttle,  and  causes  the  momentum  of  the  shuttle 
to  be  gradually  retarded,  as  the  resistance  of  the 
elastic  finger  is  chiefly  expended  to  control  the  action 
of  the  shuttle  during  the  period  of  its  impact  against 
the  scarfed  end  E2.  In  practice,  a  binder  constructed 
and  operating  as  herein  described,  renders  the  loom 
capable  of  considerably  increased  speed.  (James 
Cowgill,  Lmvell,  Mass.,  assignor  to  David  L.  Bradt 
and  William  J,  Woods,  Worcester,  Mass.) 


NOLAN  &  WILKIE'S  MOUTHPIECE  FOR 
LOOM  SHUTTLE-BOXES. 

The  object  of  this  mouthpiece  for  shuttle-boxes  for 
any  kind  of  loom,  is  to  provide  means  for  preventing 
the  yarn  of  the  shuttles  in  the  raised  shuttle-boxes 
from  being  drawn  into  the  shed  with  the  yarn  of  the 
outgoing  shuttle;  to  prevent  the  straining  or  break- 
ing of  the  yarn  by  engagement  between  the  side  of 
the  traveling  shuttle  and  the  side  of  the  shuttle-box 
mouthpiece  and  to  force  the  shuttle  into  the  box  if  it 
does  not  fully  enter  the  same. 

Fig.  1,  represents  a  front  side  view  of  the  shuttle- 
boxes  and  the  mouthpiece  with  a  portion  of  the  lay- 
beam.  Fig.  2,  represents  a  vertical  section  taken  in 
the  line  2-2,  of  Fig.  1,  showing  a  front  edge  view  of 
the  mouthpiece.  Fig.  3,  represents  an  enlarged  front 
edge  view  of  the  mouthpiece.  Fig.  4,  represents  an 
enlarged  rear  side  view  of  the  same.  Fig.  5,  represents 
an  enlarged  top  view.  Fig.  6,  represents  a  horizontal 
section. 

A,  represents  the  lay-beam;  B,  the  reed;  C,  the 
loom-temple,  and  D,  the  line  of  the  web.  The  mouth- 
piece E,  is  provided  with  a  recessed  lip  f,  which  serves 
to  guide  the  up-and-down  movement  of  the  forward 
edge  of  the  drop-shuttle  boxes  «,  in  which  the  shuttles 
are  held  by  the  shuttle-binders  6,  which  are  actuated 
by  means  of  the  springs  c.  The  rear  edge  of  the 
shuttle-boxes  is  guided  in  its  up-and-down  movement 
by  the  plate  F,  which  is  secured  to  the  arm  H,  ex- 
tending outward  from  the  lay-beam  A. 

The  mouthpiece  E,  is  secured  to  the  lay-beam  A, 
by  means  of  the  bolt  d,  and  to  the  upward  extension 
e,  of  the  lay-sword  I,  by  means  of  the  bolt  9,  the 
curved  surface  h,  of  the  rear  arm  i,  of  the  mouthpiece 
serving  to  guide  the  nose  of  the  shuttle  into  its 
shuttle-box,  and  the  inclined  surface  j,  of  the  said 


arm  serving  upon  the  upward  movement  of  the  shuttle- 
boxes  to  force  the  shuttle  completely  into  its  box, 
in  case  it  has  not  fully  entered  the  same  from  the 
shed,  thus  preventing  the  liability  of  accident  to  the 
shuttle-box  mechanism,  and  the  upright  plane  surface 
0,  of  the  said  arm  i,  serves  to  prevent  the  endwise 
forward  movement  of  the  shuttles  from  the  raised 
boxes. 

The  arm  V  of  the  mouthpiece  E,  is  offset  backward 
from  the  attaching-ear  I,  in  the  direction  of  the  line 
of  the  lay-beam,  so  that  the  extreme  inner  surface 
k,  at  the  lower  proportion  of  the  offset-arm  i'  will 
only  bear  against  the  shuttle  when  the  shuttle  is  close 


59 


up  to  the  shuttle-box,  and  the  backward  position  of 
the  said  bearing-surface  serves  to  prevent  the  yarn 
from  the  shuttles  in  the  raised  shuttle-boxes  from 
being  caught  and  broken  between  the  inner  surface 
of  the  mouthpiece  and  the  side  of  the  traveling  shuttle, 
and  the  yarn  is  prevented  from  being  discolored  by 
contact  with  the  outside  of  the  shuttle,  as  in  the 
mouthpieces  heretofore  employed. 

Another  advantage  of  this  construction  consists  in 
the  saving  effected  in  the  wear  of  the  shuttles.  The 
striking  side  of  the  end  of  the  shuttle  when  passing 
through  the  ordinary  shuttle-box  mouthpiece  is  liable 
to  engage  with  the  forward  edge  of  the  shuttle-box, 
whereby  the  end  of  the  shuttle  becomes  worn  and 
splintered,  so  that  in  a  few  months  it  becomes  useless, 
whereas  when  the  bearing-surface  of  the  shuttle-box 
mouthpiece  is  offset  from  the  attaching-ear  I,  so  as  to 
carry  the  bearing-surface  farther  than  heretofore 
toward  the  mouth  of  the  acting  shuttle-box,  the  shuttle 
is  prevented  from  coming  in  contact  with  the  forward 
end  of  the  shuttle-box  and  the  lasting  qualities  of  the 
shuttle  are  increased. 

To  the  inner  side  of  the  upright  arm  V  of  the  mouth- 
piece E,  which,  extends  above  the  line  of  the  acting 
shuttle-box,  is  secured  the  friction-cushion  J,  made  of 
a  strip  of  felt  or  woolen  cloth,  serving  to  support  the 
threads  of  yarn  n,  which  extend  from  the  selvedge  m, 
of  the  woven  web  D,  at  the  loom-temple  C,  to  the 
several  shuttles  in  the  raised  shuttle-boxes  a,  and 
when  the  yarn  is  so  supported  by  the  cushion  J,  it 
will  not  be  drawn  into  the  shed  by  entanglement  with 
the  yarn  of  the  outgoing  shuttle. 

By  the  use  of  the  thus  explained  improved  attach- 
ment to  a  loom,  the  selvedges  of  the  web  may  be 
woven  in  a  perfect  manner,  so  that  the  trouble  and 
expense  of  repairing  the  selvedges  is  avoided.  (Messrs. 
Nolan  and  Wilkie,  Pawtucket,  R.  I.) 


GARTNER'S  SELF-ADJUSTABLE  SHUTTLE- 
BOX-SUPPORTING  ROD. 

Fig.  I,  is  a  front  elevation  of  a  portion  of  a  loom 
provided  with  the  improvement;  Fig.  2,  an  enlarged 
detail  sectional  view  of  the  self-adjustable  shuttle-box- 
supporting  rod. 

In  said  drawings,  a,  is  the  loom-frame;  6,  the  lay; 
c,  the  shuttle-box;  d,  the  extended  portion  of  the  lay; 
and  e,  the  picker-stick. 

To  the  bottom  of  the  shuttle-box  c,  is  secured  the 
shuttle-box-supporting  rod  f,  provided  at  its  enlarged 
portion  g,  with  a  series  of  annular  V-shaped  grooves 
0' ■  Said  enlarged  portion  g,  of  the  rod  f,  is  arranged 
and  adapted  to  operate  in  the  tube  or  hollow  rod  ft, 
pivotally  secured  at  i,  to  arm  m. 


In  the  upper  portion  of  the  tube  are  arranged  a 
series  of  vertical  grooves  ft',  in  each  of  which  is  ad- 
justably secured  a  flat  spring  »,  provided  with  a  ver- 
tical slot,  through  which  the  tightening  screws  0, 
pass. 

The  upwardly  projecting  portion  of  the  spring  », 
is  provided  with  a  V-shaped  block  0',  adapted  to  rest, 
when  in  normal  position,  in  one  of  the  grooves  g'. 

In  operation,  should  a  shuttle  become  jammed 
between  the  box  and  the  raceway,  or  should  the 
shuttle-box  be  stopped  in  its  downward  movement  by 
any  other  cause,  the  block  0',  will  be  forced  outward 


out  of  engagement  with  the  V-shaped  groove  g' ,  and 
the  rod  f,  with  its  enlarged  portion  g,  will  slide  down 
in  the  tube  ft,  thereby  avoiding  breakage  without  inter- 
fering with  the  movement  of  the  shuttle-supporting- 
rod  operating  mechanism. 

The  chief  object  of  this  device  is  to  protect  the 
shelves  from  breaking  when  anything  catches  or 
breaks  on  the  picking  motion.  Frequently,  on  ac- 
count of  the  breaking  of  the  picking-stick,  picking- 
straps,  picker,  or  pull-back  spring,  the  picker  is  left 
to  the  front  end  of  the  box  when  said  box  is  about 
to  change.  There  is  a  stiff  spring  on  the  box-rod  for 
the  purpose  to  give  way  by  such  accidents,  but  it  is 
necessary  to  have  this  spring  very  stiff  on  the  rod,  so 
as  to  hold  the  boxes  steady  in  position,  and  for  this 
reason  a  shelf  or  lever  will  frequently  break  before 
the  spring  will  act.  To  overcome  this  trouble  is  the 
object  of  the  present  device.  The  V-shaped  blocks 
will  at  once  be  pulled  from  the  grooves  and  thus 
allow  the  box  to  remain  still,  in  turn  avoiding  break- 
age of  any  kind  to  any  part  of  box  or  levers.  (Alfred 
Gartner,  Newark,  assu/nor  to  Robert  Atherton,  Paterson, 
N.  J.) 


LET-OFF  MECHANISMS 


THE  KNOWLES  FRICTION  LET-OFF  MOTION. 

The  same  is  shown  in  the  accompanying  illustration 
and  best  explained  by  means  of  quoting  letters  of 
references  of  which  a.  indicates  the  back  warp  roll  for 
the  top  beam  c.  6,  is  the  back  warp  roll  for  lower 
beam  d.  fc,  are  the  pockets  setting  in  back  roll  stands 
;',  for  the  back  warp  rolls  «  and  b.  It  is  always  best  to 
set  back  warp  roll  6,  a  little  higher  than  back  warp  roll 
fl.       indicates  the  friction  levers  and  f,  the  racks  for 


holding  weights  0.  ht  indicates  the  inside  beam-heads 
or  flange-heads,  i,  the  outside  beam-heads  having  hub 
bearings  m.  n,  the  beam  shaft.  I,  are  the  lock  levers  to 
hold  beams  in  beam  stands  P.    %  is  the  loom  side. 

Beam  heads  i,  are  the  Knowles  Patent  Ratchet  Beam 
heads  explained  in  the  article  on  the  Knowles  Warp 
Beam.    (Crompion  and  Knowles  Loom  Works.) 


THE  KNOWLES  WARP  SLACKENER. 

It  frequently  happens  in  drop-box  looms,  that  by 
reason  of  the  breaking  or  catching  of  the  picker, 
shuttles  are  placed  in  the  wrong  box,  and  when,  for 
any  reason,  one  shuttle  fails  to  leave  its  box  at  the 
proper  time,  a  shuttle  coming  from  the  other  side  of 
the  loom,  not  being  able  to  enter  the  right  box,  will 
remain  in  the  shed  or  warp,  so  that  when  the  lay  beats 
up,  the  shuttle  will  cause  a  breakage  of  the  warp 
threads,  before  the  loom  stops. 

The  object  of  the  warp-slackening  mechanism  is  to 


prevent  the  breaking  of  the  warp  threads,  above  re- 
ferred to,  and  to  provide  an  auxiliary  mechanism, 
combined  with  the  ordinary  mechanism  of  the  loom, 
to  cause  the  warp  to  be  automatically  slackened,  by 
the  tension  on  the  warp,  as  the  lay  beats  up,  in  case 
one  or  more  shuttles  stop  in  their  passage  across  the 
lay.  Thus  the  present  Warp  Slackener  is  also  a  "smash 
protector." 

Referring  to  the  accompanying  drawings:  Fig.  I 
is  a  sectional  elevation  of  the  auxiliary  attachment 
showing  the  parts  thereof  in  their  normal  or  working 
position,  and  also  showing  a  portion  of  the  lay  sword, 
and  lay  and  connections  thereto.  Fig.  2  corresponds 
to  Fig.  i,  but  shows  the  auxiliary  attachment  after  the 
same  has  .been  operated  to  slacken  the  warp.  The 
lay  sword  and  lay,  shown  in  Fig.  i,  are  not  shown  in 
this  figure.  Fig.  3  is,  on  a  reduced  scale,  a  detail  of 
one  end  of  the  back  roll  and  rod,  looking  in  the  direc- 
tion of  arrow  A,  Fig.  1,  showing  the  curved  or  bent 
construction  of  the  end  thereof. 

The  method  of  operation  of  the  mechanism  will  be 
best  explained  by  means  of  numbers  of  references  in 
the  accompanying  illustrations,  and  of  which  1  is  the 
bottom  wooden  girt,  2  is  a  stand  bolted  thereto  by  a 
bolt  3,  and  4  is  the  upper  portion  of  one  of  the  back 
roll  stands,  at  one  end  of  the  loom,  which  stand  is 
secured  at  its  lower  end  to  the  loom  side,  not  shown. 

5,  is  the  back  roll,  supported  at  its  end  in  the  bear- 
ing 4',  on  the  stand  4,  and  adapted  to  rock  therein. 
Said  back  roll  5,  has,  in  this  instance,  its  end  curved 
or  bent  downwardly,  as  shown  in  detail,  Fig.  3,  which 
is  an  ordinary  constuction  of  the  back  roll.  6,  is  an 
arm  extending  up  from  said  roll  5,  and  supporting  at 
its  upper  end  one  end  of  the  rod  7,  over  which  the 
warp  8,  from  the  warp  beam  9,  passes  to  the  harness. 

In  the  stand  2,  attached  to  the  bottom  girt  1,  is 
loosely  mounted,  to  have  a  vertical  motion  therein, 
the  upright  spring  actuated  rod  10.  Said  rod  10,  is 
supported  in  the  stand  2,  and  has  a  yielding  motion 
therein,  by  means  of  the  spiral  spring  11,  bearing  at 
its  lower  end  upon  the  upper  surface  of  said  stand  2, 
and  at  its  upper  end  against  a  collar  12,  adjustably 
secured  to  the  rod  10,  by  a  set  screw  13.  A  collar  14, 
is  adjustably  secured  to  the  lower  end  of  the  rod  10, 
by  a  set  screw  15,  and  extends  below  the  stand  2,  to 
prevent  the  rod  10,  from  being  raised  out  of  said  stand. 
The  upper  end  10',  of  the  spring  actuated  rod  10,  is 
pivotally  connected  by  a  pin  16,  with  one  end  of  the 
arm  17.  The  other  end  of  said  arm  17,  is  provided  with 
a  hub,  loosely  mounted  on  the  back  roll  5.  On  the 
lower  end  of  the  downward  projection  17",  of  the  arm 
17,  is  pivoted,  on  a  pin  18,  a  rocking  locking  arm  19, 
the  upper  end  19',  of  which  is  pivotally  connected, 
through  a  link  20,  with  the  connector  21,  leading  to  and 
connecting  with  the  lay  36,  see  Fig.  1,  carrying  the 
lay  beam  37,  supported  on  the  lay  sword  38.  The 
connector  39,  connects  the  lay  with  the  crank-shaft, 
not  shown,  through  which  motion  is  communicated 
to  the  lay.  The  rocking  locking  arm  19,  has  a  forward 
extension  19",  provided  with  a  side  flange,  or  hori- 
zontal lip  22,  extending  out  from  one  side  thereof. 
Said  locking  arm  19,  has  also  the  rearward  projection 
19"',  provided  with  a  stud  23,  adapted  to  engage  the 
upper  end  of  the  swinging  arm  24,  pivoted  at  its  lower 
end  on  the  pin  18,  and  provided  at  its  upper  end  with 
a  side  flange,  or  horizontal  lip  24',  extending  out  in  the 
same  direction  as  the  lip  22,  on  the  locking  arm  19. 


61 


Combined  with  the  back  rod  7,  is  a  clamping  device 
for  holding  said  rod  in  its  normal  position,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  i,  except  when  a  sufficient  tension  is  put  upon 
the  warp,  by  a  shuttle  stopping  in  its  passage  across 
the  lay,  to  cause  said  clamping  device  to  operate  to 
release  the  back  rod,  and  allow  the  same  to  rock  in- 
wardly, to  slacken  the  warp,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2. 

Said  clamping  device  consists  of  an  arm  25,  pro- 
vided at  one  end  with  a  hub  25',  mounted  on  the  back 
roll  5,  and  secured  thereto  by  a  set  screw  26.  The 
other  end  25",  of  the  arm  25,  extends  up  at  substan- 
tially right  angles  to  the  straight  portion  thereof,  and 
is  provided  with  a  recessed  portion  25"',  adapted  to  en- 
gage one  side  of  a  stud  27,  extending  out  from  the 
arm  17, 

The  extreme  end  of  the  portion  25"  of  the  arm  25, 
has  an  opening  therein,  in  which  is  secured  a  block  28, 
by  a  set  screw  29.    The  block  28,  extends  out  from  one 


outer  end  of  said  rod  32.  On  the  arm  17,  is  a  pin  35', 
which  limits  the  motion  of  the  swinging  arm  24,  away 
from  the  pin  23. 

The  clamping  device  above  referred  to  is  spring 
actuated,  and  is  not  a  positive  device  for  holding  the 
back  rod  7,  in  its  upright  position,  and  in  order  to 
have  the  device  act  quickly  at  the  proper  time,  a  com- 
paratively light  tension  is  put  upon  the  clamping  arm 
30,  so  that  the  ordinary  tension  of  the  warp  8,  passing 
over  the  back  rod  7,  might  rock  or  move  inward  the 
said  back  rod,  and  cause  the  arm  30,  to  be  disengaged 
from  the  stud  27,  to  release  the  clamping  mechanism. 

In  order  to  prevent  the  accidental  releasing  of  the 
clamping  mechanism,  and  the  slackening  of  the  warp, 
except  at  t'he  proper  time,  there  is  provided  an  auxiliary 
attachment,  which  operates  to  positively  lock  and  pre- 
vent the  releasing  of  the  clamping  mechanism,  to 
slacken  or  loosen  the  warp,  except  when  the  lay  on  its 


Fig.  1. 

side  of  the  end  25",  of  the  arm  25,  to  form  a  projecting 
surface  to  extend  over  the  lip  24',  of  the  swinging 
arm  24,  and  also  over  the  lip  22,  on  the  rocking  lock- 
ing arm  19,  as  said  arms  are  rocked  on  their  pivot 
point. 

Combined  with  the  end  25",  of  the  arm  25,  to  form 
the  movable  jaw  for  engaging,  in  connecting  with  said 
end  25",  the  stud  27,  is  an  arm  30,  pivoted  at  its  lower 
end  on  a  stud  31,  on  the  arm  25,  and  provided  at  its 
upper  end  with  a  recessed  portion  30',  adapted  to 
engage  in  connection  with  the  recessed  portion  25"', 
of  the  end  25",  the  stud  27,  on  the  arm  17.  The  arm 
30,  forming  the  movable  clamping  jaw,  is  yieldingly 
connected  with  the  end  25",  of  the  arm  25,  forming 
the  stationary  clamping  jaw,  by  a  spring  actuated  rod 
32,  extending  loosely  through  hub  portions  on  the  end 
25",  and  arm  30,  and  headed  at  its  inner  end  to  prevent 
it  from  being  drawn  out  from  said  hubs. 

The  rod  32,  is  encircled  by  a  spiral  spring  33,  one 
end  of  which  bears  against  the  edge  of  the  end  25", 
of  the  arm  25,  and  the  other  end  against  an  adjustable 
nut  34,  held  by  the  thumb  nut  35,  screwed  on  to  the 


forward  movement  reaches  a  point  where  a  shuttle 
remaining  in  the  warp  would  break  out  the  warp, 
unless  the  warp  was  immediately  slackened  or  loos- 
ened, and  at  this  point  the  locking  mechanism  for  the 
back  rod  clamping  device  is  so  constructed,  that  the 
clamping  device  is  free  to  release  the  back  rod  and 
slacken  the  warp. 

The  length  of  the  lip  22,  on  the  rocking  arm  19,  in 
connection  with  the  lip  24',  on  the  swinging  arm  24, 
is  a  little  less  than  the  distance  covered  by  the  move- 
ment of  the  lay;  and  on  the  forward  throw  of  the  lay 
the  lip  22,  extends  under  the  block  28,  to  prevent  the 
disengagement  of  the  clamping  device,  as  the  lay  beats 
up,  and  in  case  there  is  no  shuttle  remaining  in  the 
warp,  the  continued  forward  motion  of  the  lay  moves 
forward  the  swinging  arm  24,  by  the  engagement  of 
the  stud  23,  therewith,  to  bring  the  lip  24',  under  the 
block  28,  to  lock  the  clamping  device  during  the 


62 


remainder  of  the  forward  motion  of  the  lay.  After 
the  lip  22,  has  passed  from  under  the  lock  28,  and  be- 
fore the  lip  24',  passes  thereunder,  in  case  a  shuttle 


shuttle  from  any  cause  stops  in  the  shed  the  whip-roll 
will  yield  to  the  strain,  and  thereby  prevent  the  smashes 
which  happen  when  the  warp  is  sprung  while  the 
shuttle  is  between  the  warp.  Thus  the  present  whip- 
roll  is  also  a  "smash  protector"  on  account  of  its  action 
in  case  the  shuttle  is  caught  in  the  shed  and  the 
regular  protecting  rod  on  the  loom  refuses  to  work. 

A  spring  whip-roll  is  also  of  advantage  for  the  weav- 
ing of  various  kinds  of  textile  fabrics,  taking  off  some 
of  the  strain  on  the  warp  when  the  reed  and  lay  beat 
up  the  filling. 

Of  the  accompanying  illustrations  diagram  A, 
represents  a  view  of  portions  of  a  loom  and  the 
improved  whip-roll  in  position,  the  direction  of 
the  movement  of  the  warp  being  indicated  by  the 
arrow  a.  Diagram  B,  represents  a  plan  view  of 
the  whip-roll  and  its  lever,  showing  one  means 
of  yieldingly  connecting  the  same.  Diagram  C, 
represents  an  enlarged  view  of  parts  of  the  whip- 
roll  and  its  lever,  partly  in  section.  Diagrams  D 
and  E,  represent  details  of  construction,  showing 
the  clutch-plates  of  the  roll  and  the  lever. 

In  the  drawings,  6  indicates  one  of  the  side 
frames  of  a  loom,  and  7,  is  a  bracket-arm,  in 
which    one   end   of  the   whip-roll    is  journaled, 
it  being  understood  that  the  opposite  end  of  the 
whip-roll  or  its  shaft  is  similarly  journaled.  The 
whip-roll  in  the  present  instance  consists  of  the  shafts 
8  and  9,  in  axial  alignment  and  the  main  portion  10. 
bent  out  of  said  alignment  and  furished  intermediate 
the  bent  portions  with  the  friction  leverage-plate  n, 


remains  in  the  warp,  the  lay  is  at  that  point  in  its 
forward  movement  where  the  tension  on  the  warp  will 
be  sufficient  to  disengage  the  clamping  device,  and  at 
this  time  the  block  28,  is  free  to  drop,  to  release  the 
-j  back   rod   and  loosen 

■ """  '*  or   slacken   the  warp. 

On  the  return  move- 
ment of  the  lay,  the  lip 
24,  bearing  against  the 
|j   "I  inner  end  of  the  lip  22, 
*^ms=J  is  moved  backward  to 


Fig.  3. 


pass  under  the  block  28,  until  the  swinging  arm  24,  has 
passed  by  its  centre,  when  it  will  drop  back  to  engage 
the  pin  23,  preparatory  to  again  being  moved  forward 
on  the  forward  beat  of  the  lay,  to  operate,  in  connec- 
tion with  the  lip  22,  to  lock  the  clamping  device,  as 
before  described.  (Crompton  and  Knowles  Loom 
Works.) 

THE  MASON  WHIP-ROLL. 

Whip-rolls  or  bars  are  usually  supported  at  the  rear 
of  the  loom  and  are  held  in  the  normal  position  by  a 
spring  acting  on  a  lever,  which  is  secured  to  the  shaft 
of  the  whip-roll. 

The  surface  of  the  whip-roll,  or  the  bar  on  which 
the  warp  is  supported,  is  offset  on  one  side  of  the  axis 
of  the  shaft  or  the  bearings  of  the  whip-roll,  so  that  the 
whip-roll  forms  a  long  crank.  The  whip-roll  is  held 
in  the  normal  position  by  a  lever,  the  longer  arm  of 
which  bears  on  a  spring,  which  tends  to  raise  the 
whip-roll  and  exerts  a  yielding  tension  strain  on  the 
warp  and  gives  way  to  the  strain  when  the  warp  is 
sprung  to  form  a  shed. 

The  object  of  the  Mason  improved  construction  of 
a  whip-roll  is  to  increase  the  capacity  of  the  whip-roll 
to  yield  to  the  strain  on  the  warp,  so  that  when  a 


having  the  rounded  lip  12,  over  which  the  warp  passes 
from  the  warp-beam  to  the  harnesses. 

On  the  shaft  8,  of  the  whip-roll  is  a  clutch-plate  13, 


63 


extending  from  the  centre  of  which  is  a  short  shaft  14, 
having  a  screw-threaded  end.  On  this  shaft  14,  is 
journaled  the  lever  15,  having  a  clutch-plate  16,  which 
engages  with  the  clutch  plate  13,  on  the  whip-roll 
Extending  from  the  lever  15,  are  the  counter-weight 
arm  17,  and  the  stop  arm  18,  which  prevent  the  undue 
rearward  rotation  of  the  whip-roll  when  relieved  from 
the  drag  of  the  warp.  The  free  end  of  the  lever  15, 
is  pivoted  to  a  rod  19,  having  a  collar  20,  and  movable 
at  its  lower  portion  through  the  guide  21,  secured  to 
the  loom  frame,  the  spring  22,  mounted  on  this  rod 
between  the  collar  20,  and  the  guide  21,  tending  to 
exert  an  upward  pressure  on  the  rod  and  on  the  free 
end  of  the  lever  15. 

The  clutch-plate  16,  is  held  in  contact  with  the 
clutch-plate  13,  by  the  yielding  pressure  of  the  spring 
23,  mounted  on  the  shaft  14,  and  held  against  the 
back  of  the  clutch-plate  16,  by  the  nuts  24,  adjustable 
on  said  shaft  to  increase  or  diminish  the  pressure 
exerted  by  the  spring  23,  to  hold  the  clutch-plates 
together. 

Under  normal  conditions  the  warp  passes  over  the 
curved  edge  12,  of  the  whip-roll  plate  11,  which 
exerts  a  slight  tension  on  the  warp  nearly  sufficient 
to  overcome  the  counter-balancing  effect  of  the  off- 
set portion  10,  of  the  whip-roll.  During  the  opening 
of  the  shed  the  frictional  contact  between  the  warp 
and  the  curved  edge  12,  of  the  whip-roll  is  increased 
by  the  sudden  taking  up  of  the  warp  in  spreading  to 
form  the  shed,  and  the  spring  22,  allows  the  free  end 
of  the  lever  15,  to  move  downward  as  the  edge  12,  of 
the  whip-roll  is  drawn  forward,  thus  relieving  the  ten- 
sion on  the  warp.  The  filling  thread  is  received  by 
the  open  shed  and  in  due  process  another  shed  is 
opened  with  similar  action  on  the  part  of  the  whip-roll. 

When,  in  place  of  closing  the  shed  on  a  fine  filling- 
thread  and  opening  another  shed — which  takes  up  the 
warp  over  the  whip-roll  to  but  a  small  extent — a 
shuttle  becomes  caught  in  the  shed  which  closes 
thereon,  it  is  obvious  that  many  times  the  amount 
of  warp  must  be  taken  up  by  the  great  diameter  of 
the  shuttle  or  a  warp  smash  must  occur.  When  this 
is  the  case,  the  relief  afforded  by  the  yielding  of  the 
spring  22,  is  not  sufficient  to  so  reduce  the  friction  of 
the  plate  of  the  whip-roll  on  the  warp  that  it  (the 
warp)  may  readily  pass.  To  provide  for  accidents  of 
this  nature  is  the  province  of  the  yielding  connection 
furnished  by  the  clutch-plates  13  and  16,  with  the 
tension-spring  and  adjustment  therefor.  It  will  be 
noticed  that  by  the  use  of  these  and  by  the  construc- 
tion of  the  whip-roll  this  roll  may  be  rotated  in  the 
direction  of  the  moving  warps  until  the  threads  are 
supported  below  the  axial  centre  of  the  whip-roll, 
where  they  are  relieved  from  the  take-up  caused  by 
the  offset  of  the  shaft  and  its  plate  11.  (Mason 
Machine  Works,  Taunton,  Mass.) 


PRATT'S  LET-OFF  MECHANISM. 

The  object  of  this  let-off  mechanism  is,  to  give  to  the 
warp  beam  the  capacity  to  yield  to  the  extra  strain  on 
the  warp  threads  when  forming  the  shed,  and  auto- 
matically take  up  the  slack  when  the  shed  has  closed. 

Fig.  1,  is  a  side  view  of  the  rear  end  of  the  loom, 
showing  the  let-off  motion  and  its  connection  with  the 
pinion  shaft,  by  which  the  warp  beam  is  operated. 
Fig.  2,  is  an  end  view  of  part  of  a  loom,  showing  the 
warp  beam  and  the  pinion  shaft.  Fig.  3,  is  a  sectional 
view  showing  the  worm  gear  mounted  loose  on  the 
pinion  shaft  and  connected  by  a  coiled  spring  with  a 
collar  secured  to  the  pinion  shaft. 

4,  indicates  the  frame  of  the  loom  and  5,  the  rachet 
gear  which  operates  the  let-off  of  the  warp.  This 


ratchet  gear  is  secured  to  the  vertical  shaft  6,  on  which 
the  worm  7,  is  secured,  and  this  worm  engages  with 
the  worm  gear  8,  mounted  loosely  on  the  shaft.  The 
worm  gear  8,  is  secured  to  the  spiral  spring  10,  sur- 
rounding the  pinion  shaft  9.    The  opposite  end  of  the 


Fig.  1. 


Fig. 


spiral  spring  10,  is  secured  to  the  collar  11,  which  is 
secured  to  the  pinion  shaft  9,  adjustably  by  means  of 
a  clamp-screw,  so  that  in  place  of  the  former  rigid 
connection  with  the  shaft  the  worm  gear  8,  is  now 
connected  yieldingly  by  the  coiled  spring  10,  with  the 
shaft  9.  The  pinion  12,  on  the  pinion  shaft  9,  engages 
with  the  gear  13,  secured  to  and  turning  with  the  warp 
beam  14. 

All  the  parts  are  supported  in  their  usual  bearings, 
and  the  operation  of  the  parts  remains  practically  the 
same  as  heretofore,  with  the  exception  that  any  ex- 
cessive strain  on  the  warp  is  transmitted  to  the  pinion 
shaft  and  the  coiled  spring  10,  and  any  slack  in  the 
warp  is  taken  up  again  by  the  reaction  of  the  coiled 
spring  acting  on  the  pinion  shaft,  and  through  the 
pinion  12,  and  gear  13,  on  the  warp  beam. 

il      ,0  W 


Fig.  3. 

The  worm  gear  8,  is  held  in  the  required  position  by 
suitable  collars  against  longitudinal  movement  on  the 
shaft  by  the  torsion  on  the  coiled  spring  10. 

By  applying  the  coiled  spring  so  as  to  exert  the 
torsional  spring  action  on  the  pinion  shaft,  a  powerful 
strain  is  applied  to  the  warp  by  a  comparatively  small 
spring,  because  the  spring  strain  is  multiplied  by  the 
small  pinion  12,  which  engages  with  the  large  gear 
on  the  warp  beam,  and  thus  the  let-off  of  the  warp 
is  more  perfectly  controlled.  (Albert  E.  Pratt,  As- 
signor,  one-half  to  Frank  S.  Berry,  both  of  Northbridge, 
Mass.)  y 


WAITE'S  LET-OFF  MECHANISM. 

Heretofore  in  narrow-ware  looms  there  has  been  a 
separate  warp  beam  for  each  set  of  warps  that  are 
used  in  making  one  of  the  narrow-ware  fabrics,  as 
suspender  goods,  lamp  wicks,  etc.,  and  a  separate 
weighted  pulley  block,  carrying  a  pulley  around  which 
the  warps  pass,  said  weighted  pulley  block  or  frame 
acting  to  apply  the  proper  tension  to  the  warp  as  it 
is  drawn  into  the  loom.  In  this  construction  the  ten- 
sion on  each  set  of  warps  is  independent  of  the  tension 


64 


on  any  other  set,  and  the  tension  is  liable  to  vary  in 
the  operation  of  the  loom,  so  that  the  finished  fabrics 
will  vary,  and  will  not  be  of  uniform  tension.  Some 
will  stretch  more  than  others. 

It  is  very  desirable  in  manufacturing  narrow-ware 
goods  that  all  the  goods  manufactured  on  one  loom 
should  be  made  uniformly  and  the  same  tension  applied 
to  all  the  sets  of  warps  simultaneously,  so  that  the 
finished  product  will  all  correspond,  and  one  fabric  will 
not  stretch  or  give  more  than  another,  and  will  not  be 
woven  closer  or  more  open  than  another,  etc. 

The  object  of  the  present  invention  is  to  obtain  the 
desired  result  mentioned  above,  by  using  one  warp 
beam  for  a  number  of  sets  of  warps,  as  twelve,  instead 
of  an  individual  warp  beam  for  each  set.  Ordinarily 
two  warp  beams  are  used  in  an  ordinary  narrow-ware 


loom,  and  by  using  a  supplemental  attachment  or 
device,  combined  with  all  the  weighted  pulley  blocks 
or  frames  used  for  the  sets  of  warps,  on  one  beam, 
there  being  one  weighted  pulley  block  and  pulley  for 
each  set  of  warps,  said  attachment  consisting  of  a 
heavy  metal  bar  or  rod,  (evener  bar)  which  rests 
and  is  supported  directly  on  top  of  the  weighted 
pulley  blocks  and  extends  between  the  warps  in  the 
direction  of  the  width  of  the  loom,  and  is  of  a  length 
corresponding  to  the  length  of  the  warp  beam  or  the 
width  of  all  the  warps  wound  thereon. 

The  weight  of  the  evener  bar,  which  is  considerable, 
ordinarily  about  fifty  pounds,  increases  the  tension  on 
the  warps  over  what  is  ordinarily  given  to  them  by 
the  weighted  pulley  blocks,  so  that  an  additional  ten- 
sion is  obtained  which  is  found  very  desirable  in  mak- 
ing narrow-ware  goods,  as  the  finished  goods  are 
substantially  non-stretchable. 

By  means  of  the  evener  bar,  which  rests  on  all  the 
pulley  blocks,  as  above  stated,  an  almost  uniform  ten- 
sion is  maintained  on  all  the  warps,  for  in  case  the  ten- 
sion on  one  set  of  warps  in  weaving  the  goods  tends  to 
raise  the  weighted  pulley  block,  the  evener  bar  pre- 
sents it  from  raising,  as  the  weight  thereof  is  sufficient 
to  overcome  the  extra  tension.  In  case  several  of  the 
pulley  blocks  are  raised  simultaneously  by  increased 
tension  on  several  sets  of  warps,  the  tension  being 
sufficient  to  raise  the  evener  bar,  there  is  provided  a 
connection  from  said  bar  to  the  friction  let-off  of  the 
warp  beam,  to  release  the  friction  and  allow  the  beam 
to  let  off  faster,  until  the  evener  bar  returns  to  its 
normal  position,  resting  on  all  the  pulley  blocks. 


The  accompanying  illustration  is  a  rear  view  of  a 
portion  of  a  warp  beam  and  let-off  attachment  of  a 
narrow-ware  loom,  sufficient  to  illustrate  the  improve- 
ments applied  thereto.  Numerals  of  references  in- 
dicate thus: — i  is  a  portion  of  a  warp  beam,  mounted 
to  turn,  in  this  instance,  in  stands  2  (only  one  stand 
is  shown),  located  at  the  rear  of  a  loom.  The  beam  i, 
is  provided  with  a  head  i',  around  which  a  friction 
band  3,  passes  attached  at  one  end  to  the  stand  2, 
and  at  its  other  end  to  a  lever  4,  pivoted  at  one  end 
on  the  stand  2,  and  provided  with  an  adjustable 
weight  5.  The  top  castle  6,  is  provided  with  a  series 
of  eyes  7,  through  each  one  of  which  one  set  of  warp 
threads,  as  8,  pass,  and  a  series  of  pulleys  9,  mounted 
in  brackets  10. 

Each  set  of  warp  threads,  as  8,  pass  from  the  beam 
I,  through  an  eye  7,  and  around  a  pulley  11,  mounted 
in  a  pulley  block  or  frame  12,  then  over  pulleys  9, 
mounted  in  blocks  10,  to  and  between  a  set  of  rolls 
and  to  the  harness. 

Each  pulley  block  12,  is  provided  with  a  hook  12', 
on  which  is  hung  a  rod  14,  carrying  weights  15,  of 
the  desired  size  to  produce  the  desired  tension  on  the 
warp  threads. 

Combined  with  the  pulley  blocks  12,  is  a  metal  bar 
or  rod  16,  of  the  desired  weight.  Said  bar  16,  rests  on 
the  top  of  the  blocks  12,  and  is  held  in  position  by 
projections  12",  on  each  block. 

The  bar  16  (evener  bar)  extends  between  the  sets 
of  warp  threads  in  the  direction  of  the  width  of  the 
loom,  and  bears  evenly  on  all  the  pulley  blocks  when 
they  are  in  their  proper  position,  and  increases  the 
tension  on  all  the  warp  threads,  over  the  tension  pro- 
duced by  the  weights  15,  by  the  weight  of  said  bar  16. 
The  weight  of  said  bar  is  sufficient  to  prevent  any 
one  of  the  pulley  blocks  12,  raising  said  bar  out  of  a 
horizontal  plane,  in  case  the  tension  on  any  one  set 
of  warp  threads  is  sufficient  to  overcome  the  weight  of 
the  weights  15,  but  in  case  of  an  increased  tension 
on  all  or  several  of  the  sets  of  warp  threads  the  bar 
16,  may  be  raised  with  the  weighted  pulley  blocks  12, 
and  when  raised  to  a  pre-determined  point  will, 
through  cord  17,  attached  at  one  end  to  said  bar  and 
at  its  other  end  to  the  free  end  of  the  lever  4,  raise 
said  lever  and  release  the  friction  band  3,  to  allow  the 
warp  beam  to  let  off  more  warp.  The  letting  off 
of  additional  warp  allows  the  bar  16,  and  weighted 
pulley  blocks  12,  to  drop  down  to  their  normal  posi- 
tion. 

In  case  the  tension  on  any  one  set  of  warp  threads 
is  lessened  for  any  reason,  the  weighted  pulley  block 
12,  may  temporarily  drop  down  below  the  evener  bar 
16,  but  the  tension  will  ordinarily  keep  each  pulley 
block  12,  in  engagement  with  said  evener  bar.  (Samuel 
Waite,  Lowell,  Mass.) 


FOLSOM'S  LET-OFF  MECHANISM. 

Of  the  accompanying  illustrations  Fig.  A,  shows  the 
mechanism  in  side  elevation  with  the  warp  beam  in 
section  and  B,  a  front  elevation  of  the  same. 

The  principle  of  the  working  of  the  new  device  is 
thus: — The  weight  for  friction  is  entirely  regulated  by 
the  yarn  on  the  beam.  When  the  beam  is  filled  with 
warp  yarn,  the  plate  as  resting  against  the  warp,  moves 
the  weight  to  the  outer  end  of  the  weight  lever.  When 
the  yarn  runs  off  the  beam  the  weight  in  turn  moves 
automatically  gradually  back  towards  the  centre,  in 
turn  slackening  the  friction  bands  running  around  the 
heads  of  the  warp  beam.  The  mechanism  is  simple  in 
construction  and  will  be  readily  understood  by  quoting 
letters  of  references,  of  which  a,  designates  the  beam 


65 


from  which  the  warp  &,  is  unwound,  and  which  is 
journaled  in  the  frame  c,  of  the  loom  and  carries  near 
one  end  a  disk  or  pulley  d. 


A  lever  e,  is  pivoted  at  one  end  to  the  frame  of  the 
machine  under  the  warp  beam  and  has  a  part  e1,  in- 
clined to  the  vertical  axial  plane  of  the  beam.  A 
brake  strap  f,  winds  about  the  pulley  d,  a  number  of 
times  and  is  fastened  at  one  end  to  the  frame  of  the 
machine,  as  shown  at  f1,  and  at  the  other  to  the 
lever  near  its  inner  end,  as  shown  at  P.  It  is  here 
to  be  noted  that  by  having  the  friction  band  or  brake 
strap  pass  a  number  of  times  around  the  pulley,  suffi- 
cient friction  is  provided  for  to  permit  the  employ- 
ment of  a  comparatively  short  lever  and  consequent 
reduction  in  space  occupied  by  the  let-off  mechanism. 
In  fact,  the  lever  need  not  project  to  an  appreciable 
extent  beyond  the  plane  of  the  warp  beam. 

A  weight  9,  embraces  and  is  adapted  to  slide  on  the 
inclined  part  e\  of  the  lever  e,  and  has  a  rigid  arm  g1, 
which  is  angular,  projecting  laterally  to  clear  the 
pulley  and  thence  upwardly  into  the  horizontal  plane 
of  the  warp  beam.  At  its  upper  end  this  arm  g1,  is 
screw  threaded  to  engage  ears  ft,  on  a  shoe  ft1,  adapted 
to  bear  against  the  roll  of  warp.  The  bearing  of  this 
shoe  against  the  said  roll  controlls  the  position  of 
the  weight  ff,  on  the  inclined  arm,  for  the  said  weight 
constantly  tends  to  slide  down  the  incline,  and  is  only 
restrained  from  so  doing  by  the  bearing  of  the  shoe 
against  the  roll.  The  jarring  of  machine  in  operation 
is  sufficient  to  insure  the  downward  movement  of  the 
weight  on  the  arm. 

The  operation  will  be  apparent.  As  the  diameter  of 
the  roll  lessens  the  weight  moves  inward  on  the  lever 
and  the  tension  on  the  brake  band  is  lessened.  (Ne- 
hcmiah  T.  Folsom,  Manchester,  N.  H.,  Assignor  of  one- 
half  to  John  8.  Folsom,  Millis,  Mass.) 


TALBOT'S  LET-OFF  MECHANISM. 

This  mechanism  relates  more  particularly  to  means 
for  effecting  a  positive  and  uniform  tension  on  the 
warp  threads  in  carpet  looms  without  reference  to  the 
quantity  of  thread  on  the  warp  beam,  so  that  a  carpet 
of  even  weight  may  be  produced  as  the  result  of  this 
tension. 

In  the  accompanying  illustration  a  perspective  view 
of  that  portion  of  a  carpet  loom  is  given,  as  is  neces- 
sary to  clearly  show  the  mechanism. 

A,  represents  the  reed  of  the  loom  supported  and 
carried  by  the  lathe,  the  sword  B,  of  which  is  pivoted 
at  6,  to  the  lower  portion  of  the  frame  C.  Connected 
to  each  side  of  the  rear  of  the  frame  C,  are  brackets 
C,  and  journaled  in  the  brackets  C,  is  the  spindle 
D',  of  the  whip  roll  D.  Connected  to  the  spindle 
D',  of  the  whip  roll  D,  are  two  lugs  d,  in  which  is 
mounted  the  tension  rod  E,  rigidly  connected  to  the 
spindle  D',  and  located  one  at  either  end  of  the  whip 
roll  D,  are  two  outwardly  arms  D".  A  weight  D3,  is 
suspended  from  each  of  the  arms  D",  by  means  of  a 
rod  D4.  A  dog  F,  provided  with  two  teeth  /,  is 
pivoted  at  V,  to  the  bracket  f" ,  which  is  rigidly  con- 
nected to  the  frame  C.  Connected  to  the  frame  C, 
below  the  dog  F,  is  one  end  of  a  spiral  spring  J,  while 
the  opposite  end  of  the  spring  J,  is  connected  to  an 
adjustable  hook  /,  extending  through  the  outer  end 
of  the  dog  F.  The  normal  tendency  of  the  spiral  J, 
is  to  draw  downward  the  said  outer  end  of  the  said 
dog  to  bring  the  teeth  f,  of  the  dog  F,  into  engage- 
ment with  the  teeth  of  the  ratchet  wheel  G.  The 
ratchet  wheel  G,  is  rigidly  mounted  on  the  end  of  the 
spindle  H,  of  the  warp  beam  I.  Connected  to  the  dog 
F,  at  or  about  the  middle  thereof  is  one  end  of  a 
chain  K,  while  the  other  end  of  the  said  chain  extends 
partially  around  spindle  D',  of  the  whip  roll  and  is 
securely  fastened  thereto. 

During  the  operation  of  the  machine  the  tension  of 
the  warp  threads  draws  the  whip  roll  in  the  direction 
indicated  by  the  arrow  and  causes  a  partial  revolution 
of  the  spindle  D',  of  the  whip  roll  D.  The  partial 
revolution  of  the  spindle  D',  causes  the  chain  K,  to  be 
partially  wound  on  the  said  spindle  so  that  the  dog  F, 
will  be  lifted  to  disengage  the  teeth  f,  from  the  teeth 
of  the  ratchet  wheel  G,  and  allow  of  the  unwinding 
revolution  of  the  ratchet  wheel  G,  and  spindle  H. 


Rigidly  mounted  on  the  spindle  H,  is  a  friction  collar 
L,  made  of  wood.  Surrounding  the  collar  L,  is  a 
dividing  strap  M,  the  sections  of  which  are  connected 
together  by  means  of  bolts  and  nuts  m',  and  mt  re- 
spectively, the  lower  section  of  the  dividing  strap  M, 


66 


being  secured  to  the  frame  of  the  loom.  By  means 
of  the  bolts  and  nuts  m>',  and  m,  the  diameter  of  the 
strap  can  be  increased  or  diminished  to  respectively 
increase  or  diminish  the  friction  on  the  collar  L. 

Rigidly  mounted  on  the  spindle  D',  of  the  whip  roll 
D,  is  a  sector  N,  and  pivoted  to  the  frame  C,  is  one 
end  o,  of  a  brake  shoe  O.  The  brake  shoe  O,  extends 
around  the  sector  N,  and  the  opposite  end  of  the  brake 
shoe  O,  is  connected  to  the  lathe  sword  B,  by  a  pitman 
P.  The  brake  shoe  O,  holds  the  sector  N,  during  one 
portion  of  the  movement  of  the  lathe  sword  B. 

Wound  on  the  warp  beam  I,  are  the  warp  threads 
a,  which  pass  from  the  warp  beam  I,  under  the  ten- 
sion rod  E,  over  the  whip  roll  D,  and  the  reeds  A, 
to  the  cloth  beam  Q. 

The  advantages  arising  from  the  use  of  the  mechan- 
ism are: — 

The  ratchet  wheel  G,  it  will  be  remembered,  is 
rigidly  mounted  on  the  spindle  H,  of  the  warp  beam 
I,  and  the  unwinding  revolution  of  the  warp  beam  I, 
and  spindle  H,  is  prevented  until  the  teeth  of  the 
dog  F,  are  disengaged  from  the  teeth  of  the  ratchet 
wheel  G.  When  the  whip  roll  D,  has  been  moved  in 
the  direction  indicated  by  the  arrow,  the  spindle  D', 
of  the  whip  roll  D,  is  partially  turned  to  partially 
wind  the  chain  K,  on  the  said  spindle  D',  and  lift 
dog  F,  sufficiently  to  disengage  its  teeth  f,  from  the 
teeth  of  the  ratchet  wheel  G.  When  the  teeth  f,  of 
the  dog  F,  have  been  disengaged  from  the  teeth  of  the 
ratchet  wheel  G,  then  the  ratchet  wheel  G,  the  spindle 
H,  and  the  warp  beam  I,  are  free  to  turn.  The  ten- 
sion of  the  warp  threads  a,  as  the  carpet  is  wound 
on  the  cloth  beam  Q,  is  sufficient  to  move  the  whip 
roll  D,  into  a  forwardly  inclined  position.  This  posi- 
tion of  the  whip  roll  D,  may,  if  desired,  be  reached 
every  third  stroke  of  the  lathe,  and  it  is  when  the 
whip  roll  D,  is  in  its  forwardly  inclined  position  that 
the  dog  F,  is  lifted  to  disengage  the  teeth  f,  from 
the  teeth  of  the  ratchet  wheel  G.  The  whip  roll  D, 
during  its  return  from  its  forwardly  inclined  position 
to  its  upright  position  draws  on  the  warp  threads  a, 
and  causes  the  unwinding  revolution  of  the  warp 
beam  I,  the  spindle  H,  and  the  ratchet  wheel  G. 

When  the  whip  roll  D,  has  returned  to  upright  posi- 
tion the  dog  F,  is  drawn  back  into  its  normal  position 
and  its  teeth  f,  engage  with  the  teeth  of  the  ratchet 
wheel  G.  The  normal  tendency  of  the  spring  J,  is 
to  draw  downward  the  outer  end  of  the  dog  F,  so 
that  a  quick  return  of  the  teeth  f,  into  engagement 
with  the  teeth  of  the  ratchet  wheel  may  be  effected. 

To  regulate  the  tension  of  the  spring  J,  on  the  dog 
F,  the  adjustable  hook  is  connected  to  the  dog  F, 
and  by  lengthening  or  shortening  the  hook  the  ten- 
sion of  the  spring  J,  can  be  respectively  diminished 
or  increased  as  required.  It  is  by  means  of  the  weight 
D3,  that  the  quick  return  of  the  whip  roll  D,  from  its 
forwardly  inclined  position  to  upright  position  shown 
in  the  drawings  is  effected  and  the  weight  D3,  counter- 
acts to  a  large  extent  the  tension  of  the  warp  threads 
<z,  on  the  whip  roll  D,  and  also  holds  the  whip  roll  D, 
at  all  times  firmly  against  the  warp  threads  so  that  the 
said  warp  threads  will  be  kept  perfectly  taut  from  the 
top  of  the  whip  roll  D,  to  the  reeds  A.  To  prevent 
the  possibility  of  more  than  the  required  quantity  of 
warp  thread  unwinding  from  the  warp  beam  I,  during 
the  disengagement  of  the  teeth  f,  on  the  dog  F,  from 
the  teeth  of  the  ratchet  wheel  G,  there  is  provided  a 
friction  collar  L,  and  friction  strap  M.  The  friction 
collar  L,  and  friction  strap  M,  prevent  the  free  rev- 
olution of  the  spindle  H,  and  yet  allow  the  spindle  H, 
to  be  turned  to  unwind  sufficient  warp  threads  to 
allow  the  whip  roll  D,  to  return  to  its  normal  position. 

In  order  to  further  facilitate  the  making  of  a  carpet 
of  uniform  weight  throughout,  the  sector  N,  and  brake 
shoe  O,  which  are  operated  immediately  upon  the 


forward  movement  of  the  lathe  sword  and  reed  so 
that  the  whip  roll  is  held  stationary  during  the  period 
that  the  filling  is  being  forced  home  into  the  main 
body  of  the  web.    (William  Talbot,  Toronto,  Canada.) 


PALMER'S  LET-OFF  MECHANISM. 

The  same  relates  more  in  particular  to  an  improve- 
ment in  let-off  mechanism  for  looms,  where,  from  any 
cause,  such,  for  example,  as  forming  suspension-loops 
of  the  warp  threads  in  weaving  hammocks,  it  is  found 
desirable  to  advance  one  of  the  sets  of  warp  threads 
faster  than  the  other  set  for  the  purpose  of  either 
leaving  an  unwoven  series  of  loops  across  the  fabric 
or  fulling  one  of  the  sets  of  warp  threads. 


=* 


The  accompanying  draw- 
ing represents  a  portion  of 
the  loom  frame  and  the  let- 
off  mechanism  in  end  ele- 
vation. 

A,  represents  a  portion 
of  the  loom  frame  at  the 
end  from  which  the  sets  of 
warp  threads  are  drawn  to 
be  woven. 

The  upper  set  of  warps 
B,  leads  under  a  guide- 
roller  C,  from  a  supply- 
roller  D,  journaled  in  elon- 
gated slots  a',  formed  in  standards  fixed  to  the  frame 
A.  The  supply-roller  D,  rests  upon  supporting- 
drums  E,  fixed  on  a  shaft  e,  journaled  in  the  frame 
A,  and  having  secured  on  one  of  its  ends  a  slip  gear- 
wheel F,  so  secured  to  the  shaft  e,  that  it  will  rotate 
together  with  the  shaft,  but  be  permitted  to  slide 
longitudinally  of  the  shaft. 

The  lower  set  of  warp  B',  extends  over  a  guide- 
roller  C,  in  proximity  to  the  guide-roller  C,  from  the 
supply-roller  D',  mounted  in  elongated  slots  a1,  in 
standards  a3,  fixed  to  the  frame  A.  The  roller  C,  may 
be  geared  together,  as  shown,  when  the  loom  is  em- 
ployed for  ordinary  plain  weaving;  but  when  employed 
for  weaving  hammocks  in  which  the  warp  threads  are 
utilized  for  suspension-loops,  the  rollers  are  disen- 
gaged by  removing  one  of  the  intermeshing  gear- 
wheels. The  supply-roller  D',  rests  upon  supporting- 
drums  E',  fixed  on  the  shaft  e'.  journaled  in  the  frame 
and  provided  at  one  end  with  a  sprocket-wheel  G. 
The  sprocket-wheel  G,  is  connected  by  a  sprocket- 
chain  0,  with  a  sprocket-wheel  G,  fixed  on  a  spindle 
9',  in  suitable  bearings  in  the  frame.  The  spindle  9', 
has  fixed  thereon  a  spur-wheel  F',  corresponding  in 
the  number  of  teeth  to  the  spur-wheel  F.  Spindle  9', 
has  further  fixed  thereon  a  brake-wheel  (not  shown  in 
the  illustration)  which  receives  around  it  a  band,  one 
end  of  which  is  secured  to  the  frame  A,  and  the 


67 


opposite  end  to  the  lever  H,  carrying  a  weight 
adjustable  along  the  lever  H,  for  the  purpose  of  in- 
creasing or  decreasing  the  frictional  contact  of  the 
band  with  the  brake-wheel  to  increase  or  decrease  the 
tension  under  which  the  warp  threads  are  to  be  fed. 

In  operation,  whenever  it  becomes  desirable  to  mo- 
mentarily advance  one  of  the  sets  of  warp  threads,  in 
the  present  instance  the  upper  set  B,  the  wheel  F,  is 
slipped  out  of  engagement  with  the  corresponding 
gear-wheel  F',  and  the  warp  threads  composing  the 
set  B,  may  then  be  pulled  forward  independently  of 
the  lower  set  of  warp  threads  B',  the  particular  means 
for  pulling  the  threads  forward  being  a  matter  to  be 
determined  for  the  purposes  in  hand.  The  inventor 
employs  a  rod  which  he  inserts  momentarily  under  a 
set  of  warp  and  moves  it  in  a  direction  to  pull  the 
threads  of  the  upper  set  quickly  along  a  distance  suf- 
ficient to  make  the  desired  length  of  unwoven  loops. 
As  soon  as  this  has  been  done,  the  gear-wheel  F,  may 
be  slipped  back  again  into  engagement  with  the  cor- 
responding gear-wheel  F',  and  the  weaving  will  con- 
tinue again  as  before. 

In  cases  where  it  is  desired  to  feed  one  set  of  warp 
continuously  faster  than  the  other  to  produce  a  fulling 
effect,  the  supporting-drum  or  drums,  engaged  with 
the  supply-roll  of  the  set  to  be  accelerated,  may  be 
made  larger  than  those  of  the  other  set,  the  support- 
ing-drums on  one  or  the  other  of  the  shafts  e,  or  e',  be- 
ing for  this  purpose  conveniently  made  interchange- 
able. Instead  of  changing  the  size  of  the  drums  the 
drum-driving  gear  can  be  made  interchangeable  to 
drive  one  set  of  supporting-drums  faster  than  the  other. 
(Isaac  E.  Palmer,  Middletown,  Conn.) 


7  has  its  lower  end  formed  into  a  socket  inclosing 
three  sides  of  the  beam  and  is  secured  to  the  beam 
by  the  bolt  8,  extending  through  the  slot  6,  so  that 
the  bracket  can  be  adjusted  laterally. 


PIERCE'S  AND  MoALLEN'S  WARP-BEAM 
BREAK. 

In  a  loom,  the  warp-beam  carrying  the  warp  for 
the  fabric  to  be  woven,  is  rotated  partially  from 
time  to  time  and  usually  at  each  pick  to  let  off 
the  warp  as  the  woven  fabric  is  taken  up.  The  warp- 
beams  are  usually  provided  with  some  kind  of  fric- 
tion-brake, which  may  be  adjusted  to  regulate  the 
frictional  resistance.  When  a  new  warp-beam  is  in- 
serted into  these  looms  it  requires  regulating  of  the 


11 

11 

JO 

Fig.i. 


tension  so  as  to  hold  the  warp  taut  during  the  form- 
ing of  the  shed  and  the  beating  up  of  the  filling. 

The  object  of  this  brake  is  to  so  construct  the  same, 
that  warp-beams  may  be  exchanged  without  read- 
justing the  tension  on  the  brake  and  to  secure  a  re- 
liable frictional  resistance  on  the  warp-beam  and  uni- 
form tension  on  the  warp. 

Fig.  i,  is  a  view  of  so  much  of  the  rear  end  of  a 
loom  as  is  required  to  illustrate  the  brake.  Fig.  2, 
is  a  sectional  view  of  the  rear  end  of  a  loom,  show- 
ing the  friction-brake.  Fig.  3,  is  a  side  view  of  the 
friction-brake,  shown  partly  in  section. 

4,  indicates  the  side  frames  of  a  loom;  5,  the  rear 
strut  or  beam,  extending  horizontally  and  connect- 
ing the  rear  ends  of  the  side  frames.  In  this  hori- 
zontal beam  5,  the  "slot  6  is  formed.    The  bracket 


The  bracket  7  is  curved,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2,  and 
terminates  at  its  upper  end  in  the  cylinder  9,  the 
axial  line  of  which  is  radial  from  the  centre  of  the 
warp-beam  10,  which  is  provided  with  the  end  flanges 
11  and  the  bosses  12  on  opposite  ends  thereof.  The 
warp-beam  is  supported  on  the  shaft  13,  resting  in 
bearings  formed  in  the  side  frames. 

To  one  end  of  the  warp-beam  the  brake-wheel  14 
is  secured.  In  the  drawings  the  brake-wheel  is  shown 
secured  to  one  of  the  end  bosses  12  of  the  warp-beam, 
as  this  method  secures  exact  concentricity  of  the 
brake-wheel  with  the  warp-beam.  In  Fig.  2,  the  brake- 
wheel  is  shown  as  made  in  two  halves,  secured  to- 
gether by  the  bolts  15,  so  as  to  firmly  secure  the  brake- 
wheel  to  the  warp-beam. 

The  lower  end  of  the  cylinder  9,  has  a  slot  16.  The 
upper  end  of  the  cylinder  has  the  adjusting-screw  17, 
by  which  the  tension  of  the  coiled  spring  18,  inclosed 
in  the  upper  end  of  the  cylinder  9,  may  be  adjusted. 
The  brake  19,  has  its  bearing -surface  formed  to  closely 
fit  the  brake-wheel  14  and  is  provided  with  the  cylin- 
drical post  20,  which  fits  the  bore  of  the  cylinder  9 
with  a  sliding  fit.  The  post  20,  is  provided  near  its 
upper  end  with  the  projection  21,  which  extends 
through  the  slot  16  of  the  cylinder  9,  and  has  the 
cavity  22,  formed  below  the  projection  21,  into  which 
the  end  of  the  lever  23  extends.  The  lever  23,  is 
pivotally  supported  between  two  lugs  projecting  one 
on  each  side  of  the  slot  16.  By  pressing  on  the  lever 
23,  the  brake  19  and  brake-post  20,  are  raised  off 
from  the  brake-wheel  14,  into  the  position  shown  in 
broken  lines  in  Fig.  3. 

When  the  brake-wheel  is  secured  to  the  warp-beam 
and  they  are  in  the  proper  position  in  the  loom,  the 
pressure  of  the  brake  on  the  surface  of  the  brake- 
wheel  is  regulated  by  the  screw  17,  until  the  desired 
uniform  tension  on  the  warp  is  secured.  When,  now, 
the  warp  on  the  beam  is  exhausted,  a  full  beam  is 
either  provided  with  the  brake-wheel  of  the  exact 
diameter  as  the  brake-wheel  on  the  warp-beam  in  the 
loom,  or  the  brake-wheel  on  the  empty  warp-beam  is 
removed  and  secured  to  the  full  warp-beam,  and  be- 
fore making  the  exchange  the  lever  23  is  depressed 
so  as  to  raise  the  brake  19,  off  from  the  brake-wheel. 
The  brake  is  suported  in  this  position  by  the  cam  end 
of  the  lever  23  against  the  pressure  of  the  coiled 
spring  18. 

After  the  full  warp-beam  has  been  placed  in  the 
loom,  the  raising  of  the  outer  end  of  the  lever  23  per- 
mits the  coiled  spring  18  to  press  the  brake  on  the 
brake-wheel  with  exactly  the  same  pressure  and  the 
same  frictional  resistance  on  the  warp-beam  and  warp 
as  existed  under  the  previously-adjusted  conditions, 
and  the  readjustment,  which  takes  up  time,  is  not  re- 
quired (0.  S.  Pierce  and  J.  MeAUen,  Central  Falls, 
R.  I.) 


TAKE-UP  MECHANISMS. 


THE    KNOWLES  RATCHET-RING-TAKE-UP. 

The  same  is  shown  in  the  accompanying  illustration. 
Letters  of  references  indicate  thus: — a,  the  bracket 
fastened  to  the  breast  beam  1>,  with  screws,  for  holding 
the  iron  guide  cloth  roll  c.    (/,  is  the  sand  roll;  e,  the 


sand  roll  gear;  f,  the  bottom  roll  that  takes  the  cloth 
and  winds  it  in  a  roll.  !l,  the  hand  wheel;  h,  the  fric- 
tion band;  i,  the  thumb-screw  for  tightening  friction 
band;  j,  the  ratchet  gear  that  is  worked  by  a  pitman 
from  the  bottom  of  lay  sword.  is  a  box  for  hold- 
ing the  bottom  cloth  roller;  I,  a  spider  that  holds  the 
ratchet  rims  W;  m,  a  catch  that  holds  the  ratchet  w 
from  flying  backwards;  n,  the  dog  fastened  to  the  end 
of  pitman  J",  that  engages  with  the  teeth  of  the  ratchet 
rings  10.  0,  is  a  casting  bolted  to  the  loom  frame  w, 
and  which  has  a  stud  riveted  fast  to  hold  the  top 
catch  m.  p,  indicates  the  spring  that  goes  on  the  pit- 
man rod  a>,  to  be  used  only  for  conditional  motion. 
<1,  is  a  casting  that  holds  the  pitman  rod  00  at  one  end, 
and  at  the  other  end  it  is  fastened  loosely  by  a  bolt 
to  a  collar  £,  that  is  fastened  to  the  crank  shaft  (not 
shown). 

At  each  revolution  of  the  crank  shaft  which  is  once 
at  each  pick  the  pitman  rod  x  is  moved  forward  and 
back.  The  collar  t,  has  a  slot  cut  from  the  centre  to 
the  outer  end  of  the  collar,  and  the  further  the  bolt 
that  fastens  the  casting  q,  to  the  collar,  is  moved  from 
the  centre,  the  more  sweep  the  pitman  rod  will 
have,  making  the  dog  »,  take  up  as  many  teeth  as 
required  on  the  ratchet  ring  w. 

s,  is  the  gear  that  drives  the  head  motion;  «,  is  the 
loom  frame;  v,  a  rod  fastened  near  the  foot  of  the 
loom  frame  extending  the  width  of  the  whole  loom 
and  fastened  at  the  same  place  on  frame  on  the  oppo- 
site side  of  loom  so  as  to  make  the  loom  frame  more 
rigid,  r,  is  a  set  screw  that  fastens  the  pitman  rod 
to  the  casting  Q,  and  is  only  used  when  using  a  posi- 
tive motion. 


When  using  a  conditional  motion  the  set  screw  r, 
is  left  loose,  and  the  pitman  rod  x,  is  then  forced 
through  the  hole  in  the  casting  q,  by  the  tightness  of 
the  cloth  pulling  against  the  top  of  the  cloth  roller  </, 
which  depresses  the  spring?).  As  the  cloth 
then  slackens  a  little,  the  spring  p,  will 
force  the  pitman  rod  x,  back  again,  mov- 
ing the  dog  n  and  the  ratchet  w,  forward. 
The  proper  weight  must  then  be  kept 
on  the  warp  that  will  put  in  the  amount 
of  picks  required  per  inch. 

If  using  a  positive  motion  the  set 
screw  r,  is  tightenend  and  the  dog  ic, 
will  take  up  1,  2,  3  or  4  teeth  each 
pick  as  may  be  required.  To  change 
the  number  of  picks  on  a  positive  mo- 
tion, the  ring  ratchet  w,  is  changed  by 
loosening  the  screws  that  fastens  the 
ring  ratchet  w,  to  the  spider  I,  and  an- 
other ring  ratchet  wheel  with  more  or 
less  teeth  is  put  on.  If  the  dog  n,  takes 
up  one  tooth  at  a  time  it  will  put  in 
one  inch  of  cloth  as  many  picks  as  there 
are  teeth  in  the  ring  ratchet;  if  the  dog 
ft,  takes  up  two  teeth,  half  as  main- 
picks  will  be  put  in,  and  so  on. 
(Crompton  and  Knotoles  Loom  Works.) 

THE  KNOWLES  WORM  TAKE-UP. 

description  of  this  take-up  is  best  given  by  quot- 
letters  of  references  from  the  accompanying  illus- 
on,  of  which  a,  indicates  the  bottom  shaft  which 
es  one  revolution  every  two  picks.  6,  is  a  bevel 
that  works   on   bottom   shaft  to   drive  Worm 


Ta 
of 


ke-Up. 
gear  b, 


c,  is 
maki 


bevel 
two  to 


gear  one-ha 
one  drive 


If  the  size 
d,  is  the 


68 


69 


shaft  that  connects  the  take-up  with  the  bottom 
shaft  o.  e,  is  a  hand  wheel  with  which  to  manipulate 
the  take-up.  <J,  is  a  spur  gear  that  connects  with  d\ 
which  is  a  small  worm  gear,  f,  is  a  handle  which 
locks  hand  wheel  6  to  worm  gear  <1'\  h,  is  a  cloth 
roll  gear,  geared  into  P. 

I  is  a  change  gear.  Multiplying  number  of  picks 
by  5  and  dividing  by  12,  will  tell  you  the  number  of 
teeth  that  are  required  in  gear  I,  to  produce  number  of 
picks  required.  Gear  »»*,  is  an  intermediate  gear  to 
drive  bottom  cloth  roll  by  friction,  o,  is  the  friction 
band;  V,  the  hand  wheel;  Q,  the  bottom  cloth  roll;  r, 
is  the  top  cloth  roll;  s,  the  guide  roll;  t,  one  of  the 
stands  for  guide  roll,  and  «,  the  breast  beam.  Cromp- 
ton  and  Knowles  Loom  Wotks.) 


TAKE-UP    ATTACHMENT    FOR  THE 
KNOWLES  NARROW  WARE  LOOM. 

The  gist  of  the  improvement  consists  in  providing 
a  take-up  attachment  which  will  take  up  the  goods  as 
they  are  woven,  and  which  is  provided  with  a  release 
device  to  release  the  woven  fabric  or  cause  it  to  be- 
come slack  in  case  the  operator  wishes  to  pick  out,  etc. 


The  accompanying  illustration  is  a  side  view  of  this 
take-up  attachment,  showing  the  breast-beam  and  fric- 
tion-roll in  section  and  the  clamp-rolls  closed  or  in 
the  position  they  occupy  when  the  take-up  is  in 
operation. 

Numerals  of  references  indicate  thus: — 1,  is  the  glass 
rod  over  which  the  woven  narrow-ware  fabric  2  is 
drawn.  3,  is  the  breast-beam,  to  the  under  side  of 
which  the  stands  4,  carrying  the  take-up  attachment, 
are  bolted  or  secured. 

The  take-up  attachment  consists  of  the  pair  of  hang- 
ers 5,  and  6.  One  of  the  hangers,  as  5,  is  pivoted  at 
its  upper  end  in  the  stands  4.  The  other  hanger,  as  6, 
is  pivotally  supported  by  a  pin  7,  on  the  hanger  5,  and 
the  upper  ends  of  said  hanger  6,  extend  above  its 
pivotal  support  and  are  connected  by  spiral  springs 
8,  with  the  upper  part  of  the  hanger  5,  to  draw  said 
ends  toward  said  hanger.  The  lower  end  of  the 
hanger  6,  carries  a  roll  9.  which  is  adapted  to  bear 
against  the  fabric  2,  on  the  under  side  of  the  take-up 
or  friction-roll  10,  as  said  fabric  passes  under  said 


friction-roll  and  over  a  roll  11,  carried  at  the  lower 
end  of  the  hanger  5.  Said  roll  11,  is  adapted  to  bear 
on  the  fabric  to  hold  it  on  the  take-up  or  friction-roll 
10,  in  connection  with  the  roll  9. 

The  friction-roll  10,  fast  on  a  central  square  shaft 
10',  is  driven  by  gearing,  and  is  provided  with  a  sand- 
paper or  other  covering  10",  to  make  a  frictional  con- 
tact between  said  roll  and  the  woven  fabric  passing 
around  the  same.  The  springs  8,  act  to  move  the  two 
clamp-rolls  9,  and  11,  toward  each  other  to  hold  the 
woven  fabric  on  the  friction-roll. 

In  order  to  move  apart  the  rolls  9,  and  11,  to  re- 
lease or  slacken  the  fabric,  there  is  combined  with  one 
of  the  hangers,  as  5,  a  cam-lever  12,  which  is  pivoted 
on  a  pin  13,  on  said  hanger.  The  cam  portion  12', 
of  said  cam-lever  12,  as  said  lever  is  raised,  is  adapted 
to  engage  the  projecting  end  of  a  (non-metallic)  stud 
or  pin  14,  secured  in  the  hanger  6,  above  its  pivotal 
support. 

It  will  thus  be  seen  that  when  it  is  desired  to 
release  or  slacken  the  woven  fabric  to  pick  out,  or 
for  any  other  purpose,  the  operator  simply  raises  the 
cam-lever  12,  which  operates  to  move  apart  the  lower 
ends  of  the  hangers  5,  and  6,  carrying  the  rolls  9, 
and  11. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  revolution  of  the  friction- 
roll  10,  in  the  direction  indicated  by  the  arrow,  when 
the  clamp-rolls  9,  and  11,  are  in  the  position  shown  in 
illustration,  will  cause  the  fabric  2,  to  be  positively 
taken  up,  and  if  at  any  time  it  is  desired  to  stop  the 
take-up  of  the  fabric  or  to  slacken  the  same,  it  is 
only  necessary  to  move  the  cam-arm  12,  to  release 
the  fabric  from  the  friction-roll. 

When  it  is  desired  to  bring  the  take-up  into  opera- 
tion again,  the  free  end  of  the  fabric  is  drawn  over  the 
upper  roll  11,  to  tighten  the  fabric  around  the  friction- 
roll  10,  and  the  cam-lever  12,  is  moved  down  into  the 
position  shown  in  illustration  to  allow  the  springs  8, 
to  act  to  bring  the  rolls  9,  and  11,  toward  each  other 
to  bear  on  the  fabric.  (Crompton  and  Knowles  Loom 
Works.) 


THE   MASON   ADJUSTABLE    GUIDE  FOR 
CLOTH-ROLL  STANDS. 

The  same  has  for  its  object  the  improvement  of  that 
part  of  a  loom  which  is  used  for  winding  the  cloth 
into  a  roll  after  it  is  woven,  so  that  the  selvage  may 
be  wound  evenly,  and  so  that  the  cloth  may  not  be 


soiled  or  frayed  by  coming  in  contact  with  any  of  the 
adjacent  parts  of  the  loom. 


70 


As  usually  constructed,  there  is  no  provision  on  the 
loom  for  guiding  the  edges  of  the  cloth  as  it  is  wound 
upon  the  cloth-roll  after  being  woven,  and  it  there- 
fore frequently  happens  that  one  edge  or  selvage  as 
it  progresses  in  its  winding  gradually  works  sidewise 
until  it  comes  in  contact  with  the  stand  or  bearing 
which  supports  the  cloth-roll.  This  stand  or  bearing 
having  been  lubricated  in  common  with  the  other 
bearings,  it  follows  that  the  edge  of  the  cloth  con- 
tacting therewith  is  stained  by  the  lubricant,  and  is 
also  sometimes  frayed  by  the  stand  or  bearing. 

The  new  device  is  best  explained  by  means  of  the 
accompanying  drawings,  of  which  Fig.  i,  is  a  frag- 
mentary elevation  showing  the  guide  applied  to  one 
end  of  the  take-up  roll.  Fig.  2,  is  a  vertical  cross- 
section  of  Fig.  i 

Letters  of  reference  indicate  thus: — A,  designates 
the  stand  of  an  ordinary  loom  for  supporting  one  side 
of  the  take-up  roll  B,  said  stand  resting  at  its  base  on 
a  cross-beam  c,  of  the  frame  C,  and  suitably  secured 
at  its  opposite  end  to  the  breast  beam  D.  The  take- 
up  roll  B,  is  similarly  supported  at  its  opposite  end. 
(Not  shown.)  Adjacent  to  the  take-up  roll  is  the 
cloth-roll  E,  loosely  mounted  above  the  take-up  roll 
on  a  suitably  inclined  track  a,  along  which  it  rolls  as 
it  increases  in  size  by  reason  of  the  cloth  wound 
thereon,  as  shown  by  dotted  lines. 

F,  designates  the  cloth-guide,  consisting  of  a  stiff 
wire  bent  in  suitable  shape  so  as  to  be  brought  ad- 
jacent the  edge  or  selvage  of  the  web  of  cloth  before 
the  same  is  wound  on  the  cloth-roll  E.  This  guide  is 
shown  in  the  illustrations  as  adjustably  mounted  in  a 
hub  of,  perforated  to  receive  the  same  and  securely 
clamped  therein  in  desired  adjustment  by  the  set- 
screw  <i~.  As  the  cloth  comes  from  the  loom  in  the 
direction  of  the  arrow,  Fig.  2,  it  passes  over  the 
breast-beam  and  around  the  sand  roll  or  take-up  roll 
B,  and  is  guided  in  proper  alignment  to  the  cloth-roll 
E,  by  having  its  edges  brought  against  the  side  of  the 
adjacent  bent  portion  of  the  guide  F.  {Mason  Machine 
Works.) 

SULLIVAN'S  CLOTH-GUIDE. 

The  object  of  this  device  is  to  guide  the  cloth  evenly 
and  without  injury  as  it  is  wound  up  on  the  cloth- 
roller  in  a  loom,  since  unless  carefully  watched,  the 
cloth  will  not  be  wound  true  or  its  selvage  edges  will 
be  folded  over  or  creased  during  the  winding. 

By  means  of  the  new  device  we  are  enabled  to  weave 


When  it  is  desired  to  remove  the  cloth-roller,  the 
guides  are  simply  thrown  into  inoperative  position  out 
of  the  way  of  the  attendant. 

Fig.  i,  is  a  front  elevation  of  a  sufficient  portion  of 
a  loom  to  be  understood  with  the  invention  applied 
thereto.  Fig.  2  is  a  longitudinal  section  thereof  on 
the  line  x-x,  Fig.  i,  looking  to  the  right;  and  Fig.  3 
is  an  enlarged  perspective  view  of  one  of  the  adjust- 
able guide-supports. 

A,  indicates  the  loom-frame;  B,  the  breast-beam; 
B',  the  cross-girth;  B2,  the  standards,  secured  to  the 
breast-beam  and  girth,  providing  bearings  for  the  sand 
roll  C,  and  the  open  guide  ways  &,  to  form  bearings  for 
the  journals  of  the  cloth-roller  R. 

On  bolts  5,  securing  the  standards  B2,  to  the  breast- 
beam,  are  mounted  guide-supports,  shown  as  brackets 
d,  longitudinally  slotted  at  a",  to  receive  the  bolts  and 
provided  with  downturned  ears  d't  at  right  angles  to 
the  body  portion  of  each  bracket. 


cL  B 


cloth  the  full  width  of  the  loom,  if  desired,  or  any 
narrow  width,  by  a  very  simple  adjustment  of  the 
guide  mechanism,  which  can  be  applied  at  once  to 
looms  now  in  common  use  without  altering  them 
at  all. 


Each  ear  has  integral  therewith  on  its  inner  side, 
when  in  place,  a  headed  stud  d\  adapted  to  enter  a 
longitudinal  slot  h',  in  the  cloth-guide  h. 

The  cloth-guides  h,  two  in  number,  are  made  as 
arms  with  enlarged  lower  ends,  in  which  a  substantially 
semicircular  recess  ft2,  is  made  (see  dotted  lines  Fig.  2) 
to  embrace  as  much  as  possible  of  the  cloth-roller  R, 
the  size  of  said  recess  corresponding  to  the  diameter 
of  the  latter. 

The  longitudinal  slot  ft',  in  the  arm  extends  from 
near  its  upper  end  and  terminates  at  its  lower  end  in 
an  enlargement  ft3,  large  enough  to  admit  the  head  of 
the  stud  d\ 

When  the  brackets  d,  are  adjusted  in  position,  the 
guides  ft,  are  hung  upon  the  studs  dit  with  the  recesses 
ft2,  embracing  the  cloth  roller  close  to  the  selvage  of 
the  cloth,  said  guides  hanging  freely  upon  the  studs 
by  their  own  weight. 

As  the  cloth  rolls  up,  the  roller  R,  is  lifted  gradually 
in  the  open  bearings  &,  (see  Fig.  2)  the  guides  ft  mov- 
ing up  as  required  along  the  studs  d3,  and  as  the  roll 
of  cloth  increases  the  outward  pressure  on  the  guides 
is  resisted  by  the  ears  d2,  and  the  heads  of  the  studs  d*. 
The  cloth  is  thus  kept  straight  and  smooth  on  the 
roller  and  wound  hard  and  firmly  thereupon,  while  the 
selvages  cannot  creep  in  or  catch  between  the  roller 
and  the  guides,  owing  to  the  large  portion  of  the 
roller  embraced  snugly  by  the  recesses  ft2. 

When  the  roll  of  cloth  is  to  be  removed,  the  guides 
are  slid  up  along  their  supporting  studs  to  the  ends 
ft3,  and  then  swung  upward  until  they  assume  the 
dotted  line  position,  Fig.  2,  resting  against  the  under 
side  of  the  breast-beam,  the  weight  of  the  slotted  por- 
tions of  the  guides  retaining  them  in  such  position  by 
gravity. 


71 


It  will  be  seen  that  the  guides  are  very  thin  and  that 
they  can  be  moved  up  against  the  bearings  6,  by  ad- 
justment of  the  brackets,  so  that  the  width  of  the  cloth 
to  be  woven  is  practically  limited  only  by  the  loom 
itself. 

The  notched  ends  of  the  guides  are  of  such  shape 
that  they  will  not  at  any  time  contact  with  the  sand- 
roll  C.    (Patrick  Sullivan,  Fall  River,  Mass.) 


BRADY'S    TAKE-UP    AND    DROP-BOX  GOV- 
ERNING MECHANISM. 

The  object  of  this  device  is  to  provide  a  loom  with 
mechanism  whereby  the  movement  of  the  take-up  and 
of  the  drop-box  chain  will  be  arrested  on  the  stoppage 
of  the  loom  caused  by  the  action  of  the  stop  motion, 
said  parts  remaining  out  of  action  during  the  time 
that  the  loom  is  being  operated  by  hand,  so  that  when 
the  loom  is  again  thrown  into  action,  said  take-up  and 
drop-box  mechanism  will  be  in  precisely  the  same 
position  as  when  the  loom  was  knocked  off. 

The  device  applies  to  looms  having  one  box  on  one 
side  and  two  or  four  boxes  on  the  other  side.  On 
all  these  looms  built  without  the  present  improvement 
added,  when  the  filling  breaks  the  loom  will  turn  over 
2  or  3  picks  before  the  belt  will  entirely  leave  the  tight 
pulley,  and  the  take-up  and  box  will  work  when  no 
filling  is  weaving;  but  by  the  new  device  this  trouble 
is  done  away,  as  soon  as  the  stop  motion  acts,  the  dog 
that  operates  the  box-chain  will  be  raised  and  also  the 
catch  that  holds  the  take-up  wheel  will  be  raised,  there- 
fore letting  the  boxes  and  the  take-up  remain  the 
same  and  not  changing  them  while  the  loom  is  run- 
ning without  filling. 

Fig.  i  is  a  perspective  view  showing  sufficient  of  a 
loom  to  illustrate  the  application  of  the  improvement 
thereto,  the  parts  to  which  said  improvement  partic- 
ularly relates  being  shown  in  full  lines  and  the  re- 
maining parts  in  dotted  lines.  Figs.  2  and  3  are  per- 
spective views  on  a  larger  scale,  illustrating  parts  of 
the  loom  to  which  the  new  mechanism  relates. 


In  Fig.  I,  A,  represents  the  usual  stop  motion 
connected  by  a  rock-shaft  a,  which  has  an  arm 
connected  by  a  cord  a2,  to  a  pivoted  finger  6,  carried 
by  a  bell-crank  lever  V ,  the  latter  being  hung  to  the 
side  frame  of  the  loom  and  acted  upon  by  a  cam  on 
the  main  shaft,  so  as  to  impart  a  reciprocating  move- 
ment to  the  finger  b. 

When  the  pick  is  properly  shot  into  the  open  shed 


of  warp  threads,  said  pick  will,  on  the  forward  beat  of 
the  lathe,  strike  the  stop  motion  and  push  the  same 
forward,  so  as  to  swing  the  rock-shaft  «,  and  lift  the 
finger  to  a  point  above  a  lug  d,  on  a  slide  d\  known 
as  the  "stop-motion  tripper-slide,"  and  which  is  guided 
on  the  frame  of  the  loom.  Hence,  the  forward  mo- 
tion of  the  finger  has  no  effect  upon  said  stop-motion 
tripper-slide;  but  in  the  absence  of  a  pick  in  posi- 
tion to  strike  the  stop  motion  A.  the  latter  is  not 


moved  forward  and  the  finger  b,  is  permitted  to  hang 
down,  so  as  to  strike  the  lug  d,  and  move  the  slide 
d\  forward,  a  depending  finger  d2,  at  the  outer  end  of 
the  slide  in  such  case  acting  upon  one  arm  of  a 
trip-lever  f,  the  other  arm  of  which  acts  upon  the 
shuttle  stop-lever  9,  hung  to  the  under  side  of  the 
breast-beam,  the  outer  end  of  said  lever  thereupon 
pressing  upon  the  spring  shifter-lever  g' ,  and  releasing 
the  same  from  the  notch  in  the  retainer  plate  ff2, 
so  as  to  permit  it  to  swing  outward  and  shift  the 
clutch  on  the  main  shaft,  so  as  to  throw  the  loom 
out  of  gear. 

The  swinging  lathe  has  a  projecting  stud  i,  which 
enters  a  slot  in  a  lever  i',  hung  to  the  frame  of  the 
loom  and  carrying  a  pawl  i2,  which  acts  upon  a 
ratchet-wheel  m,  constituting  the  primary  wheel  of 
the  take-up  train,  the  shaft  of  said  wheel  having  a 
spur-pinion  '»',  meshing  with  a  spur-wheel  m2,  on  the 
shaft  of  the  take-up  roll,  any  backward  movement  of 
the  ratchet-wheel  m,  being  prevented  by  means  of  ai 
retaining-pawl  i3,  hung  to  the  pivot-stud  of  the  lever  i'. 

The  drop-box  chain  w,  is  actuated  by  a  reciprocat- 
ing bar  n\  which  receives  movement  from  a  cam  »*, 
on  the  main  shaft,  said  cam  acting  upon  a  pivoted: 
toe  or  finger  w3,  hung  to  the  bar  »'. 

On  the  inner  side  of  the  stop-motion  tripper-slide 
d',  is  a  lug  or  projecting  1,  and  with  this  lug  is 
adapted  to  engage  a  spring  catch  or  retainer  2,  hung 
to  the  side  of  the  loom,  so  that  when  the  slide  d' ,  lias 
been  pushed  forward  by  the  finger  bt  the  retainer  will1 
engage  with  said  lug  1,  as  shown  in  Fig.  3,  and  will! 
hold  the  slide  so  far  as  regards  any  accidental  back- 
ward movement  of  the  same,  but  will  permit  it  to  be 
moved  back  when  sufficient  force  is  applied  to  it. 

Upon  a  rock-shaft  3,  which  carries  the  trip-lever 
f,  is  mounted  an  arm  4,  connected  by  a  suitable  link 
5,  to  an  arm  6,  on  a  lever  7,  hung  at  some  fixed  point 
and  adapted  to  act  upon  the  retaining-pawl  i*,  of  the 
ratchet-wheel       so  that  when  the  ~lide  d\  is  pushed 


forward,  said  retaining-pawl  will  be  lifted  from  en- 
gagement with  the  teeth  of  the  ratchet-wheel,  and 
there  will  be  no  forward  movement  of  said  wheel  or 
of  the  take-up  roll  until  the  pawl  has  been  again  per- 
mitted to  drop  into  engagement  with  the  teeth  of  the 
wheel,  an  operation  which  is  not  effected  until  the 
clutch-operating  lever  g',  has  been  pulled  into  the 
notch  of  the  retainer-plate  </',  in  order  to  again  start 
the  loom,  this  operation  having  the  effect  of  pushing 
back  the  slide  d\  under  the  action  of  the  lever  f. 


The  rock-shaft  3,  has  at  the  other  side  of  the  loom 
an  arm  8,  connected  by  a  cord  9,  to  the  pivoted  toe 
n3,  on  the  reciprocating  bar  w',  which  operates  the 
pattern  chain,  and  the  same  movement  of  the  rock- 
shaft  3,  which  actuates  the  lever  7,  and  lifts  the  pawl 
■i3,  causes  such  movement  of  the  arm  8,  as  to  lift  the 
toe  »3,  out  of  the  path  of  the  cam  n3.  Hence,  as  soon 
•as  the  loom  is  knocked  off  there  will  be  no  operation 
either  of  the  take-up  mechanism  or  of  the  drop-box 
pattern-chain,  the  throwing  of  the  loom  again  into 
gear,  however,  restoring  both  take-up  and  drop-box 
chain  to  operative  position,  the  loom  thus  starting 
again  with  the  take-up  and  drop-boxes  precisely  at 
the  points  which  they  occupied  when  the  loom  was 
stopped.    (Thomas  A.  Brady,  Phila.) 


KASTLER'S  CONDITIONAL  TAKE-UP 
MECHANISM. 

This  mechanism  is  shown  in  the  accompanying 
illustrations  of  which  Fig.  1,  is  a  side  view  of  a  part 
of  a  loom  having  the  device  applied  thereto.  Fig.  2, 
is  a  partial  front  view  of  the  same,  and  Fig.  3,  is  a 
detail  perspective  of  the  device. 

A,  designates  a  short  or  stud-shaft  suitably  attached 
to  the  loom  frame  A'.  On  shaft  A,  is  journaled,  so 
as  to  turn  freely  a  wheel  B,  and  alongside  of  the 
latter  is  pivoted  on  said  shaft  a  swinging  arm  C.  To 
the  face  of  the  wheel  B,  is  secured  a  pinion  b,  which 
by  a  train  of  gears  is  connected  with  a  cloth  roller 
B',  to  enable  the  latter  to  be  revolved  by  the  rotation 
■of  the  wheel  B. 

In  the  drawing  no  support  is  shown  for  the  wheel 
and  pinion  intermediate  the  pinion  &,  and  the  gear  on 
the  cloth  shaft,  in  order  to  simplify  the  illustration  by 
ireducing  the  parts  shown. 


Pivoted  to  the  arm  C,  is  a  pawl  D,  that  engages 
the  periphery  of  the  wheel  B,  against  which  it  is 
pulled  with  considerable  friction  by  a  bowed  flat 
spring  E,  that  at  one  end  is  secured  to  the  outer 
extremity  of  the  arm  C,  and  has  at  its  other  end  con- 
nected by  a  rod  e,  to  pawl  D,  which  stands  substantially 
tangential  to  the  wheel  so  that  when  the  arm  C,  moves 
it  in  one  direction,  it  will  slip  over  the  wheel  B,  with- 
out revolving  it,  while  when  moved  in  the  opposite 
direction,  it  will  engage  said  wheel  B,  with  sufficient 
friction  to  rotate  it. 

Y,  is'  a  handle  whereby  the  pawl  may  be  lifted  from 
engagement  with  the  wheel.  The  wheel  has  its  pe- 
riphery V-shaped  in  cross  section  and  the  pawl  is  cor- 
respondingly grooved  to  engage  it,  and  in  order  to 
produce  friction  has  its  wheel  engaging  faces  covered 
with  leather  and  other  analogous  material. 

Extending  outward  from  a  collar  f,  that  is  fixed  to 
a  shaft  A,  is  an  arm  F,  that  at  its  outer  end  carries  a 
pin  0,  to  which  is  pivoted  a  friction  pawl  G,  that  is 
forced  yieldingly  against  a  wheel  B,  by  a  coil  spring 

h.  Said  pawl  G,  serves  to  hold  the  wheel  B,  against 
backward  rotation  when  the  pawl  D,  is  slipping  over 
the  same. 

To  the  side  of  the  arm  C,  opposite  wheel  B,  is 
attached  a  plate  I,  having  a  radically  extending  slot 

i,  by  means  of  which  a  link  J,  is  adjustably  attached 
to  said  arm.  The  outer  end  of  the  link  is  pivoted  to 
the  lower  end  of  the  pivoted  arm  K,  which  is  moved 
by  a  spring  N,  in  the  direction  which  causes  pawl  D, 
to  slip  over  the  wheel  B,  without  revolving  it,  while 
the  reverse  movement  is  effected  by  rod  L,  actuated 
by  an  eccentric  L',  the  rod  passing  through  an  open- 
ing in  a  lug  fc,  carried  by  the  arm  K,  and  has  a  collar 
I,  to  strike  said  lug  k,  and  thereby  swing  the  said  arm 
K,  and  through  it  move  the  pawl  D,  in  the  direction 
necessary  to  revolve  the  wheel  B. 

The  feed  is  regulated  by  the  size  of  the  roll  of  cloth, 
by  limiting  the  backward  throw  of  the  arm  C,  by 
means  of  a  pivoted  rod  or  lever  M,  that  has  one  end 
m,  in  the  plane  of  motion  of  said  lever,  and  at  its 
other  m',  arranged  to  engage  the  periphery  of  the  roll 
of  cloth. 


As  the  diameter  of  the  roll  of  cloth  increases,  the 
bar  M,  will  be  moved  to  change  the  position  of  the 
end  mi,  to  cause  it  to  engage  the  arm  C,  at  points  suc- 
cessively further  and  farther  outward  from  the  centre 
of  motion  of  said  arm  C.  The  spring  is  required  on 
account  of  the  variation  of  the  throw  of  the  arm  C, 
caused  by  the  engagement  therewith  of  the  end  mt  of 
the  lever  M.  The  latter  will  operate  to  vary  the 
throw  as  described  because  its  end  rn,  is  placed  to 
engage  the  arm  C,  at  a  point  to  one  side  of  a  vertical 
line  passing  through  the  centre  of  the  motion  of  the 
said  arm  C.    (E.  Kastler,  Philadelphia.) 


WARP-BEAMS. 


THE  KNOWL.ES  WARP-BEAM  AND  RATCHET 
BEAM-HEAD. 

Fig.  i  shows  the  warp-beam  in  its  perspective  view; 
Fig.  2  is  a  transverse  section  of  it,  and  Fig.  3  a  trans- 
verse section  on  an  enlarged  scale,  of  the  upper  por- 
tion of  the  warp-beam,  such  section  being  to  exhibit 
the  mechanism  for  connecting  the  aprons  to  the  beam. 

a,  denotes  the  warp-beam  body,  it  being,  as  usual, 
provided  at  each  end  of  it  with  a  journal  ;',  and  a 
grooved  beam-head  c. 

Between  the  two  beam-heads  and  concentric  there- 
with there  are  two  circular  flanges  6,  each  of  which  is 
a  wheel  or  disk  consisting  of  two  equal  segments  pro- 
vided at  their  chords  with  flanges  the  segments 
being  held  together  by  means  of  headed  screws  6a, 


Each  of  the  flanges  is  movable  on  the  beam  longi- 
tudinally thereof,  and  is  held  in  position  thereon  by 
certain  of  the  sliders  f,  and  their  set-screws  9,  the 
notches  in  the  hub  of  the  head  serving,  with  the  said 
sliders,  to  prevent  the  flange  from  being  revolved 
on  the  beam  independently  thereof  when  a  weaver 
may  take  hold  of  such  flange  and  turn  it  for  the 
purpose  of  revolving  the  beam.  The  object  of  having 
the  flanges  so  movable  on  the  beam  is  to  adapt  them 
to  the  width  of  warp  to  be  wound  upon  the  beam,  the 
two  aprons  shown  at  k,  being  to  aid  in  connecting 
the  warp  to  the  beam,  such  warp  being  suitably  fast- 
ened to  the  two  aprons,  each  of  which  is  movable 
lengthwise  of  the  beam  and  more  or  less  across  the 
other  or  fellow  apron. 

At  its  inner  end  each  apron  is  hemmed  to  receive 


going  through  these  flanges,  and  by  nuts  b3,  screwed 
on  such  screws,  thus  enabling  the  flanges  to  be  easily 
applied  to  or  removed  from  the  beam,  as  occasion 
may  require.  The  hub  of  the  head  is  also  formed  by 
continuations  of  the  flanges  around  the  beam,  as 
shown,  each  of  such  continuations  having  in  it  one  or 
more  rectangular  notches  I,  each  of  which  is  for  recep- 
tion of  a  slider  f,  arranged  on  one  of  three  rods  dt  and 
provided  with  a  set-screw  <J,  for  clamping  it  to  the 
rod.  Each  of  these  rods  is  placed  within  one  of  three 
grooves  "',  made  in  the  beam  and  opening  out  of  it 
at  its  periphery,  and  having  a  width  sufficient  for  the 
reception  of  the  slider  and  to  allow  of  it  being  moved 
along  upon  the  rod  in  either  direction  of  the  length 
of  the  latter.  Each  rod  at  its  ends  is  securely  fastened 
to  the  beam  or  extends  through  the  beam-heads,  and  is 
held  thereto  by  nuts  screwed  upon  it,  three  of  which 
are  shown  at  e,  in  Fig.  1. 


a  wire  or  rod  i,  arranged  within  the  hem  and  extend- 
ing across  the  apron.  Furthermore,  there  is  made  in 
the  beam,  longitudinally  of  it,  a  groove  n,  square  or 
rectangular  in  transverse  section.  In  this  groove 
there  is  fitted  or  arranged,  as  shown  in  Fig.  3,  a 
tongue  J>,  shaped  very  like  a  T-rail  of  a  railway,  the 
opposite  sides  of  it  being  grooved  or  channelled  to 
receive  the  two  aprons  and  their  wires  or  rods  in  the 
manner  as  represented  in  said  Fig.  3.  This  tongue 
is  fastened  in  the  groove  by  screws  going  through  the 
tongue  and  screwed  into  the  beam,  one  of  such  screws 
being  shown  at  0,  in  said  Fig.  3. 

From  the  above  it  will  be  seen  how  each  apron 
can  be  moved  lengthwise  of  the  beam,  so  as  to  carry 
the  outer  edge  of  the  apron  up  to  the  inner  face  of 
the  next  adjacent  flange  b. 

In  illustration.  Fig.  4,  the  inside  of  the  Knowles 
Ratchet  Beam-Head  is  shown.    An  explanation  of  its 


73 


74 


working  is  best  given  by  quoting  letters  of  references 
of  which  a,  indicates  the  beam-head  where  the  friction 
band  goes  on;  bt  the  inside  ratchet  gear  as  made  fast 

to  the  beam-barrel,  c, 
are  small  lugs  cast  on  to 
ratchet,  and  embedded 
into  the  beam  wood  bar- 
rel, d,  are  small  lugs 
cast  on  the  ratchet  same 
as  c.  The  lug  d,  is  where 
the  iron  rods  go  through 
running  from  one  end  of 
the  beam  to  the  other, 
holding  them  tight  to  the 
beam,  making  it  impossi- 
ble for  the  ratchet  to  get 
loose,  e,  is  a  small  hold- 
fast pall;  f,  is  a  small 
plate  riveted  on  to  beam- 
head  a,  coming  down  on 
the  inside  of  ratchet  gear 
b.  This  is  what  holds  the 
beam-head  a,  in  position. 
Loosen  screw  g,  turn 
plate  half  round,  and  the 
beam-head  a,  will  slip  off. 
(Crompton  and  Knowles  Loom  Works.) 


Fig.  t. 


THE  KNOWLES   WARP-BEAM  FOR  EXTRA 
HEAVY  BUILT  LOOMS. 

This  beam  is  shown  in  sectional  elevation  in  the 
accompanying  illustration.  i,  indicates  the  warp- 
beam  body,  made  of  iron  pipe,  five  or  six  inches  in 
diameter;  however,  the  size  of  the  pipe  may  be  varied, 
according  to  the  length  of  the  beam  and  the  strain 
to  be  put  upon  it. 

One  end  of  the  pipe  or  beam  i,  is  provided  with 
an  external  right-hand  screw-thread  i',  thereon,  and 
the  other  end  with  an  external  left-hand  screw- 
thread  i". 

One  of  the  outside  beam-heads  as  2,  has  the  central 
portion  or  hub  2',  thereof  recessed  or  cored  out  to 
form  a  chamber,  which  is  provided  with  an  internal 
right-hand  screw-thread,  and  said  beam-head  2,  is 
screwed  onto  the  right-hand  screw-threaded  end  1',  of 
the  pipe  1,  until  the  end  of  the  pipe  butts  against  the 
end  of  the  chamber  in  the  hub,  as  shown. 

The  other  outside  beam-head,  as  3,  has  the  central 
portion  or  hub  3',  thereof  recessed  or  cored  out  to 


the  pipe  1,  until  the  end  of  the  pipe  butts  against  the 
end  of  the  chamber  in  the  hub  as  shown. 

Both  beam-heads  2,  and  3,  are  secured  on  the  ends 
of  the  beam  1,  and  prevented  from  turning  off  in  this 
instance  by  bolts  or  screws  4,  which  extend  through 
holes  in  the  hubs  of  said  heads  and  are  tapped  into 
the  ends  of  the  beam  1. 

The  peripheries  of  the  outside  beam-heads  2,  and  3, 
are  in  this  instance  provided  with  teeth  2",  and  3", 
which  mesh  into  let-off  pinions  (not  shown)  in  the 
ordinary  way. 

A  central  shaft  5,  extends  through  the  beam  1,  and 
the  ends  thereof  extend  beyond  the  hubs  of  the  out- 
side beam-heads  2,  and  3,  as  shown  in  the  illustra- 
tion, to  act  as  journals  for  the  warp-beam.  A  bolt  6, 
tapped  into  the  hub  of  one  of  the  outside  beam-heads, 
as  2,  secures  the  shaft  5,  in  place. 

Mounted  upon  the  beam  1,  between  the  outside 
beam-heads  2,  and  3,  are  the  inside  beam-heads  7, 
and  8,  the  hubs  7',  and  8',  of  which  are  internally 
screw-threaded  and  adapted  to  turn  on  the  screw- 
threads  on  the  ends  of  the  beam  1,  to  adjust  the  dis- 
tance between  the  inner  ends  7,  and  8,  as  desired. 

In  order  to  hold  the  beam-heads  7,  and  8,  in  their 
adjusted  positions  and  prevent  them  from  turning  on 
the  beam  1,  a  key  9,  for  each  beam-head  is  employed. 
This  key  is  adapted  to  slide  in  a  longitudinal  external 
groove  10,  made  in  the  beam  1,  and  to  enter  a  cor- 
responding groove  in  the  hub  of  the  inner  beam-head. 
{Vrompton  and  Knoiclcs  Loom  Works.) 


form  a  chamber,  which  is  provided  with  an  internal 
left-hand  screw-thread,  and  said  beam-head  3,  is 
screwed  onto  the  left-hand  screw-threaded  end  1",  of 


ADJUSTABLE  HEAD  FOR  WARP-BEAMS. 

The  same  is  shown  in  the  accompanying  illustration 
in  vertical  longitudinal  section.  Quoting  letters  of 
reference  in  the  description  will  readily  explain  the 
construction  of  this  device  to  the  reader.  «,  represents 
a  portion  of  one  end  of  a  warp-beam  to  which  ratchet 
a2,  is  secured  by  means  of  screws  a3.  Loosely  mounted 
upon  the  shaft  a,',  adjacent  to  the  ratchet  a2,  is  a 
wheel  or  head  a4.  Mounted  upon  the  inside  of  this 
head  and  in  a  position  to  engage  with  the  teeth  of 
the  ratchet  a2,  is  a  pawl  which  is  pivoted  to  the  head 
of  a4,  by  means  of  a  pin,  and  one  of  its  ends  is  kept 
in  engagement  with  the  teeth  of  the  ratchet  «2,  by 
means  of  any  suitable  spring. 

Slidingly  mounted  upon  the  beam  is  the  adjustable 
head  &,  which  is  provided  with  a  centrally-apertured 
hub  b\  arranged  upon  the  beam  a.  This  head  is 
designed  to  be  adjusted  back  and  forth  on  the  beam, 
in  order  to  confine  the  warp  within  a 
space  corresponding  to  the  width  of  the 
fabric  to  be  woven.  This  width  is  the  dis- 
tance between  the  adjustable  head  b,  and 
a  corresponding  fixed  head  (not  shown) 
upon  the  other  end  of  the  beam. 

d,  represents  screw-threaded  rods 
mounted  in  screw-threaded  apertures  b2, 
formed  in  lugs  b3,  integral  with  the  hub 
and  extending  into  grooves  in  the  beam. 
These  grooves  are  of  sufficient  depth  to 
receive  the  rod  so  that  the  rod  will  be 
below  or  flush  with  the  surface  of  the 
beam.  The  inner  ends  of  these  rods  are 
rotatably  mounted  in  eyes  d'.  The  ob- 
ject of  this  construction,  that  is,  the  ar- 
rangement of  the  rods  with  the  eyes,  is 
to  permit  the  rod  to  turn  in  the  nut 
and  at  the  same  time  to  prevent  any 
longitudinal  movement  of  the  rods. 
This  is  accomplished  by  omitting 
the  screw-threads  at  this  end  of  the  rods  and 
making  the  inside  bore  of  the  eyes  d\  smooth,  the 
rods  being  maintained  in  the  eyes  by  means  of  a 


75 


collar  d~,  fastened  on  the  ends  of  the  rods.  At  their 
outer  ends  these  rods  are  also  free  from  screw-threads 


the  former  to  turn  upon  the  shaft  «',  without  effecting 
the  beam.  The  disk  as  provided  with  pins,  is  then 
inserted,  the  pins  of  the  disk  passing  through  the 
apertures  o",  in  a  position  to  engage  the  teeth  of  the 
gears  f.  Now,  by  turning  the  head  a4,  the  gears  f, 
will  be  rotated,  causing  the  head  b,  to  travel  back  or 
forth  until  the  desired  position  is  reached.  The  disk 
as  provided  with  pins  is  then  removed,  and  the  pawl 
permitted  to  return  into  engagement  with  the  ratchet. 
(Thomas  Blackburn,  Dora;  N.  FI.,  assignor  of  one-half 
tn  John  Lancaster,  same  place.) 


and  are  arranged  in  suitable  apertures  in  the  ratchet. 
To  the  outer  ends  d\  of  the  rods  d,  that  extend 
through  the  ratchet,  there  are  rigidly  secured  spur- 
gears  f.  From  the  foregoing  it  will  be  seen  that  as 
the  rods  are  rotated 
by  means  of  the  spur- 
gears  f,  the  head  b, 
will  be  adjusted  back 
and  forth.  The  rods 
are  preferably  pro- 
vided with  screw- 
threads  having  a  steep 
pitch,  in  order  that 
the  head  may  be 
quickly  adjusted.  The 
head  being  in  one 
piece  and  controlled 
in  its  movement  by 
the  screw-threads, 
there  is  no  liability  of 
its  slipping  on  the 
beam  after  it  is  ad- 
justed. Any  desired 
means  may  be  em- 
ployed for  turning 
these  rods;  but  it  is 
necessary  that  the 
rods  be  turned  in 
unison.  For  this  reason  the  rods  are  provided  at  their 
ends  d*,  with  spur-gears  f,  each  having  the  same  num- 
ber of  teeth  and  which  are  operated  by  means  of  a 
disk  provided  with  pins,  arranged  in  a  circle  on  one 
side  of  said  disk  after  the  manner  of  a  lantern-gear. 
The  web  a10,  of  the  head  a4,  is  provided  with  a  circular 
series  of  apertures  a",  through  which  the  pins  pre- 
viously referred  to  pass  into  a  position  so  as  to  en- 
gage the  teeth  of  the  gears  f. 

The  operation  is  as  follows:  It  being  desired  to 
adjust  the  head  b,  the  pawl  is  thrown  out  of  engage- 
ment with  the  ratchet  a-,  and  held  out  in  any  way. 
This  releases  the  head  a*,  from  the  ratchet  and  permits 


THE    FAIRMOUNT    MACHINE  COMPANY'S 
ADJUSTABLE  BEAM-HEAD  FOB  GING- 
HAM-LOOM WARP-BEAMS. 

Fig.  i  is  a  plan  of  this  beam-head,  and  Fig.  2  a 
sectional  view  of  the  same.  This  beam-head  serves  a 
double  purpose,  being  used  as  warp-flange  and  fric- 
tion head  at  the  same  time. 

The  construction  of  this  beam-head  is  best  explained 
by  quoting  letters  of  references  of  which  o,  is  the 
open  space  for  the  beam-barrel  onto  which  the  warp 
is  beamed;  b,  is  a  projecting  flange  cast  to  the  head; 


Fig.  2 


c,  is  a  cap  that  is  bolted  to  the  projecting  flange  b, 
by  means  of  bolts  d  and  d'-  e,  is  a  depression  de- 
signed to  hold  a  rope  or  band  for  creating  friction 
to  the  warp-beam  and  in  turn  onto  the  warp  threads. 

This  combined  beam-head  and  warp-flange  can  be 
readily  adjusted  to  any  width  of  warp  desired  by 
simply  loosening  bolts  d  and  d',  placing  the  beam- 
head  the  required  distance  apart  and  then  tightening 
bolts  d  and  d'  again.  Two  of  these  beam-heads  are 
employed  on  a  beam,  one  at  one  side  and  the  other  at 
the  opposite  side,  both  having  their  flange  sides  placed 
against  each  other.  (Fairmount  Machine  Co.,  Phila- 
delphia. ) 


STOP- MOTIONS. 


THE  KNOWLES  CENTER  STOP-MOTION. 

The  same  is  shown  in  the  accompanying  illustra- 
tions of  which  Fig.  i  is  a  perspective  view  of  the 
complete  motion,  and  Fig.  2  a  view  in  detail  of  the 
sliding  shield  tumbler,  its  spring  and  the  sliding  shield, 
seen  from  the  other  side  compared  to  view  given  in 
Fig.  i. 

A,  is  the  race  plate;  B,  is  the  lay  wood;  C,  is  the 
reed;  D,  are  the  feeler  wires;  E,  is  the  slot  in  the 
race  plate  and  lay  into  which  the  feeler  wires  drop 
when  the  lay  comes  forward;  F,  is  the  feeler  stand; 
G,  is  the  dagger;  H,  is  the  cam  on  which  the  dagger 
G,  slides  to  raise  and  lower  the  feeler  wires;  I,  is  the 
dagger  socket;  J,  is  the  sliding  shield  which  prevents 
the  dagger  G,  from  knocking  the  loom  off  on  the  first 
pick  after  the  shipper  handle  is  pulled  on;  K,  is  the 
tumbler,  which,  when  struck  by  the  dagger,  throws 
off  the  shipper  handle;  L,  is  the  tumbler  finger  which 
connects  the  tumbler  with  the  shipper  shaft;  M,  is  the 
shield  spring  finger;  N,  is  the  breast-beam  stand;  O, 
is  the  shipper  shaft;  P,  is  the  protector  rod;  R,  is  the 
sliding  shield  tumbler,  which,  with  the  aid  of  the 
spring  M,  throws  the  sliding  shield  J,  up  to  the  end 
of  the  slots  S,  when  the  shipper  handle  is  thrown  off 
and  holds  it  up  until  the  dagger  comes  in  contact  with 


was  pulled  on.  This  shield  is  thrown  up  into  place 
when  the  shipper  handle  is  thrown  off  and  remains  up, 
preventing  the  dagger  from  striking  the  tumbler,  until 
the  first  pick  after  the  handle  is  pulled  on,  when  the 
dagger  strikes  the  notch  in  the  shield  and  pushes  it 
back  and  down,  leaving  the  dagger  free  to  strike  the 
tumbler  on  the  next  pick  if  there  is  no  filling  under 
the  feeler  wires.   (Vrompton  and  Enoicles  Loom  Works.) 


the  notch  T,  and  pushes  the  shield  back  on  the  first 
pick  after  the  handle  is  pulled  on. 

As  the  lay  moves  back  the  feeler  wires  are  raised, 
by  the  dagger  G,  sliding  up  the  cam  H,  to  allow  the 
shuttle  to  pass  under  them.  If  there  was  no  filling 
under  the  feeler  wires  when  the  lay  came  forward, 
the  dagger  would  slide  down  the  cam  H  and  strike 
against  the  tumbler  K,  throwing  off  the  shipper  han- 
dle; but  when  the  filling  is  under  the  feeler  wires  the 
dagger  is  held  up  so  that  it  cannot  slide  down  the  cam 
and  strike  the  tumbler,  but  instead  passes  over  the 
tumbler  without  striking  it. 

When  the  loom  is  stopped  and  the  lay  turned  back, 
the  filling  is  apt  to  get  out  from  under  the  feelers, 
so  that  if  it  were  not  for  the  sliding  shield,  the  shipper 
handle  would  be  thrown  off  on  the  first  pick  after  it 


76 


McMICHAEL'S  FILLING  STOP-MOTION. 

In  devices  of  this  character  heretofore  constructed, 
difficulty  has  been  experienced  from  the  fact  that  the 
stop-motion  was  found  to  offer  an  obstruction  to 
starting  up  the  loom  again  when  it  has  been  stopped 
with  the  lay  up  close  to  the  breast-beam,  and  it  was 
found  necessary  for  the  weaver  to  move  back  the  lay 
by  manual  exertion  before  the  loom  could  be  set  in 
motion.  To  overcome  this  difficulty,  additional  devices 
were  employed  to  remove  the  obstruction  offered  by 
the  stop-motion,  in  the  first  pick  of  the  loom,  when 
no  filling  is  present  to  sustain  the  fork  of  the  locking- 
dog.  • 

The  new  device  provides  a  stop-mo- 
tion which  requires  no  such  additional 
attachments  and  at  the  same  time 
allows  for  starting  up  the  loom,  with 
the  lay  in  any  position,  without  ob- 
struction being  offered  by  any  part  of 
the  stop-motion,  although  it  may  have 
just  operated  to  throw  the  loom  out 
of  action. 

In  addition  to  the  above,  the  inven- 
tion has  in  view  the  combination  of 
the  filling  stop-motion  with  the  loose- 
reed  motion  of  the  type  known  as  the 
"McMichael  Smash  Protector." 

Fig.  i  shows  a  top  plan  view  of  a 
sufficient  portion  of  a  loom  to  illustrate 
the  application  of  the  invention  there- 
to. Fig.  2  shows  a  perspective  view  of 
the  stop-motion  devices  which  are  at- 
tached to  the  lay.  Figs.  3  and  4  show 
perspective  views  of  two  of  these  de- 
vices.   Fig.  5  shows  a  section  on  line  $,  x,  of  Fig.  1. 

Letters  of  reference  indicate  thus:  «,  designates  the 
beam  of  the  lay,  and  b,  the  breast-beam.  A  plate  c, 
fastened  to  the  front  side  of  the  said  rail  of  the  lay, 
is  formed  with  a  dovetailed  slideway  which  receives  a 
plate  o\  having  a  raised  cam-surface  c2,  along  a  portion 
of  its  upper  edge  and  a  vertical  shoulder  c3,  adjacent 
to  one  end  of  said  cam-surface.  A  dog  d,  is  pivoted 
between  ears  on  the  plate  C,  and  rests  by  gravity  on 
the  cam  c2,  and  said  dog  is  provided  with  a  detector 
fork  or  finger  d' ,  which  extends  over  a  depression  a\ 
in  the  lay,  and  is  designed  to  be  sustained  by  the  pick 
2,  crossing  said  depression,  so  as  to  prevent  the  dog 
entering  into  engagement  with  the  shoulder  c3. 

The  design  is  to  cause  the  plate  C,  to  reciprocate 
in  the  slideway  of  the  plate  c,  as  the  lay  moves  to  and 
fro,  and  so  long  as  the  filling  is  unbroken  and  extend- 
ing under  the  fork  d\  the  reciprocations  of  the  plate 
C,  carry  its  shoulder  c*,  past  the  dog  d.  The  cam 
c",  riding  under  the  dog,  elevates  the  fork  d',  to  allow 
the  shuttle  to  pass  under  it,  and  after  the  shuttle 


77 


passes,  the  fork  drops  upon  the  pick  left  by  the  shuttle. 
Should  the  pick  be  absent  over  the  depression  a',  the 
dog  will  be  free  to  gravitate  into  the  path  of  the 
shoulder  c-3,  and  the  plate  C,  is  thereby  prevented  from 


3a 


1 

f  -  | 

q  c'c. 

\,d'    \X            p  ■ 

X  i 

I 

■  *  *  

Fie;. 


completing  its  stroke,  and  is  held  at  a  position  to 
effect  the  discontinuance  of  the  loom's  operation. 

e,  designates  two  of  the  slotted  locking-plates  of  the 
loose-reed  motion,  previously  referred  to,  which  plates 
are  arranged  to  reciprocate  lengthwise  of  the  lay  and 
alternately  lock  and  release  the  reed  by  registry  of 
different-sized  portions  of  their  slots  with  heads  of 
bolts  e',  which  connect  with  a  holding-bar  f,  back  of 
the  reed.  The  two  plates  e,  are  connected  together 
by  a  rod  e2,  whose  ends  are  bent  at  right  angles  and 
entered  through  ears  on  the  plates,  and  one  of  the 
said  plates  is  connected  by  a  rod  0,  with  the  breast- 
beam,  the  said  rod  g,  having  a  bent  end  passed  loosely 
through  an  ear  el,  on  the  plate  and  being  connected, 
through  a  swivel  </,  with  an  ear  '/',  on  the  breast- 
beam. 

By  reason  of  the  connection  between  the  locking- 
plates  of  the  loose-reed  motion  and  the  breast-beam, 
it  will  be  readily  seen  that  reciprocations  of  said  plates 
will  be  produced  by  the  to-and-fro  movement  of  the 
lay.  A  further  object  is  to  also  reciprocate  the  plate 
c',  through  the  same  agency,  but  as  it  is  not  desirable 
to  restrict  the  movement  of  the  plates  e,  by  the  lock- 
ing of  the  plate  C,  provisions  are  made  permitting 
continued  movement  of  said  plates  e,  after  the  plate 
C,  has  been  locked  by  the  dog  d. 

The  rod  e2,  passes  loosely  through  an  ear  c5,  on  the 
plate  C ,  and  carries  a  collar  e5,  fastened  by  a  set- 
screw  e6,  and  arranged  to  abut  one  side  of  the  ear  c5, 
and  by  acting  against  said  ear  under  one  direction  of 
movement  of  the  plates  e,  to  impel  the  plate  C,  un- 
yieldingly, in  that  direction. 

A  spiral  spring  ht  is  connected  at  one  end  to  an  ear 
h',  on  the  plate  C,  and  at  the  opposite  end  to  one  of 
the  bent  ends  of  the  rod  e2,  and  this  spring  exerts 
itself  to  hold  the  ear  c5,  against  the  collar  e5,  and 
cause  the  plate  C,  to  travel  with  the  plates  e,  in  the 
reverse  direction  to  that  above  mentioned  in  the 
absence  of  any  obstruction  such  as  the  dog  d,  presents 
when  it  has  dropped  down  in  front  of  the  shoulder  c3. 

i,  designates  a  rock-shaft  or  rotary  shipping-rod 
which  is  located  under  the  breast-beam  and  carries  a 
handle  V,  whose  turning  operates  a  belt-shipping  or 
clutch  mechanism,  so  as  to  throw  the  loom  into  and 
out  of  action.  An  arm  fc,  is  affixed  to  the  shaft  i,  by 
a  set-screw  fc",  and  projects  out  in  front  of  the  breast- 
beam,  and  it  is  formed  at  its  free  end  on  the  upper 


side  with  a  V-shaped  cam  fc'.  The  plate  6',  has  a 
pendent  arm  fc2,  which  when  said  plate  is  locked  by 
the  dog  d,  encounters  the  cam  fc',  in  the  movement  of 
the  lay  toward  the  breast-beam,  but  at  all  other  times 
1  clears  said  cam  by  passing  around  the 

end  of  the  same. 

In  the  operation  of  the  loom  when 
the  filling  is  running  properly  there  is 
no  operation  of  the  stop-motion  to 
throw  the  loom  out  of  action,  for  the 
filling  extending  over  the  depression 
«',  in  the  lay  serves  to  support  the  fork 
d',  and  prevent  the  dog  d,  from  drop- 
ping far  enough  to  take  it  into  engage- 
ment with  the  shoulder  <?.  The  plate 
c',  receives  its  full  movement  and  the 
cam  c\  raises  the  fork  each  time  for 
the  passage  of  the  shuttle,  allowing 
said  fork  to  lower  after  the  shuttle  has 
passed  and  rest  on  the  filling.  As  long 
as  the  plate  C,  makes  its  full  stroke 
lengthwise  of  the  lay,  its  arm  fc2,  is- 
carried  around  the  cam  fc',  in  the  to- 
and-fro  movement  of  the  lay.  Upon 
breakage  or  depletion  of  the  pick 
or  other  cause  preventing  its_  extend- 
ing across  the  depression  a',  so  as 
to  support  the  fork  d\  the  latter  will  fall  into  the  said 
depression  and  the  dog  d,  will  then  drop  in  front  of 
the  shoulder  c\  and  prevent  completion  of  the  stroke 
of  the  plate  C,  When  the  said  plate  is  thus  locked, 
its  pendent  arm  fc2,  is  directly  in  line  with  the  cam 
k'  and  as  the  lay  approaches  the  breast-beam,  said 
pendent  arm,  by  action  against  the  said  cam,  moves 
the  arm  fc,  sufficiently  to  throw  the  clutch  or  shipper, 
the  said  arm  k,  then  taking  a  position  some  distance 
below  the  arm  fc2.  #  m 

An  advantage  of  the  new  device  is,  that  while  trie- 
latter  adjustment  of  parts  obtains  and  the  lay  is  close 
up  to  the  breast-beam  the  loom  can  be  started  by 
turning  the  handle,  substantially  three-quarters  ot  a 
full  movement  of  the  latter  being  allowed  without 
causing  the  arm  fc,  to  encounter  the  arm  fc",  and  this 
three-quarters  movement  being  sufficient  to  put  tne 
loom  in  operation.  This  is  principally  due  to  the 
formation  of  the  arm  fc,  with  a  V-shaped  cam  *- ,  tor 
after  the  arm  fc2,  has  passed  the  point  of  the  cam  tne 


arm  fc,  can  be  raised  to  a  sufficient  distance  without 
encountering  the  arm  fc3,  to  put  the  machine  in  opera- 
tion. 

With  the  new  arrangement  by  holding  the  handle 
three-quarters  on,  the  weaver  can  run  the  loom  ^while 
the  detector-fork  has  no  support,  and  the  arm  fc2,  will 
pass  over  the  cam  fc',  without  touching  it.  This  is 
an  advantage,  as  it  is  frequently  desired  to  run  the 
loom  experimentally  without  doing  any  work,  and. 


78 


therefore,  in  the  absence  of  filling.  The  new  device 
can  be  also  readily  attached  to  looms  in  which  the 


shipper-rod  moves  longitudinally  under  the  breast- 
beam  instead  of  rocking.  (Woonsockct  Machine  and 
Press  Company,  Woonsocket,  R.  I.) 


WARP  STOP-MOTION  FOR  NORTHROP 
LOOMS. 

In  this  stop-motion  the  detectors,  which  are  normally 
supported  by  the  warp-threads,  are  located  between 
the  harness  mechanism  and  the  lay,  so  that  they  are 
brought  as  closely  as  possible  to  the  fell  or  weaving 
point,  such  position  bringing  the  said  detectors  nearer 
the  usual  breaking  point  of  the  warps,  which  point  is 
for  the  most  part  in  front  of  the  harness  mechanism. 
Being  located  in  front  of  the  harness,  the  operator  can 
readily  see  any  dropped  detector,  due  to  warp  break- 
age, and  so  locate  it  to  repair  the  warp  more  readily 
than  if  he  were  required  to  look  through  the  harness 
to  see  a  dropped  detector,  as  is  necessary  with  the 
usual  location  of  the  warp  stop  mechanism.  The  loca- 
tion of  the  detectors  in  a  stationary  horizontal  plane 
at  the  back  of  the  lay  makes  them  also  free  from  the 
frictional  action  on  the  warp  that  would  ensue  were 
they  carried  by  the  lay. 

When  the  loom  is  running  properly  the  parts  are 
in  the  position  shown  by  full  lines  in  our  illustration 
Fig.  i,  (being  a  side  elevation  of  a  portion  of  the  new 
mechanism,  the  lay  being  forward,  the  vibrator,  the 
releasing-lever  of  the  stopping  mechanism,  and  the 
intermediate  connections  being  shown  in  normal  posi- 
tion by  full  lines  and  by  dotted  lines  in  abnormal  po- 
sition, due  to  a  dropped  detector)  the  friction-locking 
device  holding  the  rock-shaft  and  its  attached  parts 
in  inoperative  position,  the  path  of  movement  of  the 
outer  end  of  the  dagger  9,  being  below  the  collar  k't 
on  the  releasing  lever  fc,  when  the  lay  is  forward.  The 
finger  e,  at  such  time  bears  against  the  feeler  6s,and 
the  vibrator  b  and  its  flange  6',  are  free  to  enter  the 
detector  guide  in  the  back  stroke  of  the  lay,  all  of  the 
detectors  d,  (see  Fig.  2, — a  side  elevation  of  one  of 
the  detectors  enlarged)  being  lifted.  A  dropped  de- 
tector, however,  will  encounter  the  flange  b',  of  the 
vibrator,  the  web  supporting  the  rear  edge  of  the  de- 
tector when  the  lay  moves  back,  and  the  vibrator  will 
be  turned  into  the  dotted  line  position,  Fig.  i,  de- 
pressing the  curved  feeler  &3. 

The  depression  of  the  feeler  turns  the  finger  e,  into 
its  dotted  line  position,  thereby  partially  rotating  the 
rock-shaft  ex,  withdrawing  the  lug  f*,  from  the  de- 
pression f  (see  Fig.  3,  showing  a  detail  of  the  con- 
nections intermediate  the  vibrator  and  stopping  mech- 
anism) in  the  ear  f,  and  moving  into  the  depression 
f3,  a  spring  permitting  sufficient  longitudinal  movement 


of  the  rock-shaft  for  such  purpose.  This  rotative 
movement  of  the  rock-shaft  elevates  the  outer  end  of 
the  arm  f,  causing  its  tip  f,  to  act  against  and  lift 
the  dagger  ff,  the  said  parts  assuming  thereby  the  posi- 
tion shown  in  dotted  lines,  Fig.  1,  so  that  the  forward 
movement  of  the  lay  will  bring  the  dagger  into  en- 
gagement with  the  stop  k',  of  the  releasing  lever  Jc, 
and  knock  it  out  from  its  usual  holding-notch,  per- 
mitting the  lever  to  fly  outwardly  in  the  usual  manner 
and  moving  the  belt  shipper  to  stop  the  loom. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  connections  between  the 
detectors  and  the  stopping  mechanism  will  be  moved 
into  operative  position  at  the  first  back  stroke  of  the 
lay  after  a  detector  is  dropped,  and  that  the  next  for- 
ward stroke  of  the  lay  causes  the  stopping  mechanism 
to  stop  the  loom.  All  the  intervening  devices  which 
thus  control  the  stopping  mechanism  by  the  position 
of  the  vibrator  are  carried  by  the  lay  and  are  very 
simple  and  efficient,  as  well  as  rapid  in  their  operation. 
The  loom  having  been  stopped,  the  operator  lifts  the 
dropped  detector  and  mends  the  warp,  and  when  the 


lay  moves  back  again  the  stopping  mechanism  is  in 
proper  position  to  act  again  without  any  necessity  for 
the  attendant  to  pay  any  attention  to  it.    (Draper  Co.) 


NORTHROP'S  FILLING  STOP-MOTION. 

Fig.  A,  shows  a  sectional  detail  of  a  sufficient  por- 
tion of  a  loom  with  the  improvement  embodied  therein. 
Fig.  B,  is  a  front  elevation  of  the  mechanism  shown 
in  Fig.  A.  Fig.  C,  is  a  top  or  plan  view  thereof,  on  a 
larger  scale,  and  Fig.  D,  is  a  perspective  detail  of  the 
upper  ends  of  the  filling-hammer  and  actuating-arm. 

The  loom-frame  A,  breast-beam  A4,  the  starting- 
shaft  d\  the  filling-fork  &12,  its  carrying-slide  &9,  sliding 
in  the  guide  68,  the  lever  A18,  actuated  by  a  cam  (not 
shown)  on  the  usual  lower  shaft  of  the  loom,  and  the 
spring  c20,  are  all  of  usual  construction. 

In  the  drawings  Figs.  A,  and  B,  there  is  shown  a 
rock-shaft  A"  to  which  the  lever  A18  is  attached,  and 
a  filling-hammer  A19,  is  rigidly  secured  to  said  shaft 
to  be  vibrated  thereby,  the  upper  end  of  said  hammer 
having  a  convexed  rearwardly  extended  upper  end 
A20,  to  readily  pass  under  the  tail  b20,  of  the  filling- 
fork  when  the  latter  is  not  acted  upon  by  the  filling. 

The  hub  6,  of  an  actuating  arm  Figs.  B,  and  C,  is 
herein  shown  as  loosely  mounted  on  the  shaft  A17,  said 
arm  having  a  bifurcated  head  b2t  recessed  to  receive 
the  filling-hammer  A19,  as  it  swings  inward  (see  Fig. 
D,)  the  top  of  the  head  being  cut  away  laterally  to 
form  a  seat,  and  leave  shoulders  b:\  at  its  front  side, 
between  which  and  the  straight  front  face  o19,  of  the 
filling-hammer,  the  looplike  tail  &20,  of  the  filling-fork 
enters  when  the  filling  fails.  The  arm  ft1,  has  a  lug  or 
projection  b\  thereon  to  engage  a  finger  dw,  fast  on 
the  starting-shaft  d',  when  the  actuating  arm  is 
operated,  to  turn  said  shaft  in  the  direction  of  arrow 
25,  Fig.  A,  a  detent  b\  on  the  actuating  arm  engaging 
some  fixed  part  of  the  loom  to  limit  its  movement 
rearwardly. 


79 


The  filling-fork  slide  is  normally  held  by  spring  CM, 
in  the  position  best  shown  in  Figs.  A  and  C,  and  so 
long  as  the  tail  &*  of  the  filling-fork  is  not  caught 
between  the  shoulders  b3,  of  the  actuating  arm  and  the 


filling-hammer,  the  latter  will  swing  back  and  forth 
without  moving  the  actuating-arm,  and  the  starting- 
shaft  d',  will  not  be  turned.  If  the  filling  fails  in 
front  of  the  fork,  however,  and  the  latter  is  not  tipped, 
its  tail  will  be  caught  between  the  filling-hammer  and 
the  shoulders  &3,  and  the  actuating-arm  will  be 
moved  toward  the  breast-beam  with  the  filling-ham- 
mer, thereby  causing  the  lug  b\  to  act  upon  the  finger 
dw,  turning  the  starting-shaft  d\  without  the  interven- 
tion of  the  filling-fork  proper,  or  its  slide. 

The  shoulders  V\  are  separated  by  a  space  only 
sufficient  to  admit  the  entrance  of  the  filling-hammer 
and  present  broad  abutments  against  which  the  tail 
of  the  filling-fork  is  held  by  the  hammer,  so  that  the 
strain  upon  the  tail  is  more  evenly  distributed. 
(Draper  Co.) 


MOMMER'S  ELECTRIC  WARP  STOP-MOTION 
FOR  LOOMS. 

This  invention,  relating  to  looms,  has  for  its  object 
to  provide  a  warp  stop-motion  which  when  a  warp 
thread  breaks  will  permit  a  metallic  drop  device  hav- 
ing a  warp  eye  and  a  slot,  to  fall  and  effect  the  closing 
of  an  electric  circuit,  the  closing  of  the  circuit  causing 
an  electromagnet,  carried  by  a  knock-off  lever,  to  put 
a  lever  or  finger,  pivoted  and  forming  the  armature 
of  the  said  magnet,  in  position  to  be  struck  by  a 
hammer  actuated  continuously  by  a  suitable  device 
on  a  cross-shaft  of  the  loom,  the  blow  of  the  hammer 
causing  the  knock-off  device  or  lever  to  be  moved 
and  push  the  usual  shipper-handle  out  of  its  usual 
holding  notch. 

Fig.  I,  shows  a  sufficient  portion  of  a  loom  with  the 
improvement  added  to  enable  the  invention  to  be 
understood.  Fig.  2,  is  a  partial  front  elevation  of  the 
left-hand  end  of  the  loom,  showing  part  of  the  usual 
shipper-handle  and  the  knock-off  device  or  lever. 

A,  represents  the  loom  frame;  A',  the  breast-beam; 


A2,  the  whip-roll;  A3,  the  under  shaft;  A4,  the  crank- 
shaft; A5,  the  lay;  A°,  the  cam  on  the  under  shaft;  B, 
the  rock-shaft,  and  B',  a  hammer  and  B",  the  lay  con- 
necting rods;  a,  the  harness  frames  having  harnessses 
o';  B3,  the  shipper-handle  adapted  to  be  moved  in  a 
slot  in  plate  C,  one  side  of  said  slot  having  a  notch 
to  receive  the  said  shipper-handle  and  hold  it  in 
place,  to  keep  the  driving-belt  on  the  driving-pulley 
(not  shown ). 

The  object  of  the  new  device  is  to  stop  the  loom 
on  the  breaking  of  a  warp  thread,  and  for  this  purpose 
there  are  provided  a  series  of  flat  ribbon-like  drop 
devices  6,  each  having  a  warp  eye  b\  to  receive  a 
warp-thread,  and  at  one  side  of  said  eye  a  slot  &2, 
through  which  is  extended  a  metallic  bar  &3,  said  bar 
acting  to  keep  the  said  drop  devices  substantially 
parallel  and  to  also  act  as  a  guide  for  a  series  of  said 
devices.  Below  the  lower  ends  of  these  drop  devices 
is  arranged  a  closure  device,  shown  as  a  trough  d, 
properly  insulated  from  the  frame  of  the  machine  and 
shown  as  filled  with  mercury  d\  the  breaking  of  a 
warp-thread  letting  a  drop  device  fall  so  that  its  lower 
end  enters  the  mercury  and  closes  an  electric  circuit. 

The  electric  circuit  shown  contains  a  wire  2,  which 
starts  from  the  mercury  cup  and  extends  to  a  battery 
3,  and  from  the  battery  by  wire  4,  to  an  electromagnet 
5,  mounted  at  or  near  the  end  of  a  knock-off  lever  or 
device  c,  pivoted  at  e\  and  carrying  a  finger  or  lever 
e2,  which  constitutes  the  armature  of  said  magnet,  the 
outer  or  heavier  end  of  said  armature  keeping  the 
same  in  its  "normal"  position,  a  wire  6,  connecting 
the  opposite  end  of  said  magnet  to  the  said  guide- 
bar  b*. 

When  the  circuit  is  open,  the  inner  or  right-hand 
end  of  said  armature  is  normally  kept  elevated  out  of 
the  range  of  motion  of  the  hammer  B',  operated  at 
each  rotation  of  the  shaft  A3,  and  said  hammer  device 
passes  under  the  said  armature,  but  in  case  a  drop 
device  falls  into  the  mercury,  it  constituting  a  closure 
device  for  the  circuit,  the  magnet  is  excited  and  turns 
the  armature,  putting  its  inner  end  in  its  abnormal 
position  when  it  will  be  struck  by  the  hammer  or 


6 


equivalent  device  as  it  comes  forward,  thus  moving 
the  armature  and  with  it  the  knock-off  device  or  lever 
e,  causing  it  to  meet  the  said  shipper-handle  and  push 
it  from  its  holding  notch  and  effect  in  usual  manner 
the  shipping  of  the  belt  to  stop  the  loom. 

The  screw  n,  is  employed  as  an  up-stop  for  the 
magnet.  Instead  of  the  mercury  any  other  suitable 
device,  which,  as  the  lower  end  of  the  drop  device 
meets  it,  will  close  the  electric  circuit,  can  be  used. 
(Draper  Co.) 


PICKING  MECHANISMS. 


KRITLER'S    SWEEP-STICK    FOR  CONNECT- 
ING  THE  SWEEP-ARM   AND  PICKING- 
STICK  OF  A  LOOM. 

The  object  of  the  device  is  to  so  construct  this  mem- 
ber of  a  loom  so  as  to  obviate  the  disadvantages  which 
have  been  heretofore  experienced,  consequent  upon 
the  inability  of  the  sweep-stick  to  adapt  itself  to  the 
variety  of  movements  occasioned  by  the  transmission 
of  power  from  a  sweep-arm,  moving  in  one  plane 
about  a  center,  to  a  picking-stick  moving  in  a  plane 


at  right  angles  thereto  and  about  another  center,  as 
well  as  swinging  back  and  forth  in  the  same  general 
plane  as  the  sweep-arm. 

Fig.  i,  is  a  sectional  plan  view  of  a  portion  of  the 
frame  of  a  loom,  showing  the  sweep-arm,  picking- 
stick  and  sweep-stick,  in  one  of  the  positions  assumed 
by  these  parts  in  their  operations;  Fig.  2,  is  a  similar 
view,  showing  another  of  the  positions  assumed  by 
these  parts  and  illustrating  the  several  strains  to  which 
the  sweep-stick  is  subjected;  Fig.  3,  is  a  side  eleva- 
tion of  the  sweep-arm  and  the  sweep-stick;  and  Fig. 
4,  is  a  section  taken  at  the  line  x,  of  Fig.  3. 

The  difficulties  heretofore  experienced  in  the  oper- 
ations of  the  shuttles  of  a  loom  by  the  picking-stick, 
from  power  transmitted  thereto  from  the  sweep-arm, 
through  the  sweep-stick,  have  been  lost  motion, 
occasioned  by  the  necessity  of  having  to  connect  the 
sweep-stick  to  the  sweep-arm  and  picking-stick,  by 
very  loose  joints  formed  by  the  passage  of  bolts 
through  enlarged  holes  in  said  sweep-stick;  the  rapid- 
ity with  which  the  connecting  holes  in  the  sweep- 
stick  are  enlarged  by  the  constant  hammering  of  the 
bolts  therein,  occasioned  by  the  lost  motion;  the  in- 
accuracy with  which  the  shuttle  was  thrown  from 
side  to  side,  on  account  of  this  lost  motion;  the  vary- 
ing time  in  which  the  shuttle  was  thrown,  on  account 
of  the  wear  in  said  holes;  the  loss  of  time  occasioned 
by  the  stopping  of  the  loom  to  replace  the  worn-out 
sweep-stick;  and  the  cost  of  constantly  having  to  re- 
place said  sweep-stick. 

These  disadvantages  are  necessitated  by  having  to 
connect  too  loosely  the  sweep-stick  to  the  sweep-arm 
and  picking-stick  on  account  of  the  several  movements 
of  said  arm  and  picking-stick,  which  require  that  the 
sweep-stick  shall  adapt  itself  to  the  several  angles 
thus  occasioned.  All  these  disadvantages  are  over- 
come in  the  present  device  by  forming  the  sweep-stick 
in  two  sections  r,  and  2,  the  former  being  made  of 


hard  wood  and  the  latter  of  leather;  the  flexible  sec- 
tion to  be  composed  of  four  layers  of  leather,  so 
divided  at  one  end  that  two  layers  will  embrace  one 
end  of  the  wooden  section  upon  either  side  thereof. 

3,  in  the  illustrations  indicates  a  bolt,  with  suitable 
washers  and  nut,  whereby  the  layers  of  leather  are 
securely  clamped  to  the  wooden  section,  as  clearly 
shown  in  Fig.  4.  At  the  inner  end  of  the  flexible  sec- 
tion, the  layers  of  leather  are  brought  together  par- 
allel and  are  held  firmly  in  this  position  by  the  bolt 

4,  passing  therethrough,  and  the  washers  5,  and  6, 
and  hub  7,  drawn  together  by  the  nut  8. 

The  hub  7,  is  reduced  in  diameter  so  as  to  pass 
through  a  hole  in  the  upper  end  of  the  sweep-arm 
9,  whereby  the  sweep-stick  is  pivoted  to  said  arm,  as 
will  be  readily  understood  by  reference  to  Fig.  4. 
The  outer  end  of  the  sweep-stick  is  secured  by  a  collar 
and  lug  strap  to  the  picking-stick  10. 

The  operation  of  the  mechanism  is  thus: — During 
the  operation  of  a  loom,  the  lathe  or  member  in 
which  the  shuttles  are  guided,  has  a  to-and-fro  move- 
ment lengthwise  of  the  loom,  which  is  at  right  angles 
to  the  swinging  movement  of  the  picking-stick,  and 
as  the  picking-stick  is  connected  at  its  upper  end 
to  this  lathe,  it  has  a  swinging  movement  which  is 
utilized  to  throw  the  shuttle.  The  picking-stick  re- 
ceives this  latter  movement  from  the  sweep-arm, 
which  is  rocked  in  an  arc  by  the  shaft  11;  and  as  said 
sweep-arm  is  rigid  as  to  any  side  movement,  the 
sweep-stick  which  connects  the  arm  and  picking- 
stick,  is  compelled  to  assume  a  number  of  angles  rela- 
tive to  said  arm  and  picking-stick  so  that  if  the 
sweep-stick  be  bolted  to  the  arm  and  picking-stick 
without  lost  motion,  it  must  be  capable  of  giving 
in  several  directions,  in  order  that  it  may  assume 
these  angles,  and  this,  the  present  stick  does,  by  rea- 
son of  the  flexible  section  2. 

4 

.6 


When  the  swinging  movement  is  imparted  from  the 
sweep-arm  to  the  picking-stick  the  hub  7  is  free  to 
turn  in  its  bearing  in  the  upper  end  of  the  sweep-arm 


80 


81 


and  when  the  picking-stick  is  swung  laterally  by  the 
movement  of  the  lathe,  the  flexible  section  bends  side- 
wise  and  is  also  given  a  tortional  action,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  2,  by  reason  of  the  twisting  of  the  sweep-stick 
upon  its  axis,  in  following  the  compound  movement 
of  the  picking-stick. 

In  practice,  by  the  use  of  Kritler's  mechanism,  the 
number  of  picks  per  minute  of  a  loom  may  be  in- 
creased, since  as  there  is  no  lost  motion  between 
the  sweep-arm  and  picking-stick,  the  shuttle  is  thrown 
with  more  accuracy  and  less  loss  of  time  and  the 
wear  and  tear  upon  the  loom  is  decreased  as  less 
power  is  required  to  throw  the  shuttle  and  less  vibra- 
tion is  imparted  to  the  machine,  by  reason  of  the 
hammering  caused  by  the  lost  motion,  and  a  better 
result  is  had  in  the  fabric  woven.  By  actual  experi- 
ments, it  has  been  found  that  from  twenty-five  to 
thirty-five  per  cent,  more  fabric  can  be  woven  by  a 
loom  having  the  improvement  applied  thereto,  and 
the  cost  of  maintaining  said  loom  is  greatly  decreased, 
on  account  of  the  decrease  in  vibration  and  the  in- 
creased length  of  time  in  which  the  sweep-stick  has 
to  be  replaced.    (Geo.  W.  Kritler,  Philadelphia,  Pa.) 


the  bottom  shaft  makes  one  revolution 
(Orompton  and  Kuowlcs  Loom  ll'orfcs.) 


in  two  picks. 


THE  KNOWLES   PICKING  MOTION  FOR 
EQUAL  GEARED  LOOMS. 

The  same  is  shown  in  the  accompanying  illustra- 
tion and  of  which  a,  indicates 
the  picker  stick;  &,  the  sweep 
stick;  c,  the  lug  strap;  d,  the 
power  strap;  c,  the  picking  arm; 
f,  the  picking  shaft;  ff,  the  pick- 
ing cam;  h,  the  picking  ball;  i, 
the  picking  shoe,  and  k,  the  bot- 
tom shaft  of  loom. 

This  picking  motion  is  for  an 
equal  geared  loom  when  the  bot- 
tom shaft  runs  the  same  speed 
as  the  crank  shaft,  making  one 
revolution  every  pick. 

You  will  notice  that  the  picking 
shoe  has  a  long  and  easy  sweep 
and  a  large  picking  ball.    This  is 


THE  MASON  PICKING  MECHANISM. 

This  mechanism  has  for  its  object  to  improve  the 
picking  motions  of  looms,  providing  means  for  hold- 
ing the  picking  roll  or  "bowl,"  as  it  is  called,  the 


shell  inclosing  the  said  roll  or  bowl  being  in  one 
piece  and  firmly  or  rigidly  carried  by  the  picker 
rock-shaft.  Means  are  also  provided  whereby  the  stud 
on  which  the  roll  or  bowl  rotates  may 
be  lubricated. 

Fig.  i,  in  side  elevation,  represents 
part  of  a  loom  having  this  mechanism 
added;  Fig.  2  is  a  partial  elevation 
from  the  left  of  Fig.  1;  Fig.  3  is  an 
enlarged  detail  of  the  picker  rock- 
shaft.  Fig.  4,  shows  the  roll  detached. 
Fig.  5,  shows  the  stud  detached,  and 
Fig.  6  shows  a  modification. 

A,  indicates  the  loom  side  and  B, 
the  cam-shaft,  having  the  picking-cam 
B1  thereon.  The  picker  rock-shaft  C. 
mounted  in  bearings  C1,  has  an  at- 
tached arm  C2,  made  adjustable 
thereon  by  a  bolt  C3  in  a  slot  of  the 
said  arm.  The  arm  Ca,  is  connected 
by  a  strap  to  the  picker-stick.  The 
shell  a,  extended  from  the  picker 
rock-shaft,  is  made  in  one  piece,  and 
integral  with  the  rock-shaft;  however 
the  said  shell  and  its  hub  made  in  one 
piece  may  be  attached  firmly  and 
rigidly  by  a  set-screw  7  to  the  said 


on  account  of  the  picking  ball  traveling  so  fast  it  does 
not  require  as  sharp  a  picking  shoe  as  a  loom  where 


shaft,  as  in  Fig. 
6.  The  shell  has 
two  rigidly-con- 
nected bearings 
2,  3,  through 
which  is  extended 
the  stud  4,  on 
which  is  mounted 
and  rotates  the 
roll  or  bowl  b, 
which,  as  shown, 
is  extended  be- 
tween the  bear- 
ings 2  and  3  when 
one  end  of  the 


said 


Fig.*  F&5 

pin  (shown  as  the  i 


82 


provided  with  a  notch  5)  receives  a  locking  device 
6.  (Shown  as  a  pin.)  The  stud  4  is  shown  as  pro- 
vided with  an  oil-chamber,  as  at  8,  (see  Fig  5)  the 
'oil  entering  therein  through  the  hole  r,  to  lubricate 
the  stud  on  which  rotates  the  said  roll  b. 

Making  the  shell,  including  the  bearings  2  and  3 
and  the  shank  of  the  shell,  in  one  casting  adds  greatly 
to  the  strength,  stiffness,  and  durability  of  the  parts, 
i  Wason  Machine  Works,  Taunton,  Mass.) 


WERNER  S  PICKER  AND  RELIEF  MOTIONS. 

A.     PICKER  MOTION. 

The  same  is  shown  in  the  accompanying  illustra- 
tions of  which  Fig.  1,  is  a  front  view  of  an  end  por- 
tion of  a  loom,  showing  the  motion  applied  thereto. 
Fig.  2,  is  a  horizontal  sectional  view  of  the  adjust- 
able means  on  the  line  2-2,  of  Fig.  1.  Fig.  3,  is  a  top 
view  of  a  portion  of  the  shuttle-box  showing  the 
picker  and  its  engagement  with  the  stick. 

a,  represents  a  shuttle-box,  and  6,  the  picker-stick 
(steel)  pivoted  at  its  lower  end  in  a  slot  d';  of  the 
casting  d.  A  strap  e,  is  connected  to  the  lower  end 
of  the  picker-stick  and  provided  with  holes  e',  in 
which  one  end  of  a  coil  spring  f,  is  inserted.  A 
series    of  holes  are  provided  so  that  the  tension  of 


if 

the  spring  may  be  regulated  as  desired.  The  picker- 
stick  6,  and  its  casting  are  shown  in  illustration 
as  in  two  parts;  but  they  may  be  made  equally  as 
well  in  one. 

ft5,  is  a  picker  block  provided  with  the  slot  a',  in 
which  the  picker-stick  can  play  up  and  down,  «4,  is 
the  picker,  a",  is  a  latch  upon  the  block  engaging  a 
screw  a7,  or  other  part  upon  the  picker  to  join  the 
picker  and  block  together.  Said  picker  and  block 
are  mounted  to  slide  upon  a  rod  a',  and  in  a  groove 
thus  insuring  the  picker  moving  in  a  straight  line 
to  and  fro.  Since  the  picker-stick  is  pivoted  in  its 
movement  to  and  fro,  it  will  have  a  sliding  engage- 
ment with  the  block  «5,  by  means  of  the  slot  a". 


The  tendency  of  the  picker-stick  when  it  first  starts 
is  to  throw  the  picker  upward,  very  often  dislodging 
the  shuttle  by  causing  the  picker  to  make  a  lateral 
blow  upon  the  end  of  the  shuttle.  To  obviate  this 
and  to  insure  the  picker  giving  a  direct  blow  upon 
the  shuttle  in  the  direction  of  its  axis,  the  picker 
block  is  provided,  and  which  is  loosely  connected  with 
the  picker. 

Now,  when  the  picker-stick  moves  forward  and 
gives  its  blow  to  the  picker  olock,  this  blow  is  trans- 
mitted to  the  picker  in  a  direct  line,  and  the  picker 
and  block,  by  means  of  the  latch,  move  together. 

a10,  is  the  ordinary  buffer  for  the  picker  and  as,  for 
the  picker  block. 

ff,  represents  the  arm  of  the  rock  shaft.  is  the 
rock  rod  having  a  swivel  connection  at  one  end  with 
said  arm  by  means  of  the  lugs  9',  and  the  pin  S2, 
passing  through  said  lugs  and  the  reduced  end  of  the 
rock  arm. 

c,  is  an  adjustable  sleeve  mounted  upon  the  stick  b, 
and  having  its  arms  C  hollow  and  shaped  to  fit  the 
stick,  and  provided  with  set-screws  r,  for  securing  the 
sleeve  upon  the  stick  at  any  desired  point. 

c'\  is  a  rod  rigidly  secured  to  a  lug  C,  upon  the 
sleeve,  and  provided  at  its  opposite  end  with  screw 
threads  c*.  The  pivoted  end  of  the  stick  or  its  casting 
when  the  two  are  made  separate,  is  provided  with 
a  lug  V,  having  an  aperture  in  which  the  rod  c'  is 
arranged. 

c3,  are  nuts,  one  upon  either  side  of  the  part  62,  by 
means  of  which  the  rod  c2,  and  its  connected 
sleeve  c,  may  be  adjusted  up  and  down  on  the  stick 
and  retained  in  any  desired  position. 

m,  is  a  connecting  piece  provided  with  a  hollow 
head  wt4,  to  receive  the  screw  threaded  end  h\  of  the 
rock  rod  h.  ni',  is  a  set-screw  for  firmly  binding  the 
rod  in  said  head.  ni2J  is  a  loop  connected  to  the 
head  and  provided  at  its  end  with  the  ball  shaped 
projection  m3,  which  fits  in  a  correspondingly  shaped 
socket  in  the  sleeve.  A  strap  c5  is  arranged  to 
fit  over  said  ball  shaped  projection  and  hold  it  to  its 
seat,  the  strap  being  secured  to  the  sleeve  by  means 
of  rivets  or  screws  ciu. 

The  sleeve  is  adjusted  upon  the  stick  by  means  of 
the  nuts  c'\  and  the  set-screws  r,  to  any  desired  posi- 
tion, according  to  the  length  of  the  throw  it  is  de- 
sired for  the  stick  to  take,  the  length  of  the  rock  rod 
ht  being  also  suitably  adjusted. 

Upon  the  starting  of  the  machinery  the  picker-stick 
moves  back  and  forth,  driving  the  picker  and  sliding 
freely  up  and  down  in  the  slot  a9,  in  the  picker  block. 
At  the  same  time  the  picker-stick  by  means  of  the 
swivel  connection  is  permitted  to  have  a  lateral  play. 
The  ball-joint  by  means  of  which  the  loop  is  con- 
nected with  the  sleeve  gives  a  secured  and  almost 
frictionless  connection  between  the  rock  rod  and  the 
picker-stick. 

The  picker  block  and  adjustable  sleeve  may  be  made 
of  aluminium  if  desired. 

B.     RELIEF  MOTION. 

The  same  relates  to  a  clutch  mechanism  constitut- 
ing a  relief  motion,  for  use  in  connection  with  the 
picker-motion,  and  has  for  its  object,  among  other 
things,  to  provide  means  whereby  the  rocker  arm 
may  be  released  and  the  shipper  rod  operated  to  stop 
the  loom  should  any  unusual  strain  come  upon  the 
picker-stick. 

Fig.  1,  is  a  view  of  a  portion  of  the  loom,  showing 
the  relief  motion  associated-  therewith.  Fig.  2,  _  is  a 
front  view  of  the  clutch  mechanism.  Fig.  3,  is  an 
end  view  of  the  clutch  mechanism,  showing  the  parts 
in  operative  position.  Fig.  4,  is  a  similar  view,  show- 
ing the  parts  released  from  operative  connection  with 
the  rocker  shaft.    Fig.  5,  is  a  detail  view,  showing  the 


83 


picker  stick,  picker  block  and  picker  in  operative  con- 
nection. Fig.  6,  is  a  detail  view,  showing  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  picker  and  its  associated  parts  in  the 
shuttle-box.  Fig.  7,  is  a  detail  view  of  the  adjust- 
ing strap.  Fig.  8,  is  a  sectional  view  taken  on  the 
line  8-8  of  Fig.  1.  Fig.  9,  is  a  view  similar  to  Fig.  1, 
showing  the  connection  between  the  relief  motion 
and  the  shipper  rod,  the  connection  between  the  re- 
lief motion  and  the  picker-staff  being  omitted  for 
the  sake  of  clearness.    Fig.  10,  is  an  end  view  of  Fig.. 


I,  looking  from  the  inside  of  the  loom  frame.  Fig. 

II,  is  a  detail,  showing  the  connection  between  the 
relief  motion  and  the  shipper  rod. 

a,  represents  a  picker-stick  (steel)  pivoted  at  its 
lower  end  in  a  slot  m',  of  a  projecting  arm  m. 

«',  represents  a  picker  block  provided  with  a  slot 
<i2.  in  which  the  stick  plays.  &,  represents  the  picker 
provided  with  a  finger-piece  &',  having  a  finger  b", 
arranged  to  engage  a  projection  o3,  on  the  picker 
block. 

Both  the  picker  and  picker  block  are  constructed  and 
arranged  to  travel  at  one  end  on  a  rod  bl,  and  the 
other  end  in  a  slot  in  the  shuttle-box  (not  shown). 
By  this  arrangement  the  picker  can  travel  back  and 
forth  in  a  straight  line  uninfluenced  by  the  upward 
thrust  of  the  picker-stick,  which  plays  up  and  down 
in  the  slot  a2. 

0,  is  a  sleeve  having  two  arms  c5,  engaging  the 
picker-stick.  (?,  is  an  adjustable  connector  secured  to 
the  lower  arm  of  said  sleeve  at  one  end  and  at  its 
other  end  secured  to  a  lug  on  the  casting  c3,  by  means 
of  a  screw  C.  This  connector  is  provided  with  a 
series  of  holes  c*,  by  means  of  which  the  sleeve  may 
be  adjusted  to  any  desired  position  on  the  stick. 

0,  is  the  rocker  rod  provided  at  one  end  with  a 
loop  engaging  a  hook  t1,  on  the  end  of  the  rocker 
arm  r. 

At  its  other  end  said  rocker  rod  is  provided  with 
screw-threads  for  engagement  with  a  hollow  head 
d,  of  a  loop  d*,  the  rod  being  retained  in  said  head 
by  means  of  a  set-screw  d2.  The  loop  is  provided 
upon  its  interior  with  horizontally  arranged  flanges 
d' ,  on  both  upper  and  lower  edges,  e,  is  a  ball  cast 
on  said  sleeve  arranged  to  play  in  the  said  loop  to 
form  a  ball-and-socket  bearing,  f,  are  pins  inserted 
in  the  loop  to  prevent  the  ball  from  leaving  the  flanges. 
The  ball  is  provided  with  a  slot  e',  in  which  the  picker- 
stick  rests. 


b' ,  is  the  rocker  shaft.  On  said  shaft  is  mounted 
loosely  the  rocker-arm  r  and  a  coupler  fast  upon 
said  shaft,  said  rocker-arm  and  coupler  being  retained 
in  place  by  collars  ®,  rigidly  secured  to  said  rocker 
shaft  by  set-crews  «?.  The  rocker  shaft  is  carried 
by  the  arms  t. 

>'",  is  a  dog  pivoted  on  the  rocker  arm  and  arranged 
for  detachable  engagement  with  the  coupler  t*.  Said 
dog  is  provided  with  a  slot  at  its  free  end  in  which 
the  arc-shaped  portion  f  of  the  coupler  can  play, 
thus  keeping  the  dog  always  in  alignment  with  the 
coupler.  The  coupler  is  provided  with  a  radical  por- 
tion t\  with  which  the  dog  engages. 

r°,  is  a  spring  connected  at  one  end  with  the  free 
end  of  the  dog  and  at  the  other  end  with  a  lug  »"\ 
projecting  from  the  hub  of  the  rocker  arm.  f8,  is  a 
spring  connected  at  one  end  with  an  arm  r\  project- 
ing from  the  lug  and  at  its  other  end  with  a  lug  J'. 
on  one  of  the  collars  x.  The  spring  »*",  serves  to  re- 
turn the  dog  to  its  engagement  with  the  coupler,  and 
the  spring  t*,  serves  to  draw  the  rocker  arm  forward 
so  that  its  dog  can  engage  with  said  coupler. 

The  parts  being  constructed  and  arranged  as  shown 
and  described,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  picker-stick 
plays  up  and  down  in  the  slot  in  the  picker  block, 
driving  the  picker  to  and  fro  in  a  straight  line.  The 
sleeve  c,  enables  the  loom  fixer  to  adjust  the  throw 
of  the  picker,  and  at  the  same  time  to  so  connect  the 
rocker  arm  with  the  rocker  rod  and  with  said  sleeve 
as  to  allow  a  lateral  play  of  the  picker-stick. 

The  coupler  and  its  associated  parts  being  in  the 
position  shown  in  Fig.  3,  with  the  coupler  in  engage- 
ment with  the  dog,  the  picker-stick  will  be  moved 
back  and  forth  as  the  rocker  arm  moves.  Now, 
should  any  unusual  strain  be  brought  upon  the  picker- 
stick,  the  dog  and  coupler  are  so  arranged  that  un- 
der such  circumstances  the  free  end  of  the  dog  will 
be  released  from  the  coupler,  thus  releasing  the 
rocker  arm  and  leaving  the  coupler,  free  to  rock  with 
the  shaft. 

Referring  now  to  Figs.  9,  10,  11,  in  which  the  relief 
motion  is  shown  connected  to  the  shipper  rod  in 
order  to  stop  the  loom  should  the  picker  meet  with 
any  obstruction,  the  connection  between  the  relief 
motion  and  the  picker-stick  being  omitted  in  these 
views  for  the  sake  of  clearness,  b12  represents  the 
usual  shipper  rod  connected  and  operated  by  a  lever 


b",  mounted  upon  the  shaft  b2".  bli,  represents  an  arm 
fast  upon  said  shaft  to  which  a  lever  &15  is  pivoted, 
this  lever  at  its  lower  end  being  pivoted  to  the  free 
end  of  a  lever  616,  pivoted  at  dw,  to  a  casting  dn, 
secured  to  the  loom  frame  b10.    The  free  end  of  this 


84 


lever  is  provided  with  a  saddle  d",  constructed  and 
arranged  to  straddle  and  ride  upon  the  top  of  the 

dog  r\ 

From  the  foregoing,  it  will  be  seen  that  as  long  as 
the  picker  meets  with  no  obstruction,  the  relief 
mechanism  will  move  back  and  forth  with  the  parts 
in  normal  position  the  saddle  d11  and  its  lever  rest- 
ing upon  the  dog  »"2,  which  plays  back  and  forth  in 
said  saddle  without  affecting  the  lever  bia.  Should, 
however,  the  picker  meet  with  any  obstruction,  as 
has  already  been  described,  the  dog  r2  will  be  thrown 
upward,  releasing  the  rocker  arm,  and  leaving  the 
coupler  free  to  rock  with  the  shaft,  as  heretofore 
described.  This  upward  movement  of  the  dog  r~, 
will  give  an  upward  thrust  to  the  lever  615,  turning 
shaft  B20,  and  by  the  connections  operating  the 
shipper  rod  to  stop  the  loom. 

In  Fig.  io,  c'-"  represents  the  lay,  c21  the  lay  sword, 
C"  the  hand  rail,  and  c23  the  reed,  and  which  are 
shown  merely  to  clearly  exhibit  the  motion  in  rela- 
tion to  the  other  parts  of  the  loom,  ft11,  represents 
one  of  the  rods  connecting  the  parts  of  the  frame. 
(Louis  C.  Werner,  Broadbrook,  Conn.) 


PAIGE'S  PICKER  MECHANISM. 

The  object  of  this  motion  is  to  prolong  the  life  of 
the  picker  and  picker-stick  as  well  as  to  throw  the 
shuttle  straight.  Fig.  i,  is  a  front  elevation;  Fig.  2, 
is  a  vertical  sectional  elevation,  and  Fig.  3,  an  en- 
larged detail  view  of  the  mechanism. 


6  c 


C  C 


A,  is  the  picker-staff  or  stick.  Bar  B,  is  bolted  to 
the  picker-stick  at  a,  a,  the  lower  end  of  the  bar  be- 
ing enlarged,  as  at  b,  sufficiently  to  receive  and  form 
a  bearing  for  a  pin  c,  which  connects  said  picker-stick 
with  one  end  of  a  link  C,  the  other  end  of  said  link- 
being  pivoted  at  c',  to  a  bifurcated  bracket  or  sup- 
port D,  adapted  to  be  rigidly  attached  to  a  loom. 

As  shown,  the  stick  is  supported  directly  on  the 
link  and  immediately  on  the  bracket  or  support  D. 
The  said  bifurcated  support  comprises  short  and 
long  arms,  respectively,  3,  d' ,  the  short  arm  d,  being 
provided  with  a  boss  d2,  opposite  to  which  on  the  bar 
B  of  the  picker-stick  is  a  similar  projection  or  boss 
V ,  each  boss  or  projection  being  designed  to  support 
the  ends  of  a  helical  spring  X,  for  insuring  the  quick 
return  of  the  picker-stick  to  its  normal  position. 

The  long  arm  d't  of  the  bifurcated  support  carries 
the  free  ends  of  a  yoke  E,  which  is  provided  with  a 
journal  c,  adapted  to  fit  a  bearing  formed  in  the 
upper  end  of  the  bar  B,  and  thus  support  a  picker- 
stick.  This  bearing  in  the  upper  part  of  the  bar 
B,  is  open  or  separable,  one  portion  being  formed 


in  said  bar,  as  at  b\  and  the  other  portion  being 
formed  upon  a  plate  B',  as  at  &3,  said  plate  being 
formed  quite  long,  its  journal-bearing  being  located 
at  a  point  midway  from  its  ends  so  that  it  cannot 
even  produce  an  abrasion  upon  the  picker-stick 
against  which  it  rests  on  a  plane  with  the  bar  b' 
said  plate  B',  being  let  into  the  bar  B,  as  shown  at 
0 ,  for  this  purpose. 

The  plate  B',  is  reversible,  end  for  end,  and  is  not 
fastened  in  any  way  to  either  the  picker-stick  or  the 
bar  B,  the  flanges  or  shoulders  C,  of  the  yoke  E,  at 
each  side  of  its  journal  e,  answering  the  purpose  of 
holding  said  plate  in  position,  and  thus  providing  just 
enough  elasticity  in  the  connection  of  the  yoke  E, 
with  the  picker-stick  to  avoid  unnecessary  friction. 

The  present  picking  mechanism  prevents  the  stick 
from  being  worn  by  the  bearing,  and  the  plate  B', 
being  made  easily  reversible  can  be  frequently  re- 
versed to  insure  uniformity  of  wear,  which,  however, 
will  be  comparatively  small. 

To  avoid  weakening  the  stick  at  this  point  and  to 
provide  for  easily  reversing  plate  B',  the  bar  B  is 
recessed  at  b\  to  receive  between  itself  and  the  stick 
the  plate  B'  and  to  aid  in  holding  the  plate  in  its 
proper  situation.  Said  plate  is  held  laterally  by  the 
shoulders  e'  of  the  swinging  yoke  E,  and  by  these 
means  the  journal-bearing  of  the  yoke  is  provided 
and  the  stick  left  entire  adjacent  thereto. 

The  metal  at  each  side  of  the  journal  e,  of  the  yoke 
E,  is  curved,  as  will  be  seen  at  e2,  below  the  said 
journal,  and  this  is  done  to  allow  more  room  for 
the  picker-strap,  permitting  it  to  drop  as  low  as 
may  be  required.  (J.  W.  Center  and  8.'  C.  Kennard, 
Manchester,  N.  H.) 


PERHAM'S  PICKER- OPERATING 
MECHANISM. 

Fig  1,  is  an  end  view  of  sufficient  of  a  loom  to  ex- 
plain the  device.  Fig.  2,  is  a  front  view  of  the  same, 
a  part  of  the  crank-shaft,  breast-beam,  and  lay  being 
shown  as  broken  away,  so  as  to  better  illustrate  the 
picking  mechanism. 

A,  designates  the  loom-frame.  B,  is  the  crank- 
shaft, by  which  the  lay  C  is  operated.  D,  is  the 
breast-beam,  and  E  are  the  picker-sticks.  Fastened 
upon  the  crank-shaft  by  means  of  a  set-screw,  is  a 
bracket  a,  with  two  arms  6,  b.  Journaled  in  and  ex- 
tending between  the  arms  b,  ft,  there  is  a  short  shaft 
or  pin  c,  supporting  a  wiper  d,  which  is  adapted  to 
be  moved  from  side  to  side  thereon  between  the  said 
arms,  e,  is  a  lever  fulcrumed  at  f,  on  the  bracket  <i, 
and  having  one  end  loosely  engaged  with  a  collar  or 
flange  0,  connected  with  the  hub  of  the  wiper  d,  so 
that  in  moving  the  lever  on  its  fulcrum  it  may  move 
the  wiper  from  side  to  side  on  its  pin  or  shaft.  The 


other  end  of  the  said  lever  is  provided  with  a  traveler, 
pivoted  to  the  lever  and  adapted  to  move  in  a  double 
cam-groove  h,  formed  in  the  box. 


85 


/,  are  rock  rods  or  pins  journaled  in  brackets  fc, 
connected  with  the  loom-frame,  which  rods  or  pins 
have  upwardly-projected  crank-arms  I,  secured  to 
their  outer  ends,  the  ends  of  which  arms  extended 
into  the  path  of  the  wiper  d,  when  it  is  shifted  to 
the  extremes  of  its  allowed  movement  longitudinally 
on  its  supporting  shaft  or  pin.  To  the  other  ends  of 
the  rods  f,  ;',  are  secured  the  upper  ends  of  arms  m, 
m,  the  lower  ends  of  which  are  connected  with  straps, 
or  it  may  be  rods  or  cords  w,  with  the  picker-sticks  E. 

It  will  now  be  seen,  that  as  the  crank-shaft  B,  is 
rotated,  the  bracket  0  will  be  rotated,  revolving  the 
wiper  d  around  the  shaft,  and  as  the  traveler  crosses 
from  one  cam-groove  to  another,  as  it  were,  the 
lever  e  will  be  moved  upon  its  fulcrum,  so  as  to 
shift  the  wiper  d,  from  side  to  side  on  its  supporting- 
pin,  and  cause  it  to  act  first  upon  the  end  of  one  of 
the  crank-arms      and  then  upon  the  other,  actuating 


one  of  the  arms  and  the  picker-stick  operatively 
connected  therewith,  so  as  to  pick  the  shuttle  through 
the  shed. 

By  means  of  this  mechanism  it  will  be  possible  in 
the  construction  of  a  loom  to  entirely  dispense  with 
the  cam-shaft  for  operating  the  picker-staves  or  their 
equivalents — thus  greatly  simplifying  the  construction 
and  cost  of  manufacture  of  the  loom,  giving  more 
room  for  the  warp-beam  and  cloth-roll,  and  lessening 
the  liability  of  breakage  of  parts.  Besides  this,  the 
loom  is  made  much  easier  of  operation,  is  more 
quickly  and  easily  stopped,  and  is  relieved  of  much 
of  the  shock  and  jar  that  is  occasioned  by  the  abrupt 
cams  of  the  picker  motion  on  the  cam-shaft.  The 
wiper  makes  double  the  number  of  revolutions  of  the 
cams  on  the  cam-shaft,  and  hence,  it  is  not  necessary 
to  make  the  said  wiper  so  abrupt  or  blunt,  or  to  act 
with  the  same  suddenness,  so  as  to  create  the  same 
shock  or  jar.    (Charles  Foster  Perham,  Lowell,  Mass.) 


BARSELOTJ'S  ROCKER  AND  SHOE  .CONNEC- 
TION FOR  PICKER-STICKS. 

Fig.  i,  is  an  end  view  of  a  part  of  a  loom-frame, 
showing  the  end  of  the  lay,  the  picker-stick,  the 
main  driving-shaft,  and  its  cam  operating  the  shoe, 
and  a  side  view  of  the  connection  made  between  the 
shoe  and  rocker,  to  which  the  picker-stick  attaches. 
Fig.  2,  is  a  view  in  elevation  of  a  part  of  a  loom- 
frame,  showing  the  lay,  the  picker-stick,  and  the 
rocker,  and  a  front  view  of  the  connection  made  be- 
tween the  rocker  and  shoe.  Fig.  3,  is  a  perspective 
of  the  mechanism  for  connecting  the  shoe  and  the 
rocker. 

F,  designates  that  part  of  the  loom-frame  with  which 
the  improvement  connects.  B,  designates  the  main 
driving-shaft,  and  C,  a  cam  located  on  said  shaft 
where  projecting  beyond  the  frame.  S,  designates  the 
shoe,  which  is  at  its  heel  end,  at  P~,  pivoted  to  the 


frame.  L,  designates  the  lay.  P,  the  picker-stick,  and 
R,  the  rocker,  with  which  the  picker-stick  connects. 
I,  designates  a  standard  upwardly  projected  from  the 


shoe,  and  »*',  a  friction-roller  arranged  in  the  top  of 
of  the  standard  for  engagement  with  the  cam  which 
operates  the  shoe. 

A',  designates  a  plate  which  at  its  upper  end  a", 
pivotally  connects  with  that  end  of  the  rocker  which 
is  opposite  to  that  which  is  hinged  to  the  frame  at  't, 
and  this  plate  A',  on  its  outer  face  as,  is  provided 
with  a  V-shaped  rib  V,  projecting  therefrom  at  right 
angles  to  the  side  edges  of  the  plate.  Aa,  designates 
another  plate  provided  with  V-form  recesses  V\ 
arranged  side  by  side  on  the  inner  face  of  the  plate, 
in  which  they  are  formed  at  right  angles  to  the  side 
edges  of  the  plate,  and  each  of  these  recesses  is 
adapted  to  receive  the  ribbed  projection  V,  on  the 
outer  face  of  the  underlapping  plate  A'. 

a*,  designates  a  slot  made  in  the  exterior  plate  A', 
and  T,  designates  a  set-screw  which  is  passed  through 
the  slot  a*  to  be  threaded  into  the  plate  A'  and  at 
its  outer  end  this  set-screw  is  provided  with  a  collar 


t,  by  which  when  the  set-screw  is  screwed  inwardly 
this  collar  will  straddle  the  slot  so  as  to  hold  the 
two  plates  A',  and  As,  with  the  rib  V,  in  such  one 
of  the  recesses  V2,  of  the  plate  A",  as  is  desirable  to 


86 


regulate  the  distance  at  which  the  shoe  shall  pull 
down  the  rocker  and  the  measure  of  throw  given  to 
the  picker-stick.  The  lower  end  of  this  plate  A2,  is 
provided  with  a  hook  H,  which  latter  is  pivoted  to 
the  plate  A2,  at  P*,  and  this  hook  is  arranged  to  hook 
into  the  toe  end  of  the  shoe  S,  in  the  eye  E,  formed 
therein. 

As  thus  made,  the  connection  made  between  the  shoe 
and  the  rocker,  to  which  the  picker-stick  is  attached, 
is  adjustable  as  to  length,  is  quite  free  from  jar,  and 
is  much  more  durable  than  the  ordinary  leather  loop 
used. 

The  operation  of  the  mechanism  thus  described  is 
as  follows: — The  driving-shaft  B,  when  revolving, 
causes  its  cam  C,  to  engage  with  the  roller  >'2,  so  as 
to  force  downwardly  the  shoe  S,  on  its  hinged  con- 
nection, thus  pulling  down  the  rocker  and  operating 
the  picker-stick  to  throw  the  shuttle,  with  the  picker- 
stick  drawn  back  to  its  initial  position  after  the  cam 
has  passed  from  off  the  roller  »"2,  by  the  return-spring 
M.  (-4.  Barselou,  assignor  of  one-half  to  L.  N.  March, 
Cohoes,  N.  Y.)  , 


DOYLE'S  PICKER-CHECK. 

Heretofore,  yielding  abutments  supported  by  springs 
have  been  used  to  receive  the  blow  of  the  picker  as 
it  is  driven  back  or  outward  by  the  point  of  the 
shuttle  as  the  latter  enters  its  appropriate  shuttle-box. 
In  this  class  of  devices  the  reaction  of  the  spring 
used  to  sustain  the  yielding  abutment  has  always 
heretofore  caused  the  shuttles  to  rebound,  more  or 
less,  which  has  interfered  greatly  with  the  introduc- 
tion and  use  of  devices  of  this  class. 

In  the  present  picker-check,  we  find  introduced,  be- 
tween the  yielding  abutment  which  receives  the  im- 
pact of  the  picker  and  the  point  of  application  of  the 
sustaining-spring  therefor,   means   for   creating  fric- 


tional  resistance,  which  dulls  or  deadens  the  recoil 
of  the  sustaining-spring,  and  although  this  spring 
still  has  considerable  strength,  its  action  is  slowed  or 
dampened,  so  that  it  is  not  so  quick  in  its  recoil  as  to 
cause  the  shuttle  to  rebound.  This  feature  may  be 
accomplished  in  a  variety  of  mechanical  forms,  of 
which  one  is  shown  in  the  accompanying  illustrations. 

Fig.  A,  is  a  side  view  of  the  mechanism,  shown 
therein  by  solid  lines,  and  showing  also  the  position, 
by  dotted  lines,  of  the  adjacent  portions  of  the  loom 
to  which  the  same  is  designed  to  be  attached.  Fig.  B, 
is  an  isometric  view  of  the  new  device,  the  view  also 
indicating  by  dotted  lines  the  relation  thereto  of  the 


picker  and  the  rod  upon  which  it  slides.  Fig.  C,  is  a 
view  in  end  elevation,  partly  in  section,  showing  some 
of  the  parts  of  the  improvement. 

A,  is  a  plate  of  suitable  size  and  shape  and  in- 
tended to  be  applied  and  secured  to  a  portion  of  the 
frame-work  of  the  lathe  of  a  loom  at  the  outer  end 
of  the  shuttle-box  thereof. 

The  device  illustrated  is  intended  particularly  for 
use  in  looms  having  shifting  shuttle-boxes,  but  if  de- 
sired, it  may  be  applied  to  looms  in  which  the  boxes 
do  not  move  or  shift. 

The  base-plate  A,  is  secured  in  suitable  manner  to 
the  part  by  which  the  check  is  to  be  carried,  as,  for 
instance,  by  a  bolt  passing  through  a  hole  a,  in  the 
base-plate,  said  hole  being  shown  in  Fig.  i. 

To  the  base-plate  A,  are  secured  studs  or  posts  B, 
and  C,  and  at  a  short  distance  laterally  from  the  stud 
C  a  short  shaft  D  is  mounted  on  said  plate.  One 
end  of  the  shaft  D,  passes  through  a  hole  in  the  plate 
A,  and  is  threaded.  A  nut  d,  being  turned  upon  the 
threaded  end  of  D  tightly  against  the  plate  A,  secures 
said  shaft  D  in  position.  Upon  this  shaft  is  fixed  a 
sleeve  or  barrel  E,  to  which  is  applied  a  spring  F,  the 
opposite  ends  of  said  spring  being  secured  to  the 
sleeve  or  barrel  near  the  ends  of  the  latter,  and  the 
middle  portion  of  the  spring  first  being  coiled  around 
the  sleeve  or  barrel  to  form  oppositely-directed  spi- 
rals, is  then  bent  to  form  a  hook 

A  belt  of  flexible  material — as,  for  instance,  leather 
—is  shown  at  9  g'  9*  9'  9*  9°.  This  belt  is  drawn 
around  the  studs  B  and  C  to  form  a  loop,  as  is  indi- 
cated by  the  drawings  at  9  9'  9~  9*.  The  slack  portion 
of  this  loop  toward  the  rear  is  attached  by  a  connect- 
ing-link g-  g"  gJ  to  the  hooked  end  h  of  the  spring  F. 
Upon  the  front  face  of  the  belt  9  9'  92  9*  a  protective 
shield  or  reinforcement  9'"  is  shown  at  that  point, 
which  is  likely  to  be  abraided  by  the  impact  of  the 
picker. 

The  operation  is  as  follows:  When  the  shuttle  is 
driven  rapidly  into  its  box,  its  point  engages  with 
the  picker,  and  the  latter  is  driven  backward  or  out- 
ward against  the  front  face  of  the  loop  g  g'  g2  g*  at  the 
point  indicated  by  the  reinforce  or  shield  g*.  This  is 
the  point  which  constitutes  the  yielding  abutment  for 
the  picker.  This  abutment  at  g5  is  driven  backward 
or  outward,  and  in  this  operation  certain  portions  of 
the  loop,  which  are  shown  as  lying  between  the  stud 
C  and  the  point  g'  (at  </4)  are  made  to  slide  over  the 
surface  of  the  stud  C  from  the  rear  to  the  front,  and 
if  the  blow  of  the  picker  is  sufficiently  strong,  this 
will  continue  until  the  points  of  the  loop  at  g'  and  9* 
are  in  contact,  when  the  loop  being  all  taken  up,  a 
dead-stop  will  be  obtained.  During  this  movement 
the  link  g~  g"  g3  will  have  drawn  the  spiral  spring 
out  around  the  barrel  E,  and  this  spring  being  of 
proper  strength  will  finally  check  the  rearward  move- 
ment of  the  picker,  after  which  its  resiliency  will  re- 
store the  parts  to  their  normal  position.  (Indicated 
in  the  drawings.)  In  this  return  movement  of  the 
spring  F.  portions  of  the  loop  g  g'  <72  g1  are  again 
drawn  over  the  surface  of  the  stud  C  with  consider- 
able friction,  which  dulls  or  deadens  the,  recoil  of  the 
spring,  and  the  parts  return  less  rapidly  to  their 
normal  position  than  in  devices  in  which  no  resist- 
ance is  interposed  between  the  yielding  abutment  and 
the  sustaining  spring.  The  loop  will  be  found  to 
slide  very  little,  if  any,  around  the  stud  B.  (Jatncs 
T.  Doyle,  Skaneateles  Falls,  Xcir  York.) 


S  ART  WELL'S  PICKER-STICK  CHECK. 

This  mechanism  is  adapted  for  use  in  that  class 
of  looms  in  which  the  shuttle  that  carries  the  filling 
is  thrown  back  and  forth  in  the  lathe  by  picker- 
sticks,  located  one  at  each  end  of  said  lathe;  the 


87 


object  being  to  provide  a  yielding  stop  to  check  the 
picker-stick  in  its  outward  movement  and  to  cushion 
the  said  stick  and  thus  relieve  the  shock  at  the 
sudden  stopping  of  the  shuttle  as  it  shoots  through 
the  shed  and  comes  in  contact  with  said  stick;  and 
a  further  object  of  the  mechanism  is  to  provide  a 
check  which  will  be  exceedingly  simple,  durable,  and 
economic,  and  which  will  not  exert  a  downward  thrusl 
on  the  picker-stick,  but  a  tension  in  a  horizontal 
direction. 

Fig.  i,  is  a  side  elevation  of  a  portion  of  the  lathe 
of  a  loom,  illustrating  the  picker-stick  in  side  eleva- 
tion and  likewise  the  check.  Fig.  2,  is  a  vertical 
section  taken  on  the  line  2,  2,  of  Fig.  1;  and  Fig.  3, 
is  a  horizontal  section  taken  practically  on  the  line  3, 
3,  of  Fig.  1. 

A,  represents  a  portion  of  the  loom-frame;  A',  the 
lathe,  and  B,  the  picker-stick,  arranged  to  throw  the 
shuttle.  At  each  side  of  the  lathe  a  plate  10,  is 
secured,  and  each  of  said  plates  is  provided  with  a 
lug  11.  provided  with  a  recess  12.  while  adjacent  to 


the  lug  11,  an  offset  13  is  secured  to  the  plate,  as  is 
best  shown  in  Fig.  1,  and  the  face  of  the  offset  sub- 
stantially opposed  to  the  lug  11,  is  of  a  yielding  or 
elastic  material,  such  as  leather  or  rubber,  or  the 
equivalent  thereof. 

A  substantially  U-shaped  arm  14,  has  its  members 
pivoted  in  the  upper  portion  of  the  recesses  12,  of 
the  said  lugs  11,  the  bottom  or  bow  portion  of  the 
arms  being  a  predetermined  distance  below  the  bot- 
tom portion  of  the  lathe,  and  upon  the  lower  or  bow 
portions  of  the  arms  14,  a  stop-plate  or  shield  15  is 
secured,  adapted  to  be  engaged  by  the  picker-stick 
B,  in  its  outward  movement,  and  the  face  of  the  stop- 
plate  or  shield  which  is  engaged  by  the  picker-stick 
B,  is  made  cylindrical  or  convexed,  as  best  shown  in 
the  said  Fig.  1. 

A  spring  16,  is  located  at  each  side  of  the  lathe  A', 
and  one  end  of  each  spring  is  secured  in  one  of  the 
lugs  ir,  of  the  base-plate  10,  the  spring  being  pro- 
vided with  one  or  more  coils  above  the  top  of  the  lug 
with  which  it  is  connected,  and  the  said  springs  are 
then  carried  downward  to  an  engagement  with  the 


side  members  of  the  U-arm  14,  the  tendency  of  the 
spring  being  to  carry  the  stop-plate  15,  in  an  inward 
direction,  at  which  time  the  arm  14,  will  have  a 
downward  and  inward  inclination. 

In  the  operation  of  this  device,  when  the  shuttle 
strikes  the  picker-stick,  the  picker-stick  is  forced  out- 
ward or  rearward,  engaging  with  the  stop-plate  15, 
and  as  this  plate  has  a  convexed  surface  it  has  a 
rocking  connection  with  the  picker-stick,  and,  there- 
fore, the  plate  will  exert  a  lateral  tension  upon  the 
picker-stick  (and  in  turn  impart  it  to  the  picker  and 
shuttle)  at  all  times  and  not  the  downward  tension 
which  is  found  in  most  other  checks  for  looms,  and 
under  this  construction  the  picker-stick  will  have  less 
wear  than  heretofore. 

Furthermore,  when  the  picker-stick  is  carried  out- 
ward the  springs  16,  will  be  placed  under  tension,  and 
as  these  springs  are  simply  engaged  with  the  pivoted 
U-arm  14,  their  ends  are  free  to  slide  on  the  members 
of  the  arm  14,  and  they  are  not  weakened  to  any 
appreciable  extent  when  acted  upon  by  the  stick,  since 
none  but  torsional  strain  will  come  upon  the  springs; 
and  when  the  springs  act  to  return  the  picker-stick 
in  an  inward  direction,  the  moment  that  the  U  arm 
14  strikes  the  check-projections  13,  on  the  base-plate 
10,  the  springs  will  be  free  to  vibrate  independently 
of  the  arm  14,  and,  therefore,  will  come  to  rest  more 
rapidly  than  if  they  were  secured  to  the  arm  to 
vibrate  therewith.  Therefore,  it  is  obvious  that  even 
in  both  movements  of  the  picker-stick  the  springs 
16,  will  not  be  in  any  manner  injured,  while  they 
will  act  as  effectively  as  though  the  springs  were 
connected  directly  with  the  stop-plate  15.  (WUliinii 
E.  Sarfiwell,  Tro;/,  17.) 


MOONEY'S  PICKER  CHECK-STRAP. 

By  it  the  weaver  is  enabled  to  see  at  a  glance 
whether  the  shuttle  is  running  properly  or  not,  and 
the  adjustment  and  correction  are  made  with  great 
ease. 

Fig.  1,  in  front  elevation  and  centrally  broken  out, 
represents  the  lay  of  a  loom  with  the  improvement 
applied  thereto.  Fig.  2,  is  a  plan  view  thereof,  also 
centrally  broken  out. 

A,  represents  the  lay  which  is  slotted  at  ".  for  the 
picker-sticks  P.  B,  B'.  are  the  shuttle-box  binders. 
A  check-strap  C,  is  secured  at  its  ends  to  the  lay,  back 
of  the  shuttle-boxes,  passing  around  outside  of  the 
picker-sticks  and  along  the  front  of  the  lay  through 
guide-loops  20. 

At  the  under  side  of  the  lay  and  near  its  center,  is 
secured  a  stand  Bx,  having  ears  5,  through  which  and 
into  the  lay  suitable  screws  7  pass,  a  third  outwardly- 
extended  ear      projecting  in  front  of  the  lay. 

The  ear  is  notched  or  slotted  at  and  the  stand 
Bx  is  provided  with  upturned  guides  V,  rounded  at 
their  inner  sides  and  adapted  to  rest  against  the  front 
of  the  lay. 

A  headed  stud  V\  having  a  wooden  roll  &x  thereon 
is  threaded  at  its  lower  end  and  extended  through 
the  slot  or  notch  &'  and  held  securely  in  place  by  a 
check-nut  ».  a  washer  to  being  interposed  between 
the  nut  and  under  side  of  the  ear  6. 

The  roll  ox  is  held  in  parallelism  with  the  guides 
0J  of  the  stand  Bx  and  with  its  inner  periphery  set 
more  or  less  within  the  plane  of  said  ends,  according 
to  the  adjustment  of  the  stud  in  the  ear  6. 

The  check-strap  passess  over  the  guides  6*  and  un- 
der the  roll,  and  the  tension  on  said  stran  will  be 
greater  or  less,  according  to  the  position  of  the  roll 
nearer  to  or  farther  from  the  bottom  of  the  notch 
or  slot  0',  varying  the  bend  in  the  strap  as  it  passes 
the  roll  and  thus  regulating  the  friction. 

As  the  picker-sticks  are  oscillated  within  the  looped 


88 


ends  of  the  strap,  the  latter  moves  longitudinally  back 
and  forth,  regulated  by  the  tension  device. 

A  suitable  lug  or  stop  cx    (a  block  of  leather)  is 


fastened  to  the  outer  face  of  the  strap  C,  between 
one  of  the  guides  1>~,  which  also  forms  a  stop,  and 
a  second  upturned  stud  or  stop  &5  on  the  stand  Bx, 
the  opposite  reciprocations  of  the  said  strap  bring- 
ing the  lug  cx  into  engagement  with  one  or  other 
of  said  stops,  the  further  movement  of  the  looped 
strap  being  stopped  and  the  picker-stick  arrested.  A 
short  upturned  stud  &°  in  front  of  the  stop  serves 
to  guide  the  strap  between  them. 

The  tension-roll  ?JX  is  so  adjusted  that  when  the 
shuttle  engages  the  picker-stick  at  the  right-hand. 
Figs  I  and  2,  the  momentum  will  be  checked  gradu- 
ally, and  when  the  lug  cx  engages  the  stop  &5  further 
movement  of  the  strap  and  stick  is  checked  just  be- 
fore the  stick  engages  the  outer  end  of  its  slot .  «, 
The  stop  b2  will  cooperate  with  the  lug  cx  on  the 
opposite  throw  of  the  shuttle  and  the  latter  will  be 
brought  to  a  stop  gradually  in  the  shuttle-box,  elim- 
inating the  chance  of  rebound. 

If  the  shuttle  is  not  running 
properly,  the  lug  cx  WM  not  bring 
up  against  the  stops  b2  b5,  and  the 
attendant,  by  noting  the  move- 
ment of  the  lug,  can  thus  know 
whether  the  shuttle  is  operating 
properly. 

This  check-strap  is  adapted  to 
looms  wherein  the  lay  or  the 
shuttle-stroke  varies  in  length,  it 
being  obvious  that  the  shorter  the 
stroke  of  the  shuttle  the  _  greater 
the  force  with  which  it  will  enter 
the  shuttle-box,  the  blow  of  the 
picker-stick  being  constant,  and 
for  a  longer  stroke  the  force  of 
the  shuttle  at  the  end  of  its  stroke 
will  be  diminished. 

When  the  stroke  is  long,  the 
tension  on  the  strap  is  decreased 
by  moving  the  roll  &x  outward, 
but  when  the  stroke  is  short  the 
roll  is  moved  inward,  thus  in- 
creasing the  friction  on  the  check- 
strap  and  acting  to  take  up  the 
greater  force  of  impact  of  the 
shuttle  upon  the  picker-sticks. 

By  the  use  of  this  check-strap  the  shuttle-box  bind- 
ers may  be  adjusted  to  permit  the  shuttle  to  enter 
freely,  yet  with  sufficient  friction  to  be  retained  in 
place,  s6  that  wear  on  the  shuttle  and  binders  is 
decreased. 

The  length  of  the  strap  is  such  that  neither  picker- 
stick  can  strike  the  end  of  the  slot  a,  on  its  outward 
throw,  the  stick  striking  the  inside  of  the  strap  and 
avoiding  shock.    (Draper  Co.) 


DURKIN'S  PICKER  MECHANISM. 

The  novelty  of  this  picker  mechanism  consists  in 
improvements  whereby  the  picker  is  actuated  to  throw 
the  shuttle  across  the  loom. 

Fig.  i,  in  side  elevation,  represents  a 
sufficient  portion  of  the  right-hand  side 
of  a  loom  to  enable  the  improvements  to 
be  understood;  Fig.  2,  is  a  rear  view  of 
the  part  of  the  loom  shown  in  Fig.  1, 
and  Fig.  3  is  a  detail  view. 

Letters  of  references  indicate  thus: — A, 
the  loom-frame;  B,  the  crank-shaft;  C,  the 
lay;  D,  the  connecting-rods  between  lay 
and  crank-shaft;  E,  the  under  or  picking 
shaft;  and  a,  b,  the  gearing  connecting  the 
said  shaft  with  the  crank-shaft. 
Upon  the  inside  of  the  loom-frame  are  located  bear- 
ings c,  in  which  are  placed  the  arm  f,  of  picker-rod 
F,  the  said  arm  having  projecting  from  it  a  finger 
f,  upon  which  is  a  roll  f,  which  is  normally  kept 
pressed  by  a  spring  m,  toward  the  picking-bowl  e, 
on  the  shaft  E. 

The  rod  F  is  bent  at  f  outwardly  through  the  loom 
side  and  is  then  carried  upwardly  outside  the  loom 
side,  as  at  P,  to  the  point  f,  where  the  rod  is  again 
bent  horizontally  forward  at  an  inclination,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  2.  The  substantially  horizontal  extremity  f, 
of  the  rod  extends  through  a  slot  in  the  binder  ft, 
forming  one  side  of  the  shuttle-box,  and  through  the 
usual  picker  ft'  in  the  shuttle-box  and  through  the 
stationary  side  ft2,  of  the  shuttle-box.    The  spring  m 


acts  to  normally  keep  the  rol 
(Draper  Co.) 


t*  against  the  cam  e'. 


LEMAIRE'S  PICKER-STRAP. 

Figs.  1,  and  2,  are  side  elevations  showing  the 
opposite  sides  of  this  improved  strap,  and  Fig.  3.  is 
a  plan.  . 

Picker-straps  of  this  kind  (for  plain  looms)  as 
heretofore  made,  consisted  of  a  stiff  strip  of  leather 
having  a  leather  strap  at  each  end.  These  straps 
were  passed  one  around  the  picker-stick,  and  the 
other  around  an  arm  of  the  picker-shaft,  and  the  free 


89 


end  of  each  strap  was  secured  to  the  stiff  connecting- 
strap.  Picker-straps  made  in  this  way  soon  wear 
out,  because  of  the  severe  strain  put  upon  the  straps, 


Fig.i 

and  are,  moreover,  hard  to  adjust,  a  change  in  the 
adjustment  necessitating  the  removing  of  the  nuts  on 
the  ends  of  the  bolts  which  connect  the  straps  to  the 
strip.  To  overcome  these  objections  is  the  purpose 
of  the  new  strap,  which  is  made  up  of  strips  A,  B, 
and  C  of  metal,  the  strip  B,  being  bent  to  form  a  hook 
b,  and  the  strip  C,  being  bent  into  the  form  of  a 
staple.  These  three  strips  are  fastened  together  by 
bolts  D,  D',  the  bolt  D,  passing  through  the  strip 
B,  the  free  end  of  the  hook  &,  and  the  strip  A,  while 
the  bolt  D',  passes  through  the  strip  B,  the  free 
ends  of  strip  C,  which  is  placed  between  the  pieces 
A,  and  B,  with  its  closed  end  toward  the  bolt  D,  and 
through  the  strap  A.  The  bolt  D,  and  hook  b, 
form  a  loop  to  hold  the  picker-shaft  and  the  bolt  D', 
and  the  strip  C,  form  a  loop  for  the  picker-stick. 


Fig.Z 


The  bolts  D,  D',  pass  through  the  blocks  E,  E', 
made  of  pressed  paper,  which  are  placed  between  the 
strips  A  and  B,  and  serve  to  make  a  better  bearing 
for  the  picker-stick  and  arm  of  the  picker-shaft. 

The  strip  A  has  a  lengthwise  slot  a,  and  strip  B 
has  three  lengthwise  slots  &',  b',  If.  These  are  adjust- 
ing-slots and  form  an  important  feature  of  the  im- 
provement, for  it  will  be  clear  that  the  long  slot  «, 
in  strip  A,  and  the  shorter  slots  V,  b2,  &*,  in  strip  B, 


provide  for  the  adjustment  of  the  lengtii  of  the  picker- 
strap,  and  also  for  the  adjustment  of  block  E'. 

A  cushion  of  leather  H,  is  placed  inside  the  hook  b, 
thus  rendering  the  operation  of  the  strap  less  noisy. 
(N.  Lcmairc,  Taunton,  Mass.) 


LAHUE'S  PICKER-STRAP. 

This  strap  relates  to  the  connection  between  the 
pick-strap  and  the  staff. 

Fig.  i,  is  a  side  view  of  that  portion  of  a  loom 
comprising  the  picker-staff  and  connected  mechan- 
ism. Fig.  2,  is  an  end  view  of  the  same.  Fig.  3,  is  a 
top  view  of  the  pick-strap  connection  with  the  staff. 
Fig.  4,  is  a  side  view  of  the  same.  Fig.  5,  is  an  end 
elevation  of  the  same  from  the  left  end.  Fig.  6,  is  an 
end  elevation  of  the  same  from  the  right  end. 


The  staff  1,  is  pivoted  by  a  pin  2,  in  a  slot  3,  in  the 
head  4,  of  the  shaft  5,  which  carries  the  sword  6. 


5 


7,  is  the  lay-sill,  and  8  is  the  frame  of  the  loom. 
9,  is  the  pitman,  and  10,  its  bearing  on  the  lay-sill. 

11,  is  a  round  rod  bent  into  a  U-shape,  making  the 
clear  distance  between  the  stems  of  the  U  somewhat 
greater  than  the  thickness  of  the  staff  1.  Two  leather 
pieces  are  cut  out  whose  outline  is  immaterial,  but  one 
of  which,  12,  is  made  oval,  while  the  other,  13,  is  pro- 
vided with  a  tab  or  flap,  and  two  holes  are  punched  in 
each  piece,  so  that  they  will  slip  upon  the  U-shape  rod. 
The  oval  piece  is  slipped  on  first  and  pushed  to  the 
bend  of  the  U.    The  flapped  piece  is  then  attached  to 


V 

—  

the  picker-staff  by  a  screw  14  at  whatever  distance 
from  the  pivot  of  the  staff  will  give  the  desired  power, 
plate  15,  with  bent-up  ends,  is  placed  under  the 


A 


ends  of  the  U,  the  pick-strap  16  is  laid  upon  it  and  be- 


90 


tween  the  stems  of  the  U,  and  a  leather  washer  17 
laid  over  that,  and  all  are  clamped  together  by  a 
boit  18  and  nut  19,  passing  through  corresponding 
holes  in  them.  To  make  the  clamp  surer,  the  extreme 
ends  of  the  U  are  bent  down,  as  at  20,  to  form 
shoulders.  Thus,  however  violent  and  frequent  the 
jerks  on  the  pick-strap,  it  can  never  pull  loose  from 
its  connection.  Owing  to  the  different  angles  of  the 
staff  with  respect  to  the  direction  of  pull  of  the  strap 
the  ordinary  connection  chafes  the  sides  of  the  staff, 
as  well  as  wearing  out  the  connecting-loop;  but  with 
the  new  connection,  the  U-shaped  rod  never  touches 
the  staff  and  all  the  wear  comes  on  the  leather  piece 
13.  The  rod  being  round,  even  that  wear  is  slight. 
The  leather  piece  12  is  pressed  slightly  into  the  bend 
of  the  U  at  each  pull  of  the  strap  and  forms  an  ex- 
ceptionally simple  and  durable  cushion,  its  elasticity 
relieving  the  strain  on  the  staff  and  on  the  shuttle. 
(0.  A.  Sawyer  and  M.  M.  Lahue,  Lowell,  Mass.) 


WARREN'S  PICKER-STAFF  STRAP. 

Fig.  A,  represents  sufficient  of  a  picker-staff,  its 
strap  and  connections,  as  is  necessary  to  illustrate  the 
application  of  this  strap  to  practice.  Fig.  B,  is  a  full- 
size  central  longitudinal  section  of  said  strap.  Fig. 
C,  is  a  transverse  section  thereof,  taken  at  the  point 
indicated  by  line  bt  Fig.  B;  and  Fig.  D,  is  a  similar 
view,  showing  a  slight  modification.  Fig.  E,  is  a  par- 
tial sectional  view  of  this  improved  strap,  taken  on  line 
b,  Fig.  B,  cutting  through  the  fold  at  the  center  of  the 
bend  of  the  strap. 

The  object  is  to  produce  a  lug-strap  for  looms 
which  shall  embody  strength,  durability,  and  elasticity 


during  use,  and  consists  in  a  lug-strap  made  of  a 
single  piece  of  leather  of  sufficient  size  to  produce 
the  strap,  said  piece  being  folded  upon  itself  and  then 
fastened  near  the  folded  edges  and  bent  into  the  loop 
form  of  a  lug-strap. 


A,  represents  the  picker-staff  of  a  loom,  which  is 
pivoted  at  its  lower  end  to  a  stationary  bearing  B, 
forming,  in  practice,  a  part  of  the  loom-frame. 

C,  represents  part  of  the  lug-strap  operating-bar,  to 
the  outer  end  of  which  is  attached  the  lug-strap  D, 
through  the  loop  of  which  the  picker-staff  passes,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  A. 

The  completed  lug-strap  is  made  from  a  single  piece 
of  leather,  about  square  in  shape,  said  piece  being 
folded  upon  itself  to  produce  several  thicknesses,  one 
lying  against  the  other,  with  folds  at  the  edges  of  the 
completed  strap,  as  is  shown  in  the  drawings. 

This  strap  is  so  folded  that  one  edge  of  the  piece  of 
leather  from  which  the  strap  is  made  comes  upon  the 
outside  of  the  strap  at  what  is  to  be  the  top  thereof, 
and  the  other  edge  of  the  said  piece  of  leather  comes 
upon  the  inside  of  the  completed  strap  near  what  is 
to  be  the  bottom  thereof,  thus  forming  a  wide  fold  at 
the  bottom  of  the  strap,  with  the  inner  edge  of  the 
leather  lying  in  said  fold,  and  a  narrower  fold  at  the 
top  of  the  strap,  with  the  outer  edge  of  the  leather 
lying  against  the  outside  of  the  fold. 

By  folding  the  leather  in  the  manner  just  described, 
with  the  wide  fold  at  the  bottom  of  the  completed 
strap  and  the  narrower  fold  at  the  top  thereof  lying 
against  the  outer  edge  of  the  leather,  it  results  that 
when  the  strap  is  bent  into  its  proper  shape  for  use 
the  top  of  the  loop  formed  by  the  bend  in  the  strap 
flares  outwardly,  slightly  upwardly,  so  that  what  may 
be  termed  the  "end"  of  the  completed  loop,  against 
which  the  picker-staff  strikes,  is  somewhat  inclined 
relative  to  a  vertical  plane,  as  shown  in  Figs.  A 
and  E,  and  thus  conforms  to  the  radial  striking  posi- 
tion of  the  picker-staff  at  the  time  of  the  impact 
of  the  blow  of  the  latter.  Moreover,  in  forming  the 
completed  lug-strap  by  a  single  piece  of  leather,  folded 
as  described,  it  will  be  observed  that  the  wearing 
portions  of  the  said  strap,  or  the  parts  thereof,  sub- 
jected to  the  blow  of  the  picker-staff,  are  all  upon 
what  is  the  finished  surface  of  the  piece  of  leather 
before  the  latter  is  folded,  which  surface  has  the 
greatest  capability  for  resisting  wear,  and,  conse- 
quently, the  greatest  endurance  in  use. 

The  strap,  after  having  been  folded,  as  above  de- 
scribed, has  its  several  plies  firmly  secured  together, 
this  being  done  by  two  rows  of  stitching,  as  shown 
in  the  drawings. 

The  completed  strap  is  provided  near  its  ends  with 
transverse  openings,  through  which  passes  the  fasten- 
ing-bolt E,  or  other  securing  devices  by  which  the 
strap  is  attached  to  the  operating-bar  C. 

The  piece  of  leather  from  which  the  lug-strap  is 
formed  mav  have  a  lining  of  cloth,  as  shown  in  Fig. 
D.  if  desired.  F.  and  C.  O.  Warren,  Worcester, 

Mass.) 


ASHBY'S  PICKER-STRAP. 

The  object  of  the  device  is,  to  prevent  the  wearing 
of  the  loop  of  the  picker-strap  by  so  constructing 
the  dog  that  at  the  time  when  the  blow  is  given 
and  the  full  force  exerted  the  loop  will  bear  on  the 
dog  fairly  and  along  its  whole  width. 

Fig.  1,  is  a  view  showing  the  connection  of  the 
picker-arm  with  the  picker-stick  in  the  relative  posi- 
tions when  the  picker-stick  has  been  drawn  fully  back 
by  the  picker-stick  spring.  Fig.  2,  is  an  enlarged 
view  showing  the  dog  secured  to  the  picker-arm,  the 
loop  of  the  picker-strap  being  shown  in  section  and 
the  poition  of  the  picker-arm  being  the  same  as  in 
Fig.  1,  when  no  strain  is  exerted  on  the  picker-strap. 
Fig.  3,  is  an  enlarged  view  showing  the  picker-arm, 
the  dog,  and  the  loop  of  the  picker-strap  in  the  posi- 
tion  when   the   projection   on   the  cam   strikes  the 


91 


picker-roller  and  the  force  is  transmitted  by  the 
picker-strap  to  the  picker-stick  to  send  the  shuttle 
across  the  fabric  and  the  loom.    The  loop  of  the 


picker-strap  is  shown  in  section  and  shows  the  surface 
bearing  on  the  dog  the  whole  width  of  the  strap. 
Fig.  4,  is  a  transverse  sectional  view  of  the  dog. 

5,  indicates  the  picker-arm;  6,  the  picker-stick; 
7,  the  dog  secured  to  the  free  end  of  the  picker-arm. 
The  dog  7,  consists  of  the  face-plate  7',  in  the  centre 
of  which  the  clamp-screw  8,  is  secured  by  screw- 
threaded  engagement.  From  the  upper  end  of  the 
plate  7',  the  bracket  7'  projects  and  from  the  lower 
end  the  bracket  73.  Both  of  these  brackets  are 
slotted  for  the  reception  of  the  picker-arm  5. 

The  bracket  7"  is  longer  than  the  bracket  ~f.  The 
ends  of  the  brackets  72  and  7s,  are  connected  by 
the  strap-bar  74,  which  forms  an  angle  of  less  than 
ninety  degrees  or  right  angle  with  the  bracket  73, 
and  an  angle  of  more  than  ninety  degrees  with  the 
bracket  7',  the  angular  position  of  the  strap-bar  7*, 
being  such  that  the  strap  bears  its  whole  width  on 
the  bar  when  the  greatest  strain  on  the  strap  is 
exerted. 

In  practice  it  is  found  that  the  strap-bar  71,  when 
inclined  at  an  angle  of  about  twenty  degrees  to  the 
picker-bar,  will  form  a  fair  bearing  on  the  loop,  but 
the  same  may  be  varied  to  the  oscillation  of  the 
picker-arm.  The  loop  9,  extends  through  the  dog 
and  is  connected  with  the  loop  10,  by  the  link  11. 
This  construction  allows  some  adjustment  of  the 
loops  to  their  bearings  on  the  dog  and  the  picker- 
stick. 

It  will  be  found  that  with  a  dog  the  strap-bar  of 
which  is  placed,  as  shown  in  the  drawings,  at  an  in- 
clined angle  to  the  picker-bar,  instead  of  parallel  with 
the  same,  the  picker-strap  wears  evenly  its  whole 
width.     (Whitin  Machine  Works,  WMtinsville,  Mass.) 


with  cement  and  rolled  upon  itself  until  the  desired 
thickness  is  reached.  The  blank  thus  provided  is 
then  doubled  back  upon  itself  in  approximately  the 
shape  shown  in  Fig.  B,  of  the  draw- 
ings and  is  then  placed  in  a  power- 
ful mold  (while  yet  in  a  plastic  con- 
dition) and  molded  into  the  form 
here  illustrated,  that  is  to  say,  the 
ends  are  left  flat,  of  uniform  thick- 
ness, and  parallel  with  each  other, 
as  at  &,  so  they  may  be  conveniently 
secured  to  the  flat  sides  of  the 
sweep-stick,  but  the  body  portion  of 
said  blank  is  upset  edgewise,  as  b' 
Fig.  A,  thus  reducing  its  width  and 
forcing  the  surplus  material  into  the 
inner  side  of  said  body  portion, 
leaving  the  inner  face  of  the  strap 
curved,  as  at  c  Figs.  A  and  C,  and 
the  outer  face  flat.  This  construc- 
tion provides  an  increased  thickness 
of  material  opposite  the  centre  of 
the  curve  C,  at  the  point  of  impact 
of  the  picker-stick,  thus  reinforcing 
and  strengthening  that  portion  of 
the  strap  which  ordinarily  wears  out 
first.  When  the  strap  thus  molded 
becomes  thoroughly  hardened,  it  is 
practically  as  solid  and  strong  as  if 
made  of  a  single  piece  of  raw-hide 
or  other  tough  material,  yet  it  re- 
quires no  more  material  in  its  construction  and  costs 
no  more  to  produce  than  the  ordinary  cemented  duck 
lug-strap. 

To  prevent  the  picker-stick  from  striking  the  ends 
of  the  thickened  portions, the  sides  of  the  loop  or 
bowed  portion  of  the  strap,  are  located  farther  apart 
than  the  ends  6,  which  is  accomplished  by  forming  a 
gradual  bend  or  jog  between  the  portions  &,  and 
and  by  gradually  compressing  the  ends  of  the  thick- 
ened portions,  an  inclined  surface  is  presented  leading 
from  the  inner  surface  of  the  flat  portions  of  the 
sides  to  the  inner  surface  of  the  concaved  portions, 
which  will  avoid  any  abrupt  shoulders  against  which 
the  picker-stick  might  engage  as  it  entered  the  loop. 

It  is  of  advantage  to  provide  the  curved  and  thick- 
ened portion  c,  not  only  at  the  bow  end  of  the  strap, 


LIVSEY'S  LUG-STRAP. 


In  order  to  show  the  advantages  of  the  new  strap 
the  accompanying  illustrations  are  given,  of  which 
Fig.  A,  is  a  side  view,  and  Fig.  B,  a  top  or  plan  view 
of  a  lug-strap  of  the  new  form.  Fig.  C,  is  a  cross- 
sectional  view  of  the  same  on  line  x,  x,  of  Fig.  B. 

o,  indicates  the  strap  as  a  whole,  the  same  being 
made  of  duck  or  similar  material,  that  is  saturated 


as  already  described,  but  also  along  the  sides  of  said 
strap,  as  seen  in  Fig.  B.  By  thus  shaping  the  sides 
only,  the  projecting  central  portion  of  the  strap  is  in 
contact  with  the  picker-stick  and  friction  of  the  parts 
is  thus  reduced  to  a  minimum  as  the  stick  swings 
back  and  forth,  and  the  curved  and  thickened  sides 


92 


are  also  made  stronger  and  less  liable  to  yield  and 
weaken  under  the  constant  pounding  of  the  bow  end 
by  the  picker-stick. 

It  will  be  found  in  practice  that  this  strap  gives 
better  results  and  lasts  longer  than  straps  of  uni- 
form thickness  as  commonly  constructed.  (E.  B. 
Jacobs  Manufacturing  Company,  Banielsonvillc,  Conn.) 


DEVICE  FOR  SECURING  PICKERS  TO  LOOM 
PICKER-STAFFS. 

The  object  of  this  device  is  to  provide  a  cheap  and 
simple  picker-holder  which  may  be  quickly  and  easily 
secured  upon  a  picker-staff,  and  one  which  when 
properly  secured  upon  the  staff  will  not  be  liable  to 
be  loosened  by  the  shock  and  jar  to  which  pickers 
and  picker-staffs  are  ordinarily  subjected. 

Of  the  accompanying  illustrations  Fig  i,  is  an 
elevation,  partly  in  section,  illustrating  the  device  as 
holding  a  picker  on  a  picker-staff.  Fig.  2,  is  a  similar 
view  taken  at  right  angles  to  Fig.  1.  Fig.  3,  is  a 
transverse  section  taken  in  the  plane  indicated  by 
the  line  x-x,  of  Fig.  1,  and  Fig.  4,  comprises  perspec- 
tive views  of  the  picker-holder  and  the  devices  by 
which  it  is  fixed  on  the  picker-staff. 

A,  indicates  a  picker-staff;  B,  the  picker,  and  C  the 
holder  which  receives  the  picker  and  secures  the  same 
to  the  picker-staff  A.  This  holder  C,  is  formed  in 
one  piece  and  of  metal  and  it  comprises  the  body 
portion  a,  provided  with  an  inwardly-directed  flange 
b,  to  retain  the  picker  within  it,  and  the  resilient 


J    *  A  I 

arms  c,  which  are  designed  to  receive  the  staff  A, 
between  them,  as  clearly  shown  in  Fig.  3,  and  arc 
provided  with  shoulders  d,  between  which  and  the 
body  o,  the  staff  is  interposed.  The  forward  por- 
tions e,  of  the  arms  c,  are  provided  with  alined  trans- 
verse apertures  f,  to  receive  the  fastening-bolt  D,  and 
one  of  said  portions  e,  is  provided  in  its  outer  side 
with  four  (more  or  less)  grooves  g,  designed  to  re- 
ceive the  four  (more  or  less)  protuberances  '1,  on  the 
inner  side  of  the  nut  E,  which  is  mounted  on  the 
bolt  D.  The  portion  e,of  the  other  arm  c,  is  provided 
in  its  outer  side  with  one  or  more  grooves  or  seats 
i,  which  are  designed  in  practice  to  receive  the  pro- 
tuberance j,  upon  the  head  fc,  of  the  fastening-bolt 
as  clearly  shown  in  Fig.  3. 

The  arms  c,  are  furthermore  provided  upon  their 
inner  sides  with  the  barbs  I,  which  are  designed  and 
adapted  to  take  into  the  shaft  A,  as  shown  in  Fig.  3, 
to  better  fix  the  picker-holder  thereon. 

In  applying  the  improvements  to  a  picker-staff  the 
picker  B,  is  placed  in  the  holder  C,  after  which  the 


4> 


picker-staff  is  inserted  between  the  arms  c,  of  the 
holder,  as  illustrated.  The  bolt  D,  is  then  passed 
through  the  apertures  f,  of  the  arms  c,  until  the  pro- 
tuberance on  its  head  rests 
in  the  seat  i,  in  the  one  arm 
c,  and  the  nut  E,  is  turned 
upon  said  bolt  until  the  pro- 
tuberances on  its  inner  side 
engage  the  outer  side  of  the 
adjacent  arm  c.  As  the  said 
nut  is  tightened  it  will  be 
seen  that  the  barbs  I,  will  be 
sunk  into  the  sides  of  the 
staff  A,  and  will  assist  ma- 
terially in  securing  the  holder  on  the  staff  and  when  the 
nut  is  sufficiently  tight  it  is  left  with  its  protuberances 
h,  resting  in  the  seats  or  grooves  V,  of  one  of  the  arms 
c,  as  shown.  By  means  of  this  and  the  fact  that  the 
protuberance  on  the  bolt-head  rests  in  a  seat  i,  of  the 
other  arm  C,  and  the  said  arms  c,  are  resilient  it  will 
be  seen  that  both  the  bolt  and  the  nut  will  be  effec- 
tually prevented  from  working  loose,  no  matter  how 
much  shock  and  jar  the  picker  and  picker-staff  are 
subjected  to,  as  the  arms  c,  will  exert  an  outward 
pressure  against  the  nut  and  bolt-head,  and  will  con- 
sequently retain  the  protuberances  thereof  in  the 
grooves.  The  arms  tf,  by  reason  of  their  resiliency, 
will  give  inwardly  when  the  nut  D,  is  tightened,  and 
consequently  will  not  prevent  the  nut  from  turning 
upon  the  arm  which  it  impinges  against.  (TV.  B.  Moody, 
Blackstonc,  Mass.) 


KEITH'S  PICKER-STICK. 

The  objects  of  this  picker-stick  are  to  lessen  the 
wear  on  the  stick  itself  and  on  that  part  of  the  picker 
through  which  the  stick  projects  and  to  render  the 
stick  less  liable  to  break. 

The  new  picker-stick  consists  in  a  stick  having  on 
its  front  edge  a  metallic  plate  which  comes  in  contact 
with  the  picker  in  the  forward  movement  of  the 
stick,  and  on  its  back  edge  a  plate  which  comes  in 
contact  with  the  picker  in  its  backward  movement 
and  means  for  firmly  securing  the  lower  extremities 
of  said  plate  to  the  faces  of  the  stick  by  pressure. 

In  the  accompanying  illustration  a  side  elevation 
of  the-  improved  picker-stick,  with  parts  broken  away, 
is  given. 

A,   represents  a  picker-stick.     To   the   front  and 
back  edges  of  the  stick  are  attached  plates  &,  and  c, 
respectively.     Integral    with  the 
lower  extremity  of  the  front  plate 
is  a  collar  dt  surrounding  the 
stick  and  the  lower  extremity  of 
the   back  plate.     In   the  top  of 
the  collar  is  a  set-screw  c,  adapted 
^    to  the   screwed   down   upon  the 
lower  end  of  the  back  plate  in 
such  manner  that  the  lower  ends 
&    of  both  plates  are  firmly  secured 
to  the  stick.   The  top  ends  of  both 
plates  are  secured  to  the  stick  by 
a    screw    threaded    bolt  passing 
through  them  and  the  stick. 

To  prevent  bolt  f,  from  work- 
°*  ing  loose,  the  hole  in  the  end  of 
the  plate  c,  is  threaded,  which 
taken  in  connection  with  the  or- 
dinary nut  on  the  end  of  the  bolt 
outside  of  the  plate,  serves  as  a 
check  to  prevent  the  bolt  from 
working  loose. 

To  prevent  the  plates  from 
wearing  in  the  wood  and  to  give  a  firm  bearing  for  the 
set-screw,  there  is  inserted  in  the  stick  at  a  point  under 


< 

►=  1 

N  - 

0  - 

> 

cC  / 

9  L 

^  -< 

93 


the  set-screw  in  the  collar  a  metal  screw  0,  upon  which 
both  plates  bear.  The  screw  may  be  so  small  that  it 
will  weaken  the  stick  but  very  little,  and  yet  afford 
a  perfectly  unyielding  bearing  for  the  plates.  To 
strengthen  the  front  plate,  the  middle  h,  can  be  made 
thicker  than  the  ends. 

Where  the  top  of  the  picker  is  of  wood  alone  the 
wood  soon  becomes  worn  and  rough  and  wears  the 
hole  in  the  picker  very  rapidly,  thus  necessitating 
the  constant  renewal  of  both  picker  and  stick,  it  very 
often  happening  that  a  picker  breaks  out  before  the 
shuttle  receiving  end  of  the  picker  is  worn  out,  while 
under  the  new  construction,  it  will  last  until  both 
edges  of  the  shuttle  receiving  end  of  the  picker  are 
worn  out. 

The  advantages  as  claimed  for  the  new  stick  are 
that  it  does  not  wear  the  picker  or  stick,  it  is  easily 
attached  to  the  stick,  it  does  not  weaken  the  stick,  it 
does  not  wear  loose  on  the  stick,  it  gives  a  steady 
picker  motion,  and,  if  the  stick  becomes  broken  for 
any  reason,  it  can  be  easily  removed  and  attached 
to  another  stick.    (W.  L.  Keith,  Milltoion,  N.  B.) 


BEARING  FOR  LOOM  PICKER-STICKS. 

Great  annoyance  and  loss  of  time,  as  well  as  ex- 
pense, have  been  heretofore  occasioned  by  the  con- 
stant wear  and  breakage  of  picker-sticks  at  the  point 
where  they  are  pivoted  to  the  loom-frame,  and  when 
a  stick  is  rendered  useless  by  such  wear  or  breakage 
it  is  necessary  to  stop  the  loom  and  remove  the  old 
stick,  replacing  it  with  a  new  one;  all  of  which  re- 
quires time,  thus  resulting  in  a  loss  of  product  of  the 
loom.  These  disadvantages  are  overcome  in  the  new 
picker-stick  by  providing  a  metal  bearing  which  may 
be  quickly  attached  to  or  detached  from  a  picker- 
stick. 

Fig.  i,  is  a  perspective  of  a  portion  of  a  loom- 
frame  and  lay,  showing  a  picker-stick  attached  thereto 
by  the  new  device;  and  Fig.  2,  is  a  detailed  perspec- 
tive of  the  lower  end  of  the  picker-stick  and  the 
bearing  removed  therefrom. 

Examining  these  illustrations  we  find  provided  a 
semi-circular  plate  A,  with  which  is  formed  a  box  B. 
Within  the  box  is  a  half-bearing  C,  adapted  to  fit 
the  pivot-bolt  D,  which  projects  from  the  stud  E. 

From  the  inner  surface  of  the  box  project  prongs 
F,  so  that  when  the  box  is  to  be  attached  to  the 
picker-stick  G  it  is  only  necessary  to  place  said  prongs 
in  proper  position  against  the  inner  edge  of  said  stick 
and  embed  them  therein  by  sufficient  force,  after  which 


the  bearim 


A  half-bearing  I,  is  formed  in  the  edge  of  the 
picker-stick  which  corresponds  with  the  half-bear- 
ing in  the  box,  so 
that  the  pivot-bolt  D 
is  inclosed  upon  one 
side  by  the  bearing  I 
and  upon  the  other 
by  the  bearing  C. 

From  this  it  will  be 
seen  that  when  a 
picker-stick  is  thus 
pivoted  to  the  stud  E 
and  the  loom  is  in 
operation  the  thrust 
upon  the  lower  end  of 
the  picker-stick  which 
is  incident  to  the 
action  of  the  sweep 
in  causing  said  stick 
to  throw  the  shuttle 
will  be  received  by 
in  the  box,  and  as  this  may  be  made  of 
steel  or  other  suitable  metal  it  is  obvious  that  but 
little  wear  will  be  brought  about  by  this  thrust,  and, 
further,  that  it  will  be  impossible  to  split  the  picker- 
stick  at  its  lower  end,  as  no  strain  comes  upon  the 
grain  of  the  wood  passing  through  the  bearing-hole, 
as  is  the  case  in  picker-sticks  as  now  used. 

The  return  movement  of  the  picker-stick,  occasioned 
by  a  suitable  spring,  causes  the  bearing  in  the  stick 
to  act  upon  the  pivoting-bolt,  but  as  this  movement 
performs  no  work  it  is  obvious  that  but  little  strain 
will  be  exerted  upon  this  bearing;  but  to  prevent  the 
liability  of  considerable  wear  taking  place  upon  the 
bearing  I,  the  hole  J  is  made  to  fit  the  bolt  D  snugly, 
thereby  causing  the  plate  to  receive  a  portion  of  the 
strain  incident  to  the  reverse  movement  of  the  picker- 
stick. 

As  now  constructed  the  life  of  a  picker-stick  is  very 
short,  as  it  is  constantly  liable  to  split  at  the  point 
where  the  pivoting-hole  is  formed,  as  such  a  stick  is 
subjected  to  an  enormous  strain  and  jar  by  the  rapid 
movements  and  sudden  stops  which  are  necessarily 
transmitted  thereto  by  the  actions  of  the  loom. 

One  of  the  advantages  of  the  new  device  is  that 
it  may  be  readily  attached  to  a  picker-stick  with  little 
or  no  alteration  of  the  latter,  and  when  the  stick  has 
become  worn  or  useless  from  any  cause  it  may  be 
removed  and  attached  to  another  stick.  {Barry  M. 
Sch a dora hi,  Ph i ladetph in.) 


a  screw  passed  through  the  hole  H,  formed  in  the 
plate,  and  into  the  face  of  the  picker-stick  will 
securely  hold  the  box  and  plate  in  position  upon  said 
stick. 


LANGUIRAND'S  PICKER-STAFF. 

This  device  relates  more  particularly  to  means  for 
effecting  a  connection  between  the  picker-staff  and 
the  connecting  bar  or  stick  for  transmitting  motion 
to  said  staff;  and  it  has  for  its  general  object  to  pro- 
vide a  simple  and  durable  device  through  the  medium 
of  which  the  tug  of  the  connecting  bar  or  stick  may 
be  adjustably  fixed  at  various  points  on  the  picker- 
staff  so  as  to  regulate  the  throw  of  said  staff  and 
that  of  the  shuttle  without  the  objectionable  neces- 
sity of  perforating'  the  staff  or  otherwise  weakening 
the  same. 

The  accompanying  illustration  is  a  perspective  view 
of  so  much  of  the  mechanism  of  a  loom  as  is  neces- 
sary to  explain  the  device. 

A  indicates  the  lay  of  a  loom;  B  indicates  the 
picker-staff;  C  indicates  the  arm  of  the  rocker-shaft 
(not  illustrated);  D  indicates  the  connecting  bar  or 
stick,  and  E  indicates  the  staff-receiving  tug  carried 
by  the  bar  or  stick  D. 

The  rocker-shaft  arm  C,  and  the  picker-staff  B,  are 
connected  by  a  bolt  F,  and  this  bolt  also  serves  to  effect 
a  connection  between  the  picker-staff  and  the  adjust- 


04 


ing  device  G,  the  body  portion  a,  of  which  is  mounted 
on  the  bolt  between  the  arm  C,  and  the  picker-staff, 
as  shown. 

The  body  portion  a,  of  the  device  G,  is  formed 
from  malleable  iron  and  it  is  provided  with  an  aper- 


tured  post  c,  and  a  guide  lug  d,  to  receive  the  shank 
e,  of  the  adjustable  section  H,  and  is  also  provided 
at  intervals  with  transverse  sockets  f,  to  receive  the 
angular  stud  (I,  of  the  said  shank. 

The  loop  or  eye  I,  of  the  section  H,  receives  the 
tug  E,  of  the  bar  or  stick  D,  and  it  is  provided  at  its 
ends  with  the  transversely  disposed  curved  portions 
which  present  a  convex  surface  to  the  loop  E, 
and  thereby  prevent  unnecessary  frictional  wear  of 
the  same-  The  shank  of  the  adjustable  section  ex- 
tends as  before  stated,  through  the  apertures  of  the 
lug  d,  and  post  c,  and  its  stud  0,  is  designed  to  be 
fixed  in  any  one  of  the  apertures  f,  by  the  binding 
screw  i,  which  takes  through  the  post  c,  and  engages 
the  shank  as  shown.  By  this  construction  it  will  be 
seen  that  the  loop  or  eye  I,  may  be  readily  and  pos- 
itively fixed  at  various  distances  from  the  free  end 
of  the  picker-staff  to  increase  or  diminish  the  throw 
of  the  said  staff,  without  the  objectionable  necessity 
of  perforating  or  otherwise  weakening  the  same.  It 
will  also  be  seen  that  the  device  has  no  direct  con- 
nection with  the  picker-staff  and  consequently  when 
said  staff  is  worn  or  broken,  it  may  be  readily  re- 
moved and  a  new  staff  employed  in  conjunction  with 
the  adjusting  device.    (J.  Langmrand,  ^Younsockct,  R.  I.) 


HOLBROOK'S  PICKER. 

The  same  is  shown  in  its  perspective  view  in  the 
accompanying  illustration. 

In  raw  hide  loom-pickers,  as  heretofore  constructed, 
considerable  difficulty  has  been  experienced  on  account 
of  their  liability  to  become  cracked  or  split  under  the 
hard  wear  and  blows  to  which  they  are  subjected, 
especially  when  the  loom  is  running  at  a  very  high 
speed.  To  overcome  this  difficulty  and  to  greatly 
increase  the  strength  and  durability  of  loom-pickers 
of  this  description,  is  the  object  of  the  new  picker. 

A,  represents  the  body  or  shank  of  a  loom-picker, 
one  end  of  which  is  enlarged  to  form  the  rod-holder 
B,  which  is  provided  at  its  centre  with  a  rod-hole 
(i.  Over  the  opposite  end  c,  of  the  shank  A,  is  fitted 
a  head-cap  D,  into  which  the  shank  extends  as 
shown,  the  end  c,  and  the  cap  D,  which  embraces  it, 
and  is  secured  thereto  by  rivets  dt  constituting  the 
head  of  the  picker,  which  contacts  with  the  point  or 
beak  of  the  shuttle. 

The  body  A,  is  composed  of  an  outward  layer  or 
thickness  f,  of  raw  hide  folded  or  doubled  over,  and 
having  an  inner  raw  hide  filling  0,  composed  of  any 
desired  number  of  pieces,  and,  between  said  layers 
or  pieces  1,  <J,  is  interposed  a  piece  of  thick  woven 
fabric      preferably  canvas  or  heavy  cotton  duck,  the 


several  layers  or  thicknesses  of  raw  hide  and  woven 
fabric  being  securely  fastened  together  by  rivets  i. 

In  constructing  the  picker  a  piece  or  strip  of  wet 
raw  hide  of  suitable  shape  or  size  is  taken,  to  form 
the  outside  layer  or  thickness  f,  and  lay  upon  it  the 
woven  fabric  ft,  which  is  doubled  in  such  manner  as 
to  cause  the  folded  edges  o,  to  lie  flush  with  the 
adjacent  edges  of  the  raw  hide  or  preferably  extend 
a  little  beyond  the  same.  The  filling  Q,  is  then  laid 
in  place  and  the  raw  hide  and  canvas  are  then  doubled 
over  a  spindle  to  form  the  rod-hole  f,  after  which 
the  rivet  holes  are  punched  and  the  rivets  inserted. 
The  picker  is  then  removed  from  the  spindle  and 
allowed  to  dry,  after  which  the  operation  of  riveting 
is  completed.  The  head-cap  D,  composed  of  a  solid 
piece  of  raw  hide  of  single  thickness  throughout,  is 
then  applied  and  secured  in  place  by  the  rivets  d. 

By  thus  interposing  a  piece  of  woven  fabric  be- 
tween the  layers  of  raw  hide  as  before  described 
the  picker  is  rendered  much  stronger  and  more  dur- 
able, as  the  woven  fabric,  on  account  of  its  toughness 
and  elasticity,  will  hold  the  layers  of  raw  hide  to- 
gether in  such  a  manner  as  to  effectually  prevent 
splitting  or  cracking  of  the  picker,  and  will  also  en- 
able the  picker  to  better  resist  the  blows  of  the  picker- 
stick  and  the  concussion  produced  by  the  contact  of 
the  picker  with  the  end  of  the  loom  box.  Further- 
more, the  extension  of  the  doubled  or  folded  edges 
o,  of  the  woven  fabric  beyond  the  edges  of  the  raw 


hide  forms  elastic  cushions  or  buffers,  which  thus 
relieve  the  picker  of  the  sudden  shocks  to  which  it  is 
subjected  from  contact  with  the  picker-stick  and  loom 
box  and  reduces  the  wear  to  a  minimum,  thus  par- 
ticularly adapting  the  picker  for  use  in  looms  which 
are  run  at  a  very  high  speed.  (C.  TP.  Holbrook,  Prov- 
idence, It.  I.) 


GLEASON'S  PICKER. 

The  great  wear  that  a  picker  is  exposed  to  in  a 
loom  in  receiving  many  thousand  blows  per  day  from 
the  steel  point  of  a  shuttle  has  made  it  very  import- 
ant to  find  some  material  of  which  to  make  it  that 
will  last  a  reasonable  time.  Cotton  very  closely  com- 
pressed together  and  confined,  offers  a  most  durable 
resistance  and  for  this  reason  is  made  use  of  in  the 
construction  of  this  picker,  producing  in  turn  an 
article  which  will  work  well  and  last  longer  than  the 
average  leather  pickers  (the  raw  hide  pickers  ex- 
cluded). The  new  picker  is  well  suited  for  plain  one 
shuttle  looms. 

The  accompanying  illustrations  show  this  picker. 
The  same  consists  of  several  vertical  layers  of  leather, 
of  a  shape  to  be  easily  secured  to  the  picker-stick, 
cemented  together  so  as  to  make  practically  one 
thick  piece  of  leather,  and  the  duration  of  this  thick- 
ness is  limited  to  a  few  days  use.  Next  take  all  the 
layers  of  leather  but  the  two  outside  ones  s,  s',  and 
punch  a  piece  out  of  the  centre  of  the  broadest  part 
of  each,  as  seen  in  Fig.  2,  in  which  «,  is  the  hole. 
Then  these  punched  layers  h,  are  cemented  together 


95 


with  one  of  the  whole  layers  s',  on  the  outside.  The 
chamber  formed  by  the  holes  in  the  punched  layers 
is  then  filled  with  cotton  compressed  together  very 
hard,  and  the  other  outside  layer  s,  is  cemented  on 
over  the  chamber,  so  that  the  whole  resembles  an 
ordinary  picker.  The  picker  is  then  attached  to  the 
picker-stick,  and  being  put 
to  use  the  steel  point  of  the 
shuttle  soon  pierces  the 
outside  layer  of  leather  S, 
and  beds  itself  in  the  com- 
pressed cotton. 

The  main  cause  of  the 
destruction  of  a  picker 
arises  from  the  impossibil- 
ity of  striking  it  with  the 
\_J  shuttle-point  exactly  in  the 
centre,  and  consequently 
— .    .  p-    g        it  sways  to  one  side.  Owing 

V'   '  "        to    the    coarse    texture  of 

the  leather,  the  steel  point  soon  makes  its  way  toward 
that  side,  disintegrating  the  leather  and  spoiling  the 
picker.  This  trouble  is  obviated  in  this  picker  by 
the  extremely  fine  texture  and  hardness  of  the  com- 
pressed cotton,  which  prevent  the  shuttle-point  from 
taking  effect  on  the  sides  of  the  recess  first  formed 
by  it,  as  these  sides  do  not  offer  the  point  the  chance 
to  begin  an  entrance  that  the  coarse  texture  of  the 
leather  does.    (M.  Gleason,  Bristol,  R.  I.) 


ward,  and  it  is  thus  firmly  locked  in  position  rela- 
tive to  the  loop  or  binder  and  the  picker-staff. 


WARDWELL'S  PICKER. 

Fig.  i,  represents  a  perspective  view  showing  the 
parts  assembled  together  on  a  picker-staff  for  use. 
Fig.  2,  represents  a  longitudinal  section  of  the  same. 
Fig.  3,  represents  a  cross-section  on  the  line  3-3, 
shown  in  Fig.  2.  Fig.  4,  represents  a  vertical  sec- 
tion on  the  line  4-4,  shown  in  Fig.  3. 

In  the  drawings,  A  represents  a  loom  picker-staff, 
adapted  to  receive  the  metal  loop  or  binder  B,  se- 
cured to  such  staff  by  means  of  a  screw  C. 

In  one  piece  with  the  loop  or  binder  B,  is  made 
the  picker  casing  or  shield  B',  in  which  is  retained 
the  picker  or  filling  D,  made  of  leather  or  other 
suitable  material. 

The  loop  or  binder  B,  is  made  as  a  skelton  frame 
and  has  at  its  rear  portion  a  vertical,  rectangular,  per- 
foration b,  of  sufficient  size  to  receive  the  picker-staff, 
as  shown.  The  forward  portion  of  said  skeleton  loop 
has  a  reduced  perforation  which  forms  a  continu- 
ation of  the  opening  b,  but  is  of  a  reduced  width  as 
compared  with  the  opening  0. 

The  picker  D,  has  a  shank  d',  adapted  to  fit  the 
interior  of  the  loop  or  binder-opening  &',  said  shank 
terminating  at  its  upper  end  as  a  head  d,  of  a  width 
equal  to  the  interior  width  of  the  opening  b,  in  the 
loop  or  binder  B. 

In  assembling  the  parts  together  for  use,  the  picker 
D  is  first  put  up  from  below  through  the  picker- 
staft"  slot  b,  in  the  loop  or  binder  B,  and  then  moved 
forward  into  the  narrow  slot  V,  and  into  the  shield 
or  casing  B',  after  whch  the  picker-staff  A  is  pushed 
through  the  slot  b  and  secured  to  the  loop  or  binder 
B.  by  means  of  the  screw  C.  It  will  thus  be  seen 
that  the  picker  or  filling  D  will  be  most  firmly 
secured  in  place  within  the  reduced  slot  b'  of  the 
loop  or  binder  B,  as  it  cannot  move  upward  on  ac- 
count of  the  lower  increased  size  of  said  picker, 
and  it  is  prevented  from  moving  downward  on 
account  of  the  increased  head  d.  The  picker-staff 
holds  it  from  going  backward  and  the  forward  end 
of  the  loop  or  binder  B  prevents  it  from  moving  for- 


The  picker  casing  or  shield  B'  may  be  dispensed 
with,  particularly  in  slow  looms  running  on  heavy 
goods.    (Frank  A.  Wardicell,  Methuen,  Mass.) 

WILKINS'  LOOM  PICKER. 

The  majority  of  pickers  for  single  box-looms  in 
use  to-day  in  cotton  mills,  are  known  as  the  "doll 
picker,"  and  are  composed  of  several  lifts  of  leather 
cemented  one  upon  the  other  until  the  desired  thick- 
ness is  obtained.  These  pickers  in  a  short  time  are 
worn  through  by  the  action  of  the  shuttle  striking 
the  leather  the  short  way  of  the  grain,  making  the  aver- 
age life  of  the  pickers  from  two  weeks  to  six  months, 
according  to  the  quality  of  the  leather  used  and  the 
care  the  picker  gets  by  the  loom  fixer.  Some  mills 
frequently  have  them  nailed  together  to 
keep  the  cement  from  breaking. 

The  Wilkins'  picker,  as  seen  by  the 
accompanying  illustration  is  composed 
of  four  pieces  of  leather,  riveted  together 
with  strong  iron  rivets,  in  such  a  man- 
ner that  the  shuttle  strikes  the  leather 
edge  ways,  thereby  obtaining  the  great- 
est strength  of  the  leather. 

At  the  point  of  contact  of  the  picker 
with  the  shuttle,  there  is  an  opening 
made  and  filled  with  common  cotton 
put  in  under  pressure,  thus  the  picker 
receives  an  elastic  blow,  as  both  cotton 
and  leather  yield. 

These   pickers   are   an  improvement 
upon   Gleason's   picker   illustrated  and 
explained  in  a  previous  article.  Glea- 
son's patent  having  been  improved  in 
the  picker  as  made  by  the  Wilkins  Mfg.  Co. 

The  Wilkins'  loom  pickers  can  be  applied  to  the 
loom  in  about  one  half  the  time,  and  will  last  three 
or  four  times  as  long,  some  having  been  yet  in  good 
condition  after  fourteen  months  use.  (Wilkins  Mfy. 
Co.,  Woon socket,  It.  I.) 


SHUTTLES. 


DRAPER'S  SELF-THREADING  SHUTTLE  FOR 
NORTHROP  LOOMS. 

Self-threading  shuttles  for  looms  are  now  usually 
constructed  with  a  slot  through  which  the  thread  is 
led  to  the  eye  in  the  side  of  the  shuttle.  When  such 
shuttles  are  used  in  automatic  looms  provided  with 
devices  for  supplying  fresh  filling  to  the  shuttle  when 


In  Fig.  C  the  thread  t  is  shown  as  above  and  in 
line  with  slot  but  confined  by  the  overhanging 
guard  in  such  a  manner  that  it  cannot  fly  or  slip  out 
of  position,  the  guard  maintaining  it  in  line  with  the 
slot  «'  to  properly  enter  it.  and  be  guided  by  the 
spur  or  projection  a4,  to  the  thread-eye  b.  The  rear 
edge  a8,  of  the  spur-base  is  inclined  forward  and 
downwardly,  the  shuttle-body  being  similarly  shaped 
at  d,  and  extending  slightly  below  the  spur-base  at  d', 
making  a  better  construction  of  the  parts, 
whereby  the  thread  cannot  become  wedged 
or  caught  between  the  two  parts,  as  the  pull 
of  the  thread  over  the  downwardly-inclined 
edge  draws  it  away  from  any  possible  crack  or 
crevice  between  the  wood  and  metal.  (Draper 
Company,  | 


the  previous  rilling  is  nearly  or  quite  exhausted,  the 
thread  must  guide  itself  into  the  slot  by  reason  of  its 
position,  as  it  is  drawn  off  from  the  end  of  the  filling- 
carrier  or  bobbin.  It  frequently  happens  that  the 
thread  thus  led  into  the  slot  will  slip  or  fly  out  again 
before  it  has  passed  under  the  spur  or  projection 
which  is  intended  to  guide  it  to  the  side  eye.  This 
shuttle  has  for  its  object  the  production  of  means  for 
guarding  or  confining  the  thread  while  in  line  with 
the  threading-slot,  so  that  it  cannot  accidentally  escape 
therefrom  before  passing  about  the  guide,  projection 
or  spur. 

Fig.  A  is  a  top  view  of  this  shuttle.    Fig.  B  is  an 
enlarged  perspective  view  of  the  eye  end  of  the  shut- 
tle, showing  the  thread  as  confined  by  the 
guard,  and  Fig.  C,  is  an  enlarged  detail  in 
side  elevation  of  a  portion  of  the  shuttle 
adjacent  the  thread-eye. 

The  shuttle-body  A,  shown  as  entirely 
open  at  its  upper  and  lower  sides,  has  a 
filling-carrier  or  bobbin  held  therein,  and  the  shuttle- 
body  is  cut  away  beyond  the  tip  of  the  filling-carrier 
to  receive  therein  a  thread-guide  block  a,  longitudin- 
ally slotted  at  to  receive  the  thread  after  it  has  en- 
tered the  thread-eye,  the  block  having  a  vertical  face 
a',  and  an  inclined  face  a3,  converging  to  the  said  slot 
to  direct  the  thread  thereinto  as  it  is  drawn  off  from 
the  end  of  the  filling-carrier. 

At  that  side  of  the  guide-block  a,  having  the  in- 
clined face  a3,  the  spur  or  projection  a1  is  formed  to 
guide  the  thread  along  the  passage  formed  by  the 
shuttle-body  and  the  edge  «5  of  the  guide-block  to 
the  thread-eye  6,  in  the  side  of  the  shuttle. 

Now,  when  the  thread  t  is  drawn  off  from  the  end 
of  the  filling-carrier,  in  line  with  the  slot  a',  it  fre- 
quently slips  or  flies  out  of  the  slot  before  it  had 
been  guided  to  the  thread-eye  b,  and  to  prevent  this 
there  is  provided  a  thread-guard  shown  as  a  shelf  c, 
bent  or  curved  downward  at  C,  and  overhanging 
the  entrance  to  the  guide-slot  a',  the  lower  edge  of 
the  guard  approaching  closely  the  inclined  face  o3, 
while  permitting  the  thread  to  pass  easily  there- 
under to  the  slot  «'. 


ANOTHER  IMPROVEMENT  IN  SHUTTLES 
FOR  NORTHROP  LOOMS. 

The  object  in  this  instance  is  to  improve  the  con- 
struction of  loom-shuttles  containing  bobbins,  the 
heads  of  which  are  held  by  or  between  separable 
spring-arms,  whereby  the  said  arms  may  hold  the 
said  bobbin-head  more  securely  and  spread  their  hold 
more  uniformly  over  the  head. 

Of  the  accompanying  illustrations,  Fig.  I  shows  a 
top  view  of  this  shuttle;  Fig.  2,  a  left -hand  end  view 
of  the  head  of  the  bobbin  or  filling-carrier;  Fig.  3,  a 
section  of  Fig.  2  in  line  and  Fig.  4  shows  a  mod- 
ified form  of  bobbin. 

The  shuttle-body  A,  has  an  inclined  bridge  to 
direct  the  head  b  of  the  bobbin,  down  into  position 
between  the  jaws  c  and  c  of  the  bobbin-holder. 

Heretofore  the  heads  b  of  the  bobbins  b'  have  been 
cylindrical  from  end  to  end,  and  the  rings  or  annular 


projections  thereon  have  been  of  the  same  diameter. 

In  use  it  has  been  found  that  the  jaws  c,  fail  to 
engage  the  ring  nearest  the  tip  of  the  bobbin  as  firmly 
as  that  farthest  from  the  said  tip,  and  to  overcome 
this  difficulty  and  insure  the  firm  and  secure  holding 
of  the  head  throughout  its  entire  outer  ringed  surface, 
the  rings  2,  3,  4,  of  the  said  heads  are  made  of  a 
decreasing  diameter  from  the  tip  end  of  the  spindle 


96 


97 


outwardly,  and  in  this  way,  as  the  jaws  connected  at 
a  common  point  and  adapted  to  be  sprung  apart, 
are  sprung  apart  by  the  insertion  of  the  ringed  head, 
the  inclination  of  the  jaws  due  to  their  change  of 
position  exactly  contact  with  and  engage  and  hold 
all  the  rings  of  the  head  alike  and  with  equal  force, 
thus  preventing  any  liability  of  the  bobbin  being  held 
loosely  and  moving  unduly  in  the  jaws  in  the  shuttle. 

Of  the  series  of  rings  2,  3,  4,  the  ring  2,  is  of  greater 
diameter  than  3,  and  ring  3,  is  of  greater  diameter 
than  ring  4.    (Draper  Com  pony.) 


BOBBIN  HOLDER  FOR  DRAPLE  SHUTTLES. 

This  holder  is  intended  as  an  improvement  on  the 
class  of  shuttle  wherein  the  head  of  a  bobbin  is  held 
between  spring-jaws,  the  bottom  of  the  shuttle  being 
open  for  the  passage  of  a  spent  bobbin  through  it. 
and  the  delivery  end  of  the  shuttle  having  a  self 
or  automatically  threading  slot  into  which  the  thread 
on  the  cop-holder  is  threaded  during  the  movement 
of  the  shuttle  through  the  shed.  In  this  class  of 
shuttle  the  thread  as  it  is  unwound  from  the  end  of 
the  bobbin,  it  then  describing  a  circular  path,  is 
thrown  into  an  open  slot  at  the  top  of  the  shuttle, 
and  in  practice  it  sometime  happens  that  the  thread 
does  not  enter  the  slot  instantly.  To  overcome  this, 
means  are  provided  in  the  present  shuttle  whereby 
the  free  end  or  tip  of  the  bobbin  is  held  in  a  slightly- 
elevated  position,  so  that  the  thread  can  readily  enter 
the  slot  as  it  first  starts  to  run  off. 

The  shuttle  referred  to  has  spring  arms  which  con- 
stitute holders,  the  said  arms  at  the  interior  haying 
a  series  of  grooves  to  be  centered  by  a  series  of  rings 
surrounding  the  base  of  the  bobbin,  but  the  said 
grooves  are  perpendicular  to  a  line  drawn  longitud- 
inally through  the  shuttle. 

In  the  new  shuttle  the  grooves  are  inclined  so  that 
the  said  rings  as  they  slide  down  in  said  grooves 
cause  the  bobbin  to  assume  an  inclined  position  with 
its  tip  elevated  a  little  above  the  center  line  of  the 
shuttle. 

Fig.  1,  shows  the  improved  shuttle  in  its  top  or 
plan  view,  Fig.  2,  is  a  longitudinal  section. 

A,  indicates  the  shuttle  body;  C,  C,  the  inclined 
bobbin-directing  plate,  and  B,  the  bobbin,  having  the 
rings  «. 

The  holder  to  engage  and  hold  the  bobbin  consists 
of  two  like  arms  C,  the  grooves  e,  being  so  inclined 
as  to  receive  and  hold  the  bobbin  with  its  tip  or 
delivery  end  «',  elevated  substantially  as  shown  111 
Fig.  2. 


COP-SKEWER  FOR  SHUTTLES  FOR 
NORTHROP  LOOMS. 

Cop-skewers  or  filling-carriers  for  shuttles  have 
heretofore  had  their  heads  provided  with  unyielding 
ribs  or  rings  which  were  adapted  to  enter  grooves 
in  springs  carried  by  shuttles. 


€    c  C 


The  self  or  automatic  threading  device  D,  has  a 
substantially  straight  slot  d\  at  one  side  of  which  is 
a  horn  rf2,  along  the  outer  side  of  which  is  a  space  d*, 
so  that  the  thread  t,  coming  into  the  slot  d',  to  get 
under  the  horn,  is  led  into  the  delivery-eye  d3. 
(Draper  Co.) 


In  "automatic  looms,"  the  "cop-skewers"  or  "filling- 
carriers"  are  transferred  rapidly  from  the  filling-carrier 
feeder  into  the  shuttle  while  the  loom  is  in  motion, 
and  much  trouble  has  been  experienced  therein  owing 
to  the  rapid  wearing  away  of  the  grooves  in  the 
shuttle-springs,  that  being  due  to  the  hard  unyielding 
rings  surrounding  the  head  of  the  skewer  or  filling- 
carrier. 

The  object  of  construction  of  the  new  device  is  the 
production  of  a  cop-skewer  or  filling-carrier  the  head 
of  which  is  capable  of  yielding  to  a  limited  extent 
when  being  inserted  into  the  shuttle  between  the  said 
springs,  such  construction  greatly  reducing  the  wear 
of  the  shuttle-spring  grooves.  To  effect  this  im- 
provement, the  metallic  head  of  the 
skewer  or  filling-carrier  has  been  sur- 
rounded with  a  wooden  split  ring,  and' 
the  head  of  the  filling-carrier  has  been 
provided  with  an  annular  groove  in 
which  this  split  shell  or  cylinder  is  lo- 
cated, the  shoulders  of  the  groove  pre- 
venting longitudinal  movement  of  the 
split  ring. 

Fig.  1,  represents  in  side  elevation  this 
new  cop-skewer  or  filling-carrier.  Fig. 
2,  is  a  vertical  sectional  view  of  the 
head,  the  blade  of  the  skewer  being  in 
elevation.  Fig.  3,  is  a  transverse  sec- 
tional view  of  the  head  on  the  line  x-x, 
Fig.  2. 

«,  is  the  skewer-blade  which  has  secured  thereto  a 
metallic  head  provided  at  its  ends  with  annular 
flanges  cl\  a*. 

A  wooden  split  shell  or  cylinder  &,  surrounds  the 
head  «'  between  the  flanges  thereof,  and  it  is  annu- 
larly  grooved,  as  at  &',  to  form  seats  for  the  encircling 


98 


metallic  split  rings  c,  which  enter  the  grooves  in  the 
shuttle  springs  or  jaws.  These  rings  retain  the  shell 
b  on  the  metal  head  «,  and  when  the  filling-carrier  is 
being  forced  into  the  shuttle-springs,  the  split  shell 
yielding  slightly  to  the  pressure,  thus  greatly  reduces 
the  wear  on  the  shuttle-springs. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  ends  of  the  wooden  shell  do 
not  abut  one  against  the  other,  and  therefore  the  shell 
has  a  capacity  of  yielding  somewhat  under  pressure 
put  upon  the  metallic  rings  c. 

Fig.  3  shows  the  ends  of  the  shell  as  separated  to 
permit  limited  amount  of  yielding  of  the  shell. 
(Draper  Co.) 


THE  LITCHFIELD  SHUTTLE. 

The  improvement  relates  to  the  spring  of  shuttles, 
which  holds  the  spindle  in  its  lowered  or  raised  posi- 
tion. 

In  the  ordinary  construction  of  the  spring  which 
engages  with  the  head  of  the  spindle,  the  spring  is 
liable  to  set  or  break  when  the  spindle  is  raised  by 


reason  of  the  strain  thereon.  This  setting  or  breaking 
of  the  spring  causes  considerable  trouble,  and  also 
expense  in  replacing  the  broken  springs  with  new  ones; 
and,  further,  the  screw  which  secures  the  spring  to 
the  shuttle,  by  reason  of  the  great  strain  on  it  when  the 
spindle  is  raised,  freqeuntly  breaks  or  pulls  out,  neces- 
sitating other  means  for  holding  the  spring.  The 
pressure  of  the  spring  during  the  operation  of  raising 
the  spindle  on  the  head  thereof  will  wear  the  corner 
of  the  head  very  fast,  so  that  the  point  of  contact 
of  the  spring  with  the  head  will  be  worn  back  to  a 
point  nearly  over  or  back  of  the  fulcrum-point  of  the 
head,  and  the  leverage  of  the  spindle  thus  being  lost, 
the  pressure  of  the  spring,  to  hold  the  spindle  in  its 
lowered  or  raised  position  will  be  practically  ineffec- 
tive, so  that  a  new  spindle  must  be  substituted. 

Other  objections  to  the  ordinary  construction  and 
shape  of  the  spring  which  bears  on  the  head  of  the 
spindle  to  hold  it  in  its  lowered  or  raised  position 
might  be  stated,  for  example,  by  increasing  the  lever- 
age of  the  spindle  by  placing  the  fulcrum-pin  farther 
from  the  point  of  contact  of  the  spring  with  the 
spindle-head,  or  by  increasing  the  pressure  of  the 
spring  by  screwing  in  the  holding  screw,  so  that  the 
spindle  will  be  more  firmly  held  down  in  the  shuttle- 
body  when  the  shuttle  is  in  motion.  The  strain  on 
the  spring  and  screw  when  the  spindle  is  raised  is 
also  increased  in  proportion,  which  is  very  objection- 
able for  the  reasons  before  stated. 

The  object  of  this  shuttle  is  to  provide  a  spring  which 


will  overcome  the  objections  before  stated;  and  the  im- 
provement consists  more  particularly  in  so  construct- 
ing the  spring  that  the  strain  thereon  will  be  re- 
lieved when  the  spindle  is  being  raised,  and  when  it 
is  in  its  raised  position,  and  the  leverage  of  the 
spindle,  and  the  pressure  of  the  spring  on  the  head 
of  the  spindle  can  be  increased  without  increasing 
the  strain  on  the  spring  and  screw  when  the  spindle 
is  raised. 

Referring  to  the  drawings,  Fig.  i,  is  a  plan  view  of 
one  end  of  a  loom-shuttle  provided  with  a  spring 
embodying  the  improvements.  Fig.  2,  is  a  central 
longitudinal  section  on  line  2,  Fig.  1.  Fig.  3,  corre- 
sponds to  Fig.  2,  but  shows  the  spindle  raised.  Fig. 
4,  show  a  spring  embodying  the  improvement  used 
in  connection  with  what  is  termed  the  "Baldwin-head" 
spindle.  Fig.  5,  corresponds  to  Fig.  4,  but  shows  the 
spindle  in  its  raised  position. 

A  description  of  the  improvement  is  best  given 
by  quoting  letters  of  references  along  with  explana- 
tions:— 1,  is  the  shuttle-body;  2,  is  the  spindle,  pro- 
vided with  a  head  2',  which  extends  in  a  recess  in 
the  body  of  the  shuttle  and  is  pivoted  on  a  pin  3,  ex- 
tending transversely  in  the  shuttle-body. 

4,  is  a  top  spring  embodying  the  improvement, 
which  extends  in  a  recess  in  the  top  of  the  shuttle- 
body,  and  is  secured  therein  by  a  screw  5. 

In  the  spring  4,  which  is  reversible,  the  ends  of  the 
spring  which  extend  over  and  engage  the  upper  side 
of  the  spindle-head  when  the  spindle  is  in  its  lowered 
position  are  made  bent,  or  provided  upon  their  in- 
clined surfaces  with  inclined  portions  4',  which  ex- 
tend at  an  angle  to  the  main  portion  of  the  spring, 
so  that  while  the  inner  surface  or  main  portion  of  the 
body  of  the  spring  extends  in  the  arc  of  one  circle 
the  inner  surface  of  the  ends  which  come  in  con- 
tact with  the  spindle-head,  lie  in  the  arc  of  another 
circle. 

By  this  construction  of  the  ends  of  the  spring  a 
recess  is  formed  to  receive  the  projecting  portion  of 
the  spindle-head,  and  lessen  the  pressure  or  strain  on 
the  spring  when  the  spindle  is  being  raised  and  held 
in  its  raised  position,  for  as  soon  as  the  top  point 
of  the  head  of  the  spindle  passes  by  the  point  or 
extreme  end  of  the  spring  it  follows  the  curve  or 
incline  on  the  end  of  the  spring  until  it  reaches  the 
inner  end  of  said  incline  when  it  is  in  its  raised  posi- 
tion, as  shown  in  Fig.  3,  and  in  this  position  the  end 
of  the  spring  is  not  raised  to  strain  or  break  the  spring 
or  pull  out  the  attaching-screw,  but  is  substantially  in 
its  normal  position.  Moreover,  by  this  construction 
the  upper  corner  of  the  spindle-head  is  not  worn 
and  rounded,  so  as  to  bring  the  point  of  bearing  of 
the  spring  on  the  head  of  the  spindle  back  over  the 
fulcrum.  At  the  same  time  the  fulcrum-pin  may  be 
set  farther  from  the  point  of  contact  of  the  spring 
with  the  spindle-head  to  increase  the  leverage,  or  the 
attaching-screw  may  be  screwed  in  to  increase  the 
pressure  of  the  end  of  the  spring  on  the  spindle-head 
without  causing  the  end  of  the  spring  to  be  raised 
any  higher  when  the  spindle  is  in  its  raised  position. 

In  Figs.  4,  and  5,  is  shown  what  is  termed  a  "Bald- 
win-head" spindle  and  a  spring  embodying  the  pres- 
ent improvement  combined  therewith.  The  spring  is 
attached  to  the  lower  side  of  the  shuttle  instead  of 
the  upper  side,  as  in  the  case  of  the  spring  4,  and  acts 
upon  the  spindle-head  to  hold  it  in  its  raised  or 
lowered  position  below  and  back  of  the  fulcrum  point 
of  the  spindle-head.  The  upper  edge  of  the  spindle- 
head,  when  the  spindle  is  in  its  raised  position,  strikes 
against  the  body  of  the  shuttle  and  limits  the  raising 
of  the  spindle.  In  said  Figs.  4,  and  5,  the  spindle  10, 
is  provided  with  a  head  10',  ordinarily  termed  the 
"Baldwin-head."  A  transverse  pin  11,  forms  the  ful- 
crum of  the  spindle. 


99 


The  spring  12,  embodying  the  present  improve- 
ment is  secured  in  the  under  side  of  the  shuttle-body 
by  the  attaching-screw  5,  and  is  in  this  instance  pro- 
vided with  a  catch  12'  at  its  end  which  extends  into 
the  circumferential  groove  in  the  bobbin.  The  spring 
12,  is  provided  with  a  recess  12"  therein  for  the  pur- 
pose of  relieving  the  strain  on  the  spring  when  the 
spindle  is  being  raised  and  is  in  its  raised  position, 
as  shown  in  Fig.  5.  That  portion  of  the  spring 
just  back  of  the  recess   12",  bears  on  the  spindle- 


head  back  and  below  the  fulcrum-point  thereof 
when  the  spindle  is  in  its  lowered  position,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  4. 

When  the  spindle  is  being  raised,  the  lower  corner, 
or  point  10"  of  the  head  thereof  follows  down  the 
outward  incline  or  depression  in  the  spring  formed 
by  the  recess  12"  therein,  and  extends  into  said  recess. 
When  the  spindle  is  in  its  raised  position,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  5,  the  inclined  portion  of  the  recess  bears  on 
the  inclined  edge  of  the  spindle-head  below  and  back 
of  its  fulcrum-point,  and  forces  the  upper  edge  of  the 
spindle  against  the  shuttle-body,  as  shown  in  Fig.  5. 

By  means  of  the  bend  in  the  spring  forming  the 
recess  12",  the  same  results  are  accomplished  with 
the  Baldwin-head  spindle  than  that  accomplished  with 
the  spring  4  in  connection  with  the  ordinary  spindle- 
head;  that  is,  the  strain  on  the  spring  is  relieved  when 
the  spindle  is  in  its  raised  position.  At  the  same  time 
the  leverage  of  the  spindle  can  be  increased  by  plac- 
ing the  fulcrum-pin  farther  from  the  point  of  contact 
of  the  spindle  and  spring,  or  the  pressure  of  the  spring 
can  be  increased  by  screwing  in  the  attaching-screw 
5,  without  increasing  the  strain  on  the  spring  to  any 
extent,  and,  further,  the  wearing  of  the  lower  corner, 
or  end  of  the  spindle-head,  is  prevented  from  the  rais- 
ing and  lowering  of  the  spindle,  as  is  the  case  in  the 
old  form  of  spring  used  in  connection  with  the  Bald- 
win-head spindle.  (Litchfield  Shuttle  Company,  South- 
bridge,  Mass.) 


the  head  and  having  a  flange  or  tongue  G,  which  is 
adapted  to  enter  a  groove  in  the  bobbin  for  securing 
the  latter  on  the  spindle. 

Bearing  against  the  under  side  of  the  rear  or  heel 
end  of  the  catch  F,  is  a  spring  H,  which  is  seated  on 
the  head  C,  and  serves  to  hold  the  tongue  end  of  the 
catch  in  engaging  contact  with  the  bobbin. 

J,  represents  a  knuckle  freely  fitted  within  the  body 
A,  consisting  of  a  partly-cylindrical  piece  forming  a 
journal  <£,  an  outwardly-projecting  lip  b,  and  a  longi- 
tudinally-extending stem  c.  In  the  back  of  the  head 
C,  is  a  circular  recess  d,  which  receives  the  journal  a, 
of  the  knuckle,  said  journal  being  pressed  against  the 
head  C,  by  means  of  a  spring  K,  which  bears  against 
the  knuckle  and  a  proper  part  of  the  body,  so  that  the 
pressure  of  the  spring  is  exerted  against  the  head  C, 
for  holding  the  spindle  B  in  position.  The  lip  &,  of 
the  knuckle  extends  at  an  angle  to  the  heel  of  the 
catch  F,  and  is  so  disposed  that  when  the  spindle  is 
thrown  out  said  heel  engages  with  the  lip  and  motion 
is  imparted  to  the  catch,  so  that  the  front  end,  or 
tongue  G,  thereof  is  raised  clear  of  the  bobbin. 

When  the  bobbin  is  to  be  removed,  the  spindle  is 
thrown  out,  and  the  heel  of  the  catch  then  reaches 
the  lip  of  the  knuckle  and  impacts  against  the  same 
as  a  deflector.  The  knuckle  slightly  yields,  so  as  to 
prevent  binding  of  the  parts,  and  the  catch  is  forced 
toward  the  head  C,  whereby  the  opposite  tongue  end 
is  raised,  and  the  tongue  emerges  from  the  groove  in 
the  bobbin.  As  the  bobbin  is  now  uncontrolled  by  the 
catch,  it  may  readily  be  withdrawn  from  the  spindle. 

It  will  be  seen  that  owing  to  the  knuckle  the  catch 
is  thrown  out,  and  said  catch  is  prevented  from  bear- 
ing against  the  wall  of  the  slot  in  the  body  in  which 
it  plays  and  breaking  out  said  wall,  the  body  thus 
being  preserved  intact. 

When  the  bobbin  is  restored  to  the  spindle,  or  a 
fresh  bobbin  applied  thereto,  the  spindle  is  returned 
into  the  body  of  the  shuttle,  and  as  the  catch  is  re- 


CJaAC 


SEEGESON'S  SHUTTLE. 

In  this  shuttle  a  catch  for  holding  a  bobbin  is  pro- 
vided, the  same  being  released  by  throwing  up  the 
spindle.  The  catch  is  so  constructed  that  a  pivot- 
pin  therefor  is  dispensed  with,  and  provision  is  made 
for  preventing  the  catch  when  thrown  up  from  break- 
ing out  the  shuttle. 

Fig.  1,  represents  a  top  or  plan  view  of  a  portion  of 
this  shuttle.  Fig.  2,  represents  a  longitudinal  section 
thereof.  Fig.  3,  represents  a  longitudinal  section 
showing  the  parts  in  different  positions  from  those 
shown  in  Fig.  2. 

A,  represents  the  body  of  the  shuttle.  B,  the  spin- 
dle for  holding  the  bobbin,  the  same  being  secured 
to  a  head  C,  which  is  pivoted  to  the  body,  whereby 
the  spindle  may  be  thrown  out  and  in.  In  the  upper 
part  of  the  head  C,  is  an  opening  D,  which  receives 
the  pivot  E  of  a  catch  F,  the  latter  projecting  over 


leased  of  the  pressing  action  of  the  knuckle  or  de- 
flector J,  it  returns  to  its  normal  position,  the  tongue 
G  then  entering  the  groove  in  the  bobbin,  so  that 
the  catch  engages  with  the  bobbin,  and  the  bobbin  is 
firmly  held  on  the  spindle,  the  latter  retaining  its  posi- 
tion in  the  body  owing  to  the  action  of  the  spring  K. 

The  pivot  E,  of  the  catch  F,  is  integral  therewith, 
and  is  formed  by  bending  the  metal  of  the  same  in 
partly-cylindrical  form,  leaving  a  contracted  portion 


100 


or  neck  </',  at  the  place  of  meeting  of  the  catch  and 
pivot.  The  outer  end  of  the  opening  D,  in  the  head 
C,  is  also  contracted,  as  at  e,  and  receives  the  neck 
d',  of  the  catch. 

The  pivot  is  inserted  in  the  opening  D,  at  the  side 
of  the  latter,  and  owing  to  the  contracted  portion  e, 
of  said  opening,  the  pivot  is  prevented  from  being 
displaced,  said  pivot  turning  freely  on  the  wall  of  the 
opening  as  its  bearings,  and  a  separate  or  loose  pivot- 
pin  being  obviated. 

The  lower  portion  of  the  head  C,  is  provided  with 
a  shoulder  or  projection  adapted  to  be  brought  in 
contact  with  the  body  of  the  shuttle  when  the  spindle 
is  thrown  in,  so  as  to  limit  the  movement  thereof. 
(James  C.  Sergeson,  Philadelphia.) 


being  also  prevented  from  rotating  in  reverse  direc- 
tion, as  its  head  is  controlled  by  the  wall  of  the  open- 
ing K,  and  the  boss  L. 

When  the  plate  B  is  forced  inwardly  against  the 
spring  E,  the  head  J  of  the  screw  H,  is  uncovered, 
when  the  same  may  be  engaged  by  a  suitable  key, 
and  rotated  to  remove  the  screw  H,  and  consequently 
said  plate,  the  same  provision  existing  when  said 
plate  is  to  be  restored  to  position,  the  head  being 
caused  to  register  with  the  opening  K,  the  plate  then 
being  let  go,  whereby  the  wall  of  said  opening  and 
boss  L,  again  embraces  the  head  of  the  screw.  The 
plate  F,  has  a  boss  similar  to  that  of  the  plate  B,  and 
the  screw  F',  is  formed  with  an  angular  head  similar 
to  the  screw  H.    (James  C.  Sergeson,  Philadelphia.) 


ANOTHER  SERGESON'S  SHUTTLE. 

The  improvements  in  this  shuttle  consist  in  having 
a  catch  plate  for  engagement  with  the  bobbin,  formed 
with  an  angular  and  tapering  opening,  and  a  screw 
which  is  provided  with  an  angular  and  tapering 
head,  said  plate  having  on  its  inner  surface  a  boss 
which  is  continuous  of  the  wall 
thereof,  and  having  its  opening  co- 
inciding with  that  of  the  plate,  where- 
by the  screw  is  prevented  from  rotat- 
ing itself  loose,  it  having  a  broad 
bearing  on  said  plate,  and  its  hold  on 
the  body  is  firm  and  secure  without 
the  employment  of  a  nut  for  such  purpose 


SERGESON'S  COP-SHUTTLE. 

The  special  feature  of  this  shuttle  consists  in  so 
constructing  the  same  that  when  yarn,  thread  or 
stock  is  used  therein  in  wet  condition,  in  the  shape 


The  accompanying  illustration  represents  a  longi- 
tudinal section  of  a  portion  of  this  shuttle. 

A,  designates  the  body  of  a  shuttle;  B,  the  catch 
plate,  which  is  connected  with  the  part  B',  of  the  body 
of  the  shuttle,  and  has  at  one  end  a  nose  C,  for  en- 
gagement with  an  angular  groove  on  the  head  of  the 
bobbin  D,  whereby  the  latter  is  held  in  operative 
position,  the  other  end  of  said  catch  plate  being 
pressed  outwardly  by  the  spring  E,  which  bears 
against  said  catch,  and  the  opposite  spindle-holding 
plate  F,  on  the  heel  ends  thereof,  said  plate  F,  exert- 
ing pressure  on  the  pivoted  head  G,  of  the  spindle. 

The  plate  F,  is  adapted  to  bear  upon  one  face  of 
the  spindle  head  to  hold  the  spindle  in  proper  align- 
ment in  the  shuttle,  and  upon  another  face  of  the 
head  when  the  spindle  is  raised  to  hold  it  in  position 
to  change  the  bobbin. 

H,  designates  the  bolt  or  screw  which  connects  the 
catch  plate  with  the  body  of  the  shuttle,  the  same 
having  an  angular  head  J,  the  latter  occupying  a 
countersunk  opening  K,  in  said  plate,  whereby  the 
latter  is  permitted  to  rock  or  oscillate  lightly  on  said 
head  as  the  bobbin  engages  with  and  disengages  from 
the  nose  C.  The  walls  of  the  opening  K  are  extended 
inwardly,  forming  the  boss  L,  whose  opening  is  con- 
tinuous of  said  opening  J,  and  whose  wall  is  both 


F  F  j£ 


angular  and  tapering,  like  a  truncated  pyramid.  The 
head  of  the  screw  coincides  in  its  angle  and  tapers 
with  the  walls  of  said  opening  and  boss,  and  occupies 
the  opening  of  both  the  plate  and  the  boss,  whereby 
it  has  an  increased  holding  surface  on  the  catch 
plate,  and  the  material  of  said-  catch  around  said  open- 
ing K  is  vastly  strengthened  at  a  place  where  the 
plate   is    subjected  to  considerable  strain,  the  screw 


of  cops,  the  body  of  the  shuttle  is  prevented  from 
warping  or  becoming  injuriously  irregular  on  its  outer 
face. 

Fig.  I,  represents  a  top  or  plan  view  of  this  shuttle. 
Fig.  2,  represents  a  transverse  section  thereof,  on  an 
enlarged  scale,  on  line  x  xt  Fig.  i.  Fig.  3,  represents 
a  perspective  view  of  a  detached  portion  thereof. 

The  inner  face  of  the  side  and  base  of  the  body  A, 
of  the  shuttle  has  grooves  B,  formed  therein,  the  same 
receiving  the  braces  or  stays  C,  which  consist  of 
somewhat  V-shaped  pieces  of  metal.  The  side  limbs 
D,  of  said  stays  have  projecting  flanges  thereon,  so 
as  to  make  said  limbs  T-shape  in  cross-section,  and 
the  sides  grooves  B,  are  similarly  shaped,  so  that  said 
limbs  which  occupy  said  side  grooves  are  interlocked 
with  the  side  wall  A',  of  the  body  of  the  shuttle, 
thus  preventing  said  walls  from  springing  apart  and 
warping  or  materially  warping.  Again  there  depends 
from  the  limbs  D,  the  legs  E,  which  enter  the 
grooves  F,  in  the  side  portion  of  the  base  G,  of  the 
body  of  the  shuttle.  Hence,  as  the  limbs  D,  are 
connected  at  bottom  by  the  webs  H,  of  the  stays, 
said  legs  E,  serve  to  resist  the  tendency  of  the  base 
of  the  bottom  to  swell  or  expand  laterally.  By 
these  means  the  shape  of  the  body  of  the  shuttle  is 
preserved  and  caused  to  run  true  in  the  raceway 
which  it  occupies.    (James  C.  Sergeson,  Philadelphia.) 


SUTCLIFFE  &  MARSHALL'S  SHUTTLE. 

The  advantage  of  this  shuttle  consists  in  the  im- 
proved method  of  holding  the  bobbin  spindle  in  the 
shuttle  where  such  spindle  is  made  removable  for  the 
purpose  of  changing  an  empty  bobbin  for  a  full  one. 


101 


Fig.  I,  shows  a  vertical  section  of  this  shuttle,  taken 
lengthwise  through  its  centre  with  the  spindle  in  ele- 
vation. Fig.  2,  shows  the  same  parts  as  Fig.  i,  with 
the  spindle  turned  up  in  position  to  be  removed 
to  change  the  bobbin.  Fig.  3,  represents  the  spindle 
and  bobbin  separate  from  the  socket,  which  remains 


in  the  shuttle  when  the  bobbin  is  changed.  Fig. 
4,  is  a  side  elevation  of  the  socket  that  holds  the 
spindle.  Fig.  5,  shows  the  under  side  of  the  socket. 
Fig.  6,  is  a  cross-section  of  the  socket  taken  on  the 
line  X-X,  Fig.  4.    Fig.  7,  is  a  separate  view  of  plate  s. 

A,  indicates  the  body  of  the  shuttle  made  of  wood, 
and  protected  at  each  end  by  steel  points.  C,  is  the 
spindle  that  holds  the  bobbin,  and  which  is  made  re- 
movable to  facilitate  changing  the  empty  bobbin  for 
a  full  one  when  run  out. 

li,  is  the  socket  made  to  hold  the  spindle  C,  in  the 
shuttle,  and  which  has  a  hole  e,  made  through  it 
sidewise  at  the  lower  part  of  its  rear  end  to  receive 
a  pivot  d,  held  on  both  sides  in  the  wood  of  the 
shuttle-body,  and  on  which  it  turns  when  raised  as 
shown  in  Fig.  2.  A  hole  r  is  made  through  the 
socket  lengthwise  to  receive  the  spindle  C,  and  a 
wide  slot  nt  (see  Fig.  5)  is  made  through  the  under 
side  of  the  socket  into  the  hole  r,  for  about  two- 
thirds  of  its  length  from  the  front  end  to  receive  a 
raised  spline  c,  made  on  the  under  side  of  a  portion 
of  the  spindle  that  enters  the  socket.  This  spline  c, 
is  for  the  purpose  of  preventing  the  spindle  from 
turning,  and  as  a  guide  in  entering  the  spindle  in  the 
socket  properly.  The  wood  t,  of  the  shuttle-body 
under  the  socket  6,  is  cut  out  in  a  stepped  form  to 
receive  the  metal  plate  s,  which  is  held  in  place  by 
a  screw  entering  the  wood  beneath.  The  plate  S, 
forms  a  step  or  notch  /,  to  receive  a  block  9,  made 
on  the  back  end  of  the  spline  c,  which  shuts  into 
it  when  the  spindle  is  pushed  down,  as  in  Fig.  1, 
and  prevents  it  from  coming  out  of  the  socket. 

The  spline  e,  in  front  of  the  block  9,  projects  out  of 
the  slot  in  the  socket  and  rests  on  the  plate  s,  to  assist 
in  keeping  the  spindle  steady  and  from  wearing 
loose.  A  button  is  made  fast  on  the  free  end  of 
the  spindle  C,  consisting  of  a  body  to  enter  the  end 
of  the  bobbin  and  a  flange  or  head  that  projects,  so 
as  to  protect  the  thread  from  being  injured  by  the 
rough  end  of  the  bobbin  when  it  is  pulled  off  over 
the  end  in  weaving.  A  flat  stiff  spring  h,  of  the 
usual  form  is  held  on  the  top  of  the  shuttle  by  a 
screw  through  its  middle,  screwing  in  the  wood,  with 
the  front  end  of  the  spring  resting  on  the  socket  6. 
just  in  front  of  the  pivot  d,  so  as  to  hold  the  spindle 
down  when  in  use. 

To  change  the  bobbin  ",  the  spindle  C  is  raised, 
as  in  Fig.  2.  Then  the  spindle,  with  the  bobbin  on 
it,  is  taken  from  the  socket.  The  spindle  is  then 
drawn  out  of  the  bobbin  by  the  button  /',  and  in- 
serted in  the  full  bobbin  and  then  put  back  into  the 


socket  and  turned  down  again,  as  in  Fig.  1.  (T.  Sut- 
cliffe  and  J.  Marshall,  Pawtucket,  R.  I.) 


MORRISON'S  SHUTTLE. 

Fig.  1,  is  a  view  of  the  blank  from  which  the 
shuttle-frame  is  made.  Fig.  2,  is  a  plan  view,  of  the 
complete  shuttle-frame. 

An  explanation  of  the  construction  of  this  new  shut- 
tle is  best  given  by  quoting  letters  and  numerals  of  ref- 
erence of  which  A,  represents  a  blank,  rectangular 
plate  of  thin  sheet-steel  having  a  slot  a  in  its  centre. 
Each  end  of  the  blank  is  cut  so  as  to  form  three  points 
1,  1,  2.  The  blank  is  then  bent  up  on  the  lines  3,  3,  so 
as  to  form  the  rectangular  open  frame  of  the  shuttle, 
said  frame  comprising  a  bottom  4.  and  sides  5.  The 
points  1,  1,  2,  at  the  respective  ends  of  the  frame  are 
brought  together  and  brazed  to  form  the  pointed 
ends  of  the  shuttle-frame.  The  brazed  joints  be- 
tween the  meeting  edges  of  the  points  1,  1,  2,  are 
slightly  rounded  and  made  perfectly  smooth. 

Between  the  sides  5,  a  brace  6,  is  located  near  one 
end  of  the  frame,  the  sides  of  the  frame  at  the  other 
end  thereof  being  braced  by  the  transverse  pins  or 
bars  with  which  the  spool-holder  is  connected.  The 


edge  7,  of  the  brace  is  curved  so  as  to  be  out  of 
line  with  the  sides  of  the  frame,  and  the  edges  of 
said  sides  5,  are  slightly  rounded,  so  as  to  avoid  all 
possibility  of  the  warp-threads  being  cut  by  them. 
It  will  be  observed  that  those  portions  of  the  sides 


102 


of  the  frame  which  constitute  parts  of  the  pointed 
ends  of  said  frame  are  so  shaped  that  their  edges  8, 
will  be  beveled  or  inclined  and  said  pointed  ends 
will  therefore  be  nearly  conical. 

W  ithin  the  extremities  of  the  pointed  ends  of  the 
frame,  steel  blocks  or  tips  9  are  brazed,  and  the 
upper  faces  of  said  blocks  or  tips  will  be  made 
smooth  and  exactly  flush  with  the  edges  8,  of  the 
frame,  so  as  to  expose  no  projection  whatever,  which 
can  catch  or  engage  the  warp-threads. 

In  order  to  further  guard  against  the  engagement 
of  the  warp-threads  by  the  inner  ends  of  the  blocks 
or  tips  9,  said  inner  ends  are  beveled  or  rounded,  as 
shown,  at  10. 

By  making  the  walls  of  the  frame  thin,  the  amount 
of  frictional  contact  of  the  shuttle  with  the  warp- 
threads  and  parts  of  the  loom  will  be  reduced  to  a 
minimum. 

Another  advantage  of  thin  walls  of  the  frame  is, 
that  the  space  within  the  frame  will  be  enlarged, 
thus  permitting  the  use  of  a  large  amount  of  thread 
on  the  spool  when  the  latter  is  first  inserted  into 
the  shuttle-frame.  The  improved  shuttle-frame  is  a 
mere  shell  of  steel  and  is  open  from  tip  to  tip,  and 
by  thus  making  the  frame  open  the  frictional  surface 
is  still  further  reduced. 

This  shuttle-frame  cannot  chip,  splinter,  or  break, 
and  there  are  no  exposed  points  or  connections  and 
consequently  nothing  to  catch  or  injure  the  warp- 
threads.    {Thomas  Morrison,  WilUamsport,  Penna.) 


NASON'S  SELF-THREADING  SHUTTLE. 

Fig.  1,  is  a  view,  in  perspective,  of  the  front  end 
of  this  shuttle.  Fig.  2,  is  a  plan,  and  Fig.  3,  an  ele- 
vation of  the  same,  and  Fig.  4,  a  cross-section  on 
lines  4-4  of  Figs.  2  and  3. 

A,  is  the  feeding  pin  preferably  in  one  piece  with 


the  eye  «.  The  thread  from  the  bobbin  must  be 
passed  about  that  pin  and  thereby  guided  into  the 
eye.  The  groove  H,  is  at  its  front  end  at  the  middle 
line  of  the  shuttle,  but  the  mouth  of  the  groove  H, 
slants  away  from  that  line  as  shown  in  Fig.  2,  and 
the  walls  of  the  groove  also  slant  inward  from  top 
to  bottom,  as  plainly  shown  in  Fig.  4;  and  it  is  this 


groove,  doubly  slanted,  as  above  described,  which 
constitutes  the  main  feature  of  the  improvement  in 
the  construction  of  this  shuttle.    With  such  a  groove 


the  thread  will  when  led  from  the  bobbin  and  along 
the  groove  as  shown  in  Fig.  2,  be  brought  into 
proper  relation  with  the  feeding  pin  A;  and  while 
this  is  a  practical  advantage  of  some  consequence, 
because  it  makes  it  easier  for  the  weaver  to  bring 
the  thread  into  proper  relation  with  the  feeding  pin 
A,  it  also  facilitates  the  slipping  of  the  thread  down 
the  feeding  pin  to  cause  a  bight  in  the  eye  «,  as 
clearly  shown  in  Fig.  1.  The  slanting  of  this  groove 
inward  also  enables  a  guide  pin  B,  to  be  used  in  the 
thread  passage. 

To  thread  the  shuttle,  the  thread  is  led  from  the 
bobbin  through  groove  H,  and  is  thereby  brought 
to  the  proper  side  of  the  feeding  pin  A,  (see  Fig. 
2)  and  the  free  end  of  the  thread  is  then  pulled  side- 
wise,  to  form  a  bight  about  the  feeding  pin,  and 
then  back  through  the  groove  H,  to  cause  it  to  fol- 
low down  the  feeding  pin  A,  and  form 


the  bight  through  the  eye  «,  as  clearly 
shown  in  Fig.  1.  This  bight  is  then 
caught  by  a  wiping  motion  of  the  fing- 
ers, and  the  free  end  of  the  thread  pulled 
through  the  eye  as  shown  in  Fig.  3. 


fkr-V.  The  whole  operation  is  performed 
rapidly  and  with  certainty  by  reason  of 
the  relation  of  the  doubly  slanted  groove  H,  to  the 
feeding  pin  A. 

When  the  shuttle  is  in  use  the  thread  extends  from 
the  bobbin  through  the  space  between  the  guide  pin 
B,  and  that  part  of  the  shuttle  body,  which  forms  the 
inner  wall  of  groove  H,  and  thence  out  of  the  eye  «. 

The  angle  formed  in  the  thread  by  the  guide  pin  B, 
serves  as  a  light  tension,  and  this  tension  may  be 
increased  by  a  fibrous  washer  b,  as  shown  in  Fig.  4. 
{Joseph,  Herbert  Nason,  Somerville,  Mass.) 


ALLEN'S  TWO-BOBBIN  SHUTTLE. 

This  shuttle,  while  capable  of  application  to  weav- 
ing generally,  is  especially  adapted  to  the  weaving 
of  silk  fabrics,  and  generally  to  that  class  of  silk 
fabrics,  which  may  be  designated  as  "changeable," 
"iridescent"  or  "cameleon,"  such  fabrics  being  gen- 
erally composed  of  three  differing  colors,  one  of  said 
colors  being  supplied  by  the  warp  and  the  other  two 
by  the  filling. 

To  produce  the  optical  effect  peculiar  to  this  kind 
of  silk  fabrics,  the  filling  threads  are  necessarily  woven 
in  parallel  relation  and  have  a  regular  and  uniform 
alternation  of  color.  This  effect  has  been  previously 
accomplished  by  the  use  of  two  separate  shuttles  in 
a  loom  of  the  drop-box  type;  the  employment  of  said 
separate  shuttles  being  necessary  to  avoid  the  twist- 
ing, mixing  or  tangling  of  the  two  threads,  the  occur- 
ence of  which,  even  in  a  slight  degree,  is  fatal  to  the 
peculiar  effect  desired.  By  means  of  this  two-bobbin 
shuttle,  the  extra  shuttle,  as  formerly  required,  is  dis- 
pensed with,  and,  consequently,  we  are  enabled  to 
employ  for  the  manufacture  of  the  fabrics  thus  re- 
ferred to  a  single-box-loom.  The  improved  shuttle 
has  two  bobbins  which  feed  simultaneously  two  filler 
threads  at  the  point  of  delivery  from  the  shuttle,  and 
thus  insures  the  same  result  as  that  attained  by  the 
employment  of  the  two  separate  shuttles  in  the  drop- 
box-loom. 

Aside  from  the  great  economy  incidental  to  the  use 
of  the  single-box-loom  as  compared  with  the  use  of 
the  box-loom,  the  extra  shuttle  is  dispensed  with 
and  the  output  of  the  loom  is  greatly  increased. 
Moreover,  we  are  enabled  to  attain  by  the  perform- 
ance of  this  shuttle  an  improved  product,  owing  to 
the  maintenance  of  parallelism  of  the  filling  threads 
throughout  the  body  of  the  fabric  and  the  conse- 


103 


quent  regular  and  uniform  alternation  of  color.  In 
addition  to  these  advantages  the  plain  type  of  loom 
employed,  is  more  readily  controlled  and  can  be  ope- 
rated at  less  expense  than  a  loom  of  the  drop-box 
type.  For  a  clear  understanding  of  this  ingenious 
shuttle  the  accompanying  illustrations  are  given,  of 
which  Fig.  A,  is  a  plan  view  of  the  improved  shuttle. 
Fig.  B,  is  a  side  elevation  partly  broken  away.  Fig. 

C,  is  a  sectional  view  on  line  X-x,  of  Fig.  A,  and  Fig. 

D,  is  a  sectional  view  on  line  V-ll,  of  same  figure. 

A  description  of  the  construction  of  this  shuttle 
is  best  explained  by  quoting  letters  of  reference,  of 
which  A,  denotes  the  shuttle-body,  provided  with  the 
recess  «,  made  of  sufficient  length  to  accommodate 
two  bobbins  BB'  which  are  mounted  on  tongues  pivot- 


ally  arranged.  The  said  bobbins  lie  in  position  end 
to  end  and  deliver  the  threads  centrally  of  the  shut- 
tle, at  which  point  the  body  is  provided  with  a  thread- 
delivery  eye  c,  vertically  arranged  in  an  enlargement 
a',  of  one  of  the  side  walls  of  the  body,  said  eye 
being  located  centrally  between  the  ends  of  the  shut- 
tles, but  to  one  side  of  the  line  thereof.  Secured  to 
one  side  of  the  shuttle  is  a  semi-circular  guard  d, 
and  a  strip  e,  is  interposed  between  the  side  of  the 
body  and  the  guard  to  serve  as  a  means  for  holding 
rigidly  two  thread-tubes  f,  <>,  lined  with  porcelain, 
and  at  their  inner  ends  extend  to  a  point  in  line  with 
the  bobbins.  The  tube  f,  extends  to  and  through  the 
guard;  but  the  tube  .'/,  terminates  short  thereof. 

In  threading  the  shuttle,  the  thread  b  from  the 
bobbin  B,  is  passed  directly  through  the  tube  f,  being 
thereby  delivered  at  a  point  some  distance 
from  the  body  of  the  shuttle.  The  other 
thread  V,  of  the  bobbin  B',  is  first  passed 
through  the  tube  .'/,  and  from  thence  to  and 
through  the  eye  o,  the  point  of  its  delivery 
being  thereby  within  the  side  of  the  shuttle 
adjacent  to  the  point  of  delivery  of  the 
thread  b,  and  same  distance  from  the  latter. 
By  this  means  threads  are  not  only  fed  or 
delivered  in  a  separate  condition,  but  the 
separation  is  maintained  by  reason  of  the 
initial  distance  between  the  points  of  de- 
livery until  the  weaving  actually  takes  place. 
There  is  no  contact  until  the  threads  are 
in  the  cloth,  and  hence  there  is  no 
twisting  nor  tangling,  as  would  be  the 
case  were  the  threads  delivered  from  the  same  eye 
(The  Rettyer  Allen  Co.,  Paterson,  N.  J.) 


<i,  represents  the  shuttle-body  provided  with  a  lon- 
gitudinal chamber  6,  in  the  top  thereof  and  with  an 
elongated  slot       in  its  front  portion. 

In  the  shuttle-body  and  at  one  end  of  the  chamber 
b,  is  arranged  a  horizontal  hole  or  recess  c,  closed 
by  a  centrally-perforated  plate  or  disk  0,  through 
which  one  end  of  the  bobbin  shaft  or  rod  f,  is  adapted 
to  pass.  Said  shaft  bears  against  the  plate  e,  resting 
on  the  spiral  spring  d,  arranged  in  said  hole  or  recess. 
The  other  end  of  said  shaft  is  bent  upward  at  an  acute 
angle,  as  at  f,  and  is  adapted  to  engage  a  vertically- 
arranged  recesss  «',  having  its  inner  back  wall  at  an 
acute  angle  to  its  bottom.  On  said  shaft  is  slidingly 
arranged  the  bobbin  </',  carrying  the  thread  or  threads 
i,  which  bobbin  is  normally  held  and  controlled  by 
means  of  the  spiral  springs  /*,  and 
arranged  on  and  surrounding  the  un- 
occupied portions  of  the  shaft  f.  On 
the  front  portion  of  the  shuttle-body 
",  and  in  alinement  with  the  elongated 
slot  ft',  is  secured  the  shuttle  bow  m, 
provided  in  its  culminating  point  with 
the  horizontally-arranged  eye  m'. 
Within  said  bow  is  arranged,  and 
secured  thereto  by  means  of  its  de- 
pending ends  n\  and  n\  a  bridge  », 
parallel  to  the  shaft  1,  and  provided 
in  its  centre  with  an  eye  »'.  The  ends 
nr,  and  n\  are  each  provided  with  an 
opening  penetrated  by  its  respective  spiral  spring  o, 
and  P,  secured  with  their  outer  ends  to  and  within  the 
end  portions  of  the  bow  or  conductor,  and  are  provided 
at  their  ends  with  loops  o',  and  [>',  respectively,  form- 
ing passages  for  the  thread  or  threads  i.  Said  thread 
or  threads  pass  from  the  bobbin  through  eye  re',  into 
and  through  loop  o',  from  whence  into  and  through 
loop  V',  and  finally  leave  the  shuttle  after  passing 
through  the  eye  in  the  bow  or  conductor  »*,  as 
clearly  shown  in  Fig.  I. 

In  placing  the  bobbin  in  position  the  rounded  end 
of  the  shaft  1,  is  inserted  through  the  perforated  plate 
V,  into  the  recess  c,  and  the  spiral  spring  is  depressed 
sufficient  to  allow  the  insertion  of  the  bent-up  por- 


2 


< 


s' 


TODD'S  SHUTTLE  FOR  NARROW  WARE 
LOOMS. 

The  novelty  of  the  shuttle  consists  in  its  tension 
and  bobbin  holding  and  controlling  device,  being  a 
spring  which  holds  the  bobbin  from  rotating  too  fast. 
Fig.  i,  is  a  plan  view  of  this  shuttle  and  its  tension 
and  bobbin  holding  and  controlling  device  and  Fig. 
2.  a  front  elevation  of  Fig.  i. 


tion  f,  of  shaft  f,  into  the  recesss  «'.  When  said 
shaft  is  released,  it  remains  locked  within  the  cham- 
ber 6.  The  spiral  springs  h,  and  normally  hold 
the  bobbin  in  position,  but  are  so  adjusted  that  said 
bobbin  can  move  from  one  side  to  the  other  when  the 
shuttle,  for  instance,  is  thrown  over  the  race,  and  is 
suddenly  stopped  in  its  movement  by  the  box  on  the 
loom,  by  which  arrangement  breakage  is  avoided, 
and  yet  the  proper  tension  is  maintained.  The 
spiral  springs  0,  and  serve  also  as  take-up  or  ten- 
sion devices  and  thus  prevent  a  breaking  or  looping 
of  the  thread.    {Walter  Todd,  Paterson,  N.  J.) 


104 


DAUDELIN'S  SELF-THREADING  TENSION 
DEVICE  FOR  SHUTTLES. 

This  device  is  shown  in  the  accompanying  illustra- 
tions, of  which  Fig.  I,  represents  a  top  plan  view  of 
the  portion   of  a   shuttle  containing  the  threading 


mechanism.  Fig.  2,  is  a  side  elevation  of  the  same. 
Fig.  3,  is  a  detail  perspective  view  of  the  threading 
plate,  its  securing  devices,  and  the  thread-tension 
device. 

In  order  to  thread  the  shuttle  but  two  movements 
are  necessary.  The  thread  is  drawn  forward  longi- 
tudinally of  the  shuttle  until  it  is  caught  beneath  the 
upturned  end  c  of  plate  C,  and  conducted  thereby 
into  the  semi-circular  threading  passage  formed 
beneath  the  plate  C,  between  said  plate  and  the 
upper  surface  of  the  shuttle  body,  and  is  then  drawn 
laterally  toward  the  side  on  which  the  thread-delivery 
eye  is  located.  This  latter  movement  causes  the 
thread  to  find  the  vertical  threading  slit  a4,  which 
takes  it  directly  into  the  delivery  eye.  As  the  thread 
is  paid  out  it  is  drawn  into  engagement  with  the 
tension  device  E,  and  made  to  engage  the  inclined 
edge  c5,  of  the  plate  C,  which  guides  it  down  below 
the  shoulders  C*  which  prevents  its  rising.  The  thread 
will  also  be  drawn  by  the  movements  just  described 
into  the  thread  notch  a2,  and  will  pay  off  from  the 
spindle  through  said  notch  around  the  arms  of  the 
tension  device,  and  directly  out  through  the  delivery 
eye.  The  delivery  eye  B,  is  provided  with  the  retain- 
ing finger  &,  to  prevent  the  escape  of  the  thread  up- 
wardly.   (Jean  Baptiste  Datidelin,  Fall  River,  Mass.) 


NASON'S  TENSION  DEVICE  FOR  SHUTTLES. 

The  object  of  this  device  is  to  provide  means 
whereby  the  tension  of  the  yarn  carried  by  the  shuttle 
may  be  accurately  controlled,  the  tension-clamp  being 


pass  through  without  breaking  the  yarn.  This  device 
with  its  friction-surfaces  not  positively  adjusted  in 
their  relations  the  one  to  the  other,  but  controlled 
by  means  of  a  spring,  which  tends  constantly  to  press 
them  together,  serves  this  purpose  admirably,  the 
spring  yielding  more  or  less  readily,  according  to  the 
position  of  the  adjusting  screw,  to  permit  the  passage 
of  the  knot  between  the  friction-surfaces. 

Of  the  accompanying  illustrations,  Fig.  1  is  a  per- 
spective view  of  one  end  of  a  self-threading  shuttle 
with  this  device  added.  Fig.  2  is  a  sectional  eleva- 
tion on  line  2-2,  of  Fig.  1,  enlarged  for  clearness. 
Letters  of  reference  indicate  thus: 

A,  the  shuttle-body;  B,  is  the  spool,  and  B',  the 
yarn  upon  the  spool;  C,  is  the  slot,  and  D,  the  pin 
which  carries  the  yarn  B',  to  the  eye  E. 

The  tension-clamp  consists  of  two  friction-surfaces 
F,  F',  relatively  adjustable  by  means  of  a  screw  S, 
working  in  the  body  of  the  shuttle,  which  controls 
the  pressure  of  a  spring  which  presses  upon  the  back 
of  one  of  the  friction-surfaces,  and  a  side  pin  S',  pre- 
vents the  yarn  from  drawing  between  the  friction- 
surfaces,  the  tension  device  being  held  within  a  recess 
formed  within  the  shuttle. 

G,  is  a  socket  of  metal  screwing  into  the  body  of 
the  shuttle,  in  which  work  the  adjusting  screws  S, 
and  the  check-nut  N,  for  locking  the  screw  S.  The 
adjusting-screw  S,  carries  pin  S',  which  projects  into 
the  cavity  formed  in  the  body  of  the  shuttle  for  the 
tension  device,  and  serves,  among  other  uses,  as  a 

side  pin  to  keep  the 
yarn  in  its  proper 
position  between  the 
friction-surfaces. 

The  friction  mem- 
bers F,  F',  are  hemi- 
spherical in  form,  the 
poles  being  slightly 
■  flattened  or  indented 
and  having  a  hole 
through  the  flattened 
part  through  which 
the  pin  S'  passes,  the 
flattened  surfaces  upon  the  two  hemispheres  being 
opposed.  A  spring  T,  surrounds  the  upper  end  of 
pin  S',  one  end  being  in  contact  with  the  inside  of 
F',  and  the  other  end  being  in  contact  with  a  disk 
S2,  fast  to  the  end  of  a  pin  S',  or  the  upper  end  of  the 
spring  may  be  attached  to  the  upper  end  of  pin  S'. 

The  operation  of  the  tension  device  is  as  follows: 
The  yarn  B',  is  laid  in  the  slot  C,  about  the  upper 
end  of  the  guide  pin  D,  and  back  again  in  the  slot 
C.  It  is  then  drawn  back  and  slips  downward  along 
the  slanting  guide-pin  D,  to  the  eye  E,  the  movement 
drawing  it  into  the  tension  device  between  the  two 
friction-surfaces  F  F',  to  one  side  of  the  pin  S'.  By 
a  wiping  motion  of  the  finger  of  the  operative  over 
the  eye  E,  the  loop  of  yarn  is  drawn  out  of  the  eye. 
The  eye  E,  being  upon  the  opposite  side  of  the 
shuttle  from  the  slot  C,  the  pin  S',  serves  to  cause 
the  yarn  to  draw  between  the  friction-surfaces  F,  F', 
near  their  centre.  To  adjust  the  tension,  the  screw 
S  is  turned  in  the  required  direction,  the  pin  S', 
and  disk  S2,  upon  the  screw  S,  putting  more  or  less 
pressure  upon  spring  T,  which  in  turn  presses  upon 
F'.  The  requisite  pressure  having  been  secured,  the 
check-nut  N  is  turned  to  place,  securely  holding 
screw  S     (Joseph  Herbert  Nason,  Somerville,  Mass.) 


so  constructed  that  the  thread  is  drawn  into  it  by 
the  same  movement  that  threads  the  shuttle 

Another  object  is  to  provide  a  tension  which  will 
yield  at  need  to  permit  small  knots  in  the  yarn  to 


HOWARD  AND  FITTON'S  TENSION  DEVICE 
FOR  SHUTTLES. 

The  object  of  this  device  is  to  provide  means  applic- 
able in  drop-box  weaving  for  automatically  stopping 


L05 


the  feed  of  the  filling  thread  in  a  shuttle  when  the 
shuttle  passes  into  the  drop-box  and  for  holding  the 
thread  taut  or  without  undue  slackness  while  said 
shuttle  is  within  the  box,  thereby  avoiding  liability 
of  the  idle  filling  thread  from  one  shuttle  being  part- 
ially drawn  into  the  warp  or  fabric  by  a  shuttle  thrown 
from  an  adjacent  box  when  the  boxes  are  changed. 

Another  object  is  to  provide  a  shuttle  with  im- 
proved means  adapted  to  be  automatically  operated 
by  contact  with  the  common  shuttle-binder  of  the 
loom  as  the  shuttle  enters  the  drop-box  for  retarding 
or  stopping  the  feed  or  for  increasing  the  tension  on 
the  filling-thread  running  from  the  shuttle,  thereby 
to  tighten  or  hold  the  filling-thread  straight  until 
beaten  up  into  the  web,  and  to  prevent  the  fabric  be- 
ing woven  loose  or  heavier  at  the  selvage  or  adjacent 
thereto  than  in  its  central  portion. 

Of  the  accompanying  illustrations,  Fig.  I,  is  a  top 
view  of  a  shuttle  illustrating  the  nature  of  this  tension 
device;  Fig.  2,  is  a  plan  view  of  the  shuttle  as  entered 
in  the'  drop-box.  showing  the  manner  in  which  the 
stop  device  for  the  filling  is  actuated  by  the  shuttle- 
binder  of  the  drop-box. 


Ti3.l 


F,  indicates  the  shuttle-box  or  one  of  a  series  of 
drop-boxes;  F',  is  the  shuttle-binder  thereof,  and  G, 
the  binder-spring. 

In  the  operation  as  the  shuttle  passes  into  the  box 
F,  the  projecting  part  D~,  of  the  presser-lever  by 
striking  the  binder  F',  is  automatically  forced  inward 
causing  the  pad  d,  to  be  pressed  down  upon  the 
thread  w,  which  is  embraced  between  the  pad  and  the 
end  of  the  guide  C,  thereby  retarding  or  stopping  the 
delivery  of  the  filling  as  the  shuttle  approaches  or 
arrives  at  its  destination,  also  holding  the  thread  from 
running  from  the  shuttle  or  increasing  its  slackness 
while  the  shuttle  remains  in  the  shuttle-box,  but  in- 
stantly and  automatically  relieving  the  stop  upon  the 
filling  as  the  shuttle  is  delivered  from  the  box  and 
the  end  D2,  released  from  contact  with  the  face  of  the 
binder  or  engaging  part. 

By  combining  the  stop  or  presser  device  with  the 
shuttle  in  a  manner  shown  and  described  and  adapt- 
ing it  to  be  automatically  brought  into  action  by  the 
binder  with  which  it  makes  contact  as  the  shuttle 
comes  to  the  end  of  its  throw,  we  attain  the  follow- 
ing benefits  viz.:  The  filling  stop  is  rendered  simple, 
efficient,  and  comparatively  inexpen- 
sive, and  conveniently  practical  for 
service  in  fancy  weaving  where  change- 
able shuttle-boxes  are  required,  the  im- 
provement can  be  incorporated  in  shut- 
tles of  the  ordinarily  employed  types, 
and  applied  to  use  in  the  common  drop- 
box-loom  without  necessitating  any 
change  in  or  addition  to  the  drop-box 
structure.  The  filling,  while  the  shuttle 
is  retained  in  the  box  is  held  from  run- 
ning off,  thus  preventing  any  liability, 
when  the  boxes  are  changed,  of  the 
shuttle  thrown  from  an  adjacent  box 
drawing  the  idle  thread  from  the  stand- 
ing shuttle  into  the  edge  of  the  woven 
fabric.  (?'.  Howard  and  J.  R.  Fitton, 
Worcester,  ifass.} 


A,  denotes  the  body  of  a  loom-shuttle;  B,  the  cop 
or  bobbin;  w,  the  filling-thread  which  is  delivered 
through  guiding  eye  C. 

D,  indicates  a  movable  presser  or  stop  device 
arranged  to  be  forced  down  upon  the  thread  w,  where 
it  passes  into  the  eye  C,  for  retarding  or  stopping  the 
run  of  the  thread  from  the  shuttle.  Said  presser  is 
an  arm  or  lever  D',  pivoted  to  the  side  of  the  body 
at  f,  and  having  a  portion  D",  that  projects  through  an 
opening  a,  in  the  side  of  the  shuttle-body,  standing 
out  therefrom  in  such  manner  that,  when  the  shuttle 
is  in  use,  it  will  engage  with  the  inner  surface  of  the 
binder  which  is  commonly  employed  in  the  shuttle- 
boxes  of  looms  and  be  thereby  pressed  inward  flush 
with  the  side  of  the  shuttle,  swinging  the  lever  D', 
and  causing  the  pad  to  bear  upon  the  thread  at  the 
shuttle-eye,  as  indicated  in  Fig.  2.  The  arm  of  the 
lever  is  made  of  an  elastic  bar,  so  as  to  yield  or 
spring  somewhat  under  excess  of  pressure.  This 
presser-lever  can  be  adapted  to  the  various  forms  and 
sizes  of  shuttles  employed  for  weaving  different 
classes  of  fabrics  and  materials— as  silk,  wool,  cotton, 
or  other  fibre.  The  bearing-head  of  the  presser  is 
provided  with  a  facing  d,  of  leather,  rubber,  felt,  or 
such  material  as  will  give  the  desired  action  on  any 
particular  class  of  filling  in  any  instance  employed. 
An  adjusting-screw  arranged  in  the  presser-lever  and 
having  a  head  that  strikes  against  the  body  of  the 
shuttle,  serves  to  arrest  the  action  of  the  presser  and 
regulate  the  approach  of  the  pad  upon  the  thread  to 
give  greater  or  less  force  of  pressure  thereon,  any 
excess  of  movement  of  the  operating-arm  being  accom- 
modated by  the  yielding  or  spring  of  said  arm. 


SWEENEY  &  STROBILE'S  AUTOMATIC  TEN- 
SION DEVICE  FOR  SHUTTLES. 

Of  the  accompanying  drawings  Fig.  1,  is  a  per- 
spective view  of  this  tension  device  with  the  tension 
lever  or  arm  removed.  Fig.  2,  is  a  longitudinal  sec- 
tional view  with  the  lever  or  arm  in  position.  Fig. 
3,  is  a  perspective  view  of  the  tension  lever  or  arm 
removed  from  the  tension  device. 

Numerals  of  references 
indicate  thus: — 1,  the  ten- 
sion device  per  se,  the  same 
consists  of  an  elongated 
cylinder  of  metal,  china  or 
other  suitable  material  pro- 
vided with  a  central  open- 
ing 2,  as  to  its  entire  lon- 
gitudinal axis  for  the  pass- 
ing of  the  thread  3. 

The  cylinder  1,  near  one 
end  thereof  is  provided 
with  a  recess  4,  extending 
into  the  opening  2,  and 
also  with  a  longitudinal 
guide  5,  on  its  outer  surface 
extending  from  the  recess  4,  to  the  opposite  end  of 
the  cylinder;  the  recess  and  groove  combined  adapted 
to  receive  a  tension  lever  or  arm  6.  This  tension  lever 
or  arm  6,  (see  Fig.  3)  consists  of  a  piece  of  steel  or 
other  desired  suitable  material,  broad  and  U-shaped 
at  one  end  at  right  angle  with  its  shank  or  extension 


100 


6X;  and  its  opposite  end  provided  with  a  bent  or 
downward  projection  6XX,  the  U-shaped  end  of  the 
lever  or  arm  adapted  to  be  seated  in  the  recess  4,  and 
the  shank  portion  6X,  adapted  to  be  seated  in  the 


9  8 

groove  5,  of  the  cylinder  1,  while  the  bent  end  6XX, 
of  the  lever  or  arm  takes  into  a  hole  7,  formed  in 
the  cylinder  1,  near  the  outer  end  of  the  groove  5, 
(see  Fig.  1)  to  prevent  endwise  or  lateral  movement 
of  said  lever  or  arm.  The  cylinder  1,  in  juxtaposition 
to  its  recess  4,  is  further  provided  with  a  circum- 
ferential groove  8,  which  receives,  after  the  placing 
of  the  lever  or  arm  6,  a  band  of  rubber  9  or  other 
resilient  means  adapted  to  hold  the  lever  or  arm  6, 
in  normal  working  position;  that  is  to  say,  permit 
vertical  movement  of  the  lever  or  arm  only  that  the 
latter  may  accommodate  itself  to  inequalities  in  the 
thread,  at  the  same  time  preserving  a  steady  uniform 
tension. 

The  tension  device  is  mounted  within  the  eye  of 
the  shuttle  secured  in  place  by  a  set-screw  passing 
from  the  outer  side  of  the  shuttle  and  takes  into  a 
bearing  10,  conveniently  located  on  the  outer  surface 
of  the  cylinder  1,  for  either  a  right  or  left-hand  shuttle. 

A  tension  device  for  the  construction  described 
permits  the  passing  or  feeding  of  the  thread  from  the 
cop  in  an  easy  and  uniform  manner  without  damage 
to  or  cutting  of  the  same,  the  thread  3,  passing  into 
and  being  guided  in  the  first  place  by  the  opening  2, 
in  the  cylinder  1,  and  thence 
passing  under  the  U-head  of  the 
lever  or  arm  6, — the  latter  accom- 
modating itself  as  to  its  tension 
properties  to  the  irregularities  or 
inequalities  in  the  thread,  and  this 
by  reason  of  the  resilient  means 
9,  employed  for  retaining  the  lever 
or  arm  in  position  and  operation  and  permitting  ver- 
tical movement  only  while  at  all  times  preserving  the 
tension,  and  encounters  no  rough,  sharp,  uneven  or 
other  cutting  edges  or  contacts  to  cut  or  damage  the 
thread.  (J-  Sweeney,  Pottstoton,  and  G.  Stroble,  Phil- 
adelphia.) 


HAMBLIN  &  CORNELL'S  TENSION  DEVICE 
FOR  SHUTTLES. 

The  object  of  this  device  is  to  prevent  the  screw 
which  secures  the  tension  device  in  the  shuttle,  and 
by  means  of  which  the  tension  is  regulated,  from 
working  out,  and  thereby  breaking  the  warp  threads 
as  forming  the  shed. 

Fig.  1,  is  an  elevation  of  a  shuttle-tension  device 
provided  with  the  improvement.  Fig.  2,  is  a  view  in 
cross  sections  of  a  shuttle  through  the  point  occupied 
by  the  tension  device.  Fig.  3,  is  a  view  showing  the 
peculiar  construction  of  the  screw  which  secures  the 
tension  device  in  the  shuttle,  and  by  means  of  which 
the  degree  of  tension  is  regulated.  Fig.  4,  is  a  plan 
view  of  a  lock  plate,  which  prevents  the  screw  from 
working  out.  Fig.  5,  is  a  view  of  the  key,  by  means 
of  which  the  screw  is  operated. 

indicates  a  screw,  having  a  small  portion  of  its 
shank,    immediately   under   its    head,    made  square. 


as  at  a'.  l>,  indicates  a  plate,  having  a  square  hole 
&',  in  its  centre,  to  fit  the  square  shank  a',  of  the  screw, 
and  provided  with  the  wings  b2.  s,  represents  the 
shuttle,  and  s',  its  delivery  eye. 

In  the  sides  of  the  opening  made  to  receive  the 
tension  plug  c,  are  the  grooves  li,  adapted  to  receive 
the  wings.  62,  of  the  plate  b,  so  that  said  plate  may 
move  easily  up  and  down  in  said  opening. 

The  tension  device  consisting  of  the  screw  a,  plate 
plug  c,  and  spring  e,  being  adjusted  in  the  shuttle 
as  shown  in  Fig.  2,  the  plate  cannot  turn,  because  of 
its  wings  b'\  projecting  into  the  grooves  h;  and  the 


MJ.JL. 


rig.  3. 


screw  cannot  turn,  because  the  spring  e,  holds  the 
plate  on  the  squared  shank  of  the  screw,  and  thus 
locks  it  in  position. 

To  advance  or  retract  the  screw,  a  key  d,  shown  in 
Fig.  5,  having  the  legs  d',  is  used,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2. 
The  legs  4',  push  the  plate  below  the  squared  por- 
tion of  the  shank  of  the  screw,  and  the  key  then 
takes  into  the  slot  of  the  screw,  and  is  turned  in  the 
direction  desired.  On  the  key  being  removed,  the 
spring  €,  acts  to  push  the  plate  b,  upward  on  the 
squared  shank  of  the  screw,  and  thus  locks  the  screw 
in  position.  (8.  M.  Hamblin  and  P.  Cornell,  New 
Bedford,  Mass.) 


HAMBLIN  AND  DAMON'S  TENSION  DEVICE 
FOR  SHUTTLES. 

Fig.  A,  is  a  top  view  of  a  portion  of  a  loom-shuttle 
showing  this  tension  device  adjusted  therein.  Fig.  B, 
is  a  side  view  of  the  tension  device  as  it  appears 
when  removed  from  the  shuttle.  Fig.  C,  is  a  top 
view  of  the  same.  Fig.  D,  is  a  view  in  perspective 
of  the  device  with  the  regulating  and  retaining  screw 
removed  and  showing  a  slight  modification  in  its  con- 
struction. Fig.  E,  is  a  view  in  cross-section  through 
the  dotted  line  x^x  of  Fig.  A. 

a,  indicates  a  portion  of  a  shuttle-body  having  the 
recess  a',  made  in  one  side  of  the  throat  thereof,  in 
which  recess  is  secured  the  tension  device  b,  con- 
sisting of  a  piece  of  spring  sheet  metal  bent  into  a 
semi-circle  with  the  ends  elongated  parallel  to  each 
other  having  one  end  provided  with  the  square  hole 


107 


C,  and  the  other  end  with  the  round  hole  «,  and  a 
screw  e,  adapted  to  pass  through  the  hole  d,  having 
a  square  shoulder  ft,  under  its  head  adapted  to  fit  in 
the  square  hole  c. 

In  Figs.  B  and  E,  the  spring  b  is  shown  as  having 
its  lower  end  bent  upon  itself  and  extending  to  a 


'■Hb 


point  in  line  with  the  portion  of  the  circle  &',  where 
it  is  slightly  bent  downward,  as  at  d2. 

When  the  tension  device  is  constructed  as  shown 
in  Fig.  B,  the  thread  runs  between  the  parts  d'  and 
d~;  but  when  it  is  constructed  as  shown  in  Fig.  D, 
the  thread  runs  between  the  part  d'  and  the  bottom 
of  the  throat  of  the  shuttle,  and  when  greater  tension 
on  the  thread  is  desired,  the  end  b2  of  the  spring  b, 
is  pressed  downward  until  the  square  hole  c  therein 
is  free  from  the  square  shoulder  e,  and  the  screw  is 
advanced  to  a  sufficient  degree.  To  lessen  the  degree 
of  tension,  the  screw  is  retracted. 

The  ends  of  the  spring  &,  are  made  square,  so  that 
when  the  device  is  adjusted,  as  shown,  the  said  ends 
will  bear  against  the  side  of  the  recess  and  prevent 
the  device  from  turning  from  side  to  side  and  getting 
out  of  its  proper  position. 

It  will  be  observed  that  when  the  square  shoulder 
of  the  screw  is  in  the  square  hole  in  the  spring  b,  the 
screw  is  prevented  from  turning  and  working  out, 
and  thus  a  uniform  tension  is  maintained  on  the 
thread. 

It  will  also  be  observed  that  the  operation  of 
threading  the  shuttle  is  the  same  either  with  or  with- 
out the  tension  device  and  that  the  thread  will  draw 
under  the  tension  device  of  its  own  motion.  (8.  M. 
Uamblin,  New  Bedford,  and  E.  8.  Damon,  Plymouth, 
Mass.) 


Fig.  E,  is  a  view  in  perspective  of  the  tension  device 
constructed  without  the  said  coil. 

",  represents  the  head  end  of  a  shuttle,  the  thread- 
ing-cavity  (',  being  provided  with  the  shallow  groove 
b,  near  the  top  of  its  walls. 

This  tension  device  is  constructed  of  spring-wire, 
one  end  of  which  is  bent  into  nearly  a  full  circle 
d.  It  then  is  carried  downward  in  a  curve  d',  to  a 
lower  plane,  and  is  then  bent  backward  in  a  straight 
line,  as  at  c,  to  a  point  nearly  coincident  with  the 
sweep  of  the  circle  d,  where  it  is  carried  downward 
at  a  right  angle  with  the  plane  of  the  portion  e,  as 
at  e',  as  shown  in  Fig.  E. 

In  order  to  give  the  device  greater  rigidity  it  may 
be  provided  with  the  close  coil  .'/,  between  the  por- 
tions d,  and  d' .  The  portion  of  a  circle  d,  is  made 
larger  in  diameter  than  the  cavity  C,  in  order  that 
when  it  is  sprung  into  the  groove  b,  it  will  expand 
into  said  groove  and  be  held  securely  in  place.  The 
perpendicular  portion  C,  is  made  to  enter  loosely  a 
hole  in  the  floor  of  the  cavity  c. 

The  device  being  arranged  in  the  shuttle,  as  shown 
in  Figs.  A,  and  C,  does  not  obstruct  the  operation  of 
threading  the  shuttle,  and  when  threaded  the  thread 
draws  down  over  the  curved  portion  d',  and  under  the 
portion  e,  where  it  receives  the  necessary  tension  by 
being  pressed  between  the  portion  e  and  the  floor  of 
the  cavity  C. 

As  will  be  seen,  the  device  cannot  of  itself  become 
displaced,  nor  is  there  any  part  of  it,  when  adjusted 
in  the  shuttle  on  which  the  thread  can  catch  and 


HAMBLIN  AND  DAMON'S  IMPROVED  TEN- 
SION DEVICE  FOR  SHUTTLES. 

The  gist  of  the  invention  consists  of  a  piece  of 
spring-wire  having  one  end  formed  into  nearly  a 
circle,  adapted  to  hold  itself  by  expansion  in  the 
threading  cavity  of  a  shuttle,  then  carried  downward 
in  a  curve  to  a  lower  plane,  where  it  is  provided  with 
a  straight  portion  adapted  to  bear  against  the  floor 
of  the  threading-cavity  and  produce  tension  on  the 
thread  as  it  is  drawn  under  it. 

Fig.  A,  is  a  view  of  the  head  of  a  shuttle  in  hori- 
zontal section  through  the  line  x-X  of  Fig.  B,  and 
showing  the  improved  tension  device  adjusted  in  place. 
Fig.  B,  is  a  view  in  cross-section  of  a  shuttle-head 
through  the  line  x-x  of  Fig.  A,  with  the  tension 
device  removed.  Fig.  C,  is  a  view  of  the  same,  show- 
ing the  tension  device  in  place.  Fig.  D,  is  a  front 
view  in  perspective  of  this  improved  tension  device 
constructed  with  a  close  coil  between  the  portions 
of  the  device  which  produce  the  tension  and  the  por- 
tion which  operates  to  retain  the  device  in  the  shuttle. 


break.  The  tension  on  he  thread  may  be  regulated 
by  slightly  bending  the  wire  between  the  portions  d' , 
and  e.  (8.  M.  Hamblin,  Taunton,  and  E.  8.  Damon, 
Plymouth,  Mass.) 


GRANT'S  TENSION  DEVICE  FOR  SHUTTLES. 

Fig.  I,  is  a  top  view  of  a  shuttle  with  this  tension 
device  secured  therein.  Fig.  2,  is  a  part  side  sectional 
view  through  the  HneY-Y,  of  Fig.  i.  Fig.  3,  is  a  part 
end  sectional  view  through  the  line  X-X,  of  Fig.  1,  and 
Fig.  4,  is  a  part  sectional  plan  view  on  the  line  Z-Z, 
of  Fig.  3. 

In  Figs.  1,  2,  and  3,  dotted  lines  extending  from 
end  of  shuttle  to  the  wall  of  compartment  A',  indi- 
cate that  a  piece  of  the  shuttle  is  cut  out  in  order  to 
expose  the  upper  end  eye  H',  and  lower  end  eye  H, 
to  enable  the  thread  to  be  passed  from  the  lower 
series  of  eyes  to  the  upper  series. 


108 


A,  represents  a  shuttle,  which  is  provided  with  the 
perpendicular  recesses  or  compartments  A1,  A2,  A3, 
and  the  horizontal  recess  or  compartment  A4,  into 
which  the  other  compartments  open.     B,  represents 


<3 


6  S  A'  i 

> 

the  spool  or  bobbin  containing  the  silk  or  thread  C. 
A  long  pin  E,  is  secured  in  the  bottom  of  the  com- 
partment A4.  To  the  pin  E,  are  secured  arms,  such 
as  D,  which  are  adapted  to  move  or  swing  in  the 
compartments  A1,  A2,  A3,  into  which  they  extend.  The 
swinging  ends  of  said  arms  D,  are  provided  with  the 
eyes  K.  The  arms  D,  are  slightly  curved,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  3,  in  order  that  each  arm  D,  when  pressed 
forward  will  bring  the  eye  K,  in  direct  alignment 
with  an  upper  series  of  eyes  H',  located  in  the  walls 
of  the  perpendicular  compartments,  in  order  that  the 
thread  or  silk  or  other  material  may  be  passed  or 
drawn  alternately  through  the  eyes  H ,  and  the  eyes 
K,  in  the  ends  of  the  arms  D,  after  having  been 
passed  through  a  series  of  eyes  located  beneath  the 
upper  series  of  eyes.  The  silk  C,  first  passes  from 
the  bobbin  B,  and  is  conducted  through  the  lower 
series  of  eyes  H,  and  out  of  the  end  of  the  bobbin, 
or  near  the  end  of  the  bobbin,  through  an  opening 
indicated  by  the  dotted  line  in  Figs,  i,  2  and  4.  The 
swinging  arms  D,  are  then  pressed  forward  until  the 
eyes  K,  in  the  ends  of  the  arms  D,  are  in  line  with 
the  upper  series  of  the  eyes  H'.  The  thread  is  then 
conducted,  by  means  of  a  hook  or  needle,  up  to  and 
through  the  upper  eyes  H',  and  the  eyes  K,  in  the 
ends  of  the  arms  D,  and  through  the  eyes  H2,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  1. 

The  relative  position  of  the  upper  and  lower  series 
of  eyes  is  shown  in  Figs.  1,  2  and  3. 

The  arms  D,  are  held  in  the  position,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  3,  by  means  of  an  elastic  or  rubber  band, 
which  is  secured  to  the  said  arms,  and  to  the  shuttle, 
so  as  to  give  the  required  tension. 

As  the  shuttle  performs  its  functions  in  weaving, 
the  thread  C,  is  drawn  from  the  bobbin  B,  passing 
through  the  lower  series  of  eyes  H,  up  to  the  upper 
end  eye  H',  and  then  alternately  through  the  said 
upper  eyes  and  the  eyes  K,  and  out  of  the  eye  H2, 
as  shown  in  Fig.  1.  As  the  thread  C,  is  drawn 
through  the  eye  H2,  the  arms  D,  are  drawn  for- 
ward, so  as  to  turn  on,  or  with,  the  pin  E,  and  when 
the  shuttle  is  about  to  return,  the  elastic  or  rubber 
band  secured  to  the  shuttle  and  to  the  swinging 
arms  D,  as  shown  in  Figs.  3  and  4,  causes  the  swing- 
ing arms  to  return  to  the  position  shown  in  Fig.  1, 
thus  taking  up  the  slack  thread. 

The  elastic  or  rubber  band  may  be  varied  in  size 
or  thickness,  so  as  to  provide  various  degrees  of  ten- 
sion.   (William  A.  Grant,  Paterson,  N.  J.) 


WHITLEY'S   TENSION   DEVICE   FOR  SHUT- 
TLES FOR  WEAVING  BROAD  SILK 
GOODS. 

The  object  aimed  at  in  the  construction  of  this 
shuttle  is  to  secure  the  accurate  binding  of  the  cloth 
by  the  use  of  tension-springs,  to  afford  facilities  for 
the  proper  adjustment  of  these  springs  and  to 
regulate  the  tension  thereof  with  alacrity. 

In  what  is  commonly  known  as  the  "French" 
shuttle  a  semi-circular  plate  is  secured  to  the 
outside  of  the  shuttle,  and  arms  provided  with 
guides  as  well  as  tension-springs  are  secured  to 
said  plate,  all  of  which  necessitates  the  use  of 
a  lathe  constructed  specially  for  their  use,  the 
projection  on  outside  of  shuttle  working  out- 
side of  the  lathe. 

The  purpose  of  the  new  shuttle  is  to  accomplish 
the  same  results  then  obtained  by  the  French 
shuttle  by  employing  a  plate  of  metal  three- 
quarters  of  an  inch  in  width  by  about  three  inches 
in  length,  which  is  placed  within  the  shuttle  on  the 
bottom  thereof  and  to  which  are  secured  guide- 
arms  and  tension-springs  so  as  to  extend  longitud- 
inally along  the  same  in  the  bottom  of  the  shut- 
tle, as  shown  in  the  accompanying  illustrations 
of  which  Fig.  1  is  a  plan  of  the  device;  Fig.  2 
is  a  side  or  edge  view;  Fig.  3  is  a  detail  view  of 
eye  bar  with  binder;  Fig.  4  is  a  plan  of  shuttle 
with  device  in  position,  and  Fig.  5  is  a  longitudinal 
section  of  the  same. 

Letters  of  references  indicate  thus: — A,  the  shuttle; 
A2,  a  lip-engaging  device;  A3,  a  groove  in  side  of  shut- 
tle; B,  the  quill;  S,  the  filling. 

a,  is  the  plate  of  the  device,  which  is  provided  with 
the  engaging  lip  a'  adapted  to  slide  under  the  pro- 
jecting part  of  the  shuttle  A2,  when  the  plate  «,  is 
slid  along  the  bottom  of  the  shuttle  into  its  proper 
position. 


When  the  plate  «  is  in  its  proper  position,  it  is 
securely  held  there  by  means  of  the  securing  pin  or 
screw  e,  which  passes  transversely  through  the  sides 
of  the  shuttle  along  the  transverse  groove  e',  in  the 
top  of  the  plate  a. 

A  spring  &,  having  a  coil  b',  is  secured  to  the  plate 


109 


<*,  by  means  of  the  loops  b2,  b3t  b\  formed  by  passing 
the  steel  wire  through  and  under  the  plate  by  means 
of  the  small  perforations  or  openings  shown  in  Fig.  i. 

A  looped  tension-bar  d,  or,  rather,  a  pair  of  the 
same,  are  secured  to  the  plate  «,  by  screws  or  rivets 


■■■■  y- 

i  :  -  1 

a. 

II 

Fig.  5 


<is.  On  the  back  of  each  of  said  loop  tension-bars 
is  an  eye  ds>  through  which  the  end  of  the  spring  6, 
passes  and  is  permitted  to  move  as  the  loop-bar  is 
operated  by  the  tightening  or  loosening  of  the  thread 
or  filling  S.  The  loop  tension-bar  dt  is  provided 
with  the  desired  number  of  loops  or  eyes  d'.  f,  and 
V,  are  the  eyelets  in  the  shuttle. 

In  the  construction  of  this  new  tension  device 
strength  and  durability  are  attained  by  winding  a 
copper  wire  c,  around  the  steel  loops  d',  and  soldering 
the  same  together  to  prevent  the  loop  from  opening 
or  breaking  by  the  concussion  of  the  shuttle.  Two 
or  more  threads  or  cords,  as  indicated  by  the  letter 
n,  in  the  illustrations,  are  passed  from  one  side  of 
the  shuttle  to  the  other,  over  which  cords  the  filling 
passes  from  the  quill  to  the  eyes  in  the  tension-bars 
to  prevent  it  from  becoming  entangled  or  caught  in 
the  springs. 

To  regulate  the  tension  of  the  springs,  they  may 
be  adjusted  for  that  purpose  by  increasing  or  dimin- 
ishing the  number  of  the  coils  V,  thereby  varying 
the  length  of  the  springs  b.  The  springs  being  con- 
structed of  a  very  fine  and  delicate  wire  which  is 
easily  manipulated,  the  length  of  the  springs  may  be 
changed  with  facility  for  the  purpose  of  regulating 
the  tension. 

Instead  of  passing  the  ends  of  the  tension-springs 
through  the  lower  eyes  <Z3,  of  the  tension-bars  d,  said 
tension-springs  b,  may  have  the  ends  thereof  coiled 
around  said  tension-bars  d,  at  a  point  anywhere  be- 
tween the  engaging  ends  d1  of  said  tension-bars  and 
the  nearest  loops  thereon  without  varying  from  the 
essential  principles  of  the  improvement,  the  gist  of 
which  consist  in  the  combination,  with  a  shuttle,  of 
the  plate  a,  placed  within  the  shuttle  and  extending 
longitudinally  along  the  bottom  of  the  same,  the  two 
looped  tension-bars  secured  to  said  plate,  the  two 
tension-springs  also  secured  to  said  plate  being  pro- 
vided with  the  coils  the  ends  of  said  tension-springs 
&,  being  loosely  connected  with  the  loop  tension-bars 
to  afford  the  tension  required.  (Ralph  Whitley,  Pater- 
son,  N.  J.) 


KOESTERS    TENSION   DEVICE   FOR  SHUT- 
TLES FOR  RIBBON  LOOMS. 

The  object  of  this  device  is  to  provide  a  spring  for 
that  class  of  shuttles  where,  a  lever  is  pressed  against 
the  quill  containing  the  silk,  the  tension  of  the 
spring  to  be  regulated  without  removing  or  bending 
the  spring;  the  device,  from  its  simplicity  of  con- 
struction and  ease  of  operation,  to  facilitate  and  reg- 


ulate the  taking  of  the  silk  from  the  quill  in  the 
operation  of  weaving. 

In  shuttles  as  now  in  use,  the  lever  is  pressed 
against  the  bottom  of  the  quill  by  a  flat  spring,  one 
end  of  which  is  secured  in  the  shuttles  by  means  of 
a  pin,  the  free  end  being  forked  to  receive  the  arm 
of  the  lever. 

To  regulate  the  tension  of  the  spring  in  shuttles 
as  now  in  use,  said  spring  is  taken  out  and  bent 
more  or  less,  or  it  is  bent  without  taking  it  from  the 
shuttle.  It  is  difficult  to  regulate  the  tension  desired, 
by  this  procedure,  and  often  the  spring  has  to  be 
manipulated  several  times  before  the  desired  degree 
of  tension  is  obtained,  while  with  the  improved  ten- 
sion device  the  tension-spring  is  regulated  positively 
to  suit,  and  this  almost  instantly,  thus  saving  time 
and  labor. 

The  gist  of  the  improvement  consists  in  the  em- 
ployment of  a  supplemental  spring  guide  or  strip  be- 
neath the  spring  proper  and  of  a  sliding  connection 
for  holding  down  or  releasing  the  spring,  as  required. 

Fig.  i,  represents  a  shuttle  provided  with  a  quill, 
a  lever,  and  the  improved  tension-spring  adapted  to 
operate  said  lever.  Fig.  2,  represents  the  tension- 
spring,  guiding-strip  and  sliding  connecting-piece, 
being  a  side  view  thereof.  Fig.  3,  is  a  top  view  of 
spring,  slide  and  pin  for  securing  spring  in  shuttle. 

A,  is  the  spring;  B,  the  guiding-strip;  C,  the  slid- 
ing connection;  D,  the  lever;  E,  the  quill;  F,  the 
shuttle-body,  and  H,  the  pin  for  securing  the  spring 
in  shuttle-body. 

Fig.  3,  shows  a  spring  and  guide  riveted  together 
at  the  end  where  the  securing-pin  is  located. 

The  old  spring  device  is  not  exact  enough,  and 
especially  when  heavy  dyed  silk  is  in  use;  but  the 
improved  spring  may  be  regulated  to  a  nicety,  accord- 
ing to  the  quality  of  the  silk. 

In  the  drawings  the  sliding  connection  shown  is  a 
loop,  which  encircles  the  spring  and  the  guide,  and 
by  sliding  the  same  backward  or  forward  the  tension 


C  A 


is  regulated  by  holding  down  or  releasing  the  spring 
A,  which  presses  the  lever  D,  upward  against  the 
bottom  of  the  quill  E. 

The  regulation  of  the  tension  of  the  spring  A,  is 
greatly  facilitated  by  the  use  of  the  guide  B,  and 
sliding  connection  C,  it  being  but  the  work  of  a 
moment  to  adjust  the  sliding  connection  for  that 
purpose.    (George  C.  Eoester,  Paterson,  N.  J.) 


TODD'S   TENSION    DEVICE    FOR  SHUTTLES 
FOR  NARROW  WARE  LOOMS. 

The  object  thereof  is  to  provide  a  simple,  durable 
and  effective  tension  device,  dispensing  with  the  com- 
plicated and  expensive  tension  devices  now  in  use. 

Fig.  1,  is  a  plan  view  of  this  shuttle,  showing  also 
a  reel   or  spool  in  position  thereon,   on  which  is 


110 


wound  the  yarn.  Fig.  2,  is  a  side  view  of  the  shut- 
tle. Fig.  3,  a  section  on  the  line  3,  3,  of  Fig.  1. 
Fig.  4,  a  section  on  the  line  4,  4. 

A,  represents  a  shuttle  provided  with  a  longitudinal 
chamber  B,  in  the  top  thereof  and  longitudinal  slot 
C  in  one  side,  and  secured  to  the  side  of  the  shuttle 
in  which  the  slot  C  is  formed  is  an  outwardly-curved 


reel  in  place  and  prevent  the  longitudinal  movement 
thereof.    (Walter  Todd,  Paterson,  N.  J.) 


*  "  j  *  g           js        i  f  JT 

\ 

Sled. 


JvcfJ. 


wire  or  rod  D,  in  which  is  formed  a  perforation  E. 

At  one  end  of  the  longitudinal  chamber  B,  is 
formed  a  small  central  hole  or  bore  F,  adapted  to 
receive  one  end  of  a  shaft  or  rod  which  passes 
through  the  reel  or  spool  B',  and  at  the  other  end  is 
formed  a  vertical  slot  G,  which  extends  to  about  the 
middle  of  the  end  of  the  chamber  B,  and  at  the  top 
of  the  end  of  the  chamber,  and  secured  to  the  end 
wall  thereof  are  plates  H,  which  are  separated  by  a 
space  equal  to  the  width  of  said  slot,  and 
below  said  slot  is  a  transverse  plate  ft,  and 
between  these  plates  is  a  sliding  plate  K, 
having  a  groove  or  recess  in  the  inner  end 
thereof,  and  the  outer  end  of  which  is  out- 
wardly-curved, as  shown  at  K,  forming 
a  projection  by  means  of  which  said  sliding 
plate  may  be  operated. 

The  reel  or  spool  B',  is  provided  at  each 
end  with  main  heads  and  with  supple- 
mental heads  is  placed  a  spring  L,  one  end 
of  which  is  secured  to  the  side  wall  of  the 
longitudinal  chamber  B,  and  the  other  end 
of  which  is  adapted  to  bear  upon  the  spool 
between  the  supplemental  heads,  as  clearly 
shown  in  Fig.  1. 

In  placing  the  reel  or  spool  in  position, 
one  end  of  the  central  shaft  thereof  is  in- 
serted into  the  hole  or  bore  F,  and  the  other  end  is 
dropped  down  into  position  through  the  vertical  slot 
G,  after  which  the  sliding  plate  K  is  moved  for- 
ward, so  that  the  slot  or  recess  in  the  end  thereof 
incloses  the  shaft  or  rod  of  the  spool  or  shuttle  and 
prevents  the  removal  thereof,  as  shown  in  Fig.  4. 

The  same  principle  of  construction  can  also  be 
applied  to  shuttles  having  two  compartments,  i.  C, 
where  using  two  bobbins. 

The  springs  L  constitute  the  improved  tension 
device  and  are  so  formed  and  arranged  as  to  bear 
upon  the  spool  or  reel  with  just  sufficient  force  to 
provide  the  proper  tension  and  prevent  the  too  free 
movement  of  the  spool  or  reel,  and  the  object  of 
the  supplemental  heads  V ,  is  to  hold  the  spool  or 


RIGBY'S  CONDUCTOR  FOR  SHUTTLES  FOR 
NARROW  WARE  LOOMS. 

The  advantages  of  this  new  conductor  are:  That 
it  is  made  in  one  piece;  that  the  tension-wires  are 
made  of  one  piece  of  finely  tempered  steel  wire;  that 
the  springs  are  so  constructed  that  the  whole  spring 
is  in  full  play,  from  end  to  end  at  all  times,  no  mat- 
ter how  much  tension  is  on,  which  is  a  great  im- 
provement on  the  style  of  spring  in  the  ordinary  con- 
ductor; that  the  springs  can  be  most  readily  and 
easily  taken  out  for  repairs;  that  there  is  nothing 
about  the  conductor  but  what  can  be  attended  to  by 
the  loom  fixer,  since  there  is  no  soldering  about  it 
and  none  to  get  loose  and  cause  trouble. 

Fig.  A,  represents  a  top  plan  view  of  a  shuttle  pro- 
vided with  the  improved  bow  or  conductor.  Fig.  B, 
is  an  enlarged  detail  view  of  a  portion  of  the  latter 
and  also  illustrates  the  means  for  securing  the  latter 
to  the  shuttle-body.  Fig.  C,  is  a  sectional  view  on 
the  line  x,  x,  of  Fig.  B.  Fig.  D,  is  a  sectional  view 
on  the  line  y,  V,  of  Fig.  B,  and  Fig.  E,  is  a  detail 
view-  of  the  tension-spring  used  in  connection  with 
the  improved  shuttle-bow. 

«,  represents  a  shuttle  of  ordinary  construction,  and 
6,  the  bow  or  conductor,  secured  to  said  shuttle  by 
means  of  the  screws  or  bolts  a2,  having  their  heads 
a',  embedded  in  the  projecting  flanges  of  the  bow 
and  engaging  the  internally-threaded  nuts  a',  having 
their  heads  embedded  into  the  body  of  the  shuttle, 
as  clearly  shown  in  Fig.  B. 

The  bow  or  conductor  6,  is  formed  of  one  con- 
tinuous plate  or  sheet  of  metal,  which  is  struck  up 
and  bent  to  form  the  straight  bottom  C,  the  hood- 
shaped  front  dt  and  the  back  f,  which  latter  projects 
upwardly  from  the  bottom  and  on  the  same  side  as 
the  hood  d.  To  strengthen  said  back  f,  and  to  thus 
obtain  the  desired  thickness,  the  portion  forming  said 


m  m  m 


=D3  E 


back  is  doubled  over  or  folded  upon  itself,  as  clearly 
shown  at  f,  in  Fig.  C,  and  to  avoid  sharp  edges  at 
the  portions  of  the  back  projecting  beyond  each  side 
of  the  bottom,  the  metal  is  bent  or  returned  upon 
itself,  as  clearly  shown  at  f,  in  Fig.  D,  that  is  to  say, 
said  projecting  portions  consist  of  three  thicknesses 
of  metal. 

The  hood  d,  in  the  central  portion  of  which  the 
eye  d'  is  arranged,  is  provided  at  each  side  of  its 
centre  with  a  projection  or  stop  e,  bent  substantially 
at  right  angles  to  the  bottom  of  the  bow  and  soldered 
thereto. 

Within  the  bow  and  secured  to  the  central  portion 
of  its  back  is  arranged  a  bracket  .'/,  supporting  the 


Ill 


pins  g',  g*,  which  latter  are  adapted  to  serve  as  ful- 
crums  for  the  tension-wires  i,  each  provided  at  its 
free  end  with  a  projection  i2,  adapted  to  bear  against 
the  stop  c,  formed  by  the  bow,  as  hereinbefore  de- 
scribed. At  the  inner  end  of  said  tension-wire,  and 
projecting  therefrom  at  substantially  right  angles,  is 
arranged  a  loop  adapted  to  be  engaged  by  the  free 
end  of  the  flat  spring  m,  the  other  end  of  which  is 
fixed  to  a  block  ms,  which  latter  is  removably  secured 
by  means  of  the  screw  »*,  to  and  within  the  bow,  as 
clearly  shown  in  Fig.  B.  The  flat  spring  m,  and  its 
tension  are  controlled  and  regulated  by  a  flat  spring- 
plate  ■m'l  of  less  elasticity  and  resting  on  the  said  flat 
spring  »»,  and  secured  with  one  end  to  the  block 
A  sleeve  nr  fits  snugly  over  the  flat  springs  m, 
and  m',  and  can  be  moved  thereon  for  the  purpose 
of  regulating  the  tension  of  said  springs. 

The  bracket  g,  as  well  as  the  back  f,  is  penetrated 
by  the  eye  ft,  arranged  directly  opposite  the  eye  d'. 
(Uolden  Rigby,  Paterson,  N.  J.) 


DOLBER'S  SHUTTLE- THREADER. 

Fig.  I,  is  a  perspective  view  of  a  loom-shuttle.  Fig. 

2,  is  an  elevation  of  the  improved  threader.  Fig. 

3,  is  a  similar  view,  but  showing  a  modified  form. 


Fig.  4,  is  a  detail  view  of  the  removable  brush  por- 
tion, and  Fig.  5,  is  a  detail  view  of  one  of  the  arrange- 
ments for  holding  the  removable  brush  portion. 

A,  denotes  the  shuttle,  which  is  provided  with  the 
usual  pot-eye  and  the  side  eye  c,  and  d,  is  the 
thread,  which  in  practice  is  deposited  on  the  pot-eye 
and  is  drawn  through  the  side  eye  by  the  use  of  the 
improved  threader. 

The  threader  comprises  a  handle  e,  in  one  end  of 
which  is  inserted  and  held  the  shank  f,  for  the  brush, 
and  secured  to  and  projecting  laterally  from  said 
shank  is  a  finger  g,  having  a  recessed  or  notched  end 
g',  which  in  practice  engages  the  thread  and  forces 
it  to  the  bottom  of  the  pot-eye. 


The  brush  portion  ft,  (shown  in  detail  in  Fig.  4,)  is 
cylindrical  in  form  and  consists  of  bristles  spirally 
arranged  on  a  shank  ft',  formed  of  twisted  wire. 

In  the  drawings  are  shown  two  arrangements  for 
removably  securing  said  brush  portion  to  the  holder, 
one  arrangement  being  a  spiral  coil  i,  of  stiff  wire, 
having  one  end  t',  closed  and  the  other  end  open 
and  adapted  to  be  turned  in  the  shank  f,  in  the  man- 
ner shown  in  Fig.  2. 

The  brush  portion  being  cylindrical  in  shape  may 
be  turned  or  screwed  into  the  coil,  the  flexible  bristles 
readily  following  the  spiral  turns,  and  when  the  brush 
is  so  inserted  the  bristles  project  beyond  the  coil 
sufficiently  to  engage  the  thread  when  the  threader  is 
inserted  and  partially  rotated  in  the  side  eye. 

Fig.  2,  shows  the  threader  when  ready  for  opera- 
tion, the  brush  portion  being  arranged  within  the 
coil  and  interposed  between  the  closed  end  and  the 
end  of  the  shank  f.  When  the  brush  from  constant 
use  becomes  worn  and  useless,  the  coil  is  turned  until 
disconnected  from  the  shank  f,  the  brush  is  with- 
drawn by  rotating  it  in  the  reverse  direction  and  a 
new  brush  is  inserted. 

Referring  now  to  Fig.  3,  the  shank  f,  is  divided 
into  four  parts,  each  of  which  terminates  in  a  jaw  /, 
and  these  four  jaws  receive  and  hold  the  brush  when 
the  jaws  are  closed  by  a  sleeve  or  ring  k,  which  latter 
is  slidable  on  the  shank.  The  bristles  of  the  brush 
project  beyond  the  jaws,  as  shown,  and  when  worn 
and  useless  the  brush 
is  removed  and  a  new 
one  inserted  by  slid- 
ing the  ring  down- 
ward and  opening 
said  jaws. 

In  practice,  the 
thread  being  depos- 
ited by  the  finger  in 
the  base  of  the  pot- 
eye,  the  brush  is  in-  figZ- 
serted  to  the  depth  of 
the  side  eye,  and  upon 
being  slightly  rotated 
the  bristles  engage 
and  hold  the  thread, 
and  as  the  brush  is 
withdrawn  the  thread 
is  drawn  through  the 
eye  and  the  operation  is  completed. 

This  shuttle-threader  is  only  used  on  shuttles  where 
there  is  a  top  and  side  eye.  (John  E.  Dolber,  Man- 
chester, N.  E.) 


TEMPLES. 


THE  KNOWLES  TEMPLE. 

This  temple  is  shown  in  the  accompanying  illus- 
tration and  is  best  explained  by  quoting  num- 
erals of  references,  of  which  i,  is  the  bar  to  which 
the  temple  complete  is  fastened  and  on  which  it  can 
be  moved  to  suit  the  width  of  cloth  to  be  woven. 
2,  is  the  spring  that  bears  against  the  bar  to  keep  it 
up  to  the  weaving  point.  At  3,  the  swivel  is  located 
that  is  used  for  adjustment  of  the  temple,  throwing 


in  properly  placing  the  fabric  in  engagement  with 
the  teeth  of  the  bur-rolls,  particularly  when  two  bur- 
rolls  are  used,  and  the  fabric  has  to  be  drawn  edge- 
wise under  one  roll  and  over  the  other.  To  obviate 
this  difficulty  is  the  object  of  this  new  temple. 

Fig.  1,  of  the  drawings  is  a  plan  of  this  improved 
loom-temple.  Fig.  2,  is  an  end  elevation.  Fig.  3,  is  a 
side  elevation.  Fig.  4,  is  a  sectional  plan  of  the  same 
with  the  upper  or  movable  leaf  of  the  temple  and 
one  bur-roll  raised  into  a  vertical  position,  the  cutting 


the  inner  teeth  of  rolls  away  or  to  the  weaving  point. 
This  swivel  is  not  shown  in  the  main  illustration 
and  for  this  reason  a  separate  illustration  of  it  is 
given  (enlarged  compared  to  the  main  illustration 
and  one-third  of  its  actual  size). 

4,  is  the  inner  bracket  which  holds  the  bar,  also 
the  tension  screw  for  adjusting  spring  2.  5,  is  the 
outer  stop  which  holds  the  bar  from  moving  for- 
ward. 6,  is  the  outer  bracket  which  holds  outer 
stop  5.  7,  is  the  temple-head  which  holds  the  bur- 
rolls,  also  the  top  cap  11  and  which  is  movable  on 
bar  1. 

8,  is  the  tension  screw  whereby  the  spring  2  is 
adjusted. 

9,  is  the  screw  that  holds  the  temple-head  and 
fastens  it  to  the  bar.  10,  are  the  screws  that  are  used 
in  adjusting  the  swivel.  11,  is  the  cap  which  is  fast- 
ened by  the  pin  12,  to  the  head  7,  and  covers  the  bur- 
roll.  12,  is  the  pin  which  fastens  the  top  cap  11  to 
the  temple-head  7.  13,  is  the  bur-roll  that  goes  in 
the  head  7,  that  revolves  and  holds  the  cloth  out. 
14,  is  the  nut  that  fastens  the  bur-rolls  to  the  temple- 
head  7. 

15,  is  the  screw  that  fastens  the  spring  to  the  in- 
side bracket  4.  This  temple  is  the  favorite  make  for 
woolen  and  worsted  mills,  especially  for  open-shed 
looms.    (Draper  Co.) 


PAINCHAUD'S  TEMPLE. 

Loom-temples  having  one  or  two  bur-rolls  mounted 
upon  fixed  axes  are  in  common  use,  but,  as  hereto- 
fore constructed,  with  the  two  leaves  of  the  temple- 
frame  bolted  together  in  fixed  positions  relative  to 
each  other,  serious  difficulties  are  often  experienced 

1 


plane  being  on  line  X,  on  Fig.  5.  Fig.  5,  is  a  sec- 
tional elevation  of  the  same,  the  cutting  plane  being 
on  line  V,  V,  on  Fig.  4.  Fig.  6,  is  a  vertical  transverse 
section  on  line  2,  z,  on  Fig.  3.  Figs.  7  and  8,  are  re- 
spectively a  side  elevation  and  an  end  view  of  the 
spindle  set  in  the  lower  leaf  of  the  temple  and  upon 
which  the  bur-roll  is  mounted,  and  Figs.  9  and  10, 


are  similar  views  of  the  bur-roll  spindle  for  the 
upper  leaf  of  the  temple  . 

12 


113 


A,  is  the  lower  leaf  of  the  temple-frame,  provided 
with  the  flange  A',  having  slots  a,  a,  by  means  of 
which  and  suitable  screws  or  bolts  it  is  securely  at- 
tached to  the  ordinary  carrier.  This  leaf  A,  has 
mounted  therein,  so  as  to  be  non-revoluble,  but  easily 
removable  therefrom,  the  spindle  6,  provided  with  the 
flat-sided  head  b',  and  upon  this  spindle  is  mounted, 
so  as  to  be  revoluble  thereon,  the  burr-roll  B. 

The  leaf  A,  has  formed  thereon  or  secured  thereto 
the  overhanging  arm  A2,  connected  thereto  only  at 


its  outer  end  and  provided  at  its  other  or  free  end 
with  the  catch  c,  as  shown. 

The  upper  leaf  C,  of  the  temple-frame  is  pivoted 
or  hinged  at  d,  to  the  leaf  A,  and  has  mounted  in 
bearings  therein  the  spindle  e,  which  has  its  outer  end 
bifurcated  and  slightly  expanded  and  made  of  spring 
steel,  so  that  when  inserted  in  its  bearings  it  is  com- 
pressed and  the  tension  of  the  spring  or  its  tendency 
to  expand  creates  sufficient  friction  in  its  outer  bear- 
ing to  prevent  its  rotation  in  its  bearings,  and  also 
prevents  its  moving  endwise  in  said  bearings  when 
the  upper  leaf  is  turned  upward  into  a  vertical  position. 

The  spindle  e,  has  mounted  thereon  the  bur-roll  D. 

The  leaf  C,  of  the  temple-frame  has  a  slot  F  cut 
through  it,  from  its  outer  end  toward  its  inner  end,  of 
suitable  length  and  shape  to  receive  the  arm  A2,  and 
catch  c,  the  latter  projecting  above  the  upper  surface 
of  said  leaf  C,  when  in  its  normal  or  closed  positions, 
as  shown  in  Figs.  2  and  3.  The  leaf  C,  is  also  pro- 
vided with  the  upwardly-projecting  ear  9,  to  which  is 
firmly  secured  one  end  of  the  spring-latch  \  the 
other  end  of  which  engages  the  catch  c,  to  lock  the 
two  leaves  together  when  closed,  and  i,  is  a  stop-pin 
set  in  the  upper  side  of  the  leaf  C,  to  limit  the  move- 
ment of  the  spring-latch  h. 

The  leaves  A,  and  C,  both  have  formed  in  their 
inner  or  adjacent  faces  two  nearly  semi-cylindrical 
cavities  having  diameters  somewhat  larger  than  the 
diameters  of  the  bur-rolls  B,  and  D,  including  the 
projecting  spurs  or  teeth  thereon,  and  the  cavities  in 
the  leaf  A,  beneath  the  bur-rolls  B,  and  in  the  leaf  C, 
above  the  bur-roll  D,  have  in  each  end  thereof  nearly 
semi-circular  shoulders  nit  and  n,  respectively,  upon 
which  the  ends  of  the  bur-rolls  B,  and  D,  respectively 
bear  when  the  strain  of  the  fabric  inserted  in  the 
temple  is  applied  thereto  and  the  bearing  of  the  roll 
upon  its  spindle  has  become  worn,  the  purpose  of 
which  is  to  prevent  the  points  of  the  spurs  of  said 
rolls  coming  in  contact  with  the  bottoms  of  said  cav- 
ities to  their  injury. 

By  this  construction  of  the  loom-temple,  the  fabric 
can  be  very  readily  and  easily  placed  in  position  be- 
tween the  bur-rolls  without  disturbing  or  drawing 
out  of  shape  said  fabric,  as  when  the  fabric  is  to  be 
inserted  the  operator  simply  presses  the  spring-latch 


h,  to  disengage  it  from  the  catch  c,  and  lifts  the  leaf 
C,  and  bur-roll  D,  into  or  past  a  vertical  position, 
and  then  passes  the  fabric  beneath  the  arm  A2,  and 
over  the  bur-roll  B,  draws  it  straight  and  smooth, 
then  turns  the  leaf  C,  and  roll  D,  down  into  its  closed 
position,  when  the  spring-latch  h,  will  automatically 
engage  the  catch  c,  and  lock  the  parts  together. 
(Ludger  Painchaud,  Salem,  Mass.) 


THE  BUTCHER  TEMPLE. 

In  the  use  of  temple-rolls,  with  different  kinds  of 
cloth,  much  difficulty  has  been  experienced  in  the 
marks  which  are  left  by  the  teeth  of  the  rolls  on  thin 
fine  goods,  and  with  heavy  closely  woven  cloth  the 
rolls  fail  to  take  proper  hold,  particularly  at  the 
selvedges,  which  latter  curl  up,  and  cloth  with  straight 
slevedges  are  hard  to  be  made. 

The  construction  of  this  temple  has  for  its  object 
the  production  of  a  temple-roll  which  will  overcome 
the  before-named  objections,  the  wear  on  the  journals- 
of  the  temple-roll  being  also  decreased. 

Of  the  accompanying  illustrations,  Fig.  1,  is  a  ver- 
tical longitudinal  sectional  view  of  the  new  temple- 
roll,  the  pod  and  cap  being  shown  in  section.  Fig. 
2,  is  a  transverse  section  taken  on  the  line  x,  x,  Fig. 
1,  looking  to  the  right.  Fig.  3,  is  an  enlarged  inner 
side  perspective  view  of  the  dust  protector  for  the 
roll-journal,  and  Fig.  4,  is  a  rear  end  elevation  of  the 
pod  and  cap  with  a  portion  of  the  supporting-shank. 

Referring  to  Figs.  1  and  4,  the  inner  end  of  the 
pod  «,  forming  a  part  of  the  shank  a,',  is  transversely 
slotted  at  a\  to  receive  a  locking  ear  &',  formed  on 
the  cap  6,  the  latter  in  this  instance,  supporting  the 
temple-roll.  A  lug  &3,  on  the  cap  (see  Fig.  4)  rests 
on  the  enlarged  end  a3  of  the  shank  when  the  cap  is 
in  operative  position,  a  bolt  &x  passing  through  the 
lug  and  into  a  threaded  hole  in  the  end  a3,  retaining 
the  cap  rigidly  in  place.  The  inner  end  of  the  cap  is- 
down  turned  at  a4,  and  threaded  to  receive  and  sup- 
port one  of  the  pivots  or  stud-bearings  0,  of  the 
temple-roll  d,  a  similar  pivot  or  bearing  C,  being  held1 


in  the  outer  end  of  the  cap,  as  clearly  shown  in 
Fig.  1. 

In  the  same  the  temple-roll  is  shown  provided  with 
bushings  d10,  axially  bored  at  the  ends  to  receive 
and  freely  turn  upon  the  smooth  inner  ends  of  the 
stud-bearings  c,  c',  the  end  of  one  bushing  projecting- 
beyond  the  end  of  the  roll,  as  at  d*. 

It  is  found  in  practice  that  lint,  dust,  etc.,  are  apt 
to  collect  about  the  inner  end  bearing  of  the  usual 
temple-roll  and  which  is  prevented  in  the  construction' 
of  this  temple  by  extending  the  bushing,  as  at  <?x. 


114 


and  inserting  it  loosely  in  the  counterbore  C  of  a 
protector  c.  (Shown  separately  in  Fig.  3.)  This  pro- 
tector is  made  of  brass  with  laterally  extending  wings 
e2,  which  enter  between  the  edges  of  the  cap  and 
pod,  holding  it  in  place,  the  bearing  or  pivot  c, 
passing  through  a  hole  e3,  in  the  protector,  the  latter 
also  taking  up  the  end-thrust  of  the  temple-roll 
when  in  use.  By  this  means  the  necessary  longi- 
tudinal play  of  the  roll  is  permitted  while  effectually 
protecting  the  bearing  from  the  entrance  of  lint  or 
■dirt. 

In  weaving  heavy,  closely-woven  cloth 
it  is  found  that  if  the  teeth  of  the  roll  are 
reduced  in  number  at  the  outer  end  of  the 
roll,  they  take  a  much  better  hold  of  the 
cloth  along  the  selvedges,  and  slack  sel- 
vedges can  then  be  held  properly,  thus 
preventing  the  curling  up  of  the  selvedge. 

With  the  usual  temple-roll,  having  the 
teeth  disposed  equally  from  end  to  end, 
the  teeth  cannot  properly  enter  and  take 
hold  of  slack  selvedges,  and  cloth  with 
straight  selvedges  cannot  be  woven. 

The  teeth  are  also  made  at  the  outer  or 
selvedge  end  of  the  roll  of  uniform  height, 
the  teeth  gradually  decreasing  in  height 
from  about  the  point  d2,  Fig.  1,  to  the 
inner  end  of  the  roll.  This  prevents  the 
teeth  at  the  inner  end  of  the  roll  from 
taking  the  greatest  hold  of  the  cloth  and 
marking  it,  for  the  gradually  decreasing 
height  of  the  teeth  toward  the  inner  end 
of  the  roll  causes  them  to  take  a  gradually 
diminishing  hold  on  the  cloth  inward  from 
the  selvedge. 

When  weaving  thin  fine  goods  the 
arrangement  of  the  teeth  as  to  number  is 
reversed — that  is  to  say,  the  teeth  are  set 
closer  together  at  the  selvedge  end,  so 
that  a  greater  number  engage  the  cloth  at  any  one 
time,  and  being  set  closer  together  they  cannot  enter 
so  deeply  into  the  material,  thus  avoiding  marking. 
Furthermore,  the  close  setting  of  the  teeth  enables 
them  to  let  go  of  the  fabric  more  easily  as  the  cloth 
is  moved  along. 

The  arrangement  of  the  teeth  as  to  height  is,  how- 
•ever,  the  same  as  heretofore,  the  teeth  decreasing  in 
height  from  the  vicinity  of  the  middle  of  the  roll  to 
the  inner  end,  as  described.  This  "tapering"  of  the 
teeth,  as  it  may  be  termed,  decreases  the  pressure  of 
the  cloth  on  the  inner  end  of  the  roll  and  so  decreases 
the  wear  on  the  bearing.    (Draper  Co.) 


putting  a  knife  against  the  roll,  the  inner  edge  of  the 
cap  is  provided  with  a  downturned  lip  or  guard, 
which  so  far  closes  the  cloth-passage  at  the  rear  side 
of  the  roll  as  to  preclude  the  introduction  of  the 
blade  of  a  knife  to  cut  anything  off  against  the  roll. 

Fig.  A,  shows  this  improved  loom-temple  in  top 
or  plan  view;  Fig.  B,  a  section  in  the  line  x-x, 
Fig.  A;  Fig.  C,  a  section  in  the  line  x'-x'  of  Fig.  A, 
and  Fig  D,  is  a  partial  longitudinal  section  of  the 
cap  above  the  roll  in  the  line  af-x2,  Fig.  A. 


IMPROVED  BUTCHER  TEMPLE. 

In  loom-temples  as  now  commonly  made  and  in 
use,  the  cloth  after  passing  the  roll  emerges  from 
the  temple  through  an  open  slot  between  the  inner 
side  edges  of  the  cap  and  pod.  This  construction  is 
objectionable,  because  when  a  fault  occurs  in  the 
cloth,  so  that  the  latter  presents  loose  yarn,  which 
Incomes  wrapped  about  the  roll  or  in  any  way  ob- 
structs its  movement,  or  if  a  fault  occurs  in  the  cloth 
which  should  be  removed  by  cutting  the  same  out, 
the  operative,  with  a  knife  or  other  cutting  instru- 
ment, cuts  the  yarn  or  cloth  while  on  the  roll,  the 
blade  of  the  knife  being  used  against  the  roll,  and  in 
this  operation  the  knife  always  strikes  the  very  fine, 
sharp  teeth  of  the  roll  and  blunts  or  damages  them, 
•so  that  thereafter  they  cannot  enter  the  cloth  prop- 
erly, but,  on  the  contrary,  they  tear  and  damage  the 
cloth,  and  the  temple-roll  has  to  be  removed  and  a 
new  one  inserted.     To  prevent  the  operative  from 


Letters  of  references  indicate  thus: — A,  the  stand; 
B,  the  shank;  a,  the  cap;  6,  the  pod;  c,  the  heel,  and 
d,  the  roll  having  the  characteristic  sharp  points  or 
pins  d'. 

The  cap  a,  is  provided  with  a  lip  or  guard  a',  ex- 
tending downwardly  from  the  inner  side  of  the  cap 
toward  the  top  of  the  heel,  said  guard  almost 
closing  up  the  usual  cloth-passage  at  the  rear  side  of 
the  roll  and  completely  obviating  the  introduction  of 
a  knife-blade  in  such  position  as  to  cut  against  the 
roll  d,  to  sever  the  cloth  or  yarn. 

The  lug  or  ear  e,  at  the  free  end  of  the  cap,  which 
receives  the  usual  journal  or  pin  on  which  the  roll 
turns,  is  made  longer  than  heretofore,  so  that  it  ex- 
tends down  to  substantial!)'  the  line  occupied  by  the 
periphery  of  the  roll,  so  that  said  lug,  and  not  the 
roll,  as  heretofore,  keeps  the  cloth  down.  This  con- 
struction results  in  greatly  reducing  the  wear  on  the 
said  journals  and  on  the  said  rolls,  and  adds  very 
greatly  to  the  life  of  the  temple. 

In  Fig.  D,  the  lug  or  ear  e,  is  shown  extended  down 
to  take  the  strain  of  the  cloth.  The  dotted  lines  in 
said  figure  show  where  the  said  ear  usually  termi- 
nates.   (Draper  Co.) 


THE  BUTCHER  THREAD-CUTTING  TEMPLE. 

In  automatic  looms,  the  filling  is  supplied  to  the 
shuttle  in  the  shuttle-box  while  the  loom  is  in  action, 
the  filling-carriers  are  supported  above  the  shuttle- 
box  and  the  outer  end  of  the  filling  on  the  filling- 
carrier  is  connected  to  a  filling-end  holder,  so  that 
after  the  filling-carrier  has  been  put  into  the  shuttle 
and  the  shuttle  thrown  through  the  shed  the  said 
filling-thread,  so  held,  will  be  automatically  threaded 


115 


into  the  delivery-eye  of  the  shuttle.  Each  insertion 
of  a  new  filling-carrier  into  a  shuttle  consequently 
leaves  outside  the  selvage  a  filling-end  of  from  fifteen 
to  twenty  inches  long,  it  leading  from  the  selvage  to 
the  said  filling-end  holder.  This  filling-end  must  be 
removed,  else  it  is  liable  to  be  caught  by  subsequent 
shots  of  filling,  making  bunches  at  the  selvage  which 


damage  the  appearance  of  the  goods  and  lessens  its 
salable  value  in  the  market.  Numerous  attempts 
have  been  made  to  break  or  cut  off  these  filling-ends, 
but  none  of  them  so  far  known  have  been  so  com- 
pletely successful  as  to  promptly  part  or  cut  off  the 
said  filling,  and  the  loom  might  sometimes  run  a 
dozen  picks  before  the  filling-end  was  removed.  In 
experiments  made,  to  provide  a  cutter  which  will  ope- 
rate promptly  and  unerringly  to  cut  off  this  filling 
it  was  ascertained  that  the  filling-end  should  be  caught 
and  cut  before  the  temple  carrying  the  cutter  is  moved 
toward  the  breast-beam  as  the  lay  beats  in  the  filling. 

In  the  present  temple,  a  cutter-blade  or  cutter 
mounted  on  or  so  as  to  move  with  the  temple,  is 
provided,  and  the  cutter  is  so  shaped  that  it  normally 
stands  in  a  plane  outside  the  path  of  the  filling-end, 
and  its  movement  is  such  that  at  each  beat  of  the 
lay  the  cutter  is  moved  so  that  it  catches  behind  the 
filling-end,  if  one  is  present,  and  the  cutter,  having 
engaged  the  filling-end,  is  then  moved  toward  the 
breast-beam  to  engage  the  thread  between  itself  and 
the  temple  and  cut  the  same,  this  cutting  movement 
being  substantially  completed  a  little  before  the  tem- 
ple is  ready  to  start  with  the  lay  toward  the  breast- 
beam.  In  this  way  the  filling-end  when  present  is 
promptly  cut  off. 

Fig.  i,  is  a  top  or  plan  view  of  the  new  thread- 
.cutting  temple;  Fig.  2,  a  side  elevation  thereof;  Fig. 
3,  a  front  end  elevation,  the  roller  being  omitted; 
Fig.  4,  a  partial  section  taken  longitudinally  through 
the  cutter-blade  or  cutter  and  part  of  the  temple; 
Fig.  5,  shows  the  cutter-blade  or  cutter  detached  and 
enlarged,  and  Fig.  6,  is  a  detail  drawing. 

The  loom-temple,  consists  of  the  .stand  A,  adapted  to 
be  secured  to  the  breast-beam  of  the  loom,  the  slide- 
bar  B,  having  the  pod  B',  the  cap  B2,  the  heel  B3, 
attached  to  the  pod  by  screws  B4,  and  the  toothed 
roller  B5  between  the  pod  and  cap  turning  on  pivots. 
The  said  stand  A,  contains  a  spring  which  surrounds 
the  bar  B,  to  normally  keep  it  pressed  forward  toward 
the  lay.  The  pod  (see  Figs.  3,  and  4,)  is  slotted  at 
a,  to  receive  a  steel  blade  a',  said  blade  having,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  3,  an  open  space  at  both  sides  of  it. 


The  shank  or  bar  B,  has  secured  to  or  formed  as 
part  of  it  an  ear  b,  which  is  slotted  in  continuation  of 
the  slot  «.  In  the  slot  in  the  ear  is  inserted  the  body 
0  of  the  thread-cutter  C,  the  acting  front  end  of  the 
cutter  being  shown  as  slotted  at  2,  to  leave  two  arms 
c' ,  c\  each  having  a  suitable  hook  c3. 

The  slot  2,  straddles  the  steel  blade,  and  in  its 
normal  or  inoperative  position  the  acting  end  of  the 
cutter  is,  by  the  action  of  a  spring  d,  kept  projecting 
through  the  slot  a,  and  elevated  as  shown  in  Figs.  2 
and  4. 

The  spring  <1,  has  near  one  end  a  coil  which  is 
fitted  over  a  stud  d',  extended  from  the  bar  B,  the 
end  3  of  the  spring  bearing  against  a  part  of  the  bar, 
but  the  opposite  free  end  of  the  spring  is  bent  into 
the  form  of  a  circular  loop  d\  one  edge  of  which 
enters  a  notch  d\  in  the  heel  c4  of  the  cutter,  the 
end  C°  of  the  spring  near  the  loop  d-t  resting  against 
a  shoulder  «'  of  the  heel,  said  spring  serving  to  re- 
tain the  said  cutter  in  its  normal  forward  position, 
with  its  cutting  end  out  of  the  plane  of  the  filling- 
end,  and  as  herein  shown  elevated.  By  removing  the 
loop  of  the  spring  from  the  notch  d3,  the  cutter  may 
be  readily  removed  to  be  -cleaned  or  oiled. 

The  cutter  has  two  forward  stop-lugs  5-5  to  limit 
the  forward  position  of  the  cutter  under  the  action 
of  the  spring  d,  and  a  shoe  6,  which  slides  on  the 
under  side  of  the  ear  6,  which  under  side  is  beveled 
or  shaped,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2,  to  let  the  shoe  both 
slide  and  rock.  The  shoe  also  receives  the  wear  of 
the  cutter  and  keeps  the  top  side  of  the  cutter  from 
being  worn. 

The  temple  at  its  front  edge  (see  Fig.  3)  is  cut 
or  milled  away  each  side  the  slot  to  leave  grooves 
8,  to  receive  the  filling-end  when  the  cutter  acts  on 
the  same  to  sever  it.  said  grooves  obviating  any  liabil- 
ity of  the  cutter  drawing  the  said  ends  into  said 
groove  &,  during  the  operation  of  severing  the  end, 
for  the  cutting  edge  of  the  hooks  c3  are  moved  into 
the  temple  only  substantially  flush  with  the  bottoms 
of  said  grooves,  the  edges  of  the  steel  plate  standing 
outside  the  line  of  the  bottom  of  the  said  grooves. 

The  body  of  the  cutter  at  its  upper  side  is  provided 
with  a  projection  c8,  which  as  the  cutter  rises  under 
the  action  of  the  spring  d,  meets  the  bottom  of  the 


groove  in  the  cap,  (see  Fig.  4)  thus  preventing  the 
slotted  front  end  of  the  cutter  from  striking  said  cap 
and  being  battered  or  jammed  to  close  the  slot  2  in 
any  way. 

The  cutter  has  near  its  front  end  a  notch  10,  to 
embrace  the  stud  by  which  the  roll  B5  is  supported 
at  one  end. 


116 


In  use  the  cutter  herein  shown  will  stand  with  its 
hooked  end  <?  elevated  and  removed  for  a  distance 
from  the  front  of  the  blade  a',  as  represented  in 
Figs.  2  and  4.  As  the  lay  comes  forward  at  each 
beat,  after  filling  has  been  thrown  into  the  shed,  the 
lay  strikes  the  heel  c*  of  the  cutter,  which  immedi- 
ately causes  the  hooked  end  to  move  from  the  posi- 
tion Figs.  2  and  4,  placing  the  hook  c8  of  the  cutter 
behind  the  filling-end,  provided  there  is  such  an  end 
between  the  selvage  and  the  filling-end  holder  de- 
scribed, and  the  said  hooked  end  having  caught  the 
filling-end  the  slight  further  movement  of  the  lay 
forward  causes  the  cutter  to  be  drawn  into  the  tem- 
ple-head, drawing  the  filling-end  across  the  steel  blade 
and  severing  the  same  at  that  point,  thus  severing 
the  thread  usually  before  the  lay  meets  the  heel  b3 
of  the  temple  to  move  the  latter  and  the  cutter  back 
for  their  full  stroke.  This  cutting  of  the  filling-end 
is  performed  close  to  the  selvage.  The  time  at  which 
the  cutter  operates  is  just  before  the  reciprocation  of 
the  temple,  and  it  is  also  just  before  the  regular  run- 
ning filling-thread  is  beaten  in,  and  hence  the  cutter 
described  cannot  catch  that  thread,  but  is  always  in 
position  to  operate  upon  the  filling-end  extended  from 
the  selvage  to  the  filling  holder  on  the  very  first 
pick,  severing  it  at  such  pick,  so  that  the  selvage  is 
left  clean  and  without  any  liability  of  being  dam- 
aged by  the  filling-end. 

In  practice  it  is  found  that  the  cutting  mechanism 
shown,  severs  the  thread  before  the  temple  is  started 
back  by  the  lay;  but  if  for  any  reason  the  thread 
should  not  be  cut  at  this  exact  time  it  will  be  cut 
while  the  temple  and  cutter  are  being  moved  toward 
the  breast-beam  together.    (Draper  Co.) 


spindle  through  a  hole  in  said  arm  b~,  up  to  a 
shoulder  with  which  said  spindle  is  provided,  and 
turning  a  nut  D  upon  the  part  of  said  spindle  which 
projects  from  the  inner  face  of  said  arm.  Said  spindle 
E  is  arranged  parallel  with  the  upper  edges  or  oper- 
ative surfaces  of  the  cloth-presser  6'. 

The  temple-roll  G  is  a  cylinder  g,  provided  with 
pins  or  teeth  g',  to  engage  the  cloth  and  having  a 
central  longitudinal  hole  which  receives  the  spindle 
E,  said  roll  turning  on  said  spindle  and  being  re- 
tained thereon  by  the  tension  or  tendency  to  contract 
of  the  cloth.  Said  roll  is  sufficiently  long  to  reach 
from  the  shoulder  e',  or  other  inner  end  bearing  of 
said  roll  to  the  outer  end  of  the  cloth-presser — that 
is,to  the  outer  face  of  the  shank  B — and  will  in  that 
case  hold  the  selvage  in  line  with  said  outer  face  at 
the  fell,  the  shank  B,  just  in  front  of  the  presser, 
being  offset  at  66  downward,  and  the  upper  inside 
corner  of  said  offset  part  being  rounded  to  allow 
said  selvage  to  bend  more  readily  around  said  offset 
part. 

The  position  of  the  presser  and  the  roll  may  be  re- 
versed or  the  temple-head  may  be  inverted  and  the 
presser  changed  to  the  opposite  selvage  of  the  cloth, 
a  right-hand  temple  when  inverted  becoming  a  left- 
hand  temple,  and  vice  versa.  When  so  inverted,  the 
height  of  the  temple-head  must  be  changed  accord- 
ingly by  securing  the  plate  to  the  under  side  of 
the  breast-beam  instead  of  on  top  of  the  same.  The 
plate  or  arm  &4,  is  also  cast  in  one  piece  with  the 
shank  B,  and  is  provided  with  holes  through  which 
and  through  slots  V ,  in  the  bracket  or  heel  F,  screws 
f  are  driven   to   secure   said   heel    F   adjustably  to 


B 


CLAUS'S  AND  LUDLAM'S  TEMPLE. 

This  temple  enables  the  cloth  woven  to  be  as  wide 
as  the  distance  between  the  outer 
ends  of  the  temple-heads,  causes  the 
temple-rolls  to  be  retained  on  their 
spindles  by  the  tension  of  the  cloth, 
allows  of  the  rolls  being  removed 
from  their  spindles  when  the  cloth 
is  not  in  the  temples,  and  enables 
any  temple  to  be  used  either  side 

Fig.  1,  is  a  plan  of  such  an  im- 
proved loom-temple;  Fig.  2,  an 
outer  side  elevation  of  the  same: 
Fig.  3,  an  inner  side  elevation  of 
the  same,  the  case  and  spring  be- 
ing omitted  in  Figs.  2  and  3. 

The  loom-temple  comprises  a  case  A,  having  an 
attaching-plate  or  slotted  flange  a,  by  means  of  which 
said  case  is  secured  by  bolts  or  screws  to  the  breast- 
beam  of  a  loom,  a  temple-shank  B,  arranged  in 
said  case  and  having  a  shoulder  b,  between  which 
and  the  front  end  of  the  case  A,  is  arranged  a  spiral 
spring  C,  surrounding  said  shank,  to  force  the  tem- 
ple-head or  rear  end  of  said  temple-shank  toward  the 
fell  of  the  cloth. 

The  pod  or  cloth-pressure  is  rigidly  secured  to 
the  shank,  being  cast  in  one  piece  therewith,  and 
projects  from  the  inner  face  of  said  shank  B,  and  an 
arm  &2,  projects  from  said  shank  laterally  inward 
and  backward  as  far  as  the  inner  or  free  end  of  said 
cloth-presser,  leaving  a  space  b3  between  said  presser 
and  arm  for  the  introduction  of  the  cloth. 

To  the  outer  face  of  the  arm  &E,  near  the  free  end 
of  said  arm,  is  secured  the  roll^spirrdle  E,  by  pass- 
ing the  inner  screw-threaded  end  portion  e  of  said 


OCC 


the  temple-head,  said  heel  receiving  the  blow  of  the 
screw  in  the  lay  in  beating  up.    (Draper  Company.) 


SYKES'S  TEMPLE. 


This  temple  is  so  constructed  that  the  toothed 
roller  and  its  casing  can  be  turned  out  of  the  way  of 
the  cloth  when  it  is  desired  to  pick  out  defective  shots 
with  which  said  roller  and  its  casing  would  otherwise 
interfere.  This  object  is  obtained  by  rounding  the 
forward  end  of  the  bar  or  shank  of  the  temple  at 
and  near  the  roller  casing  so  that  when  the  temple  is 
retracted  to  its  full  extent,  this  portion  of  said  shank 


117 


will  occupy  the  forward  guide  and  will  therefore  per- 
mit the  roller  and  its  casing  to  be  turned  part  way 
around  so  as  to  be  clear  of  the  web  of  cloth. 

Fig.  I,  is  a  perspective  view  of  this  loom-temple, 


Fig.  1. 


showing  the  parts  in  the  position  which  they  assume 
when  the  temple  is  in  use;  Fig.  2,  is  a  perspective 
view  illustrating  the  roller  casing  turned  down  so  as 
to  clear  the  woven  web. 

A,  represents  the  slotted  plate  adapted  to  be  secured 
to  the  breast-beam  of  the  loom  and  having  front 
and  rear  guides,  B  and  D,  for  the  shank  F,  of  the 
temple,  the  forward  portion  of  said  shank  being  rec- 
tangular in  cross  section  and  adapted  to  slide  in  the 
front  guide  B,  while  the  rear  portion  of  the  shank  is 
circular  in  cross  section  and  is  adapted  to  the  rear 
guide  D,  a  spring  a,  being  interposed  between  said 
rear  guide  and  a  shoulder  b,  of  the  shank,  so  as  to 
tend  to  project  the  same. 

The  outer  end  of  the  shank  carries  the  usual 
toothed  roller  and  the  casing  therefor,  said  casing 
comprising  the  cap  &,  and  trough  f,  but  that  portion 
of  the  shank  at  and  near  the  roller  casing  is  rounded, 
as  shown  at  i,  this  reduction  in  the  size  and  shape  of 
the  forward  end  of  the  shank  resulting  in  the  forma- 
tion of  a  shoulder  m,  at  the  junction  of  the  round 
and  rectangular  portions  of  the  shank.  During  the 
working  of  the  loom  the  rectangular  portion  of  the 
shank  F,  slides  backward  and  forward  in  the  forward 
guide  B,  and  retains  the  toothed  roller  and  its  casing 
in  proper  condition  for  engaging  with  the  web  of 
cloth,  but  when  it  becomes  necessary  to  pick  out  a 
defect  in  the  web,  the  toothed  roller  and  its  casing 
would  otherwise  interfere,  thus  the  web  is  simply 
withdrawn  from  engagement  with  the  toothed  roller, 
and  the  temple  is  pushed  so  far  forward  that  the 


Fig.  2. 


rounded  front  end  i,  of  the  shank  F,  occupies  the 
forward  guide  B,  and  thus  permits  the  turning  of  said 
shank  and  the  roller  casing  part  way  around,  as  for 
instance,  by  turning  it  downward,  as  shown  in  Fig. 
2,  or  downward  and  outward,  the  shoulder  en- 
gaging with  the  front  guide  B,  so  as  to  prevent  the 
spring  a,  from  projecting  the  temple,  and  said 
shoulder  also  serving  to  retain  the  roller  casing  in 


the  position  to  which  it  has  been  adjusted,  the  fric- 
tion between  the  shoulder  m,  and  the  guide  B,  being 
sufficient  to  prevent  accidental  displacement  of  the 
roller  casing. 

When  the  roller  casing  has  been  turned  to  a  ver- 
tical position,  it  is  beyond  the  selvedge  of  the  fabric, 
and  hence  is  entirely  out  of  the  way  of  the  same  and 
does  not  interefere  with  the  picking  out  of  filling 
threads,  so  that  defects  extending  even  as  far  as  the 
breast-beam  of  the  loom  can  be  easily  remedied. 

The  shoulder  »»,  of  the  temple-shank  also  serves,  by 
engagement  with  one  side  of  the  guide  B,  to  retain 
the  temple  in  a  retracted  position  without  turning 
the  same,  said  shoulder  performing,  in  this  case,  the 
same  function  as  the  usual  side  notch  of  the  rectan- 
gular temple  shank. 

The  cap  of  the  forward  guide  B,  is  detachable,  be- 
ing held  in  place  by  a  screw  «,  at  one  end,  and  a 
tongue  s,  at  the  other  end,  so  that  it  can  be  readily 
taken  off  when  it  is  desired  to  remove  the  temple 
shank.    (Thomas  Sykes,  Philadelphia.) 


SYKES'S  IMPROVED  TEMPLE. 

The  previously  explained  temple  has  thus  far  met 
with  favor  amongst  our  manufacturers;  however  there 
are  two  disadvantages  to  this  loom-temple,  viz.,  the 
accidental  turning  of  the  temple  shank  in  its  bearings 
when  the  shank  has  been  pushed  inward  to  its  full 
extent,  and  the  reduced  portion  of  the  shank  occu- 
pies the  forward  guide.  The  second  objection  con- 
sists in  the  vertical  or  lateral  play  of  the  shank  in 
the  forward  guide.    These  two  objections  have  been 


successfully  overcome  in  the  new  temple  and  of  which 
Fig.  i ,  is  a  perspective  view  and  Fig.  2,  is  a  side 
view  of  the  same,  showing  the  temple  shank  pushed 
fully  inward,  but  locked  so  as  to  prevent  turning. 
Fig.  3,  is  a  similar  view  showing  the  shank  un- 
locked, so  as  to  permit  of  the  turning  of  the  same. 

Of  the  letters  of  reference  accompanying  the  illus- 
trations— A,  represents  the  fixed  guide  plate  of  the 
temple,  adapted  to  be  secured  to  the  breast-beam  of 
the  loom,  and  B,  is  the  temple  shank,  having  at  its 
forward  end  the  roller  box  or  casing  D,  the  said 
shank  having  a  rectangular  portion  adapted  to  a 
forward  guide  A',  on  the  plate  A,  and  a  cylindrical 
portion  adapted  to  a  rear  guide  A2,  on  said  plate, 
a  spring  F,  being  interposed  between  said  rear  guide 
Aa,  and  the  rectangular  portion  of  the  temple  shank, 
so  as  to  serve  to  normally  project  the  latter,  the 
extent  of  such  projection  being  limited  by  the  con- 
tact of  an  enlarged  portion  or  lug  a,  of  the  temple 
shank  with  the  cap  or  top  plate  of  the  forward  guide. 

Adjacent  to  the  roller  box  or  casing  D,  the  shank 
B  of  the  temple  is  reduced,  as  shown  at  6,  so  that 
when  the  shank  is  driven  inward  until  this  reduced 
portion  occupies  the  forward  guide  A',  the  shank  can 
be  turned  in  said  guide  so  as  to  permit  the  roller  box, 
or  casing  D,  to  be  turned  down  out  of  the  way  of  the 


118 


fabric,  in  order  to  permit  of  the  ready  picking  out  of 
the  imperfect  shots. 

It  occasionally  happens,  however,  that  the  temple 
is  accidentally  forced  inwards  until  its  reduced  por- 
tion occupies  the  forward  guide,  as  for  instance,  when 
the  shuttle  fails  to  properly  enter  the  box  and  strikes 
the  temple  on  the  beating  up  of  the  lathe,  and  at 
such  times  it  is  advisable  to  prevent  the  turning  of 
the  temple  shank  in  its  guide.  For  this  reason  this 
temple  is  provided  with  a  movable  locking  bolt 
which  normally  engages  with  the  shank  of  the  temple 
when  the  latter  is  pushed  inward,  and  prevents  the 
turning  of  said  shank  in  its  guides,  the  bolt,  however, 
being  capable  of  retraction  or  withdrawal,  so  that 
the  temple  shank  is  then  free  from  its  influence,  and 

FTd2. 


can  be  turned  in  its  guides  when  pushed  so  far 
inward  that  the  reduced  portion  of  the  shank  occu- 
pies the  forward  guide. 

The  locking  bolt,  (see  Fig.  i)  is  represented  as  in 
the  form  of  a  plate  d,  resting  on  the  base  plate  A,  of 
the  temple  beneath  the  sliding  shank  B,  said  plate 
having  a  laterally  projecting  lug  or  finger  f,  which 
may  be  adapted  to  either  of  two  notches  Q,  <)' ,  formed 
in  a  flange      at  one  side  of  the  base  of  the  temple. 

When  the  finger  f,  occupies  the  forward  notch  (I,  the 
rectangular  shank  B,  of  the  temple  bears  upon  the 
locking  bolt  when  the  shank  is  pushed  inward  as 
shown  in  Fig.  2.  Hence  any  turning  of  the  temple 
shank  in  its  guides  is  effectually  prevented,  but  if 
the  locking  bolt  d,  is  drawn  backward  so  that  its 
finger  f,  occupies  the  rearward  recess  0' ,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  3,  the  temple  shank  when  pushed  fully  in- 
ward will  be  free  from  the  influence  of  the  locking 
bolt  and  hence  will  not  be  retained  but  can  be 
turned  in  its  guides  so  as  to  carry  the  roller  box 
or  casing  away  from  the  woven  web. 

The  turning  of  the  temple  shank  in  its  guides 
causes  a  slight  inclination  of  said  shank  as  shown 
in  Fig.  3,  and  for  this  reason  the  opening  formed 
in  the  guide  A2,  for  the  reception  of  the  cylindrical 
portion  of  the  shank  is  beveled,  as  shown  by  dotted 
lines,  so  as  to  provide  for  this  disposition  of  the 


FIG.3 


temple  shank  and  yet  prevent  any  excessive  loose- 
ness of  fit  of  the  cylindrical  portion  of  the  shank 
in  said  outer  guide.  The  opening  in  the  forward 
guide  A',  is  slightly  wider  than  its  height  and  the 
portion  B,  of  the  temple  shank  is  so  formed  as  to 
completely  fill  said  forward  guide  A',  so  as  to  pre- 
vent any  vertical  or  lateral  motion  of  the  shank  in 
said  guide  as  the  shank  is  reciprocated  longitudin- 
ally,  the    reduced    portion    b,    of   the    shank  being 


rounded  so  as  to  permit  of  the  turning  of  the  roller 
box,  in  which  case  the  shoulder  formed  by  re- 
ducing the  shank,  engages  with  the  bottom  portion 
of  the  forward  guide,  the  reduced  portion  in  this  case 
vertically  filling  said  guide  so  as  to  prevent  any  rise 
of  the  temple  shank,  such  as  would  release  the  same 
and  permit  its  projection  by  the  spring.  (Thomas 
S  ykes,  IJh  iladelph  la . ) 


MASON'S  TEMPLE. 


Fig.  1,  represents  a  top  view,  and  Fig.  2,  a  side 
view  of  this  temple. 

a,  indicates  the  shank  of  the  temple,  whose  rear 
end  is  constructed  in  the  ordinary  manner,  and  in- 
closed in  the  ordinary  box  or  casing,  which  is 
adapted  to  be  adjustably  secured  to  the  breast-beam 
of  the  loom.  The  front  end  of  the  shank  a  is  pro- 
vided with  an  arm  (>',  extending  at  right  angles 
thereto  and  parallel  with  the  loom  reed. 

b,  indicates  a  shank,  having  its  rear  end  &2,  pro- 
jecting downward  at  right  angles  thereto,  and  the 
lower  end  of  said  projection  is  provided  with  a  screw 
c,  adjustable  in  a  direction  parallel  with  the  shank  6; 
and  its  front  end  is  provided  with  the  arm  extend- 
ing underneath,  and  parallel  to  the  arm  a'.  The  shank 
b,  is  also  provided  with  the  ear  q',  by  means  of 
which  it  is  pivoted  to  the  shank  «,  by  the  bolt  Q. 
Opposite  to  the  rear  end  of  the  shank  b,  the  shank  a, 
is  perforated  vertically  to  receive  the  spiral  spring  g; 


i,  

 » 

,llr   *J 

and  the  top  of  said  perforation  is  screw-threaded,  to 
receive  the  screw  v,  by  means  of  which,  the  pressure 
of  said  spring,  to  force  the  shanks  a,  and  b,  apart,  is 
regulated,  by  advancing  or  retracting  said  screw. 
The  shank  b,  is  provided  with  a  shallow  perforation 
for  the  bottom  of  the  spring  ;/,  to  rest  in. 

In  operation,  the  screw  c,  is  adjusted,  so  that  the 
lay  in  beating  up,  strikes  its  head,  before  the  reed 
comes  in  contact  with  the  front  of  the  arms  a',  and 
thereby  compressing  the  spring  0,  and  causing 
said  arms  to  recede  from  each  other,  and  allowing 
the  cloth  to  pass  between  them.  As  the  lay  re- 
cedes, the  expansion  of  the  spring  .</,  causes  the  said 
arms  to  clamp  and  hold  the  cloth  until  the  next  beat 
up. 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  fabric  is  held  between 
surfaces  which  can  leave  no  mark  upon  it,  as  there 
is  no  part  which  penetrates  it;  and  as  no  part  of  the 
device  which  comes  in  contact  with  the  cloth,  re- 
quires lubrication,  there  is  no  liability  of  oil  stains 
thereon.  This  temple  is  for  plain  fabrics  which 
will  hold  itself  out  to  the  reeding  point.  (Henry  ^Y. 
Mason,  New  Bedford,  Muss.) 


-%.<%.-%.-v -%,-%/%/%. -%/%/%/%. 


REEDS  AND  REED  MOTIONS 


ADAMSON'S  REED. 

The  accompanying  illustration  represents  an  eleva- 
tion of  this  improved  reed. 

The  novelty  in  construction  of  this  reed  consists 
in  forming  a  suitable  bend  or  curvature  a,  in  each  of 
the  wires  or  dents  b,  inside  the  reed  and  next  to  the 
back  A,  in  such  manner  as  to  allow  an  elastic  move- 
ment of  the  wires  or  dents  within  the  reed,  thereby 
reducing  friction  upon  the  said  wires  or  dents  and 
increasing  the  usefulness — that  is  to  say,  the  resili- 
ency or  elasticity  of  the  dents  laterally  permit  of 
greater  freedom  of  the  warp-threads  through  the  reed, 
and  especially  those  threads  which  have  knots,  tufts  or 
other  imperfections — of  the  same  while  in  operation. 

The  wires  or  dents  of  the  reed  are  arranged  in  the 
usual  manner  in  parallel  lines,  and  are  firmly  wound 
and  held  rigidly  in  position  in  the  back  of  the  reed, 
the  elastic  movement  being  secured  by  the  expan- 
sion of  the  wires  at  the  parts  a,  and  the  return  to 
their  normal  positions  by  virtue  of  the  springy  nature 
which  the  formation  of  the  wire  imparts. 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  wires  may  be  provided 
with  the  small  bends  or  curvatures  a,  at  or  near  botli 
backs  or  on  one  side  only,  and  the  form  or  shape  of 
the  bends  or  curves  may  be  varied  or  modified  at 


cross  each  other  at  or  near  the  centre  of  the  reed,  as 
clearly  shown  in  Fig.  2.    It  will  be  understood  the 


semi-cylindrical  cross-bars  «,  «,  are  fixed  in  their 
relative  positions  by  the  coil  6,  that  is,  they  are  held 
so  that  they  face  each  other  and  yet  are 
separated  sufficiently  to  permit  the  teeth 
to  be  inserted  directly  in  the  frame.  The 
space  between  the  wire  coils,  the  cross- 
bars and  the  upper  and  lower  portion  of 
the  frame  is  filled  up  with  solder  as  in 
ordinary  reeds.  (Louis  F.  Liotard,  Pater- 
son,  N.  J.) 


pleasure  to  produce  the  elastic  action  desired.  It 
will  thus  be  seen  that  the  spring  action  or  elasticity 
of  the  wires  or  dents  is  confined  wholly  between  the 
backs  of  the  reed,  the  ends  of  the  said  wires  being 
firmly  bound  in  the  backs  of  the  same.  (Joseph 
Adamson,  Pawtucket,  R.  I.) 


LIOTARD'S  REED. 


The  improvement  consists  in  the  arrangement  of 
the  teeth  of  a  reed,  the  method  of  attaching  them  to 
the  reed  frame  and  the  combination  and  arrange- 
ment of  the  various  parts  thereof.  The  novel  con- 
struction of  this  reed  strengthens  its  centre  by  having 
a  double  wire  instead  of  a  single  one. 

Fig.  1,  is  a  front  elevation  of  this  improved  reed; 
Fig.  2,  is  a  sectional  view  on  line  ®,  Fig.  1. 

B,  B,  represents  the  frame  of  the  reed,  to  which 
are  secured  semi-cylindrical  cross  bars  a,  o,  around 
which  is  wound  a  wire  forming  a  continuous  spiral 
coil. 

Between  the  bars  ff,  a,  and  resting  between  the 
coils  formed  by  the  wire  are  arranged  two  sets  of 
teeth  c,  d,  in  such  a  manner  that  one  set  runs  from 
the  front  of  the  upper  frame  to  the  rear  of  the  lower 
one,  the  other  set,  from  the  rear  of  the  upper  frame 
to  the  front  of  the  lower  one.  By  this  arrangement 
the  teeth  will  alternate  in  their  direction  and  thereby 


THE   CROMPTON  REED  FOR  WEAVING 
TUFTED  FABRICS. 

In  these  fabrics  the  tuft-yarns  must  be  regularly 
inserted  between  the  warp-threads. 

The  object  of  the  new  reed  is  to  provide  the  same 
with  reed-spaces  having  at  or  near  their  upper  ends 
entrances  made  flaring,  to  better  receive  enlarge- 
ments or  knots  on  the  warp-threads  traveling  there- 
through and  to  prevent  said  enlargements  or  knots 
catching  at  the  entrances,  to  said  spaces. 

Fig.  1,  in  side  elevation  represents  a  sufficient 
portion  of  a  tufted  loom  provided  with  this  reed 
to  enable  the  latter  to  be  understood.  Fig.  2,  in 
perspective  shows  a  part  of  this  reed.  Fig.  3,  in  side 
elevation  shows  one  of  the  reed-dents  detached;  Fig. 
4,  a  detail  on  the  dotted  line  x,  x,  Fig.  3,  showing 
one  of  the  reeds  and  reed-spaces  in  vertical  cross- 
section;  Fig.  5,  an  enlarged  detail  of  the  top  of  the 
upper  end  of  the  reed  member  in  elevation. 

Referring  to  the  drawings,  the  various  parts  of  the 
mechanism  are  indicated  thus: — The  arms  18,  the  tuft- 
arm  beam  or  spool  dx,  the  tuft-yarn  tubes  or  quills 
Cx  the  lay  d2. 

Referring  to  Fig.  2,  is  a  bar  mounted  upon  the 
lay  d2,  and  shown  as  provided  at  its  front  side  with 
a  series  of  closely-arranged  vertical  slots  r1,  inter- 
secting which  is  a  longitudinal  (preferably  V-shaped) 
groove  »'3.    The  reed  r,  as  herein  shown,  is  made 


119 


120 


up  of  a  series  of  independently-removable  (prefer- 
ably U-shaped)  members        shown  as  formed  from 

flat  metal  strips  and 
^tt^-x.  arranged    with  their 

legs  in  the  slots  »'2, 
each  slot  receiving  ad- 
jacent legs  of  two  of 
said  U-shaped  mem- 
bers, as  best  shown 
in  Fig.  2.  The  legs 
of  these  U-shaped 
m  embers  r*t  are 
notched  at  their  front 
edges  to  correspond 
and  register  with  the 
V-shaped  groove 
the  said  members,  as 
shown,  being  re- 
tained in  proper  posi- 
tion by  a  clamping 
member  r5,  applied  to 
the  face  of  the  bar  »", 
and  having  a  A- 
shaped  longitudinal 
lip  or  flange  r6  which 
enters  the  groove 
>'\  referred  to  and 
the  corresponding 
notches  in  the  legs  of 
the  U-shaped  mem- 
bers and  is  secured  in 
position  by  screws  r7. 
By  this  construction,  removal  of  the  plate  J"5,  permits 
any  single  reed  member  to  be  removed  without  dis- 
turbing the  position  of  any  other  member,  each  pair 
of  vertical  legs  in  any  single  slot  r2,  constituting  a 
reed-dent  and  each  space  rs!  formed  by  and  within  a 
U-shaped  reed  member  constituting  a  reed-space. 

The  reed-spaces  J"8,  are 
of  a  normal  width  suf- 
ficient to  permit  two  or 
more  warp-threads  pass- 
ing therethrough  to  be 
freely  crossed  in  shed- 
ding. At  one  of  their 
ends — herein  their  upper 
ends — the  said  reed-spaces 
are  shown  at  their  mid- 
dle contracted  at  r'l  ac- 
complished by  pinching 
together  the  legs  of 
the  members  adjacent 
the  crown-bends  thereof 
to  a  width  as  will  re- 
ceive but  a  single  thread 
each,  so  that  when  the 
threads  are  opened  in 
shedding,    those  threads 

moved  into  the  upper  plane  of  the  shed  will  be 
carried  into  these  contracted  portions  of  the  reed- 
spaces  and  will  therefore  be  properly  centered  and 
spaced  one  from  another  and  restrained  against  lat- 
eral vibration  or  play.  The  entrances  to  the  reed- 
spaces  and  preferably  the  entrances  to  the  upper  por- 
tions of  said  spaces  at  opposite  sides  of  the  reed 
are  made  larger  than  the  smaller  portions  back  of 
said  entrances;  that  is,  said  entrances  are  made,  as 
it  were,  flaring,  as  best  indicated  at  »'10,  to  enable 
burs  or  knots  on  the  warp-threads  to  more  freely 
enter  the  reed-spaces.  Thus,  were  it  not  for  the 
flaring  entrances,  the  contracted  upper  portions  of 
the  reed-spaces  would  frequently  bar  the  entrance 
thereto  of  any  considerable  enlargement  on  a  warp- 
thread,  whereas  by  the  new  reed  the  flaring  entrances 
admit  of  the  entrance  to  the  reed-spaces  of  any  burs 


or  enlargements,  which  latter  are  worked  or  carried 
through  the  more  contracted  portions  of  the  reed- 
spaces  without  breaking  the  threads  or  interrupting 
the  passage  of  the  same  through  the  reed. 

The  tops  of  the  reed-spaces  are  also  depressed  as 
shown  at  r11,  at  their  middle,  to  not  only  provide  a 
better  and  more  suitable  enlargement  at  the  entrances 
thereof,  but  also  to  present  at  least  a  part  of  the 
tops  of  said  reed-spaces  in  such  positions  as  will 
more  nearly  conform  of  the  angular  position  of  the 
warp-threads  relatively  to  the  reed  when  the  latter  is 
in  its  extreme  angular  position.  (Crompton  and 
Knoivlcs  Loom  Works,  Worcester,  Mass.) 


ALBINSON'S  FALSE  REED. 

The  object  of  the  reed  is  to  provide  a  false  reed 
for  looms  to  take  the  place  of  the  ordinary  "cord 
or  string  reed."  It  is  intended  for  separating  the 
ends  back  of  harness,  as  in  warps  run  from  spools; 
it  also  may  be  used  back  of  reed  in  loom  for  sepa- 
rating the  threads  in  some  kind  of  work  where  it 
is  necessary  to  divide  the  ends  in  each  split  of  reed. 

Fig.  i,  is  a  front  elevation  of  said  improved  reed, 
certain  portions  being  broken  away,  and  others  re- 
moved to  better  illustrate  the  nature  of  the  improve- 
ment; Fig.  2,  is  a  vertical  central  section  of  the  same. 

A,  indicates  the  rectangular-shaped  reed-frame, 
consisting  of  the  sections  or  sides  a,  6,  c,  and  d.  The 
side  sections  c,  and  d,  are  each  provided  at  or  near 
the  ends  with  elongated  slots  C,  c3,  and  d't  d3t  pene- 
trated by  the  bolts  c2,  c4,  and  d2,  d*,  respectively,  by 
means  of  which  latter  the  said  longitudinal  sections 
or  sides  «,  and  &,  are  adjustably  secured  to  the  side 
sections  C,  and  d. 

The  upper  section  or  head-bar  a,  is  provided  with 
an  elongated  slot  a',  in  which  are  adjustably  secured, 


by  means  of  the  bolts  e',  the  end  and  intermediate 
brackets  e,  provided  in  their  forwardly-projecting  por- 
tions el,  (arranged  at  right  angles  to  the  head-bar 
a,)  with  the  inclined  slots  e2,  adapted  to  receive  and 
support  the  rod  or  wire  f. 

Said  rod  is  bent  at  its  end  portions,  as  at  V , 
adapted  to  bear  against  the  end  brackets,  and  to  thus 
prevent  a  lateral  motion  of  the  said  rod,  or  wire  1. 

On  the  latter  are  fulcrumed  and  slidingly  arranged 
a  series  of  dents  of  uniform  width  and  length,  which 
dents  project  downward  into  the  elongated  groove 
or  slot  &',  of  the  bottom  section  b,  by  means  of  which 
latter,  the  swinging  motion  of  the  dents  is  limited. 

The  frame  A,  is  adapted  to  be  secured  to  the  batten 
of  a  loom  by  means  of  screws  or  bolts  penetrating 
the  openings  c5  and  d5,  arranged  in  the  side  sections 
c  and  d,  of  the  reed-frame  A,  or  in  any  desired 
manner.    (Thomas  Albinson,  Paterson,  N.  J.) 


121 


REED  FOR  DOUPING. 

The  object  of  this  reed  is  to  produce  cross-weaving 
for  low  textured  fabrics  (chenille  weaving)  thus  far 
produced  by  passing  one  set  of  warp  threads  through 


■eyes  in  a  bar  having  a  traverse  motion  and  then 
leading  them  between  the  splits  of  a  combined  comb 
and  reed,  while  the  other  set  of  warp  threads  pass 
beneath  this  bar  and  through  the  eyes  of  teeth  in 
the  combined  comb  and  reed. 

The  new  reed  is  designed  to  have  a  traverse  and  a 
vertical  motion,  by  means  of  which  and  its  peculiar 
construction  it  both  crosses  the  warp  and  forms  the 
shed  for  the  filling. 

Fig.  I,  illustrates  the  reed,  broken  in  parts  or  sec- 
tions in  the  first  position  occupied  in  the  operation: 
and  Fig.  2,  illustrates  it  in  the  second  position  of 
the  operation. 

The  reed  frame  A.  is  provided  with  two  sets  of 
metal  strips.  The  primary  splits  B,  cross  the  frame 
and  are  secured  in  the  usual  manner.  The  second- 
ary splits  D,  extend  part  of  the  distance  only  across 
the  frame  and  divide  the  spaces  formed  by  the  pri- 
mary splits.  The  lower  ends  of  these  secondary  splits 
are  secured  to  the  frame  and  each  is  correspondingly 
secured  to  the  adjacent  primary  split  as  at  C,  a  point 
below  the  top  of  the  secondary  split,  thus  forming 
a  space  E. 

Guide  rods  F,  bent  as  shown  in  the  drawings,  are 
secured  to  the  ends  of  the  reeds,  and  bear  against 
rollers  G,  mounted  in  the  stationary  parts  H,  of  the 
loom-frame. 

The  usual  mechanism  for  lifting  heddles  may  be 
used  for  lifting  the  reed,  and  the  straps  I,  and  hooks 
J,  constitute  a  part  of  this  mechanism.  As  the  reed 
harness  lifts,  the  rollers  G.  bearing  against  the  guide 
rods  F,  at  a  point  just  above  the  bends,  impart  a 
traverse  motion  to  the  reed. 

The  numerals  1  and  2  designate  the  two  warp 
threads    or  spitfuls,    and   the    several    parts    of  the 


drawing  show  the  several  positions  they  occupy  in 
weaving  chenille.  The  position  of  these  threads  in 
Part  I,  is  that  of  the  first  pick  of  the  loom,  when  the 
shed  is  open,  thread  2  being  at  the  top  of  the  reed, 
while  thread  1  lies  in  space  E,  between  the  primary 


and  secondary  splits.  The  position  of  the  threads  in 
Part  II,  is  that  of  the  second  pick  of  the  loom,  thread 
1  being  now  at  the  top  of  the  reed,  while  thread  2 
lies  in  the  secondary  space  between  the  primary  and 
secondary  split.  The  position  in  Part  III,  is  that  of 
the  third  pick  of  the  loom,  it  being  the  same  as  that 
shown  in  Part  I.  The  position  shown  in  Part  IV, 
Fig.  2,  is  that  of  the  fourth  pick  of  the  loom,  effected 
by  the  lifting  of  the  reed  harness,  which  lifts  with  it 
the  thread  1,  lying  in  the  space  E,  the  reed  also 
being  moved  sidewise  or  transversely  by  the  guide 
and  rollers  thus  crossing  the  threads,  the  thread  2, 
now  lying  at  the  bottom  of  the  reed.  The  crossing 
of  the  whip  thread,  or  the  douping,  is  thus  accom- 
plished, and  the  shed  formed  without  the  use  of  a 
douping  harness. 

It  will  be  readily  understood  that  the  reed  is  in 
the  present  invention  required  to  form  the  shed  for 
every  fourth  pick  only  and  coincidently  to  cross  the 
whip  thread,  the  first  three  sheds  for  picks  1,  2  and 
3  being  formed  by  the  usual  mechanism.  (A.  Weit- 
hasse,  Philadelphia.) 


DAVENPORT'S  REED  FOR  WARPING. 

The  object  is  to  provide  a  reed  for  warping  which, 
from  its  simplicity  of  construction  and  ease  of  oper- 
ation, greatly  facilitates  the  forming  of  a  single 
or  a  double  cross  or  lease  or  a  cross  of  two  or  more 
threads  in  preparing  warps  and  to  avoid  the  neces- 
sity of  changing  reeds,  one  reed  only  being  em- 
ployed for  any  one  combination,  thus  saving  the 
trouble  and  expense  as  well  as  avoiding  the  waste 
of  material  in  threading  a  reed  each  time  a  warp  is 
to  be  made. 

When  the  new  reed  is  once  threaded,  it  is  not 
necessary  to  be  changed,  as  the  ends  left  in  the  reed 
when  one  warp  is  made  may  be  tied  to  the  ends  of 
the  next  warp-threads  as  the  bobbins  are  changed 
instead  of  threading  the  reed  anew  for  the  next  warp. 

At  present  in  warping  the  single  or  double  fila- 
ments are  separated  either  by  lifting  the  strands 
by  hand  or  by  the  use  of  a  reed  in  which  the  dents 
are  so  united  by  blocks  that  in  the  centre  of  the 
reed  longitudinally  a  row  of  eyes  or  openings  is 
formed  which  alternate  throughout  the  length  of  the 
reed  with  spaces  which  are  open  from  the  top  to  the 
bottom  of  the  reed-frame.  These  reeds  may  be  so 
constructed  that  the  eyes  or  openings  in  the  centre 
of  the  reed  are  either  single  or  double.  When  these 
eyes  are  double,  the  double  eyes  alternate  with  two 
vertical  slits  extending  from  the  top  to  the  bottom  of 
the  reed-frame. 

Under  the  methods  now  in  use  in  order  to  charge 
from  a  cross  of  single  threads  to  a  cross  of  groups  of 
more  than  one  thread  it  is  necessary  to  change  reeds 
or  to  employ  two  reeds. 

The  new  reed  obviates  the  necessity  of  using  more 
than  one  reed,  and  with  it  any  desired  cross  of 
threads  may  be  obtained  by  uniting  with  blocks  the 
number  of  dents  required  to  carry  the  desired  num- 
ber of  threads  to  be  crossed. 

The  new  reed  is  composed  of  dents  having  wide 
or  enlarged  ends,  either  with  or  without  an  eye  or 
opening  at  each  end  thereof,  which  may  be  formed 
in  any  suitable  manner,  the  dents  being  secured  at 
top  and  bottom  in  a  suitable  frame  with  the  neces- 
sary spaces  between  the  dents,  the  upper  ends  or  eye 
portions  of  the  dents  being  joined  at  different  por- 
tions by  blocks  soldered  between  said  portions  of  the 
dents,  leaving  a  space  between  the  middle  portions 
of  dents  where  all  the  threads  pass  through,  and  the 
ends  or  eye  portions  of  the  dents  being  joined  by 
blocks  soldered  between  them.  (Herbert  Davenport, 
Patersan,  N.  J.) 


122 


THE  KNOWLES  LOOSE-REED  MOTION  FOR 
SILK  LOOMS. 

The  same  relates  to  looms  for  weaving  textile 
fabrics  provided  with  spring-reeds,  and  more  par- 
ticularly to  a  supplemental  attachment  combined  with 
the  spring-reed. 

The  object  of  the  improvement  is  to  provide  a 
supplemental  mechanism  combined  with  the  spring- 
reed  of  a  loom  by  means  of  which  the  reed  will  be 
caused  to  strike  a  sharp  quick  blow  to  beat  up  the 
filling  just  as  the  lay  reaches  its  forward  position 
thus  making  a  fabric  of  closer  and  evener  texture, 
particularly  silk  fabrics. 

The  accompanying  illustration  shows  a  portion  of 
a  loom  side,  one  lay-sword,  and  a  sectional  view  of 
the  breast-beam,  lay,  and  spring-reed  frame  and  the 
supplemental  mechanism  applied  thereto. 

i,  indicates  the  loom  side;  2,  the  breast-beam;  3, 
the  lay;  and  4,  the  lay-sword,  pivoted  at  its  lower  end 
at  5,  and  operated  by  the  crank-shaft  6,  through  the 
crank-connector  7.  The  reed  8  is  pivotally  supported 
at  its  upper  side  between  uprights  9,  at  each  end  of 
the  lay  3,  by  pins  to  swing  in  and  out  at  its  lower 
part,  which  extends  in  a  recess  in  the  rear  upper 
part  of  the  lay.  A  flat  spring  11,  secured  at  its 
lower  end  on  the  lay-sword  4,  bears  at  its  upper 
free  end  against  the  rear  side  of  the  reed  8.  Screw 
12  extends  through  the  lay  and  may  be  turned  in 
or  out  to  regulate  the  forward  swing  of  the  reed. 

To  the  back  of  the  swing  reed-frame,  near  the 
end  thereof,  is  secured  a  stand  13,  having  an  arm 
13',  which  extends  down  below  the  lay  and  is  pro- 
vided with  a  socket  at  its  end,  in  which  is  adjust- 
ably secured  by  a  set-screw  14,  a  contact  piece  15, 
made  of  hardened  steel. 

A  bracket  16  is  secured  to  the  under  side  of  the 
breast-beam,  and  in  this  instance  is  slotted  to  re- 
ceive the  rear  end  of  the  knock-off  lever  or  arm 
17,  which  is  pivoted  to  the  bracket  16  by  a  bolt 
18  and  carries  at  its  front  end  in  a  socket  therein 
a  finger  or  contact  piece  19,  adjustably  secured  by  a 
set-screw  20  and  adapted  to  engage  the  contact-piece 

A  coiled  spring  21  extends  in  a  recess  in  the  bracket 
16  and  bears  on  the  rear  end  17'  of  the  knock-off 
lever  17  back  of  its  pivotal  support  and  acts  to  raise 
the  front  end  of  said  lever  17.  A  projection  17"  on  said 
lever  17  engages  with  the  projection  16"  on  the 
bracket  16  and  limits  the  raising  of  said  lever.  The 
engagement  of  the  rear  end  17'  with  the  bracket  16 
limits  the  downward  motion  of  said  lever. 


A  downwardly-extending  projection  17"'  on  the 
lever  17  is  adapted  to  be  engaged  by  a  screw  22,  ad- 


justable in  an  ear  or  lug  23  on  the  lay-sword  4  and 
held  in  its  adjusted  position  by  two  nuts  24  and  25. 
The  screw  22  acts  as  a  trip  to  engage  the  knock-off 
lever  17  on  the  forward  movement  of  the  lay  and 
move  it  down  to  cause  the  finger  19  to  be  disen- 
gaged from  the  contact-piece  15  on  the  swing-reed 
8,  and  allow  the  spring  11  to  act  to  force  the  reed 
forward. 

As  the  lay  beats  up  the  finger  19  will  engage  with 
the  contact-piece  15  and  hold  or  retard  the  reed  8  at 
its  lower  part.  Just  as  the  lay  reaches  the  limit  of 
its  forward  movement  the  screw  22,  which  is  prop- 
erly adjusted  as  desired,  engages  the  lever  17  and 
moves  it  down  to  trip  or  disengage  the  finger  19 
from  the  piece  15  on  the  reed  8  and  allow  the  spring 
11  to  act  to  force  the  lower  part  of  the  reed  for- 
ward and  cause  it  to  beat  up  the  filling  with  a 
sudden  sharp  blow.  (Crompton  and  Knowles  Loom 
Works.) 


HEDDLES  AND  HARNESSES. 


BEDDING'S    DOUP-HEDDLE    FOR  LENO- 
WEAVING. 

Leno  or  cross-weaving  is  effected  by  a  doup  action 
that  crosses  warp-threads  between  the  picks.  For 
this  purpose  doups  threaded  in  the  heddles  and  con- 
nected with  a  separate  harness-frame  have  been  em- 
ployed; also  frames  carrying  needle-formed  heddles 
have  been  employed  for  such  purpose;  but  so  far  a 
heddle  having  a   wire  doup   mounted   and  guided 


a. 


thereon  has  not  been  devised,  neither  means  for 
depressing  or  controlling  the  tension  of  the  doup- 
ing  devices. 

The  object  of  the  new  heddle  is  to  provide  a  more 
efficient  and  durable  device;  also,  to  provide  a  heddle 
with  a  wire  doup  supported  and  guided  thereon. 

Another  object  is  to  provide,  in  combination  with 
the  heddles  having  the  sliding  doups  thereon,  means 
for  weighting  or  depressing  the  doups  to  afford  a 
proper  degree  of  tension  therefor. 


These  objects  are  attained  by  the  heddle  mechan- 
ism illustrated  in  the  accompanying  drawings,  wherein 
— Fig.  i,  is  a  side  view  of  the  heddle.  Fig.  2,  is  a 
front  view  of  the  heddle,  together  with  a  portion  of 
the  harness-frame  showing  the  manner  of  combining 
the  heddle  and  doup  depressing  devices.  Fig.  3,  is 
an  enlarged  or  detail  view  showing  the  manner  of 
arranging  the  doup  upon  the  heddle,  and  Figs.  4 
and  5,  show,  by  side  and  front  views,  the  modifica- 
tion of  the  heddle  as  made  from  a  flat  metal  strip. 

A.  denotes  the  heddle,  having  the  open  ends  a,  a,', 
whereby  it  is  supported  on  the  rods  b,  b,  in  the  har- 
ness-frame B,  and  also  provided  with  a  double  cen- 
tral eye  or  guide-openings  d,  d',  as  indicated. 

D,  indicates  the  doup,  which  is  formed  of  wire  or 
a  metal  strand  folded  at  the  top  to  form  a  loop  or 
eye  for  the  warp-thread  W,  and  having  its  parts 
brought  together  and  extended  downward  through 
the  openings  dt  d',  in  the  heddle  A,  and  having  its 
lower  extremities  joined  by  means  of  a  loose-running 
clasp,  turn,  or  connection  f,  about  the  wire  of  the 
heddle  or  one  strand  thereof,  so  that  the  doup  D,  can 
move  freely  up  and  down  thereon,  it  being  supported 
and  guided  by  the  eyes  d,  d't  and  the  clasp  f.  The 
doup  is  shown  as  elevated  in  Fig.  1,  and  as  depressed 
in  Fig.  2. 

F,  indicates  a  small  bar  arranged  through  or  en- 
gaging with  the  foot  of  the  doup  D,  for  normally 
depressing  the  same.  Said  bar  may  extend  across 
the  harness-frame  and  engage  all  or  any  desired 
number  of  the  doups  in  a  row  of  heddles,  and  its 
ends  are  best  arranged  in  movable  connection  with 
guide-wires  G,  suitably  attached  to  the  frame,  and 
having  light  springs  H,  combined  therewith  for  norm- 
ally pressing  down  the  bar. 

An  adjustable  collar  h,  is  provided  for  regulating 
the  tension  of  the  spring  H,  as  required  in  any  in- 
stance, and  a  stop  fc,  is  disposed  beneath 
the  bar  for  limiting  the  downward 
action  of  the  bar  F  and  doups  D.  A 
spring  of  very  light  tension  is  ordinarily 
sufficient  to  depress  the  bar  F  and  hed- 
dle-doups  D,  and  in  some  instances 
even  the  bar  of  its  own  weight  may  be 
sufficient.  In  other  instances  the  hed-  } 
dies  may  be  used  without  the  bar  F,  the 
gravity  of  the  doup  or  a  slight  weight 
added  to  the  lower  part  thereof  being 
depended  upon  for  the  normal  depres- 
sion of  the  same. 

The  heddle  A,  is  made  of  wire  twisted 
to  form  the  eyes  d,  d',  as  in  Figs.  1,  2 
and  3,  but  in  some  instances  it  can  be 
made  of  fiat  band  metal,  with  the  eyes 
and  doup-guiding  slot  punched  through 
the  same,  as  shown  in  Figs.  4  and  5, 
the  doup  D,  being  of  wire  or  metal  and 
arranged  to  slide  up  and  down  the  hed- 
dle, as  above  set  forth.  When  made 
as  shown  in  Fig.  2,  the  doup  can  be 
threaded  to  pass  either  to  the  right  or 
left,  as  indicated  by  dotted  lines  r  and 
I.  If  made  of  flat  form,  then  the  hed- 
dles may  be  set  in  the  harness  with 
their  inclined  portions  at  either  right 
or  left  position,  as  required  for  weaving  any  particu- 
lar pattern.    (William  H.  Redding,  Worcester,  Mass.) 


123 


124 


HAMPSON'S  LOOM-HARNESS  FOR  WEAVING 
LENO  GOODS. 

These  goods  are  usually  woven  with  several  har- 
nesses, in  some  of  which  the  warp-threads  do  not 
pass  directly  through  the  leashes,  but  are  run  through 
the  bight  of  a  double  cord,  which  is  rove  through  the 
eye  in  the  leash  and  is  attached  to  an  adjacent  heddle. 
These  cords  are  called  "doups,"  and  serve  to  pull 
down  certain  warp-threads  at  each  pick  of  the  loom, 
so  that  the  shuttle  will  pass  over  instead  of  under 
said  threads,  as  the  figure  demands. 


rail  B',  on  an  adjoining  heddle-frame  A',  which  has- 
no  leashes. 

In  the  bight  of  the  doup  is  a  loose  ring  F,  of  rigid- 
material,  such  as  metal,  hard  rubber,  or  the  like, 
through  which  the  warp-thread  is  passed.  (Joseph 
Hampson,  Fall  River,  Mass.) 


The  varying  action  of  the  heddles  causes  the  doups 
to  work  back  and  forth  through  the  eyes  of  the 
leashes  and  the  warp  to  pull  through  the  doups, 
so  that  the  doups  break  very  frequently,  the  usual 
life  of  one  being  not  more  than  a  day  or  two,  and 
sometimes  much  less.  The  material  of  which  they 
are  made  is  the  best,  and  they  are  quite  expensive, 
so  that  the  loss  of  material  and  of  the  time  re- 
quired to  make  repairs  is  excessive  and  costly.  To 
avoid  this  delay  and  expense  by  improving  the  con- 
struction of  the  leashes  and  the  doups  is  the  subject 
of  the  improved  loom-harness  thus  to  be  described. 

Fig.  i,  is  a  front  elevation  of  a  heddle-frame  pro- 
vided with  the  improved  doup  attachment.  Fig.  2,  is  a 
cross  section  showing  the  manner  of  connecting  the 
doups.  Fig.  3,  shows  forms  of  guide-plates  for  the 
doups. 

The  heddle-frame  A,  has  near  its  top  and  bottom 
the  metallic  rails  B,  to  which  are  attached  the  upper 
and  lower  ends  of  the  respective  strands  C,  C,  of  the 
leashes  made  of  wire.  The  adjoining  ends  of  the 
strands  C,C,  are  fastened  to  guide-plates  D,  of  rigid 
material,  such  as  metal,  bone,  ivory,  celluloid,  hard 
rubber,  glass  or  the  like.  Each  plate  contains  two 
enlarged  apertures  or  eyes  d,  which  are  arranged  be- 
tween and  in  alignment  with  the  end  apertures  of  the 
plate.  Said  eyes  are  provided  with  rounded  edges  to 
prevent  wear  of  the  doups  in  working  through  them. 


HARNESS  SHIFTER  AND  ADJUSTER. 

The  object  of  this  shifter  is  to  provide  a  harness 
and  its  shafts  with  means  for  shifting  the  harness, 
that  is  to  say,  changing  its  relative  vertical' 
position  on  the  said  shafts  for  the  purpose 
of  introducing  at  certain  intervals  new  por- 
tions of  the  harness  for  their  looped  con- 
nections to  prevent  the  said  harness  at  the 
place  above  mentioned  from  being  worn 
through  by  the  continuous  friction  with  the 
warp-threads,  and  to  thus  make  it  more 
durable. 

Fig.  i,  is  a  front  elevation  of  a  portion- 
of  the  shafts  and  the  harness  carried  there 
by  and  provided  with  the  improvements. 
Fig.  2,  is  a  side  elevation  of  Fig.  i,  and" 
Fig.  3,  an  enlarged  sectional  view  on  the- 
line  x,  x,  of  Fig.  i. 
A  description  of  this  shifter  is  best  given  by  quot- 
ing letters  of  references,  of  which  «,  and  6,  repre- 
sent the  shafts,  and  c,  the  harness,  which  latter  con- 


The  doups  E,  are  rove  through  the  eyes  in  the 
guide-plates.    The  ends  of  the  doup  are  secured  to  a 


sists  of  the  looped  threads  C,  and  c2,  connecting  sub- 
stantially midway  between  the  shafts  and  passing  over 
the  outer  edges  of  the  latter.  At  the  inner  edge  of 
each  shaft  ,and  near  each  end  thereof,  are  arranged  the 
bearings  d,  d't  for  the  shaft  or  rod  e,  which  latter  is 
provided  at  one  end  with  a  squared  portion  <'', 
adapted  to  be  engaged  by  a  key.  Around  said  shaft 
or  rod  e,  are  wound  at  certain  intervals,  a  series  of 
cords  f,  having  their  central  portions  or  loops  secured 
to  the  said  shaft.  One  end  V,  of  each  of  said  cords 
f,  is  directly  secured  to  the  rod  or  strip  g,  while  the 
other  end  f,  passes  first  over  the  outer  edge  of  its 
respective  shaft  and  is  then  also  secured  to  the  said 
rod  or  strip  g.  The  said  strip  is  provided  with  a 
series  of  fingers  or  projections  g',  g2,  by  means  of 
which  latter  it  is  secured  to  the  band  or  edge  c3, 
arranged  on  and  connecting  the  free  ends  of  its  re- 
spective harness. 

The  shaft  or  rod  e,  is  provided  with  an  elongated 
groove,  in  which  is  arranged  a  wire,  by  means  of 
which  latter  the  central  portions  or  loops  of  the 
cords  f,  are  secured  to  the  said  shaft  or  rod.  Said 


wire  extends  beyond  the  bearings  d,  and  d',  and  is 
thus  held  firmly  within  the  groove. 

The  shaft  or  rod  e,  is  prevented  from  lateral  motion 
by  means  of  pins  ft. 

Whenever  a  certain  amount  of  weaving  is  accomp- 
lished, the  shafts  or  rods  e,  on  the  shafts  (',  and  6,  are 
turned  by  means  of  the  key  or  wrench.  The  length 
of  the  ends  f,  and  f,  of  the  cords  f,  are  thus  changed, 
and  the  rod  or  strip  y,  raised  or  lowered,  and  as  the 
latter  is  firmly  connected  with  the  harness-connecting 
band  or  edge  c3,  the  said  harness  is  vertically  shifted, 
that  is  to  say,  a  new  portion  of  it  will  form  the  con- 
necting-loops. By  this  arrangement  the  harness  is 
made  more  durable.  The  warp-threads  will  wear  on 
different  portions  thereof,  as  will  be  manifest.  (John 
Da cid  Ulrich,  Haldon,  N.  J.) 


HARNESS  CONNECTION  FOR  PLAIN  LOOMS. 

In  ordinary  looms  for  weaving  plain  cloth  with 
two  or  more  harnesses,  and  in  which  the  harness- 
frames  are  actuated  by  treadles  struck  by  cams,  the 
treadles  are  commonly  connected  with  the  harness- 
frames  by  flexible  straps,  and  in  use,  owing  to  the 
wear  of  the  parts,  these  straps  become  slack  and  the 
harness-frames  are  not  held  at  tension,  and  when  the 
loom  stops  the  backlash,  due  to  the  slackness  of 
tension  or  lack  of  firm  holding  of  the  harness-frames, 
results  in  making  thin  places  in  the  cloth. 


The  straps  commonly  used  are  difficult  to  get  at, 
and  with  the  buckle  commonly  used  they  cannot  be 
adjusted  to  exactly  the  proper  point,  and  frequently 


the  straps  are  adjusted  so  that  they  are  too  tight, 
which,  besides  creating  undue  wear  of  the  parts,  adds 
materially  to  the  power  required  to  run  the  loom. 
The  looseness  of  the  usual  harness  not  only  occurs 
through  the  stretch  of  the  straps,  but  also  from  the 
impracticability  of  making  a  connection  between  one 
harness-cam  through  the  heddle,  straps,  roll  above 
the  harness,  and  back  again  through  harness  and 
heddle  to  another  cam,  one  heddle  being  longer  than 
the  other  and  the  roll  at  the  top  being  longer  for 
one  harness  than  the  other,  at  the  same  time  main- 
taining the  bearing  of  both  heddles  against  both 
cams  all  the  way  around. 

If  every  part  were  made  with  absolute  correct- 
ness of  design,  this  might  be  accomplished,  but  such 
correctness  is  impossible  in  ordinary  mechanical  work. 
To  overcome  this  objectionable  connection  between 
the  usual  treadles  and  the  harness-frames,  a  novel 
connection  is  produced  by  means  of  the  new  device, 
it  containing  two  parts  connected  by  a  spring,  the 
spring  acting  normally  to  keep  the  treadle  always  up 
to  and  against  its  actuating-cam,  so  that  there  is  no 
backlash  or  slip,  and  the  harness-frames  are  moved 
uniformly  and  with  the  least  amount  of  objection- 
able strain. 

The  accompanying  illustration  shows  in  section  a 
sufficient  portion  of  an  ordinary  loom  with  the  im- 
provements added. 

A,  indicates  the  loom-frame;  B,  its  lay;  C,  the 
crank-shaft;  D,  the  cam-shaft,  having  the  shed-form- 
ing cams  d,  d';  a,  a',  are  the  treadles,  having  rolls 
acted  on  by  said  cams;  6,  is  the  top  roll,  supporting 
the  top  cording  b'\  attached  to  the  harness-frames 
c,  c'. 

Each  lower  bar  of  the  harness-frames,  has  con- 
nected to  it  a  metallic  loop  or  connection  e,  which 
supports  a  suitable  spring  e',  and  a  rod  e2,  having 
loosely  hung  on  its  head  at  its  lower  end  an  eye  e3 
to  fit  over  the  free  end  of  the  treadle,  is  passed  up- 
wardly through  this  spring  and  has  applied  to  it 
a  nut  e4,  so  that  said  two-part  connection  may  yield 
to  any  endwise  strain  and  yet  keep  the  treadle  always 
against  the  actuating-cam. 

The  nut  e4,  is  restrained  from  rotation  in  the  loop 
e,  but  the  stress  of  the  spring  may  be  readily  adjusted 
to  the  required  amount  by  rotating  the  bolt  in  the 
loop  and  in  the  eye.  To  do  this,  there  is  applied  to 
a  squared  part  of  the  bolt  an  adjusting  device  f, 
having  a  series  of  lugs  f,  which  embrace  the  flattened 
sides  of  the  head  of  said  eye  and  keep  it  from  rotat- 
ing when  the  loom  is  in  use.  To  adjust  the  spring, 
it  is  only  necessary  to  lift  the  device  f  far  enough  to 
remove  its  lugs  V  from  the  head  of  the  eye  and  turn 
the  device  f  and  rotate  the  bolt,  it  moving  in  the 
nut  e4  and  adjusting  the  stress  of  the  spring.  When 
adjusted  to  the  desired  tension,  the  device  f  will  be 
dropped. 

By  the  use  of  a  harness  connection  such  as  de- 
scribed the  levers  may  be  always  kept  firmly  against 
their  actuating-cams  and  no  loss  of  motion  is  per- 
mitted, the  spring  obviating  any  difficulty  due  to 
wear  of  parts. 

The  harness-frames  are  shown  as  provided  with 
sheet-metal  heddles  and  with  such  heddles  which 
add  to  the  weight  of  the  harness-frames  the  thus 
explained  device  has  great  and  peculiar  benefit. 
(Draper  Co.) 


JACQUARDS  AND  CARD-CUTTING  MACHINERY 


HALTON'S   J  AC  QUA  RD  MECHANISM. 

The  object  of  this  mechanism  is  to  operate  the 
griff-frame  or  frames  and  Jacquard  cylinder  of  a 
Jacquard  machine  from  the  same  shaft,  but  inde- 
pendently, and  to  provide  for  varying  the  time  of 


one  part  in  respect  to  the  other  to  accord  with 
practical  requirements. 

Of  the  accompanying  illustrations,  Fig.  I  is  a  side 
view  of  sufficient  of  a  "single-lift"  Jacquard  machine 
to  illustrate  the  application  of  the  new  mechanism 
thereto.  Fig.  2  is  a  similar  view  illustrating  the 
application  of  said  mechanism  to  a  "rise-and-fall 
shed"  Jacquard  machine. 

A,  represents  part  of  the  frame  of  a  Jacquard  ma- 
chine; F,  the  griff-frame;  B,  B',  the  operating-lever 
therefor;  G,  the  card-cylinder  and  D,  D',  the  oper- 
ating-lever therefor. 

The  card-cylinder  is  carried  by  guided  rods  a, 
connected  to  the  arms  D,  of  the  operating-lever  by 
links  a',  while  the  griff-frame  is  connected  to  the 
arms  B  of  its  lever  by  links  b- 

The  arm  B',  of  the  griff-frame  operating-lever  is 
connected  by  a  rod  <i,  d',  to  a  crank-pin  carried  by  a 
crank-arm   H,   on   the  operating-shaft   I,  the  latter 


being  any  available  rotating  shaft  of  the  loom.  The 
portion  d' ,  of  the  connecting-rod  has  a  two-part 
bearing  for  the  reception  of  the  crank-pin  and  the 


portion  dt  of  the  rod  is  threaded  and  provided  with 
nuts  whereby  it  can  be  adjusted  longitudinally  in 
respect  to  the  portion  d\  the  outer  end  of  said  por- 
tion of  dt  of  the  rod  being  connected  by  a  universal 
link  d2,  to  an  adjustable  block  d",  on  the  arm  B'. 
In  like  manner  the  arm  D',  of  the  operating-lever 
for  the  card-cylinder  is  connected  by  means  of  a  rod 
<J,  g',  link  g2,  and  block  g",  to  a  pin  i,  on  an  arm  J, 
which  is  rotatably  mounted  upon  a  projecting  por- 
tion of  the  crank-pin,  so  that  it  can  be  adjusted  on 
said  pin,  a  set-screw  m  serving  to  secure  it  in  position 
after  such  adjustment. 

By  this  construction  the  movement  of  the  card- 
cylinder  in  respect  to  that  of  the  griff-frame  may  be 
regulated  to  any  desired  extent.  For  instance,  if  the 
arm  J  is  turned  so  as  to  be  directly  in  line  with 
the  arm  H,  the  movement  of  the  griff  and  cylinder 
levers  will  be  exactly  the  reverse  of  each  other,  the 
cylinder  being  at  its  extreme  outward  position  when 
the  griff-frame  is  fully  raised  and  in  its  extreme  in- 
ward position  when  the  griff-frame  is  fully  lowered, 
while  by  shifting  the  arm  J,  in  one  direction  or  the 
other  the  movement  of  the  card-cylinder  may  be  caused 
to  lead  or  follow  that  of  the  griff-frame  to  any  desired 
extent. 

The  same  principle  of  operation  attends  the  use  of 
the  new  mechanism  'in  connection  with  the  rise-and- 
fall  machine  shown  in  Fig.  2,  the  adjustable  arm  J, 
in  this  case  being  hung  to  the  crank-pin,  which  is 
carried  by  the  outer  crank-arm  H',  and  receives  the 
operating  connection  for  the  lever  K,  K',  which 
operates  the  second  griff-frame  M. 

The  connections  shown  in  Fig.  1  may  be  reversed, 
if  desired,  that  is  to  say,  the  griff-frame  operating- 
lever  might  be  actuated  by  the  pin  of  the  arm  J,  and 
the  cylinder  operating-lever  by  the  pin  of  the  arm 
H,  again  the  arm  J,  might  be  secured  permanently 
to,  or  form  part  of  the  crank-pin,  if  said  pin  is 
capable  of  turning  around  its  axis  and  susceptible  of 
being  secured  to  the  arm  which  carries  it  in  any 
position  of  adjustment.  (Thomas  Halton,  Philadelphia.) 


THE  KNOWLES  OPEN-SHED  JACQUARD. 

This  class  of  Jacquard  machine  is  rapidly  coming 
into  favor  on  certain  classes  of  goods  where  the 
open-shed  feature  is  found  desirable  as  compared  with 
the  ordinary  straight-lift,  so  called,  or  rise-and-drop 
closed-shed  type  of  machine.  The  difficulty  with 
open-shed  Jacquards  heretofore  has  been,  that  the 
action  of  the  machine  was  such,  that  the  cylinder 
carrying  the  pattern  cards  was  required  to  make  two 
beats,  or  in  other  words,  to  present  the  same  pattern 
card  twice  in  one  beat  of  the  loom.  This  of  necessity 
involved  a  decrease  of  speed  in  the  operation  of  the 
loom,  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  movement  of  the 
cylinder  was  twice  as  fast,  so  to  speak,  as  the  beats 
of  the  loom. 

In  the  construction  of  the  Jacquard  as  shown  in 
the  accompanying  illustration  this  defect  has  been 
overcome.  The  machine,  properly  speaking,  is  of 
the  ordinary  straight-lift  type,  that  is  to  say,  the  shed 
is  lifted  from  its  lowest  normal  position  into  the 
upper  shed  and  returned  again  to  that  point  when 
required  to  descend  from  the  upper  shed.    By  the 


127 


peculiar  action  of  this  machine,  however,  hooks  that 
are  indicated  to  rise  and  on  the  succeeding  pick  of 
the  loom  are  required  to  be  up,  remain  up,  and 


the  back  end  of  the  needles  and  holds  them  back; 
thus  when  the  downward  movement  of  the  ver- 
tical movable  griff  takes  place,  the  hooks  so  held 
back  by  the  action  of  the  needles,  descend  with  the 
harness  and  warp  threads  into  the  lower  shed.  It 
will  be  seen  therefore  that  the  action  of  the  card 
cylinder  takes  place  when  the  vertical  moving  griff 
is  at  its  highest  point,  or  the  shed  open,  this  being 
the  exact  reverse  of  the  action  of  a  Jacquard  cylinder 
in  the  ordinary  construction  of  Jacquard.  It  natur- 
ally follows  that  any  needles  acted  upon  by  the  cards, 
that  is  to  say,  the  blank  portion  of  the  card,  must 
of  necessity  rise  to  come  in  contact  with  the  recip- 
rocating griff  as  mentioned  above,  and  the  griff  hav- 
ing considerable  dwell  at  its  extreme  outward  move- 
ment, necessarily  holds  the  needles  and  the  uprights 
passing  through  in  such  position  that  they  must  of 
necessity  descend  into  the  lower  shed. 

It  will  be  seen  that  in  this  operation  there  is  no 
complication  in  designing  or  card  cutting;  an  ordi- 
nary set  of  cards  that  will  produce  the  goods  on  a 
machine  in  the  usual  manner  will  produce  exactly 
the  same  pattern  on  this  machine,  the  only  differ- 
ence being,  comparatively  speaking,  as  to  the  time 
of  their  coming  in  contact  with  the  needles.  This 
machine  has  been  found  particularly  desirable  for 
narrow  ware  goods,  as  in  such  goods  the  shed  re- 
quires to  remain  open,  or  warp  threads  remain  in 
upper  shed,  for  sometime,  hence  there  is  a  very  per- 
ceptible decrease  in  the  wear  and  tear  of  the  har- 
ness by  the  use  of  a  machine  of  this  class.  (Cromp- 
ton  and  Knowles  Loom  Works.) 


•continue  to  do  so  for  an  indefinite  number  of  picks, 
unless  a  card  is  presented  that  governs  the  needle 
in  such  a  way  that  the  hook  will  descend  carrying 
the  shed  in  normal  position. 

In  this  improved  form  there  are  two  stationary 
griffs,  so  called,  one  at  the  top  of  the  machine  and 
one  at  the  bottom;  between  the  griffs  above  men- 
tioned there  is  a  second  intermediate  griff,  which  has 
a  vertical  movement  at  each  pick 
of  the  loom.  The  griffs  here 
shown  are  set  upon  an  angle  for 
the  purpose  of  varying  the  dis- 
tance between  the  position  of  the 
hooks  on  the  upright  and  the 
needle,  so  that  a  movement  of 
the  needle  gives  the  same  kind 
of  lateral  movement  to  an  up- 
right in  the  back  row  as  at  the 
front. 

The  operation  of  the  machine 
is  as  follows:  When  the  shed  is 
open,  the  cylinder  with  pattern- 
card  upon  it  comes  in  contact 
with  the  needles  and  depresses 
such  needles  as  there  are  blanks 
in  the  card,  the  effect  being  to 
throw  the  bottom  of  the  upright 
clear  of  the  stationary  griff  at 
the  bottom;  at  the  same  time  the 
needles  so  depressed  are  acted 
upon  by  the  reciprocating  griff 
-at  the  back  of  the  machine,  the 
needles  through  their  angular 
form  being  raised  to  come  in 
contact  with  the  plates  of  the  reciprocating  griff, 
and  this  in   its   backward  movement   engages  with 


THE  KNOWLES  DOUBLE  CYLINDER  SINGLE- 
LIFT  OR  RISE-AND-DROP  JACQUARD. 

This  device  has  been  found  in  practice  doing  ex- 
cellent work,  running  two  sets  of  cards  for  the  pro- 
duction of  goods  having  cross-borders  or  all-round 
borders.  The  cylinder  is  mounted  upon  horizontal- 
reciprocating  rods  having  a  movable  head  with  two 
or  more  cylinders  upon  it. 

In  operation  the  cylinder  reciprocates,  coming  in 
contact  with  the  needles  in  the  usual  manner,  and  on 
one  of  the  cylinders  is  placed  a  sufficient  number  of 


cards  to  make  a  cross-border  on  the  goods  or  possibly 
two  cross-borders. 


128 


The  borders  are  woven  making  either  one  or  two 
revolutions  of  the  set  of  cards,  as  the  case  may  be,  and 
at  the  same  termination  of  the  weaving  of  the  second 
border  the  card  operates  upon  a  needle,  which  in  turn 
governs  a  hook  in  the  Jacquard  machine,  which  in 
turn  governs  the  multiplying-device  on  the  box-mo- 
tion and  effects  a  stoppage  of  the  loom  through  the 
usual  stop-motion  device  on  the  loom.  The  opera- 
tor then  revolves  the  cylinders  by  means  of  a  cord, 
as  shown,  throwing  one  cylinder  out  and  bringing 
another  cylinder  into  position  to  act  upon  the  needles. 
The  second  cylinder  may  have  a  series  of  cards  for  a 
figure,  or  simply  a  set  of  twill  cards  for  a  twill  ground. 

In  operation  this  cylinder  will  be  used  a  sufficient 
number  of  picks  to  weave  whatever  space  may  be 
contained  between  two  borders  in  the  goods  to  be 
woven,  and  the  number  of  picks  contained  in  such 
space  is  determined  by  the  multiplying-device  at- 
tached to  the  box-motion  of  the  loom,  and  through 
such  multiplying-device  the  given  distance  between 
two  borders  is  determined;  at  the  termination  of  the 
space  the  loom  is  again  stopped  by  the  action  of  the 
multiplying-chain  and  the  usual  stop-motion  attach- 
ments of  the  loom,  and  the  cylinders  are  again  re- 
volved bringing  into  position  the  border  cards,  bord- 
ers are  woven,  and  a  repetition  of  the  foregoing  com- 
pletes the  fabric  woven.  (Crompton  and  Knowles 
Loom  TForfcs.) 

THE    KNOWLES    MARSEILLES- QUILT 
JACQUARD. 

In  the  accompanying  illustration  is  shown  the 
Knowles  rise-and-drop  Jacquard  machine,  having  a 
plain  card  attachment,  and  which  Jacquard  is  exten- 


ber  of  cards  required.  This  feature  of  saving  cards 
is  accomplished  by  means  of  the  device  shown  in 
the  illustration  on  the  top  of  the  machine,  which 
has  a  cam  upon  shafts  running  across  the  machine, 
coming  in  contact  with  the  end  of  the  lever  ful- 
crumed  at  a  point  lower  on  the  machine,  as 
shown,  and  a  series  of  rods  in  reciprocating  frames, 
one  rod  in  front  of  each  row  of  the  upright 
hooks  in  the  Jacquard  machine  and  under  the  griff 
that  lifts  the  hooks.  When  the  griff  rises  the 
pawl  acting  upon  the  ratchet  held  at  the  side  of 
the  machine  gives  a  movement  to  the  cam  shaft, 
that  throws  the  cam  in  contact  with  the  lever,  thus 
depressing  one-half  of  all  the  upright  hooks  in  the 
machine,  leaving  the  other  half  of  the  hooks  in  posi- 
tion to  be  acted  upon  by  the  griff,  and  upon  further 
movement  of  the  machine  the  cam  is  turned  out  of 
contact  with  its  lever  and  a  second  cam  operating 
upon  a  second  lever  performs  the  same  operation 
upon  the  hooks  that  were  formerly  not  acted  upon 
by  the  rods;  hence  a  two- weave  attachment  is  got 
without  any  action  of  the  Jacquard  cylinder  or  cards. 
The  plain  ground  of  any  kind  of  fabric  may  be  woven 
in  this  way. 

This  machine  as  previously  mentioned  has  been  very 
extensively  introduced  in  mills  manufacturing  Mar- 
seilles-quilts. To  fully  understand  its  operation  neces- 
sitates a  description  of  the  principles  of  Marseilles 
weaving,  and  which  is  thus: — 

Two  warps  are  used,  a  coarse  and  fine;  the  coarse 
being  the  figure  or  binder  warp,  and  the  fine  the  face 
warp.  The  fine  warp  is  operated  by  ordinary  har- 
nesses in  front  of  the  Jacquard  harness;  two  shuttles 
are  used,  one  for  the  fine  or  face  filling,  the  other 
for  the  coarse  or  backing  filling.    In  operation,  the 


sively  used  for  quilt  weaving  and  similar  goods  where 
heretofore  a  plain  card  between  each  two  figure  cards 
has  been  required. 

In  this  case  the  plain  card,  so  called,  is  entirely 
dispensed  with,  thus  largely  reducing  the  total  num- 


Jacquard  (the  hooks  being  operated  by  the  figure 
card)  rises,  opening  the  shed,  and  remains  up,  or 
shed  open,  for  three  picks,  putting  in  coarse  filling 
for  first  pick  and  fine  for  remaining  two  picks,  then 
falls,  immediately  rises,  lifting  half  of  all  the  hooks, 


129 


and  necessarily  half  of  all  the  warp  threads  operated 
by  it.  And  putting  in  another  fine  pick,  it  again 
falls,  and  on  this  movement  a  figure  card  is  again 
presented  to  the  needles,  and  a  figure  lift  produced 
to  remain  up  as  before.  During  this  action  of  the 
Jacquard  the  plain  harnesses  are  working,  weaving 
plain,  as  follows:  First  pick,  all  face  warp  in  the 
upper  shed;  second  pick,  half  of  face  warp  descends 
to  the  lower  shed  or  bottom;  third  pick,  bottom 
shed  rises  and  top  descends;  and  on  the  fourth  pick, 
all  face  warp  is  again  raised  to  the  upper  shed  and 
then  repeats.  The  action  of  the  filling  during  these 
movements  is  two  picks  of  fine  on  face,  and  one 
each  of  fine  and  coarse  to  the  back.  There  are  other 
methods  of  Marseilles  weave;  however  that  quoted 
is  the  one  most  generally  used. 

Before  the  introduction  of  the  plain  card  attach- 
ment shown,  it  was  customary  to  use  a  card  with 
perforations  for  every  alternate  needle,  by  this  means 
operating  one-half  of  all  the  hooks  in  the  machine. 
The  use  of  this  card  necessitated  that  the  cylinder  be 
presented  to  the  needles  on  the  third  and  fourth 
pick,  whereas,  by  the  use  of  the  new  attachment, 
the  cylinder  is  so  presented  only  on  the  fourth  pick, 
hence  a  large  saving  in  cards  accomplished,  and  the 
wear  and  tear  on  the  mechanism  greatly  reduced. 
(Crompton  and  Knowles  Loom  Works.) 


THE  KNOWLES  TWILL  JACQUARD. 

The  object  in  the  construction  of  this  Jacquard 
machine  is,  to  admit  of  the  weaving  of  twills  with- 
out any  action  of  the  cylinder  or  cards.  The  ma- 
chine in  its  construction  resembles  an  ordinary  Jac- 


quard machine,  and  is  made  either  straight-lift  or 
rise-and-drop. 

The  upright  hooks  rest  upon  round  wires  on  the 
bottom  griff  of  the  machine.  These  wires  which  pass 
from  side  to  side  of  the  machine  pass  through  a 
round  eye  in  hooks  that  are  somewhat  heavier  than 
the  ordinary  hook;  one  of  these  hooks  being  placed 
at  each  side  of  the  Jacquard  machine.  These  hooks 
pass  through  a  slotted  plate  at  the  top  to  serve  as  a 
guide,  but  are  not  acted  upon  by  the  ordinary  needles 
of  the  Jacquard. 

In  weaving  an  8-harness  twill  there  are  24  rows  of 
hooks  in  the  machine,  dividing  by  3  gives  an  8-har- 
ness movement,  and  thus  three  griffs  would  be  ope- 
rated in  producing  an  8-harness  twill  at  each  pick. 

The  griffs  are  so  made  that  they  oscillate  or  swing 
upon  a  pivot.    Over  the  top  of  the  griffs  is  passed 


a  series  of  bars  having  notches  in  them,  each  bar 
coming  in  contact  with  a  certain  number  of  griffs 
in  the  machine,  and  there  are  as  many  bars  so 
arranged  as  there  may  be  changes  in  the  ground 
weave  that  is  desired  to  be  produced. 

These  bars  are  acted  upon  by  a  peg-cylinder  which 
is  equivalent  to  a  ball-chain  on  a  box-motion.  When 
the  griff  rises,  one  movement  of  the  shaft  having 
these  peg-cylinders  takes  place,  moving  certain  of 
the  cross-bars  and  with  them  their  respective  griffs; 
they  then  descend,  and  on  their  next  forward  move- 
ment the  griffs  so  moved  engage  with  the  larger 
hooks  mentioned  before  at  each  side  of  the  machine, 
thus  lifting  them  and  carrying  with  them  one  of  the 
round  rods  before  alluded  to,  on  which  the  regular 
upright  hooks  are  at  rest  thus  carrying  with  them 
an  entire  row  of  the  usual  uprights. 

This  sufficiently  explains  the  action,  and  it  natur- 
ally follows  that  the  number  of  rows  so  lifted  deter- 
mines the  amount  of  twill  or  the  nature  of  a  twill 
that  is  being  woven.  If  a  5-harness  twill  were  de- 
sired there  would  be  25  rows  of  hooks  in  the  ma- 
chine, and  the  division  would  be  made  by  5  instead 
of  3,  and  in  such  case  one  row  of  the  needles  would 
of  necessity  have  three  uprights  passing  through  each 
needle  instead  of  two  as  is  the  case  usually. 

These  machines  are  largely  used  on  fine  damask 
where  a  large  figure  is  desired.  The  designer  in 
painting  the  design  simply  paints  the  figure;  no  twill 
or  ground  weave  is  painted  on  the  design  or  cut 
in  the  cards;  hence,  a  600-hook  machine  will  pro- 
duce a  figure  at  least  twice  as  large  as  an  ordinary 
600-hook  for  the  reason  that  all  the  hooks  are  used 
in  figuring  and  are  not  required  to  be  used  in  the 
ground  as  is  usually  the  case.  (Crompton  and  Knou  les 
Loom  Works.) 

THE    KNOWLES    DOUBLE-ACTING  OPEN- 
SHED  JACQUARD  MACHINE. 

The  principle  of  operating  this  Jacquard  is  shown: 
in  side  elevation  in  the  accompanying  illustration  Fig. 

1.  It  will  be  observed  that 
there  are  practically  three 
hooks  combined  in  one. 
Needles  have  three  hooks 
passing  through  each 
needle,  and  the  means  of 
indicating  from  the  card  are 
through  the  vertical  needles 

b,  the  cylinder  falling  and  rising  in  contact 
with  the  same.  The  horizontal  needles  a,  are 
in  turn  acted  upon  by  the  reciprocating  plate 

c,  shown  in  front  of  the  needles,  thus  when 
a  card  comes  in  contact  with  a  vertical  needle 
b,  it  raises  the  respective  horizontal  needle 
a,  the  reciprocating  plate  c  passes  forward, 

the  needle  rising  upon  the  same,  and  the  recipro- 
cating plate  c  depressing  the  needle,  throwing  back 
the  hook  so  that  the  same  will  not  engage  with  the 
griff  (shown  in  section  in  illustration) ;  this  action 
taking  place  when  either  one  of  the  two  sets  .of 
griffs  of  the  double  acting  Jacquard  is  at  its  lowest 
or  normal  position.  The  hooks  engaging  with  the 
(vertical  moving)  griffs  are  made  in  one  piece,  and 
the  third  hook  to  which  the  harness  is  attached  is 
made  with  a  loop  at  its  bottom  end  as  shown  at 
Fig.  2,  and  hooks  onto  the  double  upright  hook 
as  acted  upon  by  the  vertical  moving  griffs.  When 
it  is  desired  that  the  shed  remains  open,  the  hook 
engaged  to  rise  by  action  of  the  griff,  raises  at  the 
same  time  its  long  hook  (on  account  of  bend  d,  on 
long  hook)  and  which  is  carried  up  to  a  point  above 
a  stationary  griff.  If  the  reciprocating  plate  c  indi- 
cates, and  its  harness  or  hook  is  to  remain  lifted, 


130 


the  crook  of  the  long  hook  comes  in  contact  with 
the  griff  d,  and  remains  suspended  thereon  until 
such  time  as  the  action  of  the  card  and  reciprocat- 
ing griff  determine  that  said  hook  shall  again  de- 
scend into  the  lower  shed.  This  action  applies  to 
both  of  the  vertical  moving  griffs,  making  no  differ- 
ence which  one  of  the  hooks  engages  in  the  moving 
griffs,  the  action  is  the  same  on  the  longer  hook, 
and  it  will  remain  up  if  indicated  to  come  in  con- 
tact with  the  stationary  griff  at  e. 

In  Fig.  i- — at  f,  the  hooks  are  shown  at  rest  or 
in  their  normal  position;  at  0,  they  are  shown  raised 
half-way  (shed  half  open  or  half  closed)  by  either 


is  practically  half  closed  at  the  time  when  the  filling 
beats  up,  this  being  made  necessary  by  the  peculiar 
action  of  such  construction;  in  fact  at  the  moment 
when  one  hook  starts  to  rise,  its  corresponding  hook 
starts  to  descend,  thus  closing  the  shed  half  way. 
In  many  classes  of  goods  this  makes  a  defect  in  the 
figure  and  is  particularly  marked  in  the  beat  up  of 
the  filling  in  the  goods.  By  the  use  of  the  new 
device  an  absolutely   full  open   shed   is  maintained 


Fig.  Z 


and  the  possibility  of  marking  the  cloth,  as  previ- 
ously referred  to,  is  avoided.  (Grompton  and  Knowles 
Loom  Works.) 


THE   KNOWLES   JACQUARD   FOR  TWO 
WEAVE  FABRICS. 


one  of  the  respective  vertical  griffs;  at  ht  the  hooks 
are  shown  raised  in  the  same  position  as  at  c  by  one 
of  the  griffs  only;  at  i,  the  hooks  are  shown  raised 
to  the  highest  position  (top  of  shed)  by  one  of  the 
vertical  moving  griffs  (the  long  hook  being  in  con- 
tact with  stationary  griff  e) ;  and  at  fc,  the  hooks 
are  placed  in  the  same  position  as  that  shown  at  i, 
by  means  of  the  other  vertical  moving  griff  (i.  c, 
that  griff  having  its  first  bar  nearest  to  needle-board). 

In  the  needle-board  I,  carrying  the  horizontal 
needles,  tn  indicates  a  vertical  wire  (one  of  these 
wires  for  each  vertical  row  of  needles)  for  dividing 
said  needle-board  into  spaces  and  for  guiding  needles; 
n  indicates  the  sections  of  horizontal  wires  for  needles 
■o  to  rest  upon. 

The  particular  object  of  the  machine  is  to  avoid 
the  difficulties  encountered  in  many  cases  by  the  use 
of  the  ordinary  double-lift  Jacquard  in  that  the  shed 


Certain  classes  of  woven  goods — such,  for  example, 
as  table  covers  and  the  like — are  characterized  by 
having  cross-borders  at  the  opposite  ends  thereof, 
and  an  intermediate  body  portion  having  some  suit- 
able pattern,  there  being  usually  a  number  of  repeats 
of  the  said  pattern  of  the  body  between  the  two  cross- 
borders  pertaining  to  a  table  cover  or  the  like  article. 

For  the  weaving  of  goods  of  such  classes  it  is  re- 
quired that  the  Jacquard  mechanism  of  the  loom  in 
which  the  weaving  is  effected  should  be  equipped 
with  cards  that  are  punched  in  accordance  with  the 
pattern  in  the  body  of  the  goods  intermediate  the 
cross-borders  and  also  with  cards  that  are  punched 
in  accordance  with  the  pattern  of  the  cross-borders. 
In  the  case  of  ordinary  Jacquard  mechanisms,  it  is 
necessary  to  employ  a  great  number  of  cards,  one 
card  for  every  pick  in  the  entire  length  of  a  table 
cover.    This  renders  the  set  of  cards  very  expensive, 


131 


and  adds  very  much  to  the  cost  of  weaving  the 
goods. 

The  object  of  this  Jacquard  mechanism  is  to  re- 
duce greatly  the  number  of  cards  which  it  is  neces- 


sary to  employ,  and  thereby  to  lessen  the  expense  as 
well  as  to  obviate  the  various  disadvantages  and  in- 
conveniences which  are  incident  to  the  employment, 
handling,  and  storing  of  an  extended  series  of  cards. 

The  novelty  of  the  new  mechanism  consists  in  the 
combination,  with  the  feeding  devices  for  the  cards 
of  a  Jacquard  mechanism,  of  certain  devices  whereby 
the  working  of  the  said  feeding  devices  is  controlled 
automatically,  with  the  result  that  the  direction  of 
rotation  of  the  said  devices  is  reversed  from  time 
to  time  as  often  as  a  repeat  of  either  the  pattern 
of  the  cross-border  or  that  of  the  body  should  occur. 

In  the  accompanying  drawings,  Fig.  i  shows  in 
side  elevation  the  said  embodiment  of  the  improve- 
ment. Fig.  2  is  a  view  looking  from  the  left  in  Fig. 
r,  and  showing  the  auxiliary  pattern  devices,  de- 
tached, but  only  a  portion  of  the  pattern-chain. 

A  description  of  this  ingenious  and  labor-saving 
mechanism  is  best  given  by  quoting  letters  and  nu- 
merals of  references  in  our  illustrations,  and  of  which 

1  indicates  the  prism  of  the  Jacquard   machine,  and 

2  is  the  support  for  this  prism. 

3  is  the  lantern  and  4,  5  are  the  catches  for  turning 
the  prism.  7  is  a  connection  to  catches  4,  and  5,  and 
which  is  joined  to  the  outer  end  of  the  operating- 
lever  A,  for  the  pawls.  The  inner  end  of  the  said 
lever  is  arranged  to  project  over  a  cylinder  C, 
around  which  latter  is  passed  a  pattern-chain  C,  hav- 
ing balls  B,  applied  thereto,  the  sequence  of  balls 
and  empty  spaces  on  the  said  pattern-chain  being,  as 
prearranged,  in  order  to  conform  with  the  exigen- 
cies of  the  weaving. 

A  ball  on  the  pattern-chain  coming  under  the  inner 
end  of  lever  A,  acts  to  move  the  said  lever,  with 
the  effect  of  placing  catch  4,  in  position  to  engage 
the  lantern  3,  so  as  to  cause  the  prism  to  be  rotated 
in  one  direction,  while  when  an  empty  space  on  the 
pattern-chain  presents  itself  beneath  the  inner  end  of 
lever  A,  the  catch  5  comes  into  position  to  cause 


the  prism  to  be  rotated  in  the  opposite  direction- 
The  cylinder  C  is  fast  upon  the  shaft  D,  which 
latter  has  fast  thereupon  also  the  ratchet  E,  and 
the  notched  detent-wheel  N.  The  ratchet  E  is  en- 
gaged for  the  purpose  of  rotating  the  shaft  D,  and 
parts  fast  thereon  by  pawl  F,  the  latter  being  pivoted 
on  a  pin  F',  projecting  from  an  arm  G,  which  is 
mounted  loosely  upon  the  shaft  D,  the  said  pawl 
being  pressed  toward  the  teeth  of  the  ratchet  E,  by 
a  spring  G'. 

The  notches  of  the  detent-wheel  N  are  entered  to 
prevent  overrunning  of  shaft  D,  and  the  parts  that 
are  fastened  thereon  by  a  detent  consisting  of  a  roll 
M,  mounted  on  a  lever  L,  that  is  acted  upon  by  a 
spring  R. 

For  the  purpose  of  actuating  the  arm  G  and  pawl 
F  carried  thereby,  the  said  arm  is  connected  by  the 
rod  Ns  to  the  arm  N"  on  the  moving  shaft  N'  per- 
taining to  the  Jacquard  mechanism. 

In  order  to  enable  the  length  of  the  pattern-chain 
to  be  reduced,  the  pawl  F,  is  combined  with  devices, 
whereby  to  determine  the  times  at  which  the  same 
shall  be  permitted  to  engage  with  the  ratchet  C. 
Upon  shaft  D,  is  mounted  loosely  a  bent  lever  or 
bell-crank  J,  one  arm  of  which  is  connected  by  a 
cord  with  one  of  the  hooks  K'  of  the  Jacquard  mech- 
anism. To  the  other  arm  of  lever  J,  is  pivoted  the 
pawl-lifter  I,  the  end  of  which  is  caused  to  bear 
against  the  face  of  the  ratchet  E,  below  pawl  F,  by 
means  of  spring  Q,  one  end  of  which  latter  is  con- 
nected with  the  timber  Q',  while  the  other  end  thereof 
is  connected  with  the  projecting  tail  of  the  pawl- 
lifter  I. 

The  spring  Q  causes  the  pawl-lifter  I  to  occupy 
normally  a  position  which  keeps  the  actuating-pawl 
F  raised  from  engagement  with  the  adjacent  tooth  of 
ratchet  E,  so  that  ordinarily  the  pawl  F,  in  its  move- 
ments fails  to  actuate  the  said  ratchet,  the  shaft  D, 
the  cylinder  C,  and  the  pattern-chain  C. 

When,  however,  a  forward  shift  of  the  said  pat- 
tern-chain should  take  place,  the  hook  K'  is  caused 


to  be  raised  in  the  working  of  the  Jacquard  mechan- 
ism, and  thereby  the  bent  lever  J  is  moved  so  as 
to  draw  the  pawl-lifter  I  out  of  the  way  and  per- 
mit pawl  F  to  engage  with  a  tooth  of  rachet  E. 


132 


In  the  use  of  this  Jacquard  there  are  employed  as 
many  cards  as  are  necessary  for  a  cross-border  and 
one  repeat  of  the  pattern  in  the  body  of  the  goods. 
For  instance,  if  one  repeat  of  the  pattern  in  the  body 
of  the  goods  should  be  eight  inches  long,  and  if  the 
goods  should  contain  fifty  picks  to  the  inch,  there 
would  need  to  be  used  four  hundred  cards  for  this 
repeat  in  addition  to  the  number  of  cards  which 
might  be  required  for  one  cross-border.  It  may  be 
assumed  that  the  weaving  has  been  proceeded  with 
up  to  the  completion  of  the  body  portion  of  a  table 
cover,  also  that  at  this  stage  the 
devices  act  to  present  No.  i  card 
of  the  cross-border  and  then  con- 
tinue presenting  the  cards  of  the 
cross-border  in  regular  succes- 
sion, the  pawl-lifter  I  meanwhile 
holding  pawl  F  out  of  action. 
The  last  of  the  said  cards  of  the 
cross-border  is  perforated  so  as 
to  cause  hook  K'  to  be  raised, 
whereby  pawl-lifter  I  is  retracted 
and  pawl  F  is  allowed  to  engage 
ratchet  E,  and  cause  pattern-chain 
C,  to  be  advanced  one  step.  On 
the  descent  of  hook  K',  the  pawl- 
lifter  I  is  caused  by  spring  Q  to 
move  again  into  position  to  hold 
pawl  F  from  acting  upon  ratchet 
E.  A  new  indicator  upon  the 
pattern-chain  C  having  by  the 
advance  of  the  latter  been  pre- 
sented to  lever  A,  the  catches  4, 
5  are  shifted  in  position,  so  as  to 
cause  the  direction  of  rotation  of 
the  prism  to  be  reversed,  so  as  to 
feed  in  the  reverse  direction  the 
cards  of  the  cross-border. 

This  provides  for  weaving  a  second  cross-border, 
namely,  the  first  one  pertaining  to  the  next  table 
cover  or  other  article.  On  the  completion  of  this 
second  cross-border  the  last  card  pertaining  to  the 
cross-border  is  presented  to  the  needles.  This  card 
is  perforated  to  occasion  retraction  of  the  pawl-lifter 
I,  in  the  manner  set  forth  hereinabove,  but  inas- 
much as  the  indicator  that  is  presented  at  this  time 
to  lever  A,  is  of  the  same  character  as  that  last 
presented  thereto  no  change  occurs  in  the  action 
of  the  pawls.  The  continued  feeding  of  the  cards 
without  change  of  direction  causes  those  pertaining 
to  the  body-pattern  to  be  presented  successively  to 
the  needles  until  one  repeat  of  the  body-pattern  has 
been  woven.  The  last  card  which  is  used  at  this 
time  in  the  production  of  the  said  repeat  is  per- 
forated to  occasion  the  withdrawal  of  pawl-lifter  I. 
The  action  of  pawl  F,  now  brings  a  different  kind 
of  indicator  beneath  lever  A,  and  causes  the  pawls 
to  be  shifted  so  as  to  feed  the  cards  of  the  body- 
pattern  in  the  reverse  direction.  The  reversal  of  the 
direction  of  the  feed  of  the  said  cards  is  effected  in 
the  foregoing  manner  as  many  times  as  may  be 
required  for  the  production  of  the  desired  length  of 
body,  whereupon  the  pattern-chain  causes  the  cards 
of  the  cross-border  to  be  presented  to  the  needles, 
and  so  on,  in  the  manner  which  has  been  described. 
(Grompton  and  Knowles  Loom  Works.) 


of  cards,  and  the  border  demands  the  employment 
of  another  and  different  set. 

Fig.  1  is  a  diagram  illustrating  such  a  Jacquard 
machine.  Fig.  2  is  an  enlarged  section  illustrating 
the  special  construction  of  the  needle  guide-board. 

A,  represents  one  of  the  side  frames  of  the  Jac- 
quard; B,  the  griff-bars;  D,  the  lifters  or  hooks; 
and  E,  the  rest  or  supporting  bar.  Two  sets  of 
needles  F  and  G  are  used,  the  former  being  acted 
upon  by  the  cards  upon  a  needle  cylinder  F',  while 
the  needles  G  are  acted  upon  by  the  cards  upon  a 
needle  cylinder  G',  said  card-cylinders  being  located 


.1 


Fig* 


HALTONS   JACQUARD  FOR  TWO-WEAVE 
FABRICS. 

The  object  of  the  construction  of  this  jacquard 
(similar  to  the  foregoing  jacquard  mechanism)  is  to 
permit  changing  it  from  one  pattern  to  another,  as 
for  instance  in  weaving  fabrics  with  borders,  where 
the  body  of  the  fabric  requires  the  use  of  one  set 


respectively  at  the  right  and  left-hand  sides,  or  rather 
at  the  front  and  rear  of  the  machine.  The  two  sets 
of  needles  are  connected  for  joint  operation  by  means 
of  levers  H,  which  consist  of  wires  having  hooked 
upper  ends  engaging  with  eyes  a,  upon  the  needles 
G,  the  lower  ends  of  the  wires  engaging  with  eyes 
b,  upon  the  needles  F,  said  levers  having  their  ful- 
crums  upon  transverse  rods  d,  suitably  mounted  upon 
the  fixed  frame  of  the  machine. 

The  needles  F,  have  eyes  f,  which  engage  with  the 
lifters  D,  hence  it  will  be  seen  that  these  lifters  can 
be  operated  either  when  the  needles  F  are  acted 
upon  directly  by  the  cards  upon  the  cylinder  F',  or 
indirectly  through  the  medium  of  the  needles  G  and 
levers  H,  by  the  cards  upon  the  cylinder  G',  hence 
all  that  is  necessary  in  order  to  change  from  one 
pattern  to  another,  is  to  throw  one  needle  cylinder 
out  of  action  and  the  other  into  action,  it  being  un- 
derstood that  one  cylinder  carries  the  cards  for  the 
pattern  of  one  part  of  the  fabric,  and  the  other 
cylinder  the  cards  for  the  pattern  of  the  other  part 
of  the  fabric,  each  cylinder  being  allowed  to  remain 
in  action  as  long  as  the  pattern  for  which  its  cards 
are  designed  is  to  be  produced. 

In  machines  of  this  class  it  is  advisable  that  the 
needles  shall  be  accurately  guided,  hence,  the  open- 
ings in  the  guide-board  through  which  the  needles 
pass  should  be  but  little  larger  than  the  needles  them- 
selves but  when  such  small  openings  are  used  they 
soon  become  clogged  with  lint  or  dirt  so  as  to 
interfere  with  the  free  movement  of  the  needles,  and 
the  sticking  of  the  needles  prevents  proper  operation 
of  the  lifters  and  spoils  the  pattern.  Frequent  clean- 
ing of  the  openings  in  the  guide-board,  therefore, 
becomes  necessary,  and  in  order  that  this  may  be 
done  without  risk  of  disarranging  the  needles  or  per- 


133 


lnitting  them  to  assume  any  other  than  their  proper 
relation  to  each  other,  the  guide-board  is  made  in 
•two  parts  m,  and  n,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2,  the  part 
tn  having  openings  considerably  greater  in  diameter 
than  the  needles  so  that  they  are  not  liable  to  be- 
come clogged,  while  the  part  «  has  openings  but 
littie  larger  than  the  needles  themselves,  these  open- 
ings, therefore,  constituting  the  guide  openings. 

When  it  becomes  necessary  to  clean  the  openings 
in  the  board  it,  the  latter  is  readily  removed  from 
the  board  wt,  which,  however,  supports  the  needles 
and  retains  them  in  their  proper  relation  to  each 
other,  so  that  the  board  n  can  be  readily  re-applied 
to  the  ends  of  the  needles  after  the  openings  of  said 
board  have  been  properly  cleaned. 

In  order  to  insure  the  holding  of  the  needles  in 
correct  relation  to  each  other  by  the  board  wt,  the 
openings  in  the  same  are  tapered  from  the  inner 
to  the  outer  ends,  the  said  outer  ends  of  the  open- 
ings being  no  larger  in  diameter  than  the  openings 
in  the  board  ».  (Thomas  Halton,  Philadelphia.) 


DEVICE   TO   INSURE    THE    PROPER  GUID- 
ANCE   OF    THE    REAR    ENDS    OF  THE 
NEEDLES  OF  A  JACQUARD  MACHINE. 

Fig.  i  is  a  longitudinal  section  of  sufficient  of  a 
Jacquard  machine  to  illustrate  the  device.  Fig.  2 
is  a  sectional  plan  view  of  part  of  the  same  on  a 
somewhat  larger  scale,  and  Fig.  3  is  a  detached  view 
of  a  retainer-bar  to  which  the  improvement  particu- 
larly relates.  The  improvement  is  applicable  to  any 
ordinary  form  of  a  Jacquard  machine. 

A,  represents  part  of  the  frame;  A',  some  of  the 


griff-bars;  and  A",  some  of  the  lifters;  B,  B',  and 
B~  representing  three  sets  of  needles  controlling  these 
lifters.  The  needles  are  guided  at  the  front  ends 
by  a  perforated  guide-board  a,  and  the  projecting 
ends  of  the  needles  are  acted  upon  by  cards  x,  which 
are  carried  by  the  card-cylinder  x'  on  the  vibrating 
or  reciprocating  frame  D.  The  rear  ends  of  the 
needles  pass  between  horizontal  guide-rods  &,  whereby 
they  are  held  in  proper  vertical  position,  and  also  be- 
tween vertical  guide  and  retainer-bars  d,  whereby  they 
are  held  in  proper  lateral  position,  and  whereby,  also, 
their  forward  movement  is  limited,  such  forward 
movement  being  due  to  coiled  springs  f  acting  upon 


the  rods,  and  this  movement  being  restricted  by  the 
engagement  of  the  hooked  rear  ends  9,  of  the  rods 
with  the  vertical  guide-bars  d. 

In  machines  in  which  a  large  number  of  needles 
are  used  said  needles  are  very  closely  bunched. 
Hence  the  guide-bars  d  are  very  thin,  but  are  of 
considerable  length,  owing  to  the  large  number  of 
needles  in  each  vertical  row,  and  the  central  por- 
tions of  these  guide-bars  are  therefore  liable  to  be 
deflected  laterally  to  such  an  extent  that  adjoining 
needles  sometimes  engage  with  each  other,  and  thus 
cause  improper  operation   of  the  lifters.     In  order 


f 


Fig.Z. 


to  overcome  this  defect  the  rear  portion  of  the  Jac- 
quard machine  is  provided  with  projecting  brackets 
t,  upon  which  is  mounted  a  transverse  retainer-bar 
G,  notched  in  its  front  edge,  as  shown  in  Fig.  3, 


134 


for  the  reception  of  the  rear  edges  of  the  vertical 
guide-bars  dt  for  the  needles,  the  vertical  position 
of  said  retainer-bar  G,  being  about  midway  of  the 
length  of  said  bars  d,  so  as  to  firmly  brace  the 
same  at  the  point  where  deflection  is  otherwise  most 
likely  to  occur.    (Thomas  Halton,  Philadelphia.) 


JACKSON'S  JACQUARD  MECHANISM. 

The  novelty  of  this  mechanism  relates  to  improve- 
ments in  the  means  for  moving  the  upper  and  lower 
grates  in  a  Jacquard  mechanism  to  and  from  each 
other,  resulting  in  a  device  simple  and  durable  in 
its  construction. 

Fig.  i  shows  a  side  view  of  a  Jacquard  mechanism 
with  the  improved  elements  attached,  with  all  the 
inner  working  parts — such  as  the  hooks,  needles, 
etc.,  omitted.  Fig.  2  shows  an  end  view  of  the  Jac- 
quard with  the  guide-bars  B  of  the  upper  grate  and 
the  elements  that  elevate  said  upper  grate,  and 
also  the  guide  P,  attached  to  the  lower  grate,  to 
which  are  attached  some  of  the  improved  elements. 

A,  indicates  one  of  the  side  frames  in  a  Jacquard 
mechanism;  C,  the  upper  grate;  D,  the  lower  grate. 
B,  is  the  guiding-bar,  attached  firmly  to  the  upper 
grate  in  the  arm  B'  and  is  otherwise  guided  in  the 
apertures  for  that  purpose  provided  in  the  frame  A. 
E,  is  a  connecting-rod  attached  at  one  end  to  a  pin 
in  the  upper  grate  arm  B'  and  at  its  other  end  furn- 
ished with  a  screw-cut  hole  screw-cut  so  as  to  re- 
ceive the  upper  similarly  screw-cut  part  of  the  con- 
necting-rod E',  whose  lower  part  is  attached  to  a 
bolt  or  pin  F,  which  in  addition  to  connecting-rod 
E'  supports  the  link  G  and  attaches  them  both  to 
the  grate-elevating  lever  H,  consequently  also  sup- 
porting this  latter. 

The  two  connecting-rods  E  and  E',  the  rod  E' 
being  secured  to  rod  E  by  lock-nuts  E2  and  E3, 
thus  form  the  element  that  raises  and  lowers  the 
upper  grate  C  when  said  elevating-lever  H,  which  has 
its  fulcrum  H2  in  two  standards,  of  which  H'  is 
one,  is  given  the  necessary  motion  by  means  of 
connecting-rod  H3,  connecting  lever  H  with  the  eccen- 
tric arm  IP,  which  with  the  eccentric  arm  H6  gives, 
(arm  H1  being  secured  to  arm  H6  and  arm  H5 
secured  to  shaft  H6)  when  shaft  H8  is  revolved,  the 


mi 

requisite  movement  to  their  respective  motion-levers 
H  and  I. 

The  pin  F,  which,  as  previously  described,  carries 
the  connecting-rod  E',  having  attached  at  its  other 


end  E,  which,  attached  to  the  upper-cradle  arms  B' 
thus  elevates  and  lowers  the  said  upper-cradle.  Pivoted 
on  this  said  pin  F  is  a  lever-arm  G,  whose  other 


3' 


end  is  pivoted  on  a  pin  L  between  two  prongs  and 
of  a  knuckle-joint  K.  Pivoted  to  a  bearing  A', 
secured  to  the  main  frame  A  by  means  of  a  pin  M, 
secured  in  said  support  or  bearing,  is  a  fulcrumed 
lever  N,  one  arm  N'  of  which  is  rectangular-shaped 
and  fits  in  a  similarly  retangular  aperture  in  the 
knuckle-joint  K.  The  other  arm  N2  is  by  a  hole  at- 
tached to  the  pin  O',  secured  in  the  two  prongs 
O2  and  O3  of  the  knuckle-joint  O.  The  lower  prong 
O*  of  knuckle-joint  O  is  secured  to  an  arm  P'  of  a 
guide  P,  part  of  or  firmly  secured  to  the  lower  grate 
D.  This  guide  P  is  furnished  with  an  upper  projec- 
tion P2  and  a  lower  projection  P8,  both  furnished 
with  holes  through  which  the  guide-rod  B  slides, 
giving  said  guide-rod  a  steady  support.  The  other 
motion-lever  I  appertains  to  the  in-and-out  move- 
ment of  the  cradles  to  and  from  the  needles. 

Method  of  operation: — The  upward  motion  of  the 
upper  grate  C  is  transmitted  direct,  inasmuch  as 
when  the  motion-lever  H  is  caused  to  move  around 
its  fulcrum  H2  in  the  standard  H'  in  the  direction 
of  arrow-head  x  the  combination  of  the  connecting- 
rods  E  and  E'  will  lift  the  grate  C  by  the  two 
arms,  of  which  B'  is  one.  At  the  same  time  the 
lower  grate  ought  to  be  moved  in  the  opposite  di- 
rection, consequently  downward,  and  doing  this  by 
means  of  the  same  movement  administered  by  the 
same  motion-lever  H,  is  the  object  of  the  new  mech- 
anism. To  this  effect  a  fulcrum  is  created  in  the 
pin  M,  attached  to  the  support  A',  located  between 
the  upper  and  lower  grates,  nearest  to  the  lower 
grate  and  attached  to  the  part  of  the  frame  adjacent 
to  the  operating-levers.  On  the  pin  M,  represent- 
ing said  fulcrum,  is  pivoted  a  double-armed  lever  N, 
the  obvious  result  of  this  being  that  an  upward  move- 
ment of  the  arm  N'  of  lever  N  in  the  direction  of 
arrow-head  V.  would  result  in  a  downward  move- 
ment on  the  part  of  N2  and  consequently  be  trans- 
mitted to  the  lower  grate  D,  to  which  said  lever-arm 
N3  is  attached,  by  means  of  the  knuckle-joint  O, 
being  pivoted  on  the  pin  O',  of  the  arm  P',  on 
grate  D.  The  connection  of  the  different  elements 
with  each  other  will  thus  be  seen  to  be  the  follow- 
ing:— To  each  prong  of  motion-lever  H,  there  is  at- 
tached by  the  pins  F  the  two  levers  G,  both  of 
which  levers  at  their  other  ends  are  secured  by  pins 
L  between  the  prongs  of  knuckle-joints  K.  Pass- 
ing through  an  aperture  in  said  knuckle-joints  are 
the  square  arms  N'  of  the  two  fulcrumed  levers  N. 
Said  levers  N  are  each  pivoted  in  its  respective  sup- 
port, and  the  other  arms  N2  of  the  levers  N  are 
each   secured   between  the  prongs  of  the  knuckle- 


135 


joints  O,  and  pivoted  to  the  arms  P'  of  the  guides 
P,  attached  to  or  part  of  the  lower  grate  D,  thus 
completing  the  combination. 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  knuckle-joint  K  is 
secured  to  the  arm  N'  by  the  screw  J  and  can  be 
slid  back  and  forth,  and  in  being  thus  adjustable 
can  lengthen  or  shorten  the  rise  of  the  lower  grate. 
This  same  adjustability  relates  also  to  the  upper  and 
lower  connecting-rods  E  and  E'  of  the  upper  grate, 
inasmuch  as  the  end  of  rod  E'  being  screw-cut,  so 
as  to  fit  the  similarly  screw-cut  hole  in  rod  E,  it 
will  be  apparent  that  rod  E'  can  be  screwed  up  and 
down  in  rod  E  and  thus  shorten  or  lengthen  the 
rise  and  fall  of  the  upper  grate  at  the  operator's 
will  and  in  exact  proportion  to  the  rise  and  fall  of 
the  lower  grate.  (James  Jackson  and  Sons,  Paterson, 
N.  J.) 


THE   KNOWLES    JACQUARD    BOX  CHAIN 
INDICATOR  MECHANISM. 

When  required  the  Jacquard  can  be  made  to  do 
the  duty  of  the  pattern-chain  multiplier.  The  action 
of  this  multiplier  was  shown  in  the  article  on  the 
"Knowles  Mechanism  for  Operating  Shedding  and 
Drop-box  Pattern-indicators."  The  new  mechanism 
is  shown  in  detail  by  the  accompanying  drawing. 

The  upright  lever  I,  slides  into  and  out  of  engage- 
ment with  its  star-wheel  the  pin-wheel  which  turns 


the  box  pattern-cylinder.  Upright  lever  I,  is  actu- 
ated through  connector  c,  from  lever  v,  which  is 
moved  by  cam  integral  with  arms  »,  which  are 
pulled  up  alternately  as  indicated  by  the  punching  of 
the  Jacquard  cards,  by  means  of  the  cords  d,  which 
lead  to  lifter  needles  in  the  Jacquard. 

The  cards  can  be  punched  to  indicate  the  box-pat- 
tern-chain to  rest  or  move  as  desired.  The  springs 
s,  acting  through  the  yoke  ?/,  serve  to  hold  the  cam 
in  position  either  side  of  the  fulcrum  f  and  prevent 
the  jar  of  the  loom  Retting  it  out  of  place.  (Crompton 
and  Knoules  Loom  Works.) 


STAFFORD'S  LINGO. 

The  object  is  to  produce  a  lingo  having  a  spring- 
head which  shall  permit  the  loop  of  a  heddle  to  be 
connected  therewith  without  any  diffi- 
culty, which  shall  not  tend  to  cut  such 
loop,  and  which  shall  not  exceed  in 
its  proportions  in  cross-section  the 
proportions  of  the  body  or  lower  por- 
tion of  the  lingo  to  thereby  take  up 
room  laterally  or  interfere  with  the 
vertical  movements  of  the  lingo  when 
grouped  with  a  number  of  others  in 
a  Jacquard  harness. 

The  accompanying  illustrations  are 
views  from  different  sides  of  the  fin- 
ished lingo  with  a  wire  heddle  applied 
thereto. 

This  lingo  presents  a  spring-head 
in  which  the  wire  is  swaged  to  a 
smaller  diameter  than  the  body,  it 
having  a  flattened  tongue  I,  an  oppos- 
ing flattened  back  portion  2,  and  a 
neck  portion  of  circular  cross-section 
extending  throughout  the  bend  of  the 
neck.  The  neck  portion  is  wholly  free 
from  any  projection  or  edge  such  as 
would  tend  to  cut  the  loop  of  a  hed- 
dle. At  3,  is  shown  part  of  a  heddle  which  is  con- 
nected with  the  lingo.  (Crompton  and  Knowles  Loom 
Works.) 

BUTCHER'S  JACQUARD  HEDDLE. 

The  object  in  the  manufacture  of 
this  heddle  is,  to  provide  a  two-strand 
wire  heddle  with  an  eye  therein  inter- 
mediate its  end  for  the  thread  to  pass 
through,  said  eye  consisting  of  an 
oval-shaped  metal  eye-let  secured  be- 
tween the  two  strands;  the  lower  end 
of  the  wire  heddle  to  be  attached  to 
the  lingo  by  means  of  a  tube  without 
twisting  the  ends  of  the  wire. 

Fig.  1,  shows  this  wire  heddle  at- 
tached at  its  upper  end  to  the  lower 
end  of  the  cord  leading  to  the  Jac- 
quard machine  and  at  its  lower  end 
to  the  upper  end  of  a  lingo.  Fig.  2, 
is  a  detached  view  of  a  heddle-eye. 
Fig.  3,  shows  the  lower  end  of  the 
wire  heddle  with  the  tube  thereon 
preparatory  to  attaching  the  lingo 
thereto.  Fig.  4,  shows  the  next  step 
in  attaching  the  lingo,  the  ends  of  the 
wire  have  been  bent  up  and  passed 
through  the  eye  in  the  upper  end  of 
the  lingo  from  opposite  sides.  Fig. 
5,  shows  the  next  step,  the  ends  of  the 
wire  having  been  bent  up  again 
against  the  main  wires  and  inserted 
in  the  lower  end  of  the  tube,  which 
is  then  drawn  down  on  the  four 
strands  of  wire  as  shown.  Fig.  6, 
shows  the  next  step,  the  two  free  ends  of  the  wire  hav- 
ing been  bent  outwardly  in  opposite  directions  to  ex- 
tend over  the  top  edge  of  the  tube.  Fig.  7,  shows  the 
next  step,  the  projecting  ends  of  the  wires  being 
cut  off  close  to  the  tube,  leaving  the  hooked  ends 
extending  over  the  upper  edge  of  the  tube.  Figs. 
2  to  7  inclusive,  are  shown  on  an  enlarged  scale 
compared  to  Fig.  1. 

Numerals  of  references  indicate  thus: — 1,  the  lower 
end  of  a  cord  leading  to  the  Jacquard  machine,  to 
which  is  attached  the  upper  end  of  the  wire  heddle 
2.    The  lingo  3  (only  the  upper  part  of  which  is 


136 


shown)  has  a 
is  attached  to 


<|~4 


n  eye  3'  at  its  upper  end,  by  which  it 
the  lower  end  of  the  heddle-wire  2. 


the  two  wires  are  bent  up  and  passed  through  the 
eye  3'  of  the  lingo  3,  from  opposite  sides,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  4.  The  ends  2'  are  then  bent  up  against  the 
body  or  main  portion  of  the  heddle-wire  2,  and  the 
tube  6  drawn  down  over  the  four  strands  of  wire 
(see  Fig.  5)  as  far  as  it  can  be  to  form  the  loop  7 
in  the  lower  end  of  the  heddle-wire  for  the  lingo  3. 

The  ends  2',  which  extend  upon  opposite  sides  of 
the  main  wires  of  the  heddle,  are  then  bent  out- 
wardly in  opposite  directions  to  extend  over  the  top 
edge  of  the  tube  6,  (see  Fig.  6,)  and  the  projecting 
ends  are  then  cut  off  close  to  the  tube,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  7,  leaving  hooked  ends  extending  over  the  top 
edge  of  the  tube  6,  which  prevents  the  tube  from 
slipping  or  moving  up  on  the  wires. 

The  tube  6  remains  in  its  place  on  the  lower  end 
of  the  heddle-wire  and  cannot  work  loose,  because 
it  cannot  move  down  by  reason  of  the  divergence  of 
the  wires  to  form  the  loop  7,  and  it  cannot  move  up 
by  reason  of  the  hooks  8  extending  over  its  upper 
edge,  and  by  means  of  the  tube  the  free  ends  of  the 
wire  are  secured  to  the  body  or  main  part  of  the 
heddle  to  form  the  loop  7  for  the  lingo  3,  without 
any  twisting  of  the  ends  or  any  soldering,  etc.  (Edwin 
Butcher,  Worcester,  Mass.) 


COMBERBOARD  TO  PERMIT  CHANGE  OF 
TEXTURE. 

One  of  the  greatest  inconveniences  to  manufac- 
turers of  Jacquard  fabrics  is  the  fact  of  being  always 
more  or  less  restricted  to  a  certain  texture  after  the 
loom  is  once  tied  up.    To  overcome  this  inconveni- 


6 

--3 


The  heddle-wire  2  is  made  from  a 
single  piece  or  length  of  wire,  which 
is  bent  upon  itself  at  its  middle  portion 
intermediate  its  ends  and  then  the  bent 
or  loop  portion  twisted  to  form  an  eye 
4,  through  which  the  cord  1,  is  passed 
to  attach  the  heddle-wire  thereto. 

At  a  point  in  the  heddle-wire  about  midway  be- 
tween its  upper  and  lower  ends  the  eyelet  5,  having 
its  outer  edge  grooved  or  recessed,  is  placed  be- 
tween the  two  strands  of  the  heddle  which  extend  in 
the  grooved  edge  of  the  eyelet  5,  and  the  two  strands 
are  twisted  together  just  above  and  just  below  the 
eyelet  5,  to  secure  it  in  place.    (See  Fig.  2.) 

The  eyelet  portion  of  the  heddle-wire  2  is  tinned 
or  coated  with  metal  to  fill  any  opening  or  joint 
and  make  a  smooth  and  even 
catch  on  or  chafe  or  rub  the 
wires  are  raised  and  lowered. 

Upon  the  lower  free  ends  2'  of  the  heddle-wire^  2, 
is  strung  a  tube  6,  (see  Fig.  3,)  which  has  an  in- 
ternal diameter  just  large  enough  to  receive  four 
thicknesses  of  the  single  wire  or  strand  from  which 
the  heddle  is  made.  After  the  tube  6  is  placed  on 
the  lower  end  of  the  wire  heddle,  the  free  ends  2'  of 


surface  which  will  not 
threads  as  the  heddle 


Fig.  1. 


137 


ence  is  the  object  of  the  new  comberboard,  the  in- 
ventor providing  an  adjustable  sectional  comberboard 
by  means  of  which  the  same  patterns  can  be  woven  in 
different  widths  without  the  necessity  of  changing  the 
harness  and  the  comberboard,  and  thus  greatly  simpli- 
fying the  work  and  reducing  the  time. 

The  improvement  consists  in  an  adjustable  sec- 
tional comberboard,  its  adjusting  and  locking  or  tight- 
ening mechanism. 

Fig.  i  is  a  perspective  view  of  the  improved  comb- 
erboard in  connection  with  a  series  of  harness  threads 
and  Fig.  2,  a  front  elevation  of  Fig.  i,  and  illustrat- 
ing the  comberboard  adjusted  to  a  different  position. 

A,  represents  a  rectangular  frame  consisting  of  the 
parallel  sectional  side  bars  a,  a",  and  6,  W,  hinged  to- 
gether at  a2,  and  &2,  respectively,  and  of  the  connect- 
ing braces  c,  c,  arranged  at  or  near  the  outer  ends 
of  said  sectional  side  bars,  which  latter  are  provided 
on  their  inner  sides  with  longitudinally  extending 
grooves  a',  and  b',  as  clearly  shown  in  Fig.  i. 

One  of  the  side  bars  in  the  drawings  b,  b",  is  pro- 
vided on  its  outside  and  at  or  near  its  hinge  with 
the  headed  studs  or  screws  c,  e',  which  latter  pene- 
trate and  are  engaged  by  and  in  frictional  contact 
with  the  elongated  spring-wire  loop  e~,  by  means  of 
which  latter  the  sections  of  the  frame  are  held  in 
adjusted  and  normal  position. 


I 

Fig.  2. 

In  the  grooves  a',  and  is  arranged  the  comber- 
board proper,  consisting  of  a  series  of  two  or  more 
sections  d,  d',  ds,  and  d*t  connected  together  by  threads 


d\  and  which  boards  are  held  in  a  fixed  position  by 
pins  m,  m' . 

The  harness  threads  h,  h\  h\  7i»,  pass  through  the 
openings  in  the  comberboard  in  the  usual  manner. 

As  shown  in  the  drawings,  the  centre  line  of  the 
hinge  is  above  the  face  of  the  comberboard,  but  it 
may  be  placed  in  the  plane  of  the  face  of  the  said 
comberboard,  so  as  to  avoid  the  sliding  of  the  said 
board  within  the  groove  of  the  frame  during  the 
adjustment.  In  this  case  the  frame  may  also  be  dis- 
pensed with  and  the  hinge  directly  arranged  upon  the 
central  sections  of  the  comberboard. 

Whenever  a  certain  pattern  is  completed  and  a 
different  pattern  is  desired,  calling  for  a  different 
number  of  harness  threads  to  the  inch,  the  frame 
containing  the  comberboard,  or  the  latter  one,  if  no 
frame  is  used,  is  swung  upon  its  pivot  until  the 
proper  adjustment  is  obtained.  The  spring-loop  eJ, 
being  in  frictional  contact  with  the  headed  pins  e,  e' , 
will  hold  the  sections  in  adjusted  positions. 

A  further  improvement  in  the  construction  of  this 
comberboard  is  the  manner  of  boring  the  holes  by 
means  of  which  the  friction  on  the  harness  cords, 
which  would  appear  by  using  a  comberboard  with 
straight  bored  holes,  is  overcome. 

By  means  of  boring  angular  holes  in  the  comber- 
board, friction  to  the  harness  cords  is  impossible; 
the  comberboard  may  be  placed  in  any  position  what- 
ever required  by  texture  and  width  of  fabric 

These  harnesses  will  give  a  one-third  spread  of  their 
width  in  the  narrow  position,  for  instance,  a  harness 
21"  wide  can  be  spread  to  28"  or  any  width  between 
the  two;  a  24"  harness  to  32"  and  so  on;  a  harness 
say  300  ends  per  inch  can  be  spread  %  and  make 
a  harness  200  ends  per  inch  or  any  count  between. 
{Cleaver  and  Leather,  Paterson,  N.  J.) 


JACQUARD    LOOM    WITH  SHAFT-HARNESS 
ATTACHED. 

The  object  of  the  construction  of  this  Jacquard 
loom  is  to  produce  damask  or  figured  fabrics  with- 
out the  use  of  special  mountings  for  the  ground- 
binding. 

The  ground-binding  in  this  instance  is  produced 
by  means  of  a  special  device,  operating  directly  on 
the  harness  heddles. 

The  accompanying  drawing  shows  in  perspective 
so  much  of  the  loom  as  is  necessary  to  explain  the 
procedure. 

In  the  drawing  it  is  assumed  that  the  ground-bind- 
ing is  that  of  eight-leaf  satin. 

1  to  8  indicate  a  row  of  hooks  of  a  Jacquard  ma- 
chine. 

a,  are  harness  cords.  C,  to  c8,  are  the  shafts.  dt 
and  f,  are  the  harness  boards. 

e'  to  e8,  is  an  additional  harness  board  divided  into 
eight  parts  or  rods  with  projections  0'  to  o8,  and  ff  to 
r*.  At  the  right-hand  side  of  these  harness  board 
parts,  there  are  arranged  springs  s',  to  s8,  having  a 
tendency  to  draw  these  rods  to  the  right. 

(J,  is  a  crank-shaft.  \  is  an  eccentric  with  a  con- 
necting-rod i. 

k,  is  a  bell-crank  lever.  One  of  the  arms  of  this 
lever  is  connected  with  the  eccentric;  the  other  with 
the  reciprocating  knife  I. 

m,  is  a  guide  for  the  divided  harness  board. 

n',  to  nst  are  locking-pawls  held  against  the  divided 
harness  board  by  springs  p'  to  p",  and  engaging  with 
the  projections  r' ,  to  1*.  The  pawls  «■',  to  ws,  are 
connected  by  cords  Q',  to  <f,  with  treadles  or  levers 
x',  to  Xs,  suitably  arranged  in  the  loom  and  serving 
for  lifting  out  of  engagement  the  said  pawls.  This 
lifting  mechanism  for  actuating  the  shafts  C,  to  c9,  and 


138 


pawls  to  consists  of  levers  x't  to  Xs,'  pivoted 
in  the  frame  and  actuated  by  cams  t',  to  set  at 
equal  angles  on  the  shaft  V. 

Each  of  these  levers  is  connected  by  a  cord  passing 
round  a  drum  w  with  one  of  the  shafts  C,  to  c8,  and 
by  other  cords  (]',  to  <7S.  with  the  pawls  n',  to  n\ 
acting  on  the  bars  e',  to  e8,  of  the  divided  harness 
board.  The  parts  are  as  shown  so  arranged,  that 
when  one  of  the  levers  x',  to  a?8,  for  instance  x\ 
is  depressed  by  the  corresponding  cam  of  the  group 
V,  to  *8,  the  corresponding  shaft  c\  will  be  raised, 
while  at  the  same  time  a  pawl  not  corresponding  to 
the  raised  shaft,  for  instance  n\  is  caused  to  release 
its  portion  es,  of  the  divided  harness  board,  such  pawl 
being  connected  with  the  said  lever  x\  by  a  cord  9s. 


abutting  against  the  edge  of  the  knife.  When  the 
knife  I  returns,  the  pawl  n*  again  engages  with  the 
projection  r8,  and  the  division  cs,  is  held  in  position  by 
the  pawl  ns,  until  it  is  again  released  by  the  cord  5". 
(E.  V.  Oberleithitn;  Maehrisch-Sctoemberg,  Austria.) 


There  are  as  many  lifting  levers  as  eccentrics  V ,  to 
t",  but  only  two  are  shown  for  the  sake  of  clearness 
in  the  drawing. 

It  will  be  assumed  that  the  Jacquard  has  raised  the 
lifting-wires  I,  2,  6,  7,  and  8,  for  forming  the  pattern, 
but  as  the  cord  attached  to  lifting-wire  8,  is  straight- 
ened by  shifting  the  corresponding  portion  c3,  of  the 
divided  harness  board  to  the  right,  the  corresponding 
shaft  c8,  is  allowed  to  remain  in  the  lower  shed  for 
binding  purposes,  whereas  the  shafts  C,  c2,  c°  and  c7, 
are  raised  in  the  upper  shed,  as  required  by  the  pat- 
tern. The  return  of  the  divisions  of  the  harness 
board  is  effected  by  the  parts  h,  i,  fc,  I. 

On  pulling  down  one  of  the  pawls  n',  to  «  ,  for  in- 
stance, the  pawl  n\  and  thereby  releasing  the  pro- 
jection »•*,  the  division  or  rod  e8,  is  pulled  by  its  spring 
to  the  right,  following  the  movement  of  the  knife  ?. 
which  at"  this  moment  recedes  by  its  projection  o  , 


ROYLE'S  PIANO-MACHINE  FOR  PUNCHING 
JACQUARD  CARDS. 

The  advantage  of  the  new  mechanism  in  piano- 
machines  for  punching  Jacquard  cards,  is,  that  banks 
of  punches  are  placed  under  the  control  of  locking- 
levers  operated  by  keys  to  hold  any  desired  number 
of  them  in  operative  adjustment  with 
relation  to  the  card  to  be  punched. 

Since  the  improvement  is  confined 
to  the  means  for  mounting,  locking, 
and  releasing  the  punches,  there  is 
only  shown  in  our  illustrations  so 
much  of  the  piano-machine  as  neces- 
sary to  afford  a  clear  understanding 
of  the  parts  referred  to,  it  being 
understood  that  the  means  for  bring- 
ing the  cards  into  engagement  with 
the  punches  are  of  well-known  form. 

In  the  accompanying  drawings,  Fig. 
i,  is  a  top  plan  view,  partly  in  section, 
of  that  part  of  a  machine  embodying 
the  improvement.  Fig.  2,  is  a  vertical 
transverse  section  along  line  x-x, 
of  Fig.  I.  Fig.  3,  is  a  vertical  section 
from  front  to  rear  along  line  V-V,  of 
Fig.  I.  Fig.  4,  is  a  partial  vertical 
section  from  front  to  rear  along  the 
line  a-B,  of  Fig.  i.  Fig.  5,  is  a  partial 
transverse  vertical  section  along  the 
line  w-V),  of  Fig.  ■  i,  and  Fig.  6,  is 
a  view  of  a  portion  of  one  of  the  pat- 
tern-cards. 

The  table  or  bed  for  supporting  the 
pattern-cards   to   be   punched   is  de- 
noted by  A,  and  it  is  provided  at  a 
point  beneath  the  punches   with  an 
opening  a,   having  a  perforated  plate  a',  supported 
over  the  top  of  the  opening  and  forming  a  bearing 
for  the  card  at  the  point  where  the  punches  operate 
The  table  A,  is  surmounted  by  a  guide  B,  provided 
with  a  series  of  perforations  6,  corresponding  to  the 
perforations  in  the  plate  «',  and  intended  to  guide  the 
punches  to  their  work.  . 

The  punches  and  the  mechanism  for  locking  and 
releasing  them  are  carried  in  a  head  (denoted  as  a 
whole  by  C)  supported  upon  a  pair  of  rods  c,  c  ,  which 
extend  down  through  the  guide-piece  B  and  table  A 
to  a  suitable  connection  with  an  operating-tread.e 
(not  shown  in  illustrations).  The  head  C  is  com- 
posed of  an  upper  plate  c2,  and  a  lower  plate  f, 
the  latter  having  a  punch-supporting  section  c  in 
which  the  banks  of  punches  are  mounted  and  an 
intermediate  spacing  portion  f,  between  the  upper 
and  lower  plates  for  the  reception  of  the  sliding  lock- 

infnbathe  present  instance  there  are  shown  sixteen 
punches  arranged  in  a  line  and  composed  of  two 
banks,  a  punch  of  the  shorter  bank  alternating  with 
a  punch  of  the  longer  bank. 

The  punches  of  the  shorter  bank  are  denoted  by 
D  and  have  collars  d,  for  preventing  them  from 
dropping  downward  out  of  their  support  c  - 

The  punches  of  the  longer  bank  are  denoted  by 
D',  and  in  like  manner  are  provided  with  collars 
d',  to  prevent  them  from  dropping  downward  y  out 
of  their  support  c\    Each  individual  punch  of  both 


139 


banks  D,  D'  is  provided  with  a  light  spring  d\  which 
has  a  tendency  to  keep  the  punch  at  the  limit  of  its 
downward  movement.    The  lower  end  of  the  spring 


rests  against  a  shoulder  rf3,  formed  by  reducing  the 
body  of  the  punch. 

There  is  a  recess  or  chamber  C,  provided  in  the 
spacing  portion  c5,  and  in  the  plane  of  the  line  of 
punches  for  the  extension  of  the  bank  of  punches  D', 
upwardly  toward  the  upper  plate  c2,  of  the  head, 
leaving  a  space  between  the  plate  c2,  and  the  tops 
of  the  punches  D',  for  the  passage  of  the  locking- 
bars. 

Each  individual  punch  D'  has  its  horizontally-slid- 
ing locking-bar  adapted  to  move  into  the  space  be- 
tween the  top  of  the  punch  and  the  upper  plate  C, 
to  lock  the  punch  and  back  out  of  said  space  to  re- 
lease the  punch.  In  like  manner  each  of  the  punches 
D,  of  the  shorter  bank  has  a  similar  horizontally- 
sliding  locking-bar  adapted  to  be  slid  over  the  top 
of  the  punch  to  lock  it  and  back  out  of  the  way  to 
leave  the  punch  free  to  move.  The  sliding  locking- 
bars  for  the  punches  D',  are  denoted  by  E,  and  are 
held  normally  out  of  engagement  with  the  punches 
D',  by  means  of  a  retracting-spring  e.  The  lock- 
ing-bars E,  gradually  diverge  from  one  another  as 
they  extend  toward  the  front  of  the  machine  from 
the  punches  as  shown  in  Fig.  I,  and  at  their  for- 
ward ends  they  are  beveled,  as  shown  at  e',  to  en- 
gage a  corresponding  bevel  f,  on  one  of  a  bank  of 
operating  keys  F.  The  keys  F,  are  mounted  in  the 
head  C,  in  such  a  manner  as  to  have  a  limited  verti- 
cal movement,  their  movement  downward  being 
limited  by  the  contact  of  the  under  side  of  their 
heads  with  the  top  plate  c2,  and  their  upward  move- 
ment being  limited  by  the  engagement  of  a  pin 
or  stud  f  coming  in  engagement  with  the 
under  side  of  the  locking-bar  E. 

The  locking-bars  for  the  lower  or  shorter 
bank  of  punches  are  denoted  by  E',  and 
like  those  already  described  for  the  longer 
bank   of   punches,  are   provided   with  re- 
tracting-springs    and    have    their    ends  in 
like  manner  beveled  to  engage  a  corresponding  bevel 
on  the  bank  of  keys  F',  mounted  in  the  present  in- 
stance farther  toward  the  front  than  the  bank  F,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  i. 

Provision  is  made  for  simultaneously  returning  all 
the  keys  F,  or  F',  which  may  have  been  depressed  as 
follows:    A  plate  or  flat  bar  G,  extends  transversely 


across  the  machine  beneath  the  head  C,  in  such  posi- 
tion as  to  engage  the  lower  ends  of  the  depressed 
keys  F,  F',  when  the  bar  or  plate  is  raised  and  said 
plate  G,  is  connected  by  end  extensions  V,  with  the 
arms  of  a  pair  of  operating-levers  H,  connected  at 
their  free  ends  by  an  operating-bar  h,  and  pivoted 
on  a  rod  h\  at  the  front  of  the  head  C.  By  depress- 
ing  the  bar  h,  the  key-returning  plate  or  bar  G  is 
elevated,  and  any  keys  which  project  below  the  head 
are  returned  to  their  normal  position,  thereby  per- 
mitting the  locking-bars  E,  E',  to  spring  back  away 
from  over  the  punches  into  position  to  be  again  forced 
forward  by  the  depression  of  the  keys. 

The  punches  thus  far  described  are  for  the  purpose 
of  making  the  pattern-holes  i,  in  the  card  I.  In 
rr     addition  to  these  it  is  desirable  to  make,  during  the 
i_      passage  of  the  card  through  the  machine,  lacing-holes 
=S_  of  greater  diameter  than  the  pattern-holes  and  also  a 
\~y  peg-hole.    The  lacing  holes  are  denoted  in  Fig.  6,  by 
i',  and  the  peg-hole  by  i~. 

The  peg-hole  i~,  is  made  centrally  near  the  end  of 
the  card,  and  the  punch  K,  for  making  it,  is  locked 
by  a  sliding  locking-bar  fc,  similar  in  all  essential 
respects  to  the  bars  E,  E',  before  referred  to,  and 
operated  by  a  centrally-located  key  F2,  quite  like 
the  keys  F,  and  F',  referred  to,  and  in  position  to 
be  returned  to  its  elevated  adjustment  by  the  upward 
movement  of  the  bar  or  plate  G. 

The  lacing-holes  in  some  instances  are  required 
to  be  the  distance  apart  shown  by  the  holes  repre- 
sented in  full  lines  in  Fig.  6,  and  in  other  instances 
the  distance  apart  shown  by  the  holes  represented 
by  dotted  lines  in  Fig.  6.  To  provide  for  punching 
them  at  either  of  these  distances  apart  at  pleasure, 
a  bank  of  four  punches  is  located  in  groups  of  two, 
as  represented  in  Fig.  5,  the  punches  for  punching 
the  holes  the  farthest  apart  being  denoted  by  L, 
and  those  for  punching  the  holes  nearer  together 
being  denoted  by  I.  These  punches  L,  and  I,  are 
located  to  be  operated  by  means  of  a  sliding-bar  M, 
provided  with  beveled  ends  m,  m',  the  one,  m,  adapted 
to  engage  a  vertically-movable  key  F3,  to  slide  the 
bar  in  one  direction,  and  the  other,  m',  adapted  to 
engage  a  vertically-movable  key  F4,  to  slide  the  bar 
in  the  opposite  direction.  A  central  plunger  N,  pro- 
vided with  an  actuating-spring  w,  and  working  in  the 
V-shaped  groove  wi",  in  the  top  of  the  bar  M,  serves 
to  return  the  bar  M,  to  its  normal  position  to  re- 
lease all  the  punches  L,  I.    The  under  side  of  bar 


M,  is  provided  with  recesses,  one  of  them,  wi3,  be- 
ing of  sufficient  length  to  receive  one  group  L,  I, 
of  the  punches  when  the  bar  is  in  its  normal  posi- 
tion, and  with  recesses  »»*,  and  W,  separated  by  a 
partition  m"t  which  is  normally  located  between  the 


140 


other  group  L,  I,  of  punches,  leaving  the  punches  L,  I, 
of  that  group  free  to  lift  one  of  them,  L,  into  the  re- 
cess w8,  and  the  other,  I,  into  the  recess  wi4. 
When  one  of  the  keys  is  depressed,  for  example 


F8,  it  will  slide  the  bar  M  toward  the  right  as  Fig. 
5  presents  itself  to  the  observer,  carrying  the  parti- 
tion m°,  over  the  punch  I,  of  one  of  the  groups,  and 
the  bottom  of  the  bar  itself  over  the  punch  I,  of  the 
other  group,  so  that  the  two  punches  I,  will  be 
brought  into  action,  and  will  punch  the  lacing-holes 
in  the  position  shown  in  dotted  lines  in  Fig.  6. 
When,  on  the  other  hand,  the  key  F4  is  depressed, 
it  will  force  the  bar  M  to  the  left  and  'will  bring 
the  partition  m6,  over  the  punch  L,  of  one  of  the 
groups,  and  the  bar  itself  over  the  punch  L  of  the 
other  group,  leaving  the  remaining  punches  I  free  to 
pass  into  the  recess  in  the  bar  M,  and  bringing  the 
punches  L,  into  action  to  punch  lacing-holes  in  the 
position  shown  in  full  lines  in  Fig.  6.  The  keys  F" 
and  F\  are  returned  to  their  normal  position,  when 
released  from  the  hand  of  the  operator,  by  means 
of  springs  O  and  O'  (shown  in  section  in  Fig.  s), 
one  of  them  being  shown  in  edge  elevation  in  Fig.  3. 

In  operation  as  the  card  to  be  punched  is  fed  be- 
neath the  punches  more  or  fewer  of  the  punches — 
according  to  the  pattern  to  be  punched — are  locked 


C-O  O 


c 


0000000000000000 
0000000000000000 
0000000000000000 
0000000000000000 
0000000000000900- 


Fc9.6. 


in  operative  adjustment  by  the  depression  of  the 
proper  keys  F,  F',  and  the  head  C,  with  the  punches 
locked,  is  then  depressed,  forcing  the  punches  through 
the  card  as  it  rests  upon  the  perforated  plate  As 
soon  as  the  head  C,  is  returned  to  the  upper  limit 


of  its  stroke,  the  punches  may  all  be  released  by  th« 
depression  of  the  finger-bar  ft,  in  case  the  pattern  is 
to  be  changed  at  the  next  step,  and  such  other  com- 
bination of  punches  may  be  locked  in  operative  ad- 
justment by  the  depression  of  the  proper  keys  ready 
for  the  next  downward  stroke  of  the  head  C.  The 
pattern  may  thus  be  wrought  out  upon  the  card  as 
it  is  fed  beneath  the  punches,  and  the  desired  peg- 
hole  and  lacing-holes  may  be  punched  at  each  end 
of  the  card  in  the  proper  positions.  (John  Royle  & 
Sons,  Paterson,  N.  J.) 


ROYLE'S  MACHINE  FOR  PUNCHING  AND 
STACKING  JACQUARD  CARDS. 

Fig.  1  is  a  view  of  the  machine  in  side  elevation. 
Fig.  2  is  a  top  plan  view.  Fig.  3  is  a  view  in  rear 
elevation,  and  Fig.  4  is  an  enlarged  view  in  detail. 

The  supporting-frame  of  the  machine  consists  of  a 
head  A  and  a  backbone  A',  projecting  at  an  angle 
to  the  head,  the  whole  being  supported  upon  three 
legs,  two  of  them,  a,  a',  located  at  or  near  the  ex- 
tremities of  the  head  A  and  the  third,  a\  located  at 
or  near  the  extreme  end  of  the  backbone.  This 
particular  form  of  frame  is  light  and  at  the  same 
time  affords  a  rigid  stable  support  for  the  movable 
parts  of  the  machine.  The  head  A  is  surmounted 
by  a  table  B,  from  which  uprises  a  pair  of  end 
guides  C,  C,  for  holding  the  supply-stack  of  blank 
cards  to  be  fed  to  the  punches. 

The  punching  mechanism  is  located  immediately  to 
the  rear  of  the  stack-guides  C,  C,  and  is  denoted 
as  a  whole  by  D.  As  the  present  invention  does 
not  relate  to  the  punching  mechanism  in  detail,  it 
will  suffice  for  the  purpose  of  understanding  the  pre- 
sent invention  to  say  that  the  cards  as  they  are  fed 
rearwardly  from  the  supply-stack  are  received  upon 
a  punch-bed  d,  and  that  the  punches  are  forced 
through  them  by  means  of  connecting-rods  d't  con- 
nected with  the  punch-carrying  head  d2  and  actuated 
by  eccentrics  d",  d*t  on  the  shaft  E,  driven  by  the 
main  drive-shaft  F,  through  the  intermeshing  gear 
/  and  e. 

The  means  for  accomplishing  the  feed  is  effected 
by  a  flat  plate  9,  (see  Fig.  3,)  fixed  to  a  pair  of 
rack-bars  g'  g2,  mounted  in  suitable  dovetailed  grooves 
in  the  top  of  the  table  B  and  actuated  by  a  pair  of 
sector-bars  G,  G',  fixed  to  a  rock-shaft  H.  The  rock- 
shaft  H,  is  mounted  on  a  spindle  i*,  supported  in  suit- 
able forwardly-extending  portions  ft'  and  ft2,  of  the 
head-frame  A  and  provided  with  collars,  one  of  them 
ft8,  being  interposed  between  the  bearing  ft',  and  the 
end  of  the  sleeve  H'  and  the  other,  ft4,  being  inter- 
posed between  the  bearing  ft2  and  the  opposite  end 
of  the  sleeve  H',  and  provided  with  an  extended 
neck  ft5,  which  extends  through  the  bearing  ft2  into 
position  to  engage  the  nut  ft6,  screwed  onto  the  pro- 
jecting end  of  the  spindle  ft. 

By  tightening  on  the  nut  ft",  the  washers  h'  and 
ft4  are  forced  into  closer  frictional  contact  with  the 
opposite  end  of  the  sleeve  H',  so  as  to  at  all  times 
prevent  the  pitching  forward  of  the  sleeve  H'  under 
the  momentum  of  its  throw.  This  is  an  important 
feature,  inasmuch  as  the  slightest  pitch  beyond  the 
predetermined  point  will  tend  to  advance  the  card 
slightly  beyond  the  position  where  it  should  rest  to 
be  punched,  and  the  holes  in  it  are  thereby  made 
more  or  less  out  of  adjustment,  a  feature  which  be- 
comes objectionable  when  the  cards  are  employed  for 
determining  the  pattern. 

For  purposes  of  lifting  the  supply-stack  of  cards, 
whenever  from  any  cause  an  imperfect  card  becomes 
curled,  split,  or  broken  during  the  operation  of  feed, 
the  end  standards  C,  C',  are  provided  with  vertical 


141 


slides  c,  one  on  the  inner  face  of  each,  the  said  slides 
being  provided  at  their  lower  ends  with  offsets  C, 
adapted  to  take  under  the  ends  of  the  lowermost  card 


and  lift  it,  together  with  those  above  it,  upwardly  from 
the  table.  The  slides  c,  are  provided  with  operating- 
handles  c1,  which  extend  through  elongated  slots  ?, 
in  the  standards  C,  C,  and  bracket  outwardly  from 
the  outer  faces  of  the  standards.  Retaining-hooks 
o*  are  pivoted  to  the  outer  faces  of 
the  standard  C  with  their  operat- 
ing ends  in  position  to  hook  un- 
der the  handles  c2,  when  the  lift- 
ing-slides are  elevated  and  retain- 
ing the  supply-stack  in  the  de- 
sired elevation  while  the  defective 
card  is  being  removed.  As  soon 
as  the  trouble  is  remedied,  the 
supply-stack  may  be  again  low- 
ered by  simply  tripping  the  retain- 
ing-hooks c4.  Offsets  C  at  the 
lower  ends  of  the  slides  c,  are 
adapted  to  rest  normally  within 
recesses  c5,  formed  in  the  table, 
so  as  to  form  no  obstacle  to  the 
free  passage  of  the  cards  along 
the  surface  of  the  table. 

As  the  punched  card  is  pushed 
forward  by  the  next  succeeding 
card  from  the  bottom  of  the  sup- 
ply-stack, it  is  received  upon  a 
skeleton  rest  I,  consisting  of  arms 
fixed  to  and  radiating  from  a 
rock-shaft  i,  mounted  in  lugs  fc, 
projecting  rearwardly  from  a  pair 
of  brackets  K,  K',  fixed  in  verti- 
cal adjustment  at  the  rear  of  the 
head-frame  A.  The  shaft  i,  is  rocked  by  means  of 
a  crank-arm  i',  connected  by  a  rod  iJ,  with  the  arm 
I,  of  a  vibrating  lever  pivoted  at  L,  to  the  bracket 
K,  the  opposite  arm  I',  of  said  lever  being  in  en- 
gagement with  a  cam  M,  secured  to  rotate  with  the 
gear-wheel  e.    The  cam  M  is  provided  with  an  elon- 


gated slot  wi,  through  which  the  clamping-bolt  tn't 
extends  for  locking  the  cam  to  the  wheel  e,  in  the 
desired  rotary  adjustment  relative  thereto,  in  order  to 

rock  the  shaft  *,  and 
hence  the  rest  I,  at  the 
proper  moment  during 
the  rotation  of  the  wheel 
e.  The  vibrating  lever 
pivoted  at  L,  is  operated 
in  a  direction  to  return 
the  rest  I,  by  means  of  a 
spring  l\  connected  at  one 
end  with  the  arm  I,  and 
at  its  opposite  end  with 
the  supporting-frame. 

After  the  punched  card 
has  fallen  upon  the  rest 
I,  the  shaft  i  is  operated 
and  the  card  is  thrown  over  into 
an  upright  position,  resting  on 
its  edge  and  supported  against  a 
traveling  stop  N,  mounted  to  slide 
along  a  groove  o,  in  the  upper 
face  of  a  support  O,  mounted  on 
the  supporting-frame  A'.  It  is 
intended  that  the  stop  N  shall  be 
sufficiently  weighted  or  otherwise 
retarded  by  friction,  so  as  to 
afford  the  necessary  resistance  to 
hold  the  stack  of  cards  in  an 
edgewise  upright  position  against 
it,  and  yet,  so  that  it  will  yield 
step  by  step  the  distance  of  the 
thickness  of  a  card  under  the 
pressure  of  each  succeeding  card 
which  is  forced  by  the  rest  I  against  it,  or  the  cards 
which  have  already  been  pressed  against  it. 

As  the  cards  approach  their  edgewise  upright  posi- 
tion to  form  the  stack  P,  their  ends  are  caused  to 
slip  past  a  pair  of  spring-actuated  retaining-hooks 

llliliiiilliniii 


cc' 


1 


u 

 l  ;  i— 

o 

Li? 

1 

Q,  which  swing  outwardly  as  the  card  is  pressed  be- 
tween them,  and  immediately  the  card  has  reached 
its  upright  position  swing  forwardly  toward  one  an- 
other under  the  tension  of  light  actuating  springs 
Stops  9°,  are  employed  to  limit  the  throw  of  the  re- 
taining-hooks Q. 


142 


The  operation  as  a  whole  may  be  briefly  described 
as  follows: — The  cards  are  fed  one  by  one  from  the 


supply-stack  beneath  the  punches  and  after  having 
been  punched  are  fed  forward  by  the  action  of  the 
next  succeeding  card,  so  that  when  one  card  is  pushed 
forward  from  the  bottom  of  the  supply-stack  in  posi- 
tion to  be  punched,  it  at  the  same  time  pushes  a 
punched  card  onto  the  rest  I.  While  the  card  is  be- 
ing punched,  the  rest  I  is  operated  and  the  punched 
card  thereon  is  forced  rearwardly  against  the  end  of 
the  stack  P,  between  the  retaining-hooks  Q  and  is  there 
held,  while  the  rest  I  is  returned  to  receive  the  next 
succeeding  card  from  the  punches. 

The  stack  P,  may  be  continued  to  any  desired 
length  by  simply  extending  the  support  O.  {John 
Royle,  <£•  Sons,  Paterson,  N.  J.) 


WIRE  ROD   FOR   JACQUARD  CARDS. 

This  Jacquard  card  wire  will  not  slip  in  the  work- 
ing of  the  cards  or  shift  its  position  as  the  cards 
pass  around  the  card-cylinder.  It  is  secured  by  a 
staple  and  hook-eyes  to  the  card-laces  or  by  a  string 
or  wax  end. 

Of  the  wires  in  use,  some  have  two  wire  rings  sol- 
dered on  the  middle  portion,  between  which  the 
tying-strings  are  secured,  and  the  wire  can  only  slip 
the  distance  between  said  wire  rings,  whereas  others 
have  plain  straight  wires,  again  others  have,  in  lieu 
of  the  two  rings  soldered  on,  two  flat  places  where 
the  wire  has  been  flattened,  this  making  two  stops, 


between  which  the  string  is  tied,  and  in  these  the 
wire  may  slip  the  distance  between  the  flat  places. 

The  new  wire  rod  consists  of  a  wire  provided  with 
one  or  more  curves  adapted  to  fit  over  the  card- 
lacing,  permitting  the  main  stem  of  wire  to  go  be- 
tween the  two  adjoining  cards,  and  provided  with  a 
small  hole  on  each  side  of  said  curves  adapted  to 
permit  a  cord  or  fine  wire  staple  to  pass  through  the 
wire  for  the  purpose  of  securing  it  to  the  card-lacing; 
two  or  more  wire  loops  are  used  and  which  pass 
around  the  card-laces  and  which  are  provided  each 
with  two  eyes  or  rings  formed  at  right  angles  to  the 
main  loop  portion,  which  passes  around  said  laces, 
said  eyes  being  adapted  to  permit  the  card  wires  to 
pass  through  them. 

Fig.  i  is  an  illustration  of  the  improved  wire  and 
some  Jacquard  cards  laced  together,  showing  the 
position  of  the  wire  between  the  cards,  the  curve  that 
fits  over  the  laces,  and  the  holes  on  each  side  of  the 
curve,  and  the  loop-eyes  through  which  the  wires 
pass.  Fig.  2  is  a  view  showing  the  card  wire  pro- 
vided with  the  curve  and  a  hole  passing  through  the 
wire  on  each  side  of  the  curve,  a  staple  passing 
through  said  holes  and  adapted  to  hold  the  card  wire 
and  laces  together  to  prevent  the  slipping  of  the  wire 
and  showing  the  wire  loop  adapted  to  hold  the  card 
wire  and  laces  together,  the  card  wire  passing  through 
the  eyes  or  rings  on  wire  loop. 

A,  is  the  card;  B,  the  card  wire;  C,  the  curve 
which  fits  over  the  lacing  between  the  cards,  as 
many  of  which  may  be  provided  as  desired;  D,  the 
loops  provided  with  eyes  or  rings,  the  loop  portion 
going  under  the  laces  and  the  eyes  or  rings  onto 
the  card  wire,  thus  locking  the  wire  and  lacing  to- 
gether; E,  the  holes  in  card  through  which  laces  pass; 
F,  is  the  lacing,  and  G,  are  the  staples,  consisting  of 
very  fine  wire.  Although  string,  or  cord,  waxed  or 
otherwise,  might  be  used,  yet  the  use  of  staples  is 
more  advantageous.  If  cord  is  used  it  is  not  neces- 
sary to  pass  it  through  the  holes  H,  H,  the  curves 
being  tied  to  the  lacing,  virtually  accomplishing  the 


J} 

s 

o  o 

O  O 
K 

o  o 

o  o 

i 

X 



c 

■  — 

J 


desired  object.  (J.  Cleary  and  T.  M.  Miller,  Paterson, 
N.  J.) 


The  Royle  "  Repeater,"  for  punching  Jacquard  cards  from  a  set 
previously  punched  on  a  piano  machine,  is  not  explained  in  this 
chapter,  this  machine  having  been  illustrated  and  explained  In 
"Posselt's  Jacquard  Machine  Analyzed  and  Explained." 


SPOOLING,  WINDING,  WARPING  AND  REELING 

MACHINERY. 


THE  FURBUSH  AUTOMATIC  STOP-MOTION 
FOR  SPOOLING  MACHINERY. 

This  stop-motion  consists  of  a  series  of  iron  trap- 
guides  equipoised  on  a  rod  extending  the  full  length 
of  the  machine,  and  having  a  thread  or  screw  its 
entire  length.  The  trap-guides  are  fitted  loosely  on 
this  long-threaded  rod,  so  that  they  can  be  quickly 
adjusted  to  any  gauge,  and  they  have  each  a  wire 


hook  made  of  hardened  and  tempered  steel,  fastened 
to  them  by  means  of  a  small  screw.  These  wire 
hooks  are  reversible,  so  that  as  the  yarn  cuts  and 
wears  them  at  one  end,  they  can  be  turned  and  the 
other  end  used,  or  being  merely  fastened  by  a  small 
screw,  they  can  be  easily  and  cheaply  replaced  with 
new  ones.  When  an  end  breaks,  the  trap-guide  falls 
and  comes  in  contact  with  a  constantly  vibrating  bar, 
and  the  machine  is  immediately  stopped. 

Another  feature  of  the  spooler  is  the  tension-rolls 
on  the  back  of  the  machine.  These  rolls  keep  a 
constant  and  equal  tension  on  the  yarn  when  the 
machine  is  running  or  stopped,  and  when  the  spooler 
stops  on  account  of  a  broken  end,  the  rolls  are  con- 
nected positively  with  the  driving  pulleys  by  means 
of  a  belt  and  a  clutch,  and  reversed  with  the  ma- 
chine and  spool  in  turning  back  to  find  and  piece 
up  the  broken  end.  By  these  means,  the  trap-guides, 
with  the  exception  of  the  one  on  the  broken  thread, 
are  all  kept  up  in  place  and  the  tension  on  the  yarn 
preserved. 

A  description  of  the  construction  of  the  new  de- 
vice is  best  given  by  means  of  the  accompanying  illu- 
trations.  Fig.  i,  is  a  perspective  view  of  this  well- 
known  Furbush  Spooler,  and  to  which  the  present 
invention  more  in  particular  refers  to;  Fig.  2,  is  an 


enlarged  diagrammatic  view  illustrating  in  side  ele- 
vation and  vertical  section  the  latch,  a  rocking-arm, 
the  spooling  mechanism,  the  thread,  and  the  feeding 
mechanism  for  the  thread,  and  Fig.  3,  is  an  enlarged 
perspective  view  of  the  latch  and  its  supporting-shaft 
or  screw  detached  from  the  machine,  and  illustrat- 
ing a  preferred  method  of  securing  the  latch  on  its 
shaft. 

Examining  our  illustrations,  we  find  spool  B,  and 
drum  B'.  Both  are  to  be  situated  in  the  frame  work 
of  a  regular  spooling  machine  and  driven  by  pulley 
and  belt  in  the  common  manner.  At  the  other  end 
of  the  machine  and  in  the  frame,  the  two  tension- 
rolls  D  and  D',  are  supported,  and  over  these  ten- 
sion-rolls the  threads  E  to  be  spooled  are  passed. 
The  threads  E  are  passed  or  guided  through  a  reed 
F',  which  is  longitudinally  movable  back  and  forth 
across  the  machine  to  properly  wind  each  thread 
upon  the  spool  B. 

Secured  in  the  frame  of  the  machine  parallel  with 
and  below  the  guide-rod  F',  is  a  fixed  shaft  or  rod 

a,  upon  which  is  loosely  supported  a  series  of  latches 

b,  corresponding  in  number  to  the  number  of  threads 
E,  and  each  latch  is  provided  at  one  end  with  a  hook 
b',  by  means  of  which  the  latch  is  hung  upon  a  thread 
E.  The  hook  end  of  the  latch  b,  is  also  provided 
with  a  projection,  or  shoulder  62,  and  the  other  end 
of  the  latch  is  cut  out  or  recessed,  as  at  &3.  Through 
the  recesses  of  the  latches  is  passed  a  rod  b1,  serving 
as  a  stop  to  limit  the  movement  of  the  latches  upon 
the  shaft  C  The  hook  end  of  the  latch  b  is  weighted, 
so  as  to  be  heavier  than  the  recessed  end,  the  object 
being  to  permit  the  latch  normally  to  be  depressed  at 
its  hook  end. 

The  latch  is  held  with  its  hook  end  elevated  by 
means  of  the  thread  E,  but  should  the  thread  break, 
the  weighted  hook  end  carrying  the  shoulder  62,  will 
immediaetly  drop  by  gravity  (and  thus  automatic- 
ally, by  means  of  proper  connection  and  arrange- 
ments, arrest  the  motion  of  the  machine). 

Below  the  supporting-shaft  a,  and  parallel  there- 


with is  placed  a  rocking  shaft  d,  rocking  in  suitable 
bearings  in  the  frame  of  the  machine.  To  this  rock- 
ing shaft  d,  is  secured  at  either  side  of  the  machine  a 
vertically  disposed  rocking  arm  d',  the  two  arms  a 


143 


144 


being  connected  at  their  upper  free  ends  by  means  of 
a  cross-bar.  As  the  arms  d'  are  rocked  by  the  shaft 
d,  this  cross-bar  oscillates  in  a  path  directly  below 
the  elevated  hook  end  of  the  latches  6',  and  particu- 


larly below  the  shoulder  62,  thereof.  When,  how- 
ever, the  hook  end  of  one  or  more  of  said  latches 
drops  by  gravity,  the  shoulder  or  shoulders  b2  thereof, 
will  drop  into  the  path  of  said  oscillating  cross-bar, 
and  thereby  prevent  its  further  oscillation  and  thus 
stop  the  machine  by  means  of  connecting  with  the 
shipping  device. 

During  the  passage  of  the  threads  E,  over  and 
through  the  tension-rolls  D  and  D',  these  rolls  are 
caused  to  rotate  and  by  their  momentum  will  ordi- 
narily continue  to  rotate  for  some  time,  even  when 
the  machine  is  stopped,  and  the  threads  E,  no  longer 
wound  upon  the  spool.  The  threads  would,  there- 
fore, sag  and  tangle  in  the  machine  between  the 
tension-rolls  and  the  spool,  and  this  would  especially 
occur  should,  for  any  reason,  the  spool  and  winding- 
drum  B  be  suddenly  stopped.  To  obviate  this  diffi- 
culty, a  special  mechanism  is  devised,  by  means  of 
which  one  of  the  tension-rolls  is  connected  with  and 
driven  positively  by  the  driving-pulley  at  the  moment 
the  belt  is  shifted  or  transferred  from  the  fast  to  the 
loose  pulley,  but  before  the  belt  has  completely  left 
the  fast  or  driving  pulley.  The  tension-rolls  are  thus 
brought  directly  under  control  of  the  driving-pulley 
of  the  winding  or  spooling  drum  B,  and  when  this 
pulley  and  drum  cease  to  rotate  the  rolls  are  stopped. 

In  Fig.  3,  there  is  illustrated  a  preferred  way  of 
mounting  the  latch  &,  upon  the  fixed  shaft  or  screw 
a,  so  as  to  permit  of  an  adjustment  of  the  latch  on 
the  shaft  toward  the  sides  of  the  machine.  This  is 
accomplished  by  threading  the  shaft  a  and  the  open- 
ing b"  of  the  latch  &,  through  which  the  shaft  a  ex- 
tends. The  threaded  connection  between  the  latch 
b  and  shaft  a,  is  sufficiently  loose  to  permit  the  fall 
of  the  hook  end  of  the  latch,  as  previously  described. 

When  each  latch  is  turned  on  the  threaded  shaft  in- 
dependently of  the  others,  the  grouping  of  the  latches 
into  required  position  can  be  effected,  and  this  posi- 
tion will  be  determined  by  the  number  and  arrange- 
ment of  the  threads  E.  The  latch  b  is  also  provided 
with  a  hook  b\  at  its  recessed  end,  upon  which  hook 
a  weight  may  be  suspended  to  hold  the  latch  with  its 
hook  end  b'  elevated,  out  of  the  path  of  the  cross-bar 
when  the  latch  is  not  required  to  be  suspended  from 
a  thread  E. 

The  hook  is  a  double  hook  and  constructed  so 
that  either  end  may  be  used  to  suspend  the  latch  from 
the  thread.  Thus  the  lower  hook  is  secured,  by  a 
nut  or  screw  &3,  to  the  latch,  and  should  the  upper 
hook  wear  through,  or  nearly  through,  the  hook  may 
be  reversed,  so  that  the  lower  hook  can  be  used  to 
suspend  and  the  upper  hook  secured  to  the  latch  by 
the  screw  &s. 

Although  the  new  device  is  explained  in  connection 
with  a  spooling-machine,  it  is  to  be  understood  that 
with  proper  changes  or  modifications  as  will  readily 
suggest  itself,  this  device  can  be  applied  to  spinning, 
doubling,  winding  machinery,  looms  and,  in  fact,  any 
textile  machine  wherein  upon  the  breaking  of  a  manip- 
ulated thread,  it  is  desirous  to  automatically  stop  the 
machine.  (M.  A.  Furbush  &  Son  Machine  Company, 
Philadelphia.') 


DRAPER'S   SPOOLING  MACHINE. 

In  the  use  of  spooling  machines  intended  to  wind 
the  yarn  off  from  a  plurality  of  cops  or  bobbins  onto 
a  large  spool,  the  end  of  yarn  on  a  fresh  bobbin  must 
be  united  to  that  of  the  preceding  bobbin.  The 
spooler-tender  ties  a  knot  joining  the  two  threads,  and 
as  the  spool-supports  are  continuously  rotated  the 
tender,  while  tying  a  knot  must  keep  the  spool  from 
rotating  with  its  spindle,  by  holding  it  from  rotation 
with  her  hand.  This  interferes  seriously  with  the 
tying  of  a  proper  knot,  and,  in  fact,  becomes  a  posi- 
tive disadvantage  when  it  is  expected  or  required  that 
the  operator  shall  tie  a  "weaver's  knot,"  which  re- 
quires the  free  use  of  both  hands,  and  is  much  the 
best  knot  as  regards  the  effect  upon  the  future  weav- 
ing operation. 

_  The  object  of  the  new  mechanism  is  the  produc- 
tion of  simple  and  convenient  means  for  positively 
raising  the  spool  from  its  friction-seat  on  the  spindle 
when  a  knot  is  to  be  tied,  the  spool  being  held  out 
of  contact  with  its  rotating  mechanism  while  the 
operative  has  the  free  use  of  both  hands  to  tie  the 
knot,  means  being  provided  for  permitting  free  re- 
trograde rotation  of  the  spool  while  so  held. 

Fig.  I  is  a  sectional  view  of  the  new  mechanism, 
and  Fig.  2  is  a  detached  detail  view  of  the  spool- 
controlling  device. 

The  spindles  B,  have  secured  at  their  bases  hubs  or 
collars  b',  provided  wih  disk-like  flanges  or  tops  b*, 
upon  which  the  spools  S,  rest,  and  are  rotated  by 
friction,  the  spindles  extending  through  the  barrels  of 
the  spools. 

Brackets  «,  attached,  as  herein  shown,  to  the  spindle- 
rail  A,  support  a  box  D  at  the  rear  of  the  spools, 
and  stands  a'  are  bolted  to  the  front  of  the  box 
D,  one  for  each  spool.  To  a  depending  ear  a*  on 
the  stand  is  pivoted  a  lifter-bar  a3,  bent  downward 
at  its  outer  end  and  having  mounted  thereon  at  a*  a 
friction  roll  oB,  normally  below  and  out  of  engage- 
ment with  the  base  of  the  adjacent  spool. 

On  its  under  side  the  bar  is  cut  away  to  pre- 
sent a  cam-surface  <2x,  and  leave  shoulders  2,  z> 
which  form  limiting-stops  for  a  pin  or  stud  d' , 
on  the  outer  side  of  the  lower  arm  of  a  lever  d, 
pivoted  to  the  stand  at  d2,  and  extended  upwardly 


above  the  top  of  the  spool  to  form  a  handle  d*. 
Normally  the  handle  d3,  occupies  a  substantially  verti- 
cal position,  as  shown  in  full  lines,  Fig.  2,  the  pin  or 
stud  d'  then  resting  against  the  shoulder  2  of  the 
lifter-bar  a3,  the  shoulder  being  concaved  as  shown  in 
Fig.  2,  to  form  a  species  of  lock,  the  roll  a5,  being  at 
such  time  held  away  from  the  spool-base. 

When  it  is  necessary  to  stop  the  rotation  of  a  spool 
for  any  purpose,  as  to  tie  a  knot  in  the  yarn,  the 
operative  moves  to  the  left,  Fig.  2,  the  handle  of  the 
actuating-lever  d'  of  the  particular  spool  into  dotted- 
line  position.    This  moves  the  stud  d'  along  the  cam- 


145 


surface  ^x  of  the  lifter-bar  a3,  raising  the  outer  end  of 
the  latter  until  its  roll  a6  bears  against  and  lifts  the 
base  of  the  spools  S  from  the  actuating-disk  &2,  act- 
ing as  a  brake  to  stop  the  rotation  of  the  spool  and 
maintaining  it  lifted  and  stationary  as  the  stud  d' 
bears  against  the  shoulder  3,  and  the  adjacent  por- 
tion of  the  cam-surface  <JX,  the  weight  of  the  handle 
d3  then  serving  as  a  counterbalance  to  the  weight  of 
the  spool  and  maintaining  it  raised. 

Any  number  of  spools  can  thus  be  rendered  inopera- 
tive and  brought  to  a  standstill  until  the  operative  has 
tied  the  knots  or  performed  any  other  necessary  act, 
when  by  a  slight  push  on  the  handle  d3,  the  spool- 
lifting  mechanism  is  rendered  inoperative  and  the 
spool  lowered  upon  its  driving-disk  V.    {Draper  Co.) 


LORD'S  SPOOLING  MACHINE. 

The  object  of  this  spooler  is  to  enhance  the  value 
of  spooling  machines  by  improving  the  stop-motion 
devices,  so  that  they  will  act  to  take  up  the  usual 
slack  without  stopping  the  machine,  yet,  when  the 
yarn  breaks  or  becomes  snarled  the  said  devices  will 
be  moved  to  stop  the  winding  of  the  yarn. 


Fig.  1,  in  side  elevation  represents  a  sufficient 
portion  of  a  spooling  machine  with  the  improvements 
added  to  enable  its  construction  to  be  understood. 
Fig.  2,  is  a  partial  view  of  Fig.  1,  looking  from  the 
left;  and  Fig.  3,  is  a  detail  with  the  snarling  stop- 
lever  shown  omitted  in  the  other  figures. 

Letters  of  references  indicate  thus: — A,  the  frame; 
A8,  upright;  A8,  reel;  grooved  drum;  24,  winding- 
roll;  d,  the  spindle  on  which  is  mounted  a  conical  or 
other  shell  to  enable  the  yarn  to  be  wound  in  a 
conical  or  other  mass;  c4,  the  support  for  the  spindle; 
V,  the  traversing  yarn-guide,  reciprocated  by  the  usual 
groove  in  the  face  of  the  drum;  9,  the  lever;  f,  the 
lifting  device  to  elevate  the  roll  24  from  the  drum 
to  stop  the  winding  operation;  m,  the  rotating  ratchet- 
wheel  on  the  shaft  m'-  A6,  the  stringer;  A6,  the  arm; 
9*,  the  leg,  pivoted  to  it  and  having  a  pivot  93,  on 
which  is  mounted  a  leg-lever  ft,  the  inner  end  13  of 


which  is  adapted  to  be  lifted  at  times  to  be  struck  by 
the  teeth  of  the  ratchet  and  cause  the  leg  or  a 
part  carried  by  it  to  strike  and  turn  the  lever  9,  and 
elevate  the  lifters  f,  one  at  each  end  of  the  roll  24, 
and  remove  it  from  contact  with  the  drum  to  stop 
the  winding  of  the  yarn. 

The  leg  92,  or  its  equivalent,  is  provided  with  a  stud 
C,  on  which  several  independent  devices  are  mounted, 
viz.,  a  two-armed  lever  c',  having  a  pin  or  projection 
c2,  and  a  heel  cx,  a  take-up  lever  ca,  having  at  one 
end  an  open  thread-receiving  eye  2,  and  at  its  other 
end  a  toe  c4,  and  a  snarling  stop-lever  c5. 

The  eye  2,  of  the  take-up  lever,  hangs  on  the  yarn 
between  the  usual  traversing  guide  and  the  reel,  and 
the  lever  is  provided  with  a  suitable  weight  3,  for 
regulating  the  tension  on  the  yarn,  and  in  case  the 
yarn  breaks,  the  take-up  lever  drops  and  meeting 
the  broad  outer  end  12,  of  the  leg-lever,  lifts  its 
inner  end  13,  so  that  it  is  struck  by  the  usual  rotat- 
ing stop-wheel  to  stop  the  winding  operation. 

The  snarling  stop-lever  c°,  normally  hangs  near  but 
not  in  contact  with  the  broad  end  12  of  the  leg- 
lever,  but  when  said  snarling-lever  is  struck  by  the 
toe  c4,  of  the  take-up  lever,  the  snarling-lever  is 
swung  forward  and  strikes  the  said  end  12,  of  the 
leg-lever  and  depresses  it,  lifting  the  inner  end  13,  to 
be  caught  by  the  stop-wheel  to  stop  the  winding 
operation. 

The  extremity  of  the  take-up  lever  beyond  its  eye 
2,  is  bent  outwardly  to  form  a  cast-off  portion  20, 
which,  when  the  yarn  has  turned  the  said  lever  far 
enough  on  the  stud  c  to  cause  the  toe  o*  to  meet 
and  actuate  the  snarling-lever,  which,  owing  to  its 
peculiar  shape,  will  discharge  itself  from  the  thread, 
and  thereafter  the  take-up  lever  will  drop,  as  herein- 
before provided  for. 

The  heel  cx,  of  the  lever  c',  rests  against  the  leg 
92,  and  said  lever  C  has  attached  to  it,  in  an  adjust- 
able manner,  a  weight  4,  said  weight  controlling  the 
amount  of  strain  which  shall  be  exerted  on  the  yarn 
after  the  take-up  lever  (it  being  raised  by  a  snarl  in 
the  yarn)  meets  the  pin  e2,  for  before  the  said  take-up 
lever  can  be  moved  far  enough  to  cause  its  toe  to 
meet  and  move  the  snarling-lever,  the  take-up  lever 
must  meet  the  pin  c2,  and  lift  the  lever  C. 

By  adjusting  the  weight  3,  the  tension  can  be  either 
increased  or  decreased,  according  to  the  requirements 
of  the  yarn  being  wound.  By  the  adjustment  of  the 
weight  4,  the  operator  is  enabled  to  determine  the 
amount  of  strain  to  be  put  on  the  yarn,  to  take  out  if 
possible,  a  snarl  before  the  snarl-lever  will  be  actu- 
ated. These  adjustments,  therefore,  constitute  very 
important  features  of  the  new  spooler,  they  control- 
ling the  winding  of  the  yarn  absolutely  to  the  wants 
of  the  operator.    (C.  S.  Lord,  Winooski,  Tt.) 


DRAPER'S  SPOOLER-GUIDE. 

In  this  new  guide  the  blades  may  be  readily  sepa- 
rated to  temporarily  widen  the  slot  or  space  be- 
tween the  blades,  whereby,  if  the  guide  becomes 
clogged,  as  frequently  happens,  the  obstruction  can 
be  readily  removed  by  the  attendant. 

One  of  the  blades  is  mounted  to  tip  and  is  yield- 
ingly held  in  normal  position  relatively  to  the  other 
blade,  and  means  are  provided  for  adjusting  the  dis- 
tance between  the  edges  of  the  blades. 

The  mounting  of  the  movable  plate  in  such  a  man- 
ner that  it  will  tip,  prevents  the  tampering  with  the 
guide  in  such  manner  as  to  leave  the  opening  wide 
enough  at  all  times  to  permit  a  bunch  on  the  yarn 
to  pass  through  without  breakage  of  the  yarn.  If 
an  attempt  is  made  to  wedge  apart  the  blades,  the 
movable  one  will  tip  on  its  support,  closing  the  outer 
end  and  becoming  inoperative. 


146 


Fig.  I,  is  an  enlarged  rear  side  view  of  this  spooler- 
guide.  Fig.  2,  is  a  vertical  section  thereof  on  the 
line  Fig.  I,  looking  toward  the  right;  and  Fig. 

3,  is  a  sectional  detail  of  the  pivotal  sliding-connec- 
tion  between  the  blades. 

The  new  guide  comprises,  essentially,  two  blades  &, 
c,  the  upper  blade  6,  having  a  lateral  offset-portion  or 
base  b't  in  which  is  a  recess  to  partially  embrace  the 
supporting  shaft  or  rod  A,  and  forming  one  member 
of  a  clamp,  the  other  member  of  the  clamp  consist- 
ing  of  a   plate   b2,   recessed   to   embrace   the  shaft 


DRAPER'S 


BOBBIN-HOLDER 
SPOOLERS. 


FOR 


A,  and  having  ears  b3,  through  which  clamp-screws 
10  are  extended  into  threaded  holes  in  the  member  V . 

By  tightening  or  loosening  the  screws  the  guide 
as  a  whole  is  firmly  adjusted  or  moved  upon  the 
supporting-shaft. 

The  blade  &,  has  a  foot  b*,  extended  from  the  base 
b'  below  and  behind  the  blade,  provided  on  its  inner 
side  with  a  socket  b\  open  at  its  top  and  inner  side, 
as  shown  in  Fig.  2,  the  foot  having  a  threaded  hole  at 
each  side  of  the  socket  to  receive  adjusting-screws  12, 
the  lower  ends  of  which  project  more  or  less  below 
the  foot,  as  shown  in  Fig.  1. 

The  blade  c,  has  on  its  rear  face  and  about  midway 
between  its  ends  a  lug  C,  to  enter  loosely  the  socket 
■65,  and  bear  upon  a  spring  s  therein,  Fig.  2,  said 
spring  resting  on  the  bottom  b"  of  the  socket,  the 
said  bottom  projecting  into  a  vertical  groove  or 
depression  c2  in  the  face  of  the  blade  c.  Ears  c3 
extend  from  the  said  blade  and  are  held  against  the 
adjusting-screws  12  by  the  expansive  force  of  the 
spring  s,  the  position  of  the  screws  thus  determining 
the  distance  between  the  edges  of  the  two  blades  b 
and  c. 

The  blade  c  is  vertically  slotted  at  c4,  to  receive 
the  shank  of  a  screw  d,  (see  Fig.  3)  which  is  firmly 
screwed  into  a  boss  b1  on  the  foot  &\  thereby  connect- 
ing the  two  blades,  yet  permitting  bodily  movement  of 
the  blade  0  toward  and  away  from  the  blade  6,  and 
also  movement  of  blade  c  on  d  as  a  pivot,  a  separate 
screw  d'  in  the  boss  acting  as  a  check  to  prevent 
loosening  of  screw  d  by  jarring. 

A  lip  on  the  blade  c,  engages  the  foot  b*}  and  limits 
the  downward  movement  of  the  movable  blade,  which 
latter  on  its  front  side  near  its  lower  edge  is  pro- 
vided with  a  finger-piece  c5. 

If  the  guide  becomes  clogged,  as  it  frequently  does, 
the  attendant  grasps  the  finger-piece  c5  and  draws  the 
blade  c  down,  compressing  the  spring  S  and  separat- 
ing the  blade  edges,  so  that  with  the  free  hand  the 
attendant  can  remove  the  obstruction  from  between 
the  blades. 

When  the  finger-piece  is  released,  the  spring  ex- 
pands and  automatically  returns  the  movable  blade 
to  operative  position,  controlled  by  the  adjustment  of 
the  screws  12,  without  any  further  attention. 

If  a  wedge  be  inserted  between  the  blades  at  their 
inner  ends,  so  as  to  be  unnoticed,  the  movable  blade 
will  tip  on  its  yielding  support,  closing  its  outer  end, 
so  that  the  guide  will  be  inoperative,  and  such  tip- 
ping of  the  movable  blade  prevents  tampering  with 
the  guide  in  the  manner  described.    (Draper  Co.) 


The  object  of  the  new  holder  is  to  adapt  the  same 
for  the  use  of  short  and  long  bobbins.  The  accom- 
panying illustration  is  a  side  elevation  of  this  bobbin- 
holder. 

The  upper  arm  A  of  the  holder  rises  from  a  clamp 
A',  (shown  as  forked,  as  at  A2,)  and  provided  with 
a  set-screw  to  aid  in  confining  the  said  arm  in  place. 
Extended  from  the  clamp  is  a  bracket  b,  having  a 
plurality  of  bolt  holes  2,  one  of  which  is  entered 
by  the  bolt  c,  employed  to  hold  the  rest  or 
pan  d  on  which  the  bobbin  c  is  laid,  said 
bracket  also,  as  shown,  having  at  one  side  of 
each  of  said  holes  a  notch,  in  which  enters  a 
teat  or  tongue  at  the  inner  end  of  said  rest 
or  pan. 

By  taking  out  the  bolt  c,  the  rest  or  pan  d 
may  be  adjusted  in  the  bracket,  and  the  bolt 
may  then  be  put  back  into  whichever  of  the 
holes  2  desired,  that  depending  upon  whether  a 
long  or  short  bobbin  is  to  be  held,  the  parts 
being  shown  in  the  illustrations  adjusted  for  the  longer 
bobbins. 

The  enlarged  free  outer  end  of  the  arm  A  is 
chambered  at  its  under  side,  and  one  end  of  said 
chamber  is  provided  with  an  extension  entering  said 
chamber,  made  by  sawing  slots  out  of  the  solid  cast- 
ing on  each  side,  and  the  end  walls  of  the  chamber 
are  provided  with  holes  to  receive  the  bent  ends  of 
the  arms  of  the  guards  I),  said  extension  acting  as 
a  separator  for  the  guards,  so  that  they  will  remain 
separated  for  a  short  distance  when  the  bobbin  is  not 
in  place  between  the  arms. 

The  rest  or  pan  d,  upon  which  the  bobbin  is  placed, 
has  a  central  cavity  and  side  wings  extended  there- 
from, leaving  corners  between  the  said  cavities  and 
the  wings. 

A  full  bobbin  resting  upon  the  corners  is  main- 
tained central  with  relation  to  the  pan,  and  when  the 
bobbin  is  being  unwound  it  grows  smaller  in  diame- 
ter and  enters  the  cavity,  and  when  nearly  unwound 
in  jumping  about  in  the  cavity  the  corners  act  to 


check  the  movement  of  the  bobbin,  and  should  the 
bobbin  escape  over  the  corners  it  will  rest  upon  the 
wings,  and  under  the  action  of  the  guards  will  be 
pushed  back  again  into  the  cavity.  In  this  way  the 
wings  prevent  the  escape  of  the  bobbin  from  the  pan. 
(Draper  Co.) 


BUNCH-ARRESTING  YARN-GUIDE 
SPOOLING  MACHINES. 


FOR 


This  mechanism  relates  to  means  for  preventing 
the  winding  of  imperfect  yarn  onto  the  spool,  and 
it  consists  in  the  improved  construction  of  a  bunch- 
arresting  yarn-guide,  attached  to  the  traverse-rod 
and  adapted  to  receive  the  yarn  from  the  traverse- 
rod  and  guide  it  onto  the  spool.  The  guide  can  be 
changed  to  suit  any  size  of  yarn. 


147 


Fig.  I,  represents  a  top  view  of  the  yarn-guide. 
Fig.  2,  represents  an  end  view  of  the  same.  Fig.  3, 
represents  a  side  view  showing  the  jaws  in  their  closed 


condition.  Fig.  4,  represents  the  same  view  with  the 
jaws  in  their  opened  condition.  Fig.  5,  represents 
a  vertical  section  taken  in  the  line  5-5,  of  Fig.  r. 

Letters  of  reference  indicate  thus:  A,  represents 
the  traverse-rod  of  a  spooling-machine,  to  which  the 
bunch-arresting  yarn-guides  are  attached,  the  said 
yarn-guides  consisting  of  a  holder  B,  provided  with  a 
set-screw  ct  for  attachment  to  the  rod  A;  the  said 
holder  being  provided  at  one  side  with  an  elongation 
which  forms  the  stationary  jaw  C,  which  is  provided 
with  the  inclined  edge  ct  at  its  outer-end  and  with 
the  ear  &,  to  which  is  pivoted  the  movable  upper  jaw 
D,  the  said  jaw  being  actuated  to  close  upon  the 
stationary  jaw  C,  by  means  of  the  spring  d,  which  is 
held  in  a  recess  e,  made  in  the  middle  portion  of  the 
ear  6.  At  the  base  of  the  jaw  D  is  formed  the  boss 
f,  to  which  is  attached  the  pin  0,  which  serves  to 
limit  the  lateral  movement  of  the  yarn  as  it  is  being 
run  onto  the  spool. 

The  movable  jaw  D  is  provided  with  the  opposite 
ears  h,  which  embrace  the  opposite  sides  of  the 
ear  b  of  the  holder,  and  are  secured  thereto  by  means 
of  the  pivot  i.  The  movable  jaw  D  is  also  provided 
with  the  projecting  arm  by  means  of  which  it  may 
be  raised  from  its  normal  closed  position  with  the  jaw 

C,  against  the  closing  action  of  the  spring  d,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  4,  and  with  an  adjusting-screw  fc,  by  means  of 
which  the  width  of  the  elongated  opening  »»,  between 
the  parallel  jaws  C  and  D,  may  be  adjusted  to  adapt 
the  device  for  spooling  different  grades  or  sizes  of 
yarn,  the  projecting  lug  n,  upon  the  holder  B,  form- 
ing a  bearing-seat  for  the  lower  end  of  the  screw  fc. 

In  order  to  prevent  the  operator  of  the  machine 
from  readily  tampering  with  the  adjustment  of  the 
yarn-guide,  as  they  are  liable  to  do  in  order  to  avoid 
the  trouble  of  piecing  the  broken  ends,  the  head  of 
the  adjusting  screw  k,  is  placed  in  a  chamber  0, 
which  upon  the  proper  adjustment  of  the  opening 
m,  may  be  sealed,  thus  providing  a  check  against 
the  dishonesty  of  the  operator.     The  movable  jaw 

D,  is   also   provided   with   the  downwardly-inclined 


edge  P,  which  serves  to  assist  in  the  rapid  threading 
of  the  guide. 

The  yarn  to  be  wound  upon  the  spool  first  passes 
over  the  surface  of  the  traverse-rod  A,  and  then 
through  the  opening  m,  between  the  horizontal  jaws 
C  and  D,  and  thence  passes  to  the  spool;  and  when 
a  bunch  or  enlargement  of  the  yarn  arrives  at  the 
opening  the  said  bunch  or  enlargement  will  be 
arrested,  and  the  thread  will  be  broken  between  the 
said  jaws  and  the  spool,  so  that  the  imperfect  yarn 
will  not  be  wound  thereon.  The  operator  of  the 
machine  can  then,  by  raising  the  jaw  D,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  4,  release  the  yarn  from  the  opening  m,  and 
readily  remove  therefrom  an  impediment  to  the  sub- 
sequent proper  passage  of  the  yarn  therein.  (Frederic 
TP.  Eastern,  Pawtucket,  A'.  /.) 


SHELL-HOLDER  FOR  SPOOLING  MACHINES. 

The  object  is  to  manufacture  a  spindle  that  can 
be  thrown  to  one  side  when  a  shell  is  to  be  changed 
from  a  full  one  to  an  empty  one. 

The  accompanying  illustration  shows  in  elevation 
such  an  improved  holder  mounted  in  a  yoke;  the 
dotted  lines  showing  the  yoke  turned  out  to  enable 
a  shell  to  be  removed  or  applied,  as  desired. 

This  holder  consists  of  a  dead  spindle  «<,  or  a  spin- 
dle on  which  is  mounted  to  rotate  a  sleeve  having 
an  attached  base  or  enlargement  V,  said  enlarge- 
ment being  adapted  to  receive  the  inner  or  enlarged 
end  of  a  shell  6a,  supposed  to  be  of  paper  or  thin 
light  weight  material,  the  shell  being  shown  as  of 
cone  shape,  and  as  being  held  in  position  by  dogs 
pivoted  on  the  base  and  having  pins  extended  through 
holes  in  the  base;  a  suitable  cam  or  device,  acting  on 
said  pins  to  throw  the  dogs  out,  to  engage  and  hold 
the  shell,  or  to  draw  them  in  to  release  the  shell. 

The  dead  spindle  has  at  one  end  an  eye  through 
which  is  extended  a  pivot  bolt  «■'  to  thus  pivot  the 
dead  spindle  to  one  arm  of  the  yoke  D,  the  opposite 
arm  of  the  yoke  having  a  shoulder  and  spring  to- 
cooperate  with  the  free  end  of  the  dead  spindle  and 
hold  it  steadily  when  in  the  position  shown  by  the 
full  lines,  but  enabling  the  spindle  to  be  turned  out, 
as  shown  by  the  dotted  lines.  The  sleeve  6  is  kept 
on  the  dead  spindle  between  a  shoulder  and  a  pin  3. 

At  the  rear  side  of  the  base  V  and  within  it  and 
surrounding  the  dead  spindle  loosely,  there  is  pro- 
vided a  cam-plate  hav- 
ing two  pins,  one  of 
which  pins  will  strike 
a  stop  6,  carried  by 
the  yoke,  when  the 
spindle  is  turned  out, 
as  shown  by  dotted 
lines,  one  or  the  other 
of  said  pins  striking 
said  stop  according  to 
which  direction  the 
sleeve  and  base  are 
turned  about  the  spin- 
dle, and  as  soon  as  the 
cam-plate  is  arrested 
by  the  stop  6,  the 
further  movement  of 
the  sleeve  and  base 
causes  the  pins  of  the 
dogs  to  ride  over  the 
edge  of  the  cam-plate 
and  throw  the  dogs 
in  or  out,  as  desired. 

The  sleeve  6,  is  provided  with  an  oil  hole  8,  for  the 
introduction  of  oil  between  it  and  the  dead  spindle. 

The  head  or  pivoted  end  of  the  spindle  «  is  shown 
as  flattened  at  a",  o,  and  the  yoke  has  connected  to  it 


148 


by  screws  c  a  spring  s,  the  latter  acting  on  said  flat- 
tened faces  x  or  o  to  keep  the  spindle  in  one  or  the 
other  of  its  two  positions.  The  hollow  sleeve  b,  is 
also  provided  with  shell-holding  springs  h,  which 
engage  the  interior  of  the  small  end  of  the  shell  or 
cone  b\  and  aid  in  keeping  it  steadily  in  place.  (Foster 
Machine  Co.,  Westficld,  Mass.) 


THREAD    GUIDE   FOR   SPOOLING  AND 
WINDING  MACHINES. 

The  object  of  this  invention  is  to  provide  greater 
facility  for  the  adjustment  of  the  guides  side  wise 
along  the  traverse-bar,  to  bring  them  in  exactly  proper 
relation  to  the  bobbins  or  spools  of  the  machine. 

Fig.  i  is  a  perspective  view  of  a  portion  of  the 
traverse-bar  of  a  winding  machine  on  which  there 


is  placed  such  an  improved  thread-guide.  Fig.  2  is 
a  longitudinal  sectional  view  of  a  portion  of  the  bar 
and  of  the  thread-guide;  Fig.  3  is  a  transverse  sec- 
tion in  the  lines  3-3  of  Fig.  2. 

A,  is  the  traverse-bar.  B,  is  the  guide  proper,  of 
glass  or  other  material,  and  C,  the  spring  or  elastic 
holder  for  holding  the  guide  B  to  the  bar. 

The  bar  A  is  represented  as  having  its  upper  sur- 
face formed  with  a  ridge  along  which  there  is  a 
narrow  groove  a,  extending  the  whole  length  of  the 
bar,  and  which  is  just  wide  enough  to  receive  within 
it  the  thickness  of  the  wire  of  which  the  holder  C  is 
composed. 

The  guide  B  has  in  its  back  or  under  side  a  trans- 
versely-angular recess  b,  fitting  to  the  ridged  top  of 
the  bar  in  such  manner  as  to  permit  the  adjustment 
of  the  guide  lengthwise  of  the  bar,  and  the  said  guide 
has  in  its  crown  a  transverse  groove  d  to  receive  the 
thread,  and  a  longitudinal  groove  e,  for  the  recep- 
tion of  the  ends  of  the  holder. 

The  spring  or  elastic  holder  C  for  each  guide  B 
is  formed  of  a  single  piece  of  wire,  bent  at  the 
middle  of  its  length  to  form  a  taper  double  shank 
c,  which  is  driven  tightly  into  a  hole  provided  for 
it  in  the  bar  in  the  bottom  of  the  groove  a,  and 
from  the  so-formed  taper  double  shank,  straight  por- 
tions C,  project  in  opposite  directions  to  be  received 
lengthwise  within  the  groove  a  in  the  bar,  and  the 
terminal  portions  beyond  these  straight  portions  are 
turned  back  toward  each  other  to  form  springs  c3, 


the  ends  of  which  enter  the  groove  e  in  the  crown 
of  the  guide.  These  springs  c2  yield  easily  to  per- 
mit the  placing  of  the  guide  between  them  and  the 
straight  portions  C  of  the  holder,  and  over  the  bar, 
and  when  the  guide  is  so  placed  it  is  held  by  the 
springs  firmly  enough  to  retain  it  in  its  proper  place, 
yet  permitting  the  easy  adjustment  of  the  guide  length- 
wise on  the  bar,  the  holder  being  firmly  seated  in 
the  bar  by  its  straight  portions  being  sunk  into  the 
groove  a. 

There  is  a  separate  and  distinct  holder  complete 
in  itself  for  each  guide.  (Atwood  Machine  Co.,  Ston- 
ington,  Conn.) 


THE  ALTEMUS  FILLING  WINDER. 

This  filling  winder  belongs  to  that  class  of  wind- 
ing machines  in  which  the  nose  of  the  bobbin  is 
contained  in  a  fixed  cup  or  between  rollers  on  the 
frame  of  the  machine,  the  spindle  moving  rearward 
as  the  yarn  is  wound  upon  the  bobbin. 

The  spindle  in  this  winder  is  so  driven  that  a  uni- 
form rotating  movement  of  high  speed  may  be  im- 
parted thereto,  which  movement  can  be  readily  stopped 
when  necessary. 

Another  point  in  favor  of  this  winder  is  to  be  able 
to  effect  the  automatic  stoppage  of  rotation  of  the 
spindle  when  the  latter  is  full,  and  a  still  further 
good  feature  is  to  prevent  overrunning  of  the  reels 
carrying  the  skein  when  the  yarn  is  being  wound 
upon  tiiat  portion  of  the  nose  of  the  bobbin  which 
is  smallest  in  diameter,  the  formation  of  slack  yarn 
being  thus  avoided,  and  the  danger  of  breakage,  due 
to  the  sudden  jerk  when  the  slack  is  taken  up,  being 
effectually  overcome. 

Fig.  1,  is  a  front  view  of  sufficient  of  a  winding- 
frame  to  illustrate  the  improvements.  Fig.  2,  is  a 
transverse  section  of  the  same  on  the  line  1-2,  of 
Fig.  1;  Figs.  3  to  4,  are  detached  views,  on  a  larger 
scale,  of  parts  of  the  machine. 

A,  represents  part  of  the  frame  of  the  machine,  in 
which  are  bearings  for  the  shaft  a,  of  the  longitudinal 
drum  B,  and  for  a  series  of  short  transverse  shafts 
b,  each  of  which  has  a  drum  D,  centrally  grooved 
for  the  reception  of  a  driving-belt  C,  from  the  drum 
B.  Upon  each  of  these  drums  D  rests  a  cylinder  d, 
carried  by  the  winding-spindle  F,  which  is  adapted 
to  bearings  E,  E',  on  the  frame  A,  in  front  and  rear 
of  the  drum  D,  the  front  end  of  the  spindle  carry- 
ing the  bobbin,  and  the  front  bar  of  the  frame  A 
being  provided  with  cups  f,  for  the  reception  of  the 
tapering  end  or  nose  of  the  body  of  yarn  which  is 
being  wound  upon  the  bobbin,  the  spindle  being 
gradually  forced  rearward  as  the  successive  courses 
of  yarn  are  wound  upon  the  bobbin. 

As  a  general  rule,  in  winding  machines,  the  belt 
C  is  applied  directly  to  the  cylinder  d  of  the  wind- 
ing-spindle— a  plan  which  is  objectionable,  because  the 
necessary  tension  of  the  belt  causes  such  a  downward 
pull  upon  the  spindle  that  the  nose  of  the  bobbin 
will  be  pressed  firmly  in  the  cup,  thus  causing  the 
yarn  to  heat  and  glaze  or  burn,  owing  to  the  fric- 
tion. Attempts  have  been  made  by  some  machine- 
builders  to  overcome  this  objection  by  the  use  of  a 
longitudinal  driving  band  or  belt,  upon  which  the 
cylinder  d  rests,  and  by  frictional  contact  with  which 
it  is  driven;  but  this  necessitates  the  use  of  means  for 
confining  the  spindle  vertically  and  keeping  the  cylin- 
der in  frictional  contact  with  the  belt,  the  cylinder 
in  the  absence  of  such  confining  device  having  a  tend- 
ency to  jump  upon  the  belt,  and  thus  interfere  with 
the  application  of  a  proper  uniform  high-speed  move- 
ment of  rotation  to  the  spindle. 

In  the  present  winder  for  each  spindle,  a  single 
driving  drum  D  is  used,  and  upon  which  the  cylin- 


149 


der  d  of  the  spindle  rests,  the  front  end  of  the  spindle 
being  supported  by  the  forming-cup  f,  and  the  spin- 
dle being  unconfined  vertically  so  that  there  is  noth- 
ing but  the  weight  of  the  spindle  and  the  yarn  wound 
thereon  to  cause  friction  in  the  cup,  and  any  desired 
portion  of  this  weight  can  be  thrown  upon  the  drum 
by  adjusting  the  axis  of  the  spindle  nearer  to  the 
vertical  line  drawn  through  the  axis  of  the  drum,  so 
that  the  friction  on  the  yarn  can  be  varied  as  circum- 
stances may  suggest. 

/ 


ings  E',  has  a  sliding  block  c,  to  a  concave  recess  in 
the  upper  face  of  which  the  spindle  F  is  adapted,  the 
under  face  of  each  block  being  beveled  and  having 
a  bearing  upon  the  beveled  base  of  the  deep  slot 
previously  referred  to,  the  length  of  the  bearing-block 
being  considerably  in  excess  of  that  of  the  stud,  so 
that,  when,  on  the  rearward  movement  of  the  spin- 
dle, the  rear  end  of  the  cylinder  d  strikes  the  front 
end  of  the  block  c,  the  latter  will  also  be  moved 
rearward,   and,   owing  to   the  beveled   faces  of  the 


The  rotation  of  the  spindle  can  be  instantly  arrested 
by  lifting  the  front  end  of  the  bobbin,  so  that  the 
cylinder  is  free  from  contact  with  the  drum;  and 
for  the  purpose  of  supporting  the  spindle  in  the  ele- 
vated position  each  of  the  bearings  E,  E',  has  a 
shallow  slot,  in  addition  to  a  deep  slot,  the  latter  of 
which  receives  the  spindle  when  the  cylinder  is  in 
contact  with  the  driving-drum.    Each  of  the  rear  bear- 


block  and  bearing,  will  be  caused  to  rise,  so  as  to 
lift  the  cylinder  d  free  from  contact  with  the  drum 
D  and  stop  the  rotation  of  the  spindle  F. 

G,  is  a  traverse-bar  to  which  a  lateral  reciprocat- 
ing motion  is  imparted  by  the  action  of  a  cam  /», 
upon  pins  i,  on  a  guided  frame  H  secured  to  the 
traverse-bar,  said  cam  h  being  carried  by  a  shaft  K, 
driven  from  the  shaft  a,  by  means  of  the  belt  and 


150 


pulleys  shown  by  dotted  lines  in  Fig.  2.  The  traverse- 
bar  has  bent  wires  one  for  each  bobbin,  the  yarn 
passing  over  the  horizontal  portion  of  this  wire  in 
its  course  from  the  skein  to  the  bobbin,  so  that  there 
is  no  lateral  confinement  of  the  yarn,  and  the  pass- 
age of  the  latter  to  the  bobbin  is  permitted  with 
very  little  friction;  hence  fine  and  tender  yarns  can 
be  wound  without  difficulty. 

When  the  yarn  is  being  wound  upon  that  portion 
of  the  bobbin  which  is  of  large  diameter,  it  is  drawn 
from  the  skein  with  considerable  rapidity,  the  speed 
of  draft  rapidly  decreasing  as  the  yarn  is  directed  to 
that  portion  of  the  bobbin  at  and  near  the  end  of  the 
nose,  where  the  diameter  is  much  less.  If  the  speed 
of  the  skein-reels  n,  is  not  checked,  there  is  a  tend- 
ency of  the  yarn  to  overrun  and  form  slack  yarn 
while  winding  at  and  near  the  end  of  the  nose  of  the 
bobbin,  and  when  this  slack  yarn  is  taken  up  as  the 
yarn  is  directed  toward  that  portion  of  the  bobbin 
which  is  of  larger  diameter,  there  is  a  sudden  jerk 
upon  the  yarn  which  has  a  tendency  to  break  the 
same.  To  overcome  this  trouble  an  automatic  brake 
is  provided  for  the  upper  skein-reel,  consisting  of  a 
plate  P,  loosely  hung  to  an  arm  s,  on  a  rock-shaft  tt 
adapted  to  bearings  in  the  upper  portion  of  the  frame 
of  the  machine,  said  shaft  having  another  arm  «, 
with  a  slot  u\  in  which  is  adjusted  a  pin  or  bolt  V, 
connected  to  the  upper  end  of  the  cord  or  wire  w,  the 
lower  portion  of  which  passes  around  a  pulley  w'  on 
the  frame,  the  lower  end  of  the  cord  being  connected 
to  a  pin  or  on  the  frame  H,  of  the  traverse-bar  G. 

As  said  frame  moves  outward,  therefore,  in  order 
to  carry  the  yarn  toward  the  end  of  the  nose  of  the 
bobbin,  the  cord  10  is  slackened  and  the  plate  P  is 
allowed  to  fall,  so  as  to  rest  upon  the  periphery  of 
the  head  of  the  upper  skein-reel  and  serve  as  a  brake 
therefor,  the  plate  being  lifted  and  the  brake  removed 
as  tension  is  imparted  to  the  cord  w,  on  the  rear- 
ward movement  of  the  frame  H. 

Generally  each  of  the  arms  s  is  constructed  so  as 
to  carry  a  pair  of  brake-plates  P,  for  the  adjacent 
rims  of  adjoining  reels,  although  each  plate  may 
have  an  independent  arm,  if  desired,  and  in  some  cases 
the  arms  s  may  serve  as  brakes,  the  pivoted  plates 
being  dispensed  with. 

The  means  shown  in  Fig.  2  for  operating  the  brakes 
for  the  skein-reels  in  unison  with  the  movement  of 
the  traverse-bar,  may  be  modified  in  various  ways, 
for  instance,  in  Fig.  3  is  shown  a  modification  in 
which  a  bell-crank  lever  P  is  used,  one  arm  of  which 
has  a  rod  P',  acted  upon  by  a  spring  P2,  and  in- 
tended to  be  connected  to  the  arm  «  of  the  rock- 
shaft  t,  while  the  other  arm  of  the  lever  is  acted 
upon  by  a  pin  i,  of  the  traverse-bar  frame  H;  and 
in  Fig.  4  is  shown  a  cord  «",  connected  at  the  lower 
end  to  a  fixed  stud  on  the  frame  A  and  acted  upon 
by  a  pin  projecting  from  the  frame  H,  so  as  to  be 
alternately  tightened  and  slackened  as  said  frame  is 
reciprocated.    (W.  W.  Altemus  cC-  Son.) 


BOWMAN'S    BOBBIN    HOLDER    OR  CLAMP 
FOR  HORIZONTAL  BOBBIN  WINDERS. 

The  principle  objects  of  this  holder  are,  first,  to 
provide  a  simple,  durable,  efficient,  reliable,  and  com- 
paratively inexpensive  device,  for  not  only  prevent- 
ing endwise  play  or  wabbling  movements  of  the 
bobbin  in  respect  to  its  spindle,  whereby  waste  of 
yarn  is  obviated  and  accuracy  and  uniformity  of  wind- 
ing insured,  but  also  permitting  of  the  ready,  con- 
venient, and  rapid  removal  and  application  of  the 
bobbin  to  and  from  the  spindle,  and,  second,  to  so 
construct,  arrange,  and  combine  the  various  parts  of 
the  clamp,  device,  or  holder  as  that  it  may  be  conveni- 
ently applied  to  such  bobbins  and  spindles  as  are  com- 


monly employed  without  requiring  any  addition  to 
or  alterations  or  changes  in  such  standard  spindles 
and  bobbins. 

Of  the  accompanying  illustrations  Fig.  1  is  an  ele- 
vational  view  illustrating  this  bobbin  clamp  or  holder 
in  application  to  a 
spindle  or  bobbin. 
Fig.  2  is  a  perspec- 
tive view  illustrating 
the  bobbin  holder  or 
clamp  shown  in  Fig. 
1,  and  Fig.  3  is  a  sec- 
tional view  showing 
the  parts  detached. 

Letters  of  references 
indicate  thus: — D  and 
d  are  the  respective 
parts  of  a  spindle, 
which  are  adapted  for 
connection  by  means 
of  a  screw  d', 

H  is  a  pulley  or 
wheel  by  means  of 
which  rotary  motion 
is  imparted  to  the 
spindle. 

D  is  a  spindle-head 
provided  with  one  or 
more  projections  or 
lugs  adapted  to  take 
into  corresponding  re-  «^ 
cesses  in  the  base  of 
the  bobbin  E  in  order 
to  impart  rotary  mo- 
tion from  the  spindle 
thereto. 

f  is  an  annular 
groove  cut  around  the 
base  of  all  bobbins  for 
use  in  mounting  them 
in  shuttles. 

A,  is  a  clamp  or 
holder  comprising  a 
base  a,  perforated,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  2,  for 
the  accommodation 

of  the  portion  d'  of  the  spindle.  This  base  a  is 
adapted  to  be  held  between  the  parts  d  and  D  of 
the  spindle  and  is  provided  with  integral  upwardly 
and  inwardly  extending  spring-arms  B,  adapted  to 
engage  the  base  of  the  bobbin  E.  For  this  purpose 
each  of  the  arms  B  is  provided  with  a  shoulder  bt 
formed  thereon  and  adapted  to  take  into  the  groove 
f  of  the  bobbin  E. 

In  use  the  part  D  of  the  spindle  is  detached  from 
the  part  d  thereof.  The  base  a  is  mounted  upon  the 
part  d  of  the  spindle  F  by  passing  the  threaded  portion 
d'  through  the  aperture  of  the  base  a,  whereupon  the 
part  D  is  secured  to  place,  as  shown  in  Fig.  1.  Un- 
der these  circumstances  the  clamp  or  holder  A  is 
firmly  attached  to  the  spindle  in  such  manner  that 
the  shoulders  b  of  its  arms  B  are  adapted  to  take 
into  the  groove  f  of  the  bobbin  E. 

The  mode  of  operation  of  the  holder  is  as  follows: 
Let  it  be  assumed  that  the  spindle  d  is  rotated  around 
a  horizontal  axis  through  the  intervention  of  the  pulley 
or  wheel  H.  The  empty  bobbin  E  may  be  readily 
applied  to  the  portion  F  of  the  spindle  by  the  simple 
operation  of  pushing  the  bobbin  onto  the  latter  un- 
til the  lugs  on  the  part  D  enter  their  corresponding 
recesses  and  until  the  shoulders  &  take  into  the  annular 
recess  f.  Under  these  circumstances  the  arms  B  hold 
the  bobbin  E  firmly  up  against  the  face  of  the  spin- 
dle-head D,  so  that  the  bobbin  E  is  not  only  held 
against  movement  in  the  direction  of  its  length,  but 


151 


is  also  prevented  from  wabbling  at  its  free  end  in 
respect  to  its  axis  of  rotation. 

The  absence  of  endwise  play  and  freedom  from 
wabbling  movements  is  important  for  many  reasons, 
among  which  the  following  may  be  mentioned:  If 
the  bobbin  were  afforded  endwise  play,  it  would  be- 
come detached  from  the  projections  upon  the  spin- 
dle-head D  and  consequently  would  cease  to  rotate. 
In  fact  it  has  hitherto  been  customary  in  starting  the 
bobbin  to  manually  wind  the  thread  or  yarn  not  only 
onto  the  bobbin  but  also  downward  onto  the  spin- 
dle-head D  in  order  to  tie  the  bobbin  to  the  spin- 
dle-head and  thus  prevent  endwise  play  of  the  former. 
However,  this  resulted  in  the  waste  of  considerable 
yarn  or  thread.  Moreover,  under  such  circumstances 
the  free  end  of  the  bobbin  wabbles  slightly  in  re- 
spect to  its  axis  of  rotation  because  the  thread  did 
not  tie  the  bobbin  firmly  to  the  spindle-head  D,  and 
this  wabbling  motion  of  the  bobbin  resulted  in  un- 
even or,  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  "lumpy"  winding, 
which  in  the  subsequent  use  of  the  thread  or  yarn, 
for  example,  in  a  shuttle,  resulted  in  breakage  and 
waste.    (George  T.  Bon-man,  PMla.) 


MACHINE   FOR   WINDING  YARN  FROM 
CHAINS  ONTO  FILLING  BOBBINS. 

The  object  of  this  machine  is  to  dispense  with  the 
spooling  of  the  yarn. 

In  winding  yarn  after  the  same  has  been  dyed 
or  bleached  directly  from  the  chain  onto  the  fill- 
ing-bobbin, the  individual  threads  of  the  chain  have 
to  be  separated  and  connected  each  to  its  respective 
spindle.  The  machines  for  winding  the  yarn  on  the 
cop  or  bobbin  have  usually  eight  banks  of  spindles 
and  contain  as  many  spindles  as  there  are  threads 
in  the  chain. 

As  the  cops  or  bobbins  must  be  wound  in  conical 
layers  to  the  very  end  of  the  same,  and  must  form  a 
well-wound  nose  at  the  end  to  make  the  cops  or 
bobbins  perfect  and  prevent  stripping  when  used  in 
the  shuttle  in  weaving,  it  is  essential  to  the  practical 
and  successful  use  of  these  machines  that  the  ten- 
sion on  all  the  threads  of  the  chain  shall  be  uniform, 
and  all  soft  places  in  the  cops  or  bobbins  avoided. 

The  yarn,  during  the  process  of  doubling,  dyeing 
and  splitting  becomes  more  or  less  entangled,  and 
broken  ends  frequently  occur  in  the  chain.  To  suc- 
cessfully wind  this  yarn  directly  on  filling-bobbins, 
the  operation  of  separating  the  yarn  strands  of  the 
chain  requires  to  be  under  the  constant  control  of 
the  operative,  so  as  to  prevent  imperfect  yarn  pass- 
ing through  the  machine.  In  these  machines  the  suc- 
cessful operation  of  all  the  spindles  receiving  the 
yarn  from  one  common  source  (the  chain)  requires 
mechanical  refinements  and  automatic  self-adjustments 
that  in  the  ordinary  spinning,  twisting,  or  wind?"' 
machines,  in  which  each  spindle  is  supplied  from 
an  independent  source,  are  either  unnecessary  or 
not  of  such  importance  as  would  make  the 
machine  useless  without  them.  In  machines  for 
winding  the  thread  directly  from  the  chain  on 
the  cop  or  bobbin,  the  great  saving  in  time,  labor 
and  mill-room,  has  been  made  possible  by 
close  attention  to  the  details  of  the  machines, 
by  which  the  uniform  speed  of  the  spindles, 
the  accurate  adjustment  of  the  tension  of  the 
yarn,  the  accessibility  of  the  spindles  in  doffing, 
the  starting  of  the  machine  to  wind  on  the  new  bob- 
bins after  doffing,  the  uniform  and  regular  laying  of 
the  yarn  on  the  cops  or  bobbins,  the  protection  of  the 
yarn  from  floss  and  fibre,  and  other  advantages  are 
secured. 


The  accompanying  illustration  is  a  view  of  the  end 
of  the  improved  winding  machine  and  the  chain- 
tension  machine  which  delivers  the  yarn  under  the 
required  tension  to  the  winder.  This  illustration  will 
readily  explain  the  machine  to  the  reader. 

The  machine  is  provided  with  eight  lines  of  spin- 
dles secured  to  bolster-rails  extending  from  one  end 
to  the  opposite  end  of  the  machine  and  placed  so 
that  the  second  bolster-rail  is  behind  the  first  and 
above  the  same,  and  all  the  other  bolster-rails 
(whether  four,  six,  eight  or  more  are  used),  are  each 
placed  in  the  rear  of  the  rail  in  front  and  above  the 
same,  so  that  the  spindles  form  an  inclined  bank  or 
slope  and  can  each  be  readily  reached  by  the  attend- 
ant for  the  purpose  of  doffing  or  piecing. 

The  large  number  of  spindles  require  to  be  so 
closely  grouped  together,  since  the  driving-cylinders 
can  be  only  of  limited  diameter,  and  therefore  require 
a  central  support. 

On  the  top  of  the  machine  is  suspended  the  reed  0, 
by  the  rods  6,  connected  with  the  upper  end  of  the 
posts  c,  secured  one  to  each  end  of  the  machine,  or, 
when  convenient,  from  the  ceiling  of  the  room  in 
which  the  machine  is  located.  This  movable  sus- 
pended reed  a,  is  specially  made  for  this  work  and  is 
equally  spaced  over  its  entire  length  to  conform  to 
the  space  of  the  spindles. 

It  can  be  moved  backward  and  forward  by  the 
operative  to  facilitate  the  separation  of  the  threads  of 
the  chain,  and  when  the  strain  on  the  reed  is  exces- 
sive, the  operative  stops  the  machine.  When  the 
operative  releases  the  reed,  it  swings  toward  the  top 
rolls  until  it  rests  on  the  table  d.  A  bench  is  usually 
placed  in  front  of  the  foot-treadle  c,  on  which  the 
operative  stands,  so  that  when  the  operative,  whose 
hand  is  on  the  swinging-reed,  feels  that  excessive 
strain  is  exerted  on  the  reed,  he  can  stop  the  machine 
with  his  foot. 

When  the  threads  require  to  be  bunched  to  facil- 
itate doffing,  the  reed  a  is  moved  back  to  facilitate 
the  bunching  of  the  threads.  The  point  at  which 
the  rods  6,  are  pivotally  connected  with  the  posts 
c,  is  in  practice  much  higher  above  the  machine, 
and  the  reed  swings  through  an  arc  of  greater  radius 
than  that  shown  in  the  drawings.  The  rods  0,  are 
connected  to  eyes  on  the  upper  bar  of  the  reed,  so 
that  the  reed  may  swing  independently  of  the  rods. 

On  the  projecting  end  of  the  shaft  of  the  lowest 
driving-cylinder,  the  pinion  f,  provided  with  a  groove, 
is  connected  with  the  shaft  which  has  a  spline  and 
turns  with  the  same  while  in  the  normal  geared 
position,  and  is  held  in  that  position  by  the  stop-link 


b 


k 


g,  which  rests  on  the  shaft  between  the  nut  on  the 
end  of  the  shaft  and  the  pinion  f,  so  that  when  the 
stop-link  is  removed,  the  pinion  f,  can  be  drawn 
outward,  and  the  pinion  disconnected  from  the  gear 
I,  thereby  disconnecting  the  spindle-driving  mechan- 
ism from  the  cop-building  mechanism  and  permitting 


152 


the  winding  back  and  independent  adjustment  of  the 
cop-building  mechanism. 

The  chain  h,  connects  the  sprocket-wheel  on  the 
shaft  of  the  gear  with  the  sprocket-wheel  i,  from 
which  motion  is  imparted  by  means  of  gearing  to  the 
cop-forming  mechanism  by  which  reciprocating  guide- 
wires  are  operated. 

To  secure  the  most  economic  results,  the  machines 
require  to  be  of  such  lengths  that  the  greatest  num- 
ber of  spindles  that  can  be  attended  to  by  one  at- 
tendant are  massed  in  one  machine.  To  lay  the  yarn 
on  all  the  quills,  or  bobbins,  uniformly,  the  guide- 
wires  must  all  move  together. 

Practical  experience  has  demonstrated  that  the  reed 
a,  requires  to  be  placed  near  the  top  rolls  so  as  to 
accurately  guide  the  yarn  onto  the  delivery-roll  A-, 
and  from  the  same  to  the  spindles;  but  in  bunching 
the  yarn  in  doffing,  this  close  proximity  of  the  reed 
to  the  top  rolls  interferes  with  the  bunching.  There- 
fore the  reed  a  is  suspended  by  the  rods  b,  at  each 
end  from  the  vertical  posts  c,  extending  at  each  end 
above  the  end  frames  of  the  machine,  so  that  the 
operator  on  preparing  for  doffing,  before  he  stops 
the  machine,  simply  pushes  the  reed  a  backward- 

In  a  machine  for  winding  yarn  from  the  chain 
onto  filling-bobbins,  such  a  very  large  number  of 
threads  have  to  be  separated  from  each  other  and 
guided  to  the  bobbins  that  it  becomes  difficult  for 
one  operative  to  overlook  the  separation  of  the  threads 
and  the  winding  on  the  bobbins.  The  vibrating 
threads  passing  through  the  swinging  reed  cannot 
be  readily  seen  without  a  suitable  background.  The 
table  d  forms  such  a  background  and  is  used  for  this 
purpose,  as  also  to  prevent  the  loose  ends  separated 
by  the  reed  from  falling  on  the  threads  passing  from 
the  top  rolls  to  the  bobbins.  In  these  machines, 
where  as  many  as  three  hundred  and  seventy-six  (376) 
spindles  are  used,  it  is  impracticable  to  connect  all 
the  ends  after  doffing  with  the  new  bobbins.  Some 
arrangement  is  therefore  required  by  which  all  the 
ends  are  automatically  connected  with  the  new  bob- 
•  bins.  This  arrangement  consists  in  a  bobbin-holder 
and  the  arrangement  for  disconnecting  the  spindle- 
driving  mechanism  from  the  cop-building  mechanism. 

When  the  new  or  empty  bobbins  have  been  placed 
on  the  spindles,  the  driving  mechanism  is  started  to 
drive  the  spindles,  the  frame  supporting  the  guide-eye 
is  raised,  and  the  threads  connected  with  the  bob- 
bin-holders are  guided  onto  the  bottom  of  the  cone 
of  the  bobbins,  the  machine  is  stopped,  the  gear  f 
is  pushed  in  to  connect  it  with  the  gear  0,  so  as  to 
connect  the  cop-forming  mechanism  with  the  spindle- 
driving  mechanism;  the  machine  is  started,  and  a 
new  set  of  bobbins  is  wound.  By  this  arrangement 
the  operation  of  the  machine  is  practically  continu- 
ous, the  saving  effected  is  large,  as  by  reason  of  the 
improvements  incorporated  in  the  machine  the  ope- 
rative has  a  complete  oversight  and  control  of  the 
large  number  of  threads  as  the  yarn  is  delivered  to 
the  top  rolls,  as  well  as  over  the  whole  bank  of 
spindles,  being  able  to  stop  and  start  the  machine 
while  his  eyes  are  on  the  yarn  coming  from  the  chain 
as  well  as  on  the  yarn  being  wound  on  the  spindles. 
(H.  L.  Pratt,  Leioiston,  Me.,  and  G.  T.  Upton,  of  Lowell, 
Mass.) 


THE  UNIVERSAL  METHOD   OF  WINDING. 

In  the  ordinary  winding  of  balls  or  cops  of  yarn 
or  thread,  it  is  common  to  take  a  spool,  spindle,  or 
hollow  tube  and  wind  the  thread  in  spirals  upon  the 
tube,  without  an  attempt  to  place  the  successive  coils 
of  thread  in  contact  with  each  other  upon  the  tube 
at  the  first  winding  nor  thereafter,  nor  to  arrange 
them  with  any  precision  so  as  to  preserve  their  paral- 


lelism throughout  the  winding,  and  when  the  wind- 
ing, as  is  usually  the  case,  is  effected  mechanically 
the  thread  is  carried  in  coils  along  the  length  of  the 
tube  during  its  revolution  in  such  a  manner  that 
the  number  of  coils  to  each  revolution  decreases  as 
the  diameter  of  the  cop  increases.  As  a  consequence, 
the  winding  is  more  or  less  irregular,  the  threads  are 
not  parallel  in  the  successive  coils,  the  cop  is  open  or 
loose  and  lacks  firmness  and  solidity,  the  thread  is  not 
evenly  laid,  etc.,  etc. 

The  accompanying  illustrations  are  given  to  show 
the  "Universal-winding"  process.  Fig.  1  is  a  diagram- 
matical view  illustrating  this  winding;  Fig.  2  is  a  per- 
spective view  of  a  complete  cop. 

Numeral  1  in  Fig.  1  indicates  a  tube,  spindle  or  cyl 
inder  upon  which  the  thread  x  is  to  be  wound  thereon 
with  any  suitable  number  of  turns  or  coils  to  the  length 
of  the  tube  (two  turns  of  the  thread  to  the  length  of 
tube  are  shown  wound  on  in  illustration). 

In  winding  mechanically,  the  thread  is  applied  to  the 
tube  by  means  of  a  guide  having  such  a  reciprocating 
lateral  motion  in  respect  to  the  tube  that  the  same 
number  of  coils  or  turns  are  applied  upon  the  tube  and 
upon  each  layer  of  the  cop,  whatever  may  be  the  diam- 
eter that  the  latter  attains.  Instead,  however,  of  re- 
versing the  traverse  or  motion  of  the  guide  at  each 
lay  as  soon  as  the  cop  completes  its  revolution,  in  the 
new  process  either  the  tube  or  the  guide  is  so  operated 
that  the  thread  of  each  coil  as  it  is  laid  at  the  extreme 
end  of  the  cop  is  carried  across  and  to  the  outside  of 


the  preceding  thread  upon  that  end  and  laid  against 
or  parallel  to  the  outer  or  inner  side  of  that  thread, 
and  is  then  reversed  in  its  winding  and  carried  toward 
the  opposite  end.  Thus,  as  shown  in  Fig.  1,  2  rep- 
resents the  first  coil  of  thread  x  applied  to  the  tube  1, 
and  4  represents  the  succeeding  coil.  Assuming  the 
cylinder  to  be  turning  in  the  direction  of  the  arrow, 
the  thread  x  before  it  reaches  the  turn  V  will  be  laid 
upon  the  inside  of  one  of  the  coils  4,  which  holds  down 
the  loose  end  5,  and  will  then  cross  the  said  thread  at 
a  point  back  of  the  bend  V  of  the  latter,  and  will  then  be 
bent  back  at  the  point  V' ,  and  upon  the  further 
revolution  of  the  tube  will  be  laid  on  the  out- 
side of  the  thread  of  the  coil  4,  and  will  fol- 
low the  said  thread  throughout  its  convolutions 
to  the  opposite  end  of  the  tube,  and  will  finally 
be  laid  on  the  inside  of  the  said  thread  4  at  the 
left-hand,  as  indicated  by  the  dotted  lines  to,  and  will 
then  cross  the  coil  to  the  outside  of  the  same,  and  will 
be  bent  back  at  2/3  and  laid  upon  the  outside  of  the 
thread  6.  This  is  the  course  of  each  coil  of  thread  in 
each  layer  of  the  cop,  so  that  each  coil  in  each  layer 
lies  throughout  its  length  parallel  to  coils  previously 
laid  upon  the  spool.  While  it  is  not  absolutely  neces- 
sary, it  is  preferable  in  many  cases  that  each  coil  of 
thread  shall  be  laid  in  actual  contact  with  that  of  one 
of  the  preceding  coils,  so  as  to  bring  the  windings  into 
as  close  proximity  as  possible  and  secure  a  ball  of 


153 


minimum  size  and  maximum  density.  As  a  conse- 
quence of  this  construction  the  threads  are  laid  at 
each  edge  of  the  cop,  each  thread  reversing  its  direc- 
tion at  a  point  V,  V',  !)",  V3,  etc..  in  the  plane  of  the  side 
or  end  of  the  cop,  and  the  succeeding  coil  of  thread  is 
carried  over  the  preceding  coil  to  such  an  extent  as  is 
necessary  to  bring  such  thread  to  the  outside  of  the 


preceding  thread  and  to  the  extreme  end  of  the  cop,  and 
then  the  winding  of  the  succeeding  thread  is  reversed  at 
its  point  V,  V' ,  V",  V3,  etc.,  beyond  the  preceding  point 
V,  V',  V~,  V3,  etc.,  and  so  on.  The  threads,  therefore, 
are  laid  uniformly,  evenly,  and  regularly  at  each  end 
or  edge  of  the  cop  and  in  each  of  the  successive  layers 
or  windings  upon  the  cop,  and  as  each  coil  starts  at  the 
edge  of  the  cop  at  a  point  beyond  that  where  the  un- 
derlying thread  started  from  the  said  edge  it  is  laid 
alongside  of  and,  if  desired,  in  close  contact  with  the 
preceding  coil  throughout  the  whole  extent  of  the 
surface  of  the  cop. 

At  the  points  where  the  different  windings  of  suc- 
cessive layers  cross  each  other  the  thread  last  laid  is 
of  course  carried  above  that  previously  laid,  so  that 
at  each  point  of  intersection  they  overlap  first  in  one 
direction  and  then  in  the  other,  as  will  be  understood 
from  Fig.  2. 

It  will  be  seen  that  in  order  to  effect  the  result  thus 
described  it  is  necessary  either  to  continue  each  revo- 
lution of  the  cop  a  little  farther  than  the  preceding 
revolution  before  reversing  the  direction  of  the  guide 
or  to  delay  the  beginning  of  the  reverse  motion  of  the 
guide. 

The  advantages  of  a  ball  or  cop  wound  by  the  "Uni- 
versal Method  of  Winding"  are  as  follows: — In  the 
first  place,  the  same  amount  of  thread  may  be  con- 
densed into  a  much  smaller  space,  thus  securing  econ- 
omy in  packing,  storage,  and  transportation.  Again, 
in  consequence  of  the  regularity  of  winding  the  thread 
may  be  unwound  from  the  cop  without  danger  of  en- 
tanglement, and  loss  is  thus  prevented.  In  consequence 
of  the  density  and  firmness  of  the  cop  it  will  maintain 
its  shape  and  integrity  until  the  thread  is  completely 
wound  off,  and  in  shipping  the  cops  do  not  get  crushed 
out  of  shape  and  the  coils  of  thread  tangled  together. 
In  consequence  of  the  regularity  and  solidity  of  the 
cop,  it  is  practicable  to  apply  the  tension  directly  to 
the  cop  itself.  In  consequence  of  the  close  winding, 
the  thread  retains  the  moisture  absorbed  during  the 
process  of  manufacture,  which  is  a  matter  of  much 
importance. 

In  the  case  of  linen  thread  and  fine  cotton,  the  open 
winding  causes  each  thread  to  have  isolated  supports 
upon  the  coils  beneath,  and  any  pressure  tends  to  force 


these  supports  into  the  threads  above  and  to  indent 
or  abrade  the  same  to  a  very  detrimental  extent.  The 
improved  winding  in  which  the  coils  are  all  brought 
close  together  affords  such  a  multiplicity  and  close 
juxtaposition  of  supports  that  no  such  abrading  or 
cutting  can  result,  and  the  same  pressure  that  would 
mar  the  thread  of  an  ordinarily-wound  cop  has  no 
detrimental  effect  upon  one  wound  in  the  improved 
way.  As  distinguished  from  ordinary  cops  each  por- 
tion of  the  thread  extends  from  one  end  to  the  other 
of  the  improved  cop  in  each  layer  and  has  the  same 
number  of  turns  in  each  layer  throughout  the  entire 
cop.  No  slipping  of  the  threads  at  the  ends  of  cop 
can  occur  by  this  method  of  winding,  inasmuch  as 
each  thread  the  moment  it  reaches  the  edge  or  end  of 
the  cop  takes  another  direction  across  the  face  of  the 
cop  to  throw  it  back,  so  that  it  cannot  under  any 
circumstances  fall  down  or  under  and  across  the  end 
of  the  cop  and  become  entangled  or  afford  any  addi- 
tional friction. 

The  neat  appearance  of  the  new  cop  is  also  a  matter 
which  is  commercially  of  great  importance.  (Universal 
Windwtg  Co.,  Boston,  Mass.) 


FURBUSH'S  DRESSING,  WARPING  OR 
REELING  MACHINE. 

Hitherto,  in  the  reeling  of  the  yarn  or  thread  to  con- 
stitute the  warp  for  the  weaving  operation,  it  has  been 
customary  to  conduct  or  lead  the  ends  of  the  yarn  or 
thread  from  spools  or  bobbins  mounted  in  a  creel  or 
frame,  through  a  supported  heck  or  lease  and  sectional 
reed  to  a  reel  to  cause  the  thread  or  yarn  to  be  wound 
in  sections  onto  the  cross-arms  thereof,  within  range 
of  detachable  pins  mounted  in  and  projecting  from  the 
arms  until  the  spools  or  bobbins  of  the  creel  or  frame 
were  depleted  and  the  cross-arms  of  the  reel  were  pro- 
vided with  their  full  quota  of  said  material,  when  it 
was  wound  off  of  the  reel  onto  a  warp  beam. 

The  use  of  detachable  pins  in  connection  with  the 
cross-arms  of  the  reel  has  long  been  regarded  as  ex- 
ceedingly objectionable,  because  in  the  winding  of  the 
yarn  onto  the  reel  at  a  high  rate  of  speed  there  is  a 
constant  tendency  for  the  material  to  become  entangled 
with  the  pins,  and  thus  for  the  thread  or  yarn  to  break 


short  or  the  pins  to  kink  the  same  in  such  manner  as 
to  deteriorate  the  strength  thereof  in  the  one  instance, 
or  to  necessitate  in  the  other  the  stopping  of  the  reel 
to  take  up  and  unite  broken  ends. 

Another  trouble  is  the  intermeshing  and  hugging  of 
the  individual  threads  to  the  neighboring  threads 
thereof,  and  the  lack  of  regularity  in  tension,  so  that 
there  is  abnormal  stretching  of  some  of  the  threads 


154 


and  slackening  or  sagging  of  others,  whereby  in  un- 
winding from  the  reel  onto  a  beam,  due  to  such  lack 
of  tension  and  the  use  of  detachable  pins,  it  has  been 
found  in  extended  practice  that  the  material  is  very 
apt  to  be  so  deteriorated  as  to  give  a  warp  unfit  for 
subsequent  use. 

The  principal  objects  of  the  Furbush  method  of 
dressing,  warping  or  reeling,  are: — First,  To  overcome 
the  previously  mentioned  objections  and  disadvantage- 
ous features  in  the  winding  or  reeling  of  yarn.  Second, 
To  provide  a  warping-reel  with  attachments  or  devices 
adjustably  connected  with  the  cross-arms  thereof,  and 
so  arranged  as  that  the  thread  or  yarn  in  the  reeling 
operation  is  built  up  in  regular  lays  onto  one  another 
into  substantially  truncated  cones  and  in  such  manner 
as  that  in  the  formation  of  one  of  such  figures  or  forms, 
it  will  become  a  form  or  guide  for  the  building  or  lay- 
ing up  in  regular  sequence  of  a  series  of  cone-shaped 
deposits  of  the  yarn  or  fibrous  material  onto  the  re- 
spective cross-arms  of  the  reel  in  the  rotation  thereof 
until  the  spools  or  bobbins  of  the  creel  or  frame  have 
been  depleted,  or  until  the  cross-arms  of  the  reel  have 
been  completely  covered  and  in  such  manner  as  to 
present  a  smooth  cylindrical  surface,  when  the  same 'is 
transferred,  in  such  state  or  condition,  to  a  beam  to 
constitute  warp  for  use  in  the  weaving  operation. 
Third,  To  provide  a  warping-reel  adapted  to  cone  the 
yarn  or  thread  thereon,  and  provided  with  mechanism 
adapted  to  move  automatically,  step-by-step,  in  one 
direction  in  the  laying  or  building  up  of  the  thread 
or  yarn  into  cone-shaped  figures  or  forms  thereon. 
Fourth,  To  provide  a  warping-reel  adapted  to  improve 
the  winding  of  the  yarn  or  thread,  and  with  the  ab- 
sence of  broken  threads,  or  of  having  to  stop  the  reel 
to  take  up  and  unite  broken  ends  in  the  unwinding  of 
the  same  onto  a  beam  to  become  warp;  and  Fifth,  To 
provide  a  reel  or  frame  and  an  adjustably  supported 
heck  or  lease  and  sectional  reed  for  employment  in 
connection  with  a  rotatable  coning-reel  and  mechan- 
ism for  detachably  supporting  and  rotating  a  beam  for 
the  reception  of  the  thread  or  yarn  from  the  reel  in  a 
reverse  step-by-step  movement  of  the  same,  and  the 
said  mechanism  so  constructed  and  arranged  as  that 
the  warping  and  beaming  operations  are  appreciably 
improved  and  a  superior  quality  of  warp  for  weaving 
is  obtained,  due  to  the  uniformity  of  tension  main- 
tained throughout  the  winding  or  reeling  of  the  yarn 
or  fibrous  material. 

The  improvement,  stated  in  general  terms,  consists 
of  a  warping-reel  provided  with  attachments  adjustably 
connected  therewith  and  so  arranged,  as  that  the  yarn 
is  formed  in  regular  and  united  sequence  thereby  into 
cones  presenting  a  smooth  cylindrical  surface  for  trans- 
fer therefrom  to  a  beam  to  become  warp. 

To  more  clearly  explain  the  invention,  the  accom- 
panying two  illustrations  are  given,  and  of  which  Fig.  I 
is  a  front  elevational  view  of  the  reel  detached  from  its 
standards  with  the  adjustable  coning  attachments  of 
the  invention  in  application  thereto  and  showing  also 
the  mode  of  building  or  laying  up  the  yarn  or  fibrous 
material  onto  the  reel  according  to  the  principle 
involved  in  and  by  the  process.  Fig.  2  is  a  side  eleva- 
tional view  partly  in  section  of  one  of  the  cross-arms 
of  the  warping-reel  and  also  a  longitudinal  section 
through  the  yarn  or  threads  wound  thereon,  serving  to 
illustrate  the  general  appearance  of  the  respective 
groups  and  overlapping  layers  of  thread  or  yarn  com- 
prising the  series  of  united  conical  figures  or  forms 
thereof  constituted  by  the  winding  in  the  rotation  of 
the  reel. 

The  beaming  of  the  yarn,  it  will  be  understood,  is 
carried  out  with  due  regard  to  required  tension  of 
the  reel  with  respect  to  the  beam  in  order  to  insure 
uniformity  in  the  transfer  of  the  fibrous  material  from 
the  reel,  in  entirety  onto  the  warp-beam.    It  may, 


however,  be  here  remarked  that  in  the  beaming  opera- 
tion the  rotation  of  the  reel  is  reversed  and  also  that 
the  same  is  allowed  to  travel  in  an  opposite  direction 
to  that  required  for  the  reeling  of  the  material  until 
the  point  at  which  the  reeling  of  one  section  of  yarn 
onto  the  same  is  reached,  when  the  entire  contents  of 
the  reel  will  have  been  wound  off  onto  the  warp-beam. 
(M.  A.  Furbush  &  Son  Machine  Co.,  Phila.) 


ATHERTON'S  WARP  BEAMING  MACHINE. 

The  object  of  the  invention  is  an  improvement  on 
the  beaming  frame  shaft  for  holding  a  number  of  nar- 
row-ware beams  to  their  place. 

Fig.  1  is  an  end  elevation  of  a  winder  and  of  a  por- 
tion of  a  beaming  attachment  provided  with  the  im- 
provements; Fig.  2,  an  enlarged  top  plan  view  of  the 
beaming  attachment  proper. 

Tetters  of  reference  indicate  thus: — a,  represents  the 
frame  and  b  the  winder,  from  which  the  warp  is  to 
be  wound  upon  a  series  of  beams  i,  arranged  on  shaft 
d.  The  shaft  d  is  arranged  with  one  end  in  the  sta- 
tionary bracket  c,  and  is  provided  with  a  gear-wheel  e, 
meshing  with  pinion  f,  secured  on  shaft  9,  which  latter 
receives  its  motion  through  the  driving  pulley  K  The 
outer  end  of  the  shaft  d  is  screw-threaded,  adapted  to 
be  engaged  by  a  tightening  nut  d2,  and  is  also  provided 
with  a  socket. 

The  frame  a  is  traversed  by  a  slot  a',  and  a  guide 
groove  or  recess  a2,  adapted  to  be  engaged,  respect- 


ively, by  the  tightening  and  adjusting  bolt  and  nut 
and  the  projecting  portion  of  the  bracket  c".  The 
upper  portion  of  said  bracket  forms  the  guide  and 
bearing  for  the  forked  arm  c12,  adapted  to  support  the 
outer  end  of  the  shaft  d.  Arm  c12  is  provided  with  a 
stop-pin  on  its  outer  end,  and  is  securely  fastened  in 
said  bracket  c11  by  means  of  a  set-screw  c13.  A  spring, 
c14,  is  secured  on  one  side  of  said  arm  and  is  provided 
at  its  free  end  with  a  centering-block,  adapted  to 
engage  the  socket  of  the  shaft  d.  To  allow  the 
said  arm  c12,  and  its  spring  c",  to  be  withdrawn  out 
of  the  path  of  the  shaft  d  and  beams  i,  respectively, 
the  bracket  c11  is  provided  with  a  longitudinal  slot. 

On  the  shaft  d  the  beams  are  arranged  alternately 
with  a  series  of  sleeves  i1,  the  end  one  of  which  is 
adapted  to  be  engaged  by  the  tightening  nut  d2y 
whereby  all  the  beams  are  securely  fastened  to  said 
shaft  and  are  bound  to  rotate  with  the  same. 

In  operation  when  the  warp  has  been  wound  on  the 
beams  and  the  latter  are  to  be  replaced  by  empty  ones, 
the  arms  c12  and  c2  are  withdrawn  after  the  tightening- 
nuts  c'3  and  c3  have  been  loosened. 

The  tightening-nut  dr  is  unscrewed  from  the  shaft 
d,  and  the  sleeves  i1  and  the  beams  i,  are  easily  slid 


155 


off  the  said  shaft.  Others  are  now  put  in  their  re- 
spective places  and  the  arms  c12  and  c2  returned  to 
their  normal  positions,  when  the  machine  is  again 
ready  for  operation. 

From  the  foregoing  it  can  be  seen  that  the  beams 
i  can  be  readily  put  on  and  taken  off  the  shaft,  whereby 
a  good  deal  of  time  and  labor  are  saved.  By  inserting 
sleeves  of  different  lengths  various-sized  beams  can  be 
used  on  the  same  shaft  without  changing  the  construc- 
tion and  relative  arrangements  of  the  various  parts 
of  the  machine.  (A.  Scheid,  of  Harrison,  and  Robert 
Atherton,  of  Paierson,  N.  J.) 


MACHINE  FOR  DRESSING  OR  BEAMING 
COTTON  WARPS. 

This  machine  has  for  its  object  the  dividing  or  dress- 
ing of  warp-threads  prior  to  weaving  by  means  of  hed- 
dles  in  place  of  using  brushes  and  other  rubbing  in- 
struments as  heretofore  used  for  the  purpose  of  divid- 


ing a  reciprocating  motion  to  the  healds  H,  and  the 
warp-threads  W,  by  which  motion  the  said  warp- 
threads  are  automatically  and  repeatedly  divided  or 
separated  as  they  are  traveling  between  roller  G,  and 
fixed  reed  R,  through  which  they  pass  to  the  rotating 
beam  A,  the  warp-threads  being  by  preference  kept 
divided  close  to  the  fixed  reed  R,  by  a  rod  S,  passing 
between  the  threads  for  the  entire  width  of  the  warp. 

The  projection  on  the  bar  V,  engaging  in  one  of 
the  recesses  in  quadrant  U,  may  be  changed  from  one 
recess  U'  or  U2  to  the  other  by  pressing  the  lever  X 
hinged  at  X'  toward  the  arm  of  said  quadrant.  An 
extension  of  the  lever  X2  being  engaged  between  pro- 
jections on  the  said  bar,  causes  the  projecting  piece 
on  the  bar  to  be  raised  clear  of  the  notch.  Then  the 
said  shaft  may  be  turned  by  the  said  quadrant  until  the 
projection  on  the  bar  engages  with  the  recess. 

By  changing  the  position  of  the  projection  on  the 
bar  V  in  the  quadrant  U,  the  motion  transmitted  to  the 
healds  is  reversed,  that  is  to  say,  those  warp-threads 
that  formed  the  top  portion  of  the  "shed,"  now  form 
the  bottom,  and  the  bottom  threads,  the  top  of  the 
shed,  the  reciprocating  warp-threads  meeting  in  the 
centre  and  not  crossing  each  other. 

The  rising  and  falling  motion  imparted  to  the  healds 
H,  is  continuous  so  long  as  the  beam  A,  rotates,  there- 
by dividing  or  separating  the  warp-threads  from  each 
other  without  the  intervention  of  a  brush  or  other 
rubbing  instrument,  as  now  in  common  use,  and 
which,  in  addition  to  separating  the  threads,  more  or 
less  removes  the  size  therefrom,  thereby  reducing  the 
strength  and  weaving  qualities  of  the  warp.  (J.  and 
R.  Lister,  Keigley,  England.) 


ing  the  warp-threads  and  thus  by  the  use  of  this 
machine  retain  the  major  portion  of  the  size  deposited 
on  the  warp-threads,  thereby  preserving  the  strength 
and  weaving  qualities  of  the  warp. 

In  describing  this  machine  in  detail,  reference  is 
made  to  the  accompanying  drawings,  in  which  Fig.  I 
represents  a  side  view  of  which  a  portion  of  the  center 
upright  is  cut  away  to  more  clearly  show  the  action  of 
the  apparatus.    Fig.  2  is  a  detail  illustration. 

The  beam  A,  upon  which  the  dressed  warp-threads 
W  are  wound,  is  mounted  between  the  uprights  B, 
and  driven  from  the  shaft  C,  through  pulleys  (not 
shown),  and  spur  gearing  E.  The  ball  W  of  warp- 
threads  is  formed  and  sized  in  the  usual  manner  and 
the  warp-threads  W,  conducted  over  the  bars  F,  F',  and 
roller  G,  and  pass  through  mails  or  loops  M,  in  the 
healds  H,  reciprocated  in  a  continuous  and  suitable 
manner,  so  that  a  "shed"  is  repeatedly  formed  by  one 
portion  of  the  warp-threads  reciprocating  upward  and 
the  other  portion  downward,  by  which  operation  the 
said  threads  are  divided  or  separated.  The  reciproca- 
tion of  the  healds  H,  and  the  warp-threads  W,  is  ac- 
complished by  securing  to  the  rotating  shaft  C,  a  crank 
J,  and  coupling  same  by  a  rod  K,  to  an  arm  L,  mount- 
ed loosely  upon  a  shaft  N,  upon  which  are  secured  pul- 
leys O.  To  the  circumference  of  each  is  respectively 
attached  a  flexible  strap  P,  the  ends  of  which  are  con- 
nected to  the  healds  H,  and  both  kept  in  tension  at 
the  bottom  by  a  similar  arrangement  of  pulleys 
mounted  on  a  cross  rail.  Upon  the  shaft  N,  is  secured 
a  quadrant  U,  shown  by  detail  Fig.  2,  and  is  prepared 
with  two  recesses  U'  and  U2,  with  either  of  which  a 
sliding  V,  mounted  in  the  arm  L,  may  engage,  so  that 
by  the  oscillation  of  the  arm  L,  the  quadrant  U,  is 
operated  and  shaft  N,  rocked  in  its  bearings,  thus  giv- 


THE    DENN    ELECTRIC    STOP-MOTION  FOR 
WARPING  MACHINES. 

The  object  of  the  device  is  to  provide  improvements 
in  electric  stop-motions  for  warping  machines,  where- 
by a  positive  action  of  the  circuit-closer  is  insured  at 
all  times  and  the  thread-guides  permit  slack  in  the 
thread  without  closing  the  circuit  and  stopping  the 
machine. 

The  improvement  consists  of  a  conducting  strip 
forming  one  terminal  of  the  electric  circuit,  and  on 
which  the  thread-guides  are  pivoted,  the  pivoted  ends 
of  the  guides  having  a  sliding  connection  with  the  strip, 
and  a  contacting  strip  forming  the  other  terminal  of 
the  circuit,  and  provided  with  an  inclined  contact  sur- 
face adapted  to  be  engaged  by  lower  bent  ends  of 
guide. 

Fig.  1  is  a  sectional  elevation  showing  the  general 
arrangement  of  the  circuit-closer  and  the  stop  mech- 
anism. Fig.  2  is  a  sectional  plan  view  of  one  of  the 
guide  rails.  The  spool-frame  A,  carries  the  spools  B; 
in  front  of  each  vertical  row  of  spools  is  arranged  a 
rail  C,  in  front  of  which  pass  the  threads  B',  from  the 
spools  B,  through  the  eyes  D',  and  E,  of  which  the 
latter  are  rigidly  secured  in  the  rail  C,  while  the  eyes 
D',  are  each  formed  on  the  free  end  of  a  thread-guide 
D,  having  its  pivot  end  D2  formed  with  an  elongated 
slot  engaging  the  pivot  H,  pass- 
ing through  or  secured  to  a  con- 
ducting strip  I,  secured  to  the 
rail  C,  the  said  conducting  strip 
I  forming  part  of  an  electric 
circuit  by  being  connected  by  a 
wire  J,  with  a  battery  F,  or  other 
source  of  electricity;  the  other 
wire  J',  of  the  electric  circuit 
connecting  with  a  contact  strip 
K,  likewise  secured  on  the  rail 
C,  as  is  plainly  shown  in  Fig.  2. 
This  contact  strip  K,  is  in  the 


JB' 


Fig.  1. 

path  of  the  pivoted  thread-guide  D. 


156 


On  each  contact  strip  K,  are  formed  or  secured  in- 
clined surfaces  K',  each  adapted  to  be  engaged  by 
the  bent  lower  end  of  the  next  adjacent  thread-guide 
D,  so  as  to  close  the  circuit,  the  electric  connection 


being  then  made  between  the  strips  K  and  I,  by  the 
thread-guide  D,  and  the  pivot  H,  together  with  the 
wires  J  and  J',  and  the  battery  F.  The  threads  B', 
after  leaving  the  spools  B,  pass  through  the  eyes  D' 
and  E,  to  the  gatherer  G,  which  holds  the  thread- 
guides  D,  in  an  uppermost  position,  so  that  the  lower 
bent  end  of  each  thread-guide  is  a  considerable  dis- 
tance away  from  the  surface  K'  and  the  strip  K, 
whereby  the  circuit  remains  open. 

Now  when  a  slack  occurs  in  one  of  the  threads,  then 
the  thread-guide  D  by  its  own  weight  can  swing  down- 
ward to  take  up  the  slack,  without  making  contact  be- 
tween the  bent  end  and  the  spring  K.  When,  how- 
ever, one  of  the  threads  B'  breaks,  then  the  support  for 
holding  the  corresponding  thread-guide  in  an  upper- 
most position  is  removed,  and  consequently,  the  thread- 
guide  swings  downward  and  moves,  with 
bent  end,  in  contact  with  inclined  surface 
K',  to  close  circuit  as  previously  explained, 
and  to  cause  the  machine  to  stop  in  usual 
manner.  Now  it  will  be  seen  when  thread- 
guide  D,  swings  downward,  and  its  bent 
end  moves  in  contact  with  the  inclined  sur- 
face K',  then  the  force  of  downward  swing- 
ing of  thread-guide  D,  causes  a  sliding  of 
the  bent  end  in  an  oblique  direction,  it  be- 
ing understood  that  the  elongated  slot  in 
the  pivot  end  D2,  of  the  thread-guide, 
permits  such  motion.  The  bent  end 
does  not  contact  only  at  one  point  of 
the  strip  K,  but  comes  in  contact  with  a 
considerable  surface  of  the  strip,  owing  to 
the  sliding  connection,  so  that  a  closing  of 
the  circuit  positively  takes  place,  as  the  con- 
tact parts  do  not  oxidize  to  such  an  extent 
as  to  interfere  with  the  closing  of  the  circuit,  owing 
to  the  rubbing  of  the  bent  end  on  the  inclined  surface 
K'.  L,  is  the  electro-magnet,  and  N,  the  shaft  of  the 
warping  machine.  (Globe  Machine  Works,  Frankford, 
Phila.) 

SELF   REGISTERING   STOP-MOTION  MECH- 
ANISM FOR  WARPERS. 

In  the  operation  of  warping,  stoppages  are  made 
from  time  to  time  to  correct  faults  or  breakage  of  the 
yarn,  and  thus  the  proper  performance  of  the  warper 
is  very  largely  controlled  by  the  prior  treatment  of  the 
warps  in  the  operations  of  carding,  spinning,  etc.,  and 
when  these  operations  are  not  properly  carried  out, 
the  threads  will  break  more  frequently  in  the  warping, 
necessitating  stoppages  of  the  machines.  To  give  a 
record  of  these  stoppages  of  the  warper  to  the  over- 
seer is  the  object  of  this  device.  He,  in  turn,  will  thus 
know  the  quality  of  the  yarn,  and  also  if  the  warp- 
tender  is  doing  a  full  day's  work. 

Warpers  are  usually  provided  with  tight  and  loose 


pulleys  and  a  slow  speed  pulley,  the  latter  being  used 
to  start  the  machine  slowly,  or  to  run  it  at  slow  speed 
for  a  short  time  in  order  that  the  attendant  may  con- 
veniently repair  breakages. 

Inasmuch  as  the  slow  speed  of  the  warper  is  not  a 
proper  indication  of  the  work,  a  register  is  provided 
in  the  new  warper,  operated  only  when  the  warper  is 
started  at  full  speed. 

Of  the  accompanying  illustrations  Fig.  i  is  a  front 
elevation  of  the  device  as  applied  to  a  warper,  a  suffi- 
cient portion  of  the  warper  being  shown  so  the  device 
will  be  understood.  Fig.  2  is  a  right-hand  elevation 
of  the  apparatus  shown  in  Fig.  1. 

The  warper  which  is  chosen  for  illustration  comprises 
end  frames  A,  of  suitable  shape  to  form  bearings  for  a 
shaft  B,  provided  with  a  driving  roll  or  drum  B',  and 
a  gear  B",  in  mesh  with  a  pinion  Cx  (see  dotted  lines 
Fig.  2),  on  a  short  shaft  C,  having  thereon  fast  and 
loose  pulleys  C,  and  C,  and  a  slow  speed  pulley  C3. 

The  warp-roll  D,  rests  on  drum  B',  and  its  journals 
D',  are  vertically  movable  in  slots  or  guideways  A',  in 
the  main  frame. 

The  end  frames  A,  are  slotted  to  form  bearings  for 
a  shipper-ba'r  S,  movable  longitudinally  therethrough 
by  means  of  a  shipper-lever  Sx,  and  provided  with  a 
belt-fork  S',  to  engage  the  power-transmitting  belt  P, 
and  move  it  from  one  to  the  other  of  the  pulleys,  a 
laterally  extended  guide  or  support  S2,  for  the  bar 
being  secured  to  the  frame  at  the  belt  end. 

Stand  b,  is  secured  to  the  end  frame  by  bolts 
provided  with  a  laterally  extended  arm       having  an 
inclined  face  as  shown  in  Fig.  2,  to  which  is  secured 
by  screws  5,  a  registering  device  R. 

As  shown  in  Fig.  1,  the  face  of  the  register  has  a 


series  of  openings  therein,  beneath  each  of  which  is 
located  a  disk,  each  disk  provided  with  the  digits  and 
zero  in  well-known  manner,  the  complete  rotation 
of  one  dial  turning  the  next  succeeding  one  through 
one  step. 

The  spring-controlled  actuator  for  the  right-hand 
or  units  dial  projects  at  c,  from  the  slotted  bottom 
of  the  casing  and  is  extended  in  the  path  of  a  pin  or 
projection  s,  on  the  shipper-bar  S,  the  said  pin  being  so 
located  herein  that  it  will  engage  and  move  the  actu- 
ator c,  into  dotted  line  position,  Fig.  1,  when  the 
belt  P,  is  moved  onto  the  fast  pulley  C,  thereby  mov- 
ing the  right-hand  dial  one  step  or  unit. 

When  the  belt  is  for  any  reason  thrown  off  the  fast 
pulley,  the  actuator  c,  returns  to  full-line  position, 
ready  to  be  again  moved  when  the  apparatus  is  started 
at  full  speed. 

It  will  thus  be  seen  that  a  complete  register  is  kept 
of  the  number  of  times  the  apparatus  has  been  started 
at  full  speed,  and  also  that  the  belt  P,  can  be  moved 
from  the  slow-speed  to  the  loose  pulley,  and  vice  versa, 
any  number  of  times  without  registering.    (Draper  Go.} 


157 


TENSION    REGULATOR    FOR  YARN-BEAMS. 

This  device  relates  to  machines  for  dressing  yarn 
preparatory  to  weaving,  and  more  especially  to  regu- 
lating the  tension  of  the  yarn  as  it  is  drawn  from  the 
yarn-beams  in  making  up  the  full  beam  for  the  loom. 

Fig.  i,  represents  a  side  elevation  of  one  of  the 
yarn-beams  with  the  tension-regulating  mechanism  in 
position.  Fig.  2,  is  a  top  view  of  the  same  parts  shown 
in  Fig.  r.  Fig.  3,  shows  a  vertical  section  of  the  mech- 
anism, taken  on  line  x-xt  in  Fig.  2.  Fig.  4,  is  a  front 
view  of  one  of  the  frame-weights  used  in  the  machine. 

One  great  trouble  in  weaving  cloth  is  the  thin  or 
light  places  that  occur  and  produce  different  shades 
in  dyeing  and  also  otherwise  injure  the  goods.  This 
variation  in  the  cloth  is  mainly  caused  by  lack  of  uni- 
form tension  on  the  yarn  when  it  is  transferred  in  the 
dresser  from  the  beam  filled  on  the  warper  to  the  full 
beam  for  the  loom.  When  the  beam  from  which  the 
yarn  is  drawn  is  full,  the  yarn  turns  the  beam  much 
easier  than  it  does  when  the  beam  is  nearly  empty,  by 
reason  of  the  change  of  leverage. 

To  overcome  this  trouble  is  the  object  of  the  new 
device,  which  consists  in  applying  a  friction  to  the  yarn 
on  the  beam  that  shall  be  reduced  automatically  as  the 
size  of  the  beam  is  reduced  in  unwinding. 

Its  construction  is  as  follows: — A,  represents  a  yarn- 
beam  in  position  to  be  unwound.  C,  is  a  standard 
secured  to  the  floor  at  a  suitable  distance  from  the 
beam.  A  socket  J,  has  a  hole  made  through  it  verti- 
cally to  slide  on  the  standard  C,  and  a  set-screw  c  is 
tapped  in  one  side  of  the  socket  to  hold  it  at  any  de- 
sired height  on  the  standard.  Another  opening  is 
made  through  the  socket  horizontally  to  receive  a  bar 
S,  and  a  set-screw  a  is  put  in  the  opposite  side  of  the 
socket  to  bear  against  the  bar  and  hold  it  firmly.  Two 


horizontal  trunnions  0,  are  placed  one  on  each  side  of 
the  horizontal  barrel  of  the  socket  J,  to  receive  the  rear 
ends  of  a  double  bar  D,  on  the  under  side  of  which 
notches  are  made  to  fit  on  the  trunnions  0.  The  front 
ends  of  the  bar  D,  are  secured  by  bolts  to  a  friction- 
pad  R,  that  rests  on  the  surface  of  the  yarn  on  the 


beam  A.  The  object  of  the  pad  R  is  to  make  a  fric- 
tion on  the  yarn  and  to  increase  that  friction  and  make 
it  capable  of  variation. 

Weights  c,  in  the  shape  of  frames,  (see  Fig.  4,)  of 
cast  metal,  are  placed  close  together  on  the  double 
bar  D,  and  held  from  sliding  back  by  means  of  pins 
<l,  put  in  holes  in  the  bar.  A  number  of  these  weights 
c,  (represented  in  the  drawings  as  being  ten)  are  used 
on  the  bar  at  one  time,  and  when  the  full  beam  A 
starts  to  unwind,  all  the  weights  e  will  rest  on  the  bar 
and  cause  the  full  amount  of  friction;  but,  as  the  yarn 
unwinds  and  lets  the  bar  D  and  pad  R  down,  its  lever- 
age in  turning  the  beam  decreases  and  it  is  necessary 
to  lessen  the  weight  on  the  bar  D.  This  is  accom- 
plished by  means  of  a  block  B,  held  on  the  bar  S,  which 
has  its  upper  side  cut  into  a  stepped  form,  (see  Fig.  3,) 
arranged  to  catch  the  weights  e,  e,  one  after  another  on 
the  successive  steps  i,  as  the  bar  S,  sinks  down  by  the 
unwinding  of  the  yarn  from  the  beam  and  thus  relieves 
the  bar  of  the  pressure  of  the  weights  gradually. 

As  it  requires  more  tension  on  the  yarn  to  turn  the 
beam  as  it  grows  smaller,  the  weight  on  the  friction- 
pad  will  be  gradually  removed  and  the  friction  of  the 
pad  on  the  yarn  reduced,  so  that  the  same  tension  on 
the  yarn  required  to  turn  the  full  beam  will  turn  the 
same  when  nearly  empty.  A  series  of  holes  V,  are  made 
in  both  parts  of  the  bar  D,  to  receive  the  pins  so 
that  the  weights  e,  can  be  held  farther  in  or  out  on 
the  bar  to  lessen  or  increase  the  pressure  on  the  pad 
R,  on  the  yarn-beam,  and  by  loosening  the  set-screw 
a  the  bar  S  can  be  pushed  in  or  out  to  bring  the  block 
B  in  proper  position  with  regard  to  the  weights. 

When  it  is  necessary  to  remove  an  empty  beam  to 
put  in  a  full  one,  the  weights  c  can  be  removed  back 
onto  the  socket  and  the  bar  D  taken  out,  and  by  loosen- 
ing the  set-screw  <i  the  bar  S  can  be  slid  back  out  of 
the  way.    (Hugo  J.  Trost,  Olncyvillc,  R.  I.) 


WARP-COMPRESSOR. 

The  object  of  this  compressor  is  to  apply  pressure 
upon  a  warp  as  it  is  being  wound  upon  the  warp- 
beam,  whereby  the  warp  is  wound  more  tightly  and 
solidly  upon  the  beam;  thereby  increasing  the  amount 
of  warp  upon  the  beam,  rendering  its  tension  uniform 
during  the  process  of  weaving. 

The  accompanying  illustration  shows  in  perspective 
view  this  warp-compressor. 

A,  A1,  denote  stands  supporting  a  rock-shaft  B,  to 
which  is  attached  the  arms  B1  and  B2  and  B3,  having 
hooked  ends  B1,  inclosing  about  two-thirds  of  the 
periphery  of  a  pressure-roll  C,  of  suitable  length  to 
enter  between  the  heads  of  a  warp-beam  arid  rest 
upon  the  warp  as  it  is  being  wound  upon  the  beam. 

The  hooked  ends  B\  of  the  arm  are  "recessed  to 
receive  friction-rolls,  which  rotate  upon  pins  C2,  and 
bear  against  the  periphery  of  the  pressure-roll  C,  in 
order  to  reduce  the  friction  upon  the  pressure-roll, 
and  enable  it  to  rotate  freely  within  the  arms.  To 
the  rocking-shaft  B,  and  opposite  the  central  arm 
B  ,  is  attached  a  bracket,  and  the  arm  B2  is  provided 
with  an  upright  arm,  between  which  and  the  bracket 
before  referred  to,  is  a  bar  placed  transversely  to  and 
above  the  rocking-shaft  B,  and  provided  with  ways 
for  a  sliding  block,  which  traverses  along  the  bar  by 
means  of  a  rotating  screw.  The  upper  end  of  the 
sliding-block  carries  a  rotating-scored  pulley.  Attached 
to  the  ceiling  above  the  warp-compressor  are  an  eye- 
bolt  and  pulley-blocks,  containing  the  scored  pulleys. 

A  weight  is  attached  to  one  end  of  a  chain  which 
passes  over  and  around  one  or  the  other  pulleys  and 
around  the  pulley  held  in  the  pulley-block,  which  is 
connected  by  a  chain  with  a  lever  pivoted  upon  the 
previously  referred  to  bracket.  From  the  pulley  the 
chain  extends  upward,  and  it  has  its  end  attached  to 


158 


an  eyebolt,  causing  the  weight  to  exert  an  upward 
pull  upon  the  sliding-block,  which  is  multiplied  by 
the  doubling  of  the  chain. 

When  the  sliding-block  is  moved  along  its  transverse 
bar  by  the  actuating-screw,  so  the  pull  exerted  by  the 


weight  will  be  applied  in  a  plane  between  the  axis  of 
the  rocking-shaft  B  and  the  pressure-roll  C,  it  will 
tend  to  raise  the  pressure-roll  off  the  warp;  but  if  the 
sliding-block  is  moved  along  the  transverse  bar  to  the 
rear  of  the  rocking-shaft  B,  the  pull  exerted  upon  the 
block  will  tend  to  rock  the  shaft  B  in  the  opposite 
direction,  and  carry  the  pressure-roll  C  down  upon 
the  warp,  so  the  pressure  exerted  by  the  roll  C  will 
be  received  by  the  warp  as  it  is  being  wound  upon 
the  warp-beam  held  in  supporting-stands  beneath  the 
pressure-roll.  The  chain,  as  it  passes  around  the 
scored  pulleys,  is  divided  into  four  sections;  two  of 
the  sections  are  connected  by  a  short  chain.  When 
the  sliding-block  is  moved  forward  over  the  rocking- 
shaft  B,  the  weight  will  raise  the  pulley-block  and  its 
lever  until  the  connecting-chain  is  drawn  taut,  con- 
necting two  of  the  sections,  cutting  out  one  of  the  sec- 
tions and  that  portion  of  the  fourth  section  below  the 
chain,  and  causing  the  entire  weight  to  be  applied  to 
the  sliding-block.  The  lever  is  provided  with  a  curved 
or  cam  surface  upon  its  upper  side  adapted  to  be  en- 
gaged by  the  lower  end  of  the  sliding-block  when  said 
sliding-block  is  moved  back,  causing  the  lever  to  be 
depressed,  drawing  down  the  block,  and  rendering  the 
connecting-chain  slack,  so  that  the  force  of  the  weight 
will  be  exerted  upon  the  sliding-block  through  the  four 
sections  of  the  chain,  thereby  increasing  the  force  ap- 
plied to  rock  the  shaft  B,  and  carry  the  pressure-roll 
down  upon  the  warp. 

By  the  above-described  method  of  applying  the 
weight,  the*  force  exerted  upon  the  sliding-block  is  re- 
duced whenever  the  sliding-block  is  moved  off  the 
lever  and  when  it  is  not  desired  to  apply  pressure  to 
the  warp;  but  the  force  of  the  weight  is  largely  in- 
creased when  the  sliding-block  is  moved  back  over  the 
lever  in  position  to  apply  pressure  to  the  warp. 

One  end  of  the  rocking-shaft  B  is  .journaled  in  a 
sleeve  L,  which  is  pivoted  upon  a  pin  M,  held  in  the 
lugs  N,  attached  to  a  rotating  spindle  N',  journaled  in 
the  stand  A,  and  provided  with  a  screw  N2,  engaging 
a  screw-thread  in  the  stand,  and  the  opposite  end  of 
the  rocking-shaft  B,  is  journaled  in  a  sleeve  O,  held 
in  a  plate  P,  which  is  attached  to  a  rotating  spindle, 
journaled  in  the  stand  A'  and  provided  with  a  screw 
engaging  a  screw-thread  in  the  stand  A',  thereby  allow- 
ing the  bearings  of  the  rocking-shaft  B  to  be  varied 
vertically  in  order  to  bring  the  pressure-roll  C  in  the 
proper  horizontal  plane  to  allow  it  to  rest  upon  the 
warp. 

The  sleeve  O  is  capable  of  sliding  on  the  shaft  B 
and  being  withdrawn  from  the  circular  hole  in  the 
plate  in  order  to  allow  the  end  of  the  rocking-shaft 


B  to  be  lifted  through  the  opening  O3,  causing  the 
sleeve  L,  to  rock  on  the  pin  M,  raising  the  rocking- 
shaft  B,  in  an  oblique  position,  and  balanced  by  the 
weight  in  order  to  allow  access  to  the  warp-beam. 
The  rocking-shaft  B,  is  also  capable  of  being  moved 
endwise  in  its  bearings  in  order  to  bring  the  arms  B', 
B2,  and  B3,  over  the  warp-beam,  and  when  adjusted 
in  position  it  is  held  by  the  pins  R,  the  shaft  being 
provided  with  a  series  of  holes  R',  to  allow  the  adjust- 
ment of  the  shaft.  (David  McTaggart,  Worcester, 
Mass.) 


RISK'S  INDICATOR  FOR  WINDING  AND 
WARPING  MACHINES. 

This  device  is  clearly  shown  in  the  accompanying 
illustrations  of  which  Fig.  i  represents  a  view  of  the 
combined  alarm  and  indicator  in  front  elevation  and 
attached  to  a  portion  of  a  warper-frame;  Fig.  2  is  an 
end  view  of  Fig.  1. 

Letters  of  references  indicate  thus: — a,  represents  the 
reel-carrying  shaft  of  a  warper,  supported  in  roller- 
bearings  b,  arranged  on  frame  c,  to  which  is  secured 
a  bracket  dt  provided  with  horizontally-arranged  lugs 
d'  and  d2,  arranged  in  vertical  alignment  with  each  other 
and  provided  with  perforations  forming  bearings  for 
the  spring-controlled  rod  or  spindle  e,  slidingly  ar- 
ranged in  said  bearings  and  limited  in  its  downward 
motion  by  a  collar  e'  secured  thereon,  coming  in  con- 
tact with  the  lug  d2.  The  spiral  spring  e3,  controlling 
the  said  rod  or  spindle  e,  surrounds  the  same  and  bears 
with  its  lower  end  against  the  collar  e',  while  its  upper 
end  engages  the  under  surface  of  the  lug  d'.  Spindle 
e  is  provided  at  its  lower  end  with  a  shoe  e2,  which 
when  in  normal  position  rests  upon  and  engages  the 
projections  f  and  f  of  the  lever  f,  fulcrumed  at  f,  to 
the  lower  portion  of  bracket  d.  To  the  forward  end 
of  shoe  e2  is  secured,  by  means  of  wire  (I,  a  hammer 
9'.  On  the  frame  c  is  also  secured  the  horizontally- 
projecting  bracket  h,  adapted  to  receive  and  support 
the  stub-shaft  i,  upon  which  is  revolubly  arranged  the 
graduated  gear-wheel  fc,  meshing  with  a  worm  a'  on 
the  reel-shaft  a.  On  one  end  of  the  stub-shaft  I,  and 
in  front  of  the  graduated  gear-wheel  k,  is  arranged 
the  gong  I,  in  alignment  with  the  hammer  g'.  Project- 
ing from  the  surface  of  the  graduated  gear-wheel  k  and 
rotating  with  the  same  is  a  pin  k't  adapted  at  certain 
intervals,  when  said  wheel  is  in  rotation,  to  engage  the 
outwardly-projecting  end  f*  of  the  fulcrumed  lever  f, 
thereby  turning  the  same  upon  its  fulcrum  f  and  caus- 
ing the  projection  f  to  raise  the  shoe  c2  and  spindle  e, 
against  the  action  of  the  spiral  spring  e3,  which,  upon 
the  pin  k'  becoming  disengaged  from  the  projecting 
end  f  of  lever  f,  causes  said  shoe  and  lever  to  im- 
mediately return  to  their  normal  positions.  This 
movement  produces  a  sudden  jar  and  causes  the  ham- 
mer g'  to  strike  a  sharp  blow  against  the  gong  I,  thus 
sounding  the  alarm. 

The  graduations  on  the  gear-wheel  k  may  be  of  any 
desired  denomination  and  scale,  and  to  assist  in  the 
correct  reading  of  the  same  a  pointer  or  indicator  m 
is  secured  to  the  upper  portion  of  the  bracket  d,  pro- 
jecting outward  across  and  having  its  point  directly 
in  front  of  and  in  a  convenient  position  near  the  grad- 
uation in  said  wheel. 

The  relative  speed  of  the  gear-wheel  k  to  the  shaft 
a  must  be  such,  that  one  revolution  of  the  said  gear- 
wheel corresponds  to  the  winding  on  or  off  of  a  speci- 
fied length  of  warp,  but  it  will  be  manifest  that  a 
shorter  length  may  be  indicated  by  the  gong  by  simply 
inserting  a  series  of  pins  at  certain  specified  intervals 
in  the  said  gear-wheel,  and  which  pins  are  adapted  to 
operate  the  striking  mechanism  in  a  manner  similar  to 
the  pin  k'. 

The  gear-wheel  k  can  also  be  rotated  in  the  opposite 
direction — that  is  to  say,  the  pin  k'  will  strike  against 


159 


the  upper  surface  of  the  projection  P  of  the  fulcrumed 
lever  f — and  in  that  case  its  lug  f  will  force  the  shoe 
«*  upward  and  the  hammer  will  strike  the  gong  I  in 


its  return  movement.  This  is  an  important  feature 
■of  the  new  mechanism,  i.  e.,  that  the  striking  mechan- 
ism can  be  operated  having  the  reel-supporting  shaft 
rotating  in  either  direction,  since  in  older  mechanisms 
where  the  reel-supporting  shaft  is  arranged  to  rotate 
only  in  one  direction,  frequent  breakage  is  caused  by 
reversing  the  rotation  of  said  reel-supporting  shaft. 
(B.  Eastwood,  Paterson,  N.  J.) 


ATWOOD  S  REEL. 


The  advantage  claimed  for  this  reel  is  that  it  can  be 
readily  and  quickly  increased  or  diminished  in  size  as 
may  be  required  by  the  size  of  the  skein  of  yarn. 

All  of  the  arms  are  shifted  together  uniformly  out- 
ward and  inward,  thus  the  reel  is  kept  at  all  times 
balanced. 

Fig.  i  represents  a  view  of  the  swift  or  reel  looking 
toward  the  end  of  its  spindle  or  gudgeon,  the  several 
arms  being  shown  in  a  position  about  midway  between 
their  inward  and  outward  adjustments.  Fig.  2  is  a  face 
view  of  one  of  the  hub-sections,  showing  the  position 
of  two  pairs  of  arms  relatively  thereto.  Fig.  3  is  a 
face  view  of  the  other  hub-section,  showing  the  loca- 
tion of  the  different  tangential  grooves  therein,  the 
arms  being  removed. 

The  reel  is  provided  with  three  pairs  of  arms  A,  A', 
A3,  each  arm  being  provided  at  its  outer  end  with  a 
laterally-extended  skein-support  B.  The  several  pairs 
of  arms  are  located  in  different  planes  so  as  to  enable 
them  to  pass  each  other  freely  at  the  hub  of  the  reel, 
the  said  arms  being  adapted  to  be  extended  and  with- 
drawn by  a  rack-and-pinion  connection.  Each  of  the 
arms  is  provided  with  a  rack  a,  extending  from  the  end 
of  the  arm  opposite  the  skein-support  to  a  point  a 
short  distance  from  the  skein-support,  the  racks  of 
each  pair  of  arms  being  upon  the  adjacent  sides  of  the 
side  arms.  These  sets  or  pairs  of  arms  are  guided  in 
their  outward  and  inward  movement  by  grooves  in 
the  hub-sections  C,  C.  which  grooves  are  so  arranged 
as  to  keep  the  several  pairs  of  arms  at  about  sixty 
degrees  apart. 

The  grooves  in  which  the  pair  of  arms  A  run,  are 
formed  by  the  two  sections  C,  C,  and  are  denoted  by 
c,  c' .  The  arms  A',  pass  through  grooves  in  the  hub- 
section  C,  the  said  grooves  being  denoted  by  C2,  c*.  The 


grooves  in  which  the  arms  AJ  slide,  are  denoted  by 
c*,  c5  and  are  located  in  the  hub-section  C. 

The  spindle  or  gudgeon  of  the  reel  is  denoted  by 

D,  and  the  hub-section 
C  is  secured  against 
movement  thereon. 

On  the  spindle  D  is 
loosely  mounted  a 
sleeve,  having  a  pinion 
of  sufficient  width  to  ex- 
tend across  the  plane  of 
the  three  sets  of  arms 
A,  A',  A2.  Beyond  the 
end  of  the  hub-section 
C  this  sleeve  is  pro- 
vided with  a  suitable 
operating-wheel  or  knob 
F,  consisting  of  a  flat 
disk  having  its  edge 
curled  or  crimped  over 
to  form  a  convenient 
hold  for  the  hand.  This 
operating-wheel  F  is 
also  free  to  rotate  in- 
dependently of  the  spin- 
dle D. 

The  hub-section  C,  is  held  interlocked  with  the  hub- 
section  C  by  means  of  a  flexible  washer  which  is  held 
in  frictional  engagement  with  the  operating-wheel  F 
by  means  of  a  nut  and  a  jam  nut,  having  a  screw- 
threaded  engagement  with  the  end  of  said  spindle  D. 
This  spring-washer  serves  the  double  function  of  hold- 
ing the  two  hub-sections  together  and  also  applying 
friction  to  the  operating-wheel  F,  whereby  the  arms 
may  not  be  extended  or  contracted  unless  positively 
operated.  The  grooves  in  the  hub-sections  C,  C,  are 
so  arranged  that  they  will  cause  the  adjacent  racks  in 
each  set  of  arms  to  engage  the  pinion  upon  opposite 
sides  thereof.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  inner  sides  of  all 
of  the  grooves  are  necessarily  tangential  to  the  pinion, 
also  that  the  pinion  turns  upon  a  so-called  "dead- 
spindle"  when  it  is  desired  to  adjust  the  arms  out- 
wardly or  inwardly. 


The  manner  of  securing  the  skein-supports  to  the 
ends  of  the  arms  is  as  follows: — The  skein-support  B 
is  of  metal,  and  a  ferrule  is  formed  by  striking  half  out 
of  each  side  of  the  body  of  the  support.    The  arm  is 


160 


bifurcated  at  its  end,  and  the  skein-support  is  forced 
between  the  bifurcated  ends  of  the  arm,  and  the  ferrule 
passes  around  the  exterior  of  the  bifurcated  ends  and 
holds  the  support  snugly  in  position. 

It  will  be  seen  by  explanations  given  that  the  swift 
or  reel  may  be  adjusted  to  any  required  size  very 
quickly  and  easily  by  turning  the  operating-wheel  or 
knob  F,  and  when  adjusted  will  stay  in  such  position 
until  positively  changed.  (Orlo  Aticood,  Stuninyton, 
Conn.) 


LORD'S  REEL  AND  SUPPORT. 

The  object  of  this  device  is  to  be  able  to  use  any 
size  or  length  of  skeins  of  yarn  in  machines  for  wind- 
ing the  same  on  spools  and  what  is  accomplished  by 
having  the  arms  of  the  reel  constructed  so  that  they 
can  be  adjusted  to  suit  the  size  or  length  of  the  skein 
of  yarn  required  to  be  wound.  There  is  also  a  tension 
added  to  the  reel,  which  can  be  adjusted  to  suit  the 
winding  of  any  kind  of  yarn  (either  more  or  less  tight 
or  loose). 

This  reel  and  support  consists  of  a  series  of  metallic 
arms  which  are  pivoted  on  a  disk  or  spider  having  re- 
strained rotation  on  a  stud,  and  said  arms  each  have 
at  their  inner  ends  and  between  their  fulcra  and  the 
stud  a  pin  which  enters  each,  a  separate  spiral  slot 
in  a  plate  which  may  be  rotated  more  or  less  on  said 
stud  at  the  side  of  the  said  disk  or  spider,  the  spiral 
slots  acting  on  the  pins  of  the  arms  to  simultaneously 
turn  the  latter  on  their  fulcra  to  enlarge  or  con- 
tract the  effective  diameter  of  the  reel,  and  a  nut 


screwed  upon  the  threaded  hub  of  the  disk  or  spider 
and  acting  against  the  slotted  plate  holding  the  same  in 
any  position  in  which  it  may  be  left. 

The  stud  supporting  the  reel  is  mounted  on  an  arm 
pivoted  on  a  foot-casting  adapted  to  be  secured  to  a 
rail  of  the  spooling  machine,  the  said  arm  having  com- 
bined with  it  means  for  holding  it  in  proper  working 
position,  yet  permit  it  to  be  thrown  or  drawn  down 
away  from  adjacent  reels  when  the  yarn  of  that  reel 
may  need  attention. 


Of  the  accompanying  illustrations,  Fig.  I,  in  side 
elevation,  represents  such  an  improved  reel  mounted 
on  a  rail  of  a  spooling  machine;  Fig.  2,  an  enlarged 
detail  showing  the  slotted  plate,  disk  or  spider  and 
parts  of  the  arms  pivoted  thereon,  and  the  locking-nut; 
Fig.  3,  a  section  of  Fig.  2,  on  the  line  x-x.  Fig.  4, 
shows  one  of  the  reel-arms  enlarged;  and  Fig.  5  is  a 
section  in  the  line  x'-x\  Fig.  1. 

The  rail  A,  commonly  extended  from  one  to  the 
other  end  of  a  spooling  machine,  has  attached  to  it 
by  a  suitable  bolt  «,  a  foot-plate  B,  having  a  heel  B', 
to  fit  the  back  A',  of  the  rail. 

The  bolt  enters  a  web  of  the  foot-plate  and  also  an 
ear  of  a  stationary  washer  «2;  an  upright  flange  of  the 
foot-piece  (see  Fig.  5)  holding  a  bolt  or  stud  a3,  one 
end  of  which  is  passed  through  the  said  washer,  where 
it  has  applied  to  it  a  nut  a*. 

The  bolt  is  surrounded  by  a  washer  a5,  and  serves  as 
a  fulcrum  for  the  reel-carrying  arm  &,  the  setting  up  of 
the  nut  causing  the  arm  to  be  held  with  a  measured 
friction,  which  may  be  enough  to  hold  the  arm  in  any 
position  in  which  it  may  be  left,  either  up  or  down,  as 
in  full  or  dotted  lines,  Fig.  1.  The  arm  6,  is  provided 
with  a  pin  b't  which  is  adapted  to  be  engaged  by  a 
latch  V,  pivoted  at  b3,  on  the  washer  a2. 

When  the  latch  engages  the  pin,  as  in  full  lines,  Fig. 
1,  the  arm  is  locked  in  its  elevated  position,  but  when 
the  latch  is  disengaged  from  the  pin  the  arm  may  be 
turned  down  more  or  less  to  lower  the  reel  mounted 
on  it.  The  upper  end  of  the  arm  b,  has  screwed  into 
it  the  threaded  end  of  a  bolt  c.  The  bolt  enters  the 
hub  of  a  disk  or  spider  C,  and  a  friction-washer  c2, 
and  a  spiral  spring  <r,  and  is  screwed  into  the  disk,  the 
threaded  end  of  the  bolt  receiving  a  set-nut  c4,  to  lock 
the  bolt  in  place. 

The  bolt  may  be  screwed  into  the  arm  6,  to  com- 
press the  spring  e3,  more  or  less,  and  cause  it  to  act 
on  the  washer  to  make  the  latter  exert  more  or  less 
of  a  restraint  on  the  hub  of  the  disk  and  restrain  it 
from  rotating  except  after  a  predetermined  amount 
of  strain  on  the  yarn.  The  spring  and  washer  thus 
act  as  a  tension  device  for  the  reel. 

The  disk  has  pivoted  upon  it  at  d,  a  series  of  arms  d't 
having  at  their  inner  ends  each  a  like  pin  d2t  which 
enters  one  of  a  series  of  spiral  slots  d3.  in  a  plate  d*, 
mounted  on  the  extended  hub  of  the  disk  c1,  the  said 
hub  being  threaded  and  receiving  a  locking-nut  ds, 
which  may  be  made  to  lock  or  unlock  the  plate,  the 
latter  when  unlocked  being  free  to  be  moved  on  the  hub 
in  one  or  the  other  direction  to  cause  the  arm  to 
assume  a  more  or  less  radial  position  with  relation  to 
the  disk  which  constitutes  the  hub  of  the  reel,  such 
movement  of  the  plate  expanding  or  contracting  the 
reel.  The  reel-arms  d'  have  combined  with  them  ex- 
tension-arms c',  suitably  connected  thereto  and  pro- 
vided at  their  outer  ends  with  skein-holders  e2.  A 
series  of  these  arms  d\  e\  and  skein-holders  e2,  make 
up  the  reel. 

The  rear  ends  of  the  arms  el,  are  shown  as  provided 
with  a  T-piece  c-x,  and  so  bent  as  to  enter  the  slots  "» 
in  the  arms  d' ,  and  the  arms  e't  are  shown  as  slotted 
at  e'  to  receive  a  screw  e5,  inserted  in  the  arms  d'. 

The  arms  may  be  lengthened  and  shortened  at  will 
by  loosening  the  screws  e5,  and  all  of  them  may  be 
simultaneously  inclined  more  or  less  quickly  to  take 
off  a  skein  or  to  adapt  the  arms  to  the  size  of  the 
skein  applied.  The  arms  e',  near  their  outer  ends, 
have  given  to  them  a  quarter-twist,  as  at  f,  so  as  to 
turn  to  the  proper  angle  the  skein-holders. 

The  disk  d*  has  ears  or  thumb-pieces  10,  which  may 
be  engaged  easily  when  the  disk  is  to  be  turned  to 
enlarge  or  contract  the  skein-holding  arm.  (C.  S, 
Lord,  Winooski,  Vermont.) 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


IMPROVEMENTS    FOR    THE    MASON  LOOM. 

The  same  have  for  their  object  first,  to  provide  the 
loom  with  devices  by  means  of  which  the  breakage 
of  warp-threads  may  be  reduced  to  the  minimum,  and 
second,  to  provide  means  that  the  loom  be  quickly 
stopped  not  only  when  the  filling  is  broken  or  ex- 
hausted but  also  when  the  shuttle  fails  to  enter  the 
shuttle-box. 

The  strain  upon  the  warp-threads  is  equalized  and 
reduced  by  means  of  an  improved  back-bearing  for 
the  roll  over  which  pass  the  warp-threads  on  their  way 
to  the  harnesses,  the  said  roll  being  free  to  yield  when- 
ever undue  pressure  is  brought  upon  the  warp-threads. 

For  stopping  the  loom  quickly  the  same  is  provided 
with  a  compound  brake  which  acts  upon  the  brake- 
pulley  of  the  loom,  both  when  the  shuttle  fails  to  enter 
the  shuttle-box  and  also  when  the  filling  breaks  or  is 
exhausted. 


Fig.  i  represents  in  side  elevation  a  sufficient  por- 
tion of  a  loom  with  the  improvements  added  to  en- 
able anybody  to  understand  the  same  clearly;  a  por- 
tion of  the  loom-frame  being  broken  out  to  better 
show  some  of  the  parts.  Fig.  2  is  a  detail  showing 
the  left-hand  front  corner  of  the  loom  with  the  shipper- 
handle  B,  knocked  off  and  in  the  act  of  moving  from 
the  left  to  the  right.  Fig.  3  is  a  detail,  in  plan  view, 
of  the  warp-thread  support;  Fig.  4  a  face  view  of  the 
parts  shown  in  Fig.  3,  and  Fig.  5  is  a  plan  view  of  the 
shipper-handle  holding-plate. 

A,  indicates  the  loom-frame,  having  a  breast-beam 
A',  and  containing  a  crank-shaft  A4,  having  cranks, 
(not  shown)  which  are  attached  to  the  lay-swords  As, 
having  the  lay-beam  A2,  and  reed  ASx,  the  lay  having 
a  binder-finger  a,  which  acts  upon  the  binder  (not 
shown)  of  the  shuttle-box,  said  binder-finger  being 
connected  to  the  rock-shaft  a',  carried  by  the  lay  and 
having  a  dagger  a',  adapted,  when  lowered  into  its 
full  line  position,  Fig.  1,  by  the  absence  of  the  shuttle, 
to  meet  a  notched  frog  a3,  provided  with  a  finger  a*. 


The  warp-threads  w  are  controlled  by  heddles  to',  con- 
nected to  harness-frames. 

The  crank-shaft  A*  has  upon  it  at  one  end  a  suit- 
able brake-pulley  A5,  the  periphery  of  the  brake-pulley- 
being  adapted  to  be  acted  upon  by  a  brake-shoe  A", 
connected  by  a  rod  A7,  with  and  to  be  moved  by  the 
frog  a3,  when  the  latter  is  moved  by  the  dagger. 

The  loom-frame  at  its  rear  end,  has  bearings  to  re- 
ceive the  journals  C  of  the  warp-beam  C,  which  have 
at  one  end  a  let-off,  shown  as  a  pulley  C=,  over  which 
is  extended  a  rope  C3,  one  end  of  which  is  attached 
to  the  frame  at  Cx,  and  the  other  end  to  a  weighted 
lever  C\ 

The  loom-frame,  at  its  rear  end,  is  also  provided  at 
each  side  with  guideways  D,  (only  one  of  which  is 
herein  shown)  in  which  are  mounted  stands  D',  ad- 
justed by  means  of  bolts  D2,  passing  through  slots 
in  said  stands.  The  upper  end  of  each  stand  is  pro- 
vided with  a  laterally  extended  arm  Dx,  having  a 
series  of  open-top  bearings  for  the  recep- 
tion of  a  shaft  D4,  extended  from  one  to 
the  other  of  said  stands  across  the  loom, 
and  adjustable  by  placing  it  in  one  or  the 
other  of  the  bearings  referred  to.  The 
stand  is  also  made  reversible,  as  shown  by 
dotted  lines  in  Fig.  1,  to  increase  the  range 
of  adjustability. 

Fast  at  one  end  on  the  shaft  D4,  is  an 
arm  E,  supported  at  its  outer  end  in  a 
yielding  manner  by  a  rod  e,  jointed  to  said 
arm  and  provided  with  a  collar  C,  resting 
upon  a  spring  E',  supported  by  lug  e2,  on 
the  frame  work,  and  shown  by  dotted  lines, 
Fig.  1,  is  an  adjustable  stop  e3,  secured  to 
said  rod  below  said  projection  acting  to 
limit  the  upward  movement  of  said  rod  and 
its  lever.  The  shaft  D4  also  has  attached 
to  it,  between  the  stands  D'.  arms  d,  to  re- 
ceive the  slotted  carriers  d',  between  which 
is  mounted  the  whip-roll  d\  said  carriers 
being  connected  to  said  arms  by  bolts  d", 
to  enable  the  whip-roll  to  be  adjusted  up 
or  down  with  relation  to  the  shaft  D\ 

In  the  normal  operation  of  the  loom  the 
let-off  is  such  as  will  enable  the  beam  C, 
to  turn  and  give  off   the    warp    as  the 
latter  is  taken  up  in  the  weaving  of  the 
cloth.    Frequently,  however,  a  sudden  increase  in  the 
pull  or  tension  upon  the  warp  would  break  the  warp 
before  the  heavy  beam  could  rotate  to  relieve  it. 

By  means  of  the  present  improved  construction  of 
the  loom,  however,  by  mounting  the  whip-roll  d2  on 
the  spring-controlled  or  yielding  carriers  referred  to 
any  sudden  pull  or  tension  upon  the  warp  will  simply 
turn  the  said  roll  down  more  or  less  in  the  direction 
of  the  arrow  and  about  the  axis  of  the  shaft  D\  to 
effect  a  temporary  relief  and  thereby  save  the  warp. 
The  tension  of  the  spring  E',  or  the  length  of  the 
carryiny  arms  d' ,  may  be  varied  for  different  grades  or 
sizes  of  warp  or  fabric  woven,  to  enable  said  yielding 
whip-roll  to  move  when  necessary  to  relieve  sudden 
tension  or  pull  on  the  warp. 

The  loom  has  suitably  connected  to  it  the  spring- 
shipper-handle  B,  adapted  to  enter  a  notch  B',  in  the 
slot  Ba,  of  the  shipper-holding  plate  B3. 

The  shipper-handle  has  attached  to  it  by  a  bolt  &x,  a 
bearing-block  b,  in  which  is  journaled  a  rock-shaft 


161 


162 


b',  upon  one  end  of  which  is  fixed  a  handle  b2,  and 
upon  its  other  end  a  toe  b3. 

The  brake-shoe  A"  is  jointed  at  f,  to  an  auxiliary 
brake-mover  f  pivoted  at  f,  and  having  an  arm  f1* 
held  in  a  suitable  guide  f,  fixed  to  the  frame,  and  in 
a  position  to  be  acted  upon  by  the  toe  b3  referred  to. 

Assuming  the  shipper-handle  B  to  be  in  the  notch 
B'  and  the  loom  weaving  regularly,  should  the  shuttle 
fail  to  enter  the  shuttle-box,  the  dagger  a2  will  fail 
to  be  lifted  and  will  meet  the  frog  a3,  and  move  the 
same,  causing  the  finger  a*  on  the  frog  to  throw  the 
shipper-handle  B  out  of  the  holding-notch  B',  such 
movement  of  the  frog  also  acting  through  the  rod  A', 
which  herein  constitutes  one  form  of  main  brake- 
actuator,  to  draw  the  brake-shoe  A0,  firmly  against  the 
brake-pulley.  As  soon  as  the  shipper-handle  B  is  dis- 
engaged from  its  holding-notch,  as  described,  it  springs 
to  the  right,  Fig.  2,  to  throw  off  the  power,  such 
movement  of  said  shipper-handle  causing  the  toe  b3 
carried  by  it  to  slide  onto  the  outer  end  of  the  arm  fx 
referred  to,  and  depresses  said  arm,  causing  the  auxil- 
iary brake-mover  f,  to  act  against  the  brake-show  A6, 
and  increase  the  pressure  with  which  the  same  is 
pressed  against  the  brake-wheel  A6,  to  more  quickly 
stop  the  loom.  The  movement  of  the  shipper-handle 
is  thus  utilized  to  supplement  or  assist  the  main  brake- 
actuator.  The  toe  b3,  and  the  handle-lever  b2,  during 
the  movement  described  are  prevented  from  turning 
by  contact  of  the  handle  or  lever  V,  with  the  stop  b2* 
on  the  bearing-block  &,  on  the  shipper-handle. 

In  case  the  filling  fails,  the  filling-fork  (not  shown) 
will  act  and  will  release  the  shipper-handle,  as  de- 
scribed, letting  the  toe  b3t  act  upon  the  outer  end  of 
the  auxiliary  brake-mover,  to  brake  and  thereby  quickly 
stop  the  loom,  the  rod  A',  at  such  times  not  coming 
into  action,  the  brake  being  applied  solely  by  the 
auxiliary  brake-mover. 

To  release  the  brake  and  start  the  loom,  the  operator 
moves  the  handle-lever  b2t  to  the  left,  Fig.  2,  about  its 
pivot  to  move  the  toe  b3  to  the  right  or  from  the 
end  of  the  arm  f'x,  relieving  the  latter  and  permitting 
the  brake-shoe  to  be  drawn  by  the  weight  of  the  coun- 
ter balance  9  away  from  the  brake-wheel,  after  which 
the  shipper-handle  B  is  moved  back  to  the  left,  and 
engaged  and  locked  in  the  holding-notch  B',  in  its 
holding-plate. 

The  holding-plate  is  shown  provided  with  an  outer 
projection  or  stop  6°,  to  throw  the  handle-lever  6s, 
into  its  proper  vertical  position  against  the  stop  6Jx, 
on  return  or  outward  movement  of  the  shipper-handle, 
to  thereby  cause  the  toe  b3,  to  assume  proper  position 
with  relation  to  the  arm  f'x,  after  passing  the  latter,  in 
order  to  be  in  readiness  for  a  subsequent  braking 
movement  when  the  shipper-handle  is  released. 
(Mason  Machine  Works.) 


THE  MASON  BRAKE  MECHANISM. 

In  the  operation  of  looms  it  is  necessary  that  the 
brake  be  automatically  applied  when  the  shipper  is 
automatically  knocked  off  to  stop  the  loom  for  break- 
age of  a  thread.  It  is  necessary  that  the  brake  be 
automatically  released  when  the  shipper  is  again  moved 
to  start  the  loom,  and  it  is  again  further  necessary 
that  some  means  be  provided  for  releasing  the  brake 
when  the  loom  is  stopped,  in  order  that  it  may  be 
moved  more  or  less  by  hand,  as  is  found  necessary 
by  the  operator  in  placing  the  loom  in  condition  for 
further  operation. 

Prior  to  the  present  improvement  a  suitable  brake- 
controlling  member  has  been  employed  which  is  auto- 
matically moved  to  apply  the  brake  when  the  shipper 
is  automatically  moved  to  stop  the  loom,  and  which  is 
also  automatically  moved  to  release  the  brake  by  re- 


turn of  the  shipper  to  running  position;  but  independ- 
ent devices  have  been  required  for  releasing  the  brake 
when  the  loom  is  stopped  to  permit  movement  of  the 
loom  by  hand. 

There  never  has  been  constructed  a  single  brake- 
controlling  member  capable  of  automatically  applying 


the  brake  when  the  shipper  is  moved  to  stop  the  loom 
and  capable  of  automatically  releasing  the  brake  when 
the  shipper  is  restored  to  running  position,  and,  further, 
having  an  independent  movement  to  release  the  brake 
while  the  loom  is  stopped. 

The  new  device  comprehends  in  its  construction  a 
brake  mechanism  having  a  single  controlling  member 
which  may  be  made  to  fulfill  the  three  functions  before 
enumerated. 

Fig.  1  is  a  front  elevation  of  a  part  of  one  end  of 
a  loom,  showing  the  mechanism  necessary  to  enable 
the  novelty  of  the  new  device  to  be  understood; 
Fig.  2  is  a  right-hand  end  elevation  of  the  parts  shown 
in  Fig.  1 ;  Fig.  3  is  a  top  or  plan  view  of  the  parts 
shown  in  Fig.  2;  Fig.  4  is  a  detail  showing  the  con- 
trolling member,  Fig.  1,  on  an  enlarged  scale;  and 
Fig.  5  is  a  sectional  detail  to  be  referred  to. 

A,  is  part  of  one  of  the  end  frames  of  a  loom;  o, 
the  crank-shaft;  a\  the  brake-wheel;  the  brake  or 
brake-shoe  pivoted  at  0?  and  provided  with  the  lever 
a*,  notched  to  receive  a  suitable  weight  a6;  b,  the 
shipper-lever,  moving  within  the  notched  slot  b'  in 
the  holding-plate  b2. 

Depending  from  the  holding-plate  62,  is  shown  a 
bracket  &3,  (see  Fig.  5)  recessed  at  its  lower  end  to 
receive  the  short  shaft  c  of  the  brake-controlling  handle 
or  member  C,  said  shaft  c  being  retained  in  its  proper 
position  in  said  recess  by  a  cap  bl  and  pin  6°. 

Upon  the  shaft  c,  at  its  end  opposite  the  member 
C,  is  provided  a  yoke-like  portion  C,  the  opposite 
ends  of  which  constitute  stops  or  lugs  c5,  c3,  which, 
in  the  normal  or  running  position  of  the  shipper,  are 
both  in  contact  therewith  at  its  inner  edge. 

Referring  to  Figs.  1  and  4,  the  member  C  is  shown 
as  provided  at  its  outer  edge  with  an  ear,  to  which  is 
jointed  at  c*  one  end  of  the  lifting-rod  c5,  connected  at 
its  lower  end  to  the  free  end  of  the  brake-lever  o', 


the  point  of  connection  c*t  as  shown,  being  at  the  right 
of  the  vertical  or  dead-center,  so  that  the  normal 
tendency  of  the  weight  a5,  is  to  turn  the  member  C 
to  the  right  into  its  extreme  dotted  position  1,  Fig.  4, 
and  thereby  drop  the  brake-lever  and  apply  the  brake, 


163 


this  tendency  being  resisted  by  the  stop  or  lug  cJ, 
resting  upon  the  shipper-lever  in  its  notch  in  the  hold- 
ing-plate. 

When  the  shipper  is  knocked  off  either  automatically 
or  manually,  to  effect  the  stopping  of  the  loom,  it  at 


once  springs  in  usual  manner  to  the  left  into  its  dotted 
position  shown  in  Fig.  4,  and  thereby  permits  the 
weight  a5,  to  turn  the  controlling  member  C  into  its 
extreme  right-hand  position  and  quickly  apply  the 
brake  and  stop  the  loom. 

If  it  is  desired  to  release  the  brake  while  the  loom 
is  stopped,  and  with  the  shipper-lever  6  still  in  its 
extreme  left  or  dotted  position.  Fig.  4,  the  operator, 
by  throwing  the  controlling  member  C,  from  its  dotted 
position  1  toward  the  shipper  into  its  extreme  left- 
hand  or  dotted  position,  lifts  the  brake-lever  a*  and 
its  weight,  and  releases  the  brake,  such  movement  of 
the  controlling  member  carrying  the  point  of  connec- 
tion C*,  of  the  lifting-rod  cD,  into  the  position  at  the 
opposite  side  of  the  vertical  or  dead-center  line,  so 
that  the  action  of  the  weight  a5,  is  now  to  hold  the 
brake  released. 

In  the  present  instance  there  is  provided  a  suitable 
stop-plate  c6,  (shown  in  dotted  lines,  Fig.  4)  against 
which  the  stops  or  lugs  c2,  c3,  on  the  controlling  mem- 
ber may  contact  to  limit  the  movement  of  the  con- 
trolling member  in  either  direction. 

But  a  single  hand-controller  is 
employed,  which  directly  or  im- 
mediately operates  or  controls 
the  brake.  That  is,  the  brake  is 
applied  by  movement  of  a  single 
hand-controller,  and  is  also  re- 
leased by  movement  of  said 
single  hand-controller. 

By  means  of  the  new  mechan- 
ism, it  is  possible  to  provide  a 
single  hand-controller  to  auto- 
matically apply  the  brake  when 
the  shipper  is  released,  to  auto- 
matically release  the  brake  when 
the  shipper  is  moved  into  sup- 
porting position,  and  which  may 
be  manually  moved  to  release  the 
brake  without  starting  the  loom, 
the  term  "shipper"  as  herein  used 
including  any  device  by  which 
the  starting  and  stopping  of  the 
loom  is  effected. 

If  the  operator  wishes  to  stop 
the  loom  by  hand  without  apply- 
ing the  brake,  he  will  by  one 
movement  throw  the  shipper  and 

the  brake-controlling  member  to  the  left  into  their 
dotted  positions,  Fig.  4.    (Mason  Machine  Works.) 


three  or  four  picks  are  lost  before  the  loom  would 
stop,  and  besides,  the  weaver  had  "to  pull  back"  for  as 
many  picks  as  went  in  after  the  filling  broke.  To  over- 
come all  this  trouble  is  the  object  of  this  clutch-operat- 
ing mechanism,  since  by  means  of  it  as  soon  as  the 
shipper-handle  is  released  it  at  once  forces  the  pulley 
from  its  friction,  stopping  the  loom  instantly.  The 
clutch  thus  to  be  described  operates  this  kind  of  a 
friction  pulley. 

Fig.  1  shows  in  end  elevation  a  sufficient  portion  of 
a  loom  equipped  with  the  device  to  enable  the  latter 
to  be  understood.  Fig.  2  is  a  top  or  plan  view  of  the 
parts  shown  in  Fig.  1,  together  with  a  portion  of  the 
lay,  showing  the  shuttle  and  picker-stick.  Fig.  3  on 
a  reduced  scale,  is  a  partial  front  elevation  of  the  parts 
shown  in  Fig.  1.  Fig.  4  is  an  enlarged  vertical  sec- 
tion of  the  clutch  mechanism,  Figs.  1,  and  2.  Fig.  5 
is  a  perspective  detail  showing  the  two  cooperating 
expanding-yokes. 

The  loom-frame  is  indicated  by  A,  the  breast-beam 
by  ?t  the  crank-shaft  by  B',  and  the  lay  by  B. 

The  shuttle  S  and  picker-stick  P,  are  shown  only 
partially  in  Fig.  2. 

Upon  the  crank-shaft  B'  is  made  fast  a  brake-wheel 
b,  and  next  it  a  toothed  gear  said  gear  having  made 
as  part  of  it  the  hand-wheel  &3,  having  at  one  side 
a  ring-like  face  b',  of  leather  or  other  suitable  friction, 
material,  adjacent  which  is  arranged  the  rim  edge  of 
the  belt-pulley  &5,  loose  on  the  said  shaft.  Outside 
the  hub  of  the  belt-pulley  f»5,  is  a  grooved  collar  C, 
fast  on  the  end  of  said  shaft.  The  collar  C  is  grooved, 
to  receive  the  inturned  flange  c2  of  the  semicylindrical 
hood-like  clutch  member  c3,  provided  with  oppositely 
arranged  pivots  c\  to  which  is  jointed  the  forked  end 
of  the  lever  d,  supported  near  the  breast-beam  in  a 
suitable  forked  support  d',  and  itself  forked  at  its  free 
end  to  straddle  the  shipper-lever  d2t  arranged  at  the 
'end  of  the  loom  and  shown  as  of  spring  material  at- 
tached to  the  loom-frame  at  its  lower  end  and  by  its. 


FOR 


CLUTCH-OPERATING  MECHANISM 
CROMPTON  LOOMS. 

Heretofore  two  pulleys  have  been  run  on  a  loom, 
a  tight  and  a  loose  pulley;  but  as  it  always  takes  time 
for  a  belt  to  shift  from  the  tight  to  the  loose  pulley, 


own  resiliency  tending  to  normally  remain  in  its  outer- 
most positions,  Figs.  2,  and  3,  the  said  shipper  work- 
ing in  the  usual  slot  d3  in  the  catch-plate  d\  the  latter 
being  provided  with  a  holding-notch  d*.    (See  Fig.  2.) 

The  forked  end  of  the  lever  d,  close  to,  but  inside 
the  pivots  c4,  is  perforated  to  receive  the  oppositely 
arranged  pivot  projections  e,  on  the  yoke-like  member 
e',  Fig.  5,  arranged  to  travel  in  the  groove  of  the 
extended  hub  c  of  the  pulley  ft5,  the  said  yoke-like 


164 


■member  e'  and  the  member  c3,  (both  shown  in  Fig.  5,) 
■constituting  "clutch-actuating  members." 

When  the  loom  is  at  rest,  with  the  parts  in  the  posi- 
tions Figs.  2,  3,  and  4,  the  pulley  &5,  travels  loosely  on 
the  shaft  B'. 

To  start  the  loom  the  operator  throws  the  shipper- 
handle  to  the  left,  Fig.  2,  into  the  holding-notch  d5, 
such  movement  of  said  shipper  acting  to  turn  the 
lever  d  in  the  direction  of  the  arrow,  Fig.  2,  about  its 
fulcrum-pivots  c\  on  the  stationary  hood-like  member 
■c3,  causing  the  pins  e,  in  the  member  e',  to  slide  the 
said  member  and  the  pulley  &°  to  the  left,  Figs.  2  and 
4,  until  the  edge  of  the  pulley-rim  meets  the  friction- 
face  61,  of  the  hand-wheel,  frictional  contact  of  the  two 
imparting  to  the  hand-wheel  and  the  crank-shaft  the 
rotary  motion  of  the  pulley  and  starting  the  loom. 

To  release  the  clutch  and  stop  the  loom,  the  opera- 
tor throws  off  the  shipper,  as  usual,  the  resiliency  of 
the  latter  throwing  it  to  its  extreme  position  at  the 
right,  Fig.  2,  and  returning  the  lever  dt  to  its  original 
position,  withdrawing  the  driving-pulley  from  fric- 
tional contact  with  the  face  of  the  hand-wheel. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  lever  d,  is  given  an  angular 
or  reversed  bend  at  its  middle  to  clear  the  vibratory 
movements  of  the  usual  picker-stick  p,  said  lever,  Fig. 
2,  being  bent  to  the  left  at  3,  and  again  back  to  its 
normal  direction  at  4. 

The  clutch-controlling  lever  d  is  supported  at  one 
end  by  the  clutch  parts  and  at  its  opposite  end  by  the 
support  d\  and  is  loosely  connected  with  the  shipper- 
lever.    (Crompton  and  Enowles  Loom  Works.) 


FILLING  CUTTING  DEVICE  FOR  NORTHROP 
LOOMS. 

The  object  of  this  device  is  the  production  of  simple 
means  for  cutting  the  filling-thread  at  a  predetermined 
point  close  to  the  selvage  and  between  it  and  the  point 
of  attachment  of  the  end  of  the  filling. 

Of  the  accompanying  illustrations  Fig.  A  is  a  plan 
view  showing  a  sufficient  portion  of  the  loom-frame, 
lay,  and  filling-feeder  to  be  understood  with  the  new 
device  applied  thereto,  the  lay  being  shown  as  back. 
Fig.  B  is  a  view,  partially  in  section,  transversely  to 
the  lay,  showing  the  filling-cutter  and  guide.    Fig.  C 


is  an  enlarged  sectional  view  of  the  temple-head,  show- 
ing the  manner  of  attaching  the  filling-cutter.  Fig. 
D  is  a  transverse  section  thereof  on  the  line  x-x, 
Fig.  C. 

A  indicates  the  loom-frame,  A'  the  breast-beam,  b  a 
filling-carrier,  &1  the  filling  end  supporting-plate,  62  the 
holder  for  the  end,  f  the  stud,  and  f1  the  pusher  to 
transfer  a  filling-carrier  from  the  feeder,  S  the  self- 
threading  shuttle,  and  A3  the  lay,  having  the  bottom 


of  its  shuttle-box  cut  through  for  the  discharge  of  the 
spent  filling-carrier  from  the  shuttle. 

When  a  fresh  filling-carrier  is  inserted  in  the  shuttle, 
the  latter  is  thrown  across  the  lay,  the  filling  t  leading 
from  the  end  holder  &2  around  the  supporting-plate 


Jc 


V  to  the  selvage  of  the  cloth  C,  as  in  Fig.  A.  Unless 
the  end  is  severed  positively,  it  will  be  broken  as  the 
cloth  is  wound  on  the  roll,  leaving  a  long  end. 

This  positively  severing  of  the  end  is  accomplished 
with  the  new  device,  providing  a  cutter  to  positively 
sever  the  filling  end  at  a  predetermined  point  close  to 
the  cloth-selvage,  a  guide  or  holder  cooperating  to 
bring  the  filling  into  proper  position. 

The  breast-beam  A',  has  adjustably  secured  thereto 
a  stand  d,  to  which  stand  is  connected  the  temple- 
shank  d't  its  head  having,  as  herein  shown,  attached 
to  it  a  blade  ft,  provided  with  a  vertical  cutting  edge  ft'. 

Referring  to  Fig.  A,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  edge  of 
the  cutter  is  located  adjacent  the  selvage  and  at  one 
side  of  the  filling  end  t,  so  that  by  bringing  the  latter 
against  the  cutter  the  said  end  will  be  severed  close 
to  the  selvage. 

Figs.  C,  and  D,  show  convenient  means  of  securing 
the  cutting-blade  ft  to  the  temple-head,  comprising 
the  cap  c  and  pod  P,  the  upright  wall  of  the  latter  at 
the  outer  end  of  the  roll  r  being  recessed  transversely 
to  receive  the  blade.  The  end  C  of  the  cap  extends 
over  the  side  of  the  blade,  and  the  roll-stud  r'  is 
extended  through  a  suitable  hole  in  the  blade. 

In  order  to  positively  press  the  filling  end  against 
the  edge  of  the  blade,  there  is  mounted  on  the  lay  a 
guide  9,  (shown  in  Fig.  B  as  having  its  upper  ends 
2-3  diverging  toward  and  to  engage  the  filling  on  the 
side  opposite  the  blade  as  the  lay  moves  forward),  so 
that  the  filling  end  is  pressed  against  the  upright  edge 
ft',  of  the  blade  and  severed. 

Should  the  filling  end  not  be  severed  at  the  first 
engagement  with  the  cutter,  one  or  two  successive 
engagements  therewith  will  sever  it  without  fail  close 
to  the  selvage. 

The  temple  makes  the  simplest  and  most  effective 
holder  or  support  for  the  cutter  or  blade  ft,  as  it  is  in 
the  proper  position  with  regard  to  the  point  at  which  it 
is  desired  to  cut  the  filling  end.    (Draper  Go.) 


FILLING-CARRIERS  FOR  NORTHROP 
LOOMS. 

In  Northrop  looms,  the  filling-carriers  are  held  in 
a  revolving  filling-carrier  feeder.  The  said  filling-car- 
riers, due  to  the  jarring  of  the  loom  in  rapid  operation, 
are  liable  to  rotate  in  the  feeder  and  wind  or  unwind 
the  filling,  which  is  apt  to  be  injurious  to  the  opera- 
tion of  the  loom.    To   obviate  the  turning   of  the 


165 


filling-carrier  in  the  feeder,  the  Draper  Co.  in  their 
latest  make  of  "automatic"  looms  provide  the  head  of 
the  carrier  with  a  transverse  slot  and  the  feeder  with 


a  series  of  radial  guides  which  receive  the  slotted 
heads  of  the  carriers.  They  also  shaped  the  heads  of 
the  carriers  so  as  to  present  two  secant  surfaces,  which 
surfaces,  when  the  carriers  meet  and  are  being  pushed 
together,  act  one  on  the  other  to  prevent  any  rotation 
of  the  carriers. 

Figure  I  shows  a  portion  of  a  filling-carrier  feeder, 
together  with  a  pusher,  with  the  present  improvements 
added;  Fig.  2  shows  the  filling-carrier  on  a  larger 
scale;  Fig.  3  shows  a  part  of  a  shuttle  with  part  of  a 
filling-carrier  therein. 

The  filling-feeder  has  the  notched  head  or  disk  a 
at  one  end  of  a  sleeve  a3,  mounted  on  a  stud  0°,  said 
notched  head  or  disk  running  inside  the  stationary 
flanged  ring  or  plate  c,  and  the  pusher  f,  mounted  on 
stud  f.  Arm  f,  is  connected  to  the  hub  of  the  pusher 
and  carries  the  tip-supporting  device  f. 

The  shuttle  A,  has  jaws  A',  one  of  which  is  rep- 
resented in  Fig.  3,  and  the  bridge  A2. 

In  the  head  or  disk  «,  and  in  each  one  of  its  notches 
a  guide  a2  is  placed,  said  guides  being  so  located  there- 
in that  when  the  filling-carriers  B  are  being  put  into 
the  feeder  the  slots  B'  in  the  heads  of  the  carriers 


will  embrace  each  one  of  said  guides,  thus  preventing 
any  liability  of  the  said  carriers  from  being  rotated 


while  in  said  feeder  or  while  being  removed  from  said 
feeder  by  the  action  against  it  of  the  end  of  the  pusher 
V.  The  head  of  the  filling-carrier  is  so  shaped  that 
it  presents  two  flat  or  secant  surfaces  b' ,  and  when  a 
carrier  is  removed  from  the  feeder  one  of  these  flat 
sides  tends  to  and  does  contact  with  the  flat  upper 
side  of  a  carrier  then  in  the  shuttle,  so  that  the  carrier 
as  put  into  the  shuttle  cannot  turn  or  rotate  at  all, 
due  to  the  pressure  of  one  carrier  against  another. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  flattened  sides  of  the  head 
of  the  filling-carrier,  as  the  latter  is  removed  by  the 
pusher  from  the  feeder  into  position  between  the  jaws 
of  the  shuttle,  strike  the  flattened  face  of  the  abut- 
ment, connected  with  the  shuttle  and  having  its  free 
end  located  between  the  jaws  A',  said  flattened  surface 
by  its  contact  with  said  abutment  materially  aids  in 
preventing  the  accidental  slipping  or  sidewise  motion 
of  the  filling-carrier.    {Draper  Co.) 


LOCATING    SHIPPER-HANDLE    IN  COTTON 
LOOMS  AT  THE  OPPOSITE  END 
OF  BELT-PULLEY. 

In  looms  as  now  most  commonly  used  it  is  custom- 
ary to  locate  the  belt-fork  or  shipper  and  shipper-handle 
at  the  same  end  of  the  loom,  but  at  times  it  is  desirable 
to  locate  the  shipper-handle  at  one  end  of  the  loom 


and  the  belt-fork  or  shipper  at  the  other  end,  and  it  is 
to  this  latter  class  of  looms  that  the  present  improve- 
ment relates. 

The  accompanying  illustration  shows  sufficient  por- 
tions of  a  loom  to  understand  the  device. 

A  is  the  loom-frame;  A'  the  breast-beam;  B  the 
crank-shaft  for  operating  the  lay,  it  being  in  bearings 
Ax.  The  shaft  C  carries  at  one  end  the  fast  pulley  B', 
a  loose  pulley  B2,  and  a  brake-pulley  B3,  and  at  its 
other  end  it  has  a  pinion  6,  which  engages  a  toothed 
gear  c,  fast  on  the  usual  lower  or  cam-shaft.  (Not 
shown  in  the  illustration.) 

Extended  from  one  end  of  the  loom  is  a  plate  e', 
having  a  notch  e2  and  shoulder  e3,  said  notch  receiving 
the  upper  end  of  a  shipper-handle  or  lever  e,  which 
has,  as  shown,  a  projection  exi  to  which  is  secured  a 
flexible  connection  h,  extended  across  to  the  opposite 
end  of  the  loom  and  about  suitable  sheaves  f,  f,  f2, 
the  opposite  end  of  said  flexible  connection  being 
attached  to  an  ear  h'  of  a  sleeve  a',  fitted  loosely  over 
a  stud  a,  projecting  from  the  loom  side,  a  spring  s 
being  shown  as  interposed  between  the  said  sleeve  and 
loom  side,  said  spring  normally  acting  to  move  the 
sleeve  to  the  right  on  said  stud,  as  shown  in  the  draw- 
ing, and  cause  the  belt-fork  a',  to  put  the  usual  belt 
controlled  by  it,  but  not  shown,  onto  the  loose 
pulley  B2. 

When  the  shipper-handle  is  moved  so  that  it  en- 
gages the  shoulder  e',  the  flexible  connection  draws 


166 


the  sleeve  in  the  direction  to  cause  the  belt-fork  to 
put  the  belt  on  the  fast  pulley.  When  the  weaver 
springs  the  shipper-handle  out  of  engagement  with  the 
shoulder  or  when  the  handle  is  sprung  out  by  means 
of  any  usual  loom-stopping  mechanism,  the  expansion 
of  the  cam,  acting  with  the  spring  of  the  shipper- 
handle,  effects  the  transfer  of  the  belt  to  the  loose 
pulley.    (Draper  Co.) 


SCOTT'S  LAPPET-LOOM. 

The  lappet-needles  of  this  loom  are  each  independ- 
ently connected  to  one  of  the  hooks  of  a  jacquard. 

The  lappet  ends  are  brought  to  the  needles  from  a 
creel  or  bobbins,  or  from  beams,  and  each  end  is 
passed  over  two  tension-rods,  one  of  which  is  carried 
at  each  end  by  a  bell-cranked  lever,  and  through  a 
lingo  or  heddle  between  the  rods,  the  said  lingo  being 
raised  by  the  same  hook  which  raises  its  corresponding 
lappet-needle  in  order  to  slacken  the  tension  on  the 
lappet  end  when  it  is  raised,  each  end  having  thus  a 
separate  tension. 

The  bell-crank  levers  which  carry  the  tension-rods 
are  connected  by  cords  to  the  slay  so  that  as  it  beats 
up,  the  said  tension-rod  is  depressed,  (because  all  the 
needles  pass  under  the  woven  fabric)  and  as  soon  as 
the  slay  returns  and  the  needles  rise  again  the  tension- 
rod  is  returned  by  springs  to  its  former  position  and 
takes  up  the  slack. 

The  accompanying  illustration  is  a  diagram  show-  ■ 
ing  the  independent  lappet-needle  and  course  of  the 
lappet  end  thereto,  and  also  illustrating  the  tension 
device  or  arrangement  for  tightening  and  slackening 
the  lappet  end. 

Loom-frame  and  slay-frame  are  of  ordinary  con- 
struction, c,  is  the  grid  fixed  to  the  slay-sword  d, 
through  which  grid  each  of  the  lappet-needles  can 
freely  and  independently  rise. 

This  grid  is  dovetailed  in  the  slay-sword  d,  so  as  to 
be  capable  of  movement  endwise  and  thereby  impart 
side  motion  or  "slue"  to  the  points  of  all  the  lappet- 
needles  e,  simultaneously. 

f,  is  the  needle-bar  or  rail  (adapted  and  arranged  to 
receive  endwise  motion),  through  which  the  needles  e, 
can  freely  rise. 

g,  is  the  reed,    h,  is  the  hand-rail,    i,  is  the  slay. 
Means  are  provided  for  imparting  to-and-fro  mo- 
tion to  the  needle-bar  by  means  of  ordinary  weighted 


cords  or  straps  operated  by  two  eccentrics  situated  on 
the  outside  of  the  loom. 

w,  is  a  cord  or  connection  from  each  needle  e  to 
the  hook  of  a  jacquard  machine — a  separate  and  in- 


dependent cord  n  being  brought  from  each  needle  e 
to  a  separate  and  independent  hook  in  such  apparatus, 
or  several  of  these  cords  n  may  be  connected  up  to- 
one  hook  in  such  apparatus. 

n',  is  a  separate  cord  connected  to  the  same  hook 
as  the  cord  n,  and  carries  an  eye  n'\  through  which 
the  lappet  end  o  is  led  on  its  way  from  the  reel  or 
bobbin  o'  to  the  needle  e,  and  this  cord  »'  carries  the 
lingo  n3. 

Thus  each  lappet  end  o  is  independently  led  through 
an  eye  w2,  independently  connected,  together  with  its 
corresponding  needle  e,  to  the  hook  of  the  jacquard, 
and  by  passing  this  end  o,  over  two  bars  or  supports 
p,  the  lingo  n3  causes  a  depression  in  the  end  o,  while 
directly  the  jacquard  simultaneously  lifts  the  cords  n 
and  the  eye  n"  is  correspondingly  raised  with  the 
needle  to  which  it  guides  the  lappet  ends  o  and  thus 
slackens  the  latter  corresponding  to  the  amount  of 
rise  imparted  to  the  said  needle  and  again  simulta- 
neously takes  up  the  slack  when  the  needle  falls.  In 
order  to  again  slacken  the  lappet  end  o,  at  the  moment 
when  the  needle  goes  under  the  fabric  at  the  "beat-up," 
the  whole  of  the  lappet  ends  are  passed  over  the  bar 
or  support  Q,  which  extends  across  the  loom  to  in- 
clude all  the  warp  ends  (and  passing  under  all  the 
lappet  ends  o,)  and  is  carried  at  each  end  by  the  bell- 
crank-levers  pivoted  at  r\  to  the  frame  of  the  loom. 
s,  is  a  cord  from  the  slay-frame  to  the  free  end  of  said 
bell-crank  levers  r,  at  each  end  of  said  bar  q,  the 
length  of  this  cord  s  being  such  that  same  only  tightens 
just  before  the  needles  e  pass  under  the  fell  of  the 
cloth,  and  thus  it  will  readily  be  seen  that  the  bar  q 
is  lowered,  and  thereby  slackens  the  whole  of  the 
lappet  ends  o,  while  on  the  return  movement  of  the 
slay-frame  the  spring  tt  connected  to  the  bar  q,  lifts 
the  same  up  as  the  cord  s  is  slackened,  and  thereby 
takes  up  the  slack  in  the  ends  o,  caused  by  the  rearward 
movement  or  return  of  the  slay  as  the  needles  come 
from  under  the  fell  of  the  cloth. 

M,  are  the  warp  ends,  controlled  by  the  harness- 
frames  v,  to  produce  a  plain  cloth,  or  the  warp  ends 
may  be  guided  or  controlled  in  any  other  desired  and 
suitable  manner. 

is  a  coarse  reed  through  which  the  lappet  ends  o 
are  guided  and  kept  separate  as  they  come  from  the 
reel  o',  or  from  any  other  suitable  device,  creel,  bobbin, 
beam,  or  the  like. 

x,  is  a  false  reed  ordinarily  used  in  lappet-weaving 
machines  for  guiding  the  shuttle.  (D .  Scott,  Manchester, 
Eng.) 

KNOWLES  LAPPET  MOTION, 

The  Knowles  lappet  motion  is  made 
to  be  attached  to  any  loom  and  can 
be  operated  either  by  a  head  motion 
or  by  a  cam  on  the  bottom  shaft.  The 
cuts  here  shown  represent  a  lappet 
motion  operated  from  a  head  motion, 
and  can  be  best  understood  by  the  fol- 
lowing lettering. 

A  represents  the  loomside;  B  is  the 
lay-wood;  C  is  the  end  of  the  lay- 
sword;  D  is  a  casting  which  is  fastened 
to  the  lay-sword  and  is  the  stand  for 
the  lappet  parts;  E  is  a  brass  casting 
which  serves  as  a  run  for  the  ends  of 
the  needle-bars;  F  are  the  steel  ends  of  the  needle- 
bars;  G  are  the  needle-bars;  H  are  the  needles;  I  is 
the  rod  which  pulls  the  needles  down  into  the  shed 
and  turns  the  pattern-chain;  J  is  the  pattern-chain- 
drum  and  ratchet;  K  is  the  pattern-chain;  L  is  the 
pawl  which  turns  the  chain-drum;  M  is  a  screw  in 
the  back  of  the  pawl  which  prevents  the  pawl  from 
turning  the  drum  too  far;  N  is  a  lock-lever  which 


167 


also  prevents  the  chain-drum  from  being  turned  too 
far;  O  is  the  run  on  which  the  pins  in  the  pattern- 
chain  slide;  P  is  a  lever  on  the  rocker-shaft  R;  S 
indicates  the  wire  and  chain  which  connects  the  lappet 
motion  to  the  head  motion,  and  T  is  a  collar  on  the 
rod  I,  which  prevents  the  rod  from  having  too  much 
motion. 

A  lappet  motion  is  used  for  putting  trailing  designs 
into  cloth,  the  lappet  yarn  passing  through  the  needles 
H,  and  the  needles  being  pulled  down  into  the  shed 
by  means  of  the  head  motion  or  cam,  and  being  forced 
out  by  a  spring  on  the  rocker-shaft  R.  The  length 
of  pins  required  for  each  pick  of  the  lappet  design 
are  screwed  into  the  bars  of  lappet-chain  in  succession, 
and  as  the  chain-drum  is  revolved  by  the  pawl  a  new 
pin  is  brought  against  the  run  O  every  pick  and  as 
the  needle-bars  are  kept  against  the  back  of  the  run  O 
by  springs,  the  needles  are  moved  to  correspond  to  the 
change  in  length  of  the  pins  in  each  successive  bar. 

In  order  that  the  lappet-needles  may  not  interfere 
with  the  passage  of  the  shuttle  across  the  race,  the 
reed  is  set  back  and  a  false  reed  or  pin-bar  is  used 
as  a  guide  for  the  shuttle,  the  lappet-needle  being 
between  this  pin-bar  and  the  reed.  The  pin-bar  is 
controlled  by  a  cam  on  the  breast-beam,  being  forced 
down  out  of  the  way  when  the  lay  beats  up  and  allowed 
to  rise  into  place  when  the  lay  moves  toward  the  back 
center.  The  wire  S  is  adjustable  so  as  to  vary  the 
depth  to  which  the  needles  are  forced  into  the  shed. 
(Crompton  and  Knowles  Loom  Works.) 


168 


REVERSING    MECHANISM    FOR  KNOWLES 
CARPET  LOOMS  IN  CONNECTION  WITH 
THEIR  FILLING  STOP-MOTION. 

In  these  looms  considerable  power  is  necessary  to 
move  the  lay  to  its  rear  position  when  the  loom  is 
stopped. 

Referring  to  the  drawings,  Fig.  i  is  an  end  view, 
looking  in  the  direction  of  arrow  «,  Fig.  2,  of  a  loom 


provided  with  the  new  mechanism.  The  shuttle-boxes 
and  operating  mechanism  are  not  shown.  Fig.  2  is 
a  sectional  plan  view  of  portions  of  the  loom  shown 
in  Fig.  1,  taken  on  line  2-2,  said  figure,  looking  in  the 
direction  of  arrow  6.  Fig.  3  is  a  side  view  of  the  filling 
stop-motion.  Fig.  4  is  a  plan  view  of  the  parts  shown 
in  Fig.  3,  looking  in  the  direction  of  arrow  c.  Figs.  3 
and  4  are  shown  on  an  enlarged  scale;  and  Fig.  5  is  a 
sectional  view  taken  at  a  point  indicated  by  line  5-5, 
Fig.  2,  looking  in  the  direction  of  arrow  d,  same  figure. 

Numerals  of  references  indicate  thus: — 1,  the  loom 
side;  2,  the  lay;  3,  the  crank-shaft;  4,  the  bottom  shaft; 
5,  the  pulley-shaft;  6,  the  pulley-frame;  7,  the  friction- 
pulley,  provided  with  a  friction-face  7',  with  which  the 
driving-pulley  8  is  moved  into  or  out  of  contact  to 
start  or  stop  the  loom  by  the  ordinary  shipping  mech- 
anism. 

Combined  with  the  friction-pulley  7  and  driving- 
pulley  8  is  the  reversing  mechanism.  The  lever  9  of 
the  reversing  mechanism  is  hung  on  a  stud  9'  in  the 
pulley-frame  6  and  operates  the  reversing  mechanism. 

A  beveled  gear  10  is  fast  on  the  pulley-shaft  5,  and 
drives  large  beveled  gear  11  fast  on  the  bottom  shaft 
4.  The  beveled  gear  11  meshes  with  and  drives  gear 
12  fast  on  the  crank-shaft  3.  Connector  13  connects 
the  crank  3'  and  the  crank-shaft  3  with  the  lay  2,  the 
lay-sword  2'  of  which  is  pivoted  at  its  lower  end  on 
a  pin  14  in  the  lower  part  of  the  frame  1.  In  front  of 
the  lay  2,  is  the  protector-rod  15,  fast  upon  which  at 
each  end  of  the  loom  is  the  binder-finger  16  and  the 
protector-dagger  17.  The  binder-finger  16  is  adapted 
to  bear  against  the  shuttle-binder  of  the  shuttle-box, 
(not  shown)  and  if  the  shuttle  is  not  properly  boxed 
in  the  operation  of  the  loom,  the  binder  will  hold  the 


finger  16  out  and  cause  the  dagger  17  to  strike  the 
knock-off  lever  19  and  stop  the  loom. 

In  Figs.  3  and  4  are  shown,  on  an  enlarged  scale,  a 
side  and  plan  view  of  the  filling  stop-motion.  Refer- 
ring to  said  Figs.  3  and  4,  18  is  the  breast-beam,  under 
which  extends  the  knock-off  rod  20,  which  has  bear- 
ings in  the  ends  of  the  loom.  46  is  a  finger  or  arm 
projecting  from  a  collar  47,  secured  on  the  knock-off 
rod  20  by  set-screw  48.  Stand  49  is  secured  to  the 
rear  face  of  the  breast- 
beam  18  and  extends  in- 
wardly and  has  a  knock-off 
arm  or  finger  50,  pivoted  at 
one  end  on  a  stud  51  at  the 
lower  end  of  said  stand  49, 
and  provided  with  a  knob 
or  projection  50',  adapted  to 
rest  on  the  finger  46.  Se- 
cured to  the  horizontally- 
projecting  end  of  the  stand 
49  by  a  bolt  52  is  a  shoe  or 
track  53,  on  which  is  adapted 
to  rest  and  travel,  as  the  lay 
moves,  the  horizontal  bent 
end  54'  of  the  dagger  54. 
which  is  pivoted  at  its  inner 
end  on  a  bolt  55  in  the  lower 
end  of  the  stand  56,  bolted 
to  the  lay  2.  A  connecting- 
rod  57  is  pivoted  at  one  end 
to  the  dagger  54  and  its  other 
end  to  the  crank-arm  58  on 
the  shaft  59,  which  has  bear- 
ings in  said  stand  56  at  the 
front  of  the  lay.  The  shaft 
59  carries  the  feelers  60,  se- 
cured thereto  by  a  hub  61 
and  set-screws  62.  The  feel- 
ers 60  extend  over  a  trans- 
verse slot  63  cut  in  the  top  of 
the  lay,  and  in  case  they  are 
not  held  up  by  the  filling,  they  will  drop  into  said  slot 
to  automatically  stop  the  loom  by  means  of  the  filling 
stop-motion  above  described,  for  the  forward  motion 
of  the  lay  will  cause  the  end  54'  of  the  dagger  54,  which 
is  dropped  by  the  lowered  position  of  the  feelers  60, 
to  strike  against  the  end  of  the  arm  or  finger  50  and 
force  down  said  arm  and  cause  the  stud  50'  thereon 
to  move  back  the  finger  46  on  the  knock-off  rod  20 
and  revolve  said  rod  to  stop  the  loom,  and  automati- 
cally operate  the  reverse  mechanism. 

A  stand  or  frame  21  is  secured  to  the  loom  side  1, 
by  bolts  22',  and  contains  the  rubber-bunter  pocket  21', 
in  which  is  secured  the  rubber-bunter  22.  Hung  on  a 
stud  23  in  the  lower  part  of  the  frame  21  (see  Fig.  1) 
is  the  angle-lever  24,  which  is  connected  to  the  lever  9 
of  the  reverse  mechanism  by  the  rod  25,  which  extends 
at  its  upper  end  loosely  through  a  hub  24'  on  one  end 
of  said  lever  24.  The  other  end  of  the  rod  25  is 
pivotally  attached  at  9"  to  the  front  end  of  the  lever 
9.  An  expansible  spiral  spring  46  is  mounted  on  the 
rod  25  and  bears  at  its  upper  end  against  the  hub  24'  of 
the  lever  24,  and  at  its  lower  end  against  a  collar  26 
on  the  rod  25.  The  spring  46  is  of  sufficient  tension 
to  communicate  motion  from  the  angle-lever  24  to 
the  lever  9,  and  thus  furnishes  a  yielding  connection 
between  said  lever  24  and  lever  9,  and  not  a  rigid  con- 
nection. 

Attached  to  the  inside  of  the  frame  21,  by  bolts  21", 
is  a  sliding  frame  27,  which  is  provided  with  a  pro- 
jection or  lug  27',  (see  Fig.  2,)  which  extends  in  front 
of  and  in  contact  with  the  rubber-bunter  22.  Said 
frame  27  at  its  front  upper  portion  is  provided  with  a 
hub  27"',  in  which  is  mounted  a  shaft  28,  on  which  a 
dagger  29  is  loosely  supported  at  one  end,  to  move  in- 


169 


•dependency  of  said  shaft.  The  hub  30,  of  a  finger  30', 
is  fast  on  the  shaft  28,  and  said  finger  30'  extends 
under  the  dagger  29  and  acts  to  laise  said  dagger  at 


the  proper  time.  The  inner  end  of  an  arm  32  is  fast 
on  the  knock-off  rod  20.  Said  arm  32  carries  a  stud 
33,  to  which  one  end  of  the  connector  34  is  attached. 
The  other  end  of  said  connector  34  is  attached  to  a  stud 
31'  in  the  hub  31,  which  is  fast  on  the  shaft  28.  The 
arm  32  is  also  provided  with  a  rearwardly-extending 
forked  end  32',  (see  dotted  lines,  Fig.  1,  and  also  Fig. 
5,)  which  is  pivotally  attached  to  a  stud  35'  in  finger  35, 
loose  on  shipper-rod  36,  which  is  provided  with  the 
shipper-handle  37,  carrying  the  auxiliary  handle  38 
hung  thereon. 

A  connector  38'  connects  the  auxiliary  handle  38 
with  the  finger  39,  hung  on  a  pin  40',  fast  in  the  stand 
40.  The  finger  39  has  a  face  39',  which  is  in  contact 
with  the  outer  end  of  the  knock-off  lever  19,  so 
that  when  the  operator  grasps  the  auxiliary  han- 
dle 38,  in  connection  with  the  shipper-handle  37, 
to  start  the  loom,  the  knock-off  lever  19  will 
swing  its  inner  end  against  the  finger  35,  loose 
on  a  shipper-rod  36,  and  cause  the  dagger  29, 
through  forked  end  32',  arm  32,  and  connector  34,  to 
be  raised  out  of  the  path  of  the  block  41,  which  is  fast 
on  the  lay  2,  as  the  lay  beats  up.  After  the  first  pick 
of  the  lay,  the  filling  will  be  under  the  feeler-wires  and 
hold  said  wires  up  in  the  usual  way  to  prevent  the 
operation  of  the  stop  filling  motion  and  the  engage- 
ment of  the  dagger  29  with  the  block  41.  A  pin  42 
is  secured  in  a  slot  42',  in  the  inner  end  of  the  sliding 
frame  27,  (see  Fig.  1)  and  as  said  frame  27  moves  for- 
ward, the  pin  42  will  engage  the  angle-lever  24  and 
move  said  lever  forward  to  communicate  motion, 
through  spring  46,  to  the  lever  9  of  the  reverse  mech- 
anism. The  pin  42  also  acts  as  a  stop  to  limit  the 
backward  motion  of  the  lever  24  when  released  by  the 
pawl  43. 

In  the  stationary  frame  21  is  secured  a  stud  43',  on 
which  is  hung  a  pawl  43.  A  spring  43"  (see  Fig.  2) 
is  coiled  around  said  stud  43',  and  acts  to  cause  the 
pawl  43  to  engage  the  teeth  or  notches  24"  in  the 
upper  end  of  the  upright  arm  of  the  angle-lever  24, 
to  hold  said  lever  in  its  forward  position  on  the  re- 
turn of  the  sliding  frame  21.  The  pawl  43  has  a  rear- 
ward extension  or  heel  43"',  which  will  be  engaged 
by  the  end  of  the  arm  44,  secured  upon  the  under  side 
of  the  lay,  upon  the  rearward  motion  of  the  lay,  to 


disengage  the  pawl  43  from  the  teeth  or  notches  24" 
in  the  upper  end  of  the  lever  24,  and  allow  said  lever 
to  return  to  its  upright  position.    (Shown  in  Fig.  1.) 
From  the  above  description,  in  connection  with  the 
drawings,  the  automatic  oper- 
ation of  the  reverse  mechan- 
ism  on   the   breaking  of  the 
filling,   and   the   operation  of 
the  filling  stop-motion  mech- 
anism will   be   readily  under- 
stood. 

The  operation  of  the  filling 
stop-motion  (shown  in  Figs 
3  and  4)  causes  the  knock-off 
rod  20  to  rotate,  and  through 
finger  35,  operated  by  forked 
arm  32',  the  knock-off  lever  19 
to  operate,  to  move  *the  ship- 
per-rod 36  and  stop  the  loom 
on  the  forward  beat  of  the  lay. 
The  rotation  of  the  knock-off 
rod  20  in  the  operation  of  stop- 
ping the  loom  allows  the  dag- 
ger 29  to  drop  down,  the  lifter- 
finger  30'  being  lowered  by 
the  rotation  of  the  shaft  28. 
through  connector  34  and  arm 
32,  so  that  as  the  lay  moves 
forward  the  block  41  will  en- 
gage the  end  of  the  dagger  29  and  cause  the  sliding 
frame  27  to  move  forward  and  compress  the  bunter  22, 
and  the  pin  42  on  said  frame  27  will  engage  the  angle- 
lever  24,  and  rock  said  lever  24  on  its  pivot-pin  23, 
and  through  the  spring  46  move  down  the  front  end 
of  the  lever  9  and  bring  into  action  the  reverse  mech- 
anism mounted  at  the  opposite  end  of  said  lever,  to 
cause  said  reverse  mechanism  to  operate,  and  move 
the  lay  to  its  rear  position,  as  shown  in  Fig.  1. 

The  forward  motion  of  the  lay  will  -release  the  pawl 
43  from  the  arm  44  and  allow  said  pawl  to  engage  the 


teeth  24"  in  the  upper  end  of  lever  24  and  hold  said 
lever  in  its  forward  position  to  operate  the  reverse 
mechanism,  while  the  sliding  frame  27,  by  the  ex- 
pansion of  the  bunter  22,  will  return  to  its  rear  posi- 


170 


tion  immediately  as  the  lay  starts  to  move  back.  The 
continued  backward  movement  of  the  lay  causes  the 
arm  44  to  engage  the  heel  43'"  of  the  pawl  43,  and  dis- 
engage said  pawl  from  the  teeth  in  the  lever  24,  as 
before  described,  to  allow  said  lever  to  return  to  its 
upright  position  through  the  action  of  spring  45. 

It  will  be  understood  that  the  forward  movement  of 
the  sliding  frame  27  is  very  slight,  but  is  still 
sufficient  to  communicate,  through  angle-lever  24  and 
spring  46  on  the  rod  25,  sufficient  movement  to  the 
front  end  of  the  lever  9  to  bring  into  operation  the 
reverse  mechanism  supported  on  said  lever.  (C romp- 
ton  and  Knowles  Loom  Works.) 


BARDSLEY'S  LENO-MOTION. 

In  weaving  leno  fabrics  it  is  necessary,  in  order  to 
facilitate  the  crossing  of  the  warp-threads,  that  cer- 
tain of  the  said  warp-threads  should  be  given  a  half- 
and-return  movement  during  the  cross-weaving — that 
is  to  say,  during  the  cross-weaving  it  is  necessary  to 
give  to  certain  of  the  harness-frames  and  the  warp- 


threads  which  are  controlled  thereby  at  the  time  of 
each  shed  formation  a  half-and-return  motion,  that 
is,  a  movement  which  shall  carry  such  warp-threads 
from  one  extreme  plane  of  the  normally  open  shed 
to  an  intermediate  or  middle  point  and  then  back 
again  to  the  original  plane.  When  not  concerned  in 
cross-weaving,  the  same  harness-frames  and  their  warp- 
threads  are  required  to  be  given  a  full  motion — that 
is,  to  be  moved  like  all  the  other  harness-frames  and 
their  warp-threads — namely,  from  one  extreme  plane  of 
the  shed  to  the  other  extreme  plane  thereof. 

The  object  of  this  invention  is  to  provide  devices 
of  simple  and  convenient  character  capable  of  being 
applied  readily  to  dobbies  such  as  now  are  in  extensive 
use  and  fitted  to  operate  in  connection  with  the  parts 
of  the  said  dobbies  to  occasion  the  half-and-return 
movement  of  the  required  warp-threads  during  the 
cross-weaving  without  interfering  with  the  capacity 
of  the  usual  parts  of  the  dobbies  to  produce  a  full 
movement  of  the  same  warp-threads  from  one  extreme 
plane  of  the  shed  to  the  other  thereof,  when  the  cross- 
weaving  of  the  said  warp-threads  is  to  be  superseded 
by  other  kinds  of  interweaving  thereof  for  the  time 
being. 

Fig.  1  shows  in  side  elevation  a  well-known  form  of 
dobby  having  applied  thereto  the  said  embodiment  of 
the  invention  and  certain  of  the  harness-frames  which 


are  operated  thereby,  with  the  intermediate  connec- 
tions. Fig.  2  is  a  view  in  plan  of  the  parts  which  are 
represented  in  Fig.  1. 

1,  is  the  usual  actuating-rocker  of  the  dobby,  it  re- 
ceiving movement  in  customary  manner  from  the 
mechanism  of  the  loom  to  which  the  dobby  is  applied. 

2,  is  the  rock-shaft  on  which  the  said  rocker  is  fixed. 

3,  are  the  connectors,  which  transmit  movement  from 
arms  of  the  said  rocker  to  the  lifters.  4,  are  the  usual 
lifters,  they  moving  in  slots  5,  in  the  horizontally- 
extending  portions  6,  of  the  frame  7,  of  the  dobby. 
8,  are  the  hooks  engaged  and"  actuated  by  the  lifters  4. 

9,  are  the  lever-connectors,  having  the  hooks  8, 
pivotally  connected  with  the  upper  and  lower  ends 
thereof,  and  each  lever-connector  being  pivoted  upon 
an  outwardly-projecting  portion  of  one  of  the  harness- 
actuators  or  harness-levers  10.  11,  are  the  connections 
or  cordings  which  serve  to  transmit  movement  from 
the  said  harness-actuators  or  harness-levers  10,  to  the 
harness-frames  H. 

12,  are  the  needles,  and  13,  the  pattern-fingers  or 
levers.    14,  is  the  pattern-cylinder. 

15,  is  an  arm  or  extension  attached  in  accordance 
with  the  present  invention,  to  the  rocker  1.  16, 
is  a  connecting-rod  that  is  actuated  by  the  said 
arm  or  extension  15.     17,  is  a  swinging  arm 
pivoted  at  18,  to  the  dobby-frame  7,  and  which 
£s-     has  the  upper  end  of  the  connecting-rod  16, 
£&.     pivoted  thereto  at  19.    20,  is  a  second  swinging- 
arm,  one  end  of  which  is  joined  pivotally  at  21, 
£3    to  the  swing-arm  17,  while  the  other  end  thereof 
is  joined  pivotally  at  22,  to  the  arm  23. 

24,  is  a  rock-shaft  upon  which  the  arm  23,  is 
made  fast.    25,  is  an  arm  that  also  is  made  fast 
upon  the  rock-shaft  24,  the  said  arm  25,  having 
a  curved  upper  end  that  is  concentric  with  the 
rock-shaft  24.    26,  are  straps  which  are  con- 
nected at  their  outer  ends  to  the  said  curved 
upper  end  of  the  arm  25,  the  inner  ends  of  the 
said  straps  26,  having  connected  thereto  wires 
f       27,  which  are  engaged  with  elongated  loops  or 
/3      links  28  that  are  connected  with  and  form  part 
of  the  harness  connections  or  cordings.  The 
harness-actuators    or    harness-levers    of  those 
harness-frames  which  are  required  to  have  at 
times   the   half-and-return    motion   are  passed 
through  the  said  elongated  loops  or  links  28. 
When  operated  by  the  engagement  of  their 
connected  hooks  or  hooked  jacks  with  the  usual  lifters 

4,  so  as  to  receive  their  full  length  of  stroke  outward, 
the  said  harness-actuators  or  harness-levers,  in  con- 
sequence of  their  engagement  with  the  outer  ends  of 
the  links  28,  serve  to  transmit  to  their  harness-frames 
the  full-length  movement  that  carries  the  warp-threads 
from  the  lower  plane  of  the  shed  to  the  upper  plane 
thereof.  Thus,  whenever  an  outward  movement  of 
one  of  the  said  harness-actuators  or  harness-levers  is 
called  for  by  the  indicators  on  the  pattern-cylinder, 
the  movement  of  the  said  harness-actuator  or  harness- 
lever  which  results  from  the  actuation  of  the  latter 
from  one  of  the  usual  lifters  4,  gives  to  the  connected 
harness-frame  its  full  motion  and  highest  position. 
While  the  harness-actuator  or  harness-lever  remains 
in  its  outer  position,  it  supersedes  the  action  of  the 
oscillating  arm  25,  upon  the  said  connected  harness- 
frame.  This  it  does  by  reason  of  its  engagement  with 
the  outer  end  of  the  elongated  loop  or  link  28,  and  by 
reason  of  the  further  fact  that  the  arm  25,  which  may 
be  termed  a  "half-stroke  lifter,"  has  only  half  the  ex- 
tent of  traverse  that  the  usual  lifters  have. 

Whenever  the  outward  movement  of  one  of  the  said 
harness-actuators  or  harness-levers  is  not  called  for, 
the  latter  remains  stationary  in  its  innermost  position. 
The  length  of  the  opening  in  the  elongated  loop  or  link 
28,  permits  the  said  loop  or  link  and  all  of  the  connec- 


171 


tions  intermediate  the  arm  25,  and  the  harness-frame 
to  move  in  unison  with  the  said  arm  25,  which  is  fast 
upon  a  rock-shaft  24,  having  a  second  arm  23,  also 


made  fast  thereon,  this  latter  arm  having  joined  thereto 
the  swinging  arm  20,  and  the  latter  in  turn  being 
pivotally  connected  with  a  second  swinging  arm  17, 
from  which  last  a  connecting-rod  16,  extends  to  an 
arm  or  extension  that  is  provided  upon  the  rocker  1. 

As  the  rocker  oscillates  it  swings  the  arms  17  and  20, 
carrying  the  pivot  21,  by  which  such  arms  are  joined 
together  above  and  below  the  line  passing  through 
the  pivots  18  and  22,  by  which  such  arms  are  joined  to 
the  dobby-frame  and  the  arm  23.  It  follows  that  each 
swinging  movement  of  the  rocker  1,  in  either  direction 
occasions  a  complete  oscillation  of  the  rock-shaft  24, 
and  arm  25,  and  the  required  half-and-return  move- 
ment of  the  harness-frames,  the  links  28,  playing  back 
and  forth  relatively  to  the  retracted  harness-actuators 
or  harness-levers.  In  other  words,  while  an  ordinary 
lifter  is  occupied  in  making  a  complete  traverse  one 
way,  the  half-stroke  lifter — i.  e.,  arm  25 — will  make  its 
complete  one-way  traverse  and  return. 

The  elongated  links  28,  permit  play  of  the  harness 
connections  or  cordings  relatively  to  the  harness-ac- 
tuators or  harness-levers  when  the  latter  are  in  their 
innermost  or  retracted  position,  and  thus  enable  the 
said  harness  connections  or  cordings  to  be  moved  by 
the  oscillating  arm  25,  and  given  the  desired  half-and- 
return  movement  without  occasioning  movement  of 
the  said  harness-actuators  or  harness-levers.  At  the 
same  time  whenever  one  of  the  harness-actuators  or 
harness-levers  is  actuated,  it  being  moved  outward  by 
reason  of  the  engagement  of  the  lifters  with  its  con- 
nected hooks  or  hooked  jacks,  the  said  harness-actu- 
ator or  harness-lever  acts  upon  the  outer  end  of  the 
corresponding  loop  or  link  and  thereby  operates  to 
occasion  the  full  movement  of  the  harness-frame. 

The  invention  will  be  employed  in  connection  with 
certain  only  of  the  harness-actuators  or  harness-levers 
pertaining  to  a  dobby.  The  remaining  harness-actuators 
or  harness-levers  will  be  operated  in  customary  man- 
ner to  communicate  full-length  movements  to  their 
connected  harness-frames.  (Crompton  and  Knoicles 
Loom  Works.) 


LOOM  FOR  WEAVING  PILE  FABRICS. 

In  this  loom  the  body  or  backing  of  the  pile  fabric 
is  woven  in  the  ordinary  manner  and  the  threads  com- 
posing the  pile-surface  are  introduced  as  warps. 

Use  is  made  of  distenders,  in  the  form  of  thin  blades 
passing  through  the  reed  at  intervals  and  supported 
by  a  frame  and  harness  similar  to  the  heddles  of  a 
loom,  and  these  distenders  project  beyond  the  point 
where  the  picks  are  knocked  up  to  place  and  the  cloth 
fabric  produced,  and  the  parts  are  so  made  and  the 
movements  so  arranged  that  the  distenders  are  carried 
downwardly  and  rest  upon  the  shuttle-rail  of  the  lay 
at  the  same  time  the  pile-warps  are  elevated,  so  that 
a  distending-thread  is  laid  across  the  distenders  be- 
tween them  and  the  pile-warps,  and  when  the  shed  is 
changed  the  pile-warps  are  carried  down,  leaving  loops 
over  the  distending-threads,  which  distending-threads 


are  supported  by  the  distenders,  and  then  a  pick,  is 
interwoven  in  forming  the  body  or  back  of  the 
fabric  after  the  distenders  have  been  raised,  and  as 
the  weaving  progresses,  the  distending-threads  slip  off 
the  ends  of  the  distenders  and  the  fabric  is  complete, 
ready  for  the  distending-threads  to  be  pulled  out  in 
completing  the  fabric,  or  the  pile-loops  may  be  simul- 
taneously cut  as  the  distending-threads  are  drawn  out. 

Fig.  1,  is  a  diagrammatic  view  showing  part  of  the 
lay,  breast-beam  and  heddles  and  with  the  distenders 
raised  for  the  shuttle  to  pass  beneath.  Fig.  2,  is  a 
similar  view  with  the  distenders  depressed  and  resting 
upon  the  shuttle-rail  of  the  lay  for  the  shuttle  to  pass 
over  the  distenders.  Fig.  3,  is  an  elevation,  and  Fig. 
4,  an  end  view,  of  the  frame  in  which  the  distenders 
are  sustained;  and  Fig.  5,  represents  the  fabric  by  an 
enlarged  diagrammatic  section,  and  Fig.  6,  represents 
a  modification  in  the  fabric. 

A,  is  the  breast-beam  around  which  the  woven  fabric 
passes  and  is  wound  upon  a  suitable  cloth-beam.  B, 
is  the  lay  made  with  a  shuttle-rail  5,  and  with  a  reed  6. 

Usually  two  shuttles  are  used;  one  for  laying  in  the 
distending-threads  7,  and  the  other  for  laying  in  the 
filling-threads  8,  which  form  the  backing  of  the  fabric. 
C,  D,  E,  and  F,  indicate  heddle-frames. 

Heddles  C,  and  D,  show  the  raising  and  lowering 
of  the  warps  that  are  used  in  making  the  pile-loops 
and  the  heddles  E,  and  F,  manipulate  the  warps  in 
the  weaving  of  the  body  or  back  of  the  fabric. 

The  distenders  G  are  in  the  form  of  thin  wires  or 
springs,  of  a  width  to  correspond  to  the  length  of 
loops  forming  the  piles  of  the  fabric,  and  each  dis- 
tender  is  made  with  a  vertical  bar  or  T-head  10,  at  the 
ends  of  which  are  slots  or  eyes  for  cords  or  wires  by 
which  such  distenders  are  held  within  the  frame  H, 
and  the  vertical  bars  of  these  distenders  are  of  suffi- 
cient length  for  allowing  the  warps  to  be  raised  or 
lowered  by  the  harness,  the  warps  passing  between 
the  vertical  bars  of  the  distenders. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  have  as  many  distenders  as 
there  are  wires  in  the  reed,  as  the  weaving  is  reliably 
performed  when  there  is  a  distender  to  every  three 
or  four  wires  in  the  reed,  and  the  distenders  G  pass 
through  the  reed  and  are  of  sufficient  length  to  reach 
beyond  the  cloth-making  point,  so  as  to  support  the 
desired  number  of  pile-loops  in  the  woven  fabric  be- 
fore the  distended  pile-loops  pass  beyond  and  separate 
from  the  ends  of  the  distenders  as  the  weaving  pro- 
gresses. These  distenders  are  raised  when  the  shuttle 
or  shuttles  are  to  pass  beneath  them,  and  they  are  de- 
pressed and  lie  substantially  upon  the  shuttle-rail  when 
the  shuttle  is 'to  pass  above  them.  Hence  they  are 
sometimes  in  line  with  the  woven  fabric  and  some- 
times at  an  angle  to  the  same,  and  to  give  freedom  of 
movement  to  the  parts,  the  frame  H  is  pivoted  at  its 
ends  to  the  frame  I,  to  which  the  ordinary  straps  or 


cords  are  applied  in  the  harness-mechanism  for  rais- 
ing or  lowering  the  frame  I,  and  as  this  movement 
takes  place,  the  frame  H  and  the  vertical  bars  10  of  the 
distenders  G,  swing  upon  the  pivots  12,  so  as  to  allow 
the  parts  easily  to  assume  the  proper  positions  as  the 


112 


distenders  stand  at  different  angles  to  the  woven 
fabric. 

When  the  loom  is  in  operation,  the  picks  8  are 
thrown  in  at  the  proper  time  from  a  shuttle  or  shut- 


tles passing  below  the  distenders  G,  so  as  to  weave 
the  body  or  backing  of  the  fabric,  and  when  the  picks 
8  are  laid  in  position  by  the  shuttle  the  distenders  G 
are  elevated  for  the  shuttle  to  pass  beneath  the  same, 
and  when  the  pile-loops  are  to  be  formed  the  dis- 
tenders G  are  lowered,  so  as  to  rest  upon  the  shuttle- 
rail,  as  seen  in  Fig.  2,  for  the  shuttle  O  to  pass  over 
the  same  and  lay  in  a  thread  7  between  the  top  edges 
of  the  distenders  G  and  the  warp-threads  13,  from 
which  the  pile  of  the  fabric  is  made,  and  when  such 
warp-threads  13  are  depressed  and  the  distenders  G 
raised,  a  pick  8  is  to  be  laid  into  the  body  of  the 
fabric  to  confine  and  hold  the  loops  of  the  plush  or  pile 
fabric,  and  the  pile-warps  are  again  raised  and  the 
distenders  depressed  for  laying  in  another  thread  7, 
for  distending  the  loops  of  the  pile. 

The  distenders  are  substantially  in  the  plane  of  the 
upper  shed  while  the  backing  is  being  woven,  and  in 
substantially  the  plane  of  the  lower  shed  when  the 
distending-thread  for  the  loops  is  laid  above  them. 

It  is  advantageous  to  employ  two  or  more  heddles 
for  manipulating  the  warps  from  which  the  pile-loops 
are  made,  so  that  such  loops  may  be  woven  alternately 
between  the  picks  forming  the  body  of  the  fabric,  as 
represented  in  larger  size  in  Fig.  5,  the  threads  of  the 
warp  forming  the  pile-loops  passing  up  between  one 
pick  and  the  next  and  around  the  distending-thread 
7,  and,  passing  beneath  two  picks  and  over  two  other 
picks  in  the  body  or  backing  before  being  again  car- 
ried up  to  form  another  loop  in  the  pile  fabric. 

It  will  be  apparent,  that,  as  the  weaving  progresses 
the  distending-threads  7  pass  off  the  ends  of  the  dis- 
tenders G  progressively,  and  they  remain  in  the  loops 
of  the  pile  fabric  and  they  may  be  drawn  out  at  any 
time,  as  desired,  and  where  the  pile-loops  are  to  be 
cut  any  suitable  blade  may  be  drawn  in  for  cutting 
such  loops  as  the  distending-threads  are  drawn  out, 
the  cutting-blade  being  connected  with  a  distending- 
thread  so  as  to  be  drawn  into  each  loop  in  succession 
as  the  distending-thread  is  drawn  out. 

The  warp-threads  14,  that  are  interwoven  with  picks 
8  to  form  the  backing  of  the  fabric,  may  be  of  any 
desired  character  and  number.  They  are  not  rep- 
resented in  Fig.  S,  to  avoid  confusion.  Three  picks 
may  intervene  between  the  pile-loops,  as  seen  in  Fig. 
6,  instead  of  the  four  shown  in  Fig.  5.  (C.  Goupland 
and  F.  Pearson,  Seymour,  Conn.) 


the  reed  as  in  locked  position.  Fig.  2  is  a  cross  sec- 
tional view  of  the  lay  and  some  of  its  equipments, 
showing  the  lay  as  moved  forward,  and  the  reed  as  in 
unlocked  or  released  position. 

Of  the  letters  of  reference  in  illustrations  a,  desig- 
nates the  breast-beam,  and  b  the  lay  of  the  loom,  c  is 
the  reed,  and  d  the  upper,  and  e  the  lower  bar  of  the 
same.  The  bar  d  is  pivotally  supported  so  that  the 
lower  bar  may  be  swung  backward  and  forward  when 
permitted  to  do  so. 

The  reed  will  be  locked  against  swinging  motion 
in  the  latter  part  of  its  forward  movement,  when  act- 
ing to  beat  up  the  filling,  and  also  manifestly  in  the 
first  part  of  its  backward  movement;  and  it  will  be 
unlocked  in  the  first  part  of  its  forward  movement, 
and  the  last  part  of  its  backward  movement,  so  that 
it  can  swing  upon  its  pivotal  support  in  case  it  meets 
with  an  obstruction,  such  as  a  lodged  shuttle  in  the 
shed,  f  designates  a  holding-bar  which  can  move  to 
a  limited  extent  backward  and  forward  on  an  offset  ff 
formed  on  the  lay,  and  when  moved  forward  may  rest 
with  its  forward  side  or  face  against  the  lower  bar  e 
of  the  reed,  and  hold  the  latter  in  place,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  1;  and  when  the  said  holding-bar  is  moved  back 
the  lower  bar  e,  may  be  free  to  swing  backward,  as 
represented  in  Fig.  2. 

h  designates  springs  having  one  of  their  ends  secured 
to  some  convenient  part  of  the  frame  of  the  machine, 
while  their  free  ends  are  arranged  to  bear  against  the 
rear  side  or  face  of  the  holding-bar  to  maintain  the 
same  in  place  against  other  than  undue  pressure. 

To  hold  the  reed  rigidly  in  place,  a  vertically  mov- 
able locking-bar  i,  on  the  back  side  of  the  lay,  is 
provided. 

The  upper  forward  edge  of  the  locking-plate  is 
bevelled,  as  at  j,  so  as  to  provide  for  reeds  of  different 
size. 

f  designates  a  plate  secured  to  the  lower  side  of 
the  holding-bar,  and  transversely  through  this  plate 
are  formed  slots  Jo,  to  receive  the  shanks  of  headed 
screws  I,  the  slots  Jo,  not  being  sufficiently  large  to 
permit  the  heads  of  the  screws  passing  through  the 
same.  By  this  means  ,  the  holding-bar  is  kept  on  the 
lay,  and  guided  in  its  movements  backward  and  for- 
ward. 

To  move  the  locking-plate  vertically  in  proper  time, 
elbow-levers  are  fulcrumed  on  brackets  «!,  secured  to 
the  bottom  of  the  lay.  Said  levers  being  arranged  so 
that  the  lower  edge  of  the  rocking-plate  may  rest 
upon  the  substantially  horizontal  arm  n  of  the  said 
lever,  whereas  the  other  arm  0,  of  the  said  lever  is 
pivoted  in  a  slot  P,  formed  in  the  inner  end  of  a  rod  Q, 
which  at  its  outer  end  passes  through  a  hole  formed 
in  a  bracket  r,  secured  to  the  breast-beam.  A  spring 
s,  surrounds  the  rod  Q,  and  is  arranged  between  a  collar 
t,  on  the  said  rod  and  the  bracket      so  as  to  operate 


McMICHAEL'S  SMASH  PROTECTOR. 

Fig.  1  is  a  cross  sectional  view  of  this  smash  pro- 
tector, showing  the  lay  as  moved  forward,  but  with 


normally  to  press  the  said  rod  inward  and  operate  the 
elbow  lever  with  a  tendency  to  raise  the  rocking-plate. 
Nuts  u,  are  turned  upon  the  outer  end  of  Q,  to  prevent 
its  disengagement  from  the  bracket  >". 

In  the  operation  of  the  device  when  the  lay  moves 
back,  the  rod  <1  will  be  made  to  act  upon  said  elbow, 
and  move  it  from  the  position  in  which  it  was  shown 


173 


in  Fig.  i,  to  that  in  which  it  is  represented  in  Fig.  2, 
allowing  the  locking-bar  to  drop  and  release  the  hold- 
ing-bar, thus  unlocking  the  reed.  When  the  lay  moves 
forward,  the  operation  just  described  will  be  reversed 
and  the  parts  will  be  moved  from  the  position  in 
which  they  are  shown  in  Fig.  2,  to  that  of  Fig.  i, 
raising  the  locking-bar  and  locking  the  holding-bar 
and  reed  in  place,  so  that  the  latter  can  act  to  beat 
up  the  filling.  It  will  be  understood  that  the  reed 
will  not  be  swung  back,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2,  unless  an 
obstruction  like  a  shuttle  in  the  shed  is  met  with  as 
the  lay  moves  forward,  in  which  case  the  reed  will  be 
released  and  swing  back,  thus  preventing  a  "smash." 
(Woonsocket  Machine  and  Press  Co.) 


if  the  reed  properly  seated  in  its  place  is  carried  by 
the  beating-up  motion  of  the  lay  substantially  beyond 
the  point  where  it  must  meet  a  shuttle,  if  one  is  acci- 

^3 


POEHNERT'S   SMASH  PROTECTOR. 

Fig.  I,  is  a  front  view  of  those  parts  of  a  loom  to 
which  this  protector  more  particularly  pertains;  Fig. 
2,  is  a  top  view  of  such  parts;  Fig.  3,  is  a  view  of  the 
same  in  vertical  section. 

The  object  and  purpose  of  the  improvement  is  the 
prevention  of  injury  to  the  parts  of  the  loom  and  to 
the  cloth  which  is  being  woven  therein,  if  a  shuttle 
or  other  obstacle  is  caught  accidentally  between  the 
reed  and  the  warp-shed  in  the  beating-up  motion  of 
the  lay. 

Letters  of  references  indicate  thus:  «,  denotes  the 
lay  as  a  whole,  which  has  in  practice  the  ordinary 
reciprocating  or  vibratory  motion,  and  h  denotes  the 
reed  which  is  not  fast  in  the  lay,  as  is  the  more  com- 
mon practice,  but  its  upper  edge  is  rather  loosely 
seated  in  the  groove  <\  formed  in  the  underside  of  the 
cross-piece  which  connects  the  two  vertical  arms  of  the 
lay.  The  lower  edge  of  the  reed  is  held  in  place  be- 
tween the  cross-piece  <l  and  the  reed-confiner  c,  which 
is  in  a  general  sense  a  roll  with  trunnions  at  the  ends 
journaled  in  the  upright  arms  of  the  lay  and  having 
some  rotary  motion. 

This  reed-confiner  is  held  in  a  position  to  confine 
the  lower  edge  of  the  reed  between  it  and  the  cross- 
piece  d,  by  means  of  the  reed-confiner  spring  f;  but, 


A 

W  1b 

so  far  as  the  action  of  the  spring  f  is  concerned,  if 
the  reed  in  its  beating-up  motion  strikes  a  shuttle  or 
other  obstacle  in  the  warp-shed,  the  backward  pressure 
thus  put  upon  the  reed  readily  overcomes  the  oppos- 
ing pressure  of  this  spring,  the  reed-confiner  rolls 
backward,  and  the  reed  is  wholly  released  from  its  seat, 
remaining  hanging  loosely  upon  the  warp-shed;  but 


dentally  lying  in  the  warp-shed,  then  the  reed  is  locked 
in  place  in  order  that  it  may  properly  beat  up  the 
filling  thus: — 0  denotes  reed-confiner  locks,  which  are 
simply  pins  having  some  back-and-forth  motion,  being 
loosely  held  in  openings  in  the  cross-piece  d,  prepared 
for  their  reception,  and  for  the  most  of  the  time  held 
out  of  contact  with  the  reed-confiner  by  means  of  the 
springs  h,  the  said  pins  being  allowed  play  between 
the  bunter  i'  and  the  reed-confiner  e,  the  spring  h  bear- 
ing against  the  cross-piece  d  at  one  end,  and  the  head 
of  the  pin  at  the  other  to  retract  the  confiner-locks. 

Just  as  the  reed  is  about  to  beat  up  a  pick  into  its 
place,  as  a  part  of  the  piece  of  cloth  that  is  being 
woven,  these  reed-confiner  locks  strike  the  bunters  * 
and  are  thereby  forced  forward  into  the  sockets  €  in 
the  reed-confiner.  In  such  position  they  lock  the  reed 
firmly  in  its  place  to  accomplish  its  normal  and  proper 
beating-up  function,  the  springs  k  permitting  necessary 
beating-up  motion  of  the  lay,  but  holding  the  reed, 
nevertheless,  locked  in  place. 

When  the  reed  retreats  in  the  backward  motion  of 
the  lay,  and  the  locks  V  cease  to  have  contact  with 
the  bunters  i,  the  reed-confiner  is  unlocked  and  re- 
mains unlocked  until  another  beating-up  motion  of 
the  lay  again  brings  the  locks  0  into  contact  with  the 
bunters  i,  which  have  just  been  spoken  of  as  though 
they  were  practically  rigid  and  stationary.  As  a  mat- 
ter of  fact,  they  rest  against  springs  fc,  which  are  con- 
siderably stouter  (that  is,  resist  compression  with 
greater  degree)  than  the  lock-springs  h,  so  that  the 
action  so  far  described  will  take  place  if  everything 
goes  on  as  it  should,  but,  if  for  any  reason  the  locks 
0  should  not  properly  enter  the  sockets  e'  in  the  beat- 
ing-up motion  of  the  lay,  then  these  springs  fc  will 
permit  the  bunters  i  to  retreat  and  so  prevent  break- 
age of  the  parts  of  the  loom.  (Edward  Poehnert, 
Rockrillc,  Conn.) 


THE  KNOWLES  CLOTH  SEPARATOR. 

This  cloth  separator  is  used  for  cutting  fringes,  sep- 
arating cloth  when  a  center  selvage  is  used  and  so  on, 
while  the  cloth  is  on  the  loom  and  before  it  is  wound 
upon  the  cloth-roll.  The  accompanying  diagram  will 
clearly  explain  its  method  of  operation. 

A  indicates  the  breast-beam  of  the  loom;  B  a  way 
screwed  onto  the  breast-beam  and  extending  the 
length  of  the  beam;  C  is  a  casting  which  slides  on 
the  way  B,  and  can  be  fastened  to  it  by  means  of  the 
screw  D;  E  is  one  part  of  the  shear  and  is  bolted  fast 
to  the  casting  C;  F  is  the  other  part  of  the  shear  and 
is  fastened  to  the  part  E  by  the  screw  P;  G  is  the  arm 
which  is  connected  to  F  by  the  pin  K,  and  is  fast  upon 
the  shaft  L;  H  is  the  rod  which  is  fastened  to  the  stud 
I,  this  stud  being  a  part  of  an  arm  similar  to  G  but 
placed  at  the  end  of  the  rocker-shaft  L;  J  is  the  pro- 
tector-rod which  when  the  lay  comes  forward  strikes 
against  H,  rocking  the  shaft  L  and  the  arm  G,  thus 


174 


closing  the  shear  F  upon  E  and  cutting  the  cloth  M 
which  is  between  the  shear.  When  the  lay  returns  to 
the  back  center  the  shears  are  opened  by  means  of 


a  spring  (not  shown).  N  is  a  board  which  extends  the 
width  of  the  breast-beam  and  is  held  in  place  by  a  pair 
of  brackets  which  are  not  shown  in  the  illustration. 
(Crompton  and  Knowles  Loom  Works.) 


ZUPPINGER'S  CLOTH  SEPARATOR. 

The  object  of  its  construction  is  to  produce  a  cutter 
which  will  not  cut  into  the  edges  of  the  cloth,  the 
purpose  being  to  produce  a  cutter  having  a  wide  por- 
tion provided  with  slits  in  which  the  adjacent  edges 
of  the  strips  of  cloth  may  enter,  with  the  cutting-edge 
between  the  widths  of  cloth. 


Of  the  accompanying  illustrations,  Fig.  i  is  a  per- 
spective view  of  a  cloth-roll  on  a  loom,  showing  the 
protection-rail  and  the  cutter  carried  on  the  edges  of 
the  cloth.  Fig.  2  is  a  perspective  view  of  the  cutter 
removed. 

A  designates  a  cloth-roller  of  a  loom;  B  the  double 
widths  of  cloth  wound  thereon;  C  the  protection  board 
covering  the  roller  c;  and  D  is  the  cutter  which  is 
secured  to  a  flat  metallic  member  E,  which  is  provided 


G  is  a  sliding  member  having  the  bifurcated  end  G' 
securely  fitting  the  apertures  Q,  and  the  L-shaped  por- 
tion at  its  other  end,  which  is  designed  to  abut  against 
the  protection-board,  or  in  case  no  protection-board  is 
used  then  to  bear  against  the  roller  c.  The  adjacent 
edges  of  the  widths  of  cloth  engage  in  the  slots  d, 
and  support  the  cutter,  while  substantially  L-shaped 
portion  bears  against  the  protection-board  or  roller. 
When  being  used  in  connection  with  the  former,  the 
portion  G,  has  the  L-shaped  portion  upturned,  and 
when  in  use  with  the  roller  downwardly  turned. 

It  will  be  readily  seen  that  a  cutter  constructed  in 
accordance  with  the  thus  given  directions  will  prevent 
the  sides  of  the  cloth  being  cut  into,  in  case  the  work 
does  not  run  straight.    (John  Zuppinger,  Phila.) 


with  the  slot  d,  extending  from  the  two  side  edges 
tuio  the  cutter. 


BOSWORTH'S  AUTOMATIC  PICK-COUNTER. 

In  weaving,  a  certain  number  of  picks  are  thrown 
by  the  shuttle  to  produce  cloth  of  a  given  weight. 
The  number  of  picks  are  determined  in  a  given  space — 
say  one  inch  of  cloth — by  the  speed  at  which  the 
fabric  is  fed  through  the  loom  with  reference  to  a 
given  speed  (picks  per  minute). 

The  object  of  the  counter  is  to  provide  a  simple 
device,  and  one  which  is  contained  in  small  compass, 
by  means  of  which  the  number  of  picks  being  woven 
into  a  certain  fabric  may  be  determined  at  any  time. 

To  produce  this  result  a  dial  is  employed,  having  a 
moving  hand  connected  to  a  pawl-and-ratchet  device 
in  such  a  manner  that  the  hand  is  caused  to  move  one 
space  or  point  each  time  the  shuttle  of  the  loom  is 
operated.  In  connection  with  this  pawl-and-ratchet 
device,  there  is  employed  a  trip-wheel  connected  with 
the  moving  fabric  in  such  a  way  as  to  move  continu- 
ously therewith  and  automatically  start  and  stop  the 
ratchet  device,  so  that  the  counting  shall  take  place 
at  certain  predetermined  points  and  continue  for  a 
predetermined  interval,  so  that  the  number  of  picks 
or  threads  which  go  into  a  certain  length  of  cloth 
shall  be  accurately  counted  at  stated  intervals  during 
the  operation  of  weaving  said  fabric. 

Fig.  i  is  a  front  view  of  the  dial;  Fig.  2  is  a  rear 
view  of  the  same  showing  the  ratchet-wheel  and  trip- 
wheel;  Fig.  3  is  a  side  elevation,  partly  in  section,  of 
the  same. 

Letters  of  references  indicate  thus: — a  represents  the 
dial,  which  is  numbered  from  a  normal  or  starting 
point  marked  zero  with  as  many  numbers  as  desired. 
Supported  in  front  of  the  dial,  (covered  with  a  glass) 
is  a  hand  0,' ,  which  is  mounted  on  the  projecting  end 
of  an  arbor  a2,  which  passes  through  the  dial  and  is 
supported  in  a  frame  at  the  rear  of  said  dial.  To  this 
arbor  there  is  rigidly  connected  a  ratchet-wheel  a3, 
which  has  as  many  teeth  in  its  periphery  as  there  are 
numbers  on  the  face  of  the  dial,  each  tooth  correspond- 
ing to  one  space  or  point  on  the  dial.  There  is  also 
mounted  on  the  arbor  a  spiral  spring,  one  end  of  which 
is  connected  to  the  frame  and  the  other  end  connected 
to  the  ratchet-wheel  or  arbor,  so  that  as  the  hand  is 
moved  from  the  zero  or  starting  point,  the  spring  is 
wound  up  and  tends  to  restore  the  hand  to  its  normal 
position  when  released. 

Pivoted  on  the  arbor  a2  adjacent  to  the  ratchet-wheel 
is  a  vibrating-lever  b,  which  carries  a  pivoted  spring- 
actuated  pawl  b',  adapted  to  engage  the  teeth  of  the 
ratchet-wheel,  the  pawl  being  constructed  with  a 
laterally-extending  pin  b3  which  projects  entirely 
through  the  pawl,  so  as  to  engage  the  ratchet-teeth 
at  one  side  of  the  pawl  and  form  a  projection  at  the 
other  end  to  be  engaged  by  a  trip-wheel.  Adjacent  to 
the  pivoted  pawl  on  the  lever,  is  a  holding-pawl  b*, 
which  is  pivoted  to  the  frame  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
engage  the  teeth  in  the  ratchet-wheel  to  prevent  the 


175 


same  from  returning  by  the  action  of  the  spring  a*. 
The  holding-pawl  b3  is  provided  with  a  laterally-ex- 
tending projection  b*,  which  stands  in  line  with  the 
pin  b1  on  the  pawl  and  sufficiently  removed  there- 
from so  that  they  will  not  contact  in  the  ordinary 
operation  of  the  lever-pawl  in  operating  the  ratchet- 
wheel. 

Adjacent  to  the  ratchet-wheel  and  journaled  loosely 
•on  the  arbor  a",  a  trip-wheel  c  is  formed,  with  a  portion 
C  of  its  periphery  depressed  so  that  it  stands  sub- 
stantially coincident  with  or  within  the  bottoms  of 
the  ratchet-teeth  in  the  ratchet-wheel.  The  remaining 
portion  c2  of  the  wheel-periphery  is  formed  coincident 
with  or  slightly  larger  than  the  outer  ends  or  points  of 
the  teeth  of  the  ratchet-wheel.  The  projection  &2  in 
the  operating-pawl  b'  extends  over  the  depressed  por- 
tion of  the  periphery  of  the  trip-wheel  and  is  adapted 
to  be  engaged  and  moved  outward  by  the  portion 
C*  of  said  wheel,  which  acts  as  a  cam-projection  and 
support  for  said  pawl,  so  that,  when  the  pawl  is  en- 
gaged thereby  it  may  still  vibrate  with  the  lever,  but 
shall  not  engage  the  teeth  in  the  ratchet-wheel. 


The  trip-wheel  is  made  to  revolve  continuously  at 
a  speed  corresponding  to  the  speed  of  the  fabric 
through  the  loom,  while  the  vibrating-lever  b  is  con- 
nected so  as  to  vibrate  each  time  the  shuttle  of  the 
loom  is  operated.  The  depressed  portion  of  the  trip- 
wheel  corresponds  in  length  to  a  certain  length  of 
cloth,  so  that  the  number  of  vibrations  which  the 
shuttle  makes  in  this  space  will  represent  the  number 
of  picks  or  threads  which  are  woven  into  a  certain 
length  of  the  fabric. 

To  provide  for  adjusting  the  space  during  which 
the  ratchet-wheel  will  operate,  the  trip-wheel  is  con- 
structed with  an  adjustable  segment  c3,  which  is  pivoted 
on  the  arbor  and  has  a  periphery  corresponding  to  the 
enlarged  periphery  c2  of  the  trip-wheel.  The  end  of 
this  segment  is  beveled  off  to  form  a  cam-face  to  en- 
gage the  pin  or  projection  b2  in  the  operating-pawl 
and  is  further  provided  with  a  slotted  opening  C*, 
concentric  with  the  periphery  of  the  wheel,  and  a 
clamp-screw  c5  in  the  wheel  passes  through  said  slotted 
opening,  so  as  to  hold  said  segment  in  different  posi- 
tions of  adjustment.  The  trip-wheel  C  is  further  pro- 
vided with  a  cam-projection  c6,  which  extends  out- 


wardly from  the  enlarged  periphery  c2,  and  is  adapted, 
as  the  wheel  is  rotated,  to  move  the  operating-pawl  b' 
farther  away  from  the  ratchet-wheel  and  cause  it, 
through  the  agency  of  the  projection  &2,  to  engage  and 
move  the  holding-pawl  6s  so  as  to  entirely  disengage 
the  ratchet-wheel  and  permit  it,  through  the  agency 
of  the  spring,  to  return  to  its  normal  position. 

For  imparting  motion  to  the  trip-wheel  c,  a  grooved 
pulley  c1  is  employed,  which  is  connected  rigidly  to 
said  trip-wheel  and  over  which  passes  a  cord  or  belt 
c\  said  belt  passing  over  guiding-pulleys  or  sheaves 
c°,  c10,  c",  and  thence  around  the  beam  on  which  the 
fabric  or  the  warp  is  wound  or  unwound,  a  weighted 
pulley  P  being  provided  between  two  of  the  guiding- 
pulleys  to  take  up  the  slack,  as  shown  in  Figs.  2  and  3. 

The  operation  of  the  device  is  thus: — The  loom  be- 
ing set  to  feed  the  fabric  at  a  speed  to  produce  a  cer- 
tain number  of  picks  to  the  inch,  is  started  with  the 
hand  a'  at  the  normal  or  zero  point,  and  the  operat- 
ing-pawl b'  engaging  the  ratchet-wheel  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  depressed  portion  of  the  trip-wheel.  When 


a  number  of  points  on  the  dial  are  counted  off  cor- 
responding to  the  number  of  picks,  the  movable  seg- 
ment of  the  trip-wheel  is  secured  by  a  screw  c5  in  a 
position  to  disengage  the  pawl,  the  depressed  portion 
of  the  periphery  of  the  trip-wheel  being  thus  limited  to 
correspond  to  a  certain  length  of  fabric — say,  one 
inch.  Each  time  the  trip-wheel  makes  one  revolution, 
therefore,  the  dial-hand  will  be  moved  through  the 
operation  of  the  vibrating-lever,  pawl  and  ratchet- 
wheel,  a  number  of  points  corresponding  to  the  num- 
ber of  picks  woven  into  a  given  space,  when  it  will  be 
thrown  out  and  remain  in  the  position  counted  until 
the  trip-wheel  makes  a  complete  revolution,  when,  by 
the  cam-projection  c6,  both  pawls  will  be  disengaged 
from  the  ratchet-wheel,  and  the  wheel  and  hand  re- 
turned to  their  normal  positions  by  the  springs  pre- 
viously referred  to.  This  counting  of  the  number  of 
picks  to  the  inch  will  take  place  at  certain  predeter- 
mined intervals,  depending  upon  the  diameter  of  the 
trip-wheel,  and  may  be  made  to  correspond  to  any 
length  of  cloth  desired— say,  for  instance,  ten  or  twelve 
inches. 

The  operator  is  thus  enabled  to  determine  at  any 


17G 


time  by  the  dial,  just  how  many  picks  are  being  placed 
in  the  fabric,  and  if  a  greater  or  less  number  than  the 
one  desired  appears  then  the  loom  is  regulated  to 
secure  the  proper  number.  {Harvey  W.  Bosworth, 
Urbana,  0.) 

LANCASTER'S  PICK-MEASURING  DEVICE. 

The  object  of  this  device  is  to  indicate  upon  a  glance 
at  a  piece  of  cloth,  (whether  in  the  loom  and  in  the 
process  of  weaving,  or  after  it  leaves  the  weaver's 


hands,  and  when  undergoing  inspection  in  the  course 
of  finishing  and  delivery)  the  number  of  picks  it  con- 
tains in  a  given  length. 

Fig.  i  is  a  sectional  side  view  showing  only  so  much 
of  a  loom  as  necessary  to  give  to  the  reader  a  clear 
view  of  the  construction  and  mode  of  operation  of  the 
device.    Fig.  2,  is  a  front  view  of  the  same. 

A,  designates  the  crank-shaft  of  a  loom  by  which 
the  lay  is  operated,  and  b  designates  the  center  bear- 
ing of  the  said  shaft. 

C,  designates  a  worm  on  the  crank-shaft  a,  which 
meshes  with  and  operates  a  worm-wheel  d,  arranged 
to  turn  in  suitable  bearings  connected  with  bracket  e, 
supported  from  the  centre  bearing  b,  or  other  sta- 
tionary part  of  the  loom-frame. 

F,  designates  a  lever  fulcrumed  as  at  9,  at  a  suitable 
point  and  upon  a  suitable  part  of  the  loom,  and  pro- 
vided at  the  end  of  its  longer  arm  with  a  wire  h,  which 
extends  up  in  front  of  the  harness,  (not  shown)  and 
through  a  suitable  guide  £  on  the  top  of  the  loom- 
frame.  The  said  wire  is  provided  at  the  shed  point 
with  a  mail  or  eye  through  which  passes  a  thread 
contrasting  in  color  or  other  visual  character  with  the 
threads  or  yarns  being  woven  into  the  goods,  and 
which  thread  extends  in  the  direction  of  the  warps. 
The  opposite  end  of  the  lever  f  bears  against  the  face 
of  the  worm-wheel  d,  which,  at  a  suitable  point  in 
the  path  of  the  end  of  the  lever,  is  provided  with  a 
slot  or  depression  k,  into  which  the  end  of  the  lever, 
in  contact  with  the  worm-wheel,  may  fall  at  each  revo- 


lution of  the  said  wheel,  drawing  the  wire  h  and  thread 
carried  thereby  down,  during  one  or  more  picking 
operations,  depending  on  the  length  or  extent  of  the 
slot  or  depression  k;  the  wire  fo,  being  raised  by  the 
shorter  arm  of  the  lever  f,  riding  out  of  the  depression 
k,  formed  in  the  face  of  the  worm-wheel  d  upon  the 
extreme  outer  face,  and  so  raising  the  longer  arm  of 
said  lever  against  the  gravity  thereof,  and  subsequently 
the  wire.  The  continued  revolution  of  the  wheel 
causes  the  end  of  the  slot  to  act  against  the  lever  and 
move  it  so  as  to  elevate  the  wire,  which  so  remains 
until  the  slot  comes  round  again. 

The  construction  and  arrangement  of  parts  as  herein 
shown  are  such,  that  the  worm-wheel  d  will  be  moved 
to  the  extent  of  one  of  its  teeth  at  each  revolution  of 
the  crank-shaft  a,  and  while  the  end  of  the  lever  f, 
adjacent  to  the  worm-wheel  rides  on  the  face  of  said 
wheel,  the  colored  thread  controlled  by  the  wire  ft, 
will  float  on  upper  side  of  the  goods  as  woven,  and 
when  said  end  of  said  lever  drops  into  the  slot  or  de- 
pression the  colored  thread  will  be  drawn  down  and 
woven  into  the  cloth  for  two  picks  and  show  on  the 
back  of  the  goods. 

Calculating  now.  for  example,  that  the  worm-wheel 
has  sixty  teeth,  and  that  each  tooth  represents  a  pick, 
the  colored  thread  will  thus  float  on  the  face  of  the 
cloth  for  fifty-eight  picks,  and  on  the  back  for  two 
picks.  From  explanations  thus  given,  it  will  be  readily 
seen  that  any  measure  for  any  number  of  picks  per 
inch  required,  can  be  readily  made.  The  measure  so 
obtained  can  be  laid  upon  the  goods  along  the  line 
where  the  colored  thread  is  woven  in,  so  that  the  at- 
tendant can  tell  at  a  glance  whether  the  requirements 
as  to  picks  per  inch  are  being  met  by  the  weaver. 
{.John  Lancaster,  Dover,  N.  H.) 


LUTTON'S  PATTERN-CHAIN  SUPPORT. 

The  abject  of  this  chain-support  is  to  form  a  rack 
to  hold  a  long  pattern-chain  and  keep  it  straight. 

Fig.  1  is  a  view  of  the  support  in  side  elevation 
showing  the  position  of  the  chain  thereon.  Fig.  2,  is 
a  top  plan  view,  partly  in  section.  Fig.  3,  is  an  en- 
larged view  in  detail,  in  side  elevation  of  the  support- 
ing rails;  and  Fig.  4,  is  a  top  plan  view  of  the  same. 


The  support  comprises  four  standards,  those  at  the 
rear  being  denoted,  respectively,  by  A,  A',  and  those 
at  the  front  being  denoted  by  a,  a't  the  standards  being 


177 


connected  by  low-down  girders  B,  and  at  their  upper 
ends  by  the  chain-supporting  rails  C,  C,  which  extend, 


respectively,  from  the  rear  standard  A,  to  the  front 
standard  ft,  and  from  the  rear  standard  A',  to  the  front 
standard  «'. 

The  rear  standards  are  taller  than  the  front  stand- 
ards, and  carry  at  their  upper  ends  rollers  D,  for  the 
reception  of  the  links  at  the  opposite  edges  of  the 
pattern-chain.  The  side  rails  C,  C,  from  their  con- 
nection at  «2,  with  the  rear  standards  curve  down- 
wardly and  forwardly  to  a  point  between  the  front 
standards  «,  ft',  and  thence  extend  upwardly  to  the 
tops  of  the  standards  ft,  «',  to  which  they  are  con- 
nected, and  are  there  provided  with  rollers  dt  for  the 
reception  of  the  links  at  the  opposite  edges  of  the 
pattern-chain. 

The  supporting-rails  C,  C,  are  each  provided  with 
inwardly-extending  flanges  c,  c',  along  which  the  ends 
of  certain  of  the  cross-rods  of  the  pattern-chain  ride, 
the  said  flanges  c,  C,  being  cut  away,  as  shown  at 
c2,  (?,  for  a  short  distance  from  the  rear  standards, 
sufficiently  to  permit  the  cross-rods  of  shorter  length 
to  drop  through. 

To  the  rear  of  the  standards  A,  A',  and  forming  a 
continuation  of  the  side  supporting-rails  C,  C,  at  their 
rear  ends,  are  supports  E,  E',  sufficiently  near  together 
to  retain  the  ends  of  the  shorter,  as  well  as  the 
longer,  cross-rods  thereon  during  the  passage  of  the 
chain  from  the  roller  or  wheel  (not  shown)  where  the 
chain  is  brought  into  action. 

The  series  of  side  links  of  the  opposite  edges  of  the 
pattern-chain  are  denoted,  respectively,  by  F,  F',  the 
shorter  cross-rods,  which  form  the  greater  portion  of 
the  chain,  by  f,  and  the  longer  cross-rods,  which  are 


inserted  at  intervals  throughout  the  length  of  the  chain 
by  V. 

As  the  chain  travels  along  down  the  guides  E,  E', 
to  the  point  where  the  supporting  side  rails  C,  C\ 
are  located,  the  shorter  cross-rods  f,  are  dropped  be- 
tween the  cut-away  portions  c2,  c3,  of  the  flanges  on 
the  side  rails,  while  the  longer  cross-rods  f  are 
carried  along  the  past  cut-away  portions  c2,  c3,  thereby 
holding  the  chain  suspended  at  intervals  and  in  such 
a  manner  that  it  will  not  be  liable  to  become  kinked 
and  the  cross-rods  will  not  be  liable  to  become  dis- 
placed. As  it  passes  off  the  ends  of  the  flanges  c,  c', 
at  the  front,  the  chain  is  directed  up  and  over  the 
rollers  d,  thence  to  the  rollers  D,  and  thence  to  the 


roller  or  wheel  (not  shown),  where  the  chain  is 
brought  into  action. 

In  order  to  retard  the  downward  sliding  of  the 
longer  rods  and  the  consequent  tendency  to  slip  off 
the  ends  of  the  flanges  c,  c',  before  the  previously- 
released  loop  is  drawn  up  over  the  rollers  d  there  are 
provided  beveled  or  rounded  faced  stops  G,  G',  which 
uprise  from  the  upper  faces  of  the  flanges  c,  c',  in 
such  a  position  that  the  ends  of  the  longer  cross- 
rods  f,  will  be  forced  to  ride  over  them  during  their 
travel.  These  stops  G,  G',  are  secured  to  the  side 
rails  by  screws  ff,  extending  through  depending  flanges 
on  the  stops  at  the  outside  of  the  supporting-rings. 
(William  J.  Lutton,  Pntcrson,  N.  J.) 


PITMAN  FOR  LOOMS. 

Heretofore  these  pitmans  or  connecting-rods,  as 
used  for  connecting  the  crank-shaft  with  the  lay,  have 
been  constructed  of  wood  with  a  semi-circular  notch 


in  each  end  to  fit  the  crank-pin  on  the  shaft  and  the 
wrist-pin  on  the  lay,  respectively,  the  pitmen  being 
held  to  each  pin  by  a  U-shaped  strap  of  leather  or 
metal  straddling  the  end  of  the  pitman  and  fastened 
by  a  transverse  bolt.  The  constant  and  severe  shock 
produced  by  the  successive  thrust  and  pull  tends  to- 
split  the  ends  of  the  pitmen,  necessitating  frequent 
repairs.  The  new  pitman  aims  to  overcome  this  dif- 
ficulty and  expense. 

Fig.  i,  is  an  end  view  of  so  much  of  a  loom  as  is 
necessary  to  illustrate  the  appliance  of  said  pitman 
to  it.  Figs.  2  and  3,  are  side  and  top  views  of  a  pit- 
man, partly  in  section. 

A  is  the  wooden  body  one  end  of  which  has  the 
notch  «,  strap  B,  and  fastening-bolt  C,  whereas  the 


other  end  is  provided  with  a  metallic  knuckle  D,  hav- 
ing an  eye  d  for  the  wrist-pin  or  crank-pin,  and  a  cen- 


178 


tral  flat  shank  d\  which  is  received  in  a  slot  or  nar- 
row gain  cut  in  the  end  of  the  body  A.  The  should- 
ers d2  on  each  side  of  the  shank  abut  against  the  end 
of  the  body  A.  The  shank  d'  is  provided  with  an  en- 
largement <Z3,  which  fits  a  corresponding  enlargement 
of  the  gain  in  the  body  A.  Bolt  E  passes  trans- 
versely through  the  end  of  the  body  A,  and  the  shank 
■d',  and  clamps  these  parts  firmly  together.  A  similar 
knuckle  may  also  be  used  at  the  other  end  of  the 
pitman.  (R.  H.  Livesey  and  W.  Squire,  Fall  River, 
Mass.) 

LOOM-GEAR. 

In  the  majority  of  looms  as  now  constructed,  the 
fast  and  loose  pulleys  are  mounted  on  one  end  of 
the  crank-shaft  and  the  crank-shaft  gear  and  hand- 
wheel  at  the  opposite  end,  the  hand-wheel  being  usually 
required  in  order  to  insure  the  safety  of  the  operative. 

Such  gears  are  usually  cast  in  one  piece  with  the 
hand-wheel  and  keyed  to  the  shaft  with  the  gear-hub 
close  to  the  shaft-bearing,  the  key  being  driven  home 
from  the  outside,  and  when  the  gear  has  to  be  re- 
moved, it  is  effected  by  the  aid  of  a  forcing  appa- 
ratus, the  operation  usually  resulting  in  the  breakage 
of  the  hub  by  forcing  it  over  the  key,  and  the  whole 
casting  must  be  thrown  aside. 

It  has  been  proposed  to  make  the  gear  and  hub 
detachable,  keying  the  latter  to  the  shaft  and  securing 
hub  and  gear  together  by  bolts;  but  when  such  gears 
have  been  used,  they  have  either  been  applied  to  the 
crank-shaft  inside  the  pulleys,  which  serve  as  a  guard, 
or  else  the  hand-wheel  has  been  keyed  to  the  shaft 
outside  the  gear.  In  the  former  case  the  pulleys  must 
be  removed  to  detach  the  gear, 
and  in  the  latter  case  the  hand- 
wheel  has  to  be  forced  off  over  the 
key,  breaking  the  hand-wheel. 

In  the  at  present  to  be  explained 
gear  all  of  the  foregoing  _  objec- 
tions are  overcome  by  making  the 
hub,  gear,  and  hand-wheel  in  three 
separate  pieces  or  castings,  secur- 
ing the  gear  and  hand-wheel  to- 
gether and  to  the  hub  by  suitable 
bolts,  the  hub  alone  being  keyed 
to  the  crank-shaft.  In  this  way 
the  hand-wheel  and  gear  may  be 
removed  from  the  hub  together  or 
separately  for  any  needed  repairs, 
and  a  guard  is  always  present  for  the  gear. 

The  accompanying  illustration  is  a  vertical  sectional 
view  of  this  loom-gear. 

C,  indicates  the  crank-shaft  of  a  loom,  running  in 
proper  bearings  of  the  loom-frame. 

The  hub  a,  having  a  disk-like  body  a',  is  perma- 
nently attached  to  the  shaft  beyond  the  loom  side  by 
key  «x,  the  body  being'  annularly  shouldered  on  its 
outer  side  at  a2. 

A  ring-gear  b  is  provided  with  a  web  apertured 
to  snugly  fit  over  the  shoulder  a2  of  the  hub-body  to 
which  it  is  detachably  secured  by  bolts  &x. 

The  hand  or  balance-wheel  c  is  formed  on  an  an- 
nular body  C,  having  at  its  inner  end  an  inturned 
flange  c2,  which  slips  over  the  shoulder  a2,  the  flat 
face  of  the  wheel-flange  c2  resting  against  the  flange 
»'  of  the  gear.  The  bolts  Z>x  are  extended  through 
the  adjacent  flanges  of  the  gear  and  wheel  into  the 
hub-body,  rigidly  securing  the  three  parts  together 
•to  operate  as  a  single  casting. 

By  the  construction  described  a  very  firm  and  strong 
connection  is  effected  between  the  parts,  the  hub  by 
its  shoulder  a2  providing  a  common  support  for  the 
•gear  and  wheel,  while  the  latter  effectually  guards  the 
gear  and  prevents  accidents  to  the  operative. 


As  the  hub  and  balance-wheel  will  under  ordinary 
circumstances  last  as  long  as  the  crank-shaft  itself,  it 
is  only  necessary  to  renew  the  gear  when  worn  out, 
or  to  turn  it  relatively  to  the  hub  to  present  new 
teeth  at  the  points  of  greatest  wear.  (Andrew  F.  Mc- 
Cann,  Fall  River,  Mass.) 


PILE-WIRE  FOR  LOOMS. 

Fig.  i  represents  a  side  elevation,  and  Fig.  2  is  a 
top  view  of  the  same. 

A,  represents  a  pile-wire  provided  at  its  end  with  a 
longitudinal  groove  a,  or  with  a  longitudinal  grooved 
holder  applied  to  the  end  of  the  pile-wire.  The 
grooved  portion  of  the  pile-wire  or  holder  serves  for 
receiving  the  base  of  the  cutting-blade  B,  by  which 
the  pile  of  the  fabric  is  cut  as  the  pile-wire  is  moved 
transversely  across  the  loom. 

The  cutting-blade  B  is  provided  with  a  down- 
wardly-slanting sharpened  edge  b,  which  extends 
from  the  widest  portion  of  blade  to  the  innermost 
point  of  the  same,  the  straight  base  of  the  blade 
being  blunt,  so  as  to  firmly  rest  throughout  its  entire 
length  in  the  groove  of  the  pile-wire.  The  outer  end 
of  the  blade  is  made  tapering  and  bent  up  to  form  a 
guard  that  is  usually  employed  in  pile-wires  of 
this  class,  so  as  to  produce  the  glancing  off  on  the 
reeds  and  prevent  injury  to  the  same.  The  outer  end 
of  the  pile-wire  or  holder  is  provided  with  a  side  recess 
d,  which  extends  under  the  bottom  of  the  grooved 
end,  the  pile-wire  or  holder  being  thickened  along 
the  opposite  side,  so  as  to  reinforce  it  at  the  outer  end 
and  make  up  for  the  diminished  strength  caused  by 
the  recess.  To  the  body  of  the  cutting-blade  B,  at 
the  widest  part  of  the  same,  is  riveted,  by  a  rivet  C 
having  a  square  shank,  a  flat  spring  C,  made  in  shape 
of  an  L,  that  extends  into  the  side  recess  d  of  the 
wire  or  holder,  said  spring  being  provided  at  its 
lowermost  free  end  with  a  laterally-extending  heel  or 
shoulder  that  springs  in  below  the  blunt  base  of  the 
cutting-blade  and  serves  thereby  to  lock  the  cutting- 
blade  firmly  to  the  holder,  so  as  to  prevent  the  re- 
lease of  the  blade  from  the  pile-wire. 

Owing  to  the  square  shank  of  the  rivet  C,  the  posi- 
tion of  the  locking-spring  C  on  the  blade  cannot  be 
changed,  and  hence  the  locking-spring  will  always 
engage  in  the  side  recess  of  the  pile-wire  or  holder. 
The  cutting-blade  can  be  readily  inserted  into  the 


Fig 


rtgs> 


pile-wire  or  holder  by  slightly  lifting  the  locking- 
spring  and  inserting  the  blade  in  the  groove  of  the 
pile-wire  and  sliding  it  inwardly  until  the  locking- 
spring  has  passed  over  the  outer  end  of  the  pile-wire 
and  is  in  line  with  the  side  recess  of  the  same  so  as 
to  engage  in  it.  For  detaching  the  cutting-blade  the 
locking-spring  is  lifted  out  of  the  recess,  upon  which 
the  cutting-blade  can  be  removed  from  the  grooved 
end  of  the  pile-wire.  Instead  of  grooving  the  holder 
or  the  pile-wire  after  making  the  same,  either  may 
be  cast  with  the  groove  in  it. 

The  advantages  of  this  pile-wire  for  looms  are, 
first,  that  a  stronger  cutting-blade  is  obtained,  as  the 
body  of  the  same  is  not  weakened  by  slits  or  recesses, 


179 


as  has  been  the  case  in  similar  pile-wire  constructions 
heretofore  in  use;  second,  that  the  cutting-blade  can 
be  used  for  a  greater  length  of  time,  as  it  can  be  re- 
peatedly sharpened  down  to  the  edge  of  the  locking- 
spring  without  weakening  the  body  of  the  blade,  and 
third,  that  the  cutting-blades  can  be  quickly  inserted 
and  readily  removed  from  the  pile-wire  or  holder 
whenever  they  have  to  be  sharpened.  (0.  Seg Schneider, 
Assignor  to  J.  Waring,  Yonkers,  N.  Y.) 


THE  ALTEMtS  METHOD  OF  GEARING  FOR 
TRANSFORMING     UNIFORM  ROTARY 
MOTION     INTO  DIFFERENTIAE 
ROTARY  MOTION. 

This  method  of  gearing  is  specially  applicable  to 
winding  machinery,  although  it  can  also  be  applied  to 


spinning  machines  or  machinery  generally  in  which  it 
is  desirable  that  a  shaft  shall  move  faster  at  one  time 
than  at  another,  or  faster  at  one  part  of  each  revolution 
than  at  another  part  of  the  same  revolution. 

Fig.  I,  is  a  side  view  of  this  method  of  gearing.  Fig. 
2,  is  an  end  view  looking  in  the  direction  of  the  arrow 
in  Fig.  I,  but  showing  only  the  primary  pair  of  gears, 


the  others  being  omitted  in  order  to  avoid  confusion. 
Fig.  3,  is  a  transverse  section  on  the  line  3-3,  Fig.  1, 
but  showing  only  the  second  pair  of  gears.    Fig.  4,  is  a 


transverse  section  on  the  line  4-4,  Fig.  1,  showing  the 
final  pair  of  gears;  and  Fig.  5,  is  a  perspective  view 
illustrating,  detached  from  each  other,  the  two  parts  of 
an  adjustable  eccentric  gear-wheel  constituting  part  of 
the  gearing. 

Letters  of  references  indicate  thus:— A,  represents  the 
shaft  to  which  the  differential  rotary  motion  is  to  be 
imparted;  this  shaft  having  a  pulley  a  from  which 
power  is  transmitted  by  a  belt  «'  to  another  shaft,  or 
said  shaft  A  may  be  furnished  with  a  series  of  such 
pulleys  a,  so  as  to  transmit  the  differential  rotary  mo- 
tion to  a  number  of  independent  shafts. 

Turning  loosely  on  the  shaft  A,  but  confined  longi- 
tudinally thereto  by  collars  0,  is  a  tubular  shaft  B, 
which  has  a  pulley  d,  for  the  reception  of  a  driving 
belt  d' ,  the  latter  serving  to  impart  uniform  rotating 
motion  to  said  pulley  d.  The  tubular  shaft  B,  is  also 
provided  with  a  spur-pinion  f,  which  meshes  with  a 
spur-wheel  V,  secured  to  a  countershaft  D,  to  which  is 
also  secured  the  hub  of  an  adjustable  eccentric  spur- 
wheel  consisting  of  a  toothed  section  F  and  a  hub  sec- 
tion F',  the  toothed  section  of  this  wheel  engaging  with 
the  similar  section  G,  of  another  adjustable  eccentric 
spur-wheel  having  a  hub  section  G',  which  is  secured 
to  a  second  countershaft  H  parallel  with  the  shaft  D, 
this  second  countershaft  having  a  spur  wheel  g  which 
meshes  with  a  spur  pinion  i  secured  to  the  shaft  A. 
It  will  thus  be  seen  that  uniform  rotating  motion  is 
transmitted  from  the  tubular  shaft  B  to  the  counter- 
shaft D,  and  differential  motion  from  the  latter  shaft 
to  the  countershaft  H,  this  differential  motion  being  in- 
turn  transmitted  from  the  shaft  H,  to  the  shaft  A,  and 
the  character  of  the  differential  motion  being  governed; 
by  the  eccentricity  of  the  wheels  F  and  G.  The  toothed 
portion  of  either  of  the  wheels  F  or  G  is  adjusted' 
radially  in  respect  to  its  shaft  so  as  to  vary  the  extent  of 
its  eccentricity  as  may  be  desired,  the  toothed  portion 
of  each  wheel  having  a  cross  bar  m  in  which  is  an 
elongated  opening  re  for  the  passage  of  the  shaft,  and 
two  elongated  openings  s,  for  the  reception  of  the  bolts 
t,  whereby  the  toothed  and  hub  portions  of  the  wheel 
are  secured  together,  said  bolts  passing  through  open- 
ings w  formed  in  laterally  projecting  wings  W  on  the 
hub.  By  making  both  of  the  wheels  F  and  G  adjust- 
able, the  two  wheels  may  always  be  maintained  in 
proper  relation  to  each  other,  whatever  the  extent  of 
their  eccentricity,  without  any  movement  of  either  of 
the  shafts  D  or  H  from  or  toward  each  other.  Owing 
to  the  character  of  the  gears  f,  V  the  countershafts  D 
and  H  rotate  at  a  much  lower  speed  than  the  driving 
shaft  B,  the  gears  g  and  i,  however,  restoring  the  initial 
speed  to  the  shaft  A,  so  that  the  latter  shaft  may  make 
a  number  of  turns  in  changing  from  its  lowest  to  its 
highest  speed,  or  vice  versa,  as  is  necessary  in  many 
classes  of  machines  in  which  differential  motion  is  de- 
sired.   (W.  W.  Alterrms  &  Son,  Phila.) 


AN  INGENIOUS  APPARATUS  FOR  REMOV- 
ING WRAPPING-CORD  FROM 
YARN  CHAINS. 

After  bleaching  or  dyeing  it  is  necessary  to  re- 
move  the  wrapping-cord,  as  previously  to  said 
pz»  processes  wound  spirally  around  the  chain.  This 
has  heretofore  been  effected  in  various  ways,  one 
of  which  is  to  unwind  the  cord  upon  a  suitable  re- 
ceiver as  the  chain  is  moved  longitudinally. 

In  the  new  apparatus  the  wrapping-cord  is  removed 
by  severing  the  cord  with  a  suitable  cutter  as  the  chain 
is  moved  longitudinally. 

Fig.  1,  in  side  elevation,  represents  an  apparatus  for 
removing  the  wrapping-cord  embodying  the  present 
improvement;  and  Fig.  2  is  a  left-hand  front  elevation 
thereof. 


180 


A  suitable  frame,  comprising  upright  sides  A,  and 
cross-girths  a,  a,',  is  longitudinally  slotted  at  its  upper 
end  at  u~,  Fig.  t,  to  receive  the  journals  &x  and  cx  Gf 
two  rolls  B  and  C,  between  which  the  yarn  chain  Cx 
is  passed  as  it  is  drawn  over  a  guide-roll  Rx. 

The  wrapped  chain  in  the  form  of  a  loose  coil,  as  at 
R,  Fig.  I,  is  passed  over  an  over-head  pulley  R10  and 
then  down  between  rolls  R12,  near  the  floor,  after  which 
it  is  passed  several  times  around  the  drums  R2  R3  and 
led  over  a  guide-roll  R'  to  and  between  the  presser  or 
friction-rolls  B  and  C. 

At  the  front  of  the  apparatus  an  upturned  guide- 
bracket  D  is  secured  to  the  cross-girth  a,  the  said 
bracket  forming  an  obstacle  to  separate  the  chain,  which 
is  halved  as  it  is  drawn  along  with  the  guide  in  the 
center. 

A  thin  cutting  blade  or  knife  f,  having  lateral  ears 
or  projections  f  to  slide  in  the  guides  is  secured  to 
or  forms  a  part  of  a  carrier  fx,  shown  as  a  rod  pivoted 
at  its  lower  end  on  a  crank-pin  f,  projecting  from  the 
inner  face  of  a  sheave  or  pulley  f,  fast  on  a  shaft  f4, 
rotatably  mounted  in  a  bearing  a"  on  the  inner  face  of 
one  of  the  side  frames  A,  rotation  being  imparted  to 
the  pulley  f  by  a  belt  or  band  f,  from  drum  R2.  The 


free  end  of  the  wrapped  chain  is  divided  and  the  di- 
vided parts  pass  along  at  each  side  of  the  bracket  D, 
with  the  knife  or  cutter  f  between  said  parts,  and  the 
apparatus  is  set  in  operation. 

Rotation  of  the  sheave  or  pulley  f  gives  a  reciprocat- 
ing motion  to  the  knife,  as  well  as  a  slight  back-and- 
forth  movement  in  the  direction  of  the  length  of  the 
chain,  the  outwardly-turned  edge  of  the  knife  acting 
upon  the  spiral  coils  of  the  wrapping-cord  c10  and  sever- 
ing them  as  the  chain  is  drawn  along  through  the  ap- 
paratus past  the  knife  or  cutter,  the  presser-rolls  B  and 
C  preventing  the  unwrapped  chain  from  spreading  as  it 
leaves  the  knife. 

The  numerous  yarn  ends  composing  the  chain  lie  in 
parallelism  without  twisting  or  crossing  each  other, 
so  that  they  will  not  be  cut  by  the  knife,  but  will 
divide  into  two  parts  at  the  knife  and  will  pass  along 
at  each  side  thereof  while  the  cord  c"  is  severed  in 
short  lengths  or  pieces  which  will  drop  off  or  be  dis- 
lodged in  the  subsequent  separation  of  the  chain  into 
its  component  yarn  ends.    {Draper  Company.) 


BOBBIN  FOR  SILK  WEAVING. 

The  object  in  the  construction  of  this  bobbin,  is  to 
wind  a  wire  around  said  bobbin,  so  that  the  silk  when 
drawn  off  will  have  less  friction  compared  to  plain 
bobbins,  the  thread  only  touching  the 
wire  instead  of  the  wooden  part  of  the 
bobbin.  Fig.  i  is  a  side  view,  and  Fig. 
2  a  view  of  the  complete  bobbin  and 
cop  illustrating  the  delivery  of  the  thread 
therefrom. 

This  bobbin  is  composed  of  the  follow- 
ing parts:  The  head  i,  having  a  spindle- 
hole  through  its  axial  centre;  the  tubular 
stem  or  shaft  2;  the  conoidal  or  rounded 
tip  3,  closing  the  end  of  the  tube;  and 
the  wire  or  strands  4,  connected  with  said 
tip  and  head  thus  forming  a  plurality  of 
guards  or  external  ridges  spirally  about 
said  tubular  shaft. 

The  head  1  is  provided  with  an  end 
that  fits  the  lower  end  of  the  tube  2, 
and  a  shoulder  against  which  the  end 
of  the  tube  is  seated,  so  that  when  said 
parts  are  glued  and  forced  together  a 
firm  and  rigid  attachment  is  produced. 

The  tip  3  is  made  solid,  and  is  shaped  with  a  rounded 
or  conoidal  top  and  a  projecting  shank  or  tenon  that 
fits  the  interior  of  the  shaft  tube  2,  and  a  shoulder  that 
matches  the  end  thereof  so  as  to  present  a  smooth  and 
flush  exterior  surface. 

A  transverse  hole  9,  is  formed  through  the  tip  3,  near 
the  base  of  the  conoid  and  a  small  wire  or  smooth 
strand  4,  is  passed  through  said  hole,  the  wire  bent 
downward  along  the  shaft  and  wound  spirally  about 
the  cylindrical  surface  thereof;  the  two  spiral  strands 
occupying  diametrically  opposite  positions  on  the  cir- 
cle. The  ends  of  said  spiral  strands  are  securely  fast- 
ened within  the  interior  of  the  head  1,  or  to  the  end  of 
the  shaft  2,  where  it  is  connected  with  the  head. 

By  constructing  and  combining  the  parts  in  the 
peculiar  manner  shown  and  described,  there  is  thus  pro- 
duced a  durable,  efficient  and  highly  advantageous  bob- 
bin that  can  be  manufactured  with  practical  facility  and 
economy. 

With  the  bobbin  constructed  as  described,  they  can 
be  made  of  much  greater  length  than  those  ordinarily 
used  for  silk  weaving,  and  are  able  to  hold  a  much 
greater  quantity  of  filling  in  a  single  cop,  while  afford- 
ing a  free  and  uniform  delivery  of  the  thread  from  com- 
mencement to  finish  of  the  cop,  without  liability  of  fre- 
quent stoppages  of  the  loom  or  the  making  of  waste  in 
weaving.  This  bobbin  is  of  especial  utility  in  using 
double  ends,  or  two-thread  silk  in  the  cop,  the  liability 
of  the  threads  separating  as  they  run  off  being  over- 
come thereby,  since  the  plurality  of  opposite  spiral- 
guards  raise  the  unwinding  silk  from  the  body  and 


Fur  £ 

prevents  the  thread  from  closing  its  coils  about  the 
cylindrical  surface  and  creating  sufficient  frictional  ten- 
sion to  break  the  thread  as  it  is  drawn  off,  by  the  sud- 
den action  of  the  shuttle  when  thrown  across  the  loom. 
{Frank  Stone,  Worcester,  Mass.) 


FISHER'S  BOBBIN. 


Generally,  as  heretofore  constructed,  bobbins  have 
been  formed  of  wood  or  similar  material,  thus  not  only 
heavy  but  also  liable  to  split  and  crack,  so  as  to  catch 
the  yarn  or  threads  and  break  them.    These,  as  the  in- 


]8i 


c 


"pel 


ventor  of  the  new  bobbin  claims,  are  serious  objections, 
and  it  is  the  object  of  the  invention  to  provide  a  bobbin 
which  shall  obviate  these  disadvantages  without  adding 
to  the  cost  of  manufacturing  the  same. 

Fig.  i  is  a  perspective  view  of  such  a  bobbin  in  the 
process  of  construction,  and  showing  the  manner  of 

connecting  the  end  of 


the  strip  which  forms 
the  peripheral  flange 
or  base.  Fig.  2  is  a 
side  view  of  a  finished 
bobbin. 

The  manufacture  of 
these  novel  bobbins  is 
done  thus:  A  long 
strip  (a)  of  stout 
Manila  paper  or  other 
equivalent  fibrous 
material  suitable  for 
the  purpose  is  sup- 
plied. One  edge  of 
the  strip  is  cut  at  a 
slight  angle  to  the 
other  edge.  Both 
sides  of  the  strip  are 
coated  with  a  proper 
cementing  compound, 
such    as    silicate  of 


f  G.2. 


soda,  sizing,  or  other  desirable  cement,  and  one  edge 
placed  upon  a  suitable  mandrel.  (Indicated  by  dotted 
lines  in  Fig.  i).  The  strip  is  wrapped  and  wound  upon 
the  latter,  and  each  convolution  of  the  same  is  pressed 
closely  upon  the  preceding  one,  so  as  to  form  solid 
walls.  As  the  body  of  the  bobbin  is  being  formed  the 
edge  retreats  spirally  from  the  end,  so  as  to  form, 
when  finished,  a  beveled  end  e.  The  loose  edge  is  then 
tightly  cemented  down  so  as  to  form  a  smooth  tube  or 
body,  and  the  latter  may  be  dried  and  coated  with 
shellac  varnish  or  its  equivalent;  but  generally  before 
coating  the  bobbin  with  shellac,  the  strip  f  is  added  to 
form  a  peripheral  flange  or  base. 

The  inner  end  of  the  strip  is  secured  as  follows: 
Several  cuts  or  incisions  are  formed  in  the  last  convo- 
lution of  the  strip  a,  extending  up  from  the  lower  edge. 
Then  under  the  flaps  h,  ft,  thus  formed  the  end  of  the 
strip  f  is  cemented,  and  the  said  strip  is  wound  on  the 
end  of  the  bobbin  and  forms,  when  completed,  a  base 
or  peripheral  flange  «. 

After  the  loose  end  of  the  strip  f  has  been  cemented 
down,  the  whole  completed  bobbin  may  then  be  coated 
so  as  to  provide  a  smooth  polished  surface. 

A  bobbin  constructed  in  accordance  with  the  fore- 
going is  exceedingly  tough  and  durable,  is  not  liable 
to  crack  or  break,  and  possesses  the  highest  degree  of 
efficiency  for  the  purposes  for  which  it  is  intended. 
(James  C.  Fisher,  Lawrence,  Mass.) 


BLACKBURN'S  BOBBIN. 

The  object  of  constructing  this  bobbin,  is  to  so  con- 
struct a  bobbin  of  large  size  as  to  decrease  the  weight 
of  the  same  without  impairing  its  efficiency. 

Fig.  A,  is  a  sectional  view  of  this  new  bobbin.  Fig. 
B,  is  a  side  view,  on  a  smaller  scale,  of  the  parts  of  said 
improved  bobbin;  and  Fig.  C,  is  a  view  likewise  on  a 
smaller  scale,  and  illustrating  the  bobbin  with  the  tex- 
tile covering  removed  from  the  lower  portion  of  the 
same. 

The  bobbin  is  composed  of  a  central  tubular  wooden 
stem  A,  reduced  in  diameter  at  its  lower  end  so  to 
form  a  shoulder  a,  the  reduced  portion  of  the  stem 
being  adapted  to  a  central  opening  formed  in  the 
wooden  base  B  of  the  bobbin,  in  which  it  is  firmly  re- 


tained by  glue  or  other  cement,  the  shoulder  a,  rest- 
ing firmly  upon  the  top  of  said  base. 

Surrounding  the  lower  portion  of  the  stem  A  and 
fitting  snugly  to  the  periphery  of  the  upper  half  of  the 
base  B,  is  a  sheet-metal  cone  D,  the  upper  end  of  which 
fits  snugly  against  the  stem  a,  while  its  lower  portion 
is  secured  to  the  base  B,  by  means  of  nails  or  pins 
b,  as  shown  in  Figs.  A,  and  C. 

The  periphery  of  the  base  B  is  flared  to  accord  with 
the  flare  of  the  cone  D,  and  in  the  lower  portion  of 
the  base,  beneath  the  lower  edge  of  the  overlapping 
metal  cone,  is  formed  a  peripheral  groove  d. 

Surrounding  the  metal  cone  D  and  securely  cemented 
or  otherwise  united  thereto,  is  a  conical  textile  envelop 
F,  composed  of  an  available  fabric  which  extends  both 
above  and  below  the  metal  cone,  the  projecting  upper 
portion  of  the  envelop  being  united  to  the  outer  face 
of  the  central  wooden  stem  A  of  the  bobbin,  while  the 
projecting  lower  portion  of  said  textile  envelop  F,  is 
caused  to  enter  the  groove  d  in  the  wooden  base  by 
the  pressure  of  a  confining  wire  ring  or  wire  band  1- 
By  this  means  the  textile  envelop  is  firmly  secured  in 
its  place,  and  the  sheet-metal  cone  is  entirely  inclosed, 
so  that  the  yarn  wound  upon  the  bobbin  can  never 
come  into  contact  with  said  sheet-metal  cone,  and 
hence  cannot  be  stained  by  rust  or  otherwise  injured 
by  such  contact. 

The  use  of  the  hollow  sheet-metal  cone  in  order  to 
form  the  flaring  lower  portion  of  the  bobbin,  renders 
the  latter  much  lighter  than  the  usual  solid  wooden 
bobbins,  while  the  use  of  wood  for  the  central  stem 


and  base  of  the  bobbin,  renders  said  bobbin  preferable 
to  one  made  entirely  of  sheet-metal  by  reason  of  its 
less  weight  and  cost,  and  by  preventing  injury  to  the 
yarn,  which  is  likely  to  result  from  contact  with  said 
sheet-metal  surface,  the  latter  being  liable  to  oxidize  in 
the  damp  atmosphere  of  a  mill,  or  by  reason  of  the 
wetting  of  the  bobbin  in  some  of  the  various  pro- 
cesses of  manufacture  in  which  it  is  to  be  used.  (R. 
Blackburn,  Nottingham,  England.) 


182 


SPOOL  HEAD. 


GRADUATED  YARN  TEMPLET. 


In  this  spool  the  heads  are  secured  upon  the  shaft  in 
such  manner  that  they  cannot  be  removed  or  become 
loose  by  accident  or  by  the  wear  incident  to  their  use. 
thereby  producing  a  more  durable  spool,  which  will 
save  much  of  the  loss  in  material  and  time  which  has 
heretofore  been  occasioned  by  the  breaking  down  of 
the  spool  when  in  use. 

The  construction  of  this  spool  is  best  described  by 
referring  to  the  accompanying  illustrations,  of  which 
Fig.  I  is  a  side  view  of  this  spool;  Fig.  2  shows  a  de- 
tailed section  of  one  end  thereof,  showing  one  of  the 
heads  and  means  for  attaching  the  same  to  the  shaft; 
and  Fig.  3  is  a  section  at  the  line  x-xt  of  Fig.  2. 

Referring  in  detail  to  the  drawings,  A  represents  the 
shaft,  made  of  wood,  and  having  passed  through  each 
end  thereof  a  hard-wood  plug  B.  The  heads  C  are 
circular  and  slightly  cup-shaped,  so  that  their  inner 
sides  may  afford  guidance  for  the  rope  or  yarn  run 
upon  the  spool.    These  heads  have  formed  therewith 


the  sockets  or  ferrules  D,  the  outer  diameters  of  which 
are  the  same  as  the  diameter  of  the  shaft. 

In  securing  the  heads  upon  the  shaft  the  ends  of  the 
latter  are  turned  down  so  as  to  fit  within  the  sockets, 
as  clearly  shown  in  Fig.  2,  and  when  the  heads  are 
placed  upon  the  shaft,  the  pin  E,  a  portion  of  which 
is  threaded,  is  passed  through  a  suitable  opening  in 
each  of  the  central  openings  in  each  of  the  heads 
and  threaded  into  the  shaft,  the  spindle  F  pro- 
jecting from  the  head  to  serve  as  a  trunnion 
upon  which  one  end  of  the  spool  may  turn. 

To  prevent  the  withdrawal  of  the  pin  or  the 
head,  a  rivet  G  is  passed  through  the  ferrule  or 
socket  and  through  a  hole  in  said  pin  just  in  the 
rear  of  the  hardwood  plug  B,  so  that  neither  the 
pin  can  be  turned  to  back  it  out  of  the  shaft  nor 
the  head  drawn  from  off  the  end  thereof,  the  plug 
serving  the  two-fold  purpose  of  adding  stability 
to  the  rivet  and  preventing  the  loosening  of  the 
pin  within  the  shaft  by  sidewise  strains. 

A  spool  constructed  in  accordance  with  this 
improvement  will  have  little  or  no  tendency  to 
wear,  and  consequently  the  head  and  spindles  cannot 
be  withdrawn  accidentally,  which  is  of  great  advantage 
in  that  it  prevents  the  loss  which  has  heretofore  been 
occasioned  by  the  breaking  down  of  spools  when  in  use. 


The  object  of  this  measure  is  to  produce  a  grad- 
uated templet,  by  which  the  number  of  threads  or 
counts  of  a  piece  of  cloth  per  inch  being  ascertained, 
the  size  of  a  piece  to  be  cut  to  weigh,  to  find  the  num- 
ber of  yarn  of  which  the  cloth  is  woven,  will  be  plainly 
indicated  thereon. 

Referring  to  the  accompanying  illustration,  the  space 
between  the  divisions  on  the  top  side  of  the  templet 
marked  "standard,"  are  so  proportioned  that  a  piece  of 
cloth  cut  of  the  full  width  of  the  plate  and  of  the  length 
between  the  left  end  of  the  plate  and  the  mark  indi- 
cated by  the  count  or  number  of  threads  per  inch  in 
the  piece,  will  contain  a  given  length  of  yarn. 

For  example,  a  piece  of  cloth  of  full  width  of  the 
plate — of,  say,  100  picks  or  counts  to  the  inch — cut  to 
the  length  of  the  left  end  of  the  plate  to  the  line 
marked  "100,"  will  contain  the  same  number  of  yards  of 
yarn  as  a  piece  of  cloth  of  the  full  width  of  the  plate 
of  80  picks  or  counts  to  the  inch,  cut  to  the  length  be- 
tween the  left  end  of  the  plate  and  the  line  marked  "80" 
will  contain,  and  consequently  either  piece  of  cloth  may 
be  put  on  the  scales  and  weighed  the  same  as  so  much 
yarn  and  the  number  of  the  yarn  ascertained. 

In  graduating  the  scale  marked  "standard,"  for  cot- 
ton yarn  or  spun  silk,  the  number  taken  for  standard 
is  1,000.  The  length  of  yarn  contained  in  each  of  the 
various  samples  cut  as  above  directed  is  120  yards,  and 
if  a  sample  cut  to  the  measure  indicated  by  the  number 
of  picks  or  counts  per  inch  weighs  25  grains,  this 
number  divided  into  1,000  equals  40,  which  is  the  num- 
ber of  the  yarn,  and  if  it  weighs  20  grains,  1,000  divided 
by  20  equals  50,  which  is  the  number  of  the  yarn  in 
that  case. 

In  making  the  templet  for  woolen  cloth  the  propor- 
tional graduation  of  the  scale  is  the  same  as  that  used 
for  cotton;  but  the  plate  itself  is  made  narrower  in  pro- 


.stanaara,oooC£°rf I'1 'T""""!'"  "  "  1 '  I'  '  '  '  '  '  '  |-rT 


/(e    /re  U« 


/£o  *H  /is  ytftf  S* 


H/)ir  site  Sba 


Uilil.l.liliM 


"Ml 


One  of  the  principal  advantages  of  the  improvement 
is,  that  a  perfect  spool  is  produced  at  little  or  no  in- 
crease of  cost  over  the  old  method  of  manufacturing 
said  spools.  (J.E.Dinyman  and  8. Klingin,  Little  Falls, 
N.  F.) 


portion  to  the  difference  in  weight  of  the  two  materials. 
This  proportion  is  as  500  to  525 — that  is,  the  plate 
would  be  one-twenty-fifth  narrower  than  the  plate 
given  for  cotton,  and  the  results  would  be  given  in 
"runs"  instead  of  numbers. 

For  worsteds  the  templet  can  be  taken  just  as  it  is 
for  cotton,  but  the  "standard"  number,  instead  of 
being  1,000,  as  in  cloth,  will  be  1,500,  and  this  number 
divided  by  the  number  of  grains  the  piece  weighs,  in- 
dicates the  number  of  the  yarn.  For  example,  if  a 
piece  of  worsted  measured  and  cut  to  dimensions  ac- 
cording to  the  count  of  threads  to  the  inch,  as  above, 
weighs  75  grains,  1,500  divided  by  75  equals  20,  the 
number  of  the  yarn  in  the  sample. 

In  making  the  templet  for  raw  silk,  or  silk  in  the 
gum,  the  plate  is  made  narrower  than  for  the  cotton, 
in  the  proportion  of  100  to  120,  or  one-sixth  narrower, 
and  the  graduations  are  made  the  same  as  for  cotton. 
As  a  sample  large  enough  to  cut  full  width  of  the 
plate  and  of  the  necessary  length  cannot  always  be  had, 
there  is  provided  an  arrangement  of  proportional  divi- 
sions on  the  other  side  of  the  plate  marked  "half-size," 


183 


by  which,  if  a  sample  is  as  wide  as  the  plate,  but  not 
long  enough  to  reach  up  to  the  line  indicated  by  its 
number  of  threads  per  inch  on  the  standard  side,  it 
can  be  cut  by  the  side  of  the  scale  marked  "half-size," 
and  the  number  to  be  divided  by  the  weight  in  grains 
will  be  500  instead  of  1,000;  and  if  a  sample  is  long 
enough  to  reach  the  required  mark,  but  is  too  narrow 
to  reach  across  the  plate,  it  can  be  cut  to  the  middle 
mark  "0.50"  length-wise  of  the  scale  and  the  result  of 
the  grain-weight  divided  into  1,000,  divided  by  2  or 
halved,  will  give  the  number  of  the  yarn.  A  line 
marked  "0.25"  is  for  a  quarter-sized  sample,  and  the 
result  is  divided  by  4.  Still  another  line  is  provided 
for  one-eighth  size,  the  result  to  be  divided  by  8. 
With  these  lines  a  very  small  sample  can  be  used. 

In  making  a  count  of  the  threads  per  inch  in  the 
cloth  to  ascertain  the  desired  size  to  cut  a  sample,  as 
it  is  the  area  and  not  the  mere  length  that  counts  in 
weighing,  the  warp-threads  should  be  counted  as  well 
as  the  filling,  and  if  they  differ  the  average  of  the  two 
counts  should  be  used.  For  example,  if  the  warp  has 
80  threads  per  inch  and  the  filling  92  threads,  the  aver- 
age, 86  threads,  is  the  number  to  be  used  as  the  "count" 
of  the  goods.    (A.  Schacr  Draper  Co.,  Manuf.) 


GRADUATED  CLOTH- WEIGHT  TEMPLET. 

The  object  of  this  templet  is  to  produce  a  gage  so 
divided  by  lines  that  a  sample  from  a  roll  of  cloth  cut 
to  a  certain  dimension  indicated  by  the  division  on  the 
plate  bearing  the  same  number  that  the  cloth  is  inches 
in  width,  will  give  the  number  of  yards  per  pound  of 
the  cloth  in  the  roll,  by  weighing  the  samples. 

The  templet,  as  seen  by  the  accompanying  illustra- 
tion consists  of  an  oblong  piece  of  sheet  metal  A,  cut 
to  a  given  width  and  divided  by  lines  into  spaces  on 
each  side  or  edge,  the  spaces  between  the  lines  on 
the  lower  side  c  being  equal  to  each  other,  but  only 
one-half  the  width  of  the  spaces  on  the  upper  side  a, 
marked  "standard,"  which  are  also  equal  to  each  other 
and  are  numbered  by  tens  up  to  sixty  or  higher. 
These  lines  represent  the  width  of  the  cloth,  in  inches, 
to  which  the  sample  belongs  that  is  to  be  tested — 
that  is,  they  indicate  the  length  the  sample  must  be 
cut  to  for  weighing. 

For  example,  a  merchant  receives  a  sample  of  cloth 
which  he  is  informed  is  forty  inches  wide. 

He  takes  the  sample  and  cuts  it  to  the  width  of  the 


<S/an<3ar<3 

111111111 
1 

1  1  1  1  |  1  1  1  I 

1  1  1  1  |  1  1  1  1 

1111(1111 

HI  1  |  |  111 

1  1  1  1  |  1 

TttdtSi  'o                Jo                Jo                 V                So                £0  "rc"fJ 

■  o.fo- 


ZO        JO  f 

V       Jo        60       ?0  So 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 11 

III! 

1  1  II 

1  1  1  1 

1  1  1  1 

llllll 

plate  A  and  the  length  from  the  left  end  to  the  line  on 
the  a  side  of  the  plate  marked  "40."  The  piece  cut  to 
these  dimensions  is  then  weighed  on  grain-scales,  and 
the  number  of  grains  the  sample  weighs — suppose  it  is 
twenty  grains  in  this  case — is  divided  into  one  hundred, 
the  standard  number,  and  the  result,  five,  is  the 
number  of  yards  to  the  pound  that  the  cloth 
weighs.  I 
The  standard  number,  one  hundred,  according  J 
to  the  width  of  the  plate  and  of  the  spaces  be-  *L_ 
tween  the  lines,  has  been  calculated,  to  produce  a 
given  result. 

If  the  templet  were  twice  as  wide,  the  standard  num- 
ber to  divide  the  number  of  grains  in  weight  into 


would  be  two  hundred,  and  any  change  in  the  widths 
of  the  spaces  between  the  lines  would  necessitate  a 
change  in  the  standard  number,  or  a  second  operation 
of  dividing  or  multiplying  of  the  result.  This  is  illus- 
trated in  the  lines  on  tlie  0  side  of  the  plate  and  the  pro- 
portional lines  marked  "0.50"  and  "0.25." 

Sometimes  the  sample  available  is  not  large  enough 
to  cut  to  the  "standard."  Then  the  proportional  divi- 
sions can  be  used.  For  example,  if  a  sample  is  as  wide 
as  the  plate,  but  not  long  enough  to  reach  the  line  the 
width  in  inches  of  the  cloth  requires,  it  can  be  cut  to  the 
line  of  the  same  number  on  the  c  side  of  the  plate,  which 
are  one-half  the  width  of  those  on  the  <i  side,  and  when 
weighed  the  weight  in  grains  divided  into  fifty. 

If  the  sample  is  not  so  wide  as  the  plate,  but  is  long 
enough  to  reach  the  line  of  the  width  in  inches  on  the 
o  side,  it  can  be  cut  to  the  width  of  the  line  marked 
"0.50"  in  the  middle  of  the  plate.  Then  the  resulting 
weight  can  be  divided  into  hundred  and  the  result 
divided  by  two;  or  by  means  of  one  operation  divided 
into  fifty  and  the  number  of  yards  per  pound  found. 

Other  proportional  lines  marked  "0.25,"  &c,  are 
made,  and  it  will  be  readily  seen  that  by  use  of  these 
lines  samples  of  very  small  size  and  most  any  shape  can 
be  utilized. 

Of  course  the  full  standard  size  of  sample,  when  it 
can  be  had,  will  give  a  more  accurate  result  than  can 
be  obtained  with  smaller  samples.  {A.  Scliaer. — 
Draper  Co.,  Manuf.) 

CLOTH  AND  YARN  CALCULATING  RULE. 

Its  object  is  to  provide  mechanical  means  for  solving 
certain  questions  that  arise  in  manufacturing  textile 
fabrics,  that  solved  in  the  usual  way,  require  a  great 
deal  of  figuring  and  calculating  on  the  part  of  both  the 
manufacturer  and  the  dealer. 

One  of  these  questions,  for  instance,  is: 

If  a  dealer  wants  cloth  of  a  certain  width  and  number 
of  yards  to  the  pound,  what  number  of  yarn  and  how 
many  picks  to  the  inch  in  xceaving  will  make  the  goods? 

Another  question  is: 

Having  goods  of  a  certain  width  and  number  of  yards 
to  the  pound  and  number  of  picks  to  the  inch,  what  is  tlie 
number  of  the  yarn? 

And  having  yam  of  a  certain  number,  what  must  be 
the  number  of  picks  per  inch  to  make  goods  of  a  certain 
width  and  weight? 

These  and  many  like  questions  that  usually 
require  elaborate  calculations,  with  all  their  lia- 
bility to  error,  are  correctly  solved  with  a  single 
movement  of  the  device,  shown  in  the  accom- 
panying illustrations,  of  which  Fig.  1  shows  a 
top  view  of  the  calculating-rule  closed.  Fig.  2 
represents  the  same  open,  as  when  it  is  in  use. 

This  calculating  device  consists  of  a  rule  A, 
of  any  convenient  length,  having  a  dove-tailed 
groove  made  in  the  center  of  its  width  and  ex- 
tending the  whole  length  of  the  rule.  A  strip  <* 
is  fitted  to  the  slide  in  the  groove  after  the  man- 
ner of  slide-rules.  This  rule  then  has  four  lines 
of  divisions  made  on  it,  designated  as  1,  2,  3,  4, 
in  the  illustrations.  Lines  1  and  4,  are  made  on  the 
rule  proper  at  each  side  of  the  groove,  and  lines  2 
and  3,  are  made  on  the  slide  a.  The  space  made 
by  the  divisions  on  the  lines  1,  2,  3,  commence  largest 
at  the  left  hand  and  decrease  in  logarithmic  propor- 


■  LmiiIi 


iti  1 1 1 1 nii|iHiiiiiitimU)HfiniiiHiTw[|iiilliii»iiT'  mIu'Mji  'T' 


f  I  G  l. 


tion  a;,  they  g_>  to  the  right,  ;>nd  when  the  slide  a, 
is  closed  in  the  rule  the  civinor.s  cn  the  Iir.es  1,  2,  3, 


184 


exactly  agree  with  each  other;  though  line  i,  is  num- 
bered 2,  3,  4,  while  the  same  divisions  on  the  slide  «, 
are  marked  20,  30,  40,  and  so  on,  the  figures  in  the 
middle  of  the  slide  serving  for  lines  2  and  3,  on 
each  side  of  them.  The  line  4,  of  divisions  are 
also  made  in  logarithmic  proportion,  but  increase  in 


Wi'i'i'it'i 


the  opposite  direction  to  the  other  lines,  and  when 
the  slide  a,  is  close  in,  No.  40  on  the  slide  is  opposite 
No.  99,  on  the  line  4.  Line  1,  of  the  divisions  is  marked 
on  the  rule  as  "No.  of  yards  per  lb.,"  and  line  2  is 
marked  on  the  slide  "Av.  No.  of  yarn."  Line  3  is 
also  marked  on  the  slide  as  "Inches  wide,"  and  line 
4  is  designated  on  the  rule  as  "Av.  count,"  (or  aver- 
age picks  per  inch,)  which  means  that  as  the  number 
of  picks  per  inch  of  the  filling  may  not  be  the  same 
as  the  number  of  threads  per  inch  of  the  warp  the 
average  of  the  two  is  taken  as  the  average  count. 

If  the  one  was  eighty  threads  to  the  inch  and  the 
other  eighty-six  threads,  eighty-three 
would  be  average  count.  The  same 
lemark  applies  to  the  "Av.  No.  of 
yarn"  marked  on  line  2  of  the  di- 
visions. 

How  to  use  the  rule  to  solve  the 
following  questions:  If  the  cloth  is 
forty  inches  wide  and  the  average 
count  per  inch  eighty,  move  the  slide 
a,  so  that  40  on  line  3,  is  opposite  to 
80  on  line  4,  and  opposite  of  yards  per 
pound  the  cloth  will  be.  If  the  yarn 
is  No.  30,  cloth  will  weigh  three  and 
seven-tenths  yards  per  pound.  If  the  yarn  is  No.  60, 
the  cloth  will  run  seven  and  four-tenths  yards  per 
pound.    And  the  reverse  process  is  also  correct. 

If  the  cloth  weighs  four  and  nine-tenths  yards  per 
pound  and  the  yarn  is  No.  40,  bring  4.9  on  the  line  1 
opposite  40  on  line  2,  and  opposite  any  width  of 
cloth  on  line  3  will  be  found  on  line  4  the  number  of 
count  per  inch  necessary  to  make  the  goods.  If  the 
count  is  100  per  inch  on  line  4,  the  width  will  be 
thirty-two  inches  on  line  3.  If  the  count  is  75>  the 
width  will  be  forty-nine  inches. 

And  if  the  number  of  the  yarn  is  80  on  line  2  and 
the  count  is  60  on  line  4  and  they  are  placed  oppo- 
site each  other,  then  opposite  any  width  on  line  3  is 
the  number  of  yards  per  pound  on  line  1. 

These  examples  are  but  few  of  the  many  in  which, 
by  the  use  of  the  rule,  calculations  can  be  quickly 
made.    (A.  Schaer  Draper  Co.,  Manuf.) 


The  object  of  the  new  scale  is  to  facilitate  the  oper- 
ration  of  finding  the  number  of  the  yarn  and  lessen 
the  liability  to  make  mistakes.    This  is  accomplished 
by  graduating  the  scale-beam  for  weighing  the  yarn 
into  divisions  so  proportioned  and  numbered  that  the 
mark  indicated  by  the  sliding  pea  on  the  beam  will 
indicate  the  number  of  the  yarn,  so  that  it 
can  readily  be  seen  at  a  glance  without  mak- 
y\-i  f{  !  1 11  a     ing  any  calculation,  thereby  saving  time  and 
T     ■     1     avoiding  the  liability  of  making  mistakes. 
1  \,  Fig.  1  represents  the  scale-beam  with  its 

proportional  divisions  and  a  pea  of  the  right 
weight  for  cotton  yarns  or  for  spun  silk. 
Figs.  2,  3,  and  4,  represent  peas  of  the  proper  weight  to 
use  on  the  same  scale-beam  for  woolen,  worsted,  and 
linen  yarns,  respectively. 

The  scale-beam  A  is  made  of  aluminium,  as  the 
lighter  it  is,  the  more  quickly  it  will  turn  on  its  pivot 
and  the  more  accurate  the  weight  will  be.  B  is  the 
hook  upon  which  yarn  to  be  weighed  is  hung.  The 
divisions  b,  on  the  scale-beam  A,  start  from  twenty, 
although  they  may  go  down  to  ten  or  five  for  very 
coarse  yarns,  and  go  up  to  two  hundred  or  higher  for 
very  fine  yarns,  and  are  so  proportioned  to  each  other 


SCALE-BEAM   FOR  ASCERTAINING  THE 
COUNTS  OF  YARN. 

Heretofore  the  ordinary  way  of  obtaining  this  num- 
ber has  been,  to  reel  of!  one  hundred  and  twenty  yards 
of  the  yarn  to  be  numbered,  and  then  weighing  this 
sample  on  a  grain-scale,  and,  by  calculations  based 
on  the  number  of  grains  the  sample  weighed,  find  out 
the  number  of  the  yarn. 


iiW'WTOiiir'i,,T,,,;y,a,,,,j; 


III!' 


that  if  a  hank  of  one  hundred  and  twenty  yards  of 
cotton  yarn  or  spun  silk  is  hung  on  the  hook  B,  and 
balanced  by  the  pea  for  those  materials,  the  number 
indicated  by  the  middle  mark  on  the  pea  S,  will  be 
the  number  of  the  yarn. 

Cotton  and  spun  silk  are  of  the  same  class-num- 
ber that  the  same  pea  answers  for  weighing  both. 

For  other  yarns, — as,  for  example,  woolen,  worsted 
and  linen — peas  are  provided  having  the  same  propor- 
tional weight  to  the  pea  used  for  cotton  and  to  each 
other  as  the  class-numbers  of  those  materials  have  to 
cotton  and  each  other,  which  proportions  are  closely 
approximated  in  the  following  weights. 

For  cotton,  twelve  and  one-half  grains;  rooolen,  six 
and  nine-sixteenths  grains;  worsted,  eighteen  and 
three-fourths  grains;  linen,  thirty-five  grains.  These 
weights  may  all  be  used  on  the  same  proportionally- 
divided  scale-beam  with  the  same  length,  one  hundred 
and  twenty  yards,  of  the  different  yarns  and  the  num- 
ber of  each  yarn  will  be  the  number  that  the  weight 
or  pea  indicates  when  the  scale  is  balanced. 

By  cutting  a  sample  of  cloth  to  a  size  proportioned 
to  its  count  of  threads  or  picks  per  inch,  so  as  to 
contain  one  hundred  and  twenty  yards  of  yarn,  it  can 
be  weighed  on  the  scale  and  the  number  of  the  yarn 
in  the  piece  shown,  the  same  as  in  the  case  of  the 
yarn  above  described.  (A.  ScMer.— Draper  Go., 
Manuf.) 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


JAMES  INGLIS,  JR., 

Engraver  of  Designing  Paper 
For  all  Textile  Trades. 


ECLIPSE  NAPPING  MACHINE. 

FABRIC  IN  DIRECT  CONTACT  WITH  THE  NAPPING  ROLLERS  ALL  AROUND  THE  DRUM. 


Greater  Production. 
Better  Finish. 
Easier  Threaded. 
No  Shifting  of  Filling. 

Better  Results  Than 
Can  be  Obtained  with 
Teasels. 


Long  or  Short  Nap 
as  Desired  on  Cotton  or 
Woolen  Goods,  from 
the  Lightest  to  the 
Heaviest. 

No  Heavier  Napping 
on  the  Sides  than  in 
the  Centre. 


RICHARD  C.  BORCHERS  &  CO., 


Sole  nanufacturers  in  the  United  States. 


1708-1710  Germsntown  Ave., 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


EDW.  CLEAVER.  WM.  A.  LEATHER. 

CLEAVER  &  LEATHER, 

JACQUARD  HARNESS  BUILDERS, 

For  Ribbons,  Broad  Silks,  Tapestries,  etc. 

Sole  Owners  and  Hanufacturers  of 

Brauch's  Patent  Jacquard  Harnesses.* 

WEAVERS'  HADNipgg      —  . 
LINGOES  ^  SUPPLIES.  a  %^/- 

159  Madison  Street,     -    Paterson.  N.  J. 

TELEPHONE  405  B. 

*  See  article  "Comberboard  to  Permit  Cbange  of  Texture,"  in  chapter  on  new  "Jacquard  Machinery," 

in  this  book. 


ATHERTON  MACHINE  CO., 

Successors  to  j^obert  Atherton, 


Jobbing  and  Repairs 

promptly  attended  to. 


BUILDERS  OF. 


^MACHINISTS, 


Improved  Silk  Machinery, 


WINDERS,  DOUBLERS,  POWER  WARPERS, 
QUILLING  MACHINES,  ETC. 


DiHhnn  Dar*****  supplied  and  cut  in  all  widths  to  order, 
KJ  UUU 11    rdpCr  and  properly  rolled. 


FRANKLIN  MILL, 

MILL  STREET,       -        -        PATERSON,   N.  J. 


xiii 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


KILBURN.  LINCOLN  &  CO.. FALL  R  VER 


MASS. 


LOOMS 

For  Cotton  and  Silk  Weaving. 
ALSO   SHAFTING,    PULLEYS   AND  HANGERS. 


The  Kilburn,  Lincoln  &  Co.  High-Speed  Loom. 

There  are  over  30,000  "High-Speed  Looms"  manufactured  hy  Kilburn,  Lincoln  &  Co.  in  successful  operation  in  the 
city  of  Fall  River  alone,  and  many  thousands  more  in  other  parts  of  New  England  and  the  South. 

The  light-running  qualities  of  this  loom  and  the  consequent  great  saving  in  power,  commend  it  to  manufacturers.  On 
account  of  the  light-running  feature,  combined  with  strength,  our  loom  is  especially  adapted  to  be  run  at  High  Speed.  At 
the  Seaconnet  Mills,  Fall  River,  928  of  tlnse  looms  were  in  operation  for  a  number  of  years  at  204  p;cks  per  minute,  turning 
out,  in  301  days  of  10  hours  each,  14,329,219  yards  64x64  goods,  a  daily  average  of  51^  yards  per  loom. 

Of  the  other  Fall  River  mills  using  our  looms  may  be  mentioned  the  King  Philip,  where  2,800  are  in  operation  on 
the  finest  grades  of  co  ton  cloth.  The  Ha  graves  and  Parker  Mills,  also,  are  fitted  with  our  "New  High-Speed  Loom,"  manu- 
facturing fancy  goods,  so-ne  of  which  are  the  finest  produced  in  the  country. 

We  claim  that  the  mills  producing  the  largest  quantities  of  goo  Is  per  day,  as  well  as  those  producing  the  finest  quality 
of  goods,  are  running  our  looms. 


GEORGE  It.  K.  SMITH. 


FRANKLIN  S.  SMITH. 


STANTON  M.  SMITH. 


THE  HOLBROOK  MFG.  CO. 


466,  468,  470  Washington  St., 


SOAPS 


OF  EVERY 
DESCRIPTION, 


NEW  YORK, 

For  Textile 
Manufacturers 


"THE  BEST 
IS  GOOD 
ENOUGH." 


Our  Granulated  Carbonate  of  Soda 

is  the  Highest  Grade  of  Concentrated  SaUSoda  on  the  Market. 


xiv 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


BUILDERS    OR  THE 


FISHER  PATENT  CARD  FEED, 

Woolen,  \A/orsted,  Jute,  etc. 

IF  YOU  ARE  IN  THE  MARKET  AND  WANT  THE  BEST, 
CORRESPOND  WITH  US. 

THE  FISHER  FEED  IS  A  LEADER. 


For  a  first-class  Finishing  Press  that  will  last  you  a  life-time,  buy  our 
latest  improved  Machine,  it  gives  a  fine  Finish;  your  Goods  WILL 
sell  for  more  finished  in  this  manner  than  in  any  other  way. 

Don't  have  Shuttle  Smashes  on  your  Looms.  The  Mc Michael  Patent 
Protector  prevents  them.   Each  Smash  will  cost  you  about  $3.00. 


XV 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


LOUIS  F.  LIOTARD, 

MANUFACTURER  AND  IMPORTER  OP 

REEDS  and  HARNESS,  SSi* 

All  the  Latest  French  Appliances  for  the 
Weaving  Department. 

Sole  Agent  for  CHAIZE  FRERES  (St.  Etienne)  Patent  Braided  and  Patent  Mail  Heddles. 

PATERSON,  N.  J. 


SO  AND  £ 
ESSEX  STR 


ee-t, 


ROBERT  HUNTER   1502  Cay^a  street> 

IVv/L>L^rV  1     I1U11  Nicetown,  Philadelphia. 


MANUFACTURER  OP 


BOLETTE  CONDENSERS,  WORSTED  APRONS 

AND  NON=ELECTRIC  ROLLER  LEATHER, 


ALSO,  DEALER  IN 


New  and  Second  Hand    Textile  Machinery. 

Bolette's  Altered  and  Repaired,  Dealer  in  Best  Selected  Oak  Tanned  Leather 

All  Duplicate  Parts  Kept  on    Hand.  for  Aprons,  Bolette  Aprons  and  Blades. 

All  Styles  of  Aprons  for  American  and  English  Condensers  Carried  in  Stock. 


q  *|.  >fr  .j. 4. 4.  4.  't"^^  "h  ■  ^        4*        'h  ^"f*  O 


4 


7.  S.  Standard  Traveler  Cleaner. 

Patented  Feb.  26,  1889;  Oct.  21,  1890. 


* 

* 
* 
* 
* 
* 


25  YEARS' 


EXPERIENCE  ""SSSS"-"' 

Cpinning  and 
Twister  Ring's, 

OUGHT  TO  COUNT 
FOR  SOMETHING, 

AND  IT  DOES! 

OUR  rings  are  the  best  that  experience  can  pro- 
duce ;  that  money  can  buy  ! 

OUR  U.  S.  STANDARD  TRAVELER  CLEANER  is 
the  best,  simplest,  cheapest  and  most  effective 
traveler  cleaner  in  the  market. 

OGGO 

WBITINSYILLE  SPINNING  RING  CO, 

WHITINSVILLE,  MASS.,  U.  S.  A. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


JAMES  JACKSON  &  SONS, 

#      Textile  riachinists. 

Jacquard  Machines  (Highest  improved)  and 

Compass  Boards,  Specialties — — — — ^ 


VELVETS  AND  VELVETEENS  IN  THE  GRAY,  Dyed  and  Finished. 

Nos.  18  and  20  Albion  Ave.,  PATERSON,  N.  J. 

GEORGE  L.  SCHOFIELD, 

Dealer  in  New  and  Second-Hand 


COTTON  and 

WOOLEN 


Machinery 


Agent  for  WESTON  HYDRO-EXTRACTOR. 

No.  123  North  Front  St.,  Philadelphia. 


Lj  l"OLi  jru.u  IQDU. 


TELEPHONE  133. 


W  If 


LL 

© 

< 
_i 

O 


fefl 
C 

3 

03 


3 


.  E 

l.  a 

«>  j 

£  _ 

1/3  Q 

£  S 
a 


55 


o 

CL 


01 

o 
u. 


X 


^T'.^*  ^1 


J.  A.  GOWDEY  &  SON, 

MANUFACTURERS  OF 

Reeds  and  Harnesses 

AND  DEALERS  IN  MILL  SUPPLIES. 

ESTABLISHED  1834. 


40  Clifford  St.,  Providence,  R.  I. 

Also,  Front  Street,  Chicopee,  Mass. 


SILK  DESIGNING 


FOR 


All  Classes  of  Jacquard  Work. 

Ample  Facilities.   Many  Years'  Experience. 
Prompt  Execution  of  All  Orders. 

D.  &  J.  RUSHTON, 

Church  St.  near  Harket,   PATERSON,  N.  J. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


FREDERIC  HAND  &  CO., 


JACQUARD  DESIGNERS, 

:05   Market  Street,      -      PATERSON,   IM.  J, 


SKETCHES. 


and 


DRESS  SILK, 


Jacquard 
Designs 

FURNISHED 


for  all 

kinds  of 


TAPESTRY. 


FRANK  FISCHER, 

JACQUARD  CARD  CUTTER 

REPEATING  PROMPTLY  EXECUTED 
UP  TO  boo  AND  900. 

All  the  Latest  Im-  Upward  of  Twenty 

proved  Machm-        ^    Years'  Experi- 
ery  and  Appli-  ^  ence. 

anees. 

30  DALE  AVENUE,  PATERSON,  N.  J, 

Telephone— 331  B. 


WILLIAM  CRABB  &  CO., 

NEWARK,  IM.  J. 
MANUFACTURERS  AND  IMPORTERS  OF  THE  FOLLOWING  GOODS: 


Bagging  Loom  Reeds, 
Cotton  Banding, 
Card  Clothing  in  Leather, 
Card  Clothing  in  Wood, 
Card  Pins, 
Circles, 
Comber  Needles, 


Feed  Rollers  in  Brass  Shells,  Rivets, 

Gill  Brass.  Rotary  Gills, 

Gills  and  Gill  Bars,  Spreader  Pins, 

Hackles,  Steel  Springs, 

Hackle  Pins,  Steel  Wire, 

Jennie  Pins.  Tentering  Pins, 

Needle  Pointed  Goods,  Waste  Machine  Clothing 

Picker  Te*-th,  and  Teeth, 

Porcupines,  Weavers'  Combs, 


Comb  Pins 
Drawing  Frame  Pins, 
Fallers, 

ALSO   GENERAL   MILL  SUPPLIES 


XVlLl 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


CHAS.  R.  EARLE,  Pres.  and  Treas.  M.  W  GARDINER.  JR  ,  Secy. 

PHENIX  IRON  FOUNDRY,  providence. 

Manufacturers  of  *V*  '* 

Starch  Mangles,         Bleaching  and 

Calender  Rolls  of  Paper,    --^         m  «  _         %  m 

cotton  and  Husk,     Dyeing  Machinery, 

Printing'  Machines,  Shafting,  Pulleys,  Clearing-,  Hydraulic  Presses,  Tenter  Drying 
Macliiues,    Ageing    Boxes,    Expansion   Pulleys,   Hollingworth  Automatic 
Feeds,  Can  Drying  Machines,  Grate  Ba«-s,  <  lotli  Cutting  Machines, 
Silk,   Lace  and   Cotton   Finishing  Machinery, 

and  Sole  Manufacturers  of     NAGLE    POWER    FEED  PUMP.  Send  for  Catalogue. 


F.  B  WiLKINS, 

Agent. 


1 

m 

% 

!  | 

WILKINS  MFG.  CO., 

Manufacturers  of 
Wilkins'  Improved  (Cotton  Filled) 

Loom  Picker, 

FOR  COTTON  LOOMS. 

ALSO.  DEALERS  IN 

Manufacturers'  Supplies, 

WOONSOCKET,  R.  I. 


JAMES  HUNTER  MACHINE  CO., 

NORTH  ADAMS,  MASS. 

Fulling  Mills,      #     Cloth  Washers, 

SOAPING  MACHINERY,  WOOL  SCOURERS, 
EXHAUST  AND  BLAST  FANS, 

Power  Transmission  flachinery. 


FRED.  B.  WILKINS.  WILLIAM  J.  MILAN. 

F.  B.  WILKINS  &  CO., 

Reeds,  Harnesses, 

and  Manufacturers'  Supplies. 

MANUFACTURERS  OF  THE 

Double  and  Single  Knotted  Loom  Harness, 

14  and  16  S.  Main  St.,  WOONSOCKET,  R.  I. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


GLOBE    MACHINE  WORKS, 

FRANKFORD,  PHILADELPHIA. 


Patentees  and  Builders  of 


Warping  riachinery, 

Electrical  Stop  Motions, 
The  Denn  Linking  Warper. 

Slasher  Warpers,  Long  and  Short   Chain  Warpers,  Balling  Warpers, 
Beam  Warpers  and  All  Kinds  of  Warping  machinery. 

CREELS  AND  ELECTRICAL  _  V2+*A  ~ 

STOP  MOTIONS  UP  TO    J^OO  nilCIS. 


L.  S.  WATSON  MFG.  CO.,  LE,CES 

Manufacturers  of 

WATSON'S  PATENT  HACHINE 


TER, 
MASS. 


Wire  Heddles  and  Heddle  Frames. 

Agents  and  Importers  of  the  GERMAN  TINNED  CAST-STEEL  WIRE  HEDDLES. 

These  Heddles  are  made  with  soldered  warp  eyes,  also  soldered  end  eyes  and  are  made  endless,  they  are  the  most  desirable  and 

thorough  made  foreign  heddle  yet  offered.    Orders  solicited. 

IRON  END  FRAMES  A  Specialty,  Giving  More     C\t\i\  Yi\  nt«f»rl  <»  be  Perfectly  Adapted  to  Weaving  all  kinds  of  Cotton, 
Breadth  for  Weaving.       uual  aiiL»cu  Woolen,  and  Worsted  Fabrics,  Fancy  Cotton,  etc.,  etc. 

Agents  for  DIXON'S  ALL  WIRE  DOUP  HEDDLES,  the  most  satisfactory  for  Leno  Work; 

Samples  and  Price  on  Application. 

Also  Hanufacturers  of  HAND  STRIPPING  CARDS  c*  Every  Description. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


W.  W.  ALTEMUS. 


J.  K.  ALTEMUS. 


ESTSBLISHED  1S65. 


W.W.  ALTEMUS  &  SON, 


Textile  .  . 


Machinery 


2816  North  Fourth  St., 


Philadelphia. 


BOBBIN  WINDING  MACHINE 

Patented  November  23,  1887,  and  "Variable  Motion  Patented  September  5,  1893. 


BUILDERS  OF  ALL  KINDS  OF   1 

COP  AND  BOBBIN  WINDING  MACHINES, 
SPOOLERS,  WARPERS,  BEAMERS, 
Jmm>        CHENILLE  CUTTING,  CARPET  ROLLING, 
SINGEING  MACHINES,  AND 
SPECIAL  MACHINERY  TO  ORDER. 

WE  MAKE  MACHINERY  FOR  ALL  KINDS  OF  YARN.  Correspondence  Solicited 


ADVERTISEMENT.. 


44 


THE  UNIVERSAL 

THE  ONLY  PERFECT  SYSTEM 
OF  WINDING  YARN  TO 
AVOID  WASTE. 


No  Rewinding. 

Saves  40  per  cent,  in 
cost  of  packing 
cases. 

Saves  60  per  cent,  of 
floor  space. 

Saves  50  per  cent,  of 
power. 


High  Speed 
Machines. 

Every  inch  of  yarn 
is  available  for 
use. 

No  waste. 

Conical  or  Parallel 
Tubes. 


UNIVERSAL  WINDING  GO. 

226  DEVONSHIRE  ST., 

BOSTON. 


XXll 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


The  most  complete  line  for  TAPING,  BINDING  or  TYING  UP 
GOODS. 

For  Edgings  ami  Insertion  on  all  kinds  of  goods.    Especially  adapted 
for  RIBBED  UNDERWEAR. 


MING    &    CHARIN     229"231   Church  Street, 

'      11  ^9  PHILADELPHIA. 

TAPES  AND  BRAIDS 
CROCHET  LACES 

Use  HADI  FY  CO      cotton  yarn  for 

Largest  Production  at  Least  Cost  for  Labor. 
AND    SECURE  A    Smoothest   Surface  and   Most   Regular  Patterns. 


YOUR  COLORS  RICH,   LUSTROUS  and    FULL  OF  LIFE. 
RESULT-HIGHEST  MARKET  PRICE  for  YOUR  GOODS. 

FLEMING    8c    CHARIN,  Agents, 

229-231   Church  Street,  Philadelphia 

The  Textile  Record 

Contains  MORE  ORIGINAL  MATTER  upon  practical 
processes  in  the  textile  industry  than  any  other  journal. 
Richly  illustrated  articles  on  new  Textile  Machinery. 
It  is  the  only  periodical  in  the  world  that  fully  repre- 
sents the  knitting  industry. 

Price,  $^oo  a  year.     Sample  Copies  on  application. 

THE  TEXTILE  RECORD  COMPANY, 

Edited  by  E.  A.  POSSELT.  425  WALNUT  ST.,      PHILADELPHIA,  PA 

Posselt's  Private  Sehool  of  Textile  Design 

2152  North  21st  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

FOR  THE 

TEACHING  OF  DESIGNING  AND  MANUFACTURING 

ALL  KINDS  OF  COTTON,  WOOLEN,  WORSTED,  SILK  AND  LINEN 

TEXTILE  FABRICS 

ALSO  FREE  HAND  AND  MECHANICAL  DRAWING. 

mrm  SUIT  COURSE  OF  INSTRUCTION  TO  THE  WANTS  OF  EACH  STUDENT. 

HE  MAY  TAKE  UP  HARNESS  OR  JACQUARD  WORK  EITHER  IN  COTTON,  WOOL,  WORSTED,  SILK 
OR  LINEN;  UPHOLSTERY,  CARPETS,  ETC.,  ETC. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


,  ATENTS. 

HOWSON  &  HOWSON, 

Counsellors-at-Law  and  Solicitors  of  Patents, 

PHILADELPHIA,     -     119  South  Fourth  Street, 
NEW  YORK,  -     38  Park  Row, 

WASHINGTON,  D.C.,  918  F  Street. 

PATENT   PRACTICE   BEFORE    THE    TJ.  S.  COURTS 
AND   PATENT  OFFICE. 

UNITED  STATES  AND  FOREIGN  PATENTS  PROCURED. 

Trade-marks,  Labels  and  Copyrights  Registered. 

^^^—11  —  Established  1 853. 


:STABLISHED,  1S30. 


R.  SERQESON  &  CO., 

PHILADELPHIA,  RA. 

Corrugated  Cop  Shuttles 


A  SPECIALTY 


MANUFACTURERS 

OF  ALL  KINDS  OF 


Loom  Shuttles. 


Special  attention  called  to  Sergeson's  Patent  Improved  Combined  Spindle,  with 
Top  Catch;  will  adjust  to  anv  size  Bobbin. 

Also,  Patent  Bobbin  Catch,  with  Square  and  Angular  Head  Screw  ;  cannot  work 
loose  or  come  out  and  damage  warp. 

Also,  to  our  Easy  Threaded,  Adjustable  Tension  Eye. 


xxiv 


/ 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


THE  LEADING  WORK  ON  TEXTILE  MANUFACTURING. 

The  Structure  of  Fibres,Yarns  &  Fabrics 

Being  a  Practical  Treatise  for  the  Use  of  All  Persons  Employed  In  the  Manufacture  of  Textile  Fabrics. 

 by  

E.  A.  POSSELT. 

ACCOMPANIED  BY  OVER  400  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

Two  Volumes  Bound  in  One.     Quarto,  Handsomely  Bound  in  CloUi.     Price,  Five  Dollars,  including  Expressage. 

THE  MOST  IMPORTANT  WORK  ON 

The  Structure  of  Cotton,  Wool,  Silk,  Flax,  Jute  and  Ramie  Fibres, 
The  Preparatory  Processes  these  Fibres  are  subjected  to  previously  to 
The  Picking,  Carding,  Combing,  Drawing,  Spinning,  and 
Calculations  required  by  the  Manufacturers. 

This  work,  as  well  as  the  other  books  written  and  pub'ished  by  Mr.  Posselt,  have  been  sold  by  the  thousands 
amongst  our  Manufacturers,  Overseers  and  Operators. 

They  also  sold  extensively  in  England,  Germany,  France,  Austria,  Russia,  Brazil,  Japan,  etc. 
They  are  used  as  Text-Books  in  the  various  Textile  Schools. 

What  Practical  Manufacturers  have  to  say  on  the  Books  : 


SAXON  WORSTED  COMPANY,  Franklin,  Mass. 
Mr.  E.  A.  Posselt,  Dear  Sir  .- — You  may  please  send  to  u<s  five 
<5)  more  copies  of  your  new  book,  "The  Structure  of  Fibres, 
Ya  ns  and  Fabrics."  This  will  make  six  copies  in  all,  for  wh  ch 
we  will  send  you  check.  We  trust  the  work  will  meet  with  the 
sale  which  it  deserves.  The  composition  of  such  an  extensive 
and  yet  accurate  work  certainly  earns  for  you  the  thanks  and 
appreciation  of  all  interested  in  textile  industries 

Yours,  etc  ,  I.  G.  Ladd,  Treasurer. 


BONAPARTE  WOOLEN  MILL,  Bonaparte,  Iowa. 
E.  A  Posselt,  Esq  ,  Dear  ,S/>  .—Your  book,  "  The  Structure  of 
Fibres,  Yarns  and  Fabrics,"  received  4th  inst  ,  and  have  end  sed 
draft  $10.00  on  New  York  in  payment  of  sjtne.  I  have  delayed 
for  a  few  days  before  writing  you  in  order  to  give  myself  time  to 
look  through  the  work  I  must  say  that  I  have  always  received 
fiom  you  sterling  value  for  my  money,  and  your  present  work  is 
no  exception  to  the  rule.  It  more  than  meets  my  expectations, 
and  I  shall  find  it  very  helpful  to  myself  It  will  be  simply  in- 
valuable to  the  young  man  learning  the  art  of  woolen  manufact- 
ure, who  has  to  rely  on  himself  too  often  and  get  little  encourage- 
ment from  those  around  him  To  such  a  one  your  work  will  prove 
a  vetitable  mine  ot  information.  Wishing  you  much  success.  I 
am,  yours  truly,  W.  R.  Dredge.  Fupt. 


THE  KNOX-HILL  COMPANY,  Warsaw,  Ills. 
Mr.  E-  A    Posselt,  D  ar  Sir:— Your  work  "  Technology  of 
Textile  Design  '  received,  and  I  am  very  much  pleased  with  it. 
I  expected  it  would  be  good  but  it  goes  b»yond  my  anticipation. 

Yours  truly,  J.  \V.  Wilson,  supt. 


MILLBURY  SCOURING  COMPANY,  West  Millbury,  Mass. 
Mr.  E  A  Posselt,  Dear  Sir ; — Enclosed  check  in  payment  of 
book,''  Fibres,  Yarns  and  Fabrics  "  Thank  vou  for  terms,  etc. 
Your  book  "  Technology  of  Textile  Design  "  was  the  instruction 
book  at  the  Lowell  School  of  Design  and  therefore  have  one  on 
hand,  which  is  quite  inexhaustive  and  its  own  talker. 

Yours,  W.  W.  Windle. 


MANUFACTURERS  OF  WOOLEN  HOSIERY,  Milroy,  Pa. 
Many  thanks  for  the  superb  book  you  sent  on  Textile  Fibres 
and  their  manipulations.    It  is  excellent.    Yours,  etc., 

Thompson  Bros. 


BRIDGEPORT  SILK  COMPANY,  Bridgeport,  Conn. 
E.  A.  Posselt,  Esq.,  Dear  Sir  :—  Please  find  enclosed  amount  of 
bill  for  last  publication  sent  me.    I  now  have  all  your  works  up 
to  date,  and  sincerely  wish  you  luck  with  your  last  exellent 
effort.    What  next  ?    Send  circular. 

Respectfully,  F.  M.  Patterson. 


FROM  CAXIAS,  BRAZIL. 
Mr.  E.  A.  Posselt,  Dear  5»  .  — Have  received  the  books 
"  Structure  of  Fibres,  Yarns  and  Fabrics,"  "  Technology  of  Tex- 
tile Design,"  "The  Jacquard  Machine,"  and  am  much  pleased 
with  them.  Yours  truly,  Robert  D.  Wall. 


RAY'S  WOOLEN  COMPANY,  Fiankliu,  Mass. 
E  A  Posselt,  Esq.,  Drar  Sir;    I  have  purchased  more  ihan 
$2=  00  worth  of  booh  s  ou  manufacturing  before  purchasing  yours, 
and  can  truthfully  say  "Fibres,  Yarns  and  Fabrics,"  is  worth 
double  all  the  others  are.    I  am  yours,  Joseph  Aldrich. 


MASCOMA  FLANNEL  COMPANY. 
E.  A.  Posselt,  Dear  Sir  .  —Enclosed  please  find  check  for  pay- 
ment of  enclosed  bill  for  copy  "  Structure  of  Fibres,  Yarns  and 
Fabrics"  Was  much  pi  _ased  with  book,  it  is  well  worth  the 
money  to  an  experienced  manufacttner,  and  many  times  its  cost 
to  begiuners  in  the  art  of  manufacturing  II  I  could  have  had 
such  a  work  in  my  younger  davs  of  manufacturing,  it  would  have 
learned  memany  points  that  I  had  to  work  out  by  study  obser- 
vation and  experience,  attended  with  more  or  less  mistakes  on 
my  part  and  expenses  otherwise.  M  E  George,  Supt. 


JAMESTOWN,  N.  Y. 
Mr.  E.  A.  Posselt,  Dear  Sir:-  Please  find  enclosed  money 
order  .  .  (for  books  send)  I  am  well  pleased  with  the  books. 
The  book  "  Technology  of  Textile  Design."  and  the  book  "  Struct- 
ure of  Fibres,  Yarns  and  Fabrics."  I  would  not  be  without  for 
their  weight  in  gold.     Please  acknowledge  receipt  and  oblige 

Yours  tru  y,  T.  D  Douglass 


EATON  RAPIDS  WOOLEN  MILLS,  Eaton  Rapids,  Mich. 

E.  A.  Posselt.  Dear  Sit  : - 1  have  further  examined  the  hooks 
purchased  of  you,  •  Structure  of  Fibres,  Yarns  and  Fabrics"  and 

Technology  of  Textile  Design,'1  and  find  them  just  what  I 
wanted.  Yours  trul5',  Wm  A  Horner. 


HAMILTON,  ONT  ,  CANADA. 
Mr  E.  A.  Posselt,  Dear  Sir . — When  I  was  living  in  Magog, 
Quebec,  I  sent  for  two  of  your  books.    I  am  well  pleased  with 
them  and  would  not  be  without  them  for  ten  times  the  money. 

Harry  Marsh,  143  Pirton  Street,  East. 


THE  ACME  FELT  COMPANY,  Albany,  N  Y. 
Mr.  E.  A.  Posselt,  Dear  Sir  .—Book,  "  Structure  of  Fibres, 
Yarns  and  Fabrics,"  received.    Very  much  pleased  with  it. 

Yours  respectfully,  The  Acme  Felt  Company.  - 


PROVIDENCE  WORSTED  MILLS,  Providence,  R  I. 
My  Dear  Posselt  :— I  have  your  latest  work,  "  Structure  of 
Fibres.  Yarns  and  Fabrics,"  and  I  assume,  in  my  opinion,  it  is 
the  best  work  of  the  kind  ever  published.  H.  Sheridan. 


ADDRESS  ALL  ORDERS  FOR  BOOKS  TO  E.  A.  POSSELT,  PUBLISHER,  2152  NORTH  21st  ST.,  PHILA. 

XXV 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


Technology  of  Textile  Design. 

A  Practical  Treatise  on  the  Construction  and  Application  of  Weaves 
for  all  Kinds  of  Textile  Fabrics,  Giving  Also  Full  Par- 
ticulars as  to  the  Analysis  of  Cloth. 

by  E.  A.  POSSELT. 

IN  ONE  VOL.,  QUARTO.    BOUND  IN  CLOTH,  350  PAGES,  WITH  OVER  1500  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


PRICE  FIVE  DOLLARS. 


ABSTRACT    OF"  CONTENTS. 

DIVISION  OF  TEXTILE  FABRICS  ACCORDING  TO  THEIR  CONSTRUCTION;- 
SQUARED  DESIGNING.  PAPER. 

FOUNDATION  WEAVES : — PLAIN, — TWILLS, — SATINS. 

DRAWING-IN  DRAFTS. 

DERIVATIVE  WEAVES:- RIB  WEAVES,— BASKET  WEAVES —BROKEN  TWILLS- 
STEEP  TWILLS— RECLINING  TWILLS— CURVED  TWILLS— COMBINATION 
TWILLS— CORKSCREWS,— ENTWINING  TWILLS—  DO  UB  L  E  TWILLS- 
CHECKERBOARD  TWILLS, — FANCY  TWILLS— POINTED  TWILLS,— DOUBLE 
SATINS —GRANITES,— COMBINATION  WEAVES;— COLOR  EFFECTS. 

SPECIAL  SINGLE  CLOTH  WEAVES :— HONEYCOMB  WEAVES— IMITATION  GAUZE 
WTEAVES  — ONE  SYSTEM  WARP  AND  TWO  SYSTEMS  FILLING— SWIVEL  WEAV- 
ING—TWO SYSTEMS  WARP  AND  ONE  SYSTEM  FILLING— LAPPET  WEAV- 
ING—TRICOTS. 

DOUBLE  AND  MORE  PLY  CLOTH  :  —REGULAR  DOUBLE  CLOTH— WORSTED  COAT- 
INGS, —  MATELASSES,  —  QUILTS,— RIB  FABRICS,— THREE,  FOUR,  ETC.,  PLY 
FABRICS. 

PILE  FABRICS:— VELVETEENS,— FUSTIANS —CORDUROYS,  — CHINCHILLAS,-CHE- 
NILLE,  —  FRINGES,  —VELVETS,  —  PLUSHES,  —TAPESTRY  CARPETS,  -  BRUS- 
SELS CARPETS,— DOUBLE  FACED  CARPETS,— DOUBLE  PILE  FABRICS,— 
TERRY"  PILE  FABRICS —SMYRNA  CARPETS  AND  RUGS— IMITATION  TURKEY 
CARPETS. 

TWO  PLY  INGRAIN  CARPETS. — GAUZE  FABRICS  THE  JACQUARD  HACHINE.— GOBELIN 

TAPESTRY. -ANALYSIS  OF  TEXTILE  FABRICS. 

NOVELTIES  IN  DESIGNING  :— DESIGNING  WEAVES  BY  FOUR  CHANGES,— SHADED 
FABRICS— SOLEIL  WEAVES, -CHECK  PATTERNS —CRAPE  WEAVES ,— HUCK 
PATTERNS,— WOVEN  TUCKS,- CRIMP  STRIPES,— BEDFORD  CORDS— CROCO- 
DILE CLOTH— LARGE  DIAGONALS,— TO  INCREASE  THE  THICKNESS  OF  A 
FABRIC  WITHOUT  SPECIAL  BACKING  THREADS.  -  BRACKET  WEAVES,— 
FRINGES— PEARL  EDGES. 

THIS  IS  THE  MOST  IMPORTANT  BOOK  ON  TEXTILE  DESIGNING  EVER  PUBLISHED. 

Complete  Circular  upon  application. 
Address  a.,  orders  to    f=~      ^      POSSELT,  Publisher. 

2152  IN  Twenty-first  Street,  Philadelphia,  Ra. 


XXVI 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


Posselt's  Textile  Library,  Volume  I. 


Textile  Calculations, 

A  Complete  Guide  to  Calculations  relating  to  the  Construction  of  all  Kinds  of  Yarns  and 
Fabrics,  the  Analysis  of  Cloth,  Speed,  Power  and  Belt  Calculations, 

For  the  use  of  Students,  Operatives,  Overseers  and  Manufacturers, 

BY 

E.  A.  POSSELT, 

In  One  Vol.  Quarto.    Handsomely  bound  in  Cloth  and  Gold.    186  pages.    Numerous  Illustrations. 

PRICE,  TWO  DOLLARS. 

ABSTRACT  OF  THE  CONTENTS. 


YARN  AND  CLOTH  CALCULATIONS. 

Grading  of  the  Various  Yarns  Used  in  the  Manufacture  of  Textile  Fabrics  According  to  Size  or 
Counts — To  Find  the  Equivalent  Counts  of  a  Given  Thread  in  Another  System — To  Ascertain  the 
Counts  of  Twisted  Threads  Composed  of  Different  Materials— To  Ascertain  the  Counts  for  a  Minor 
Thread  to  Produce,  with  Other  Given  Minor  Threads,  Two,  Three  or  More  Ply  Yarn  of  a  Given 
Count — To  Ascertain  the  Amount  of  Material  Required  for  Each  Minor  Thread  in  Laying  out  Lots 
for  Two,  Three  or  More  Ply  Yarn — To  Ascertain  the  Cost  of  Two,  Three  or  More  Ply  Yarn — To 
Find  the  Mean  or  Average  Value  of  Yarns  of  Mixed  Stocks — Reed  Calculations — Warp  Calculations 
--Filling  Calculations — To  Ascertain  the  Amount  and  Cost  of  the  Materials  Used  in  the  Construc- 
tion of  all  Kinds  of  Plain  and  Fancy  Cotton  and  Woolen  Fabrics. 

STRUCTURE  OF  TEXTILE  FABRICS. 

The  Purpose  of  Wear  that  the  Fabric  will  be  Subject  to—The  Nature  of  Raw  Materials — Counts 
of  Yarn  Required  to  Produce  a  Perfect  Structure  of  Cloth — To  Find  the  Diameter  of  a  Thread  by 
Means  of  a  Given  Diameter  of  Another  Count  of  Yarn — To  Find  the  Counts  of  Yarn  Required  for  a 
Given  Warp  Texture  by  Means  of  a  Known  Warp  Texture  with  the  Respective  Counts  of  the  Yarn 
Given — Influence  of  the  Twist  of  Yarns  upon  the  Texture  of  a  Cloth — To  find  the  Amount  of  Twist 
Required  for  a  Yarn  if  the  Counts  and  Twist  of  a  Yarn  of  the  Same  System,  but  of  Different  Counts, 
are  Known — Influence  of  the  Weave  upon  the  Texture  of  a  Fabric — To  Find  the  Texture  of  a  Cloth 
— To  Change  the  Texture  for  Given  Counts  of  Yarn  from  one  Weave  to  Another — To  Change  the 
Weight  of  a  Fabric  without  Influencing  its  General  Appearance — To  Find  Number  of  Ends  Per  Inch 
in  Required  Cloth — Weaves  which  will  Work  with  the  Same  Texture  as  the  2  ,  Twill — Weaves 
which  will  Work  with  the  Same  Texture  as  the  ~,  ^-j,  etc.,  Twill — Selections  of  the  Proper  Texture 
for  Fabrics  Interlaced  with  Satin  Weaves — Rib  Weaves — Corkscrew  Weaves — Two  Systems  Filling 
and  One  System  Warp — Two  Systems  Warp  and  One  System  Filling — Two  Systems  Warp  and  Two 
Systems  Filling. 

ANALYSIS. 

How  to  Ascertain  the  Raw  Materials  Used  in  the  Construction  of  Textile  Fabrics — Microscopical 
Appearance  of  Fibres — Tests  for  Ascertaining  the  Raw  Materials  Used  in  the  Construction  of  Yarns 
or  Fabrics — How  to  Ascertain  the  Percentage  of  Each  Material  Constituting  the  Fabric — How  to 
Test  the  Soundness  of  Fibres  or  Yarns — How  to  Test  Given  Counts  of  Yarn — How  to  Ascertain  the 
Weight  of  Cloth — How  to  calculate  the  Weight — How  to  Test  and  Analyze  the  Various  Finishes — 
Cotton  Spinning. 

SPEED,  BELTING,  POWER,  Etc. 

Speed — Belting — Water  Power — Steam  Power — Heat. 
Arithmetic — U.  S.  Measures — Metric  System. 


1XV11 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


POSSELT'S  TEXTILE  LIBRARY,  Vol.  II. 

WOOL  DYEING 


(PART  I.) 


By  PROF.  W.  M.  GARDNER,  F.  C.  S. 

Director  of  the  Dyeing  Department  of  the  Textile  School  in  Bradford,  England. 
Quarto  Bound  in  Cloth  and  Gold.  PRICE,  $2.00  Including  Postage. 


ILLUSTRATED. 


"  The  only  up  to  date  book  on  Wool  Dyeing  in  the  market,  written  by 
the    greatest    authority    on    the    subject    in    this    country    and  Europe." 

TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


WOOL  FIBRE. 

Physical  Structure. 
Variations  in  Physical  Structure. 
Physical  Properties  of  Wool. 
Chemical  Composition  of  Wool. 
Chemical  Properties  of  Wool. 
Action  of  Water. 
Action  of  Acids  on  Wool. 
Carbonizing  Process. 
Action  of  Alkalies. 

Estimation  of  Wool  in  a  Mixed  Fabric. 
Action  of  Metallic  Salts. 
Action  of  Coloring  Matters. 

WOOL  SCOURING. 

Object  of  the  Wool-Scouring  Process. 

Composition  of  Wool  Yolk. 

Theory  of  Wool  Scouring. 

Manufacture  of  Potash  Salts,  etc.,  from  Yolk. 

Scouring  Agents. 

The  Process. 

Recovery  of  Crease  from  Scouring  Eaths. 
Scouring  by  Means  of  Volatile  Liquids. 
Yarn  Scouring. 
Cloth  Scouring. 

BLEACHING  OF  WOOL. 

Estimation  of  Hydrogen  Peroxide. 

Sodium  Peroxide. 

Barium  Peroxide. 

The  Bleaching  Process. 

Sodium  Peroxide  in  Connection  with  Bleaching. 
WATER. 

Sources  of  Water. 
Cause  of  Impurities  in  Water. 
Character  pf  Impurities. 
Mechanical  Impurities. 
Dissolved  Impurities. 

Determination  of  Amount  of  Lime  and  Magnesium  Salts. 

Temporary  and  Permanent  Hardness. 

Iron  as  an  Impurity. 

Detection  of  Iron. 

Estimation  of  Iron. 

Free  Acids  as  Impurities. 

Alkaline  Impurities. 

Lead  and  Copper  Impurities. 

Effect  of  Water  Impurities  During  Various  Dyeing,  etc.,  Operations. 
Chemical  Purification  of  Water. 


ADDRESS  ALL  ORDERS  TO 


MORDANTS. 

Ceneral  Remarks  on  Wool  Dyeing. 
Classification  of  Coloring  Matters. 
Theory  of  Mordanting. 
Mordants. 

Chromium  Mordants. 
The  Chromates. 

Use  ot  Bichromates  as  Mordants. 
Bichromate  and  Sulphuric  Acid. 
Overchroming. 

Bichromate  and  Hydrochloric  Acid. 
Equivalent  Mordants. 

Organic  Acids  and  Salts  as  Assistants  with  Bichromate  Mordants 

Chromic  Salts  as  Mordants. 

Summary. 

Iron  Mordants. 

Application  of  Iron  Mordants. 

Copper  Mordants. 

Application  of  Copper  Mordants. 

Aluminium  Mordants. 

Application  of  Aluminium  Mordants. 

Tin  Mordants. 

Application  ot  Tin  Mordants. 
Mordants  Less  Commonly  Employed. 

ASSISTANTS  AND  OTHER  CHEMICALS. 

Acids. 

Strength  of  Solutions  Containing  Various  Percentages  of  Acid 

Organic  Acids. 

Alkalies. 

Strength  of  Solutions  of  Caustic  Soda  of  Varying  Specific  Gravity 
Table  showing  Strength  of  Acid  of  Various  Specific  Gravity. 
Salts. 

Sodium  Salts. 
Salts  of  Potassium. 
Soaps. 

Manufacture  of  Soaps. 
Use  of  Soap. 
Ammonium  Salts. 
Calcium  Salts. 
Solvents. 

APPENDIX. 

Weights  and  Measures. 

Thermometers  and  Thermometer  Scales. 

Hydrometers  and  Specific  Gravity. 

Table   Giving  a  Comparison    between    Specific   Gravity  and 

Degrees — Twaddell  and  Beaumme. 
Table  of  the  Elements,  with  theirSymbols  and  Atomic  Weights 


E.  A.  POSSELT,  Publisher, 

2152  IM.  Twenty-First  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


THE  JACQUARD  MACHINE 

ANALYZED  AND  EXPLAINED: 

With  an  Appendix  en  the  Preparation  ol  Jacqnard  Cards  &  Practical  Hints  to  Learners  of  Jacqnard  Designing 

WITH  230  ILLUSTRATIONS  AND  NUMEROUS  DIAGRAMS, 
BY  E.  A.  POSSELT. 

This  book,  quarto,  handsomely  bound  in  cloth,  will  be  mailed,  postage  prepaid,  to  any  address, 

upon  receipt  of  Price,  $3.00. 
ABSTRAC T  OF"  THE  CONTENTS 


History  of  the  Jacquard  Machine.. 

The  Jacquard  Machine — General  Arrangement  and  Appli- 
cation. 

Illustration  of  the  different  parts  of  the  Jacquard  Machine 

— Method  of  Operation,  etc. 
The  Jacquard  Harness — The  Comber-boards. 
Tying-up  of  Jacquard  Harness. 

I.  — Straight-through  Tie-up 

II.  — Straight-through  Tie-up  for  Repeated  Effects,  in  one 

Repeat  of  the  Design. 

III.  — Straight-through  Tie-up  of  Jacquard  Loom,  having 

Front  Harness  attached. 

IV.  — Centre  Tie-up. 

V. — Straight-through  and  Point  Tie-ups  Combined. 
VI. — Straight-through  Tie-up  in  Two  Sections 
VII.— Tying-up  a  Jacquard  Harness  for  Figuring  Part  of 
the  Design  with  an  Extra  Warp. 


VIII.— Straight-through  Tie-up  in  Three  Sections. 
IX.— Point  Tie-up  in  Three  Sections. 
X. — Combination  Tie-up  in  Two  Sections. 
XI. — Straight-through  Tie-up  in  Four  Sections. 
Xll.— Tying-up  of  Jacquard  Looms  with  Compound  Har- 
ness attached. 
XIII. — Tying-up  Jacquard  Looms  for  Gauze  Fabrics. 

Modifications  of  the  Single  Lift  Jacquard  Machine. 

I. — Double  Lift  Single  Cvlinder  Jacqnard  Machine. 

II.  — Double  Lift  Double  Cylinder  Jacquard  Machine. 

III.  — Substitution  of  Tail-cords  for  Hooks. 

Tying-up  of  Jacquard  Harness  for  Two-ply  Ingrain  Carpet. 

General  Description  of  the  Construction  of  the  Fabric. 
Straight  through  Tie-up. 
Point  Tie-up. 


APPENDIX. 


Preparing  and  Stamping  of  Jacquard  Cards. 

Dobby  Caid-Punching  Machines. 
Piano  Card-Stamping  Machines. 
Stamping  of  Cards. 


Repeating  Jacquard  Cards  by  the   Positive  Action 
Repeater. 
Lacing  of  Jacquard  Cards. 

Lacing  of  Jacqi'ird  Cards  by  Hand. 
Lacing  of  Jacquard  Cards  by  Machine. 


PRACTICAL  HINTS  TO  LEARNERS  OF  JACQUARD  DESIGNING. 


Squared  Designing  Paper  for  the  different  Textile  Fabrics 
executed  on  the  Jacquard  Machine. 

Selection  of  the  Proper  brush  for  the  different  LI  De- 
signing Papers. 

Colors  used  for  Painting  Textile  Designs. 

Preservation  of  Textile  Designs 
Sketching  of  Designs  for  Textile  Fabrics  to  be  executed  on 
the  Jacquard  Machine. 

Methods  of  Setting  the  Figures. 

Size  of  Sketch  Required. 

Enlarging  and  Reducing  Figures  for  Sketches. 
Transferring  of  the  Sketch  to  the  Squared  Designing 
Paper. 


Glossary. 


Outlining  in  Squares. 

Rules  fur  Outlining  in  Squares  Inside  or  Outside  the 

Drawing  Outline. 
Illustration  of  a  Sketch — Outling  on  n  Paper — Finished 

Design — Fabric  Sample  (Single  Cloth). 
Designs  for  Damask  Fabrics  to  be  executed  on  a  Jac- 
quard Loom,  with  Compound  Harness  attached. 
Designs  for  Two-ply  Ingrain  Carpet. 
Designs  for  Dressgoods  Figured  with  Extra  Warp. 
Designs  for  Figured  Pile  Fabrics. 
The  Shading  of  Textile  Fabrics  by  the  Weave. 


ABSTRACT  OF  COMMENTS  OF  THE  LEADING  TEXTILE  PRESS  ON  THIS  WORK. 

It  is  a  thoroughly  practical  work,  written  by  one  who  is  master  of  the  business  in  all  its  various  branches. 

Wade's  Fibre  and  Fabric,  Boston. 

The  work  is  well  gotten  up,  and  with  its  explanatory  illustrations,  cannot  fail  to  be  of  great  service  both  to 
the  student  and  the  advanced  weaver. 

The  Manufacturers'  Review  and  Industrial  Record,  New  York. 

This  work  has  long  been  a  serious  need  in  textile  mills,  and  amongst  designers  and  card  stampers,  and  we 
predict  for  it  a  wide  circulation.  Tributes  to  its  value  have  reached  us  from  most  prominent  manufacturers  in 
the  country. 

The  Philadelphia  Carpet  Trade. 

The  most  important  addition  ever  made  on  this  side  of  the  Atlantic  to  the  literature  of  the  textile  industry,  etc. 

Textile  Record  of  America,  Philadelphia. 

It  is  a  great  work,  and  is  a  credit  to  the  author,  etc.,  etc. 

The  Bulletin  of  the  Philadelphia  Textile  Association,  now  the  Manufacturer. 

It  is  the  only  work  in  the  English  language  that  treats  exclusively  on  the  Jacquard  Machine.  No  designer 
«ho  wishes  to  be  up  in  his  vocation  should  be  without  it. 

Boston  Journal  of  Commerce. 

ADDRESS  ALL  ORDERS  TO 

E.  A.  POSSELT,  Publisher, 

2152  N.  Twenty-first  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


xxix 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


THOMAS  HALTON 


BUILDER  OF 


Jacquard  Machines 


OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION. 


Single  Lift, 

Double  Lift, 

Rise  and  Fall, 
Cross  Border. 


'  600"  Single  Lift,  with  Patent  Independent 
Cylinder  Motion. 


'Fine  Index"  Machines 


A  SPECIALTY. 


Try  one  of  our 


Single  Lift  or 
Rise  and  Fall 


flachines 


With  our 


Patent  Independent  Cylinder 
Motion, 

and  you  will  be  convinced  that  it 
is  the  simplest  and  best  method  of 
working  the  cards. 

Handles  the  Cards 

with  Perfect  Ease 

and  can  be  adjusted  to 
any  time. 


'600"  Rise  and  Fall,  with  Patent  Independent 
Cylinder  Motion. 


2627  nutter  street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Below  Lehigh  Avenue,  * 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


c 

E  = 

O  « 
Q. 

.  *-» 

c  -° 

c 

5-  -a 

•  MM 

es  " 


© 

E 


s 

ca  .2 
E  "S 


cu 

C3 


T3 
C 

ca 


E- 

E 

ca 

U 

C 

>,  is 

—  CO 

Cu 

.2  £ 

5  | 

c  ° 

.2  c 

o  .2 

E  Z 


T3 
C 

C3 


X) 

ca 


a. 
E 


CU 
CU 
Cu 

V) 

x 


X 

ca 


ca 


■r  <l> 
£  X 


E 
o 
o 
-J 


C 

3 

O 

<U 


E 
o 
o 
_ 


o 

_QJ 

X 
c3 
Cu 
C3 


T3 
C 


-  1? 

x  X) 

I  Q 

E°  .1 


1/5 

-*-l  . 
Cu 


CU 
"O 

>^ 

(Li 
> 

CU 
i— 

c3 
>, 

cu 


(Ll 

c 

ca 

X, 


Cu  T3 
E  B 


T3 
C 
ca 

cu 
c 

E 


to  o 

x  £ 


E 
o 
o 
_J 

cu 
x: 
H 


n 

S3 

a. 


-*-> 

c 

ca 

(LI 

o 

E 

-4— ' 

ed 

o 

c 

<x 

o 

X- 

c 

moti 

ca 

(Ll 

T3 

>, 

C 

u 

x 

CU 

c 

on 

ca 

-4-U 

ms 

wi 

o 

o 

Xl 

X 

O 

o 

a 

c 

o 

T3 

CU 

E 

> 

f  the 

mpro 

o 

o 

c 

o 

03 

ca 

no 

E 

X 

o 

cs 

(/) 

OJ 

C3 

t/i 

C 

j 

o 

x: 

c 

<U 

C3 

i 

CD 

c 

CU 

X 

H 

o 

TJ 

aj 

c 

X 

ira 

om 

-a 

o 

x: 
+-> 
o 


c 

cu 
> 
cu 

<s> 
cu 


-a 
c 

(B 


x: 

(/) 

E 


-a 


T3 

CU 


Xv 


Cu  o  .ti 


cu 

u 

T3 
C 

c3 

~qj 

CU 

x: 

COD 

c 
o 

T3 


<L» 
£ 

u 
a 

be 
c 


D.  .S 

e8 


</3 

O 
4-J 

CU 
> 

X 

-+-» 

o 
a 


u 
O 
*- 

C 

o 

o 

M  be 

c  n 


cu 

^  o 


.s  .s  S  g 


c 

c 

<u 


a 

o 
U 

c 

C8 


o 
02 


be 
c 


1  o 

C3  O 

03  W5 


C  C 
CL  Q. 


1) 

cu 

u 

u 

3 

3 

f, 

<n 

<n 

<n 

<u 

u 

Cl 

a 

"3 

C 

C 

ed 

CO 

c 

e 

a 

"5 

a 
u 

> 
o 

a 


c 

y 
03 


be 

4-1 

c 

"E. 

deri 

Cu 

c 

<u 

Wa 

Cal 

o 

T3 

C 

03 

ne 

u 
u 

x- 

r 

o 

ac 

be 

C 

■5 

03 

c 

be 

— 

■o 

pin 

Mi 

c 

03 

Cu 
03 

be 

<t> 
i) 

Z 

c 

c 

CJ5  <s> 

■~  E 


ea 
cu 
xa 

cu 
(/) 
cu 


03  cS 


be 
c 
'n 
ij) 
"O 

c 

03 

be 
n 

'S 


c 

o 

1— 

in 

>, 
i— 
cu 
> 

<lT 

Cu 

E 


&0 

c 

'53 
x 


c 

i— 

P3 
cu 
XI 

DC 

c 


T3 
C 

15 

>^ 

cu 
> 
m 

c 

o 


E  § 
o  ^ 


VJ         W  tm 

a.  S  ir  a 


T3 

CU 

CU 
03 
T3 

ca 

^  o 

"si 

'w  feri 

c  C 

</)  •— < 

(U  *J 

o  J= 

> 
LU 

-4-1 

J3 

be 
'3 


C3 
CU 

00 
te\ 

3 
O 
X 

ca 


T3 

o 


cu 

Cu 


c 

cu 
> 
o 

'O 

u- 

o 

cu 


CO 

E 

ca 
i — 

LU 


ca 
U 


'— 

cu 

> 

cu 

Pu 

(/) 

ca 

cu 

u 

12 

_ca 

'5 

3 

0 

Cu 

od 

t/T 
>> 

(/) 

_aj 

ca 

;/> 

*3 

Qu 

E 

CO 

cu 

-UJ 

& 

_o 

>, 

(/> 

la 

(U 

o 

X 

si 

c 

'> 

Q 

<u 

3 

C 

ca 

t— 

_ca 

3 

CU 

03 


cu 

X 


c 
o 
(J 

o 


X 

■$ 

c 

cu 

E 


c 

ca 

c 

o 

si 


io 

.  x< 

o  u 

J? 

.  CQ 

<u  o 


T3 
C 

ca 


(O 

(/) 

; — i 

3 

c 

CU 

c3 

W) 

•o" 

i— 

c 

ca 

f— 

ca 

-*-» 

CU 

X 

CU 

Cu 

o 

bC 

c 

c 

pe 

"3 

0 

cu 

o 

-a 

c 

"ali 

Cu 

CO 

x: 

ee 

to" 

wi 

>> 

o 

CU 

•a 

c/7 

3 

cu 

ca 

Cu- 

c 

X 

lO 

CUD 

ed 

X 

X 

bD 

(/) 

H 

ari 

fin 

cu 

"cu 

X 

o 

CQ 

X 

J* 

ao 
c 

•_l 

o 

-*-* 

co 

in 

0 

cu 
bC 

X 

ca 

"a; 

CO 

00 

< 

c 

b£) 
c  ca 

<  Cu 


cu 

> 


'  Printed  in  the  V.  S."A.- 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


H.  W.  BUTTERWORTH  &  SONS  CO., 

Philadelphia,  Pa. 

BLEACHING,  ♦ 
PRINTING, 

DYEING  a* 

FINISHING 


flACHINERY 


for  textile  Fabrics, 


xxxii 


GETTY  CENTER  LIBRARY 


3  3125  00017  3175 


